JP6674721B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "slot machine").

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as seen in Patent Literature 1, for example, there has been known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prize can be obtained when a hit is won is performed.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a game ball to the starting port. Then, when a game ball is awarded to the starting port, a determination process for determining a hit or the like is performed. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time on a predetermined display. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a winning has been won, and the opening and closing member of the special winning opening is operated, so that the player is often given to the player. The special game that can win the prize is provided.

JP 2010-187791 A

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is required to make further improve the game playability.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Means 1: a game board detachably provided to the game machine main body,
Determining means for performing a determination based on the reception of the game medium to the starting port provided in the game board,
A symbol variation unit that performs symbol variation based on the result of the determination by the determination unit,
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol fluctuation, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege to the player,
Effect control means for performing control relating to the effect,
A plurality of movable bodies operable under the control of the effect control means,
The plurality of movable bodies include at least a first movable body and a second movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact, and a third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact the movable body. Yes,
The effect control means,
The first movable body, the second movable body, and the specific state in which the movable body operation timing at which each of the third movable body becomes operable is related to the result of the determination by the determination unit. Specific condition generating means that can be generated based on the fulfillment of certain specific conditions,
When the movable body operation timing arrives within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body provided at positions where the player cannot contact the plurality of movable bodies are determined in advance. and although operating respectively in step, said the plurality of the third movable member player of the movable body is provided contactable position, independently of the operation by the first movable member and said second movable member It is possible to perform the operation that
If the third movable body is not at the normal position when the movable body operation time arrives in the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body are set even if the third movable body is within the symbol variation execution period. It is possible to execute a process of performing a restoring operation on the third movable body in parallel with the process of operating the body according to a predetermined procedure being performed normally,
further,
The process of causing the third movable body to perform the restoring operation can be executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol change arrives when the specific state is not in the specific state, but in the specific state. Sometimes, when a specific time corresponding to the symbol change comes, it is not executed with this as a trigger,
The specific time corresponding to the symbol change is at least one of a start time and a stop time of the symbol change,
further,
The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are provided so as to be able to emit light,
Even when any one of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is executing a restoring operation, it is possible to cause the movable body to produce and emit light. ,
further,
As a result of performing the restoring operation of the third movable body that is not in a normal state in response to the arrival of the specific time corresponding to the symbol change, even if it fails to return to the normal state, the state returns to the normal state. It is possible to cause the third movable body in a state where it has failed to return to produce and emit light,
further,
When a specific abnormal state occurs in which a specific effect restriction occurs when any one of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is performing a restoration operation, body is the executable to continue the recovery operation among which the specific effect limit occurs, in a state that is continuously executing the the reconstruction operation and corresponding to the symbol variation in the particular abnormal condition gaming machine, wherein the recovery timing even if new incoming, said a new feasible to continue the recovery operation in the form to cross the incoming restoration time.

  According to the present invention, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 35 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 37. (A) is a view in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide a part where the operation button is to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by LL in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG.51 (a). 51A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 63, which is disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a part of a function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where a game board is attached to a pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is the schematic of various detection signals input / output to the connection terminal board of rental devices, such as a game ball, which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a delivery motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 4 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure showing arrangement of an output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which performs drawing of the display area of an upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 92. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. 6 is a timing chart for explaining a timing at which a connection confirmation signal is output to an INIT terminal of a transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystal. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st starting-port passage process (step S5232). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a big hit determination process (step S5305). (A) is a figure which shows a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a figure which shows a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st change pattern setting processing (Step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate part passage processing (Step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol normal process (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol change start processing when in the normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison object with this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by a fixed channel method. The relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the playback channel is shown. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel system as this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by an automatic channel method. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, reproduction | regeneration sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart showing an example of an effect time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flow chart which shows an example of search processing of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of an empty channel search process. It is a figure showing an example of a variation pattern of sound control by each channel method or those combination. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure of an empty channel search processing at the time of performing control which outputs sound of this embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an example of conditions for selecting a channel for which sound output is to be replaced (stopping sound reproduction) when a channel is not empty when a new sound is output in the embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the example of production for explaining sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel from which each sound effect is output. It is a figure showing an example of a priority of a sound effect in a production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half fluctuation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen structure of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a composition table of a reproduction channel in sound source control in a modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the change of the modification of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a channel group-by-channel volume control table indicating priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs the sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each sound effect, showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sounds in the embodiment. 9 is a first half of a flowchart illustrating a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. 9 is a second half of a flowchart illustrating a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure of controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure showing an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 155, a notification content, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition for terminating the notification (release condition). (A) is an example of processing when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) is an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (C) is an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a process when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is. (D) is a diagram illustrating an example of a process performed when an output condition (state detection) of a notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the production progress notification processing separately according to the notification state of the pachinko machine. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the contents about processing about volume adjustment. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel reservation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the procedure about processing concerning setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure showing an example about the content of restriction defined for every channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the limitation content determined according to a channel limitation level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special release process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under control is performed. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of an assignment status of each channel when a process related to a channel assignment cancel operation is performed. An example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination will be described. It is a time chart shown. The processing of moving the movable decorative body in accordance with the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, but not in this processing, is performed in a separate processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about the situation of the decoration body side. It is a time chart which shows an example about an allocation situation of each channel when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during a period in which a symbol change is performed, and a state of the movable decorative body side. . A time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel and the status of the movable decorative body when a movable body abnormality occurs in each of the plurality of movable decorative bodies at two different timings during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. is there. 6 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto continuous hit function). 9 is a time chart showing an example of display contents when an operation is performed a plurality of times. 6 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of production using an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example of production using an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the effect pattern in the effect mode which can perform a sword-drawing effect, (A) An example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transfer effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sword part (sword body part) itself, (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, (C) 2nd. Indicates the sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, and (C) 2nd sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decoration and the operation validity period concerning the operation means. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. 9 is a timing chart illustrating a relationship between a state change timing of a sword decoration body and an operation timing of an operation unit according to a first modification. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for pseudo consecutive production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition example of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect after operation of the sword decoration body (dropping effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) during the pseudo continuous change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of effect patterns which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (border role) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (border role) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is made effective during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is made effective during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above, the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure showing an example of transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is enabled once and the sword decoration is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure showing about a suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing another example of the specific operation related production. It is a figure explaining an example about the effect when the "specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the production contents for each type about the production when a plurality of types (progress productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as precursor productions. It is a figure which shows the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect is performed as a specific operation related effect. It is a figure showing another example of the production contents when a specific operation related production is performed as a precursor production. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific production mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect at the time of displaying sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure showing the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure showing the example of the production in which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining operation unification control in the state of an automatic button production. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the stable side automatic production processing in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the production acceptance processing according to the display type in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the production acceptance processing according to the display type in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the production acceptance processing according to the display type in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the production acceptance processing according to the display type in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining the production acceptance processing according to the display type in the automatic button production state. (A) is a time chart showing an example of an effect when operated in a single operation mode a plurality of times when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and (b) is a control in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when operated in a long press mode when not performed. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function functions in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect at the time of starting operation in a mode. When the automatic button production state is controlled and the number of holds is in three production situations, the symbol variation is started in a “first production pattern in which a specific production acceptance period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when the operation (release operation) for releasing the automatic button production state or the operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the symbol is "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect accepting period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears cannot be set". FIG. 9 is a time chart showing a processing example when a change is started and an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within an execution period of the symbol change; is there. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation starts in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect accepting period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, and the symbol variation execution period It is a time chart which shows the example of a process when the operation for performing the setting to the automatic button effect state in the inside is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when an effect is advanced by the 3rd effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing regarding effects, such as effect setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period concerning "specific processing regarding effects, such as effect setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production processing about a special production acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example concerning an effect development when starting an effect after an operation while maintaining "an image suggesting the type of the operation target" as a display state. 287 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern that is effected in the manner illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. FIG. 287 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect display that appears on the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern that is effected in the manner illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of displaying a mimic image as a moving image by displaying several mimic images sequentially when a specific reception effect occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when the operation by the player has not been in time by the time when the effect reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when the operation by the player has not been in time by the time when the effect reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when the operation by the player has not been in time by the time when the effect reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production which differ in the time until the production reception automatically occurs after the period in which the production reception is permitted. It is a figure which shows the example about the 1st reception production and the 2nd reception production which differ in the time until the production reception automatically occurs after the period in which the production reception is permitted. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which suggests whether or not the reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is validated according to the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which suggests whether or not the reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is validated according to the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which suggests whether or not the reception effect in which the "automatic effect function" is validated according to the mode of the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic effect function" is validated only in a reception effect among a precursor effect and a reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic effect function" is validated only in a reception effect among a precursor effect and a reception effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which makes it possible to recognize that an "automatic effect function" is validated only in a reception effect among a precursor effect and a reception effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the novel directivity using an automatic production function. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel assignment status. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel assignment status. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example of a channel assignment status. It is a time chart which shows the processing content at the time of operating a movable decorative object when a specific condition is satisfied. 304 is a time chart illustrating a modification example of the example illustrated in FIG. 304. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing when timing tm1 when a new design change starts in the situation where a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. 9 is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation timing (a start timing and an end timing of a symbol change) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. 9 is a time chart for explaining an aspect when a new restoration operation timing (a start timing and an end timing of a symbol change) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until a sword decoration body 5001 returns to an original position. 30 is a time chart illustrating an example of restrictions on a volume setting and a brightness setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on a sword section 5010. It is a time chart which shows an example about the light emission mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period according to the specific abnormality detection. It is a functional block diagram explaining composition and outline of a function for performing production control in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of module composition in a peripheral control part of a game machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration up to obtaining data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flow when scheduler data is executed according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating functions of the sound module of the embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the function of the lamp module of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the function of the sequence control in the production control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the function of the lamp and the sound in the production control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a function, such as a sound and a motor, in production control of a game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scheduler definition according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of operation of an accessory controlled using scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice effect performed in a series of fluctuation | variation display from the start of fluctuation | variation of a special symbol until it stops in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler used and scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which performs lighting and blink control of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which performs lamp control in button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls the whole flow in a star character object notice of this embodiment, and a left star character. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star character in a star character announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a medium star character in a star character object notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs motor control in a logo combination fall notice of this embodiment. It is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in a peripheral control board of the gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to the embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect in a series of fluctuation | variation display from the fluctuation | variation start to the stop of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the effect performed from the fluctuation | variation start to an end, and performs the said effect. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating scheduler data and a scheduler to be executed. It is a figure explaining content of button hatcher role first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which performs motor control in the first half fall preview of button hatcher role fall notice which is the first half of hatchet role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatcher role latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter half part of the hatchet role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatcher role latter fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which performs motor control in the latter part of the hatcher role fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for every fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern classified liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for every fluctuation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of effect control of the first half fluctuation (normal fluctuation 12 seconds) of fluctuation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub effect block data control update processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure which performs a notice effect in a change display corresponding to change pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing which performs a notice effect, the execution time of the notice effect, and (B) is It shows scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute a notice effect. It is a figure explaining the relation between the liquid crystal effect block data for every variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal design block data for every variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing-up data file by step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect-4 effects) with the graphic synthesis and motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining composition of effect block data of step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows composition of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows composition of step-up notice sub-effect block data. Show. It is a figure showing an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effects of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a scheduler function for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a parameter for a scheduler function for liquid crystal effects in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the production switch in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of composition of production SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production SW start command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage in which a step-up notice effect is performed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device in each step. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step up notice using the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect. 3 shows a drawing image using scheduler data. It is a figure explaining master data defined on liquid crystal effect scheduler data for every drawing division in this embodiment, and effect SW corresponding to substitution data replaced with the master data concerned. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production switch of this embodiment, and shows especially the evaluation procedure which sets production switch to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the detail of the structure of the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the production SW information table, (B) is a bit assignment of production SW control information, (C) Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production SW number corresponding to the production SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the production SW flag and the production SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the production SW flag and (B) shows the production SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW replacement table information contained in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, and the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW 3 shows a replacement table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines a layer information table according to the embodiment; FIG. 3A illustrates a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table; FIG. Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) shows the content of a layer information table (the first half of notice), (B) shows the content of the layer information table (the first half of notice). Show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, and (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini-character production in this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the program data which defines an individual common block of a button mini character production in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for performing a button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division | segmentation which can be determined in the callback function at the time of the callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of an individual layer at the time of execution of the notice effect of this embodiment, and the drawing result of all the layers. It is a figure explaining an example of a common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) is a display of a symbol and an execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is a configuration of a liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block, (C) Shows a configuration of a liquid crystal announcement effect block composed of a common block over a plurality of periods. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image written to each layer is written to write an image to a frame buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and writing the converted image file into a frame buffer in the embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in a peripheral control RAM and transferring the display list command group to a VDP with a built-in sound source in the embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring a display list command group to a sound source built-in VDP without storing it in a peripheral control RAM in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of performing the expected effect in which the princess character is largely displayed as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. 379 is a diagram illustrating a display example when a help image is displayed in a state where the expected effect illustrated in FIG. 378 is being performed. It is a figure showing the example of a display when character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining an example about processing at the time of generating a production restriction period in a non-game state. It is a time chart for explaining an example about processing when an effect restriction period is ended early. It is a time chart which shows an example about processing concerning a special period (opening exclusive use period). It is a time chart which shows an example about processing when a game is started when it is set to a store opening period (special period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation reception production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the special operation reception production. 6 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including an acceptable sound. 6 is a time chart showing a mode of channel assignment of sound data including an acceptable sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the contents of a production when a low expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the modification when a high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. 11 is a time chart illustrating an example of an effect in which a first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where "weak suppression mode" and "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where "weak suppression mode" and "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect in the case where "weak suppression mode" and "strong suppression mode" occur sequentially in the effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (movement acceptance control under suppression) which appears in "in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as an operation target" in a suppression / automatic reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the content of the effect which appears when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 2 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when the fluctuation pattern 3 is selected in the fluctuation pattern determination. It is a time chart which shows the effect content which appears when an "intrinsic reception effect" occurs in the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows an example as a concept about the processing procedure at the time of implement | achieving various display effects using scenario data and blocks. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the process when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (valid period). 404 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m + 1” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404. 404 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404. 404 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404. 404 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started from the “m−3” th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404. In the effect reception period (valid period) in the case where the timing of performing the “operation (setting) of the operation state flag to the ON state” in the frame is performed after the “determination process for effect reception”, It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows an example about an integrated mimic image. It is a figure showing the example of a display about an integrated mimic image from the beginning of an effective period until it ends. It is a figure showing the example of a display about an integrated mimic image from the beginning of an effective period until it ends. It is a figure showing an example about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress at the time of a 1st effective period generate | occur | producing. It is a figure showing an example about the production progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect progress when the 2nd validity period arises. It is a figure explaining the modification of the effect which suggests the degree of expectation concerning an integrated mimic image step by step.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, and a game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a lower part for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front and houses a power supply board therein, and is attached to the back side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is attached across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls are housed therein. Payout control board box 950 There.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, as viewed from below, with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch 11 which penetrates vertically and is depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 has the right and left lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses formed to be the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are the same. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are depressed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower left and right fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 include projections 32 and 42 that bulge out of the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, An upright wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and bulging forward from near the upper end of the upright wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the front left of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface is swelled forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and within the range of the cash or the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card deducted from the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Refund display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of games and prepaid cards, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, so that the player can perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating forward and backward. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking unit 135 includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, both left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to respective upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The upper end of the lock spring 144 contacts the flange member 143, and the lower end of the lock spring 144 contacts the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, and the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 as viewed from the front is obtained. The hinge can be rotatably supported on the body frame 4.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a columnar hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front left side of the through-hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is used for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a bar shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three) are provided with ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear side can be viewed from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward from a position lower than the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is provided with a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Accordingly, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 39A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 39B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a central side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and the operation button 410 is capable of being pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) such that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not easily transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction, extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners at the top, bottom, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detecting pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are depressed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter of the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed transparent, and a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 includes an operation button spring 438 having four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 and being inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward. The operation button 410 is further restricted from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side of the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a can make it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be viewed from the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. Thereby, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner part of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside of the button base 413 to the outside. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the rear, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a and has a central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, respectively, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without any irregularities, and the rear side has a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421, and an inner peripheral surface of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut out to hide the operation button by a first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can display a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part with respect to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation buttons 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in the normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 from near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the frame unit It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center portion is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Is mounted with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, so that when the player presses the operation button 410 from above in the same manner as a conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is made a flat surface However, if a part deviating from the center of the operation button is pressed, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can smoothly retreat without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to enjoy the operation to be operated sufficiently.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is panned so that the effect operation unit 400 is suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part, since it is mounted on the production operation unit mounting part 326a of the unit cover 326. In addition, the whole of the effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 44), the vibration motor 424 is pressed against the player pressing the operation button 410. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape protruding forward (a part of a substantially spherical surface), the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. As compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  Moreover, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 in the operation button are formed of transparent members, The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated. This makes it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the outer peripheral surface of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside decoration member 432 of the operation button are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. 46, the concavo-convex lines of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concavo-convex lines of the second button decoration portion 432g intersect with each other as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button interior decoration section 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is increased. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  In this manner, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the interest of the player strongly and has a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button right inner decoration board 432 inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operating button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operating button inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  The effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration part 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422 a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423 a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are arranged, and by illuminating the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the base unit 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left side of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and on the front left side of the through-hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower part of the left unit. A left unit lower decorative base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a rectangular hole extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. The left reflective standing wall portion 538 has a flat surface, and an inner surface provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface of the left reflecting wall 538 itself from a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (the left portion) of the above-described reflecting standing wall portion 33.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens unit 532 a and the square lens unit 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward in a dot shape. With the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in a curved shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, a groove portion is concavely arcuate backward, and a mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are circumferentially divided by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflector 532f when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between grooves is pointed backward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with respect to a radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface in the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When light that has been reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected forward by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction decreases as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the cross-section of the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed in a wavy shape, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b The light can be applied to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b forward has a shade of concentric striped pattern. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffused lens member 532, and the circular decorative portion formed at a position located in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffused lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of vertically arranged rectangular pyramid-shaped portions on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In addition, the left decorative lens member has a multi-face decorative portion that is forwardly arranged from the square lens portion 532b of the left diffuser lens member 532 by light whose circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left diffuser lens member 532. Each of them is illuminated and decorated by the light applied to the light.

  The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction, with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 has a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end such that the upper side moves from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear as it moves upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, and a left-shaped part. A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent rearward along the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 54 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached above the plate unit 320 to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a front view right side of the through-hole 111, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side from the center in front view, and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member A transparent flat right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with the front and right sides open. An opaque box-shaped opaque right unit left light blocking member 559 and a light opaque mounted to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559 on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover A plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are provided. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension, extending shortly in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective standing wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) that stands upright from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through-hole 111. ing. In the right reflective standing wall portion 568, an inner side surface which is flat and faces the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. In addition to this reflection surface, similarly to the inside surface of the left reflection standing wall portion 538, the inside surface of the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is not only provided from a reflection material such as metal or resin, but also reflected to the inside surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the above-described reflecting standing wall portion 33.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side from the center in the left and right direction on the front surface, and a center mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is used to decorate the right unit right decoration member 557 with light emission through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has white front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a plate-shaped main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short plate-like manner. A notch 553c, which is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front view and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d which is shallowly recessed so as to be capable of housing the 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting rearward from the rear end face of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lens portions 553e provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a front end of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it moves forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 553e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in a radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward in a front view as it goes forward, so that the door frame Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection unit 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-blocking member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Accordingly, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f and left on the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, a side reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection part 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. A portion 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a front view right side of the main body portion 556a. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. As shown in FIG. 55, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the front as going from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 in the right unit can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped and a rectangular parallelepiped portion extending upward and downward, and to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center, a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, and each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. At the center and diffuse radially forward.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left side of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right side of the main body 556a, and is reflected by the inner side of the right side to the side reflection section 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by striking the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. As a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f in the main body 556a and the light radiated to the left from the side reflector 556f to the right on the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, light with more uniform density can be radiated to the right. Thus, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated with the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decoration member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the left decoration member 554 and the right cover 555 of the right unit. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light-blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body 559a to the right in front view in a flat-plate shape, and a rear wall 559b. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a rectangular shape to the left from the right end side in the front view and formed in a plurality at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The wall portion 559b extends rightward from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extends rearward. A plurality of plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes forward. It is formed so as to be inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main units 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c, 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d which are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. Accordingly, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with a predetermined width in the left and right direction. . Light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is converted into the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, since the inner space of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d, they are arranged behind the respective divided spaces. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering between the spaces, and a portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space is removed. , Can be independently illuminated. In other words, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to independently decorate each of them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at a front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, when a problem such as clogging of a ball or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 in the door frame right side unit 550, a right unit left decorative member 554, a right unit right decorative member 557, and a right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the members 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and can be recognized, and the malfunction can be promptly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 59 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571, which is mounted at the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like shape with open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits extending each and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and vertically separated A unit body 271 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 271 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the above, the outer outer light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the outer periphery of the opening window. Outside light detection unit 35 (left outside light detection unit 35a, right outside light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outside.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is mounted on the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 and have a plurality of slits 574b closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576 A plurality of (three left and right) transparent plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 over the opening 574a, respectively, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side, and the opening portions 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on portions of the plural (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b respectively formed on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 271 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of substrate bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of substrate bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled diagonally to the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front in such a manner that lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 when viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a square extending left and right with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view, and a half of a full width (length in the left-right direction) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the square and defined as a base. The shape is a combination of a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, the left and right sides of the part protruding forward at the center in the left and right direction on the front face connect the end in the left and right direction of the unit main body 271 and the left and right end of the front end of the part protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a that penetrate back and forth are formed at positions on the front surface of the unit from the left and right ends to the position outside the portion protruding forward. The unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely at a predetermined height in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at an obliquely extending portion of the front surface that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a part of the front surface of the unit body 271 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to be three vertically separated from each other.

  The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The in-top decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent such that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that its front surface moves along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 and moves rearward downward. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The light guide member 578 will be described as a straight part extending right and left from the end to the center from the end toward the center. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the circular arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed such that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like unevenness, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the circular arc portion 578b and having a plurality of unevennesses. It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  Also, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the circular arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is provided by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the center in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front face of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular truncated pyramid protruding forward are arranged in right and left rows.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579, between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill a space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state where the top middle right decorative member 582 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative board 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall having a square shape in front view extending rightward and leftward outward from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper part of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so that it moves forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 271. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 so as to move to the front side. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light blocking members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light blocking member 588 is provided between the upper and lower LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 which are arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member are provided. It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the top middle decoration member 576 projects greatly forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a which are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 before and after the door frame base 110 is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , The game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower part than the upper plate 321) (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326 c) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The front surface of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude significantly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is emphasized and emphasized to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left and right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, which appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear portion of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In comparison, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for pulling out game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322a is provided in the lower plate 322 in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c, so that the lower plate hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Because it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball 322. It can be guided to the hole 322a or indirectly reflected to the right wall to the hole 322a. Thus, in a state in which the lower dish hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are located on the left side of the lower dish hole 322a in the lower dish 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first region A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in which the lower plate 322 faces forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his hand on the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the heavy bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrude largely forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 in the top frame decoration unit 570 is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front edges of the top middle decoration member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the left and right front surfaces are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers separated from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punched metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the middle top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is in the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player, and to make the player enjoy high quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  Thus, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  The door frame 3 has the top decoration member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction and the effect operation unit 400 projecting forward. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can see a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 taken apart and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled unit viewed from behind. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and a rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be divided, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side and on the rear side.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special lottered by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large winning prize port 2005 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a and having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3200 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable rendering unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back under the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through these notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, FIG. 64 and FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 has an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. , Is provided. These fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement step portions 1115 are cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a, like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step 1121 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. In addition, the holding step portion 1121 has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and from the front of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It has a plurality of protruding pins 1123 which extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 that engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1121. It protrudes toward and engages resiliently with the engaging step 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 so that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted. (A center side). By engaging the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claw 1124 and the engagement piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 which is notched upward from a lower end at a lower left corner in a front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates the notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 on the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above-described game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component, a board holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wooden board such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1150 has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide part 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction in front view. In the gaming panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 has the same width as the out port 1151 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front, and is opened downward, and has a cutout 1152 having the same shape as the cutout 1011 of the front component 1000, and a vertical direction above the cutout 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  The game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating front and rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be inserted between the game panel 1150 and the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating before and after for mounting the front unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened at the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  In addition, various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transmissive members so that they can be visually checked from the outside. I have. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, particularly, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 has a surface with poor fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to countermeasures against fraud described below.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. , A normal holding indicator 1408 made up of two LEDs for indicating the number of holdings relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003, and a lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reserve consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying the result of the second special lottery selected by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 including two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result. When the special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, a round indicator 1407 made up of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is mainly provided.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the gaming board effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. The game board-side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally rearward of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at a lower part in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is disposed in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially immediately below the stop section 1006. The second start port 2004 is arranged right below the gate 2003 from the front just below the gate 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first starting port 2002 and a winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the front view 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center role 2500 that is attached to the approximate center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

  The starting port unit 2100 is disposed just above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 is upwardly opened with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the large winning port 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6 pieces), and extend left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to a game state.

  The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

  The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly downward from the center in the up-down direction at the upper left of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view in the game area 5a. The upper side unit 2300 has the left end of the shelf approaching the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). To the center in the left-right direction).

  The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is located on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, an effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to. The center role 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that a game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges the ball into the game area 5a. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed immediately below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a game board effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having an open front and having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. And a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is mounted rotatably about an axis extending left and right along the axis and accommodates the effect drive board.

  The back unit 3000 also includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end inside the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A rear lower movable effect unit 3200 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, a rear upper left movable effect unit 3200 mounted on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable rendering unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view within the 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable rendering unit 3400 and a movable rendering unit 3100 after the bottom of the back under the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is depressed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d so as to be slidable up and down.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses a back-to-back movable production unit 3100, a back-top left movable production unit 3200, a back-left movable production unit 3300, a back-up middle movable production unit 3400, and a back-bottom front movable production unit 3500. It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, so that the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed. , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and a game ball is placed on the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, it is positioned right above the first start port 2002, and is accepted with high probability in the first start port 2002. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), On the downstream side, it flows down in the area where the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the second starting port 2004 is set to a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), the game machine is in the open state, and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “ A special lottery result that generates "medium hit", "small hit", "per probability change", "per time reduction", etc. is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, special lottery results that are determined by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “ 15R jackpot "," probable change (probability change) "," time reduction (time reduction) "," probable change time reduction "," probability change time reduction no hit "and the like.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 is ready to accept game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are supplied from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to accept game balls, many game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which game balls can be received, or the special winning When any one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is set to a predetermined value. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is indicated as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a display in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated and displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the game board effect display device 1600 (the symbol row is changed). (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center role 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, rear lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, rear left movable effect It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the unit 3300, a back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. This can make the player entertain and can prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window part, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is provided in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are provided. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative section 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative section of the present invention.

  In addition, the decorative member inside the operation buttons of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side are the second decorative body of the present invention, and The second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration 432, the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub-screen decoration 476, and the peripheral decoration 478 of the screen unit 470 correspond to the second decoration of the present invention, respectively. .

  Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration board mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is a luminous body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is a back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 correspond to the base portions of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the rendering operation unit 400 (or the second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Such as the decoration in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) overlap, the decoration in which the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. It is possible to show the player a decoration full of perspective with no sense of perspective, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Also, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side (screen unit 470)) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that the button lens 411 can be moved by the operation of the player, so that the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move. Then, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like) approach or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, The first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478) change according to a change in the distance from the clean decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, and the like. , Etc.) can be changed to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration). The decoration (intersecting mode) by the member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the opposite side to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decoration body Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decoration 411a and the second button of the operation button decoration member 432 are viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, and the like) is more greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through it, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the radial shape of the first button decoration portion 411a can be seen. , The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A) or the door frame passes through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. Of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 cross each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. And the decoration by the first button decoration 411a and the second button interior decoration 432g can be made to stand out to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. it can.

  In addition, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration part 432g is provided. The decoration allows the player's line of sight and interest to be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that is visible in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, so that the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, each LED (or the sub-screen decoration board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 is mounted. When the LED 477a) emits light, the light can decorate the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), and further, the button lens 411 can also emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light-emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner board are operated by the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration board 436 can be diffused, the second button decoration section 432g includes the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button While the interior decoration board 435 and the interior decoration board 436 under the operation button are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a is decorated with the second button interior decoration. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) causes the light-emitting decoration. Since the second button decoration 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly light-emitting decorated while the first button decoration 411a is weakly light-emitting decorated, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, With the LEDs (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 emitting light, the first button decoration part 411a and the By looking at the two-button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the sense of perspective is emphasized, and to have a appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest. A high pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the decoration member 432 inside the button lens 411 or the operation button (or the door) There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame) are not required. The second side effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward and enlarged as much as possible, and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A). Further, as described above, since there is no need to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be provided. The pachinko machine 1 can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance and attract the player's attention, and have a high appeal.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is formed into a flat shape. Compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be hardly broken (hardly broken). Therefore, when the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being irritated and deteriorating the fun, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, the pachinko machine 1 has The outside diameter of the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side is 10 cm. An operation button 410 movable (advancing / retreating) by a player operating in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ３０30 cm, and an operation button decoration that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. And a frame-shaped frame unit 415 to be attached, the effect operation unit 400 having the largest possible operation button 410 at the position where the storage bowl of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (second Since the effect operation unit 400A) is visible, it is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration section 411b. First LED 422a, 423a for light-emitting decoration of second button decoration portion 411b, and second LEDs 422b, 423b for light-emitting decoration of frame side lens 417, and frame side lens 417 and second button. In the frame main body 416 partitioning between the decorative part 411b Since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the cylindrical part 416d, the second button decoration part 411b, and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical part 416d and the main body are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration part 411b by the 413a and the inner extension 413f. Lighting can be prevented, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly and luminously decorated, respectively, and a luminous effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, by appropriately turning off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b, light emission effects of various patterns are performed. It is possible to make the player hard to get tired of, and to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Also, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided as one operation button left outer decoration. Since the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration section is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. The first LEDs 422a and 423a can be moved as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b as compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently emitted. The second button decoration part 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly illuminated and decorated, the appearance of the luminous decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  Furthermore, since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 is moved in accordance with the advance / retreat of the operation button 410. In addition, the wiring connected to the decoration board 423 outside the operation button does not bend or expand, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected, and thus the operation button 410 can be moved (operation) or the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminous decoration can be enjoyed by the player without any problem, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 pass through the transparent button lens 411. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edges of the operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) are set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is decorated, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b emit light as appropriate, so that the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be illuminated and decorated in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emitting effect and operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). The effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge is made operable by the player, the operation button 410 is provided to the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By causing the player to operate, the operation of the operation buttons 410 (player participation type effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can participate in the player-participation type effect and entertain.

  Furthermore, since it has an opaque main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that enable only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged rearward because the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is bright. It is possible to prevent the in-operation button decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a favorable state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a favorable state, and the player can enjoy the decoration and the luminous effect sufficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion from the portion 411b. On the other hand, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is provided at an end (rear end) of the inner cylindrical portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer side Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. I will not do it. Therefore, the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described operation and effect can be realized.

  Further, since the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration part 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. The body and the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely separated by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the main body 413a on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 Also extend rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body part 413a, and the intrusion of light into the center of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Can be. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can fully enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the part 411b is located, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members and the rear side (back side) outside the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. At this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button decoration member 432 (the second effect on the door frame side) changes the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) become relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decoration member 432 in the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Since the outer shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration 411b are provided. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, a light emission effect in which light turns around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, and the like, the player can be bored with various light emission effects, and can enjoy the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game, in which the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a on the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3, is used. At the same time, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 so that a predetermined space is provided behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is located from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside and a lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front, so that the lower plate 322 can be made less noticeable, and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively easily noticeable. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were viewed vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Also, at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the upper portion extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends toward the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied into the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 abut or press against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the interest of the player from being lowered, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, lower plate covers 340 and 340A that restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j at the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad or uncomfortable by entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j with the game ball, and to enjoy the game for the player. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 in the lower plate second region A2, the game balls supplied to the lower plate 322 bounce in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Also, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can move the lower plate main body 325 to the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion). When a hand is put into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, so that the fingertips can be prevented. Or the like can be prevented from touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be.

  Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. caused by the contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340, 340A. Is not transmitted to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) from the lower plate covers 340, 340A, and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, since the lower plate hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, the lower plate hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged from the lower plate body 325 into the main body. It is difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, to reduce interruption of the game, and to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Accordingly, since the speed of the game balls in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be reduced, the lower ball covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition to this, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls contact the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, it can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the burden on the gaming hall on which the player 1 is installed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction expands most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After being provided on the plate unit cover 326 of the protruding plate unit 320, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are removably attached to the most protruding portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, which is capable of storing game balls. The storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are provided outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. A space at the rear of the lower space first area A1 and the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. , The effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out when viewed from the front, and the storage dish (upper dish 321) can be seen. In addition, the lower plate 322) can be made small and less noticeable. Therefore, a stunning effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen in a portion where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the gaming machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. Can be recognized at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player can be provided.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional portion 325B, the second additional portion 325C, and the lower plate covers 340, 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in a region of the lower plate 322 that is not visible from the front (lower plate second area A2). it can. Therefore, the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently ensured against the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first additional portion 325B, and the second additional portion. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portions 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C having a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, and the like, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), the various rendering operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 has a container shape depressed downward, and the game ball is formed. Can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a that rise from the upper ends of the main body standing wall portions 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having a shape according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various configurations can be accommodated. Accordingly, the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 where the game balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are connected to the portion where more game balls are loaded by storage. No boundary (joint, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even when a large number of game balls are stored, a force such that the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. The lower plate cover 340, 340A can be prevented from coming off from the lower plate main body 325 without acting.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as receiving a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower operation ball supply port 323c and a lower operation hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And more than half of the lower plate 322 including (i.e., the player) is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (the player). The pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the user. Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize a game ball heading from the lower counter ball supply port 323c to the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a, a game in the lower plate 322 is provided to the player. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and to prevent the ball from being distracted, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish on the bottom of the lower dish 322 that guide game balls from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball hole 322a by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d between the hole 322a and the ball hole 322a, the lower ball hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is guided by the guide means and is smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is possible to give an illusion that the game ball is discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate hole 322a. In addition, the lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since at least half of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate 322 is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured as compared with the appearance.

  Further, in a state where the lower dish ball extracting hole 322a is open, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the bottom face of the lower dish 322 and the lower dish ball. Since the portion between the hole 322a and the guiding portion such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d can smoothly guide the ball to the lower plate hole 322a and discharge it to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (a player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player from being distracted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, when the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is kept open, the game balls supplied to the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supply port 323c can be immediately sent to the player without being noticed by the ball guiding section 322c or the like. Since it is possible to discharge the ball downward from the lower plate hole 322a, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower plate 322 is twice as large as the size of the lower plate 322, the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently secured as in the case of the conventional lower plate of the pachinko machine.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as accepting a game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit mounting for mounting a large-scale effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 of FIG. In addition to the portion 326a, the dish lower decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, which is lower than substantially the center in the vertical direction, is recessed so as to go back. Because of the shape, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the production operation unit attaching portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, the large-scale effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen in a state where the upper plate and the lower plate are viewed side by side in the conventional pachinko machine in an emphasized state. At a glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the dish front lower decorative portion 326c that is recessed rearward on both left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently ensured. It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls, so that the player can be dedicated to the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip becomes The rear wall 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like can be made hard to touch. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently ensured even by tactile sensation, and when the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the lower plate 322 Since it can be recognized that many game balls are stored in the game, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, and can enjoy the game and suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the fingertip of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 is difficult to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, and the like, the player has the same feeling as the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by making the player relieved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be wider toward the back side (rearward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the lower decorative portion 326c in front of the plate) where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to increase the appealing power to the player and to increase the player's appeal. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 covers the side and the upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that is wrapped around the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) with the lower plate cover 340, the player can When the hand is put in, it is possible to prevent the fingertips or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), thereby preventing injury. It can be played in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent a game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball hole 322a that penetrates up and down so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine is used. Has the same function as the lower plate in the above, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, when playing with the present pachinko machine 1, will not be confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the past It is possible to play a game with such a feeling that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is viewed from the front. The lower ball hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer and the appearance can be improved, and a highly appealing pachinko machine that can strongly attract the player's interest. Machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to a player on a base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the present invention. Of the operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) which decorates the outside of the device, and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470). The diameter is about 15cm and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) An operation button 410 having a protruding transparent button lens 411 is attached, and a first button decoration part 411a, a second button decoration part 411b, and a button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, and the button lens is provided. Since there is a cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, the button lens 411 and the decoration inside the operation buttons are provided by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. The outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) are reduced from being seen from the gap between the member 432 (the screen unit 470). Thus, the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button button 411 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) to be separated from each other. Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a and the like even if the gap between the large operation button and the large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. 410 (button lens 411) can be realized without any problem. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent, and the player's interest becomes stronger. The pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal can be obtained by attracting.

  Further, since the button base 413 (the main body 413a) that projects in a tubular shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 (operation button internal member) are provided. When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the outer wall of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be shielded by the inner wall of the button base 413 to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is reduced. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the moving direction of the operation button 410. (A plane perpendicular to the plane), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) are combined by combining the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so that the decoration member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are provided. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device that allows the player to entertain with the operation buttons 410 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more enjoyable can be realized.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorativeness) is imparted to the operation button 410. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button The back side of the operation button 410, the operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470), and the like can be reliably hidden from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470). Deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the button lens 411 includes an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 over the entire circumference, and cooperates with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b to form a player. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decoration member 432 in the operation button ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation buttons 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be easily secured. Can be satisfactorily moved.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is formed in a cylindrical shape, the direction of the outer periphery is eliminated as compared with the case where the button lens 411 is formed in a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain a player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the operation buttons 410 are enlarged, when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation buttons 410, it is easy to check the position of the operation buttons 410 without having to operate them. Since the touch operation can be easily performed by touching the operation button 410, the player can easily participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is provided with the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the effect image of the player can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be used. The effect can be enjoyed, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type production and entertaining. Also, by performing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make a player think that something is good, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. Can be.

  Further, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). This allows the player to immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the present pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and has a high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and a player's expectation for the operation using the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation buttons 410 is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a pachislot machine, a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decoration 411a may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side over the entire circumference may be formed in a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the base unit 430 (the first unit) of the operation button 410 surrounds the outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the entire outer periphery of the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side. Although the one provided with the button base 413 (the main body part 413a) protruding in a tubular shape toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display units 460A may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411, or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as a relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is desirably subjected to light diffusion processing such as a grain, a slit, a prism, or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate 322 is described as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, and is recessed backward from both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) and connected to each other behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). 322, or may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), and a part may wrap around behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). You may be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the lower portion 322 of the lower portion of the lower plate 322 on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example in which the shape is concave is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and a polygonal prismatic surface or a polyhedral concave front surface may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , A device having a rotating body having a decoration on its surface, a device having a decoration having a decoration, and a movable device for moving the decoration, Characters, items, logos, and decorations that simulate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine. ”,“ Characters, items, logos, etc. Or a member having a decoration such as a seal or printing, etc. "or a member such as a panel. The number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j may be attached.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the production operation unit mounting portion 326a which is opened forward for mounting the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, on the front of such a dish unit cover, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine can be applied by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. An area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to visually recognize from the front, The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown as arc-shaped ones partially provided in the circumferential direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decoration having the plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an elliptical shape) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button arranged on the rear side, the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side second effect. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is provided under a predetermined condition. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having a variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, “a device such as a magic mirror, the rear side of which can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side”, and “a liquid crystal film, which is transparent when the power is turned on / off,” Or become opaque so that the rear side becomes visible ". The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or may not be relatively movable.

  By having a variable light transmission means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member, or, the front member and the rear member, is in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member disposed on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen, The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapped decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, and the player can be hardly bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  More specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member is darkened by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by a player. When the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting unit such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap can be shown to the player.

  Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member The decoration by the surface of the player can be shown to the player. When the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from a light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decoration device such as a display device or a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, if both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the light emitting portion such as an LED is brightened, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by light from a light emitting unit such as an LED). ), And the fulfillment conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are respectively satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) passes through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting a portion to be brightened by the light of the light-emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple stages, and a variety of decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, when the rear side is darkened, it looks like a mirror. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror, but similar effects can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmission means such as a liquid crystal film can transmit light even in an opaque state (has translucency), the light can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting unit such as an LED, a variety of effects such as a light emitting effect and a decorative effect can be shown to the player. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a block diagram showing a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG which performs a process for generating a control power supply (for example, +5 V) and a control relating to a game including payout of award balls. And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect related to a game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The two control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 69, the main control board 1310 of the first control unit MCG that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, such as a main control program for controlling game operations, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like; A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input; a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like; a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids; A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for a power failure or a momentary power failure at a predetermined voltage. Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in advance in this embodiment), The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly duplicated based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are transmitted to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function And is composed of The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  60, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and the like. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Also, a gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 60, a count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to detect cheating using a magnet is transmitted to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port based on a detection signal from each of these switches, so that a main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, and a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the panel relay board 4161 and the first special symbol display 1403 via the function display unit 1400 A drive signal is output to the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the ordinary symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main circuit with a reset function is output. For example, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. As the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and The detection of a game ball by the gate sensor 4003 frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. In contrast, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and 2012 where the game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb from an output terminal of the predetermined serial output port, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a mainly includes a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects to the bus 1310ah. It is connected to the circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and an operation signal from the operation switch 954 (RAM clear signal). Is output from the payout control board 951, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (Cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 70, among the first control units MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like, as shown in FIG. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. An operation switch 954 also serving as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. ) Is output as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952d and a CR unit for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various types of game-related information (game information) and various types of payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port 952b as serial data of the serial system as a signal (command transmission means). The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954, and output of warning information according to the error is stopped (error canceling control unit).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the dispensing control input circuit 952b is configured such that various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals are not reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The dispensing control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and dispensing control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function. And is composed of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with the reset function is configured to reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a later-described dispensing control system reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting an out-of-ball of a game ball in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the discharge control MPU 952a via the discharge control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the interface.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various commands related to dispensing from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. ) Is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data is completed, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting the signal to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and output the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port to an error LED display. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, the payout rotator and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, so that the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Notification) and the number When "3" is displayed, it is notified that "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls). Is displayed, and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (that the electrical connection is cut off from one of the dispensing control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it is "stocking (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is predetermined). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there is an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down. The main computer 1310 that progresses the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout and the like are provided. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first transmitted to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The input is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball rental display unit 330 to the game ball. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is turned off by the capacitor BC1 in the power-off processing. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, the operation signal is transmitted to the predetermined information of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. Input to the input terminal of the input port, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the connection terminal board for rental devices such as gaming balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control substrate 951, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (Accurately, the game ball rental terminal connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880.) , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay is performed. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected.) Between the CR unit 6 and the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game device rental terminal connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) and the ground voltage LG. The game ball and the like are supplied to the payout control board 951 via the connection terminal board 869, and the game ball and the like are supplied to the frequency display board 365 via the connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line. The three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven one digit at a time. The lighting of the digit segment display is controlled. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for specifying a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display. Are turned on and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of seven signals) for designating the content to be displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the plate 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content by the light emission of the container can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental display section 330. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL via a CR unit lamp 365d, a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the like. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen). Is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a PRDY signal for notifying that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board for connecting a lending device for a gaming ball or the like. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the clerk of the hall or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that a game ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a controls the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal for notifying the fact via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls a drive current for launching (firing) a game ball toward the game area 5a based on an operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. An effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 19, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side effect display device 1600 and a door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, and also controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information for specifying the year, month, day, and time. A real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and a lower speaker 92 And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and various light emission modes such as LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a blank signal is input Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information such as information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot hold the stored contents only for a time period in which the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d stores the stored contents. You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a reset is performed by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on the various commands. A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, Motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the rendering operation unit 400. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, and are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). Diagnose whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read and written various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ＤＭＡDMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading / writing from / to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ab g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a frame decoration driving amplifier board, a motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When the timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by employing a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Thus, noise countermeasures can be taken with respect to the lighting control of the LED, which is meaningful in the game. It should be noted that the lighting control of the LEDs is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. When the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated, the resistance value is variable, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is controlled. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to a game effect are notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and the sound from the mute to the maximum volume Can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound volume is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played and to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 in addition to the music and sound effects, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for designating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to be described later when the power is turned on. Some are read out and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board-side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further added by 5%, and the game board side is turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power supply of the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired for the 75%. The backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, a peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, in a dedicated manner, information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing the copied data, and backup non-management data for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, data not to be backed up. A work area 1511cf is provided.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power failure or a power recovery due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) starts RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described below. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is represented by “Bank”. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank0”, “Bank1”, where the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4” (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Direction with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described later, which is output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor-drive-board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door-side is set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds on the basis of this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms) which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated as the effect backup information (1ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with one pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms). The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc is a pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and a pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to a momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information 0) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that the storage area is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at a high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at a high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing one pair of the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area. Reference numeral 1511dc denotes an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source for controlling, and various character data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. LCD for storing sound data and sound control ROM 1512b, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting toward the decorative drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is disposed near the lower part of the device 460 and transmits to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511. A signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the differential circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e Is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forcible switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) and sprite data used for displaying a screen and an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later are displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and volume adjustment icon data described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main frame rear image in which the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player, and the display of the service mode screen Break used to display service mode screen image data and break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source is incorporated. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, transmits the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound instruction data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After being extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the first sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM is also provided (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay. The effect display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board effect display device 1600 are Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial type differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data is created, and one screen (1) is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a system in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized, and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included. Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the sound is amplified from the lower volume speaker 921 and the upper volume speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. The volume is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track used The maximum volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually compared with the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 is simply described. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and sound data of the track in which the production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and And outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 actually. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute so far is performed. The volume of the production sound proceeding according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the production operation unit 400 is set). When the operation mode is changed to the setting mode by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set.) It is flowing.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the production sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. Then, when the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the point where the notification sound started flowing, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period elapses after the notification sound starts flowing. It starts to flow again from where you have progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a positive signal and a negative signal as serial data of a differential system, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data in which left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential system for each of the left and right sides between the board from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for directing door frame side]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, as shown in FIG. As described above, the interface based on the parallel system is used for the channel CH2. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to distinguish, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 to around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the side of the main frame 4, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching out the paid game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is provided.
In addition, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is arranged. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. In an environment that receives noise and the like that has entered the vehicle.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the transmission control IC 1512d for the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes " By adopting the differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, a differential one-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics. Even if a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting a differential communication method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a hardware-based configuration alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. When serial data in the parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For effect on the door frame side provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) at the time of reception by the transceiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as disturbed data different from the normal data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The directing transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise. In addition to such a hardware configuration, A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display controller 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally formed, but are separately assembled, and the structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4 is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Accordingly, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main frame 4 so that the maintenance of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If it is not possible to solve the problem occurring in the door frame 3, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side are provided. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. More specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive. Each of the substrates and the substrate 4450 is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while each of power supply wires and other wires for transmitting various signals is electrically connected by a harness. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 include, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data in the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates, such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates is formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral door relay board. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one of the wires is red, the other is gray, the power supply wires of the harness are red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes a LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Are transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected to transmit the two signals, while When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. Have been. Accordingly, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the signal to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) for notifying the drawing data to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying the predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal and output the image to the game board effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that a failure has not occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the 320, if no LOCKN signal has been input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "A failure has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device." Play the game board side by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In addition to outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "there is a problem with the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device.") To that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RAM 4165aa with a built-in RTC. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information in the RTC information. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various kinds of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture depending on the environment. Sometimes, it is too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or the brightness of the image. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the game panel effect display device 1600 has an LED-type backlight, the game board effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5%, which is the correction information obtained for the game. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, (E.g., a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or a notification that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the like). Etc.) also flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, so that the sound is muted. The maximum sound volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect of music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound volume is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen played by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of a sound effect such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music and the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. And adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume, thereby adjusting the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the clerk of the hall can turn the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel loud with the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and the game console effect display device 1600 enters a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the effect sound to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the effect sound because the clerk of the hall feels the volume adjusted to be small, the effect operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the production operation unit By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, the state becomes a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud about the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time can use the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 or the like. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, a power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 and FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The unit 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hit ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24 V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the connection terminal board 869 for a rental device for game balls and the like via the power supply board 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified power to the power factor improving circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies the DC + 37V to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the result to the emission control circuit 953a of the emission control unit 953 and the power generation circuit 935d.

  Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 is built in payout control MPU 952a of payout control unit 952 in payout control board 951. Backup power to the supplied RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The firing control circuit 953a of the firing control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source to drive the game ball with a launching strength (firing strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302, as shown in FIG. By controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball feeding unit 250 outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 to thereby control the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d supplies a direct current + 5V (+ 5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+ 5V"), a + 12V direct current (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 12V") and a direct current from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. +24 V (DC +24 V, hereinafter referred to as “+24 V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is a + 5V power line, the power system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is a + 12V power line, and the power system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is a + 24V power line.

  The + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g generates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and the payout is performed. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. In other words, + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the discharge control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the discharge control built-in RAM, which is in the forward direction by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The current flows toward the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electric connection method of + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 by an electric connection method in which the payout control board 951 returns to the power supply board 931 from the payout control board 951 again. Is supplied and can be charged. Thereby, when the + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored content is retained by supplying the power supply terminal of the payout control RAM to the power supply terminal VBB. It has become so.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, the + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g allows a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward directed by the diode MD0, the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, The current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by supplying + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V generation circuit 1310g can generate + 5V. When the power is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB. Although the current is interrupted by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current does not flow, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 75, three kinds of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three kinds of voltages, + 12V and + 12V Two kinds of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are supplied to the peripheral via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the three kinds of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter, referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board effect display 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to a backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V generation circuit 194a that generates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. In addition to + 9V generated by the + 9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates and the like of the door frame 3.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-panel-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates + 3.3V from + 12V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper-panel-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid-crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. And the door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0 and, for example, to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5 V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and generates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied is a + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. With such a circuit configuration, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V power supply line of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from the + 5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the power failure or the instantaneous blackout of + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notice signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice when detecting a sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the data is input to a decorative board or the like of the door frame via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, and applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line. As compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of the power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Circuit of main control board]
Next, circuits and the like of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by a power supply, a main control system reset, a main control crystal oscillator, a main control input circuit, a power failure monitoring circuit, and a main control MPU created by the main control board 1310. Various input / output signals to the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid driving circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310g shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 77, in addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), thereby first removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). And smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). , The ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 has a power outage or a momentary power outage at a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and has one end grounded to a ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is interrupted by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the capacitance of this capacitor MC5 sets the delay time by the delay circuit. You can do it. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is smaller than the threshold value while the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing a ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A, B, C, and ST in addition to the VDD terminal. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the output terminal F by applying + 5V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this circuit receives an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, only the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (discharge control built-in RAM) incorporated in the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control board 951 and the main control The operation is performed when the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, if an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, the main control board 1310 The main control built-in RAM is cleared by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is output from the payout control board 951 HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 10A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control substrate 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the main control board 1310 is operated while the operation switch 954 is operated. In this case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and inputted.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a must instruct that the RAM to clear the information stored in the main control built-in RAM be cleared. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and whose logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform a RAM clear for deleting information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the voltage is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using the voltage of + 12V. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are shifted to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69 are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12 V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two kinds of voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors + 12V and + 24V signs of a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when detecting a power failure or a momentary power failure sign, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. 951 to the payout control MPU 952 a and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by monitoring of a +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, monitoring of a +12 V power failure or momentary power failure, and output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal, which is a reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is a cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. +5 V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set) serving as a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , +12 V and the reference voltage Vref. The third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V, and the second terminal, which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A, is applied with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring terminal V2 of +12 V is applied to a fifth terminal which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to a sixth terminal which is a minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line and one end. The other end of the resistor MR22, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22, and the other end of the resistor MR21, MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +24 V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +24 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage starts to fall from + 24V when + 24V fails or momentarily stops. In this case, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 has a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +24 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, a fifth terminal, which is a plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is connected to the other end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and one end. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other end of the resistor MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21, is divided by +12 V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47 V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V starts to fall from + 12V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. , The monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND) to preset the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

  When the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref. The signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). And the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure notice signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal). On the other hand, when the signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured such that when a signal whose logic becomes HI is inputted to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic of the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is LOW. Is input, the state where the signal whose logic is HI is output from the output terminal 1Q is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is a negative logic) The state of output from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are each grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal as the D input terminal is stored, and is not output from the 1Q terminal as the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 supplies a signal from the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, for monitoring the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, and the power failure of + 12V. Alternatively, a signal from the seventh terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal for inverting the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The power outage clear signal is output after the main control MPU 1310a performs power-on processing to be described later and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal PR terminal is inverted and the output terminal is inverted. Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches a state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal as LOW.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs a peripheral power failure notice signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b for electrically connecting the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed through the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  A circuit including the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal that is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Also, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). (Harness) and is electrically connected to the payout control board 951. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the subsequent transistor MTR22 is a subsequent switching circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from a 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the preceding transistor is turned off. The MTR21 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The first-stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the first-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the second-stage transistor MTR22, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage. By being input, the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is reduced to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, whereby the latter transistor MTR22 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of peripheral control unit 1511 in peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit including the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the +5 V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is transmitted to the peripheral control board. 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310b for transmitting a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the control circuit 1510 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, has one transistor, and a power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral. While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. Main control without reset function to output as power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage. And is different from the logic of the power failure notice signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 having one end electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is also connected to the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, while the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via a wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the power failure notification is performed by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using +5 V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board The main control MPU 1310a is provided between the main control MPU 1310a and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in order to suppress the influence of noise entering a wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the boards. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to / from main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. An RXA terminal, which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 via the main control input circuit 1310b as a main serial data reception signal. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as a main payment serial data transmission signal without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb transmits a main payment serial data transmission signal from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and transmits the serial data transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb as a serial serial data transmission signal.

  The operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above is input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, and, for example, a payout that notifies the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca for the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function And outputs drive signals from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to various displays, and outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to output the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The control output circuit 1310ca outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 951, and the like.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. To the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is increased by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. Have been. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. ) Is mainly configured.

To the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310, +12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the dispensing control board 951, and to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50, the minus terminal is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to a positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power outage or a momentary power outage, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main charge serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec, and the transmission can be completed as main serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

  As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of the intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When the shift register 1310aea transmits as main serial data, a main serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from + 12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main circumference serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is connected to the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the gate. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is connected to ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is shifted to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  To the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510, + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground terminal (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal No. 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (the fourth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (the fifth terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main circumference serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Input terminal.

  Accordingly, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main serial transmission port 1310ae can be completely transmitted, and the main serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without being lost.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR 50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW due to the voltage being lowered to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. As described above, the logic of the main serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V which is the communication voltage applied through the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line is reduced, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained. The control reference voltage includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 decreases due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, the terminal is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Thus, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost, so that the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a command being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  The plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a are all configured as main circumference serial data and are constituted by a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. Thus, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that allows all commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as an interface circuit as main circumference serial data is performed. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and does not lose the commands. Can be reliably received.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control section, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, followed by the circuit of the payout control unit, and various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The + 5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). The second terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which a noise component has been removed.

  The third terminal of the dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, and smoothing is performed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to a power supply terminal of a payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of a payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. . The power supply terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a has a power supply terminal, a VDD terminal. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) incorporated in the payout control MPU 952a, and has a capacitor PC4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. The VBB terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. And the plus terminal of As a result, as described above, when the + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since the current is interrupted by the diode PD0 to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the current does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the VDD terminal. The stored contents are held by the application of the payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 for outputting a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in the present embodiment, 8 MHz) for outputting a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and the various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25 V), the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time.

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to an SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a reset terminal of a payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW. Each is input to the reset terminal. The SRT0 terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively. The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to a ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCC terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. Further, the smoothed +5 V is applied to not only the VCC terminal but also an OE terminal which is an output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from an OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is a clock terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to a ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 70 and the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, a circuit to which a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by a circuit to which a detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input, a circuit to which a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration for inputting the detection signal from the switch is substantially the same, the circuit for inputting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state where 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 which is grounded (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 20A) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door open signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to an external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is further pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 has a + 12V power supply in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR22, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the switch 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor PTR 20 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. You. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic of the main frame becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is increased to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 because the door frame open switch 618 is OFF. As a result, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a by turning off the door frame opening switch 618. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame release switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut off) in a state where 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the terminal and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), the external terminal plate 784 has one end electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door open information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame release switch 619 is pulled up to the +5 V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 has a + 12V power supply in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing a voltage change from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which a contact constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeats ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is turned off. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI is output. Is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side so that the transistor is turned off. The PTR 24 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR 28. As a result, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board. 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned on, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. Then, while the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned off, and the logical Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of a state in which the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and a state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 In this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. , It is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 3 and / or The player that the main body frame 4 is open can determine that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer end The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer determines whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, Or, although it cannot be determined whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player who has opened the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 does not normally occur during the game. It can be determined that this has occurred.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the normally open switches of the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are employed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the switch is turned on (conductive), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 even if the switch is turned on (conducted) for some reason. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open (normally open (NO)) switch (a door frame opening switch 618 ′ and a body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and the main frame 4 is opened for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, even when a normally open switch is used for the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when a disconnection occurs. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 which is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of the two types of voltage of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 to indicate a power failure or a momentary power failure. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the paid outage power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the collector of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of +24 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V. At this time, since the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic has become HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V When there is a sign of a power outage or momentary power outage, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is reduced to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. When there is no sign of a power outage or a momentary power outage of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a power failure notification signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. , The logic of the payout power failure notification signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the third terminal PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, has one end electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC40 has a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a full signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is supplied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal which is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and whose logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951 on the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the signal becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When a signal whose logic is set to HI by being pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor 44a is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the fullness detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when a signal whose logic is LOW due to being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration is used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. This is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without any intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the tank fullness detection sensor 279 is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the ejection detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the ejection device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. However, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 952a uses the full tank detection sensor. When it is determined based on the detection signal from 279 that the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. Control is performed. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the payout motor 834 has a game space in which the accommodation space is not full and the payout motor 834 is not full. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls. When the payout rotator is rotated and the payout rotator is rotated to continue paying out the game balls, the payout rotator itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 becomes unable to rotate when the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball path described above. The dispensing motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally generates heat to cause a failure, or the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted to the rotating motion of the dispensing rotator. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is such that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The first and second terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to ground (GND), and the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are set to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding and succeeding stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is converted into an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48, and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is + 12V in main control input circuit 1310b of main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. By turning on / off the transistor PTR44, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 due to.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent switch circuit. The resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from an operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 controls the RAM (discharge control built-in RAM) incorporated in the dispensing control MPU 952 a of the dispensing control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. The operation is performed when the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) is cleared, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, the operation is performed to cancel the error. A function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from time and an error release after power-on (after a period of performing the function as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period from power-on). Function. An operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in a function of performing RAM clear within a predetermined period from power-on, and after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since power-on). In the function for canceling the error in ()), the signal is an error canceling signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned on, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned on. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 43. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from power-on. It is determined that the instruction is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. , The transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, as shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW becomes the transistor of the preceding stage. The signal is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the preceding transistor PTR 42 is turned off, and the preceding switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage applied to the base of the succeeding transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR 42. Is increased to the +5 V side by the resistor PR51, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. It is determined that the instruction is given.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. When a signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to main control board 1310. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, receives the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is an instruction to perform a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to a + 12V power line and a + 5V power line, respectively, to which +12 and + 5V are applied, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. And the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 via the zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor driving voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are connected to the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60. Discharge motor drive signals are input to certain first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is generated. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When the back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-mentioned zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to a stage preceding the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. Circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 sends BRDY, which is a ball request signal, and BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, from the CR unit 6 through the game ball or other rental device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. Are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from 24 V AC supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while a payout control board 951 connects a rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible via terminal board 869. And are output. As shown in FIG. 84, input / output circuits for inputting and outputting these various signals mainly include photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via a resistor PR71, and is connected to a transistor via a resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, which has one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC80A) without inverting the logic). Is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned on / off, the logic of a signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to a power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), a pull-up resistor (not shown) having one end electrically connected to + 12V power supply line at power supply substrate 931 Is electrically connected to the other end. By turning on / off the transistor PTR71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. You.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. You.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is reduced to the ground (GND). As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80B) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 71 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via a resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. I have. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to a + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80C) without inverting the logic). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the terminal. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and a payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 through a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  EXS output when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is a CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the EXS logic output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is different from the EXS signal logic output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible or impossible from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is transmitted via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting a current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is used. The photocoupler PIC 74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the PDY signal via the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a connection terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. At a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the internal control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is reduced to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic becomes LOW is output to the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the voltage is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit without reset function 952cb. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an RXD terminal which is a serial data input terminal of a serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main payment serial data reception signal via a payout control input circuit 952b. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit without resetting function 952cb as the main serial data transmission signal. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

  The input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a are connected to the above-described RWMLR signal, the dispensing power failure notice signal, the door open signal, the full signal, and various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) from the CR unit 6. In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output via the payment control input circuit 952b. The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to output the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switch signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. The payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. Besides doing A payer ACK signal for notifying that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the payer ACK signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. The output signal is output to the substrate 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. Output to

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from main control board and various output signals to external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 includes a payer serial data transmission signal, a payer ACK signal, an operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Games such as jackpot information output signals such as two round jackpot information output signals, probability variation information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving information output signals, starting opening winning information output signals, etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten. Prize ball number information output signal outputted every time, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal A game information signal such as an output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, an information output signal during time reduction, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. I do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 and an award ball number information output signal from the payout control board 951 are output to the external terminal board 784, and the main award ball count from the main control board 1310 is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, hourly information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a game or the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in which two rounds have been performed (two round jackpots). The number of hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of hits of the pachinko machine 1) and the number of hits of 15 rounds (the number of hits of the 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot determine the number of occurrences of two rounds or the number of occurrences of 15 land jacks from the total number of jackpots, so that the number of jackpots actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It cannot be grasped whether it is a 2 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is disposed above the pachinko machine 1. Some players select whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter may actually be skewed toward the number of occurrences of the two round jackpots. Therefore, even if the player starts the game, only the two rounds of the jackpot hit occur. In some cases, a 15-round big hit does not easily occur. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may excite the player more than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by outputting the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal separately as the jackpot information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot, The number of occurrences of the 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can determine whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is two rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter shows 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of big hits and the number of occurrences of two rounds can be displayed separately, or only the number of occurrences of 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state, which may excite the player more than necessary Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the two round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the two round jackpot until the end, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal also has the 15 round jackpot information output signal. It is output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the two round big hit information output signal and the fifteen round big hit information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a two round big hit occurs, the two round big hit information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a two-round jackpot information output signal and a 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

  As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. When a jackpot information output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. A signal that indicates that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. The main prize ball number information output signal includes various prize ports such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize ports 2001 and 201, and the large prize port 2005 shown in FIG. Is a signal that informs the player every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the ball reaches 10 balls, and the 15 round jackpot information output signal generates a 15 round jackpot. In the state The two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability variation is a signal that indicates that the probability variation is occurring. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal that conveys that there is, and the special symbol display information 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. This is a signal that informs that the state is "stopped", and the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal in a state where the variable display of the ordinary symbol is ended (stopped) on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The information output signal is a signal that informs that there is a certain time reduction, and the information output signal during time reduction is a signal that indicates that the time reduction state is occurring. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is output in white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number-of-prize-balls information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer sets the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball every time the prize-ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the paid out game balls and to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player whose door frame 3 and / or main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during a normal game. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the body frame 4 are open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. // It can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the signal is a signal that indicates that the state is the state. In the present embodiment, the end of the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 (stop). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and to count the number of times to display the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting port winning information output signal. The starting port winning information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs the player every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, the game ball is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer executes the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting port 2004 and count the number of times that the starting port winning information output signal has been input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

  The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal for notifying that the 15-round jackpot is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT5, It is output. When a 15 round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15 round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal has been input can be counted, and the total number of times that the 15 round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit is occurring. In the present embodiment, while the two-round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is output. When the two round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a two round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the two round jackpot information output signal is input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of times that the two round big hit has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the two round big hit information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT7 is used for outputting a normal symbol display information output signal in blue. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal for notifying that the normal symbol variable display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the ordinary symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the ordinary symbol display information output signal and receives the ordinary symbol display information output signal from the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. At 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the ordinary symbol has been completed (stopped), and to count the number of times, and to display the total variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red to output an information output signal during time reduction. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that indicates that the time saving state is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the information output signal during time reduction from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during time reduction is input. In addition to counting the number of times the information output signal has been input during the time reduction, the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be ascertained.

  The output terminal PT9 is orange and outputs the information output signal during the probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during probability variation is a signal that indicates that a probability variation is occurring. In the present embodiment, the information output signal is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability variation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability variation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the information output signal during probability variation is input, sets the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the probability variation is occurring. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times that the information output signal during probability variation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is provided with a light blue color and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the ball that has hit the ball reaches ten, this signal is transmitted to the effect. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 sets the pachinko machine 1 to 10 prize balls every time the main prize ball number information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. A game ball to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered into various winning ports such as a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, a general winning port 2001, 201, and a special winning port 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main prize ball number information output signal is output for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds. The output is made at intervals of 0.128 seconds so as to form one continuous signal.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and a wiring having a connector colored in the same color as these colors is electrically connected to each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are connected to the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side to the right side of the center, in this point also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side The wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 to the hole, respectively. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island facility side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the number of remaining game balls is low, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally makes a 15-round hit, and the payout is performed because the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (For example, if a ball is clogged or a ball occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless the ball is clogged or the ball cannot be eliminated). Then, as described above, the number-of-prize-balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side reaches the number of 10 game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 as prize balls. Since it is a signal notifying each time, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk at the hall, for example, checks a hose-shaped replenishing nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island equipment to the prize ball tank 720, and specifies the position of the ball clogging (also, for example, if the ball is generated in the payout device 830). Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball is identified) and resolved to return to a state in which the game balls are paid out.

  However, even when the clerk of the hall is proceeding with the work, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, and after the 15 round big hit, the game ball is paid out by the work of the clerk of the hall. When the payout control board 951 returns to the state in which the payout control board 951 pays out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, the payout control board 951 is finished even though the 15 round big hit has ended and the 15 round big hit has not occurred. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal indicating that the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches ten, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. In this case, an extremely large number of game balls are paid out even during the period in which the 15th round big hit has not occurred. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 A problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 to actually pay out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. The main control board 1310 receives the game balls entered into various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 201, and the large winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the number of game balls reaches ten, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal notifying that, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. Via a hall computer. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (trouble such as clogging of the supply nozzle or the like, clogging of the dispensing device 830, or trouble of the ball) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of game balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit for effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is disposed near and below the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly includes a liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the minus signal. The plus signal and the minus signal from which the noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the disturbance of the serial signal.

  Based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The signal is restored to three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As described above, the red, green, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a have 8 bits each for the red, green, and blue video signals. Since the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V includes, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. Two LOCKN signal output request data are also input into the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510, where two signals are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, as described above. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so as to be connected to the circuit. Accordingly, when two signals that have been differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so as to be transmitted so that the two signals are transmitted. , The peripheral control terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450 V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame. From the side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a serial signal (serial data) by the differential system called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the receiver ICSDIC0 for the door frame side effect, while the differential circuit 1512e At When two signals differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the output request of the LOCKN signal is received when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal to be described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, renders the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period during which the game board effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer and performing a demonstration, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and effect display In order to check whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is used. This is transmitted as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, The data format is completely different from that of the differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of the company. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when the received data is determined to be abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a different data format from the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, for the purpose of forced output. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD, VDDO, LVDSVDD, PLLVDD, and PDWN terminals of the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit. A capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GND terminal serving as a ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal is provided. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. A capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and a GNDO terminal serving as a ground for TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. A capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSGND terminal serving as a ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. A capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between a terminal and a PLLGND terminal serving as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

  The PDWN terminal indicates that when +3.3 V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power is reduced. It is a terminal to communicate. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the +3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal is a rising edge for transmitting various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, and D0 to D17 terminals) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (The logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, a rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal is for instructing whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by connecting the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode. The operation mode can be selected by grounding both to the ground. The operation modes include a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. And a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are three synchronizing signals (three-bit synchronizing signal). is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, For some reason, a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (a 3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal for some reason. If it is difficult to draw the data on the door frame side effect display device 460 with appropriate data, the mode is automatically switched from the normal mode to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Through this, it is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 for the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in advance. Note that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and a peripheral door. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and The signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. Terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal indicating that data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal are connected to three video signals (18, red, green, and blue video signals, respectively, restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. This is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. The input is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with a clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. These are input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other, and are connected to the same ground. Has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described. Subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. The award ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (the payout device 830) to drive the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates. When the game machine is electrically connected to a game ball payout device (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as the prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. One prize ball is designated by the command 10H, and the command 11H is specified. , Two prize balls are specified,..., 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball rental machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a rental ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 which is a storage plate) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is provided. When the ball lending machine 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. , A command 20H to a command 2EH are prepared, a command 20H specifies one prize ball, a command 21H specifies two prize balls,..., A command 2EH 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout control board 951 to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies a self-check. The transmission side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as the command reception confirmation is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 tuning effect-related, special figure 2 tuning effect-related, jackpot-related, power-on, ordinary figure tuning effect-related, ordinary power actor-related, information display, state It is classified into indication and others.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization production related)
The special figure 1 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named as "Start special figure 1 synchronizing effect", "Specify special symbol 1", "End special effect 1 synchronizing effect", and "Specify fluctuation state". To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronizing effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 specifying command is for designating out, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. Note that the probability and the time reduction state include a low probability time reduction state indicating that the state is a low probability state and a time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state indicating a high probability state and the time reduction state, and a low probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is not the time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is the high-probability state and is not the time-saving state (as the normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal pattern display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for displaying the symbols in a fluctuating manner is shorter than that in the non-time saving state (normal gaming state), and the stop display is performed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. The number of times of stop display is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period during which the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed as shown in FIG. 8 is made longer as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), and FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 as shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of possessed balls (in other words, the non-time saving state In addition, the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and when the pair of movable pieces is opened and closed, the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is increased, so that the second start-up is performed. This is a state in which the acceptance ratio (ball entry ratio) of game balls to the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 change, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure hit information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 entrainment effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named start of special figure 2 tuning effect, designation of special symbol 2 and end of special figure 2 tuning effect. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronizing effect start command instructs the start of special figure synchronizing effect in the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command specifies out-of-range, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The end of the special effect 2 tuning effect indicates the end of the special effect 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 change, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 tuning effect starts. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. 89, a jackpot opening, a jackpot 1 opening N-th display, a jackpot 1 closing display, a jackpot 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, and a jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot opening 1 opening N-th display command is started during opening of the jackpot 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). During the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (when the starting opening unit 2100 is closed). The large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls from 0 to 10 has been counted (shown in FIG. 69). The number of the game balls entered into the special winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit middle and large winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the start opening unit 2100 The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the N-th round of the special winning opening 2005, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the start-up opening unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 count display command is displayed when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the starting winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, when the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-large winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the small hit ending command is transmitted. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command named main control return destination at power-on. To these various commands, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is issued when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power is restored). When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, the information instructs the user to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, the power is restored when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored). )), The above-mentioned information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low probability time saving state, the high probability time saving state, the low probability non-time saving state, and the high probability non-time saving state, And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when each of the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet type is created, what kind of work is for the copyright, what kind of game specification (for example, a probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the change of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (A so-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to identify the type code among the Max type, Middle type, and Sweet digital type that indicate the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. The copyright code and the game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation is limited And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the game specification occurs.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs a return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: when the main control board power is turned on (when power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, Is also transmitted.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission processing, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to zuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. It is composed of commands related to the box 1402, such as start of general figure synchronizing effect, designation of general pattern, end of general figure synchronizing effect, and designation of state during change. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general figure synchronizing effect start command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect start with the effect pattern specified in the mode. The figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the end of the ordinary figure synchronizing effect, and the fluctuating state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state are a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving state indicating a high probability state and a time saving state as described above. State, a low-probability non-time-saving state indicating that the state is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that the state is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. As the gaming state, a low probability non-saving time state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 change, the general symbol designating command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The normal electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It is composed of commands called “hit opening”, “opening of normal electric power”, and “end of normal drawing”. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during opening of the day. State or time of expansion), and the ending per-figure-end command instructs the start of ending per-figure-per-figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for the ordinary electric power is transmitted when the ordinary electric power is opened. The ending command is transmitted at the start of the ending of the per-figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification]
As shown in FIG. 90, the categories of the notification display are composed of commands named win award display, connection anomaly display, disconnection / short-circuit anomaly display, magnetic detection switch anomaly display, door open, and door close. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize abnormal display command indicates that a game ball enters the special prize port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 when the player wins the special prize port other than during the big hit (during the operation of the condition device) (even though it is not during the big hit). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric connection in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed. The disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, a main control board 1310, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, and a count sensor. When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with 4005 or the like occurs, the start of disconnection / short circuit abnormality display is instructed. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  In addition, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door is open, the door frame is instructed to be notified. The door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In this state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the main frame 4 is in the open state, the main frame closing command is issued. The main frame closing command is transmitted to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a winning is made to a special winning opening other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of sending the command to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619), The frame closing command is transmitted when the main frame closing is detected (when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display section is composed of commands called frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error clearing navigation command (corresponding to error clearing command), and frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1310a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error release navigation, the error release navigation command is transmitted during the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section includes various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Inspection of various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on and the RAM clear other than the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when returning from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 90, a start opening prize, a change shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned “9 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. Based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the start of an effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 is determined. And a start of an effect when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability termination designation command instructs a state transition from the shortened operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state, and the high-probability end designation command instructs a state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is a special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). The number of balls that have not been used yet (the number of reserves) is displayed on the display. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). When the ball is entered, the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 notifies the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol. Reserved 0 to 4 (the number of balls (number of reserves) that have not yet been used for the normal symbol change display on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8) The special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The special design 2 memory prefetching production command instructing the notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold is instructed. Before the second special symbol display 1405 is used for the variable display of the special symbol, a prefetching instruction is provided to pre-read and notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension. Is what you do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation has been determined after the reduction of the specified number of fluctuations has been completed (after the elapse of the stoppage period). The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the change is determined (after the loss suspension period has elapsed) in which the high probability number in the case of “high probability N times” is exhausted. When the number of balls changes (in a state in which a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, (When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations is reduced from the number of reservations by using the first special symbol display 1403 to display special symbols in a variable manner.) The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the special symbol 2). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the fluctuation display, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves increases, the second special symbol display 1405 displays special information based on the number of reserves. Pattern The normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of pending balls has been reduced by using the variable display, and when the number of normally activated ball 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 is performed). In the state where there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used in the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the symbol display 1402, when the number of the reserves is further increased by the passing of the game ball through the gate unit 2003, or based on the retained number, the ordinary symbol display is used. When the number of reserved symbols is reduced by using the normal symbol in 1402 and the number of reserved symbols is reduced, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is set to the first starting port 2002). Is transmitted when the number of pending balls increases and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls is increased when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (the number of retained game balls enters the second starting port 2004). But Sent when it increases). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second starting opening When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit sound to notify the user of the fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used to monitor whether there is a fraudulent act in addition to notifying by sound from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command and does not notify the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) is provided with a broken ball, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error, and a CR not connected. When the ball is broken, bit 0 (B0, “B”) is used. Represents a bit.), The value 1 is set in bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2) in the case of 50 or more stocks, and The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, the value 1 is set in B5, the value 0 is set in B6, and the value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command), a ball watching, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error are prepared, and in the ball watching, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. "Retry error" indicates that payout of game balls that do not consistently occur due to a retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, Then, the value 0 is set in B7.

  For the frame state 2 command, “without a ball” is prepared, and a value of 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) while the ball is being removed. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, a change of the frame state, and at the time of an error release navigation, and an error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of the error release navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92. FIG. 94 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and whether or not a reach (reach loss) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random numbers to be used for determination, and fluctuations to be used for determining the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbols which are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 shown in FIG. A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot symbol for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of symbol random number, first special symbol display 1 when generating a small hit game state 03 and the random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1405, the initial value for the small hit symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol A random number for determination and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 should be opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination are used. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for jackpot determination is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77, other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. I do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and a checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum thereof is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when the value does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually set to the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and normally updates the random number for pattern hit determination based on the extracted ID code from the fixed numerical range of the counter. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. In other words, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value derivation process is always overwritten and updated as the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two steps of security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassemble the game board 5, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincides with the unauthorized acquisition, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. An instantaneous blackout is generated at each obtained predetermined interval, and even if a game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-described main control program performs main control-side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register."), The main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and a watch dock timer clear register ( If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and time measurement is started, when the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the clock by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clock. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs a comparison result by comparing a voltage between + 24V and a reference voltage or comparing a voltage between + 12V and a reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that the logic becomes HI when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clearing process, first, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function by setting its logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been. The determination as to whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is output from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the logic thereof is set to HI. Is input to Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the output terminal 1Q when the state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) resulting from the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, does not indicate that the RAM is to be cleared, and operates the operation switch 954. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 954 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system shown in FIG. 72 that performs the drawing control of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (boot). I'm waiting for you. In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If there is an input of a power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure notice signal continues. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is erased, and the value 0 when the game information is not erased. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). For this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a resets itself, and then returns to its original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets the value of the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter, so that the main-control-side power-off process described later is normally completed, and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared as described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0) in step S32, that is, if the main control-side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program executes the process by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Also, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates that the RAM is to be cleared and game information is to be erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code is obtained. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and sets this fixed value as a normal symbol per-judge initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol-per-test determination random number described above. I do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310 a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the random number for the jackpot determination used to determine whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state is updated in hardware by the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Is set to latch and acquire a random number, and the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set at a high speed in advance based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). The other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are rapidly extracted without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and performs main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as the random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to inform that the power has been turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in (1) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, after the completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, a main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the error release navigation command accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) is issued. The execution of the game control RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to convert the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 into the error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the predetermined time has elapsed even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is treated as a release switch for releasing an error notification accompanying an error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which should have been originally used to cancel an error generated in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storing unit for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a predetermined time elapses, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit random number update processing, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has not been input, the non-hit random number updating process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal has been input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Accordingly, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program executes the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special reserved number display 1404 shown in FIG. Then, the drive signals output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control program performs setting for prohibiting RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Since the main control MPU 1310a cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs the main control-side power-on processing again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs a main control-side power-on process by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power outage or the instantaneous blackout. The charged electric charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, the charged power is applied as +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The main control-side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the shutdown. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the When the power is cut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, when the power is restored, in the wait time standby processing in step S22, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A standby time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that performs the drawing control of the apparatus 460 starts (boots) is started, and immediately before the standby time is reached. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within about 7 ms, the step S42 is performed. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52. Thereafter, the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control timer interrupt process described above is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off process in the main control side power-on process may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, the main control-side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating a checksum based on the contents of the above is compared with a value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even when the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like when the power is restored and the clerk at the hall does not indicate the intention to clear the RAM. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thus, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is input (that is, step S22). If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Can not prevent the game information from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. It has become so that it does not. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notification signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notification signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the power supply 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information due to the progress of the game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main system composed of the processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process at the time of the side power cut-off, so that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when restarted, calculates the checksum in step S28. It is determined that the calculated result of the checksum in the backup processing (ie, the calculated value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64) matches, so that the instantaneous power failure stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is determined. There is no initialization of game information immediately before a power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are reset. Can be restarted again without any updating of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the main control power supply at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) from the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous power failure. Therefore, if the main control-side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process in step S22 is performed. It is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input in step 24 immediately after. Returning to the determination, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is kept input, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12 is cleared in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. By setting the set value and clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and starting the timekeeping again, the main control built-in WDT 1310af can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. . The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, so that the steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the step S52 is performed) The content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM can be prevented from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt process described later. The mechanism was adopted. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to the power outage or the momentary power outage, a portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and a main control side power supply. The content of the main control built-in RAM is divided into two parts: a part that can be completely completed by hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are completely changed. (Game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. For transmission, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. I have. Here, first, the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , That is, the problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not perform the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen in the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 executes the step In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, the gaming state is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started to shift from the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened. That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the server, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned, It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, a large winning opening 1 count display command for transmitting the number of balls of the game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is transmitted. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the ball of the game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even though the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the big hit gaming state (ie, what round).

  In such a situation, for example, when ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. From the main control board 1310 to the main control board 1310 to issue a special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing a transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting the closing of the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 during the round). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state by transmitting the signal to the board 1510, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Transition from the open state to the open state (that is, 5-5 To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the jackpot gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece has been expanded) indicating that a game state in which a game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 and a game state advantageous to the player is being achieved. When the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen to the player on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2107 and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen indicating that the player is in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (ie, a screen for instructing a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot know what game the player plays.

  As described above, in the above-described two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the large winning opening 2005 from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107 as a return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the state in which the game is in the state of being in a jackpot game state (ie, a screen indicating the number of the round). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but the A screen that starts driving of the solenoid 2108 and informs that the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 (for example, “Big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please display a message that informs the player that a ball should be thrown in.) Is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and power is returned to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Later, it is possible to instruct the player to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs in a state in which the player is in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the power is subsequently restored, the starting port solenoid 2107 is used as a return destination of the main control board 1310. A screen that informs the driver that driving has started and the pair of movable pieces has been expanded in the left-right direction (for example, “The movable pieces are being expanded. Is displayed on the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, and the power is returned to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Can be instructed to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004. Accordingly, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 in detail about the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. Accordingly, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted as transmission information. Is stored. These commands are such that a power-on state command is transmitted first, and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated and the RAM is cleared by operating the switch 954, information indicating the fact is provided at power-on (in addition to power-on, power failure or instantaneous power failure causes power (Including the time of power recovery to recover.) In any of the above-mentioned low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state, low probability non-time reduction state, and high probability non-time reduction state And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310) to create a so-called max-type, middle-type, and sweet-dig-type. What game specifications (for example, if the probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes (for example, It is possible to specify whether the game specification is a game specification (a so-called ST machine or the like) in which a probability variation occurs when the game is performed 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line determines which of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). Thereby, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of works is mixed. With the mixture of 1310, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine), the main control board 1310 determines which type of copyright the work has by checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs. Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor, and can separate the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program in the main control board 1310 switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 94 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control-side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank of the above. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later, The various symbols transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time during which the ordinary symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing, the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal that informs that the ACK has been received normally is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. Note that these various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program includes, for example, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and a magnetic detection sensor for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 reads the detection signal from the payout control board 951 and the payout ACK signal transmitted from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Are stored in the input information storage area as input information. Also, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002, and a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004. When each of the signals is read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other signals shown in FIG. 90 is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004. And a corresponding start-up winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning opening 2001 and 2011, and a count sensor 4005 for detecting game balls entering the large winning opening 2005 , A detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004 , And a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, when this switch input process is started, the first time is read for the first time, and the detection signal is read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the elapse, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for the first to third times and the reading twice for the second to fourth times, a total of two times of reading is performed. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. Reliability can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is a counter of an initial value update type, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the hit random number updating process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. Although the update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number update processing in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control-side main processing within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for initial value determination for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out a game ball is created and paid out as a prize ball. If the planned number of game balls has reached ten, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created award ball command or self-check command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so that the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that effect, stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 951 has normally received the award ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is checked. A self-check command is generated and transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be replaced by In the prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. Is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program is a command of various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-described frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 951 of the reception is output as output information in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display in FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Note that the frame state 1 command here corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to a first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal is input from the count sensor 4005 when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005) or the like. Then, a prize abnormal display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, whether the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance or not. (A determination as to whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated (referred to as “special lottery”)), and a value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. For example, it is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches (determination as to whether or not to generate a probability change). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) that is set higher than that at a normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 is read in the high probability. ３32767 are set, and are read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing of step S114, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches the jackpot determination value, a random number for a jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special effect 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so that the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is lit, and stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. I do. In addition, when a big hit game state is set, for example, according to the game state to be generated, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, FIG. The second round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the round display lamp 1407a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set so as to be turned on, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the status indicator 1401 is turned on or off in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not the probability variation has occurred. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In the gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol hit described above is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section and the second section of the gate information storage are stored. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage and display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for ordinary symbol hit determination is extracted from the read out gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). It is determined whether or not the movable piece is to be opened and closed based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that a game state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands that are classified as related to the ordinary figure tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and are transmitted as transmission information. While storing in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. For example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal symbol effect production shown in FIG. Is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol fluctuation based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, and various commands classified as related to the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 89 are created. In addition to storing in the storage area, an output of a lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1402 according to the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, and a driving signal is sent to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to the output, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to the game, such as information output information during working hours And outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out the transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and various kinds of special figure 2 tuning effect related shown in FIG. Command, and various commands classified into jackpot-related (for example, when a game ball that has entered a special winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected, a large win based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) is detected. A command for displaying a special winning opening 1 count corresponding to a mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as a general-tune synchronizing effect, various commands classified as a normal electric actor effect, FIG. 90 Various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display and status display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 transmits at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to its transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main serial data can be completed. At the time of power recovery in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. Since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Which constitutes a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, The mode is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the power-on processing at the main control side, and according to the game information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after the completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit) ) Is transmitted (error command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (The error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) ) Is transmitted (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 1510 (production control). ) Is transmitted (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door close command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door close command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, while the process can be completed. The power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is executed by the peripheral control board Can be output to In other words, the main control board 1310 sets the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 93, and sets the main control built-in RAM work area in step S34 in the same processing. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, a power-on status command classified as power-on and a power-on main command shown in FIG. The control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is output as main circumference serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, to the game board side effect display device 1600. Effect display in the display area. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the main control board 1310 can display and notify the return destination of the progress of the game in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the state of the system of the pachinko machine 1 is so-called, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistakenly viewed as having failed in a state where the player has failed. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  In addition, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on shown in FIG. A power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are generated by creating a power-on main control return destination command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, a power-on state command is configured as main circumference serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying which type is the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, and the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., and based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. This causes the peripheral control MPU 1511a to be in a state in which interrupt permission is set, and output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of the game effect and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information, which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db also in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM). If the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC controller 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting the backlight is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is set. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of the LED included in the setting information being 80%, the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is determined based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the use time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the production control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (it is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when executing the peripheral control unit steady processing, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the data in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmission buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is generated. The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing the data to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When serial transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  Whenever a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa Is not using a bus, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad by one byte at a time. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier substrate LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 and the like based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 The presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is determined as appropriate whether or not to reflect this.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data of one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later is transmitted from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74 by the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thus, various screens are drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when rendering exceeding the rendering capability of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is performed, the generated rendering data for one screen (one frame) is rendered on the gaming board side display unit 1600 and the door frame side production. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but a so-called dropping of frames occurs. However, the lamp data output processing in step S1012 causes the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronizing with the effect by music and sound effects etc. according to.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs serialized audio data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a positive signal and a negative signal are used. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the luminescence data arranged in time series that constitute the luminescence mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of luminescence data starting from the first luminescence data is changed to the luminescence of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The driving data of the electric driving sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric driving source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is configured to transmit information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and various information transmitted from the main control substrate 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. I do. In the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing includes, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, and the number of ordinary symbols held. Normal symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of pending start changes, and a special winning opening 2005 A special winning opening 1 count display command (a special winning opening count command) output every time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command indicating a full state shown in FIG. 90 (a second error occurrence command, It is analyzed whether the command is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means) and it is recognized which game state is currently in play. Also, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door opening command, or a door frame closing. Analyzes whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands are various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning production related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning production related, various commands classified into big hit relation, and power-on shown in FIG. 89. Various commands, various commands classified in the ordinary figure synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the ordinary electric production production-related, various commands classified in the notification display shown in FIG. 90, the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into a status display shown in FIG. For example, when the command is an error release navigation command (second error release command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from a normal effect form associated with the effect operation, so that, for example, the game board side Using the effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) to visually warn the outside, or use a speaker to audibly warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, an improper act on the main control board 1310 which may affect the progress of the game is suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 in the calendar information storage unit, which is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer is designated by the pointer of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. On the basis of the emission data, the game board side emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 The door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is stored in various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. And is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and displays the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. From the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and outputs the extracted data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board effect display device. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the pointer points out of the time-series sound command data constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 levels from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for substrate volume 6, and Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as the audio data obtained by serializing the audio data in the audio data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when the clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or sound effect from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a fraudulent act of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen played by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to be backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) in the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the copy to the backup second area 1511cc of Bank4 (1fr). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is to be backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. The effect control information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), is used as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) are designated by copying the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM). From the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are continuously copied in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) at a time from the head address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the content stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. And the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in the backup second area 1511dc. Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  This peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and then sets 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value of 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. To complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed at the moment will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is equal to 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value of 1 is set in the stationary processing flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In addition to the transmission to the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a process in a case where the execution of the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  As a result, in the present peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is not performed, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the number of executions of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, if the 1st timer interrupt of the 33rd time occurs and the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric driving sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 and the motor driving board 4180 shown in FIG. At the same time, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When serial transmission of the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c is stored. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the staging operation unit 400 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series to constitute. 73 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral controller 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor driving clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller in units of 1 byte. 1511ad, and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port and writing the data, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on drive data designated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the like is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown in 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  Each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for the motor driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in effect operation unit 400 are input, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The operation presence / absence of the operation button 410 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, a drawing state information acquisition process is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripheral information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal output to convey that effect, specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the frequency of failures and the state of occurrence of failures between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the door frame side effect display device is obtained. 460 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, as the effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied by the peripheral control D A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac to Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the bank 3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). And the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and copies the contents of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank4 (1ms). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to this, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the one-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode of the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. Under file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310 is determined. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data due to noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are defined by the reception command storage area. 1511 cac is stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data when storing the data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored value is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, if the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 can be received. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal executed when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and outputs a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started in step S1304 and the power failure notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is turned off, the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed, thereby ensuring a stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the transmitted command at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, backup processing of the command is performed (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. By specifying a copy, from the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Is specified in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to this point are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc are successively copied in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in succession.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has been input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process illustrated in FIG. 97 will be described. In the LOCKN signal history creation processing, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is generated by drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the data is abnormal, the signal is output to convey the fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is, as shown in FIG. 100, the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores one byte (8 bits: the most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, the least significant bit B0, and "B" represent bits). It has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. A request is made to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data) A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is not requested. Is determined.

  If there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, if there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1500 is converted to the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. When there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 such as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least bit B0. From the first bit to the most significant bit B7.

  If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST has been shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  As described above, each time the LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process illustrated in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination processing, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a failure has occurred between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. 101, stores the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When the determination is made, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. Has the value 0, and the lower four bits B3 to B0 have the value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no failure between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 This is a state in which a failure occurs in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined, and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset. At this time, the value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

  Subsequent to step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (greater) than the upper limit value CC-LMT of the accumulated number of times in step S1526, that is, it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. If the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag that indicates whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Value 1 indicates that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset. On the other hand, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset by an instantaneous power failure or power failure. At this time, the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, a description will be given of the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. This connection recovery processing is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, and includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection restoration process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed along with the data and the updating of the pointer has been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period in which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the gaming board effect display device 1600 or a state where the pachinko machine 1 is in a customer waiting state and the demonstration by the gaming board effect display device 1600 is performed. It is possible to determine whether or not the current period is based on the screen generation schedule data. A start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. When the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or in the customer waiting state, the effect is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is terminated as it is, and in step S1540, the routine is executed according to the screen generation schedule data. When the effect has been completed and pointer updating has been completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is performed, the communication check counter CC-CNT determines whether or not the communication failure counter CC-CNT is provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the same process. The number of times that it is determined that the state between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state, is counted up. (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred once.

  If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is equal to 0 in step S1542, that is, if the number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not been determined once, this value remains unchanged. On the other hand, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem in step S1542, the number of times is one. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, and This flag indicates whether the connection between the receiver and the receiver has a failure. If the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure, the value is 1; Are set to 0 when the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a failure has occurred in the connection does not reach the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is equal to 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem is the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby outputting the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. This restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, if the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the communication error display processing is performed. (Step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Perform the process of drawing in For example, a message “A problem has occurred in the upper-panel liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. In the communication error display process, a period during which the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state are performed. During the operation, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to check whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, A LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. And a notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.”) Is displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600. In addition to performing a process, a notification sound (for example, “a problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device”) is repeatedly performed from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, a process of lighting all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the decoration symbols which are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part normal processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result obtained by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 94, or the second special lottery result shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery selected by accepting the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Then, the round is completed, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls is paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 is obtained from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left decorative pattern is on the left side of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, and the central decorative pattern is in the center. On the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. Can be recognized by the player. At this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in a semi-transparent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left to the lower left of the area, the center decorative pattern rotates from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in a fluctuating manner as if they are, it corresponds to the stopped and displayed left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern have an opaque mode so that the background image at the position is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is started and stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600, are started and displayed in a variable manner, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the first special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball into the second starting port 2004. Upon receiving a command from the main control board 1310 that transmits the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, as shown in FIG. When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit in the power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In order to indicate the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the When the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process, that is, when the effect is progressing along with the screen generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data is being activated. While the data is being activated, that is, during the period from when the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started until the variable display is stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is performed. In the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol to the stop display. Even when the value is not the value 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the transmitter). Even if the number of times that it is determined that the failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is once or not, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not connected. The connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection recovery process Without performing the communication error display process of step S1548, for example, a message such as "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame-side effect display device is provided. Reference numeral 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process, the effect is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the updating has been completed, that is, in the scheduler updating process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Of the step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the time process When it is determined in step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 that is executed as one process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, when the transmitter When the number of times that it is determined that the connection with the receiver has a failure is not found once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, ie, the transmitter If the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the device and the receiver has a failure is at least one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty If the cumulative number determined to have not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, terminates the routine, and terminates the communication abnormality flag CC-LMT. If the value of FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has definitely failed, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-described communication error display is performed. Performs the processing and ends the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are provided. This is a case where the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once at the time of the connection with the ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is surely defective). In the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed and notified, and a LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Has been activated.

  The variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is displayed again. Since the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 during the interval period until the start of, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is validated, and the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect A malfunction occurs between the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If there is at least one state, and the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state where a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, SYNC By always performing the pattern output process, while performing the process of restoring the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which a problem has occurred in the connection during the period has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is, the problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver without fail). ), The communication error display processing is always performed, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the like. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is performed The processing for restoring the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection restoration processing is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 The message "A problem has occurred on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed, so the drawing data received from the door frame side effector transmitter IC In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the presence, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The image is displayed based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative again. During the interval until the symbol change display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is enabled. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display for the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started to be displayed until it is stopped and displayed. Door frame-side staging receiver ICSD that informs that drawing data received from IC 1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result in which the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is the information of most interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not the big hitting game state in which the big hit is generated, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is distorted due to the influence of noise or the like and is incorrect. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the effect is not interrupted in the middle of the process and the process of recovering to the state where the drawing can be correctly performed is performed. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the waiting state for the customer. During the period in which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is being performed, this is greatly different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the operation, the signal is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a and includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal by the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, The two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals. The two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided on the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally: As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 around the peripheral control unit 1511. Output to the control MPU 1511a. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, While it can be determined that no failure has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450. The notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is transmitted to the gaming-board-side effect display device by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600 and a notification sound to convey that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data that is the serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. As a result, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receiving the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effector receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no trouble has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as the notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify a store clerk or the like of the hall by executing a notification process. The store clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check does not take much trouble. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, the signal is output to convey that effect. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450 Since this signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. The receiver IC SDIC0 is a door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. If the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between image communication between the door frame side effecting receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effecting transmitter IC 1512d, and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is started. By outputting the image data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication error between image communications at an early stage and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the problem. It has become. Therefore, by finding and solving the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Further, the door frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame-side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception cannot be performed normally, the effect control microprocessor generates a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal that indicates that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the LOCKN signal is inputted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling you Is generated, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 to inform the user. You can do it. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early detects a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure between image communications, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 of the failure. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall, or directly notify the clerk of the hall that happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, by detecting and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460 early, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being performed does not reach the cumulative number of times upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem during image communication. From the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d A connection confirmation signal for notifying the start of transmission to the frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Has become. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication trouble is solved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during a period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communications is set. Door from door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d When the connection confirmation signal notifying the start of transmission to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the connection is confirmed. When the output of the signal is stopped, and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d changes the door frame to a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern). Stop sending to the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and control the liquid crystal display The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a trouble elimination signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move in a direction in which the communication trouble is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. When the connection confirmation signal is continuously output only during a period in which the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if the ten main control MPU 1310a starts to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and starts executing the game again, the door frame The effect distortion (image distortion) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460 is caused by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starting to execute the game again and ending (period from timing K1 to timing K2). (Every (interval period)), it is possible to move in the direction of eliminating.

  According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 in FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 in FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port, which is a starting area in which a game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 is provided in the game area 5a toward a game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5. A main control MPU 1310a in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. 70 payout control MPUs 952a are mounted.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is turned off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game-related information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and when operated within the period from the time of power-on to the time of power-on processing of the payout control unit, the payout control built-in RAM A RAM clear function of outputting a RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to a payout control MPU 952a as a payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing stored payout information, and a main control power supply of FIG. The period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the power When the operation is performed after a lapse of a period from the time of entry to the time of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, the RWMLCLR signal of FIG. And an error clearing function for outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated during the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is performed. 77 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, for erasing information about the game control microprocessor, and is operated within a period in which a payout control unit power-on process is performed from power-on. The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. Of the period when the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control-side power-on process of FIG. When the operation is performed after a lapse of (or a period during which the payout control unit power-on processing is performed after the power is turned on), the RWMCLR signal in FIG. An error clearing function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a that is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a that is a game control microprocessor. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions of a pachinko machine 1 and an error canceling function. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error canceling function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input portion of the panel relay board 4161 is provided with various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detecting sensor. , A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. I do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired to obtain an unfair advantage. Unauthorized gaming continues.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting unit, a sound warning, or the like. I have.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the progress of the game and the effect will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images of characters, etc.) based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, The display mode and the operation mode of various members (such as the stage operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the stage are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting opening winning process is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting opening. Done.

  If the processing flag is 0 when the first and second start-up opening prize processing is completed, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of holds is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the hold state is exhausted and executed, and the result of the jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , The processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting opening winning processing has been completed, the fluctuation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the stored result of the big hit determination, the current game state, and the like. After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the change display of the special symbol to the stop display, and the stop symbol (the big hit symbol, the loss symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second start-up opening prize processing is completed, the processing during the change is executed. In this fluctuation processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. To stop. Then, thereafter, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the change start processing is a big hit, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and when the result of the big hit determination stored in the change start processing is not a big hit (losing). , The process selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is completed, the big hit game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set a jackpot game mode (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the jackpot that has been won. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. After updating the gaming state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interruption processing, the processing is started again from the fluctuation start processing.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored as the variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern is used to determine the time from the start of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol to the end thereof, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect appearing on the effect display device 1600. The type of the pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a large hit variation variation pattern, a loss reach variation variation pattern, and a loss variation variation pattern. The big hit change is a change that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. In the effect display device 1600, after the reach effect, the change display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the big hit symbol. Is performed. The outreach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number. In the effect display device 1600, decoration is performed through the reach effect. An effect is performed in which the variable display of the symbol is developed so that the symbol is finally determined and stopped and displayed. The outlier fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and when it is not determined that the reach is to be performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number, the effect display device 1600 does not pass the reach effect. Then, an effect is developed in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally lost and the symbol is fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by obtaining game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the information, it is possible to make such a variation pattern of the decorative symbol appear. Further, on the peripheral control board 1510, based on the acquired game information, the effect display device 1600 causes the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to appear, and also changes the effect display (background or hold image) related to the degree of expectation or effects. Control is performed to change the mode (display or movement) of the operation unit 400 or to operate a movable member such as the back-to-back movable effect unit 3100.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Assuming now that the main control program has shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes On condition that the detection signal from the one starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2002) (YES in Step S5231), the first big hit determination random number is obtained from the random number counter. A first start opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( A second starting port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the big hit control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating either “8R probable big hit A” or “8R normal big hit”, the special winning opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed eight times after opening the game for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005. 8R jackpot control game state,
-When the result of the determination process on the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "16R probability big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is controlled 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the determination process on the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "8R probable big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ), The opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed is closed eight times when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicates a mode indicating "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). After that, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice to control the 2R big hit game state.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time reduction control is executed, the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed. As described above, left-handing is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if the jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of up to eight rounds. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, if a big hit is won, a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of the winning species) ), A large-hit jackpot game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (approximately 2000 game balls can be acquired), such as the expected value of prize balls that can be acquired when a big hit is won Therefore, when the shift control is performed to the right-handed state, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than in the left-handed state.

  In the big hit control process, in order to start the opening control of the special winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter described later, and the like are performed.

  In the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability is determined according to the winning type of the jackpot that has triggered the jackpot game. A flag and a time reduction flag are set.

  The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in a jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) which is set when the big hit game state based on the probability change big hit and the 8R probability change big hit B) is ended, and the next big hit occurs. Reset with.

  The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control is being executed (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability-time-saving state). As shown in FIG. 110, the time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, will be set when the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R certain big hit A, 16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B) ends. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning a big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later. Or it is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The change number counter is a counter indicating the number of changes in the special symbol since the change number counter was reset, and is used in a first change pattern setting process (second change pattern setting process) shown in FIG. It is updated (for example, counted up) when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B) Is reset when the big hit game state based on the game is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then, in the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hitting game state is being controlled is set. Is determined. As a result, if the small hitting execution flag is set, the small hitting control process for controlling the small hitting game state (step S5240b) is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the special winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

  Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time reduction flag, and a time Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

  If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, when the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not “0” (step S5237), the second special symbol reserved A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is held so that the lottery for the second special symbol in the reserved state is not lost (unless the value of the second special symbol number counter is "0"), the first special symbol is determined. Irrespective of the lottery hold status, only the random determination for the second big hit determination random number is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player only maintains the driving of the game ball to the right side of the center role 2500 (right-handed). Only the lottery (determination process) for the two big hit determination random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

  It should be noted that the special figure game (symbol variation) using the second special figure (second special design) is limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special design). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which a game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning has occurred, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to be able to determine.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S5232).

  Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes each of the random numbers on the first special symbol side (the random number for the big hit determination, the random number for the reach determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, the random number for the variation display pattern) as the process of step S5241. ) Is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is set to the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether or not “4” which is the (upper limit) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the reserved number of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (the determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Next, the first special figure pre-reading process for executing the pre-reading effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5245). As will be described later, the first look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In the first special figure pre-reading process, information necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, the content of the effect, and the like (information related to a hit for the pre-reading determination, a symbol type for the pre-reading determination). Information, information on a variable pattern number for pre-reading determination, and the like, and store the information in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5242 that the number of reserved special first symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S5234).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5233 that the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. In step S5251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes each random number on the second special symbol side (a random number for determining a second big hit, a random number for a second reach determination, and a random number for a second big hit symbol). Random number, a random number for the second variation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not “4” (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed in order to set the state.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To be stored.

  Then, the second special figure pre-reading process for executing the pre-reading effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the processing is ended (step S5255). As will be described later, the prefetching effect on the second special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variation display of the second special symbol. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (hit information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and the effect content on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S5252 that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the above-mentioned variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  When the number of reserved special first symbols changes based on a game ball having entered the first starting port 2002, a command instructing the number of reserved special first symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). (First reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) instructs the number of retained second special symbols. Command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. Since only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the read big hit determination random number, the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. 1st special symbol normal process in which is performed (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which, for example, a process of determining a mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )

  3. The variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern, and the effect corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device (game board effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode of the effect display to be performed (step S5282).

  4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283).

  5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped based on the result of the determination process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5301. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a fluctuating display of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is next executed as a process of step S5302, where the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Of the first special symbol (for example, the first big hit random number, the first reach random number, the first big hit symbol random number, and the first variable display pattern random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol The random number stored in the area is read out from the same main control built-in RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. First-in, first-out (first-in, first-in) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, the first big hit determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first big hit symbol random number, and the first variable display pattern random number). The shift operation is performed in a first-out mode.

  More specifically, the first special symbol storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol storage area a to first special symbol storage area d), The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d). Then, the extracted random numbers are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol has been suspended is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  After that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit determination process for determining the hit of the big hit is performed based on the read random number for the first big hit determination. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5311), the high probability state shown in FIG. The big hit determination table is selected (step S5312). If the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S5311), the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110A is selected (step S5313), and the selection is made. The determined big hit determination table is compared with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). (Low-probability non-work-short state, low-probability work-short state), a large-hit jackpot determination table used in the case of a low-probability work, A big hit determination table at the time of probability. Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The first big hit determination random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the type of first big hit determination random number coincides with the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability at low probability; approximately) "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability to be referred, the 204 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the 65332 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating that the big hit is a big hit probability at the time of a low probability; approximately “1/321”.

  Also, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to be compared with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 kinds of first big jackpot random numbers match the big hit determination value, and 63496 kinds of first big jackpot determination The first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other such that the random numbers match the outlier determination values (big hit probability at high probability; approximately “1/32”). On the other hand, in the special symbol and special electric auditors control process performed in step S5239 of the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability is referred to compare with the second big hit determination random number , 2040 kinds of big hit determination random numbers match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and 63496 kinds of second big hit determination random numbers match the out-of-office determination value indicating that the loss has occurred. The random numbers for the second big hit determination are associated with each other (big hit probability at the time of high probability; approximately “1/32”). It should be noted that the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, and the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination value) set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number The number of the jackpot determination values may be different with the same number (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of the jackpot determination values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit determination tables at the time of low probability and the big hit determination table at the time of high probability may be made different (or both may be made different). .

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S5315). ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit has been lost, the read big hit determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won based on the selected big hit determination table. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of the present example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; In this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (loss determination).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-hours reduction state. And a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-hours-saving state).

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches the reach, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the above. However, the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state matches the reach determination value indicating that all of the 72 types of reach-determination random numbers do not reach, in order to maximize the speed of the game progress in the time-saving state. In such a case, it may not be possible to match with the reach determination value indicating that reach is performed.

  Also, the reach determination table in the low probability state indicates that five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown, and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the low-probability state is higher than that in the high-probability time-saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-work-short state, five types of reach determination including the same reach-determination random numbers as the reach-determination random numbers set in the reach determination tables in the high-probability work reduction state and the low-probability state are provided. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the use random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination values that indicate that the reach is not performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-hours reduction state.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and determines that a reach loss has occurred (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the change becomes the reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag has been set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, 200 Are stored in a form in which they are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side stores a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit B, 2R normal hit) in the symbol determination table. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the random number for the first big hit symbol is set to be different from the type of the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific games and effects for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, after the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 is displayed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit gaming state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit gaming state. Is controlled to the effect mode in which the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state.

  2. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 gaming balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big hit game state Controls the low-probability time-saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is consumed 100 times (or the big hit is won in the period until 100 times consumed), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state An effect display device in which a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, it is relatively disadvantageous. 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big hit game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed eight rounds during the execution period of the 16R big hit gaming state (whether it will be 16 rounds) (successful rendering) ) Is performed and an additional challenge effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being controlled to the high probability time saving state, a relatively advantageous state 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. The count sensor 4005 indicates that after the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the large winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or that 9 game balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at the time of 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and determines whether the number of rounds will exceed 8 rounds (or 16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit gaming state (failure production) ) Is performed, an additional challenge effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the high-probability time-saving state is controlled, the state is relatively advantageous. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the jackpot symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the count sensor 4005 opens the large winning opening 2103 for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won the large winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) to be closed twice when detected at step 2, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103. After the 2R jackpot game state, Until the variable display of the symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until the symbol is exhausted 100 times), the state is controlled to the low probability time saving state, and a specific character is executed during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. Perform a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in the low-probability time-saving state, the effect display device 1600 is relatively disadvantageous. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R certain variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and a big hit (16R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 at the maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times to pay out approximately 2000 game balls.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot A, it is determined to be an 8R probability variable jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 8R ordinary jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot symbol 8R ordinary jackpot symbol. decide. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 16R probability variable hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variable hit is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 8R probability variable hit B is determined, the 8R probability variable hit is determined as the big hit symbol. If it is determined to be a B symbol, and if it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit, it is determined to be a 2R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the small hit flag is set in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After it is determined to be a unique symbol stop mode (step S5334), the flow shifts to step S5337.

  Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the loss symbol as the mode of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (step S5336), and proceeds to step S5337. I do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the lottery result (one of the type of big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S5337. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → Stop display is performed in the order of the middle decoration symbols (note that the left, middle, and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed in the same pattern in a fluctuating manner and may be simultaneously stopped and displayed). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative patterns are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal big hit is won as a big hit. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as another symbol) is determined. In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach design accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same design in which the left and right decorative designs are “0” to “9” and different middle decorative designs; reach loss) When the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined as an outlier symbol (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are different symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

  In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game starts, and the big hit game Is displayed after the start of the game.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been done (step S5341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is set. Is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344). If a reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. (Not shown) (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are selected. If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the fact is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). When the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), the process is ended. As a result, the first special symbol display control is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 for the thus determined fluctuation time, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of the present example includes random numbers for jackpot determination (first random number for jackpot determination, random number for second large jackpot determination) and random numbers for jackpot symbol (first random number for jackpot symbol, random number for second large symbol hit). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the determination. In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The random numbers for the first variation display pattern are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads the selected variation pattern table and the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is obtained by comparing the read random number for variable display pattern with the read random number for variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the read random number for variable display pattern from this table. Is determined. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Have been. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 kinds of random numbers for the variation display pattern among the 241 types of random numbers for the variation display pattern are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The kinds of random numbers for the variation display pattern are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the super reach effects having the low jackpot expectation is executed, and the 18 random numbers for the variable display pattern have the high jackpot expectation. This is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any of the super reach effects is to be executed.

  Note that the super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a jackpot game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed The expectation of is increasing. That is, such a super-reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and thus, even if a loss is finally displayed, the player's expectation degree for the big hit game state Can be increased. However, in order to sufficiently increase the player's expectation of the jackpot playing state, during the period in which the super-reach effect is being executed, a high-expected notice effect that is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern appears (Composite) is required.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss which is provided corresponding to the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state And a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with the above. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided in correspondence with the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A change time of 12 seconds can be set, and a change time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time reduction state and in the non-time reduction state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time reduction state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is performed. In addition to the prompting, the player has secured time to make the second starting port 2004 win a game ball.

  In addition, when 0.1 second is selected from the fluctuation time at the time of the loss of the second special symbol, each game ball hit at 0.6 second intervals in the game area 5a in the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state). It is possible to prevent the paper from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

  That is, the right-hit game ball is supplied to a region immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is received from this area to the gate unit 2003 in the time saving state (high probability time saving state or the like), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second start port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). Thereby, under a condition that can be successively accepted by the second starting port 2004 one after another (a time-saving state in which almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if the game balls are accepted, a control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be successively digested with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of about "1/32" each time the game balls are accepted. Will be made possible.

  In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state), In many cases, the starting port 2004 receives game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table for the loss of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is extremely variable as the variation time in the time-saving state (such as the high-probability time-saving state). It can be set as short as 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol change is completed only in a time (0.1 second) shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds is obtained. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to suppress such game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. .

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5371. In the process of (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S 5372), the process proceeds to step S 5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), the process ends.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1 (step S 5371), if the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time at which the symbol should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S5381. In the processing of the above, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S5387). The standby time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, When the time reduction flag is reset (step S5389), the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5389). S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is executed in the above big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R likelihood jackpot A command, 8R likelihood jackpot command, 8R likelihood jackpot command, 8R likelihood jackpot A, 8R likelihood jackpot, 8R likelihood jackpot, 8R likelihood jackpot B, 2R likelihood jackpot) Big hit command, 8R positive variable big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command) are set. As a result, an effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) of a jackpot game state according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when the vehicle is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). In other words, when the number of times the special symbol changes after being controlled to the low probability time reduction state reaches a predetermined upper limit (100 times), it is determined that the condition for terminating the low probability time reduction state is satisfied, and The function is stopped and the game is shifted to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S 5392).

  Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S 5393), a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game state is started is set (step S 5394), and the small hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value, of the first special symbol process flag. (Step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hitting execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hitting control process (step S5240b) is performed. The small hitting game state is executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, when the small hit game state is executed, the game state is not changed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (NO in step S 5393), it is determined that a loss has occurred and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394), the process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag or the small hit executing flag is not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is performed according to the suspended state. The processing related to the progress of (lottery or symbol control) is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S5402. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal process in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped based on the read ordinary random number is performed (step S5403).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process that stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405).
4. Variation display of the ordinary symbol so that the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting “per-universal symbol”, the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004. Electric-powered accessory opening processing for executing processing for enabling control (step S5407)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S5402).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the ordinary reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of Step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the ordinary pending number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the processing of step S5413, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Next, as a process of step S5414, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in a normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, in the process of step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the process of step S5421 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as a process of step S5422, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol retaining storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary figure variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal holding number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Are shifted in a first-in first-out manner (first-in first-out).

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is the time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a time reduction time ordinary figure hit determination table (not shown) ( If the current gaming state is a non-time reduction state (low probability non-time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S5425), a non-time reduction time-of-day map hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S5425). In step S5427, the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S5428).

  The general chart hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (high probability time reduction state). And a non-working time normal time map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-working time reduction state, high-probability non-working time reduction state). Then, in the time-saving-time ordinary figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 255 types of ordinary random numbers match the ordinary figure hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during the working hours, the game ball is always elected per ordinary drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. We control acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-working time reduction state, may be made to coincide with the general figure hit determination value indicating that the general figure is won.

  In addition, in the non-working time general map hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 255 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general map hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-usual-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual figure is out of place. As described above, in non-working hours, even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the ball is not won per ordinary drawing, so that the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened. There is no control to allow game balls to be accepted into 2004. However, as described above, it is also possible to obtain a hit of a normal symbol even in a non-time saving state. In this case, a winning probability (for example, 50%) lower than that of the time saving state is set, and the lottery result of the normal symbol becomes a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, the movable piece is moved forward again. You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the 2nd starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected general symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S5429). ), After setting a perpetual hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per peristaltic perimeter (step S5430), the perpetual perch as a mode when the perturbation control of the perturbative symbol is stopped (a perpetual stop symbol). On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is a loss as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol ordinary processing, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. An unusual symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S5432). After that, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S5404), this process is ended.

  Then, while such control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the peripheral control unit regular processing (the reception command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation at each time is grasped, and an effect according to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation where a start winning has occurred, and when there is such a situation, performs control relating to a hold display or a pre-reading effect according to the start winning. Then, thereafter, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game status, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, effect symbol variation start process, effect symbol variation process, effect symbol variation stop process, big hit display process One of the big hit game in-game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until the variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, it takes effect (such as demonstration effect) when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control regarding the big hit is not performed. When the control is performed and a variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing.

  Effect design variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol change period are determined based on the change pattern command and the like, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started based on the determined effect content. Control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing. Of the fluctuation patterns (effect patterns), many of the “variation patterns (effect patterns) stopped at the big hit symbol” are prepared in pairs with the “variation patterns (effect patterns) stopped at the losing symbol”. Since they function as the same fluctuation pattern (effect pattern), an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears is provided. Therefore, when a variation pattern (effect pattern) is described below, when a “predetermined variation pattern” or a “specific variation pattern” is described, unless otherwise noted, “stop at a big hit symbol” "Predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) stopped at the losing symbol", and as a result of the effect contents being developed in the same manner It comes to the branch point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Processing during effect symbol change: Various effects determined in the effect symbol change start process are controlled to start at each timing during the symbol change period, and the value of the process flag is changed when the change time ends. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing stop of all the symbols, the control of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbols and deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) is performed. When the decorative symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process. Update to the value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect that notifies the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of the big hit) in a period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. Then, thereafter, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing.

  Big hit game processing: Control for various effects during the period of occurrence of the big hit game state. When the big hit gaming state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing.

  Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the fluctuation allowable state (display effect for notifying the player of the end of the big hit game state) is controlled. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determination table T1 which is referred to in the effect symbol change start process when in the normal gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, the effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern commands. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) associated with the fluctuation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on the (fluctuation effect), the control is performed so that the change of the decorative symbol is started.

  The effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on the effect lottery or the game situation. You may make it. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  In addition, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this way, and then performs a preview lottery (a process of judging the notice effect) based on the jackpot determination result, the symbol type, and the fluctuation pattern. By performing control (processing during fluctuation of the design symbol) to make the preview effect won in the preview lottery appear at a predetermined timing in the execution of the determined effect pattern (fluctuating effect), a plurality of effect contents can be obtained. It is made to be possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the big hit symbol depending on the appearance mode and the like of the combination.

  Conventionally, among such composite effects, there is a case where a plurality of appearances are performed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed while the same specific notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being executed, In this way, it is expected that the entertainment interest will be maintained. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the expectation degree of the big hit symbol appears is high, the frequency at which a plurality of timer effects are executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed becomes naturally low. However, it was considered difficult to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  As will be described later, the “timer effect” refers to a predetermined effect appearing during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and displays a count display toward a timing at which the predetermined effect is performed by a first predetermined numerical value. (For example, “60 seconds”) to a second predetermined value (for example, “0 seconds”), which is executed as a count effect display or a standby display before starting the count display (for example, during preparation). It is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is ensured that some effect always occurs when the count reaches the second predetermined numerical value. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or cut-in A) in which one of an effect mode that is relatively disadvantageous for the player (an effect mode with a low degree of expectation) and an advantageous effect mode (an effect mode with a high degree of expectation) appears. , B, etc.) are targeted for the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined numerical value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, a notice timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept confidential as to which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, “the effect target of the timer effect” is the effect of the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, “0 second”) as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are accurately displayed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer effect as described above, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display is performed by counting up or counting down, the time elapsed since the start of the count ( (E.g., seconds).

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when a winning is made in the preliminary lottery, the above-described effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) is determined. A timer effect (variable timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect can be executed. That is, in this case, if only the notice timer effect to execute the count effect display as "the effect contents of the notice effect that functions so that the big hit expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", Instead, it is also executed as "the effect contents of the effect pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", so that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command is Effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without uselessly stacking (additional expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in the preliminary lottery”). For example, if the big hit expectation when the specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is “20%”, when the notice side timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation is increased by the composite effect function. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount. On the other hand, if the variation side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, the big hit is expected. The timer effect can be executed with the degree kept at “20%” (appears only when a specific variation pattern is selected), and the appearance frequency can be suitably maintained.

  It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree when an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) appears in the determination table T1 is different depending on the change number (further, the effect pattern). There is a tendency to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variation timer effect in which the “conversation notice” is directed as the effect content is executed. The appearance ratio is as follows: variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the big hit expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail. An effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer effect can be executed is included, and can appear with a different probability than in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that all the same normal reach effects are performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can be performed on the variable side timer effect for which the conversation notice is to be directed. This is different from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that: Variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed. However, in variation numbers 9 and 10, a variation-side timer effect for which a conversation notice is directed is executed, and variation numbers 11 and 14 are performed. 12, a variable-side timer effect with cut-in A as an effect target is executed, and the variable numbers 13 and 14 execute a conversation notice and cut-in A, and a variable-side timer effect with these as effect targets. Are different in that they can be The variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed. However, the variation numbers 17 and 18 execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation announcement, and the variation number 19 and 20, a variable-side timer effect with cut-in B as the production target is executed, and with variation numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable-side timer effect with the cut-in B as the production target is executed. Are different in that they can be In addition, the expectation degree of the big hit is higher when the variable-side timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable-side timer effect with the conversation announcement as the target is performed. Is set such that the expectation of a big hit tends to be higher when the variable timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is performed.

  The “conversation notice” is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after an effect pattern (a change effect of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low level of expectation is often added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. This is an effect that is often performed (or an effect in which a relatively high level of expectation is always added). Therefore, the “conversation notice” is set such that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-ins A and B, and the later-described character A operations and B) having higher expectations. It is something to be done. In addition, the “cut-in” appearing as the content of the variable production is executed in the character reach in such a manner as to correspond to the cut-in A appearing as the production content of the announcement production, whereas the SP-reach performs the notice “cut-in”. This is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

  In addition, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect pattern) for a plurality of variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) ) Is assigned as a variable side timer effect. If the fluctuation pattern is “a predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as a shortened fluctuation or a normal reach production with a low degree of expectation”, a count production display as a notice side timer production is displayed. In order to prevent the effect from being won (by increasing the degree of premium) and appropriately secure the degree of expectation UP when the notice-side timer effect appears, the fluctuation pattern is “variation pattern (performing the fluctuation-side timer effect) (Variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.), the variation pattern is determined by the predetermined type (for example, variation Nos. 1 to 6) are reduced.

  Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the individual types correspond to the above-described predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, and 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and four variation patterns (variation numbers) are provided. Nos. 1 to 4) correspond to the above-described predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), and the corresponding ratio is “4/8”.

  In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is such that the count effect display (variable side timer effect) can be performed (count variation pattern), the notice is more noticeable than in the case of the variation pattern in which the variation side timer effect is not performed. As a content of the effect of the effect, the ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice timer effect) cannot be executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (fluctuating effect) without increasing the degree of expectation and reducing the frequency of appearance.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (variable effect) determined in the effect symbol change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The appearance rate of the notice side timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-mentioned notice-side timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the effect on the notice timer is effected, it is possible to appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the effect on the notice timer can appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

  Note that, even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in fact, a bigger hit than in the case of a loss The announcement timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability for the effect pattern that has been won, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). Of the effect (notice timer effect) is different. Therefore, among the above-described count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of occurrence of a plurality of count displays is high in one effect pattern (variation effect), In some cases, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, so that it is expected that the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notification timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern in comparison with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effects appear (the ratio at which the notice-side timer effect is determined to be executed in the preview lottery) is set to be high. In other words, in this case, only a large hit expectation is required for one notice-side timer effect to be won in the notice lottery, and two timer effects (variable-side timer effect and notice-side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the production effect of the double timer can be realized without needlessly increasing the jackpot expectation.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol change start process is a count change pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is directed, and the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is directed. In this example, the mode of the count display (the form and color of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the count display mode of the variable timer effect (variable count effect display) is confirmed. By recognizing the easiness of the notice timer effect to appear, coupled with the fact that the appearance ratio of the notice timer effect is made different depending on which count variation pattern is performed, You can expect it.

  Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice timer effect (notice count effect display), regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable timer effect (variable side effect) It may be different from (or different from at least one of) the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display, or may be the same as the same mode (or at least one of them). .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (the notice count display effect) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect to be directed. This is useful for improving the sense of expectation by making the player recognize that a notice timer effect that is set at a high degree is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). Regarding the common mode as the notice timer effect (notice count display), a plurality of modes (for example, a blue count and a red count) having different degrees of expectation are prepared, and any one of them is executed. You may do so.

  Further, in order to be able to more appropriately recognize that the notice-side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice-side timer effect is executed, and a count display when the variable-side timer effect is executed, It is desirable to make the counting speed different (for example, the speed at which the number changes in counting up or counting down). In such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during a period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and the fluctuation-side timer effect having a relatively low degree of expectation is compared with the timer effect. Can be given an interest in which of the notice side timer effects with high expectations is being executed, and the entertainment of the game during the timer consumption period can be suitably maintained.

  At this time, in the variable-side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed relatively close to (or the same as) the count speed of the advance-timer timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( Cut-in) and a mode in which the count is displayed at a speed relatively not close to the count speed of the notice timer effect (conversation notice), whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. Can be made interesting by making the difficulty of the judgment different. Also, in the variable-side timer effect (or the notice-side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice-side timer effect (or the change-side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count display may be performed by displaying.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the fluctuating timer effect and the count display of the notice timer effect are performed simultaneously, it is easy to determine whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed on the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation-side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total count or time required for digesting all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is obtained, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, and the count display of the variation timer effect and the notice timer are performed. By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the effect count display different (for example, the larger the total count is more likely to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the notice timer effect is being executed is different. To make it interesting

  In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (the effect target of the timer effect, the reach effect, and the Although the contents of the production are the same, the production timings are different, but the production timing pattern (starting or ending timing of the count display (total number of counts or the time required for all counts)) is different. (The same effect type is used for each effect pattern) and a plurality of different change patterns may be prepared and made to correspond one-to-one.

  In addition, even if the number of displayed counts (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect are made different or the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable-side timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed, thereby giving an interest. .

  In addition, if the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect is executed with a count-up display, so that whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed can be definitely determined. It is expected to greatly improve the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, while the notice-side timer effect is executed in a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice) is executed in a count-up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for cut-in) is executed with the countdown display, it is difficult to determine whether or not the notice timer effect has been executed depending on the production target, and it is interesting. Can be granted.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is produced for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, and cases where different effects are produced. To control. When the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed to the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, the effect is different from the case where different effects are targeted for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect. Even if it is set so that the rate at which the jackpot expectation decreases becomes high, and even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be produced for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is set as the target for the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, one of the change-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect is first given a predetermined numerical value. Since the count display is terminated and the other count display is continued, at this point, it is as if the effect is a different effect (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). Looks like). Then, after that, since the other count display which has been continued reaches a predetermined numerical value in a manner in which it is clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed, the process is terminated. Even if it is revealed by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation preview with relatively low expectation is to be produced, a different production that can appear later is regarded as a production target ( The timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation), and it is expected to improve the game entertainment while maintaining the expectation.

  Also, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is to be directed in the variable-side timer effect and the notice-side timer effect, the timing at which the variable-side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice-side timer effect It is desirable that separate count end indications (for example, “successful count!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) appear at the timing of reaching the numerical value.

  More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and a notice-side timer effect, each of which is directed to a “conversation notice” performed as a variable-side or notice-side effect, appear in one effect pattern. Then, in this case, the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the notice-side timer effect respectively proceed at the same time, but in the variable-side timer effect, the variable-side effect is related to the “conversation notice”. While the count display progresses in accordance with the fluctuating side specific production that occurs (such as “Successful count!” Or an effect that coincides with the appearance of a conversation announcement), the announcement timer production creates The count display is made in accordance with the noticer-specific effect ("Chance UP!", A timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) which occurs as the noticer effect. By proceeding, separate count end corresponding displays are respectively made to appear at different timings.

  By the way, it is required that the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are always executed when they are set as the effect targets of the variable timer effect (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, if the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when the effect is to be directed to the variable timer effect. It is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effect to be the production target of the variable-side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variable effect), and only by executing the effect pattern, the variable-side timer effect and the effect target are determined. It is desirable that each of the effects (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) be allowed to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to perform control so that an effect (an aspect having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the effect is always selected in the preliminary lottery when the variable timer effect is executed. .

  If the production of the conversation announcement and cut-in is not included in the production of the variable-side timer production, it is determined whether or not to appear as the production content of the preliminary announcement in the preliminary lottery described later. A determination is made as to in what form (relatively high or low expectation) as the effect content on the side, and the appearance control is performed based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expected degree) to the probability of a certain change when a specific effect pattern appears, the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the like. become.

  Then, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable-side timer effect) are prepared as selectable effect patterns associated with the variation numbers. In this case, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the hit in the hit determination. At this time, when the big hit determination has been won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate at which the start timing or the end timing of the count display is delayed is increased, whereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The tendency is for the probability that a big hit symbol appears to be higher as the time becomes slower.

  As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, an effect pattern that is set so that the variable timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol change is selected in this manner, what kind of notice effect is performed during the execution period of the effect pattern. In such a case, it is determined whether or not to additionally execute (combination) (preliminary lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description regarding the automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly described.

  2. Description of the Related Art In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from speakers in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, there are some reach that should improve the player's expectation, and others that output various sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding predetermined default. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be able to be assigned to the vacant channel due to the channel assignment. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize various sound effects because it was not possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose of realizing various sound effects by effectively utilizing the available channels to enhance the interest of the player is to make the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 a pair of upper speakers 573 (sounds). Output means) and the respective sounds to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) are dynamically allocated and managed, while the number of combinations of sounds to be output is determined by the number of each channel. When the number of channels exceeds the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment), each channel is dynamically allocated to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output through each dynamically allocated channel within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 119 (A) and 119 (B) each show an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison object with the present embodiment. FIG. 119 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned to each reproduction channel to be used in advance. Here, as to the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

  In the illustrated “notification sound 1” to “button press sound”, it is assumed that the sound whose reproduction has started must not be silenced in the middle of the reproduction until the end of the reproduction. As a channel assignment method, a pair of a reproduction channel and a sound is exclusively assigned to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted. As a channel assignment method, assignment is made to the same channel so as to minimize the reproduction timing.

  In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the output sound is muted and a new sound is output. For a sound that would cause a problem when overwritten, an independent channel is assigned, or a sound whose playback timing does not overlap is assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of the reproduction channel number, the left and right pan initial value, the upper and lower pan initial value, the volume initial value, the sound number, the reproduction type setting and the output type setting are managed for each sound division and sound name. I have. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description is omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of the reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the game state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the gaming state, and the gaming state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced when trying to reproduce it. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 122 (A) to 122 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 122 (A), as the gaming state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “stop of left symbol”, “stop of right symbol”, “stop of middle symbol”, and “big hit” The game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the “first half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 122 (C), a start sound is awarded during the reproduction time of “first half notice A” as a new sound (“hold” in the drawing). 119B), the “holding winning sound” is assigned in advance to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “first half announcement A”, as shown in FIG. 119 (B). Is overwritten with the hold winning sound, and the output of the “first half notice A” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 122 (C), a start sound is awarded as a new sound during the reproduction time of “full screen notice” (“Hold” in the drawing). 119B), the “holding prize sound” is assigned to the same reproduction channels 14 and 15 as the “full screen preview” as shown in FIG. 119 (B). Is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound is stopped (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 123 (A) and FIG. 123 (B) each show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the above-described sound control using the fixed channel, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel indicates that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated in accordance with a rule described later (see above). "Sound control by automatic channel method".

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used similarly to the sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the “reproduction channel” in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of assignment of a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rule, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one channel is required when outputting in monaural. Become.

  Regarding the “notification sound 1” to “button press sound” shown in the figure, the sound whose reproduction has been started must not be silenced on the way no matter what until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, for the “normal BGM” to “holding winning sound” shown in the drawing, there is no problem if the sound whose reproduction has been started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and then muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter, abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined in the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier for specifying a specific AUTO group and a priority (priority) can be specified in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, if a free channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

  In the above case, when there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no free channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for implementing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in the automatic channel system, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by a fixed channel, a left / right pan initial value, a vertical pan initial value, a volume initial value, Instead of the sound number, the playback type setting and the output type setting, an identifier and a priority (also referred to as “playback priority”) for specifying an AUTO group, a left / right pan initial value, an up / down pan initial value, a volume initial value, a sound It manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings, and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group of the plurality of AUTO groups in which each sound is to be reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced simultaneously. This priority indicates that the sound should be reproduced with higher priority as the numerical value is higher, while the sound should be reproduced without priority as the numerical value is lower. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, a notification sound having a priority of “25” (“information sound 1”, “information sound 2”, and “information sound 3”) Sound effect (“big hit decision sound” and “button press sound”) with priority “20”, BGM with priority “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and priority “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first-half notice sound effect" to "second-half notice sound effect"), and hold winning sound with priority "01" And Thus, in a state where there is no available channel, for example, when an attempt is made to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce the notification sound using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having the lower priority (for example, the hold winning sound) ) Is reproduced with priority using the channel on which the information is reproduced.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker (the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L). For example, when “0x80” is set, the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L are output. The difference between the sound volumes output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  As described above, the initial values of the upper and lower pans are, for example, the upper and lower values of the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the lower speaker 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be determined, for example, within a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. In addition, “1” is added to the third byte (0x1FF for 0xFF). ) Is set so that it is not affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it is always played back at the volume set at the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents a reproduction start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set in each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A effect sound”, while “second half notice A effect sound” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "sound". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such a seek point, the number of sounds that can be registered exceeds the maximum number that can be registered.

  The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the gaming state, the playback sound, and the priority. The time axis which is the horizontal axis indicates the gaming state, and the gaming state is, for example, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “middle symbol stop”, and “big hit middle”. ]. On the other hand, the vertical axis indicates the (playback) priority, and indicates that the (playback) priority increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 126A and 126B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), in the game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis, “first half of fluctuation”, “second half of fluctuation”, “left symbol stop”, “right symbol stop”, “medium symbol stop”, and “ The game is controlled to be "big hit".

  In the “first half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction” is reproduced all the time in the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponding to range A). At this point, when the start winning is awarded (corresponding to the "hold winning" shown), and the hold winning sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since the reserved winning sound can be reproduced by using the reproduction channels 12 and 13, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to "reserved sound reproduction" in the figure). Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced all the time on reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( (Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, when a start winning prize (corresponding to “holding prize winning” in the drawing) is present and a new prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. The output of all other types of sounds continues without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the winning prize sound (corresponding to “holding sound reproduction” shown).

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” in the drawing) is further generated after that, so that the notification sound with the highest priority “25” as a new sound ( Attempting to reproduce the “report 2” shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, at the start timing, the sound having the lowest priority is searched for among the sounds being reproduced, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the hold winning sound having the lowest priority of “01”. In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above. However, the priority (25) of the notification sound to be reproduced next (corresponding to “notification sound 2” in the drawing) is Since the priority order of the reserved prize sound is higher than the priority (01), the reserved prize sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. The work information for automatic channel control includes, as a work name, a setting reservation flag, a requested sound number, a sound number being reproduced, an automatic allocation group, a priority at the time of automatic allocation, an elapsed time since registration, and a volume control for each channel. And a pan control work, and have respective information corresponding thereto.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The request sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced if “−1” is stopped and other than “−1”.

  In the automatic assignment group, channels are fixedly assigned when the value is "0", while channels are automatically assigned when the value is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, “1” indicates the AUTO group 1 and “2” indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic assignment represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method described later.

  The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time since the registration of the desired reproduction sound as “0”. The elapsed time since the registration is the same as the priority at the time of automatic assignment, when a new sound is to be reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority are being reproduced, Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, the sound reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and deleted.

  The volume control work stores a volume value (volume value) of a sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described set values of the left and right pans and the up and down pans.

  FIG. 128 shows an example of an empty channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel method. In FIG. 128, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

  When there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program checks the automatic allocation group related to the new sound (step S1102A). If the automatic allocation group is “0”, the allocation is fixed. , And playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

  On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than “0”, the effect control program determines that automatic allocation is performed, and determines whether the new sound corresponds to a monaural channel (step S1106A). .

  When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (one channel) (step S1108A). ) While the reproduction of the new sound is started on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduction sound of the same or lower priority than the priority of the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced is started. It is determined whether a channel exists (step S1110A).

  The rendering control program terminates the process when there is no channel of the reproduction sound equal to or lower than the priority order of the new sound in such a reproduced (monaural) channel, while ending the processing if it exists. Determines whether there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1112A).

  When there are a plurality of the corresponding channels, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time since the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel (step S1114A). On the other hand, when there is one corresponding channel and there is only one corresponding channel, the effect control program starts reproduction of the new sound on a (monaural) channel satisfying a desired condition (step S1116A).

  On the other hand, when the effect control program determines in step S1106A that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there is a vacant (stereo) channel (two channels) (step S1106A). S1120A). If the effect control program determines that there is an empty channel, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition and starts the reproduction of the new sound (step S1122A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty channel, the effect control program determines whether or not a (Stereo) channel of the sound being played back has the same or lower priority as the new sound (step S1). In step S1124A), if there is no sound, the process is terminated, and the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, when the effect control program exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

  The effect control program starts outputting the new sound on a (stereo) channel satisfying a desired condition when a plurality of corresponding channels do not exist. Based on the elapsed time from the registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from the registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

  As described above, the production control program searches for an empty channel to reproduce a new sound. The process of searching for such an empty channel will be described in a more easily understood manner.

  FIGS. 129 (A) and 129 (B) to 132 (A) and 132 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 129 (A), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a normal BGM reproduction request having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the effect control program searches for an available channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_A having a priority of 05, and searches for available channels 02 to 03. , The reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request of a button press sound having a priority order of 20 is generated, and searches the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a free space, the reproduction of the button press sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_B having a priority of 05, and searches for a reproduction channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in .about.07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_B is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 06 to 07.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the jackpot determined sound having the priority order of 20, and makes the reproduction channels 08 to 09 the reproduction channels. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the jackpot determined sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08-09.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the sound effect of the first-half notice_C having a priority of 05, and searches for an available channel. Since there is a vacancy among the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and makes the reproduction channels 12 to 13 search. Since there is an empty space, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the production control program searches for an available channel when a reproduction request for the notification sound 3 having the priority order of 25 is generated, and sets the reproduction channels 14 to 15 to Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  FIGS. 133 (A) and 133 (B) to 136 (A) and 136 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 133 (A), the production control program searches for an available channel when a reproduction request of a reach BGM having a priority order of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (B), the production control program searches for an available channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 1 having the priority order 25 is generated, and the available reproduction channels 02 to 03 become available. Because of the presence, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

  After repeating the above-described processing, the effect control program, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), triggers the reproduction request of the full-screen preview sound having the priority of 10 to generate an empty channel. Is searched, and since there is an empty space in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full screen preview sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the notification sound 1 having the priority order of 25, and FIG. As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to “non-reproduction (vacancy)” in the drawing), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 3 having the priority order 25 is generated, and performs a reproduction channel 04 to 05 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacancy)” shown in the figure, reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce the accessory notice sound having the priority order of 10, and searches for reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is an empty space, reproduction of the accessory announcement sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 and 13.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the production control program searches for an available channel upon the occurrence of a request to reproduce a hold winning sound having a priority of 01, and performs reproduction channel 14 to 15 ( Since there is a vacancy in the “non-reproduction (vacancy)” in the figure, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the production control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request of the notification sound 2 having the priority order 25 is generated, but no free channel exists. Therefore, the use of the reproduction channels 14 to 15 that reproduce the “hold winning prize sound” having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being reproduced is stopped, and the reproduction channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. The reproduction of the notification sound 2 as the desired sound is started.

  In this way, each of the sounds to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a reproduction channel having a low priority is searched for in accordance with the priority of the sound. Will be reproduced on the reproduction channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the unused channels be effectively used as described above, but also the sounds to be output can be increased as much as possible using the channels including the empty channels. Since it can be reproduced, various sound effects can be realized and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B) to 138 (A) and 138 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the empty channel search processing. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request of a left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are empty. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (B), the production control program searches for an empty channel when a reproduction request for a right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and searches for an empty channel in the reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the production control program searches for a free channel when a reproduction request for a medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 is issued, and performs reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the production control program searches for a vacant channel when a reproduction request of the jackpot BGM having the priority order of 15 occurs, and searches for a vacant channel in the reproduction channels 00 to 01. , The reproduction of the big hit BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

  In addition, when the replacement reproduction of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain reproduction channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound reproduced before the replacement in the reproduction channel after the completion of the reproduction. It goes without saying that this may be done.

[12-3. Variation of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the case where the sound control by the automatic channel method is performed using all the reproduction channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sound control may be performed as follows by a combination or the like.

  FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (F) are diagrams each showing a variation example of channel assignment in sound control by the above-described two types of channel systems or a combination thereof.

  FIG. 139 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the fixed channel method for the maximum number of channels (16 channels) described above as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) shows this example. This corresponds to the embodiment of the present invention described above, and shows an example of channel assignment when sound control is performed by an automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels. Since the sound control based on these two channel assignments has been described, a detailed description will be omitted.

  FIG. 139 (C) shows an embodiment in which sound control is performed by the automatic channel method by allocating channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups (corresponding to “PTN2” in the drawing). . FIG. 139 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels, and sound control is performed on some of the reproduction channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN3” in the figure).

  FIG. 139 (E) shows an embodiment in which channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed on some of the playback channels by the above-described fixed channel method. (Corresponding to “PTN4” in the figure). Note that a specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 139 (F) shows an example in which one automatic channel group is used to allocate channels for the maximum number of reproduction channels, and the sound is controlled by the automatic channel method. Control is performed, but is different from the above-described example in that the number of channels is ensured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. Note that a specific example of the channel method shown in FIG. 139 (F) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the present embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel method in which all channels are grouped into one group, the assignment of empty channels or the replacement of channels being output is performed based on a pre-specified criterion. The sound can be output only by deciding the priority order. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method of outputting sound by designating a channel, it is not necessary to manage the channel, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. Becomes

  In addition, by adopting the automatic channel system, the number of channels can be minimized. For example, a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels can be employed, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by automatic channel method]
Subsequently, details of another embodiment of the above-described sound control method will be described. In the above-mentioned sound control method, the automatic channel method dynamically changes the sound assignment to each channel so that the available channels can be effectively used to reproduce many sounds. In diversifying recent gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, so that sound source management may be complicated.

  In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in a superimposed manner, it is possible to repeatedly execute a notice effect or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), the sound is divided into a plurality of groups, and the plurality of sounds and the reproduction channels are dynamically assigned to each group, so that the sounds are surely duplicated. can do. In addition, there is an advantage that management is facilitated by dividing sounds by type.

  Further, the sound includes a sound to be output in preference to the effect sound, such as a notification sound, and a sound that is continuously output, such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), a sound that is output in priority or a sound that is always output is output in a fixed channel manner, and a sound that changes according to the result of the start winning or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

  With the configuration described above, it is possible to effectively utilize unused channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from being generated by the fixed channel method. In addition, since it is possible to classify by sound type such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, management of effect data is facilitated.

  The sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 139 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel method and multiple automatic channel methods are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in sound source control is set to 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by a fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by an automatic channel method. . Channels for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

  The channel configuration table includes “automatic allocation” indicating whether or not to perform automatic allocation to the channel number, “division” indicating a group to which each channel belongs, and “use purpose” of each channel. Note that “remarks” are added to the configuration table shown in FIG. 140 as a supplement.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the configuration of each channel in this embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are fixed channel systems. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

  The automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 8 to 19 are “AUTO group 1”, and the automatic channel type channels from channel numbers 24 to 29 are “AUTO group 2”.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment can output sound in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

  The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “channel 0” and each channel is represented by “channel” + “channel number”) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting a sound commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, the sound is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

  Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or while waiting for a customer. Channel 3 is a channel paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channels 4 and 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channels 5 and 7 are channels that are paired with channels 4 and 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sound quality of BGM is improved by outputting not only a stereo output but also a plurality of sounds at the same time. Therefore, a plurality of (pair) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output simultaneously. Further, as described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs simultaneously using up to eight channels (four pairs). Has become.

  While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is set to the fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the sound is reproduced only by the automatic channel method, while preventing the generation of the empty channel.

  Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing a sound output when a notice effect is executed. In the announcement effect, the sound selected by the lottery is output each time according to the result of the fluctuation display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. As described above, for the sound output every time based on the predetermined condition, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels for outputting the sound at the time of the announcement effect is AUTO group 1.

  When outputting a sound at the time of performing the notice effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, two empty channels are searched, and a continuous channel is set as an output channel in principle. At this time, if an empty channel exists, the setting is made so that the designated sound is output from the empty channel. On the other hand, if there is no free channel, the channel being used is released and a new sound is output or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure of channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output in an effect other than the notice effect output in the automatic channel system.

  The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, like the channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. The channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the hold sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 is, for example, a sound that is output without depending on the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound that is output with priority such as when a big hit is confirmed. Note that sounds based on the lottery result at the time of the start winning are output from the channels 24 to 29 as described later.

  Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel system is applied. In the channels 24 to 29, a sound output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the time of starting winning and a sound output when the hold display changes at the start of the fluctuation are reproduced. By outputting the channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel manner, it is possible to output the sound at the time of determining the big hit without fail even if there are no empty channels in the channels 24 to 29, thereby attracting the player's attention. Can be.

  Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are the channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. In addition, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. As described above, the fixed channel method in which the output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound relating to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality are reliably transmitted to the outside.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is allocated when output is constantly continued as in BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably as in abnormal alarm sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method for sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, etc., it is possible to prevent the sound from being output while a vacant channel is generated, and to set a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search processing]
Next, a procedure for searching for a free channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a vacant channel search process when the control for outputting a sound according to the present embodiment is performed. Although FIG. 128 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 141 is different in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of the common processing is omitted.

  In the empty channel search processing shown in FIG. 141, in the processing of steps S1108B and S1120B, if the new sound is of the automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not an empty channel exists in the channels of the same group. That is, if there is no vacancy in the same channel group even if channels in different groups are vacant, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is “No”.

  Further, in the empty channel search process shown in FIG. 141, when there is no empty channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step S1118B, Step S1132B). Hereinafter, the conditions for selecting a channel whose sound reproduction is to be stopped will be described with reference to FIG. The effect in which the output of the sound is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a condition for selecting a channel whose sound output is to be replaced (sound reproduction is stopped or released) when no channel is available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. . As specific selection conditions, attributes of a sound being reproduced and a new sound are compared, and a sound having a higher importance is given priority. The attributes include, as described below, the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound being played, and the like. It also includes the remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

  Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 128, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time since the start of the reproduction in this way, the output of the effect sound that has been sufficiently executed is ended, and the player can easily recognize that a new effect has been executed.

  Condition 2 selects a channel based on the reproduction time of the entire effect. For example, an effect with a long playback time can be an effect with a high expectation, so an effect with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling an effect with a long reproduction time, the effect on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the preset total playback time regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

  The condition 1 and the condition 2 are conditions relating to the reproduction time. However, other than this, for example, sound output of an effect with a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Alternatively, the channel may be selected in accordance with the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction with respect to the entire production time, that is, the progress ratio of the production. By setting the conditions in this way, the output of the sound can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the effect.

  Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a sound with a large volume is output may be an effect with a higher degree of importance. Therefore, a channel in which the volume of the output sound is low is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel having a large volume of output sound may be preferentially selected to cause the player to recognize that a new effect is to be performed.

  Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in volume of a sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect with a higher degree of importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. Conversely, a channel with a large volume change may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change (panpot) of a sound image localization position. For example, as an effect that produces a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sound of the stereo speaker can be a more important effect, consider a channel with a small change in the dynamic sound image localization position. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel having a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

  Condition 6 selects a channel based on a sound number (index). For example, a large (small) sound number is selected. At this time, a priority may be associated with the sound number.

  Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected on the assumption that an effect that is output as a high-quality stereo sound has a higher degree of expectation. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of vacant channels is insufficient even if the channel for outputting monaural sound is opened, a channel for outputting stereo sound is selected to increase the number of vacant channels. It may be.

  Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that volume adjustment cannot be performed may have higher importance, or an effect set so that volume adjustment may be performed may have higher importance.

  In addition to the conditions described above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a request for reproducing a new sound may be discarded without changing channels. Also, by assigning a unique priority to all sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

  In the table shown in FIG. 142, conditions 1 to 8 are shown as an example, but these conditions may be applied alone or a combination of a plurality of conditions may be applied. For example, a threshold may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Subsequently, an example will be described in which control is performed to assign channels based on the priority assigned to newly output sounds. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first-half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the change will be described. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining sound control according to the present embodiment. ing. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of the priority order of the sound effects in the effect example of the present embodiment.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 143, the first-half notice _A occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. At this time, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first-half notice_B is generated. Further, the first-half notice C is generated while the first-half notice_A and the first-half notice_B are being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the priority of the first-half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first-half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first-half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set in the first-half notice _B and the first-half notice _C, when a low-priority notice effect is repeatedly performed in the same group, the volume is set based on the suppression volume value. Reduced.

  Explaining the content of each notice, the first notice _A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears. The character appears on the display screen, and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

  The first-half notice _B is an effect executed by operating the effect button. When the button is operated, a button press sound is reproduced (channels 18 and 19), and the first-half notice _B is started, and the effects are stereoscopically output from channels 10 and 11. A sound is output.

  In the first-half notice_C, the display of the screen is stopped for a predetermined time together with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), and a sound having a lower priority than the first-half notice_C, specifically, another notice effect and BGM are temporarily displayed. Is muted (blackout production). Thereafter, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first-half notice_C is resumed.

  Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each announcement effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the effect sound in the first half variation of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume (volume).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started at time t0, and at time t1, the first-half notice_A is started. At this time, the effect sound effect of the first-half notice_A is output at a preset volume V_A.

  After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button press sound of the effect button is reproduced by the volume V_T, and the effect sound of the first-half notice_B is output by the volume V_B. Since the priority of the first-half notice_B is higher than the first-half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

  It should be noted that the volume does not have to be lowered when the priority of the notice effect performed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the notice effect being executed, or when the sound effect output at the same time is small. You do not need to lower the volume. Also, the volume may be reduced only in the case of a combination of specific notice effects.

  Further, when the first-half notice C is executed at time t3, the screen darkens until time t5, and sound effects other than the first-half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first-half notice_C is output with the volume V_C.

  The effect sound effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B that have been muted from time t3 are restarted at time t5. The button press sound is normally output until time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at time t3.

  Thereafter, the effects of the first-half notice _A and the first-half notice _B are continued until a preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first-half notice_C ends, and the first half of the change ends.

  During the period in which the effect sound is muted, the output of the effect sound may be continued with the volume being set to 0, or the output of the effect sound may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub-volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume for controlling the volume of the effect sound effect may be set to 0, and the first-half notice_C output of the sound effect May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even in the state where the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first-half notice_C, sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds with higher priorities are output.

  As described above, when lowering the volume of the sound being played by outputting a new sound, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag, etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is reduced. The volume may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being reproduced on the same channel in the channel system (fixed channel system, automatic channel system) may be lowered. Further, the volume of a sound being reproduced on a channel in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, a sound having a higher priority can be output with priority. The sound with a high priority is, for example, a sound such as a notification sound or a warning sound for surely transmitting to a player or an employee of a game hall, or a player who has a high expectation that a result of a variable display will be a big hit, and Sound effect to increase the sense of expectation, or a sound effect that has a high stage effect and can enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily manage the effect data related to the effect sound by classifying the channels used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups. As a result, it is possible to improve development efficiency, such as by suppressing the occurrence of bugs due to systematic tests. Also, by enabling a stable game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group (AUTO group 1) that outputs a sound effect of a notice effect, and a group (AUTO group 2) that outputs a sound effect related to hold. The number of sound effects of the notice effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sounds can be reproduced simultaneously and simultaneously. In particular, in the first half of the change, it is possible that the output of the effect sound exceeding the number of allocated channels is required, for example, by performing the advance notice of the pending change together with the notice of the change. In such a case, the effect of the game can be maximized by outputting the effect sound with a lower priority in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1 while exchanging the effect sound with a higher priority. .

  Further, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect effect sound with the change of the hold display of the fluctuation display can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and is desirably executed reliably. . In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound related to such a hold display (hold sound) from a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce independently of the notice effect related to the variable display. it can. Also, unlike the case of the announcement effect in the variable display, the output of the effect effect sound is stopped because the number of effect sound effects output simultaneously does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to the AUTO group 2. Is less likely to be. Further, even in the case of being stopped, the output of the effect sound effect having the lower priority is merely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing an effect with a high effect of increasing the expectation of the player.

  In the present embodiment, channels to which the automatic channel system is applied and channels to which the fixed channel system is applied are mixed. As described above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are used effectively by searching for available channels, and priority is given to directing effects and sound with high importance by setting priority. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied to a case where sound is continuously output like BGM or a case where sound is preferentially output in order to notify a malfunction of a game machine or an illegal act. As described above, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and use of the sound, each channel can be effectively used, and furthermore, appropriate control can be performed in accordance with the output state of the sound. For example, in the control for outputting BGM, it is sufficient to output a sound to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the game state. In the control for outputting an alarm sound, a specified channel is searched without searching for an empty channel. Output the sound directly to the On the other hand, in the automatic channel method, as described above, the available channels can be utilized to the maximum extent, and a sound having a high effect can be output with priority.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute an effect with a high priority. Further, the effect under execution can be continued without decreasing the volume without interruption. At this time, the volume can be returned to the original volume as long as the low-priority effect that has been executed is continuing even after the high-priority effect ends. Further, as described in the embodiment, by stopping other effects and executing a specific effect alone, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized. In this manner, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

[15-2. Modified example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers. A modified example in which the number of channels set and the number of channels set to the fixed channel method are variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of executing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of (for example, 9) and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of an effect in a modification of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 146 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the occurrence of the reach.

  In this modified example, the display screen is divided into nine parts, and an effect of displaying different scenes on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and an effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output simultaneously. The selection of the scene may be based on a lottery or may be selected by a player.

  The gaming machine of this modification uses 32 channels in sound source control as in the above-described embodiment. The default channel assignment is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (eight channels) of BGM at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in the present modification, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM simultaneously. Therefore, in the present modification, channels for outputting BGM are reallocated, and the arrangement of the channels is rearranged.

[15-2-2. Channel arrangement]
FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration table of a reproduction channel in sound source control according to a modified example of the present embodiment. FIG. 147A illustrates a default configuration, and FIG. The default configuration in FIG. 147 (A) is the same as the arrangement shown in FIG. 140 as described above.

  In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 147 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 147 (B). Specifically, a fixed channel type channel for outputting BGM is added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels to which the automatic channel method assigned to the AUTO group 1 is adopted is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different announcement effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

  After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGMs corresponding to each scene are reproduced while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGMs are output at a normal volume, the volume will be too high. Therefore, the output is performed at a volume lower than normal. When a scene is selected, an announcement effect (second half announcement) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to a normal volume, and the reproduction of the other BGM is ended. . When the player selects a scene, for example, a screen divided by an operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected, and the BGM of the selected scene is changed to another scene until the scene is determined. The volume may be set larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of another scene may be set smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing an example of a volume change of the effect sound in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, where (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound. Is shown.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of the change), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 147 (B)). )). After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), reach occurs and the second half fluctuation starts. After the start of the second half change, a multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 146, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display areas, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

  When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the multi-screen effect arrangement (FIG. 147 (B)) is output. At this time, the output is performed at a volume V_2 smaller than the normal volume V_1.

  Thereafter, when a scene to continue the effect is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, a display area corresponding to scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and further, a second-half notice_5 corresponding to scene 5 is executed.

  After the end of the multi-screen effect, the channels for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the arrangement of the channels may be returned to the default. When the output of the BGM from the channels 10 and 11 is continued as in the present modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next change.

  Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at a necessary timing. For example, in the present modified example, the channel arrangement may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the second half change.

  Furthermore, instead of changing the channel arrangement according to the effect content, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, an effect mode such as a big hit state, a time saving state, or a background change) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to “variable fixed channel” in FIG. 139 (F)) for performing sound control using the fixed channel method and the number of automatic channels for performing sound control using the automatic channel method (see FIG. 139 (F) corresponding to the “variable AUTOch”) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to set a state in which more notification sounds, BGMs, or sound effects can be reproduced depending on the situation. Or the number of BGMs and sound effects to be reproduced in the effect by increasing the number of reproducible notification sounds can be flexibly dealt with.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and sounds to be output are managed by associating the sounds with the groups. In addition, when the number of sounds that can be simultaneously assigned in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being generated is stopped based on a predetermined condition to output a new sound, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the output sound belonging to the same group has been described. Here, a case will be described in which, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, control such as changing the volume of the sound being output on another channel is performed.

  After the special symbol starts to change, in a state before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the BGM during reproduction and the output of the sound by other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time together with the output of the predetermined sound effect. As a typical effect for performing such control, there is a blackout effect for regulating the output of sound effects and darkening the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the output of the sound effect has been regulated, the darkness of the screen is released, and the output of the sound by the BGM or another effect is restarted, so that the newly output sound (the sound ), The player's attention can be drawn, and the player's expectation of the fluctuation can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output, instead of deallocating a channel to which a sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume (volume) may be returned without considering processing such as reassigning a sound to a channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In the present embodiment, channels are grouped, and a priority is set for each group. Then, a case where a sound is output on a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority and a sound is newly output on a channel belonging to a group having a higher priority will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table for each channel group]
FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example of a channel group-by-channel volume control table indicating the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, each channel is defined as a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). 3 divided into five groups.

  For each group, a group volume priority and a suppression volume value are set. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, one or more numerical values are set, and “1” has the highest priority.

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another sound being reproduced when the sound is being reproduced on a channel belonging to a group having a lower priority. Specifically, when “−1” is set, the sound reproduction is continued without changing other sounds being reproduced. If “0” is set, control is performed so that other sounds being reproduced are muted. When a numerical value other than “0” is set, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of another sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit being%. Note that a value larger than 100 may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

  Further, with reference to FIG. 149, each set value will be described. In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, fixed channel type and automatic channel type channels are mixed. In the fixed channel, a sound such as a notification sound or BGM that is output with priority or constantly output is assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type of effect and the degree of importance are assigned.

  In the fixed channel 1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when a sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced in the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying a player or an employee of a game arcade to the outside as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the gaming machine, or a notification sound such as a clogged ball. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed channel 1, the output of the effect sound and the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output because of the cause of the occurrence of the wrongdoing or the failure. While the notification sound is being output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having relatively lower priority is restricted.

  In the fixed channel 2, the group volume priority in FIG. 149 is set to “4”, which is the lowest. In addition, since “−1” is set as the suppression volume value, even if the reproduction of the sound is started on the fixed channel 2, other sounds being reproduced are not affected. The sound reproduced in the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in a game, and in a normal game, a staging sound effect that draws the player's attention in response to execution of a special symbol fluctuating display while the BGM is output, and the like. Is output.

  In the AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to “2”. In addition, since “0” is set as the suppression volume value, when a sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed channel 1 are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone.

  Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot determination sound, a blackout sound effect, a V winning sound, and the like as shown in the reference reproduction sound. The big hit determination sound is a sound that informs that the result of the variable display becomes a big hit at a predetermined timing such as a start winning prize, and is a production effect sound that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V prize sound is a sound that informs that a game ball has won a prize in the V zone and that, for example, a transition to a high probability state has been confirmed. Like the big hit determination sound, the expectation of the player has been greatly improved. Can be done.

  The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-described blackout effect is executed, and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display of the effect screen is also darkened. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen together with the output of the blackout sound effect may be executed. The jackpot determination sound and the V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds in order to prevent the player from overlooking the output of these sounds. Is resumed. On the other hand, in the blackout effect sound, the player's attention is concentrated on the blackout effect by keeping the effect sound of another effect not being output for a predetermined time after the blackout effect sound is output. Further, after the execution of the blackout effect, an effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect may be executed in the first half fluctuation, and the corresponding effect may be executed in the second half fluctuation. It may be.

  In the AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to “3”. Further, since “50” is set as the suppression volume value, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the reproduced sounds of the group having the priority of “4” or less are halved (50%). Output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved since the group volume priority is “4” as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that draws the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely silencing the BGM. Specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 include, for example, a first half effect sound and a second half effect sound.

  In the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to “2”. Also, as in the case of the AUTO group 2, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the reproduction of the group having the priority "3" or less is performed. All sounds are halved. For example, when the notice effect sound is output from the AUTO group 2, the volume of the notice effect sound is reduced by half. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been reduced by half, the BGM may be continued without changing the volume, or the volume may be reduced by half (1/4 of the original volume). You may.

  Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a hold change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, a button press sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed, and the like. is there. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same, sound is output as it is at a normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the start winning port, a hold winning sound is output even during execution of the blackout effect.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Next, a procedure of volume control in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound belongs according to the present embodiment. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. Hereinafter, the group volume control processing will be described.

  When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1401). If there is no new sound reproduction request (result of step S1401 is “No”), the processing after step S1420 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and sets a volume control table for each channel group. From FIG. 149, the suppression volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are obtained (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (Step S1403). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), that is, if control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1406 is executed.

  If the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1403 is “No”), that is, if control is performed on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further sets the sound of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processing from step S1406 is executed.

  When the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1404 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The order is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the currently reproduced highest priority sound are recorded.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1406). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced (step S1407). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

  Describing the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is “No”), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

  The sound control executed after step S1410 will be described. If a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced has been registered (result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a new reproduction request. A comparison is made between the group volume priorities of the existing sounds and the group volume priorities held in the work area (step S1411).

  If the group volume priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is lower than the group volume priority already stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a issues the new reproduction request. The volume of the affected sound is reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area (step S1414).

  If the group volume priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is higher than the group volume priority stored in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the new reproduction. The sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound are overwritten in the work area (step S1412), and the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

  Further, if the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is equal to the group volume priority stored in the work area (result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the work area While maintaining the contents, the volume of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). If the group volume priority of the sound being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

  When the processing in steps S1415 and S1416 has been performed on all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing in step S1407 ends, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the suppression volume value and the group volume priority to work. It is determined whether or not the area has been registered (step S1420). If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “No”), this processing ends.

  If the suppression volume value and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a plays back the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether the process has been completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing ends.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. Is deleted (step S1422). Lastly, for all the sounds being reproduced, the volume values are returned to the original volume values determined in advance (steps S1423 and S1424), and this processing ends.

  The above is the processing for controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when reproduction of a new sound is requested in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the sound volume control will be described in time series. FIG. 151 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order, wherein (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 151 illustrates an example in which a notice effect and a blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started, and the normal BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed ch2). As shown in FIG. 149, the fixed channel 2 has a group volume priority of “4” and a suppressed volume value of “−1”. Since the normal BGM has a suppression volume value of “−1”, the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

  When the game ball wins the starting winning opening (the sound output at the time of the holding winning is omitted here), the variation display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first-half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the group volume priority is “3” and the suppression volume value is “50” (results of steps S1402 and S1403 are “No”). . At the start of the first-half announcement, since no parameters have been recorded in the work area (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameters of the effect sound effect of the first-half announcement are recorded in the work area (step S1405).

  At the start of the first-half notice A, normal BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is “Yes”), and the sound number of the effect sound of the first-half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is "Yes"). At this time, the group priority of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is the same as the group priority of the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”). The determined volume value is set (step S1413).

  At this time, since the normal BGM is being reproduced and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half variation (the result of step S1415 is “Yes”), the sound is generated based on the effect sound effect parameter of the first half announcement A. Is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of the normal BGM is reduced (suppressed) to an output of 50%.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “0” (step S1402). At this time, the parameters of the first-half notice A are recorded in the work area, but since the blackout effect has a higher group volume priority (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the contents of the work area are blackout effected. (Step S1412), and set a predetermined volume value to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

  Furthermore, the effect sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A being reproduced have the group priority lower than the blackout effect because the effect sound of the blackout effect is lower than the blackout effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"). Is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, since the suppression volume value is 0, the sound is muted.

  Further, the second-half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second-half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “<”), the second-half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is performed. Is continued until the end.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, a hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the group volume priority is “2” and the suppression volume value is “50”. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained and output with a predetermined volume. Therefore, even when the blackout effect is being executed, the hold winning sound is output as usual.

  When the blackout effect ends (time t26), the parameters of the blackout effect recorded in the work area are erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to a predetermined volume (step S1423). . Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half advance notice A, and the second half advance notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the output of the sound of the first-half notice A and the second-half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while a sound effect with a high group priority is being output, a specific effect can be emphasized by suppressing the output of a sound effect with a low group priority. Furthermore, the volume control based on the suppression volume value allows the player to recognize that a plurality of effects are proceeding at the same time. By setting the priority higher, it is possible to execute the effect without deteriorating the effect.

  In the case where a high-priority sound is newly output and the output of the rendering effect sound being reproduced is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the rendering effect sound being reproduced is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. From the timing at which the sound with the higher priority is output, gradually lowering the volume of the other effect sound to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) so as to fade out Is also good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being reproduced) and the time to reach the target value and the amount of change may be specified, or the target value may be set based on the effect contents such as the length of the effect sound reproduction time. The reaching time and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new effect sound is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the effect sound stand out, or if the output of the new effect sound is relatively long, the target The time to reach the value may be set long to reduce the sense of discomfort that may occur when the effect sound switches.

  For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a jackpot determination sound or a V winning sound, the output of the effect sound during reproduction such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output effect sound more prominent without breaking the game tempo.

  Further, when the output of the new effect sound is terminated and the output of another effect sound is restarted, the volume of the other effect sound is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be defined and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first-half notice A is reproduced. However, when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value, and the start value (the volume of the currently reproduced sound. In this example, the volume is controlled to be 50%), and control is performed so as to fade in based on the specified amount of time and the amount of change. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player's uncomfortable feeling while making the effect sound switching more prominent, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the effect sound has been described as an example. However, the present invention can be similarly applied to the case of a warning sound and a notification sound. As an example, in the case of outputting a notification sound with a high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraud), not only the effect sound but also a notification sound with a relatively low importance (priority). For example, the output of the notification sound of ball clogging may be restricted. On the other hand, if a wrongdoing is performed while a low-priority (priority) notification sound is being output, the output of the high-priority notification sound (alarm) is interrupted. Sound) may be output with priority.

  The output time of the warning sound and the notification sound is not set as in the case of the effect sound, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the warning or the notification is eliminated. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a plurality of types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, a sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, another notification sound is output. . At this time, the next highest priority sound may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output simultaneously.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long / short)]
As described above, the control of the sound that is output repeatedly according to the priority order between the groups has been described. Subsequently, a control example of controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long / short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a volume control table for each sound effect, showing volume (volume) control for each total reproduction time (output time) of sound in the present embodiment. A used reproduction channel (ch), a total reproduction time, and a suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

  The used reproduction channels are divided into five groups of fixed channels 1, fixed channels 2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3, as in the example shown in FIG.

  The total playback time is a time from the start of output of the sound effect to the stop thereof. When the total playback time is set to -1, the effect sound is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by the other sound effects to be output. At this time, control is performed so that the volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed.

  When the total playback time is set to 0, loop playback is repeatedly output, and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. If the value set for the total playback time is any other number (positive number), it is the playback time of the sound effect. The unit of the total reproduction time is millisecond (ms).

  The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating a mode of changing the volume of another simultaneously output sound effect, as in the example shown in FIG. Specifically, in the case of “−1”, the sound reproduction is continued without changing the sound being reproduced, and in the case of “0”, the sound effect being reproduced (− (Except for the sound effect for which 1 is set) is suppressed (silenced). In the case of a numerical value other than “0”, for example, when “50” is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

  Next, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 152. In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, fixed channel type and automatic channel type channels are mixed, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. It is. In the example shown in FIG. 152, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but may be set for each sound effect.

  Since the total playback time is set to “−1” and the suppression volume value is set to “0” for the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 1, when these sound effects are played, the other sound being played is All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced in the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside of a player or an employee of a game arcade or the like, and is a sound effect output due to a fraud or occurrence of a failure. Cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects being reproduced is forcibly suppressed (stopped, muted).

  For the sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2, since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1", the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects do not affect other sounds being reproduced. The sound effect assigned to the fixed channel 2 is mainly BGM in the game.

  The sound effect assigned to the AUTO group 1 has the total playback time set for each sound effect (playback time) and the suppression volume value set to “0”, so that the notification sound is output from the fixed ch1. All currently playing sounds are muted. That is, the sound output in the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the effect, and the other sounds are muted and output alone. As shown in FIG. 149, specific sounds output in the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot determination sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound.

  For the sound effects assigned to the AUTO group 2 and the AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to a value (reproduction time) for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to “50”. When a sound is reproduced, the outputs of all other sounds being reproduced are halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, specific sounds output in the AUTO group 2 that can enhance the effect while continuing the flow of the game by halving the output of the BGM include, for example, the first half effect sound and the second half effect effect. Specific examples of the sound output in the AUTO group 3 include a holding winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the holding display has changed, and a pressing of the effect button. For example, a button press sound to be notified.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effect that is reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effect. FIGS. 153A and 153B are flowcharts illustrating a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect according to the present embodiment. Hereinafter, a procedure of the output control of the sound effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether there is a request to reproduce a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce a new sound (the result of step S1501A is “No”), the processing after step S1530A is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a request to reproduce a new sound (result of step S1501A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound requested to be reproduced, and The suppression volume value and the total playback time are obtained from the control table (FIG. 152) (step S1502A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (no suppression control) (Step S1503A). If the acquired suppression volume value is “−1” (result of step S1503A is “Yes”), that is, if control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processing after step S1506A is executed.

  When the acquired suppression volume value is not “−1” (the result of step S1503A is “No”), that is, when performing control on the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a further performs the control of the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have already been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), the processing after step S1506A is executed.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the group volume priority are not registered (the result of step S1504A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether there is a sound that is already being reproduced (step S1506A). If there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, if there is a sound that is already being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is “Yes”), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1510A.

  The sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the newly requested sound is “−1”. (Step S1510A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is “−1” (result of step S1510A is “Yes”), as described above, an alarm sound at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is output, and the new sound is output. The suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of the effect sound during the other reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a sets a predetermined volume value to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, suppression volume value, and total playback time for which a new playback request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects being reproduced is suppressed, the processing after step S1530A is executed (step S1514A).

  On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is not “−1” (result of step S1510A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is It is determined whether a tone number is set to “−1” or the work area (step S1520A). If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is “−1” or a sound number is not set in the work area (result of step S1520A is “Yes”), the processing from step S1530A is executed.

  If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not “−1” and a sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

  If the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound for which the new reproduction request was made. The number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time are overwritten on the work area (step S1522A).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound requested to be newly reproduced is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (Step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound requested to be newly played is shorter than or equal to the total playback time held in the work area (result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly played is increased. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, if the total playback time of the sound requested to be newly played is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “No”), the volume of the sound requested to be newly played is Then, a volume value reduced based on the suppression volume value of the work area is set (step S1525A).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller than or equal to the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). If the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppression volume value already recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the processing of steps S1526A and S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of step S1530A and thereafter (step S1528A).

  When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time. Is registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total playback time have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “No”), the process ends.

  If the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not has been completed (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area has not been completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), the present process is terminated.

  When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase is performed (step S1532A). Finally, the volume values of all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the predetermined original volume values (step S1533A, step S1534A), and the process ends.

  The above is the processing of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the sound volume control will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 154 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. (A) shows the execution timing of the effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 154 illustrates an example in which the first-half announcement effect and the blackout effect are executed.

  When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the game is started and normal BGM is output. The normal BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to “−1” as shown in FIG. The normal BGM is a loop playback in which the playback is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set in the total playback time. Since the suppression volume value is “−1” (result of step S1503A is “Yes”), the normal BGM parameter is not registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

  After that, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, in order to execute the first half notice A, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first-half notice A is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, and the total reproduction time is set to 15000 ms and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

  At this point, since no parameters have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

  Further, at the start timing of the first-half notice A, the normal BGM is being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), the total reproduction time of the first-half notice A is 15000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and The parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A for which the reproduction request has been made are registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, at this time, the normal BGM is being reproduced, and the volume has not been suppressed yet, so the suppression volume value is “100”, which is larger than the suppression volume value “50” of the first-half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half advance notice A (step S1527A).

  Subsequently, the parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), and the first-half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is “No”). This process ends.

  Thereafter, the blackout effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 1, and the total reproduction time is “8000” and the suppression volume value is “0” (the result of step S1503A is “No”). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first-half notice A have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first-half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

  Further, the total playback time of the blackout effect sound for which a new playback request has been made is “8000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total playback time of the first-half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

  Next, the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first-half notice A held in the work area is “50”, and the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound requested to be newly reproduced is “0” (step The result of S1521A is "Yes"), and the sound number, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" of the blackout effect sound for which the new reproduction has been requested are overwritten on the work area (step S1522A).

  Further, since the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout announcement effect sound effect is shorter than the total playback time (15000 ms) of the effect sound of the first half announcement A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the notice effect sound (step S1524A).

  Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is normally “50” for BGM, “100” for the sound effect of the first-half notice A, and “0” for the suppression volume value of the blackout notice effect sound effect recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is set to “0” (step S1527A).

  Thereafter, during the execution of the blackout effect, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, a new sound reproduction request of a hold winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, and the total playback time becomes "2000" and the suppression volume value becomes "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect have been registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is “Yes”), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the effect sound of the first-half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the sound effects of the normal BGM and the first-half notice A is suppressed.

  Further, the total winning time of the hold winning prize sound for which a new playback request has been made is “2000” (the result of step S1510A is “No”), and the total playing time of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “8000”. (The result of step S1520A is “No”).

  Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound held in the work area is “0” and the suppression volume value of the hold winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is “50” (the result of step S1521A is (“No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playing time (2000 ms; a2) of the hold winning sound is shorter than the total playing time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound (the result of step S1523A is "Yes"), a predetermined volume value is set to the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppression volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “Yes”). Then, even if the output of the hold winning sound ends (time t34), the output of the blackout effect sound is continued because the parameters of the blackout effect sound are recorded in the work area.

  Thereafter, when the blackout effect ends (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area ends (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), and thus the blackout stored in the work area is stopped. The parameters of the effect sound are deleted (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the normal BGM in which the sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the volume of the sound effect of the first-half notice A are returned to the predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM is suppressed during the sound effect reproduction of the first half notice A, but the sound volume returns to the normal volume.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of another sound effect being reproduced is muted, and a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) can be emphasized. Even if the output ends, it is possible to provide a production opportunity to the player. Specifically, if the output of the sound effect is completed during the mute period, the sound effect is output even while the specific effect is executed and the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed. In the case where the output of the sound effect is continued until after the end of the mute period, the execution of the specific effect is emphasized by suppressing the output of the effect sound of the effect during the mute period. be able to.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, when a channel to which sound data is to be allocated has no vacancy (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), a new sound is generated. If the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the undesired sound output form in the effect design may cause a drop in the game entertainment.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the condition for allocating new sound data is satisfied when there are no channels available (the number of empty channels is 0), the pachinko machine 1 is set in advance. By controlling the sound output of lower importance to be selectively discarded based on the priorities that have been set, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output in the production design and to reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment. It was suggested to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to take technical measures in terms of how to make it difficult to show itself when there is no available channel (the number of available channels is 0).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to make it possible to allocate more channel resources to the effect sound (effect sound), various types of output that are not output as long as an appropriate game is played. As for the notification sound of (1), a channel saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying the content of abnormality or the like with only a single channel can be adopted. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel saving type control structure is employed for outputting various notification sounds will be described.

  FIG. 155 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as a channel X and a channel X) of a finite number of prepared channels as various types of notification sounds (payout notification sounds and abnormal notification sounds) except for the effect sound as sound control using a fixed channel method. 3) shows an example of a sound definition table in the case of realizing a process of outputting only a sound definition table. In this sound definition table, for each sound name, the priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting definition are managed. doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the description of the definitions of the other notification sounds and effect sounds is omitted. Note that, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the effect sound is defined by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 124 for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority is a parameter that is used to determine which of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output irrespective of the assignment state of the low priority notification sound to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X has priority, and after the output of the notification sound ends, the notification sound is assigned to channel X and output. Will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers formed by a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right pans during the reproduction of the sound, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) is output, and when set to “0x80”, for example, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when “0xFF” is set, it indicates that the output is performed only from the right speakers (the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R).

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). Indicates the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume separately output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, when set to “0x00”, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, when “0x80” is set, the volume difference individually output from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the pair of lower speakers 921.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of the reproduction, and can be determined, for example, in a setting range from “0x00” to “0xFF”. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) for repeatedly reproducing the target sound, or 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once. Is represented. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 156 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds exemplified in FIG. 155, for each type of the notification sound, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition for terminating the notification (release condition). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a finite notification time is determined for any notification sound. However, this is to use a single channel X as effectively as possible in order to effectively use a single channel X. This is a process for maintaining the state and refraining from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state in which the magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act using a magnet is being performed). It is to notify that there is something. As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism is detected” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “magnetic is detected” ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. As for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism detected” takes 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sound repetitions) from the detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. On the other hand, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the lighting by the various lamps are continued until the release condition of “power on again” is satisfied. Has become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the state in which the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (the possibility that an illegal act due to a sticking action is being performed is high) is high. Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that the player is in the state), and the count sensor 4005 (the first special winning opening sensor or the second large winning opening sensor despite not being in the big hit gaming state (the state in which the special winning opening is opened)). A notification sound that indicates that the detection by the winning port sensor has been performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of winning a game ball by forcibly opening a closed large winning port is performed). 3 (large winning prize abnormal) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has been performed. Regarding the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “buzzer vibration was detected” and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected"), and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and the notification time is detected by the vibration sensor 2405. 60 seconds (equivalent to six repetitions of the notification sound), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and various lamps Will be continued until the release condition “power-on again” is satisfied. In the notification sound 3 (large winning prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a booming big prize abnormality has been detected” and a loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "large winning prize is detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) disposed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (equivalent to six notification sounds) after the detection by the count sensor 4005 is completed, the loop processing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ends. The execution of the display and the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition of “power-on again” is satisfied.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. (It does not have to be the mode). In addition, the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing includes a notification sound 1 such as “bub-boo” that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which the possibility of improper conduct is high). A combination of sequential output of an alarm sound used in any one of the above-mentioned items 3 and a message sound (unique sound) playing a role of notifying individual identification as to the content of the notification is adopted. The audible alarms consist of monotonous sounds to give warning implications in tense fraudulent situations, and the message sounds consist of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alert sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  In other words, when reporting a member belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a wrongdoing has been performed), the hall-side response to the wrongdoing is more difficult than identifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial movement of In this regard, according to the above configuration, a notification sound of "boo-boo" or a lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices) is output, and only those that belong to the first notification group (an illegal action is performed). Since it is possible to recognize that the event has been performed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall to a fraud. Still further, a message sound for notifying which notification type follows the notification sound of “boo-boo” is output, and display is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that measures after the initial movement corresponding to the hall side will be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door open) indicates a state in which the door frame 3 is detected to be open with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (the possibility that an illegal act due to the door open is being performed). However, it is informed that the door may be opened due to the abnormality countermeasures by the hall side). As the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the door is open” ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed. In addition, as for the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds from when the door frame release switch 618 is detected (corresponding to three notification sound repetitions). ), The display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps are the release condition “door closed detection (the door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to be closed). On the other hand, the execution is continued until “the detection of the closing of the door frame 3)” is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619 is detected ( A notification sound 5 (frame open) is provided to notify that the body frame has been opened due to anomalous measures by the hall side, although there is a possibility that the body frame has been opened, but there is a possibility that the wrong action has been taken. However, when the possibility that some kind of wrongdoing has occurred is in the middle and cannot be denied, it is regarded as belonging to the second notification group, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are not notified. The mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (open frame), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, “frame is open”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and a body frame opening switch is set as a notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to three notification sound repetitions) from the time when the detection by 619 is performed, the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is terminated. For lighting by various lamps, the release condition is “frame close detection (the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the body frame open switch 619). Until the detection of it) "I am satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 uses different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily lighted) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, respectively. (It does not have to be the mode). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. As for the notification sound to be subjected to the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of the content of the notification and a sound belonging to the second notification group (an illegal action) (A state in which the possibility of the occurrence of the event is in the middle level). The combination of the successive output with the alarm sound used in any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as “ping-pong ping-pong” which plays the role of notifying that I have.

  That is, in the case of notifying a member belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a medium possibility that a wrongdoing has been performed), it is possible to prevent a person playing an appropriate game from feeling disgust. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent promptly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, first, as in the case where the notification sound belongs to a third notification group to be described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as the notification sound. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game hardly feels disgust. On the other hand, a warning sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound although it is different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for the person playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the output is performed when the lighting mode is different from that in the first notification group but belongs to the third notification group. By performing the notification by lighting the various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the abnormality countermeasures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) indicates that although the game time is in a non-time saving state, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area of the game area 5a that is to the right of the center role 2500. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which a game is played in a manner that is disadvantageous for the player and it should be corrected to a game in an appropriate mode (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Please return to left-handed” )) Are respectively executed. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” and the display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. The processing is terminated in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), a state where the lower plate 322 is detected to be full of game balls by the full tank detection sensor 279 (lower plate) A notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where ball-off is to be performed is provided as a game guidance for appropriately proceeding the game although the possibility of fraud is low. It is considered that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when it is in a state to be set, and for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, the notification time, and the release condition are all set to be common. And

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (balling guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” and a loop in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 are performed. A display process (for example, "Please remove the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and a looping process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball of the lower plate" as the notification time, and a game board Both of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are ended in 20 seconds (corresponding to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed. .

  However, as for the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance), those sensors 2401 and 2401 are terminated 20 seconds after detection by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7. More specifically, for example, after the output of the message sound for 5 seconds, the silence for 5 seconds is completed. Data is allocated to channel X, and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silence output), and a loop process of repeating a 10-second notification sound in which the message sound and the silence data are set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 output silence data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by checking the silence data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in a busy hall. It is desirable that the silent data be prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing be performed while the sound data is allocated to the channel X.

  By the way, silence parts may be present in the notification sound (between the alarm sound and the message sound) used in the first notification group and the second notification group, but these are very short for providing "between". It is clear that the above is a time-based one, and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long time-free silence part (third notification group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boobboo" or "ping-pong ping-pong" is not output, and only a message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period interposed therebetween. It is possible to make a notification about the game guidance without causing the user to feel disgust.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group are set to have the same priority, but the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group have different priorities. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the target sound is adopted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 1 SHOT reproduction for reproducing the target sound once may be adopted. . “Booboo” commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group and “ping-pong ping-pong” commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group have a connection with the message sound. May be prepared separately for each notification sound as the sound data, or may be prepared as sound data different from the message sound, and the sound data combining the message sound and the alarm sound at the time of output is created. The channel may be assigned later.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows a process when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), assuming that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that magnetic detection has been performed is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the magnetic detection has been performed based on the updated state of the notification flag is externally output and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, and finds information on magnetic detection. 156 is included, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification mode is set. (In this case, the alarm sound reproduction is started in a loop of “a jerky magnetism is detected”), and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the alarm time of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set.

  When the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c to perform the peripheral control. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X so that the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism is detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting this in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism was detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from the timing tα1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnetic is detected”). "), And lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the first notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (a), at the timing tα2 when 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tα1 and a notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is in a state of loop playback, the step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 when the magnetic detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected based on the updated state of the notification flag is output to the outside and managed in the hall computer. In the processing of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed in the reception command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is determined that the information of the vibration detection is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I will not do it. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not processed in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Should be set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has ended, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection The schedule data for generation is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of “buzzer vibration detected”) is set. Playback is to be performed.

  Also, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and the vibration detection schedule data. By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting the extracted data in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and the lamp are performed. These are performed for lighting.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I have. In the lamp lighting, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection has already been set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection which has already been set is reflected in various lamps, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection have the same data content. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tα3 after 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” is repeated based on the expiration of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality). The loop process to be executed is terminated. In this case, since the time required for reproducing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is timed. At the timing tα3, when the notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced six times, the loop processing is terminated at a well-cut timing.

  Also, at this time, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) has not been timed up, so the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection, and By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds) to the channel X, the notification mode (here, “boob vibration Has been detected ”loop).

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set but set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to reproduce the notification sound “Booboo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) expires, “Booboo vibration detected. It is possible to prompt the user to end the loop processing and stop the reproduction at an incomplete timing (for example, timing such as “buzzing”) in the notification sound such as “do”.

  According to such a configuration, when an output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (a)), when the sixth alarm sound (here, “bubble”) and the sixth message sound (here, “magnetism detected”) have been played, the seventh alarm sound (here In this case, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if the “buzz” were reproduced. As a result, "Booboo magnetism detected" and "Booboo vibration detected" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent information in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with “bub magnetism” and the notification sound 2 starts with “movement detected”, a meaningless buzzer such as “booboo magnetism detected” Content, which can confuse the site).

  Further, according to the above configuration, at timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is short, and the notification sound 2 ends at the time of the alarm sound of “bub-boo”, and the message sound ends. Even if the reproduction is not performed, the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing and the reproduction is stopped, so that it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has been detected at the same time (only the magnetic abnormality is detected). In the case of notification, the notification sound is terminated at a well-cut point). As a result, when the alarm sound is cut off at an incomplete timing, it will be prompted to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will show `` magnetism detected '' and `` vibration detected '' respectively By being displayed, it is possible to properly recognize that the state in which the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 157 (b) shows a process performed when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. This is an example.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), at timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection by the body frame opening switch 619 in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame release has been detected. Next, information indicating that frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided to processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, and as a result, the frame opening detection is performed. When it is determined that the information is included, the notification sound 5 (open frame) shown in FIG. 156 is allocated (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), and the notification is made. In addition to starting the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, “frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. .

  When the notification sound 5 (open frame) is assigned to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the open frame is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. This is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the screen generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection which is the condition for canceling the frame opening detection is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from the timing tβ1, and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “the frame is Open ") and lighting by various lamps provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (the lighting mode of the second notification group).

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (b), at time tβ2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from timing tβ1 and a notification sound such as “frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in a state of loop playback, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 5 (open frame) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door opening detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Do not assign. That is, since the notification sound 5 (opening frame) having the same priority order has already been assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) of the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the door opening at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed up when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) has ended, the door open detection is performed. The schedule data for sound generation is set, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to the channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop) The notification sound is reproduced.

  Also, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, and The light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Display and lamp lighting are performed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door is separately displayed at a position different from a position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. I have. When the lamp is turned on, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the detection of the door opening is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the detection of the opening of the frame is already set and has the same priority. Thus, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each lamp emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection have the same data content. In any case, no change occurs in the lamp lighting.

  Then, at the timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is generated based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times.

  Also, at this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) has not been timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection, and By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door Is open Ping-pong ping-pong "loop) to play the notification sound.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 4 (door open) is set at the timing tβ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door open is not set but set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) expires, the “door is open” It is possible to prompt the user to stop the loop processing and stop the reproduction at an incomplete timing (for example, a timing such as "the door is open") of the notification sound such as "ping pong ping pong".

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (b)) When the third message sound (here, “frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping-pong ping-pong”) have been reproduced, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "door is open") was reproduced. As a result, "frame open ping-pong ping-pong" and "door open ping-pong ping-pong" are connected in strange places, making it impossible to recognize the contents of the notification in a tense situation. Generation can be suppressed appropriately.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the door opening is short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted at an incomplete position, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 157 (c) shows a process when an output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. This is an example.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game is not performed during the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) even though the time is not reduced. If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that a game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role 2500 in the area 5a (the right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), The control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that a right-handed operation has been detected in the non-time saving state as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time-saving state) is provided to processing related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become like In the process of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output. 156, the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) shown in FIG. 156 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). A timer for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (in this case, the loop of “return to left-hand”) and for notifying the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance). 20 seconds).

  Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in the present embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a. Only information indicating that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. May be performed, and the processing regarding the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

  When the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time-saving state is copied to the various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Become like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the schedule data in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal is the end of the notification which is the release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) (the timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) times out). It is continuously executed until Regarding the processing of the third notification group having low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the effect, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, “Please return to left-handed”) is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 157 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is in the state of the loop reproduction and 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tγ1, the step S110 or It is assumed that the lower tray full sensor has been detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information indicating that the lower plate full state has been detected, as in the case of the timing tγ1 at which the right-handed operation was detected in the non-time saving state. Thus, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of the lower plate being full) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is received by the reception command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is grasped that the information of the detection of the lower plate full is included, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) shown in FIG. 156 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). No assignment is made to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is not newly assigned to the channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower tray full at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) in a state where the sound generation schedule data is not assigned to the channel X is not processed.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the timer (20) for counting the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) that has not been set yet. Second), and if the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has ended, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball extraction guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball from the lower plate" The notification sound is reproduced in the loop of ").

  Also, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state, but does not set the schedule data for the screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full state. The schedule data is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, so that the above-described display in the liquid crystal is executed. I have.

  In the display in the liquid crystal, the display according to the ball-pulling guidance is separately displayed at a position different from the position where the display according to the left-hand guidance is performed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Has become.

  After that, at a timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have elapsed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) having timed out. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In this case, since the time required for reproducing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handing” once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice.

  Also, at this time, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) is not in a time-up state, so the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower plate full. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here, Then, the notification sound is reproduced in a loop of "Please remove the ball of the lower plate".

  That is, at the timing tγ2, the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set, but is set at the timing tγ3. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “Please remove the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball-pulling guidance) times out , So that the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing of the notification sound such as "Please pull out the lower plate ball" (for example, timing such as "Please pull out the lower plate ball"), and it will not be played back Be able to encourage.

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (see FIG. 157 (c)) After the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has been played, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the lower plate") It is possible to realize the smooth switching of the notification sound as if it had been reproduced. As a result, "return to left" and "please remove the ball of the lower plate" are connected at an unusual place, and the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized is appropriately suppressed. Will be able to do it.

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, no sound data for 5 seconds is interposed. Since the message sound of another notification sound is played back, two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound, so that occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized is preferably performed. Can be avoided.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), assuming that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the processing of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 at which no notification sound is output, Regarding the processing corresponding to the magnetic detection (magnetic abnormality processing), the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 157 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is started, and the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) times out. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), 60 seconds have not elapsed from the timing t-1 and a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is at the timing t-2 when the loop is being reproduced. In step S110, it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 155). ), Even if the door opening detection occurs, the process of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Normally, as for the processing with the lower priority, as in the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality is different from the case where only the door is opened, and the possibility that some kind of misconduct has been taken is high, It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the “second notification group in which the possibility of fraud is medium”. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (a), at timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection nor the schedule data for sound generation is set. Only the flag corresponding to the door open detection is set. At timing t-3, based on the flag being set, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of the door opening and the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the door opening are respectively set. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is allocated to channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, “door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” loop) is started. . The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp in response to the detection of the door opening is started from timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound such as “Booboo magnetism was detected” is displayed even though the door opening detection was performed by the door frame open switch 618 in a state where the loop is being reproduced, and “Booboo magnetism was detected. From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Ending of the notification sound" is finished, the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the detection of the door opening is reproduced in full for 30 seconds, and the "door is open ping-pong ping-pong" That is, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced in a more detailed notification mode different from the process based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is performed. Although the content (in this case, the “door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” loop) is expected, it is expected to promote recognition of a situation in which the possibility of fraud is high.

  In addition, after the notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism detected", the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation It becomes possible to recognize that the notification to which it belongs has ended at an early stage. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of “ping-pong ping-pong” after the message sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

  FIG. 158 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), suppose that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 at which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (the processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Will be Therefore, at the timing tδ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is timed tδ3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a good timing. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), 30 seconds have not elapsed since the timing tδ1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop playback, and the step is performed at the timing tδ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed operation in the non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the detection of the right-handing in the non-time saving state. From this (see FIG. 155), the process of the notification sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed even when right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

  That is, as described above, the lower priority side notification sound is the same as the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (c) when the processing of the lower priority side is overlapped. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Accordingly, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) is set, while the sound generation corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state Schedule data is not set. If the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) has not timed up at the timing tδ3, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the minute, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of “return to left-handed”).

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as “The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the warning sound such as “Please return to left-handing” is not included at a good timing. Is reproduced, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has been reduced while maintaining the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the sound corresponding thereto is output (silence output). It has become. Therefore, even with such silence data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it can be easily recognized that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Become like

  FIG. 158 (c) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), suppose that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 at which no notification sound is output. Regarding the processing corresponding to the detection of the door opening (the processing at the time of opening the door), the same processing as the “processing according to the detection of the opening of the frame (processing at the time of opening the frame)” described with reference to FIG. Will be Therefore, at the timing tε1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) times up the timing tε3. Then, the information processing sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a good timing. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing which is the condition for releasing the door opening is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2 when 30 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tε1 and a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is in the state of loop reproduction, and the step S112 is performed. It is assumed that the magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94. In this regard, since the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is prioritized, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) is performed for both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content is not reflected as the operation of each actuator. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound and the lamp lighting, it has been set up to that time at the timing tε2. A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door open detection from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the sound generation schedule data, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are respectively set. State. Then, the assignment to the channel X and various lamp operations is determined based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the door opening and the content based on the light emission mode generation schedule data. By switching to the contents based on the schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is performed by any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed for the process with the lower priority in the execution state (the process when the door is opened) without performing any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between the two different processes (the door opening process and the magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (c), at timing tδ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “buzzer magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. In accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds), the notification process such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced six times, and the loop processing is terminated at a sharp timing. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the occurrence of the magnetic detection with a high possibility that the misconduct has occurred, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense state is immediately transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

  FIG. 158 (d) shows an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing t # 1 at which no notification sound is output, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 in the processing of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 157 (c) is performed for the processing (left-hand guidance processing) corresponding to the right-hand detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore, at the timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” starts, and the timing (ζ3) at which the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) times out. In this case, the loop processing is ended at a well-cut timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” has been reproduced twice. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound which is the condition for canceling the left-hand guidance is up.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at time tζ2 when 20 seconds have not elapsed from timing tζ1 and a notification sound such as “please return to left-handed” is in the state of loop playback, step S110 or step S110 is performed. It is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the priority of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is lower than the priority of the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) according to the detection of the door opening. From this (see FIG. 155), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the detection of the door opening is prioritized, and the processing content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) reflects the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. It should be noted that the display in the liquid crystal is displayed at different positions in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 for each notification. Even when a high-priority notification is generated, the display in the liquid crystal on the lower priority side is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, the right-hand detection in the non-time-saving state set up to that time at timing tζ2 A process for canceling the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state, but also the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. Are kept in the set state, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode corresponding to the door opening detection, as well as the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection, which has a higher priority than this, are maintained. The generation schedule data is set to a set state. The assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection. In the process of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the detection of the door open, the output content of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, the process in the execution state with the lower priority (left-handed guidance process) does not perform any operation. It is possible to realize the change of the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-hand guidance process, door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 158 (d), at timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door opening) is started. In accordance with the expiration of the timer (30 seconds), the alarm processing such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong” has been reproduced three times, and the loop processing is ended at a sharp timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection which is the condition for releasing the door opening is performed.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the detection of the door opening having a medium possibility of the misconduct being performed, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. In any case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person playing the appropriate game does not disgust, "Ping-pong ping-pong" is used to provide notification to the second notification group, and it is expected that the hall side will be notified as soon as possible of the switch to the situation where the possibility of fraud has occurred. .

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation in which such an abnormal notification sound is output. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected on some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 155 are to be output, the above-described processing according to the priority order is performed so that various Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately provide notification of abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like (a channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group in which the possibility of fraud is medium, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly reported only by the control based on the priority of the game machine.

  In addition, the notification sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been committed, but also when there is an abnormality that is not likely to have been committed. is there. In other words, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If so, it is possible that such a detection state may be maintained for the convenience of the hall (such as recovery from various errors), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily performed. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the status of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is not required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. The notification is to be realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification processing will be described for each situation with reference to FIGS. 159 to 164.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 at which no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also set. It is set. At this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is set to 30 seconds until the timing tα12 arrives. Plays for seconds.

  On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the detection of the door opening is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 comes.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα13 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the door open detection ends and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high at the magnetic detection. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, with respect to the lamp emission according to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation to various lamp operations is not performed. At the timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of the lamp emission corresponding to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. At this time, by setting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 159, when the notification sound reproduction according to the door opening detection has been completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 has occurred. Such a situation means that a person who intends to perform some illegal operation opens the door frame 3 to make it open, and then waits until the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening is completed, and It is assumed that the magnet may be momentarily in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when the unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the magnet is cooled, and it is extremely malicious. Therefore, there is a concern that simply performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has already been turned off, the magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity even if any countermeasure is taken.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment utilizes that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued at the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection ends. Based on this, the “sound generation schedule data in response to the detection of the door opening”, which is in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds), is set again, and the notification sound is set to the channel X. The special processing to be re-assigned to is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which has already been completed is reproduced in a form linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It will be expected to attract everyone's attention. In addition, as a person who commits fraud, he is already reassured that if the magnetic notification is over, the reproduction of the notification sound has been completed, and it is finally possible to make the situation that the wrongdoing is less noticeable. By playing the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening that should have ended, an unexpected notification situation will be created, so it is expected that any further misconduct will have a recognition that the risk is too large Become like

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is performed and during the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is performed, other channels are used. A process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound and the other game sounds during the fluctuation of the assigned symbols (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be the volume 0. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels while the symbols are changing is not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is being performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State) or whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 159, in the period between the timings tα11 to tα13 and the period between the timings tα14 to tα16, the symbol variation is performed based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. The process of suppressing the volume of the middle production sound and the other game sounds (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. During the period from timing tα13 to tα14, the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the fact that the process is being performed, a process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16), both the notification processes by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During and after the period, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds are reduced to the same value, but both the notification process by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. During the period, a process of lowering to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states only by checking the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side is further speeded up.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, at the timing tα16 at which the door open detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which was already in the end state is reproduced in a manner that is linked to "reproduction of notification sound according to the magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act has been performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the volume of other game sounds may not be suppressed but may be continued.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door open detection, during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door open detection is displayed. The start period is the same as the period during which the operation is performed and the period in which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the detection of the opening of the door, but the end periods thereof are all different. As described above, by operating the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp emission so as to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it is possible to appropriately notify the contents of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 160, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) according to the door open detection ends, at timing tα23, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 159, it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act has been performed. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening already in the end state is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the effect of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds does not change. Incidentally, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since there is a low possibility that such an action has been performed, when the corresponding notification sound ends, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the end state will not be reproduced again.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 161, FIG. 159 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door open detection ends. Same as the example. However, in the example illustrated in FIG. 161, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at timing tα34 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. I have.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 161, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has been already ended is “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played in connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 161, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 159, after a person who intends to perform some unauthorized manipulation opens the door frame 3 to make it open, the door open detection is performed. Waiting for the completion of the corresponding notification sound reproduction, the magnet is instantaneously placed in the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when an unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the heat is cooled. It is assumed that the situation may have been entered. However, after the timing tα34, in consideration of the fact that the door frame 3 is closed and a non-illegal state in which no magnetic detection has occurred, even in such a non-illegal state, it is possible to respond to the magnetic detection. It is considered that only the continuous reproduction of the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing, and the channel X is vacated when further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep the state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 161, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various types of notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 162, FIG. 159 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, it is assumed that the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 162, after the notification sound reproduction in response to the detection of the door opening is completed, an unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. Sometimes, the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in spite of the fact that the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response thereto, the magnet is kept within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 without being depressed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is about to be repositioned, and more malicious cheating may have occurred. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 is output. A process for resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed to when 60 seconds elapse from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed is set as a base point. Can be continuously reproduced. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. Finally, a beep sound such as “Booboo magnetism detected” does not end the loop processing at a sharp timing. For example, the loop processing ends at an incomplete timing such as “Booboo magnetism detection”. As a result, it is expected that a great sense of discomfort will be created in the hall and everyone will be noticed.

  Further, at a timing tα44 after a lapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection" is set again, and the special processing for re-assigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which has already been completed is reproduced in a form linked to “reproduction of the notification sound according to the detection of magnetism”, as well as an intermediate sound such as “detecting the bubbling magnetism”. At an odd timing, the loop processing is reproduced in such a manner as to be linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been completed becomes higher, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was reproduced in a state of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 159 shows that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door open detection ends. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 163, it is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 at a timing tα54 within a period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 163 as well, when the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening is completed, the unauthorized magnet is secretly arranged inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cooled. In spite of the fact that the magnet instantaneously enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response thereto, the pachinko machine 1 is largely shaken without such a situation. It is possible that more malicious fraud has been committed. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form linked to “the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been completed is reproduced in a manner further linked to “reproduction of the notification sound according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  In addition, at the timing tα54 at which the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration). Second), and at a timing tα55 at which reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection ends, sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

  According to such a configuration, a beep sound such as "Boo-boo oscillation detected" is not terminated at a well-cut timing. Since the processing is completed, it is expected that a great sense of discomfort will be generated in the hall and everyone will be noticed.

  Further, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). "Schedule data" is set again, and special processing for re-assigning the notification sound to channel X is performed. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound according to the detection of the door opening which has already been completed is further connected to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the vibration detection" which is linked to the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection". In addition to the playback of the notification sound, the playback is linked to the “reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the vibration” whose loop processing has been completed at an incomplete timing such as “detect the vibration”. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door open detection which has already been in the end state becomes higher, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection was reproduced in a state of being stopped halfway, and in the hall. It is expected that this will create even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 164, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) according to the frame opening detection instead of the door opening detection. I assume.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164 as well, it can be said that a situation in which magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraud has occurred. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet to be useful. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may be erroneously detected when the magnet is used on the hole side to eliminate clogging of the ball in the ball tank or the payout passage.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 164 as well, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection which has been already ended is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. By performing the reproduction in a manner connected to the “reproduction” (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of discomfort will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at timing tα66 at which the main frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection ends, not only the notification processing (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. For each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp), a special process for terminating them is also performed.

  According to such a configuration, while performing the function against fraudulent acts appropriately, when the erroneous detection is performed on the hole side, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection only by closing the main body frame 4 ( (Notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) can be completed, so that it is expected that the response of the hole side to erroneous detection is promptly maintained and the atmosphere in the hole is appropriately maintained. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 164, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is not performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the magnetic detection. May be performed.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is provided with a player-side volume adjustment function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 128), and the effect selection left button 331 has been operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume has been set, a process of lowering the set value by the player (player setting value) is performed on the speaker volume, and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the player volume setting has been set. The value (player setting value) is increased. Also, when the player setting value is reduced and the actually reduced volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is output at the reduced volume value. On the other hand, when the set value of the player is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pip!”) Is output at the increased volume value. In addition, it is possible to grasp the volume to which the volume adjustment has been completed and the volume has been changed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. Incidentally, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority (for example, “20”, which is the same as the button pressing sound) referred to when there is no more available channel, and the output sound volume of the effect sound ( (Audible sound volume) can be more reliably transmitted.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed in a period before the game is started because the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not been performed yet (the demo display and the like). (Permissible period), as well as during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the big hit determination is being executed, acceptance by the player is allowed, and more important effects have appeared At times and the like, the setting of the volume value can be changed flexibly to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where the channel assignment of various effect sounds is made according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol change, the pachinko machine 1 When it is detected that 1 has entered a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or a door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Also, at this time, it is possible to execute an effect progress lower notification process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value without stopping channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment or the abnormal state of the specific notification sound ends, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the effect sound in accordance with the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described effect progress notification process, the channel assignment of various effect sounds in accordance with the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped, so that only a specific information sound is assigned to the channel during normal time ( More channels are used than in the non-broadcast state), and there are no available channels to which sound data is not allocated at a stage prior to the end of the specific broadcast sound channel allocation (broadcast state). Risk tends to be higher. If there are no available channels to which no sound data has been allocated at a stage prior to the end of the specific notification sound channel allocation (broadcast state), any of the sound data at that time is lost. Since one channel assignment has to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (reporting state) of a specific notification sound is completed, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to a channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Regarding the concerns about available channels related to such production sound, if a fixed channel method is used for the channel assignment of the notification sound, there is no direct adverse effect, but a fixed channel method is used for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Or, or whether to adopt the automatic channel method, since it should be determined from the design point of view of the game and production, even if any channel method is adopted, as the above-mentioned production progress lower notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to reduce costs and improve reliability in developing the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed during the effect progress notification process, the value is reduced to the specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable and is maintained. In other words, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("pi!" Or "pipi!") Even when the player performs an operation while the performance progress lower notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel is given a margin by that amount to promote the reduction of the risk of running out of empty channels.

  However, in spite of the pachinko machine 1 capable of changing the volume value flexibly when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the performance progress lower notification process is being executed. If the change is not allowed, if the production progress lower notification process is performed due to the erroneous detection or the notification by the hall side (door opening, etc.), the sound volume appropriate value according to the content of the production progress is appropriately adjusted. It is unavoidable that the gaming entertainment will decline due to the inability to change the settings. In addition, if the production progresses during the production progress notification process, and a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume ( After the setting change of the volume of the listening sound is allowed, it is necessary to accept a plurality of operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. There is a concern that even though the production progress notification process has finally been completed, there is not enough available channels to produce the production sound properly, which may lead to a decrease in the game entertainment.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification processing is being performed, the pachinko machine 1 decreases to the specific value. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the produced sound is not changed but is maintained, while the change value of the set value (player set value) by the player pertaining to the sound volume is accepted. When the effect progress notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations performed up to that point are reflected.

  According to such a configuration, if the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is received in accordance with the effect of the progress of the effect while the effect progress notification process is being performed, a new operation is performed. Without performing the process, when the effect progress notification process ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) in which all the operations performed so far are reflected. As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification processing is being executed, so that the effect progress notification processing ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will be prevented from deteriorating until the game is completed. Further, immediately after the completion of the effect progress notification processing, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of steps, and a shortage occurs in an empty channel due to the volume adjustment completion sound at each time. Is also preferably avoided.

  According to the above configuration, when performing the batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value when the effect progress notification process is ended, the game during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being executed is performed. Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played once at the volume after the batch change. Alternatively, the sound may be output in a special mode sound (for example, “B!”) Different from the above.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the production progress notification processing is completed, the number of changes of the player setting value and the player during the period in which the production progress notification processing has been executed Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively with the end of the production progress notification process. . According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the notification due to the erroneous detection or the hall side (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, the appropriate production due to the lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  In the above-described example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection ends while the door opening state is maintained, when a magnetic abnormality occurs after that and the notification sound corresponding thereto ends, the notification corresponding to the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 159). However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is in the output state and a magnetic abnormality occurs and the corresponding notification sound ends, the door opening detection is performed even if the door opening state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted “notification sound according to door open detection”).

  When the door is in the open state, a lamp is emitted according to the detection of the opening of the door. Is desirable. Further, it is desirable that the operation be continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state is ended.

  If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if abnormality detection is performed, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door is open, the specific error It is desirable to output the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening based on the occurrence of the alarm. According to such a configuration, the occurrence of some abnormality can be recognized by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of the door opening detection.

  Or, if there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if abnormality detection is performed, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door is open, the The notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening may not be output again based on the occurrence of the specific error, and a state where re-notification is possible may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation in which such an abnormal notification sound is output. Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the luminance setting value is changed, it is desirable that the changed luminance is reflected on some of the effect lamps among the plurality of effect lamps.

  Hereinafter, an example of the processing from the execution of the effect progress notification processing to the change of the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is described.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram for describing the details of the effect progress notification process for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, prior to describing the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the output volume (audible sound volume) being collectively changed, the contents of the effect progress notification process are described with reference to FIG. Will be described briefly. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 155 are shown, and the description of other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 165, in this description example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume control mode of the effect sound. For example, in the first sound volume suppression mode, when the set value (player setting value) of the sound volume is changed by the player, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” is changed. Among the possible settings, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “10”. On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “0”. Therefore, the degree of suppression of the second sound volume suppression mode is greater than that of the first sound volume suppression mode. Particularly, in this example, although the processing relating to the output itself is performed, the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as an example.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, large winning abnormalities) belonging to the first informative group having a high possibility of fraud are provided. When the notification process relating to any of them is executed, a process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode which is the higher suppression level. In addition, when the notification process is performed on any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and special winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set in the second volume suppression mode, which is the higher suppression level. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

  Note that, in this description example, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and winning award abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is performed, the output volume of the production sound (audible sound) The period during which the process of suppressing the sound volume is continued is set to be the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, large winnings abnormality) is reproduced to the end of this processing. Is set to

  On the other hand, when the notification process is performed on any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having the medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the suppression degree is set. In the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the lower side, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is performed. However, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening and frame opening) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Thus, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) in the first sound volume suppression mode on the lower side of the suppression degree is ended.

  On the other hand, if the notification process is performed on any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance and ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance, out of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the staging effect is obtained. The processing for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is not executed at all.

  In this example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. May not necessarily be different from each other, and the output sound volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Audible sound volume) may be suppressed. However, the condition for terminating the process to be suppressed is different when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed more strictly than when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important that you do this.

  FIG. 166 shows the content of the process related to the volume adjustment associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. FIG.

  In this example, the player setting value is made variable by “1” within the range of “1” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The sound volume of the effect sound is set to be smaller as the value is smaller. In addition, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player in a state in which the above-described suppression modes (the first volume suppression mode and the second volume suppression mode) are not set for the production sound. It is set as a numerical value of 20 times the value. Therefore, in this example, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of “20” to “100” by the operation by the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the player setting value of the effect sound volume is “3” of “1” to “5”, and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” which is 20 times the output sound volume. Further, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination has not been performed and it is in a state of waiting for a start winning, the effect selection left button 331 is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. A displayed image 331a and a display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, a first sound volume value display OH1 that allows the current player setting value to be recognized as any one of “1” to “5” is also executed. You. The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super-reach effect, which is a reach effect performed with the background image changed. , The display may be hidden and at least one of a first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when an operation is performed by the player. Further, with respect to the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, one of them may be omitted, and only the other may be displayed.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 166 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to “1” each time the operation is performed. Accordingly, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" at a time. Further, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is within the range of the player set values “1” to “5”. OH2 (see FIG. 166 (C)) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, neither the player setting value nor the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is reduced. The user setting value remains “1” (the output sound volume of the effect sound (the audible sound volume) remains “20”). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is “1”, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or the volume is set to “ It is desirable that audible output be prevented by setting to "0". The same applies to the case where the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is “5”.

  On the other hand, when the winning start is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the decorative symbol SZ varies in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the variation pattern. Is displayed. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to the present embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 166 (A) (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed) but also a symbol change according to the big hit determination when the game is started. The reception by the player is allowed even during the execution period, and for example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

  That is, FIG. 166 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 166 (B). In the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is “60”, which is 20 times as large as those. With the setting changed to “80”, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at “80” which is the changed volume, and the player setting is performed in the second operation. Under the condition that the value has been changed from “4” to “5” and the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) has been changed from “80” to “100” which is 20 times those, Volume adjustment completed with "100", the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  In addition, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, the player setting value is changed from “1” to “5” which is the range of the player setting value. Then, the second volume value display OH2 indicating the current set value by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This clarifies which of the current set values is the range of the player set values “1” to “5”, so that even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. The purpose of the present invention is to prevent an operation error such as an operation of the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. In the gauge display, the numerical range of “1” to “5” is constantly displayed as a block, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to a change in the player setting value. By performing the display, the current player setting value is indicated.

  Note that the second volume value display OH2 is displayed after the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 in the state shown in FIG. 166 (C), as shown in FIG. 166 (D). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the display is turned off, and thereafter, the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation on the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”) Is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output every time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is not displayed is reset. Thereby, it is more preferably promoted that an operation error such as an operation of the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed is not generated even though the player setting value is the maximum value “5”. become.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 167, while the door open detection is occurring during the symbol change execution period and the process related to the notification sound is being executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated. It is a figure explaining the content about the processing regarding volume adjustment accompanying that.

  The situation shown in FIG. 167 (A) is a situation before the symbol fluctuation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 166 (A). In such a situation, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), during the symbol variation execution period, the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding thereto is performed. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong” and a display in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is being opened ") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is executed.

  Further, as described above, during the symbol fluctuation period, when the detection of the door opening belonging to the second notification group occurs and the processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed according to the detection, the first sound volume suppression mode is set. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 167 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3” which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 167 (A). The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The effect contents will be developed under the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being performed, the first specification is performed. The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound lowered to the value (here, “10”) is not changed and is maintained, while the set value of the sound volume by the player (player set value) The change acceptance of itself is permitted, and when the above-described effect progress lower notification processing (processing for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all the operations performed up to that point. Is collectively changed as described above.

  That is, FIG. 167 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation of the effect selection right button 332 twice with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 167 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed with the volume of the first specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the first specified. Since the value (here, “10”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5”. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of the player set value "1" to "5", and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  Then, after returning to the state in which the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again, the door frame 3 is closed, and the processing relating to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the production progress lower notification processing (output volume to a specific value) When the process is completed, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), in response to the completion of the process, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value gradually changes from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Because of the change, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the first specific value (here, “10”), and the second operation Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it is changed collectively from the first specific value (here, "10") to "100" in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  As described above, the accepting of the change of the set value (the player set value) by the player is allowed even during the period in which the effect progress notification processing is being executed, so that the effect progress notification processing ends. It is expected that the game entertainment will be prevented from deteriorating until the game is completed. Immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively (from “10” to “100”) with the end of the production progress notification process, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel adjustment of the volume adjustment completed sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lower notification processing due to the notification due to the erroneous detection or the hall side (door opening, etc.) has been finally ended, the appropriate production due to the lack of available channels. Can be suitably suppressed from occurring such that the user cannot enjoy the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are exemplified as the specific states. The end condition may be different from the effect progress notification process in the state in which the effect has been made.

  For example, first, regarding the production progress lower notification processing in a state where the door is opened, when the door is closed or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door opening was continued. ). However, in any case, when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed collectively (for example, from “10” to “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound despite the change in output volume. It is desirable not to make the assignment itself.

  On the other hand, the effect of lowering the production progress in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred should not be terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality has ended, but should be continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power supply is shut down. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively (for example, from “10” to “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored after the power is turned off. Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel allocation itself of the volume adjustment completion sound.

  In addition, in the effect progress lower notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the player setting value is changed, a display indicating that fact is displayed, whereas in the effect progress lower notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred, Alternatively, when the player setting value is changed, a display indicating that fact may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the end condition is different between the effect progress notification process in the state where the door is opened and the effect progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs. become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, the output (channel assignment) of the volume adjustment completion sound triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob cannot be performed. It is more desirable to make the available channels have room.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the buttons for volume adjustment (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although illustration is omitted. Lamps (such as lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for effects, etc., and gaming lamps such as special figure LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from brightness setting targets. ) Is provided with a button for brightness adjustment (a button for increasing brightness, a button for decreasing brightness, etc.), and when it is determined that the button for brightness adjustment has been operated, the player determines the brightness of various effect lamps. Processing for changing the set value (player set value) can be executed. Further, when the player setting value related to the brightness is decreased or increased, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value according to the set value related to the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the brightness of such an effect lamp can be changed by a player's operation in both a state where the symbol is not changed and a state where the symbol is changed.

  In addition, it is desirable to assign a channel for the brightness adjustment completion sound under the same conditions as the above-described volume adjustment completion sound. In this case, even if the setting value related to the brightness is changed, A situation in which the channel assignment of the sound itself is not performed, a situation in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output, and the like appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (for example, whether the above-described effect progress lower notification processing is being executed) when the set value relating to the luminance is changed, not the volume. Will be made possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  When a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed after being controlled on the demo screen) is satisfied, the player setting value regarding the volume is set to a specific value (for example, “3”) without operation by the player. It may be changed. However, if the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, “3”) without operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH1) The value display OH2) and the output (channel assignment) related to the volume adjustment completion sound are not performed so that a third party is informed that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  If a new volume adjustment is performed while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment is being output, the volume adjustment sound that is in the output state is output even if there is an available channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel in the form of aborting it and outputting it (overwriting and outputting) is more effective in giving room to the number of available channels. desirable.

  In addition, when an operation is performed further on the side where the volume is increased despite the player setting value being the maximum value, or when the volume is decreased despite the player setting value being the minimum value. When the operation of is performed further, even if there is an empty channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and is not output so that the number of empty channels has a margin. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but a display (the first volume value display OH1 or the second volume value display OH2) indicating the current set value is displayed. Is also good.

  Although the volume adjustment by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not allowed may be generated.

  On the other hand, FIG. 168 shows that when the state detection occurred in FIG. 167 is not a door opening but a magnetic abnormality, the processing related to the notification sound is executed, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the content of a process related to volume adjustment when a right button 332 is operated.

  The situation shown in FIG. 168 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (A). In such a situation, when the start winning is generated and the jackpot determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the result of the jackpot determination and the fluctuation are similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 167 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. In addition, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, a predetermined effect is developed, and an effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol change, and the processing related to notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in response thereto. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Booboo magnetism detected" and a display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetism detection") And lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs during the symbol fluctuation period and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed in response to the detection, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3” similar to that in the situation of FIG. 168 (A), but the effect is produced. The output volume of the sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, “0”) lower than the original value (20 times the player setting value). The effect contents are developed under the volume value (here, mute).

  In this regard, also in the case where the performance progress lower notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, if the operation on the performance selection left button 331 or the performance selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, “0”) is obtained. )), The output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound (here, the silence)) is not varied but is maintained, while the set value by the player regarding the volume (the player set value) is itself. Is accepted, and when the above-mentioned production progress lower notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. The fact that they are changed collectively is as described above.

  That is, FIG. 168 (C) shows a state after the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the reach effect in the state shown in FIG. 168 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original numerical value (game value). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the predetermined value (20 times the user set value) is maintained. Therefore, even if the operation of the effect selection right button 332 is performed twice by the player, the sound volume of the effect sound is maintained until the effect progress lower notification process (the process of reducing the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect content is developed with the volume of the second specific value.

  Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, the output sound volume of the staging sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is second specified. Since the value (here, “0”) is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and even in the second operation, the player setting value is changed from “4” to “5”. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from “3” to “4”, and since the player operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by a gauge display that the current set value is “4” in the range of the player set value “1” to “5” is: This is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is changed from “3” to “4” and displayed on the first volume value display OH1.

  Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself changes from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of the player set value "1" to "5", and the first volume value Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

  By the way, in this example, in the situation shown in FIG. 168 (C), the magnetic detection itself has not been detected yet. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The effect progress lower notification process for suppressing the above is continuously executed.

  After that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection is performed under the condition that the volume adjustment guide display OAH returns to the state in which the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the effect progress lower notification process (specifies the output volume) When the process of lowering the value is completed, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), in response to the completion of the process, the output volume (audible sound volume) reflects all operations up to that point. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value gradually changes from “3” to “4” according to the first operation and “5” according to the second operation during the performance progress notification processing. Because of the change, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is originally “80” corresponding to the first operation from the second specific value (here, “0”), and the second operation Should be changed stepwise to "100" according to the above, but it is changed collectively from the second specific value (here, "0") to "100" in which all operations up to that point are reflected.

  It should be noted that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the notification process according to the opening of the door, even in the situation shown in FIG. The display in the display area 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed, respectively. I have. In other words, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the effect sound is out of the suppression target and is determined according to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification process according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound is terminated, the effect sound remains the target for the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp, even if the notification sound ends. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the change acceptance of the set value (player set value) by the player is permitted even during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being performed. Thus, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest until the end of the effect progress notification process is completed is suppressed. Immediately after the performance progress notification process is completed, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound may cause shortage or lack of available channels due to the volume adjustment completion sound. Such a situation can be suitably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is changed collectively ("0" → "100") in response to the termination of the production progress lower notification process associated with the magnetic anomaly. The channel allocation of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed in spite of the change in volume. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate effect cannot be enjoyed due to a lack of available channels, even though the effect progress notification process is finally terminated due to the notification due to erroneous detection. Can be suitably suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 155, the notification sound corresponding to the opening of the door, such as “the door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong”, and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic anomaly, such as “detected a bubbling magnetism”, are shown in FIG. Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player setting value.

  Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-hand guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball-off guidance) is executed, the effect progress lower notification processing is not executed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be appropriately varied. However, as shown in FIG. 155, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to “1” (0x1FF) in the third byte of the volume initial value. Playback is always performed at the volume set by the initial value.

  Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group do not set “1” in the third byte of the volume initial value. You may make it include in the target of volume adjustment by a player.

  167 and 168, the state detection is performed not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation is started, and over the timing of the start and the end of the symbol variation. May be executed in the same manner even when the notification process according to the above is executed.

  In each of the processes described with reference to FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, after the end of the production progress notification process, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 331 is performed in the same manner as before the start of the production progress notification process. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  In addition, in the processing described with reference to FIG. 167 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 168, the effect of suppressing the effect sound during the period in which the effect of the effect of the progress of the effect is being performed is made different. The output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound) can be changed in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the volume of the sound may be performed.

  In the effect progress notification process, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of various game sounds is suppressed. Of these game sounds, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as a sound (winning sound) played in response to winning, may be played back at the initial value set volume without being affected by volume suppression. That is, in this case, the hole side can easily grasp whether or not the game is continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds such as a sound (winning sound) reproduced in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the performance progress notification processing is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound is reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not performed.

  As described above, in FIG. 155 to FIG. 168, there is no channel space by adopting a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormality content and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of available channels is 0) It has been proposed that technical measures should be taken in terms of how to make it difficult to appear itself. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, the effect design sound (effect sound) is assigned to a channel to which the effect sound (effect sound) is not vacant (the number of vacant channels is 0). Concerns about the appearance of the above unintended sound output still remain.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical aspects are also applied to the channel assignment of the effect sound at a stage prior to the occurrence of a situation where there is no available channel (a situation where the number of available channels is 0). We try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical ideas applied to the output of the production sound will be sequentially described. In adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving type control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each example described below, any of the fixed channel method and the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. When the automatic channel method is adopted, the control based on the above-described priority may not necessarily be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. Further, each example described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as “an action of praying while holding the hand to the pachinko machine 1” or “button operation” is performed. Detection is possible by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silence data composed of only silence sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of allocating a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation processing is being performed, as a result of accepting the game ball in the specific winning opening, for example, even if special production conditions such as a jackpot decision production or a look-ahead production are established, the At this point, no special sound according to the effect is assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the end of the channel reservation processing, a special sound is assigned to a channel and an effect of reproducing the channel can be executed (later notification effect).

  That is, in this case, at least one of the channels to which the special sound can be assigned is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any degree of expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to a shortage of channels even though a special result is obtained in the determination according to the winning.

  As for the special sound, for example, in addition to the jackpot determination sound executed only when a big hit is won in the jackpot determination according to the winning, a highly expected effect mode (for example, , An announcement sound with a high degree of expectation performed during execution of a reach effect, etc.), or a pre-reading sound when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the pre-reading judgment according to the winning. It is possible to exemplify a pre-reading notification sound executed as an effect, but the point is that when a special judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the predetermined judgment means according to the winning, it is assigned to the channel and output Anything can be used.

  FIG. 169 shows that, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a special sound (for example, quine) in accordance with a so-called look-ahead effect is output as a “special sound”. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more precisely, a state in which a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a prefetch effect) has not yet been made). 6 is a time chart showing an example of a channel reservation process previously reserved from time to time.

First, prior to describing an example of the channel reservation processing, first, a general prefetch effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize occurs in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. Then, the first and second starting opening winning processing (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 104 are performed. In the first and second starting opening winning processing (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a starting opening (first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, processing for increasing the number of reserves on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc., is performed as described above.

  In addition, as described above, in the first and second starting opening winning processing (FIG. 104: steps S5231 to S5234), a prefetching processing for executing a prefetching effect on the winning opening side is also performed (FIG. 104). 105: Step S5245, FIG. 106: Step S5255).

  Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is an effect that suggests the determination result of the first special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is there. In the first special figure pre-reading process, information necessary for the peripheral control board 1510 side to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, the content of the effect, and the like (information related to a hit for the pre-reading determination, a symbol type for the pre-reading determination). Information, information on a variable pattern number for pre-reading determination, and the like, and store the information in the corresponding storage area as transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the first special symbol itself, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side also suggests the judgment result of the second special symbol (or the degree of expectation thereof) in advance before starting the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In the second special figure prefetching process, information (hit information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required to determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and the effect content on the peripheral control board 1510 side is generated, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result of the second special symbol itself, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol may be included in the command as information indicating the type of the big hit game. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the determination process as to whether or not the jackpot has been won or the symbol variation is not exhausted, and when the symbols are put on hold, the information ( Based on the first special map side information related to the look-ahead effect, the second special map side information related to the look-ahead effect), it is expected whether or not the jackpot determination put on hold will obtain a special result. A look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance is executable.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation where a start winning has occurred, and when there is such a situation, performs control relating to a hold display or a pre-reading effect according to the start winning. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-described fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit game processing shown in FIG. Perform one of the operations. In the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display corresponding to the start winning is provided in any one of a plurality of modes (for example, blue having a relatively low expectation and red having a relatively high expectation). A determination is made as to whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that indicates the degree of expectation of read-ahead depending on whether the display is performed, and a mode according to the result of the determination (for example, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is not to be performed, In a normal display mode). Thus, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is exhausted, a look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

  By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display indicating a jackpot determination) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, quine) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. Many. However, such a special sound (look-ahead effect) is reproduced at the timing of winning the game ball which occurs irregularly, so that the game ball wins at the timing when there is no available channel and the pre-reading judgment is made. If there is a win, the player cannot recognize that the special sound is not reproduced even though the pre-reading determination has been made, and the hold display appears in a highly expected mode (blue or red). It is feared that the entertainment interests of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 169, as described above, prior to causing the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 to win a game ball and output a special sound (prefetch effect), the special sound is output. The channels that can be assigned are changed from the state in which the special sound has not been output (more precisely, the state in which the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the pre-reading effect) has not yet been made). Can be executed.

  For example, at timing tY10 shown in FIG. 169, the number of the jackpot determinations (the number of holds) in the hold state is now 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. Game (handle operation) to be performed. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, up to four big hit determinations are put on hold in accordance with the winning, and the big hit determinations are made. Each time the state is put on hold, processing related to hold display and pre-reading effect according to the winning is performed.

  Here, as the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation processing is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (in the order of winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) Assuming that a second prize (third hold) and a fourth prize (fourth hold) have occurred, a process related to a prefetch effect is performed at each timing when such a hold occurs. Then, when a prefetching effect is performed by winning the prefetching determination, a special sound (for example, quine) is output at a timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing at which a prize is won and the prefetching determination is performed), and a specific mode is performed. Will be displayed.

  On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is being executed is, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, for example. Assuming that a second prize (third hold), a fourth prize (fourth hold), and a fourth prize (fourth hold), processing relating to the prefetching effect is performed at each timing when these holds occur. However, when a prefetching effect is performed by winning the prefetching determination, a special sound (for example, quine) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (winning timing), but is maintained in a state of waiting for execution. Then, a special sound (for example, quine) is output after waiting for a channel to be subjected to the channel reservation processing to become empty. It should be noted that the hold display having a specific mode may appear at a timing at which a special sound (for example, quine) is output, or may appear at a timing at which a hold that has been won in the prefetch determination has occurred. Good. However, in the case where a hold display having a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that has been won in the pre-read determination is made, a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and a case where the channel reservation process is not executed In any of the pre-reading effects, it is preferable that only one aspect (for example, only red) can appear as a specific aspect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is placed in front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (not shown) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) is provided. Detects this as an object, and starts the channel reservation processing with this as an opportunity.

  For example, at timing tY11 shown in FIG. 169, the player is holding his hand over the front of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In the prayer effect mode, first, a prayer mode background display in which “Torii of a shrine” is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is performed, and “countdown of the countdown” is performed for a predetermined time (30 seconds). "Audio" is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced. Note that the countdown sound starts from “30”, for example, and is counted down every second and ends when the countdown becomes “0”. In addition, during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this manner, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

  However, the "shrine torii (prayer mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in a predetermined channel are displayed by the player holding his hand over the front of the display area of the game board effect display device 1600. This can only be used as an opportunity (triggered by sensor detection) as an opportunity, and is not related to the effect of the effect (effect suggesting the degree of expectation) that is evolving within the running pattern change, It does not depend on the result of the jackpot determination at all. Therefore, the display and sound to be generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to other contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) can be obtained. The channel can be maintained in the use state (here, the use state by “countdown sound” that does not show any degree of expectation). Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses, This makes it possible to avoid occurrence of a situation in which another sound that is not known when it will end is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

  Until the predetermined time (30 seconds) during which the channel reservation process is executed has elapsed, the player plays the game so that the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 receives a game ball. (Handle operation). As a result, as shown in FIG. 169, a first prize (first reservation), a second prize (second reservation), a third prize (third reservation), and a fourth prize (fourth reservation) are generated. Then, a process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the suspension occurs. However, as described above, while the “countdown sound” is being reproduced (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the result of the determination according to the prize is that the determination result indicating that the prefetch effect is to be performed (prefetched winning). Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, quine) is not assigned to a channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a state of waiting for execution. The special sound (e.g., quine) thus placed in an execution waiting state is to be output as a post notification sound that is output after the winning at a timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tY11. Become.

  On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds the hand and starts the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation processing) on his / her own initiative and ends the time (timing tY11 to tY12). If no prize has been generated or a special determination result has not been obtained although a prize has been generated (the prefetching effect has not been won), even if the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown voice” ends, a special No sound is played.

  According to such a configuration, during a period from when the player holds his hand to start the reproduction of the “countdown voice” (channel reservation processing) on his / her own initiative and ends this (timing tY11 to tY12). When a prize is generated and a special judgment result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the judgment according to the prize, a special sound (quein) is not output at that time, and the “countdown sound” is output. This is executed as a post-notification effect in which the output is performed at the timing when the channel is ended and a channel becomes empty. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a vacant channel, even though a special determination result (prefetching win) is obtained. Further, even if a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained at any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12, a special sound (quein) corresponding to the special determination result (quein) is generated at one timing when at least one channel becomes empty. Since the reproduction is performed aiming at tY12, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not a special sound (quein) is generated at the timing tY12, and a special determination result (pre-reading) can be obtained within a relatively long time between the timings tY11 to tY12. (Winning) can be easily recognized.

  When the special sound (quein) is to be output as such a post-notification sound, the channel may be assigned to any of the channels that are idle at the timing tY12 and reproduced. However, if the special sound (quein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the “countdown sound” has been assigned, the channel reservation processing and the subsequent announcement effect corresponding to only one channel can be performed. It can be said that it is useful in that it can be realized, and it is possible to expand the range of production in a limited number of channels.

  Further, in this embodiment, with respect to the prayer mode background display in which “Torii of the shrine” is displayed as a background image, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “voice of countdown” is ended, and the reproduction of a special sound (Kuin) are performed. The display is continued even after the end timing comes. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands so that the channel reservation process is performed again each time the number of reservations decreases. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when holding your hand when "Shrine Torii" is displayed as a background image (the probability that a special sound will be played at the timing of later notice) from Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation processing is satisfied (for example, a release operation using a button). However, in practice, the player holds his hand even when "Shrine Torii" is displayed as a background image or "Shrine Torii" is not displayed as a background image. When this is detected sometimes, only the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the assigned state by the predetermined sound (countdown sound) for the predetermined time is performed, and therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” ends. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at a timing at which the reproduction of the special sound (quein) as the later notification sound ends.

  If the player again detects his hand during the period from the timing tY11 to the timing tY12 and detects this, the reproduction time of the “countdown voice” is continued until a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the detection again. May be extended so that a special sound corresponding to the pre-read winning is output when the timing comes.

  In addition, such a prayer production mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol change is in a changing state but also when the pattern change is not in a changing state. You may make it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor or an action to be detected by the contact type sensor such as a predetermined button operation.

  However, when the special sound (Cuin) is output as such a subsequent announcement sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize ( Since it is difficult to determine which of the second prize, the third prize (third prize), and the fourth prize (fourth prize) resulted in a special judgment result (prefetch win), the prefetch win There is a concern that the entertainment of the game may be reduced due to the reservation being exhausted without recognizing that the reservation has been made. On the other hand, the content reproduced as the special sound is not a uniform sound (here, “Cuin”) but a first prize (first hold), a second prize (second hold), and a third prize (first It is also conceivable to make the setting different depending on which of the three prizes (fourth prize) and the fourth prize (fourth prize) is selected. However, in this case, since the content changed from the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation processing is not executed (here, “Quine”), it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead has been won. It is feared that it will disappear.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, a special determination result is obtained at any of the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). Depending on whether or not (prefetching win) has been obtained, a process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, “Cuin”) started from timing tY12 is performed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 169, it is assumed that a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the first prize (first hold) which wins at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, “Quine”) is reproduced for three seconds from the timing tY12.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 170, a case where a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the second prize (second hold) which has been won at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. In this case, it is assumed that the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Note that, here, the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, and when a special sound (here, “Cuin”) is reproduced for 6 seconds, “Cuin” is reproduced twice. Then, a sound in a form such as "quen quinn" is output.

  On the other hand, in the example illustrated in FIG. 171, it is assumed that a special determination result (pre-read winning) is obtained in the third prize (third hold) that has been won at a relatively late timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, “Cuin”) is reproduced for 9 seconds, “Cuin” will be 3 The sound is reproduced in batches and a sound in a form such as “quen quinquen” is output.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 172, it is assumed that a special determination result (pre-reading win) is obtained in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which is won at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. In this case, since the time required to reproduce “Cuin” once is 3 seconds, when reproducing a special sound (here, “Cuin”) for 12 seconds, “Cuin” is 4 The sound is reproduced in batches, and a sound in a form such as “Cuin Cuin Cuin” is output.

  According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (prefetched winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, and also, the timing It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (pre-read winning) has been obtained in a winning. In this example, it is suggested that as the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is shorter, a special determination result (prefetched winning) is obtained in a winning that occurs at an earlier timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is, the longer the time between the timings tY11 and tY12 indicates that a special determination result (prefetched winning) has been obtained in a prize that occurred at a later timing. .

  In this example, it may be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained in accordance with the prize. Thus, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is varied as described above. However, in place of this, in consideration of the fact that the number of holds is limited to a maximum of four, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, a special sound "Quine" 1 is obtained regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second time, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, the special sound is set to the reproduction time for two times of “Quine” regardless of the prize timing, and the special judgment is made in the third prize If the result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for three times of “Quine” regardless of the winning timing, and if the special result is obtained in the fourth winning, the special sound is performed regardless of the winning timing May be set to the reproduction time for four times of “Cuin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a prefetching win is obtained, “Kein” is reproduced as a special sound. However, a first judgment result (for example, a relatively The reproduction content of the special sound may be changed depending on which of a low prefetching win and a second determination result (for example, a relatively high expectation prefetching win) is obtained. For example, when a first determination result (for example, a prefetching win with relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination when a prize is won, “Quine” is reproduced as a special sound, whereas the prefetching when a prize is won is performed. If the second determination result (pre-reading winning with a relatively high expectation) is obtained in the determination, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, the timing occurs at any one of the timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to the prediction as to whether a prefetching win has been obtained in the prize, the first judgment result (prefetching win with a relatively low expectation) and the second judgment result (prefetching win with a relatively high expectation) are determined as prefetching wins. It is also possible to make a prediction as to which was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce “Kuin” or “Dokan” as a special sound in accordance with the determination result even in the prefetching effect when the channel reservation processing is not executed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the first determination result (the prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) in the prefetching determination in the first prize (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and a second determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) winning at an extremely late timing. In this case, however, the special sound is reproduced in a "Cuin" manner for three seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in a "Dokan" manner for another nine seconds.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Kuin” mode is 3 seconds, the first prize (the first prize winning) at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 ( It becomes possible to predict that a first determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the (first hold). In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was confirmed that the pre-reading was won in the pre-reading determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which was won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, in response to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the prefetching determination in the first winning (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound has been reproduced in the mode of “Dokan” after the end of the one “Quin” that has been played back, the second look-ahead determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) It is possible to predict that a determination result (pre-read winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) has been obtained.

  Alternatively, when a first determination result (first-look winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the pre-reading determination according to the winning in the first starting port 2002, “Quine” is reproduced as a special sound. In the case where a second determination result (prefetched winning on the second special figure side) is obtained in the prefetching determination according to the winning in the second starting port 2004, “Dokan” may be reproduced as a special sound. . In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading judgment according to the winning in the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading judgment according to the winning in the second starting port 2004. It is desirable to reproduce "Cuin" or "Dokan" as a special sound depending on whether there is any.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 173 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the “Kuin” mode is 3 seconds, the timing tY11 to tY12 The first prize (first hold) that has been won at an extremely early timing in the interval is a prize to the first starting opening 2002 side, and the first determination result (first special figure side) in the prefetch determination corresponding thereto. It is possible to predict that a prefetching win has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound itself has been performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the pre-reading is also won in the pre-reading determination in the fourth prize (fourth hold) which is won at an extremely late timing. It can be grasped. Further, in response to the fact that the first determination result (prefetching winning on the first special figure side) has been obtained in the prefetching determination in the first winning (first hold) winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. The fourth prize (fourth hold) is placed on the second starting port 2004 side by confirming that the special sound is being reproduced in the “Dokan” mode after the end of one “Quin” that has been played back. , And it is possible to predict that a second determination result (prefetching winning on the second special figure side) has been obtained by the prefetching determination corresponding thereto.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the specific winning opening while executing the channel reservation processing, , A case where a prefetching win in a prefetching effect is obtained. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173 is basically a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and a special process is performed in the determination process. Channel control (such as channel reservation processing) which has a technical feature in itself that can avoid the case where a special sound is output when a determination result is obtained and a shortage of channels occurs so that output cannot be performed. Therefore, it is obvious that the application example is not necessarily limited to the prefetching winning in the prefetching effect.

[Channel Restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment monitors the number of available channels during the progress of the game, and when the number of available channels is less than a predetermined number, at least some of the various game sounds are played. The rate at which the execution of processing related to output is restricted is increased (channel use restriction). That is, in this case, for at least a part of the game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of available channels becomes zero, and the execution is performed as the number of available channels approaches zero. Since the rate of restriction increases, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of available channels to zero.

  More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, each time a symbol change according to the jackpot determination in the suspended state is exhausted (every time the starting condition is satisfied), the consumed symbol variation is reduced. The channel availability during the execution period is determined. As a result, when there is room in the channel availability, the rate at which channel use is restricted (the channel restriction level) is reduced until at least the symbol fluctuation, which is the determination target, is terminated, and the channel availability is reduced. If there is no room for the situation, the rate at which the channel use is restricted (the channel restriction level) is increased at least until the symbol fluctuation, which is the determination target, is terminated at least, and the channel restriction using such symbol fluctuation as one unit is set. By executing, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of empty channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation to be determined is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and the higher the level value, the higher the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the process related to the setting of the channel restriction level.

  Now, it is assumed that it is determined that a pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, as shown in FIG. 174, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first resets the value of the previously set channel limit level as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol change is completed.

  Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, the symbol, Identify "X" which is the number of free channels (the minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the channel becomes the least available within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when symbols are stopped without the reach effect being started) I do. In addition, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern, the channel is set within the period of the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol fluctuation). "Y", which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing at which there is no free space.

  However, when an effect pattern in which the symbol effect is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to “the latter half of the change” is not performed. In this case, the next step processing is performed without performing the processing in step S3103 itself, or the maximum numerical value that can be set as the number of vacant channels “Y” in the processing in step S3103 (a numerical value that is not subject to channel limitation) Will be set.

  Next, as the process of step S3104, “X” specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with “Y” specified in the process of step S3103, and among these “X” and “Y”, Is set based on the value on the side with the smallest number of free channels (the side on which there is no room for the number of free channels) of at least until the symbol fluctuation to be determined is completed at least. As a result, during the period from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation that is the determination target, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. In addition, it is expected that the number of empty channels is hardly reduced to zero, and a decrease in gaming interest due to appearance of an unintended effect is expected.

  In this embodiment, when setting the channel limit level, the “minimum number of free channels” used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the change (step S3102) and the second half of the change (step S3103). I have to do that. This is because the effect contents in the first half of the change (the period from the start of the pattern change to the start of the reach effect) are shared by a plurality of effect patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Because the number of available channels is often specified, specifying the minimum number of available channels in the first half of the fluctuation can reduce the data amount required to specify the minimum number of available channels. .

  However, the minimum number of available channels used for setting the channel limit level does not necessarily need to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. The number of vacant channels (minimum vacant channel number) may be specified with one pattern as a unit, based on the timing at which the channel has the least vacancy within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

  In addition, the “minimum number of free channels” here means a sound (BGM-related, a symbol stop related to a big hit determination, a big hit determination, and a big hit determination) that is automatically generated when the performance pattern (production content) to be determined advances. This indicates only how many channels are left empty when they are assigned to each channel only for related sound effects. Therefore, a button pressing sound (a sound accompanying an effect generated based on a button operation, etc.), a volume adjustment completion sound, various notification sounds, a block winning sound (a sound accompanying a winning in a general winning opening), a holding winning sound (first sound) Production patterns (production contents) to be determined, such as a sound accompanying a winning in the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), a general electric production sound (a sound associated with the production in accordance with the normal pattern determination), etc. are developed. However, various sounds that are not necessarily executed only by sound are not included in the judgment.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating values of the channel limit levels set separately for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the content of the limit set separately for the channel limit levels. .

  As shown in FIG. 175, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, among the various game sounds, the block prize sound (the prize to the general prize port) among the various game sounds is set as the channel use restriction target sound. ), Hold winning sound (sound associated with winning in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004), general electric sound (sound accompanying the effect according to the normal design judgment), volume adjustment completion sound Is exemplified. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol fluctuation in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) out of various game sounds. Restrictions on channel use can occur.

  More specifically, when the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “0”. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the symbol fluctuation is executed in a state where the available channels have room, and the sounds (block prize sound, hold prize sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) which are subject to the channel use restriction are determined. None of them are limited, and if there is a prize in the general winning opening during the execution of the symbol change, a block winning sound is allocated to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and during the execution of the symbol change, the first starting port 2002 or If there is a winning in the second starting port 2004, a reserved winning sound is allocated to a predetermined empty channel and reproduced, and during the execution of the symbol change, when an effect according to the determination of the ordinary symbol is performed, a general sound corresponding to the effect is obtained. The electric performance sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to this is assigned to the predetermined empty channel. Ri applied to the be played.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction is performed based on the association shown in FIG. Set the level to “1”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation with a little room in the empty channel is being executed, and four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary electric production sound, volume adjustment completion (Sound), a restriction on channel use (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when a winning in the general winning opening is detected during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, payout of the prize balls in an amount corresponding to the winning is performed, but the block winning sound is changed to a predetermined value. Processing is performed so as not to allocate to an empty channel. In this case, it is desirable that the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening is not set and the block winning sound itself is not reproduced.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum vacant channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. Set to “2”. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the symbol variation is performed in a vacant channel with a relatively small margin, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary electric production sound, volume adjustment) which are subject to the channel use restriction are set. Of the completion sounds), a channel use restriction (50% restriction) is generated for two sounds, a block winning sound and a holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restriction on the block prize sound, if a prize is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the prize is detected. Although the payout of the minute prize balls and the above-described first and second start-up opening prize processing are performed, the processing is performed so that the reserved prize sound is not allocated to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable that the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is not set, and the reproduction of the reserved winning sound itself is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the “minimum free channel number” specified in the processing in step S3103 is either 0 or 1, the processing in step S3104 determines the channel restriction level based on the association shown in FIG. Is set to “3”. In other words, in this case, it is assumed that there is a situation in which a symbol variation having no margin in an empty channel is executed, and the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, ordinary production sound, volume adjustment completion) which are subject to channel use restriction are set. A limit (100% limit) of channel use is generated for all of the sounds. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-described restrictions on the block winning sound and the restriction on the holding winning sound, even if an effect according to the determination of the ordinary symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the general electric sound is not affected. Is not assigned to a predetermined free channel. Also, if there is a volume adjustment operation by the player during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the operation, but the volume adjustment completion sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to them should not be set, and the reproduction of the sound of the general electric production sound and the volume adjustment completion sound should not be performed. Is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, in the course of the game, when a symbol change in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is allocated is less than the predetermined number is performed, the number of the empty channels becomes predetermined. As compared with the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least some of the various game sounds is increased. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound), the output is output from a stage before the number of available channels actually becomes zero. Since the execution of the related processing is restricted, and the rate of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes zero during the execution of symbol fluctuation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be appropriately suppressed.

  Further, in the above configuration, among the various game sounds, the sound subject to the channel use restriction is not the most important “production sound related to the jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 but the other “sound associated with the prize”. "," Production sound related to normal judgment ", and" sound related to volume adjustment ". In other words, even if a restriction on the use of the channel is generated during the execution of the symbol change, the effect as to whether or not a big hit symbol appears in the symbol change is suitably performed without being restricted, so during the execution of the symbol change, The decrease in entertainment interest when the use of the channel is restricted is suppressed.

  In the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of sounds (block winning sounds, holding winning sounds, general electric production sounds, volume adjustment completion sounds) are prepared as a plurality of types of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction among various game sounds. As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of vacant channels, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of types of sounds subject to channel use restriction is increased. However, a method of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output from a stage before the number of empty channels actually becomes 0, and increasing the rate of execution restriction as the number of empty channels decreases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a method described below with reference to FIG. 176 may be adopted.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content determined for each channel restriction level.

  As shown in FIG. 176, in this alternative example, according to the “minimum free channel number” specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104, the channel is used. A restriction lottery on whether or not to restrict is performed. However, here, a plurality of sounds which are candidates for the channel use restriction are not prepared, and when a determination result indicating that restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained, one game sound (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound) ) Only for the channel use.

  For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and Restriction processing related to channel use is not performed on a specific game sound to be restricted (for example, a volume adjustment completion sound).

  However, when the channel restriction level is 1 or more, the probability that a determination result indicating that restriction is to be applied in the restriction lottery is increased as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum vacant channel). When the number is 6 to 11), the probability is 25/100. When the channel restriction level is 2 (the minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), the probability is 50/100. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), the probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when a determination result indicating that a restriction is imposed in the restriction lottery is obtained, the restriction processing relating to channel use is executed with the same content regardless of the channel restriction level.

  Even with such a configuration, if a symbol change in which the number of empty channels to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number is performed during the game, the number of the empty channels is reduced. As compared with the case where the symbol variation that does not become less than the predetermined number is executed, the rate of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least some of the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sound), there is a limit to the execution of the processing related to the output from a stage before the number of available channels actually becomes zero. Since the rate of execution restriction is increased as the number of available channels is reduced and the number of available channels is reduced, it is preferable to prevent occurrence of a situation where the number of available channels becomes zero during execution of symbol fluctuation. It is expected to be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the specific sound (volume adjustment completion sound) is reproduced during the symbol variation execution period, so that the minimum vacant channel during the symbol variation execution period is confirmed. This makes it possible to estimate the possibility that the number will run out, and promotes the progress of the game (winning, button operation, etc.) according to the estimation.

  In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176, after executing a judgment process relating to various announcement effects based on the effect pattern, the minimum number of free channels is identified from the occurrence state of the announcement effects, and the identified minimum idle channel is determined. Although the channel limit level is set based on the number of channels, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance for each effect pattern how many sounds will be simultaneously allocated to channels during the symbol fluctuation period, the likelihood of a channel shortage occurring for each effect pattern is classified in advance. Keep it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the rate at which the effect pattern is limited may be increased as the likelihood of shortage of channels in which the effect pattern is classified in advance increases. In other words, in this case, when a specific type of effect pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, there is no actual button operation or various winnings do not occur, many channels are not used, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a margin, the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be limited during the execution of the symbol fluctuation, but the vacant channel is obtained only by performing the simple processing. Is very useful in that it is possible to prevent the number of channels from becoming zero, and even when such processing is executed, the relative number of empty channels during symbol fluctuation is relatively small. When the number is small, the ratio of execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted, and when the number of available channels is relatively large during the symbol change, the output rate is related to the output of the game sound. Phenomena that the execution of the process is restricted is reduced, "and it is expected that the gaming entertainment will be maintained in a favorable manner since the player does not feel uncomfortable. become. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it is possible to estimate the possibility of an effect pattern in which channel shortage is likely to occur.

  In addition, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is performed with the symbol variation as one unit. The restriction level may be varied, and the channel restriction may be performed according to the channel restriction level in each case. Or, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is not changed at a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

  By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 175 and 176 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted in channel use is not the most important “effect sound related to the jackpot determination” in the pachinko machine 1 but other sounds. Only "sounds associated with winning", "production sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment" are adopted. However, since these sounds include those having a lower frequency of occurrence than the effect sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that can more effectively secure an empty channel, it is necessary to use “related to big hit determination”. It is desired that the effect sound is also adopted as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, when the above-described restriction processing is performed on the “production sound related to the jackpot determination”, there is a concern that the production sound may not be reproduced, resulting in a production lacking in excitement. If the big hit symbol is stopped in a certain situation, there is a possibility that the gaming interest may decrease.

  In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176 and other examples thereof, among the “sound effects related to the jackpot determination”, only the effects related to “effects related to symbol fluctuations that are on hold and will be consumed in the future”. If the use of the sound channel is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 176 or another example thereof), the effect related to the result of the symbol variation during execution may be reduced. Thus, it is possible to adopt the effect sound having a high frequency of occurrence as a restriction target without any restriction.

  For example, when a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the period in which the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the prize is put on hold, the holding is normally performed. A determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect with respect to the jackpot determination made in the state is performed. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that indicates in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the held jackpot determination is to win the jackpot is performed. Become.

  However, when the number of used channels becomes large and there is anxiety about the availability (such as a state in which the symbol fluctuation with the minimum number of available channels of 0 or 1 is being executed), the channel usage is restricted and the status of “hold status” If the target sound is a “sound effect according to the effect related to the pattern fluctuation that will be consumed in the future”, a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the jackpot determination according to this is suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process for the prefetching effect itself is not executed for the jackpot determination put on hold, so that both the prefetching effect and the effect sound corresponding thereto are not performed. In this case, the look-ahead effect is not only a hold change in the game board effect display device 1600, but also a predetermined effect change (effect sound or a sound corresponding to the look-ahead determination) in a different effect means (sub liquid crystal, lamp, etc.). When the execution is performed to generate an effect change that is performed in accordance with the hold change or the like, not only the hold change in the game board effect display device 1600 but also a different effect means (such as a sub liquid crystal or a lamp) is used. It is more desirable to limit a predetermined effect change so as not to be performed in order to suppress a sense of incongruity (direct effect deviation) when a specific effect sound is not assigned as a channel shortage countermeasure.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of used channels increases and anxiety arises in the vacant space, the channel portion allocated to the effect relating to the design change in the future which is not the running pattern change is executed. Because it is possible to supply the effect sound related to the fluctuation of the effect, the effect related to the result of the pattern change during execution is not affected at all, Will be able to In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "effect relating to the change of the symbol in the future in the unexecuted state". Since the effect during the change of the symbol (effect content according to the effect pattern) which is not performed is always executed, the decrease in the entertainment interest due to the restriction of the effect is appropriately suppressed.

  Further, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, a process is performed in which a specific sound is not output when a “predetermined effect condition” that causes concern about the number of available channels is satisfied. did. However, even in a case where “predetermined rendering conditions” are not satisfied and there is no concern about the number of available channels, a process for restricting a specific sound from being output under predetermined conditions is performed. May be executed. For example, when a specific condition different from “predetermined effect conditions” is satisfied, an effect state (effect period) in which a specific sound cannot be output over a plurality of symbol changes is generated. According to such a configuration, a special effect state (effect period) in which there is a margin in the number of available channels over a plurality of symbol fluctuations appears, and in the special effect state (effect period), the special effect state is provided. You will be able to perform other productions more aggressively.

  In addition, when the “effect sound related to big hit determination” is set as the restriction target, if only the production sound of the production (production display, production sound) is set as the restriction target (no sound output), the production lacks in excitement. However, in the above configuration, if the number of used channels becomes large and the space becomes uneasy, the jackpot is determined and the jackpot determination is suspended. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect is not performed, and both the effect display and the effect sound for the look-ahead effect are not performed. Therefore, a special result (a look-ahead winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. It is only in the same production situation as when it was performed (hold display when the look-ahead production is not executed), and it is preferable to appropriately avoid a decrease in gaming interest due to the production execution lacking in excitement It becomes possible way.

  In addition, when the “sound related to the jackpot determination” is set as a restriction target, when a prize is won and the jackpot determination is put on hold, the judgment processing for the look-ahead effect itself is not performed, and the effect display and the effect related to the look-ahead effect are performed. The sound and both are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the "effect sound related to the jackpot determination" is to be restricted, the determination process for the look-ahead effect is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, and restricts them, so that when the specific timing during the symbol change arrives, only the effect on the effect display of the effect display and the effect sound May be canceled to perform this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the pre-reading effect is performed in a special mode (timing) different from when the “effect sound related to the big hit determination” is not set as the restriction target (normal time), and the special effect is performed. Since the look-ahead effect will be executed after showing as if the result (look-ahead winning) was not obtained, the look-ahead effect is suppressed while suppressing the decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the effect sound according to the look-ahead effect is not output. It can be suitably performed.

In addition, as a process related to a future effect in a situation where channel use is restricted, a determination process for a look-ahead effect is performed when a prize is won, but even when a special result is obtained, a specific timing during a symbol change arrives Until both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed and these are limited, and when a specific timing during the symbol change arrives, the effect display and the effect sound for the effect display A configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed is referred to as a first restriction processing,
The game proceeds when the configuration in which the determination process regarding the look-ahead effect is not executed itself when a prize is won, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed is the second lower limit process. Among them, when the symbol fluctuation in which the number of empty channels to which sound is not allocated is less than a predetermined number is performed, compared to the case where the symbol fluctuation in which the number of the empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is performed. Thus, the rate at which one of the first restricted processing and the second restricted processing is executed is increased, and the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing was performed is set. Let the expected value of the number of channels used in “A” be “A”, and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second limited processing is performed be “B”. When it As the relationship is relation of "A <B", it is more desirable that the one of those first restriction under treatment and the second restriction under processing is executed. In other words, in this case, as the number of used channels increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, instead of the first under-limit processing in which only the production sound is restricted, both the production display and the production sound are restricted. Since the rate at which the channel is restricted is increased by the second restriction sub-process, the feeling of anxiety when the number of used channels is increased is expected to be more appropriately suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the sound assigned to the finite channel includes the first group sound in which the effect volume can be adjusted by the operation reception by the player, and the effect sound cannot be adjusted by the operation reception by the player. At least to a second group sound (such as an error sound). In this regard, when a "predetermined effect condition" that causes a concern about the number of available channels is satisfied, limiting only the sound that is distinguished as the first group sound may cause the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. It is desirable to appropriately execute the processing when it occurs.

  Further, the limited channels are divided into a plurality of groups including at least a first channel group to which a production sound can be assigned and a second channel group to which a notification sound (error sound) different from the production sound can be assigned. If it is determined that the number of empty channels to which no sound is assigned in the first channel group is reduced to less than a predetermined number, the symbol effect display execution period is set to be empty in the first channel group. Compared with the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific sound to the effect state in which the specific sound is not newly assigned to the channel of the first channel group is higher. " As described above, it is possible to execute the processing only for the first channel group when an error occurs. And performing the definitive processing more reliably desirable in terms of both possible to reduce the processing load.

  In addition, as described above, in the configuration illustrated in FIG. 176 or another example thereof, “the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels to which no sound is allocated is reduced to less than a predetermined number is empty. Compared to the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number, the ratio of the specific effect sound that is not newly assigned to the channel is at a higher ratio. " There are features. In this regard, if the execution period of the symbol effect display, in which the number of available channels is reduced to less than the predetermined number, is processed as “an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel”, As soon as the execution period related to the symbol effect display ends, the “effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel” can be canceled (terminated). On the other hand, when the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of empty channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as “the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel”, An effect state (an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel) must always be continued over a plurality of symbol changes including the symbol effect display even after the symbol effect display ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the execution period of the symbol effect display in which the number of available channels is not reduced to less than the predetermined number is processed as "the effect state in which the specific effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel". Although the ratio is low, once this is processed, the effect state is prolonged without being easily ended, during which time the specific effect sound cannot be output. In other words, in this case, when a “production state in which a specific production sound is not newly allocated to a channel” appears, the special production performance (the symbol production display reduces the number of available channels to less than a predetermined number) Effect of the game) can be added, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Further, in an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel, a specific image that can be displayed only in the effect state may be displayed. According to such a configuration, by displaying the specific image, it is possible to recognize that the specific effect sound is in an effect state in which a new effect sound is not newly assigned to the channel.

  In addition, the specific image can appear at a plurality of timings in one symbol change, and if it is displayed as an image having different contents (appearance, form, etc.) at each timing, any one of the plurality of timings can be used. Even if there is an image of content that the player does not know (look, shape, etc.), the image is displayed at other timings or other content (look, shape, etc.) As a result, it is possible to more reliably recognize that the sound is in an effect state in which a specific effect sound is not newly assigned to a channel.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in an output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is reduced, In the state where the sound volume is lowered (suppressed state), a process of ending the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed. Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed, a process of increasing the volume of another game sound which is continuously assigned to the channel can be executed (special channel opening process).

  According to such a configuration, the use state is aimed at at a timing in a state where it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the mode of channel assignment of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is reduced (suppression state)). Is decreased (the number of empty channels is increased). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice that the game has been performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the specific game sound is no longer output.

  FIG. 177 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such a channel special release process is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, during the period in which the symbol change according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tk11, the predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board effect display device 1600 is developed. Of the “normal BGM playback” corresponding to the playback channel 02, 03 and played back (here, stereo playback), and according to the effect A displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The sound of “effect A playback” is assigned to the playback channels 08 and 09 and is being played back (here, stereo playback).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction and effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is a stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of symbol fluctuation), the reproduction channels 08 and 09 are removed and the reproduction is ended. In this way, even when the predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of the effect, by ending the effect sound assignment from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel, the effect contents of the predetermined effect pattern can be obtained. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a new sound cannot be allocated and reproduced due to lack of available channels when progressing.

  However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is in the stage of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation), the effect sound is deallocated from the channel and changed to an empty channel. Since the number of effect sounds in the reproduction state is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears in the effect pattern is reduced by the reduced amount.

  Therefore, in this description example, as shown in FIG. 177 (a), first, the sound of “effect A playback” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback ending timing tk13 before the timing tk13 arrives. During the period from “timing tk12” to “timing tk14” after the timing tk13, the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 is played. It is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to be in a reproduction (here, stereo reproduction) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of “effect B playback” is in the playback state, the timing tk13 at which the playback of “effect A playback” ends. In response to the arrival of the sound, a process of lowering the sound volume (volume suppressing process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” are allocated to channels.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), the sound of “reproduction B reproduction” in this description example is output as a production sound corresponding to a step production in which the production contents can be developed up to four times. After the effect contents have evolved three times (step 1, step 2, step 3) sequentially, whether or not the effect is further developed to the effect contents according to step 4 is executed. Thus, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” corresponding to the step effect are assigned to channels. When the volume suppression processing is terminated and the volume is returned to the normal volume, if a high-expected effect mode that further develops to the effect content according to step 4 appears (an effect with a relatively high expectation), While the specific effect sound corresponding to the effect content of step 4 is output as the sound of “effect B playback”, the effect content according to step 3 does not evolve to the effect content according to step 4 When a low expected effect mode in which the effect is finished appears (an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation), an effect sound different from the specific effect sound is output as the sound of “effect B playback”.

  According to such a configuration, an effect design is made in which the timing tk13 arrives at a time when the sound volume suppression processing is performed on a plurality of effect sounds. Since the sound of “play” is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use is reduced (the sound of “staging A playback” is changed to the non-play state). Has been done).

  In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (c), the effect contents having a relatively high expectation (the effect contents developing to step 4) and the effect contents having a relatively low expectation (the step contents) 4 during the period (the period during which it is unclear whether or not to develop) that the effect content (the effect of whether or not to develop to step 4) appears to be linked to any of the above. The sound volume suppression processing is executed, and the sound of “effect A reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 to terminate the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only is the situation where the volume of the production sound is reduced, but also the interest itself of the player is strongly attracted to the production B (the sound of “production B reproduction”). Then, the effect A (the sound of "effect A playback") is ended, and thereafter, the volume of the effect sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "effect B playback" was returned. In some cases, even if the sound of "reproduction A is not reproduced", the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing into step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (the production content having a relatively low expectation) ( (The effect content that does not evolve to step 4) appears, and it becomes possible to make it harder to notice that the sound of "effect A playback" is no longer reproduced.

  Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this example, the volume is lowered while a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of “effect B playback” are assigned to channels, but all effect sounds are reduced. The sound volume is not reduced, and a specific effect sound (here, the sound of “normal BGM reproduction”) is continuously reproduced at the normal sound volume. In other words, in this case, the volume of a plurality of production sounds (sounds of "normal BGM reproduction") is reduced while the volume of the plurality of production sounds is being reproduced as usual without suppressing the volume, and thus the sounds are distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of “effect A playback” is terminated while the sound of “effect A playback” is stopped, the sound of “effect A playback” can no longer be noticed. Become like

  Furthermore, in this example of the description, the sound reproduction of the “production A reproduction” is not ended immediately after the volume suppression processing is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the volume suppression processing. After the elapsed timing tk13 arrives, the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated. In other words, immediately after the start of the volume suppression process, there is a possibility that the player's interest may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of “volume decrease” has occurred, but the volume decreases to a specific value. If the state in which the value does not change with the specific value is maintained for a predetermined period of time, it is assumed that such an interest has already faded. By ending the reproduction of the sound, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

  In particular, in this example, the effect sound to be subjected to the sound volume suppression process is stepwise decreased in volume, and after the sound volume becomes 0 (silence), the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” is ended. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to notice that the sound of "reproduction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound of “effect B playback” is started to be reproduced while the sound of “effect A playback” is being played back. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the state where the sound of "effect B playback" is being played, the sound of "effect A playback" is started to be played, and while the sound of "effect B playback" is being played in the suppressed state, "effect A playback" May be ended.

  Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be effects accompanied by an effect display on the game board effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, only sound effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the timing tk12 at which the sound of "reproduction B reproduction" is reproduced comes as the fluctuation pattern (producing pattern) according to the big hit determination is developed. Not limited. For example, based on an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410), the sound of “effect B playback” is started to be reproduced, and the sound of “effect A playback” is reproduced while the sound of “effect B playback” is reproduced. May be terminated in the manner described above.

  Further, the effect sound to be subjected to the sound volume suppression processing does not necessarily have to be stepwise decreased in sound volume. Conversely, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. Also, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower level than normal, it is difficult for the user to notice that the reproduction of the sound of “effect A reproduction” has ended. Is possible.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177, a specific effect sound (in this case, the sound of “normal BGM playback”) corresponding to the effect pattern is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal sound volume is maintained. Although the playback is continued, the volume of all effect sounds may be reduced when the volume suppression processing is performed. Conversely, with respect to the sound of “reproduction A playback”, the volume may be maintained without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression processing is performed. While the player's interest in the sound of “production B playback” is in the state of being played, the reproduction of the sound of “production A playback” is terminated, and then the sound of “production B playback” is also included. Even if the sound of “effect A playback” is not reproduced when the volume of a plurality of effect sounds targeted for volume suppression is returned, the effect contents with relatively high expectation (step 4). The sound of "production A reproduction" is reproduced by attracting interest in which one of the production contents that have developed into the "A" and the production contents with relatively low expectations (the production contents that do not develop into the step 4) appears. You can make it hard to notice that you are no longer Uninaru.

  In addition, at least during the time when the sound volume suppression process is performed during the effect pattern for reproducing the sound of “effect A playback” and “effect B playback” (after the volume of “effect B playback” is reduced from the normal value). Until the normal value is returned), even if a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in order to more appropriately maintain the interest in the sound of “staging B playback”, It is desirable not to reproduce the corresponding hold winning sound. Further, even if a special result (prefetching win) is obtained in the prefetching determination when a prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the prefetching effect is not reproduced. It is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177, the sound reproduction of “production A reproduction” is ended within the period in which the production sound is reduced in volume. Was increased (returned to the original volume value), but in addition to this, a special production sound that had not been assigned to the channel at the end of the period was added to the channel. It is also possible to newly assign and play (play at the normal volume). According to such a configuration, the user is interested in whether or not a special effect sound is reproduced when the volume is returned, and is further noticed by the fact that the sound of "effect A reproduction" is not reproduced. You can make it difficult. In addition, when the number of channels used after the volume is restored is lower than before the volume is decreased, there is a concern that the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation is reduced, but a special effect sound is generated. Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (played at the normal volume), so that before and after the volume is reduced, the same or more (two or more effect sounds are assigned to the channel) (When newly assigned), it is possible to use the channel, so that it is preferable that the player can feel as if the expectation had decreased. Will be avoided. In this case, there is a case where a special effect sound is reproduced when the volume is returned and a case where the special effect sound is not reproduced, so that it is suggested that the expectation degree is relatively high when the special effect sound is reproduced. It is desirable to do.

  When a special effect sound that has not been assigned to the channel when the volume is returned is newly assigned to the channel and played back, the channel that has become empty due to the removal of the sound assignment of “effect A playback” is removed. It is desirable to assign a special sound effect to the sound. According to such a configuration, a wide range of effects can be realized with a small number of channel resources.

  Further, such a channel special opening process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. "Effect A" is adopted as the symbol change, and the symbol variation is smaller when the minimum number of free channels is smaller (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when the number is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the number of available channels is large enough to prevent the user from feeling uneasy about lack of channels, it is possible to continuously output “effect A” without ending the process. become.

  In the above-described example, the “volume suppression effect” in which at least a portion of the game sounds among the game sounds is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, a specific type of effect pattern is executed (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination. ), And when the effect content reaches a specific timing, the effect is executed over a part of the period in the effect pattern. In this regard, the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “specific type effect patterns” that can generate such a volume suppression effect is prepared as “other effect patterns” that do not generate a volume suppression effect ( It is desirable to set the number of the effect patterns to be less than the stored number of effect patterns in order to improve the entertainment interest when the volume suppression effect occurs.

  In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as “effect patterns” that can generate a volume suppression effect, the effect patterns include an effect pattern for executing the volume suppression effect over a first set time and a time longer than the first set time. It is desirable to include an effect pattern for executing the sound volume suppression effect over the second set time, and to make the effect patterns differ in the degree of expectation that the big hit symbol appears. According to such a configuration, when at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the degree of the jackpot expectation is indicated by how long the state is continued. Will be able to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). When the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (A process of reflecting the sound volume set value as the sound volume). Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player with respect to the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume set value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 in which the “effect pattern capable of generating a volume suppression effect” can be selected, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the design change regardless of the effect pattern, Since the player who sees the state in which the sound is not output comes to be aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained. Note that in this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is desirable to make the user aware (aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but this is output at the volume 0, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  During the period in which at least some of the game sounds are output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, a “volume suppression effect” is being executed, and the expectation degree (including 100%) of the big hit symbol is suggested. It is desirable to perform an expected display (eg, an expected effect in which one of a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation appears). According to such a configuration, since the interest of the player is shifted to the expected display (expected effect), the sound of “effect A playback” is generated during the period in which the “volume suppression effect” is executed. It will be possible to make it more difficult for the user to notice the termination.

  When the "volume suppression effect" is executed and at least a part of the game sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the sound of the "effect B playback" is returned to a state in which the sound is output in an unsuppressed mode. At a predetermined timing before the timing arrives, new effect sound data different from any of the effect sounds (“normal BGM” or “effect A playback”) already in the output state is assigned to the channel, and the new effect sound is assigned. The sound corresponding to the data may be output in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, the sound corresponding to the new effect sound data is output in an unsuppressed mode while “effect B playback” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence mode. Since the sound of "reproduction B playback" is returned to the state of being output in the non-suppression mode while being output in the non-suppression mode, the sound of "reproduction A playback" has been terminated. Can be made more difficult to notice.

  During the period in which the “volume suppression effect” is executed, it is desirable that the display image on the effect display device 1600 is not displayed or displayed in a suppressed mode. However, in this case, it is desirable that the display image displayed on the effect display device 1600 includes an image that is not a target of the processing.

  In one effect pattern, a period during which the “volume suppression effect” is executed may appear multiple times, and in those periods, the length of “time during which at least a part of the game sound is output in the suppression mode or silence” It is desirable to make them different. According to such a configuration, in any effect scene, a specific effect sound can be set to a non-output state in a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. .

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the pachinko machine 1 starts the symbol variation until the symbol variation ends. During the period, the game board-side effect display device 1600 performs a process of developing a display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and allocates a sound of “BGM playback” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel for reproduction. Is performed. Then, when the display effect on the game board effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing in the symbol fluctuation period, the sound of “BGM playback” is kept assigned to the predetermined channel, and the sound is output in the suppressed mode or in silence ( When the volume of “BGM playback” is reduced to a specific value and output, and an operation on a predetermined operation unit (the operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, a big hit symbol (the corresponding A special effect sound indicating the degree of expectation that a special display mode (appearance display mode) appears in the effect pattern is output in a non-suppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested in the special effect may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in accordance with the operation detection, the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which there is likely to be room in the use state of the channel. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing anxiety, such as "maybe there is no available space in the channel and the special production sound cannot be output". Can be performed, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of “BGM playback”) is to be assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, the sound is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the processing of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (processing of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating a validity period for effect reception), a sound ("" It is possible to provide the player with an operation opportunity (generate a validity period for effect reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) in a suppressed mode or in a state where the sound is output in a silent state.

  However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, an effective period of effect reception is to be generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression processing is terminated and the volume is returned to the initial value when the operation (production acceptance) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to the sound is started at an uncertain timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”, and this is switched. It is also conceivable to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of “BGM playback” is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects from the stop of the specific effect pattern to the end of the effect, the timing of the symbol stop, and the like. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or is uncertain (depending on the player), if the operation (effect reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. In addition, there is a concern that a so-called sound gap may occur between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that, resulting in a decrease in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ("BGM playback" sound) corresponding to the specific effect pattern are stored. For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super-reach production, sound data during the second half of the super-reach production, etc.) are determined in a time series prescribed by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Processing for sequentially assigning to channels is performed. The specific sound data (one sound material) among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When the predetermined channel is allocated to the predetermined channel in a time-series manner, the reproduction is started by being allocated to the predetermined channel from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception in the specific directing pattern occurs, and the valid period ends. Then, the reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state to the predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the reproduction.

  In this regard, in a specific section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, compared to the other sections, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output with no sound. Is performed in advance, and when the specific sound data is allocated to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special Within the period), there is a chronological relationship in which the effective period of the effect reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the validity period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The special production sound according to the reception of the production is performed over the two sections in the specific sound data after the end of the (partial section) (the other section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, super sound data, Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect to the predetermined channels in the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, without performing volume adjustment from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output in a silence (special period)”. In addition, when an operation performed by the player is accepted in the “suppressed mode or the state in which the sound is output without sound (special period)” created in this way, a special process is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “suppressed or output in a silence state (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after this, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) ends in a manner that the special sound effect is sunk into the reproduced special sound effect. Since the data content of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” can be secretly returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It is possible to provide an effect sound without discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the special effect sound is not suppressed by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. Thus, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 178, a specific example when executing such suppressed operation sound output processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), during the period in which the symbol change according to the result of the big hit determination is being performed, at timing ts11, the identification effect that the effect is progressing on the game board effect display device 1600 is specified. Is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction). The sound of "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol change from the start of the symbol change to the end thereof when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each of those periods may be May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 178, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period (a part of the symbol fluctuation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Are assigned to the channels 02 and 03 and are in a reproduction state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At timing ts12, which is before timing ts13 at which an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) at which an operation opportunity to produce a production sound is given, silence data is set. It is set to a playback state in a partial section. As a result, even if the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is not adjusted from the initial value, the sound can be output without sound while the sound is allocated to a predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of “BGM playback” is in a playback state in a partial section set as silent data content, and there is likely to be room in the channel usage status. While the atmosphere is provided, it is possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing the feeling of anxiety that "there is no chance that the channel is full and the special production sound may not be output." It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, during the operation validity period according to this example, even when there is no operation by the player, the timing ts16 at which the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is ended. At the timing ts15 before the arrival of the game, the period is terminated so that the effect of the operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, even if an operation by the player is received at any timing during the operation validity period, the sound of “BGM reproduction” becomes a reproduction state in a partial section set as silent data content. In an atmosphere where there is likely to be room in the use state of the cage channel, a special effect sound according to the operation by the player can be generated. Note that the operation validity period is ended not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player but also when an effect by the player is accepted. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

  In this example, it is assumed that an effect by the player is received at timing ts14. Based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned is performed. , 03 different channels 08 and 09 are assigned special effect sounds for playback.

  In this regard, in this example, the maximum time (time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to “SY”, and the operation valid period is ended at the maximum time. When the time (time from the timing ts15 to the timing ts16) until the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” is “BF”, the operation is within the operation validity period. Even if the operation by the player is received at any of the timings, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain time of “SY + α (> BF)” and reproduced.

  According to such a configuration, even when an operation by the player is received at any timing within the operation validity period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. The sound of “BGM playback” can be output as an unsuppressed mode in such a manner as to be mixed into the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound to the output of the “BGM reproduction” sound in the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted, A buffer period for restoring the sound of "BGM playback" in a non-suppressed manner in the output period of the special effect sound (the sound of "BGM playback" is returned in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed into the special effect sound. The period of time during which the player does not notice that the sound of "BGM playback" is not returned as a non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is received, but is restored after a predetermined time. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound of “BGM reproduction” is restored as the data content of the sound for BGM reproduction (non-suppression mode), when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. The reproduction of the special effect sound is ended in the state.

  In the above description example, the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started” and the “timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended” are determined by the operation by the player as shown in FIG. 178 (b). Depending on the accepted timing, it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow, but whatever the timing, the timing ts16 arrives when the special effect sound is in the playback state. It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set as the sound of “BGM reproduction” is started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the user can further remember “uncomfortable feeling caused by returning the sound of“ BGM playback ”after a predetermined period of time without returning to the non-suppressed mode when an operation by the player is received”. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the sound of BGM reproduction to a reproduction state in a normal section while paying attention to a special effect sound having a large volume initial value.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, when an effect by the player is received, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception. However, a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination is given. A special effect sound may be generated based on the effect being received only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, even when the specific production condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when an operation by the player is received within the operation valid period, the effect is received. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is reproduced. Regardless of the operation performed at any time within the operation validity period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is also desirable to shift to the same manner as in the case of the example shown in FIG.

  However, in the case where a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced instead, the reproduction time is made shorter than in the case where the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even when the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the sound of the BGM reproduction is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is set to the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Is set to arrive after the end of. According to such a configuration, a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period during which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. Also, by setting such that a resurrection effect in which the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) increases during this silent period can be expected, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the symbol change is stopped in a loss mode without returning the sound of the BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. Is also good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the assignment of the sound of the BGM reproduction to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

  In addition, when a special effect sound is to be generated, a movable effect for operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception is also performed to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. This is desirable in that the reproduced sound is secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is silently output in some sections. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Whatever is output if is output. Here, examples of the suppressed aspect include an aspect in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, and an aspect in which the frequency of vibration of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to a predetermined channel itself is set in a time-series period in which the suppression mode or silence is set, so that the “BGM reproduction” Without adjusting the volume of the sound, it is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or without sound only by reproducing the sound. However, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel does not necessarily have to set the time-series period of the suppression mode or silence. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of “BGM reproduction” may not be set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (or mute). That is, in this case, even if an operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed with the reception of the effect. Not to be. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) is performed. On the other hand, when the specific production condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound or the like) is being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value from the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is completed. (A process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the symbol fluctuation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 178, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to generate a new sound assignment to an empty channel at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the timing ts12 arrives to a timing ts16. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric production sound, an adjustment sound, etc., have nothing to do with a result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change being executed. It is preferable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not reproduced without newly assigning it to a channel.

  Also, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific effect sound (BGM) is set on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. (It is desirable that the sound is not a music but an effect sound such as a sound effect or a dialogue sound) so as not to overlap with the sound.) While the specific effect sound is being played, the timing ts12 comes and the BGM playback Is desirably output in a suppressed mode or silent. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (at the timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable in relieving anxiety that a special sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not necessarily have to be reproduced at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives. The playback may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if the specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state, “ Since the sound of the BGM playback set to the “suppression mode or silence state” can be made to appear to be returned to the playback state in the normal mode, the sound of the BGM playback is set to the suppression mode or silence state. It is possible to make it hard to notice that

  Also, "the specific production sound is to be terminated before (or at or before) the timing ts14 at which the special production sound (or the predetermined production sound) is output". "The output of the specific effect sound is terminated based on the effect of the operation performed by the player within the operation valid period, or automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period)." Means that. In other words, if an operation by the player is not accepted until a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation validity period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

  When it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the effect sound is output on a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the silence state is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, the sound of the BGM reproduction can be easily mixed into the effect sound, and the sound of the BGM reproduction can be output normally. It is possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process may not necessarily be performed when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. For example, in the process described with reference to FIG. 175 and FIG. "Sound of BGM playback" is adopted as the restriction target, and the symbol fluctuation is smaller when the minimum number of free channels is smaller (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is smaller than a predetermined number, compared to when the number is not smaller than the predetermined number). The rate at which the suppressed operation sound output processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where the number of available channels is large enough to prevent a feeling of anxiety that a special effect sound is not output due to a shortage of channels, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without suppression or silence. Will be able to do it.

  Regarding the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if there is no operation, the effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

  In addition, when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) illustrated in FIG. 178 occurs, while the sound of “BGM playback” is being output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, the effect is accepted. A “acceptable sound” that indicates that the event is accepted (or that the effect acceptance is allowed) may be output in a non-suppressed manner. The “acceptable sound” is configured as a partial section in the “specific sound data” for outputting the “specific sound effect”, and the “specific sound data” is assigned to a channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, the “specific sound data” is assigned to the channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and the specific effect sound corresponding to this is output in a non-suppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the "acceptable sound" is output as a sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” is output before and after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to a precursor effect performed before the operation valid period occurs (a effect suggesting that the valid period will occur soon). In this case, in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to straddle before and after the timing ts13, a “reproduction section of the precursor effect sound” and a “reproduction section of the acceptable sound” are provided. The “acceptable sound” may be a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at the timing ts15. It is good, but when an effect is received while in the output state, it is desirable to set this to a non-output state in response to this.

  That is, “the acceptable sound is output” here means that “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing ts13, and that the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “acceptable acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data that has been made arrives at the timing ts13. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the “acceptable sound reproduction section” in the sound data is terminated and the sound data (including silence data) is reproduced.

  In the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, even if the effect is received at any timing within the validity period, the elapsed time from the effect reception is performed. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the sound of “BGM reproduction” is assigned.

  In this regard, when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), a special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is also displayed as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is performed reaches the predetermined time value". Rather, it is desirable to perform “display is not performed when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern has arrived, regardless of the effect received at any time within the validity period”. As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) in a period after timing ts15 and before timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must arrive before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, as for the processing relating to the special effect sound, the output state has to be continued until the timing at which the sound of “BGM playback” comes after the timing ts16 at which the sound is returned in an unsuppressed manner. However, the special production display can be ended before the special production sound, so that the production after the production after the operation can be developed with good tempo become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of “BGM playback” is restored, or as the timing arriving before the timing ts16. Is important.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), based on the fact that the effect has been received, “the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect was received is determined in advance. In parallel with the process for the special effect sound that keeps the output state until the specified time value is reached, and the process for the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Will be started respectively.

  For example, if an effect is received at a relatively early timing within the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process relating to the special effect display” of the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period. The “process relating to special effect sound” in the post-operation effect ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed from when the effect was received. On the other hand, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing within the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process relating to the special effect display” in the post-operation effect is executed only for a relatively short time. However, among the post-operation effects, the “process relating to the special effect sound” is executed from the time when the effect is received until the time when a predetermined time value elapses.

  That is, in this case, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 178, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), the output state is changed until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value. The function of executing the special effect sound to be continued and the process of the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives are executed.

  According to such an operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of the “processing related to special effect display” in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a cost, the end timing of the “processing relating to the special effect sound” in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the expiration of the validity period but is operated at a later time, the end timing of the “special effect sound processing” in the post-operation effect is set at a relatively late stage. However, there is a disadvantage that it is not possible to maintain a long execution state of the “processing relating to the special effect display” in the post-operation effects.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for producing a lively effect.
・ Whether to lengthen the execution state of the “special effects display processing” in exchange for speeding up the end of “special effects sound processing” and enjoy it (operating early in the validity period) Do) or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing for special effect display", whether to extend the time until "processing for special effect sound" is completed and enjoy it (at a later stage during the validity period) Do you operate) or
・ Simultaneously sacrificing the time during which the “processing for special effects display” is maintained as an execution state and the time until the “processing for special effects sound” ends, so as to balance the whole. (Do you operate at a timing that is neither early nor late during the validity period?)
To provide a strategic operation directing effect for the validity period itself such that the operation timing can be selected according to the mood of the player, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not easily cause boring. Will be able to

  Here, in the above-described example, as a post-operation effect when an effect is received during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), “processing relating to special effect sound” and “processing relating to special effect display” are performed. Although the description has been given of the example in which the "movement of predetermined effect movable body" is performed, "the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed instead of the "process for displaying the special effect display". May be executed. However, as for the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body", similarly to the case of the "process for special effect display" described above, even if the effect is received at any timing during the validity period, The operation state is terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, “ending the operation state” means that, when the effect is to move the predetermined effect movable body to the specific position, the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position is moved to the original position. This means starting the process of operating to return.

  In the above description example, when an effect is received during the operation validity period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and a" process for a special effect sound "that is continued until the time elapsed from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when a predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, when a large hit determination is lost, or when a predetermined performance determination is lost). , Etc.), even if an effect is received within the operation reception effect, the “process relating to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition Is satisfied (FIG. 178), the “predetermined time value” is set to be relatively short, and the “special effect sound processing” is performed as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect may not be received. As a result, the effect is effective without the effect being received. When the period may end, the player's interest in watching the state where “the process relating to the special effect display (or the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body)” is not performed even though the operation is performed may be changed. It is feared that it will decrease. Accordingly, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and" a process for a special effect sound "that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable to be done. Any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 300 or an appropriate combination can be used as a method for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception and an effect mode related thereto.

  As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, the effect is accepted when the acceptable sound is in the output state in an unsuppressed manner. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the acceptable sound is released at this time. In this regard, even when a normal valid period that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable sound is set to the output state in an unsuppressed manner along with the generation. However, it is desirable that, even if an effect reception is performed during the output state, the output state is continued without canceling the output permission state. In addition, the acceptable sound output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated is an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable sound output when the normal valid period is generated. It is desirable to use the game in order to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest even when the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed.

  Further, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silence state, the N allowable reception sounds indicating that the valid period is generated (or that the valid period is generated) are set as N acceptable sounds. There are types (modes), and output is always performed (output in a non-suppressed mode) in any of these types. On the other hand, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressed state as usual, it indicates that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred). Only M types (aspects) less than N are prepared as acceptable reception sounds, and "output in any of those types (output in non-suppressed mode)" and "output in any of those types" However, it is preferable that the sound data including the acceptable sound is not assigned a channel and a valid period is generated. It is desirable to indicate that "the expected degree of appearance of the big hit symbol differs" depending on the type of the acceptable sound.

  Alternatively, either a valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or a silent state or a valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a normal state in a non-suppressed state , A plurality of types (modes) are prepared as the acceptable sound, but the rate of appearance of the acceptable sound with a high jackpot expectation occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state. It is preferable that the sound is relatively high during the valid period during which the BGM reproduction sound is output in a normal state in an unsuppressed manner. . Also in this case, in the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, the acceptable sound indicating that the valid period is generated (or that the valid period is generated) is not accepted. While the output is always performed (output in a non-suppressed mode), the valid period occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in a normal state in the non-suppressed mode. Or that the valid period has occurred), “a case where the acceptable sound is output in a non-suppressed manner” and “a case where the sound data including the acceptable sound itself is not assigned without being assigned a channel”. It is desirable to do so.

  According to these configurations, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptable sound is not so detailed (M kinds of less than N kinds). Or cannot be expected (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is normally output in the non-suppressed mode, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound may be overlooked by the sound of the BGM reproduction. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptable reception sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in a suppressed mode or a silent state, in a situation where the sound output in the non-suppressed mode can be emphasized, the acceptable reception sound is set to Since output is always performed in a non-suppressed manner, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes is adopted, among the types of acceptable sound that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state”, , At least one of the types of acceptable sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner” (for example, Among them, the type with the lowest jackpot expectation) may be included. However, the acceptable sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the unsuppressed mode” include “the sound of BGM reproduction is suppressed or silent”. The acceptable sounds that can be output when the “valid period that occurs when the state is in the state” are also included in the types that cannot be output (for example, the type with the highest expectation of big hits among the acceptable sounds). Is desirable. Also, the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressed mode” is “BGM reproduction It is desirable to make the number of effect types larger than the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the "effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state". Among the effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to the effect reception in the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a normal state in the unsuppressed mode", "Sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that may appear as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception in the “suppression mode or the effective period that occurs when in the silent state” may be included.

  Further, in the normal game state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function is activated, the valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state, and the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the non-suppression mode. In the case where a plurality of types (aspects) having different jackpot expectation degrees are prepared as the permissible acceptable sounds in any of the valid periods generated when the output is performed as usual, the output is performed in any of the valid periods. When this is done, a special reception allowable sound may be output that “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”. Note that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as the special reception allowable sounds.

  In other words, in this case, when the "permissible period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state" is generated, if the special acceptable sound is output (unsuppressed mode), the effect is produced within the valid period. The post-operation effect performed on the basis of the reception is also performed in a special mode in which "the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%" when it appears. If an effect reception is performed in a state in which the special reception allowable sound is output, the output of the special reception allowable sound is interrupted, and when the special reception allowable sound is output, the ratio of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%. It is desirable that the effect sound be output.

  However, when the “valid period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressed mode as usual” is generated, when the special acceptable sound is output (non-suppressed mode), the valid period is set. After the operation is performed based on the fact that the effect has been received in the special mode, when it appears, it is executed in the special mode of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”, and in the special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special acceptable sound output when the “valid period generated when the sound of the BGM playback is in the suppressed mode or the silent state” is output and the “sound of the BGM playback is output as usual in the unsuppressed mode. The special acceptable sound output during the “valid period generated when the state is in the state” may be different kinds of acceptable sound. In addition, there are a plurality of types of special reception-permissible sounds that are output when the “valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressed mode”, and among these types, There may be the same type as the type of the special acceptable sound output when the “valid period generated when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state” is different from the type. . When an effect reception is performed in a state where the acceptable sound (including the special acceptable sound) is output, the output of the acceptable sound is interrupted, and the effect sound corresponding to the effect after operation (the effect after operation is special). In the case of performing in a mode, it is desirable that when output, a special effect sound ("the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%") is output.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state (when the listening mistake is unlikely to occur), if the special reception allowable sound is output, the sound is output within the valid period. After the operation is performed on the basis of the fact that the effect has been received, the effect is always executed in a manner of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%” when it appears. On the other hand, in a state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when it is easy to make a mistake due to contention with the sound of the BGM reproduction), it is determined that the special reception allowable sound is output. Also, as the post-operation effect performed based on the effect reception being performed within the validity period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a mode of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%”. As a result, it is possible to give a suspicion (a suspicion as to whether or not the user has mistakenly heard) whether the acceptable reception sound was output as the “special reception allowable sound”, and to be able to appropriately maintain a sense of tension. Become. As a result, while the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode, the emphasis is placed on "how not to overlook the acceptable sound" and the tension until the acceptable sound is output. This can be suitably maintained. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception effect, “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which“ when it appears, the ratio of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100% ”” Compared to the case of the operation reception effect, "a special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which" there is a 100% stop at the big hit symbol when it appears "" It is desirable that the effect (pre-permissible operation-related display or pre-permissible operation-related sound) is executed in a relatively short time so that the validity period is suddenly generated.

  In a state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where it is easy to mistakenly hear due to competition with the sound of the BGM reproduction), the message “special reception allowable sound is output and the operation The post-production is not executed in a manner in which “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100% when it appears”. The operation reception production (valid period) and “the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation production is“ When it appears, the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100%. In the “executed” operation accepting effect (effective period), special acceptable sounds are output as different types of acceptable sounds. Alternatively, the same type of acceptable sound may be output. Further, in a state where the sound of the BGM reproduction is output as usual in the non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where the reception allowable sound is likely to be erroneously heard due to the competition with the sound of the BGM reproduction), “the special reception allowable sound is output. The operation accepting effect (effective period) in which the effect after the operation is performed in a manner of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol when it appears, becomes 100%” may not necessarily occur. In the operation reception effect (valid period), the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode of “the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol when it appears becomes 100%”. Regardless of which type is output as the sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which the appearance rate of stopping at the big hit symbol becomes 100% when it appears, and this mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

  In addition, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal valid period that occur while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, an image display simulating the operation means used as the operation target is displayed. A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promoting effect prompting the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, when the effect is received, the “effect” is displayed while the gauge display is left (displayed). A process related to a special effect display in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body), and “elapsed time from the effect reception timing” Of the special effect sound continued until the time reaches a predetermined time value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize after the effect has been received based on the remaining gauge as a display which timing in the validity period the effect was received. In this way, it is possible to predict whether or not the process for the special effect display (or the process for operating the predetermined effect movable body) will end immediately. As a method of starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296, or an appropriate combination, and furthermore, It is possible to use the contents of the written description.

  In the above description example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “specific-type effect patterns” for outputting the sound of “BGM reproduction” in silence or in silence, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number to be smaller than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “other effect patterns” that are not output with no sound in order to improve the entertainment interest when the effect occurs. .

  Further, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as the “effect pattern” for outputting the sound of “BGM reproduction” in a silence mode or silently, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed for the first set time in the effect patterns. Alternatively, an effect pattern for outputting a sound without sound and an effect pattern for outputting the sound of “BGM playback” in a suppressed mode or for a silent time for a second set time longer than the first set time are included, and the big hit symbol is included in those effect patterns. It is desirable to have different degrees of expectation. According to such a configuration, when the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation degree by how long the state is continued. .

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). When the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (A process of reflecting the sound volume set value as the sound volume). Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player with respect to the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume set value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "effect pattern for outputting the sound of the BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or in silence", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the design change regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, since the player who sees the state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the “volume suppression effect” is being executed, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained. become. Note that in this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but the display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is desirable to make the user aware (aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). "No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to the channel, but this is output at the volume 0, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to the channel. .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the reception of the effect when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silence state is displayed for more than twice the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15). It is desirable that the output state be maintained. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the time ts15 elapses, The output time (special effect sound) until the timing ts15 can be made longer.

[Channel assignment release operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is allocated to an empty channel to which no sound data is allocated is triggered by the detection by the detecting unit. Executable (channel assignment cancel operation). In other words, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation of the player, the operation by the player is performed at a timing immediately before the player's favorite effect sound or special sound occurs, and the empty channel is created. By securing the sound in advance, it is possible to reliably output the effect sound or special sound desired by the player through the previously secured empty channel.

  Note that the operation (channel assignment canceling operation) in this description example is not limited to the “button operation”, and is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173, such as an act of praying with the hand held over the pachinko machine 1. The specific action may be performed by a contact-type or non-contact type predetermined sensor capable of detecting any state change occurring when the specific action to be detected (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed. What is necessary is just to perform a process of removing the sound assigned to the channel from the channel and terminating the reproduction in response to the detection.

  FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when a process related to such a channel assignment canceling operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 179, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tw11, the predetermined effect pattern that is effected by the game board effect display device 1600 is developed. (Eg, effect sound reproduced during execution of the super reach effect) assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 and reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction), and A sound of “BGM2 playback” according to the effect mode (for example, one music piece continuously played over a plurality of fluctuations in a time saving game state or the like) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 for playback (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and (b), among the sounds in these playback states (BGM1 playback and BGM2 playback), the sound of “BGM2 playback” is a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation). Is detected, the channel assignment is forcibly terminated, and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, at timing tw12, the effect of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is accepted. An allowable reception period can be generated up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, a specific action to be detected, such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" (channel assignment canceling operation). Is displayed, prompting the user to perform the operation.

  Here, FIG. 179 (a) shows the assignment status of each channel when the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is not performed during the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, and the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection unit. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03 when the detection is not performed by the predetermined detection unit until the timing tw13 arrives. This is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Also, at the timing tw13 at which the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate a button and secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is hidden.

  Further, at timing tw13, a process of allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a big hit determination sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and performing reproduction is performed. In this example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to the empty channels by the detection by the predetermined detecting means, the empty channels are previously secured in the other channels (the reproduction channels 10 and 11). A predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) can be assigned to a channel and reproduced. However, if the other channels are not previously reserved, there is no available channel to which a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the jackpot determined sound) can be allocated, and it cannot be reproduced and output. Concerns will arise.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows the assignment status of each channel when a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed at timing tw12a in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, and detection is performed by predetermined detection means. Is shown.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means until the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are detected at the timing tw12a at which the detection is performed. , The sound of “BGM2 playback” is removed. As a result, it is possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channels 02 and 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determination sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. This eliminates the concern that a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit determination sound) cannot be reproduced and output. Further, the playback state of the sound of “BGM2 playback” is forcibly terminated at the time when the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means. Playback ends at a halfway point without being played back (up to the point where it is well-cut), so the player feels that an empty channel has been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) by the player. This makes it easier to wait for the timing at which a predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit decision sound) is reproduced.

  At the timing tw12a at which the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the reproduction state of the sound of “BGM2 reproduction” is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 is displayed. (Operation of a button to secure an empty channel) is not displayed, and the reception period in which the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted is ended.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), at timing tw13, not the reproduction channels 02 and 03 previously reserved as empty channels, but other channels (playback channels 10 and 11) is assigned a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot determined sound) and reproduced. However, if there is no vacancy in other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit sound) is assigned to the previously secured reproduction channels 02 and 03 for reproduction.

  Alternatively, when the specific sound (channel assignment canceling operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the effect sound is removed from the specific channel based on the detection by the predetermined detecting means, the other channel has an empty space. Alternatively, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a jackpot sound) may be assigned to the specific channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, in allocating a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot determined sound) to a specific channel and reproducing it, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound for the specific channel (here, in this case). , BGM2) are assigned, the assignment state is canceled at that point in time upon detection of a specific action such as a button operation (channel assignment canceling operation), so that one channel (specific channel) is assigned. The sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined effect sound (in this case, the big hit sound) can be respectively reproduced by simply using them, and the reproduction channel which is a finite resource can be effectively used. .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), at the timing tw13 at which the reception period ends, a predetermined effect sound (here, the big hit definite sound) is reproduced, but the timing after the timing tw13 In this case, a predetermined effect sound (in this case, a big hit determination sound) may be reproduced.

  In addition, as the predetermined effect sound, besides the jackpot confirmation sound, an effect sound indicating the degree of expectation of the appearance of the jackpot symbol, an effect sound indicating that the player has lost the jackpot, or the like may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds be selectively output based on the type of effect pattern appearing in the symbol variation. Alternatively, when it is suggested that a jackpot has been lost, no effect sound may be output even if the timing tw13 arrives, and an empty channel may not necessarily be used.

  On the other hand, the sound for ending the channel assignment when the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is detected is not a sound output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute as a specific sound. In other words, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is overlooked when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted without any trouble. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (b), when a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation has arrived, a reception period in which the effect reception of the effect of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted is generated. Not limited to For example, at least during a period in which a specific sound as a target to be excluded from channel assignment is in a reproduction state, reception of a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted, and channel assignment of the specific sound is performed based on the reception. May be eliminated. In this case, for example, the state of a previously reserved empty channel is maintained for a predetermined time, such as a predetermined timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the reproduction state, and then another sound is output to the empty channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

  In addition, as a method of canceling the channel assignment of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, a channel to which the specific sound is assigned is set to an empty channel at that time, and a predetermined sound (for example, 0. The channel assignment of a specific sound may be canceled by assigning an extremely short assignment cancellation reception sound (eg, one second) over the same channel. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel assignment of the specific sound at a stage earlier when the specific action is accepted and forcedly terminated than when the forced termination is not performed.

  In addition, at least during a period from when the effect reception of the specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) is permitted to when the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound using the vacant channel created by the effect reception is completed, a new sound is generated. To prevent the channel from being wasted by the occurrence of a special game sound (for example, a prize sound, a hold change sound, or a volume adjustment sound) that is not related to the effect of whether a big hit symbol appears in the symbol change. , Pre-reading effect sound, etc.) should not be output.

  In addition, the specific sound (the sound of “BGM2 playback”) to be forcibly terminated is reproduced as a non-loop effect sound such as a song or a line that is reproduced only for a predetermined time without being looped. This is desirable in that it is easy to remember the fact that empty channels have been reserved in advance by a specific action (channel assignment canceling operation) by the player so that the reproduction is terminated at an incomplete part without being reproduced to the end. .

[Notification of abnormalities during the production according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to a channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not output. A specific notification sound is assigned to a channel on the condition that the notification sound has occurred in a specific situation, and is output. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the abnormal state is not necessarily output, so that there is a sufficient amount of channels to reduce the risk of running out of empty channels. Will be expected.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. When such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “a movable body abnormality has occurred” or the like) and a game An abnormal display (for example, “an abnormality has occurred in the underside movable effect unit 3200”) in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 can be executed. In addition, it is preferable that the abnormal display in the display area is performed so that it is possible to specify which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies has an abnormality. An aspect may be used in which one of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the group specifies an abnormality. For example, as the plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 or the like) , A rear-side movable stage unit 3300, a back-left movable stage unit 3400, a back-right movable stage unit 3400, a back-side movable stage unit 3500, a back-side movable stage unit 3700, etc.). The abnormal display in the display area is performed in such a manner that which side of the decorative body or the board-side movable decorative body has an abnormality can be specified. Note that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies that have different driving sources and are provided separately.

  However, such a movable body abnormality is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player side will not have any negligence. Because there is no such event, if the notification process is executed prominently during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, the effect during execution is This has an adverse effect on the player, which is awkward for the player. Not only that, there is no room for the number of vacant channels as much as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is output, which may give the player anxiety that a new sound cannot be output. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may decline.

  However, on the other hand, the failure of the movable decorative body often occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all. In this case, the case where a movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decorative body is not operating at all is an abnormality caused by the movable decorative body being removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a sticking action or an illegal action such as a wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in the detected situation, and if you do not output the alarm sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality even in such a situation, it may promote wrongdoing and It is feared that a serious player may lose interest in the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (symbol variation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, and this is detected. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of notification sound, abnormal display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like). However, during a period in which various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, a process of operating the movable decorative body by at least effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (a change pattern (effect pattern)). When a movable body abnormality is detected during the operation of the movable decorative body based on the effect pattern during a jackpot game, the notification processing (output of a notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is performed. , An abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output of information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body (notification on the hall side) is not performed clearly and does not adversely affect the performance, so that it may be performed regardless of the situation.

  According to such a configuration, even in the period in which various games (symbol fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are being executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to cause a failure (peripheral control board 1510). The movable body is abnormal in the process of operating the movable decorative body under the effect control (a situation in which the movable body driving process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed). In the event of occurrence of a malfunction, the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound can be performed. In the event that a notification has occurred, the notification processing of the abnormal notification sound and the like by the pachinko machine 1 is not performed. While manner also, so for a legitimate player is expected to avoid that adverse effects are exerted on the effect of running.

  For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, control of assigning effect sounds to channels, occurrence of abnormality The light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is performed in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, so that the effect during the execution is adversely affected. The influence will be suppressed. However, even if an effect timing to operate the movable decorative body again after the movable body abnormality is detected arrives, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body has not yet been recovered from the abnormal state. No staging is performed.

  That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, it is determined whether or not a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed. Regardless, it is possible to execute a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decorative body to a specific position (origin position)) to recover the movable decorative body from the abnormal state. This restoration processing may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, during the symbol variation execution period in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative object is performed, the specific movable effect is started even if the specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body is recovered from the abnormal state at a stage earlier than that, it is possible to execute a specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decorative body.

  Although the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation (moving to the specific position (origin position)) is performed on the movable ornament, the movable ornament is identified within the predetermined time. If it does not return to the position (origin position), it is determined that the recovery has failed, and the game or effect will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  FIG. 180 shows the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. 4 is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing ti11, the game board effect display device 1600 displays. The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern that is being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol change (specific effect pattern), at timing ti12, an operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player may occur up to a period up to timing ti14. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected during this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Thus, effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is performed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing ti14. The effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 180, it is assumed that at timing ti13, an operation performed by the player has been accepted. Therefore, at timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation performed by the player has been received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform a movable effect of performing a specific movable decorative body in an effect operation (see FIG. 180 (b)). (See FIG. 180 (a)), and the effect sounds are assigned to the channels 08 and 09 in accordance with the movable effect and are reproduced (see FIG. 180 (a)).

  Here, in the movable body driving process, for example, when a specific movable decorative body is operated, first, it is determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the movable body driving process is terminated without performing any driving because the restoration process has failed and recovery cannot be expected. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is obtained, and it is determined whether a specific movable decorative body is at a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, when the specific movable decorative body is at the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in a mode determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decorative body is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving of the specific movable decorative body ends, information from a predetermined sensor is obtained, If it is determined based on the information that the movable body has been returned to the specific position (original position), the movable body driving process ends. However, when it is determined in the movable body driving process that the specific movable decorative body is not at the specific position (original position), a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is executed. After that, the movable body driving process ends. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

  By such a movable body driving process, the specific movable decorative body performs an effect operation from the timing ti13. In this illustrative example, at the timing ti15 in the period in which the effect operation is performed, the specific movable decorative body is activated. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot operate. In FIG. 180 (b), the dotted area indicates a period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the driving of the specific movable decorative body (drive for the rendering operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). An abnormality is determined), and a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed based on the determination.

  However, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, Since it can be said that the situation is highly likely to have occurred due to the failure of the decorative body, in this example, it is not performed to assign an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality to a channel and reproduce it. That is, in this case, regarding the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the control of the assignment of the effect sound to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, the movable body abnormality is detected. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it is not detected, it is possible to prevent the effect being performed from being adversely affected. In other words, when a situation appears in which the movable body cannot be returned to the normal state (moved to the original position) during the execution of the movable process based on the effect pattern during the symbol change, the situation is determined based on the appearance of the situation. As a result, the execution timing of the “restoration processing for the movable body that is not performing the normal operation and that is not in the original position (the movable body that is not at the original position)” is executed, but when the restoration processing is performed (or When the restoration of the movable body fails in the restoration process, it is not performed that the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

  At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (the origin position). In this case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it becomes possible to execute a normal movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and the recovery has failed. In this case, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoring operation is not performed, and a game or an effect is developed while maintaining the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even within the same symbol variation, or within the next and subsequent symbol variations, even if the timing at which the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body is executed based on the effect pattern arrives, the specific movable decorative body No effect operation is performed, and a display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and an operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. In addition, various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light-emission mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even when the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in an operating state, so that when the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that entertainment interests will be suppressed.

  As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, at least when the movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, By not assigning the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not reproducing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

  On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) in the same variation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. When a specific movable decorative body is generated at a timing different from the time when a specific movable decorative body is operated by the production control (production pattern), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to a channel and reproduced.

  FIG. 181 shows that, during the period during which the symbol variation is performed, the movable body abnormality is detected not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the variation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, but in another process. It is a time chart which shows an example about the assignment situation of each channel at the time of detection, and the situation on the movable decorative body side.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern developed on the display device 1600 has been assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  Then, as described above, in this symbol change (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player is the maximum at the timing ti14. Can occur over a period of up to Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected during this period (a period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is terminated with this as a trigger. Thus, effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is performed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at a timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform a rendering operation (operates without being based on the rendering pattern). It is assumed that the specific movable decorative body is not detected at the specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at the specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). In FIG. 181 (b) as well, the dotted range indicates the period when the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state. Therefore, at timing ti11b, a restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

  At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is completed. At this time, it is detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). When it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the storage of the abnormality history is erased, and thereafter, it is possible to execute a normal movable production without performing any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 181, the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) occurs so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation validity period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, so that the production operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed. Not performed, a display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and an operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced, and an abnormality occurs. The various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body described above emit light only in the light-emission mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 in the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is changed by the above-described restoration processing. If it has been eliminated, the effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) as usual is performed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. Note that this description example is based on the assumption that a movable body abnormality has occurred only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and a restoration process corresponding to the abnormality has been performed. . That is, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the specific movable decorative body are executing the restoration process, a specific operation is performed even if an operation by the player is received within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14. The effect operation of the movable decorative body is not necessarily performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 181, it is assumed that at timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been eliminated), and the recovery has failed. doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, a predetermined restoring operation is not performed, and a game or an effect is developed while maintaining the abnormal state.

  Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the specific movable decorative body even though it is not the timing to operate the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination It can be said that there is a possibility that a specific movable decorative body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to an unlawful action such as a sticking action or a wire entry, and thus an abnormality is detected. In addition, the timing ti13a is a situation in which even if the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body has not been solved by any external force, the abnormality of the movable body has not been eliminated. It can be said that it is growing more and more.

  Therefore, at the timing ti13a, a notification process according to the movable body abnormality is executed while the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various sound effects corresponding to the specific effect pattern being allocated and reproduced in accordance with the progress of the effect contents, the abnormal notification sound is reproduced for a predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00 and 01. To be played back. In the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect according to the specific effect pattern progressing and being executed as it is, an abnormal time display corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, “ An abnormality has occurred in the backside movable effect unit 3200). In addition, in various light emitting units, as a mode corresponding to the movable body abnormality, some of the light emitting units emit light in an abnormal state, and the other light emitting units are operated in a normal manner in accordance with the progress of the effect contents. It will emit light.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 180 and 181, even when the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is performed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the production, it is unlikely that the wrongdoing has been performed, and there is a possibility of failure during the production operation. . On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the production operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not performed, there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed, and the abnormality is more abnormal than the production. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that outputting a notification can be more important.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 181, the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a where the restoration process is performed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, at the timing ti11b, an abnormality of the movable body is detected in spite of the situation that the specific movable decorative body cannot operate on the basis of the effect pattern. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the alarm has occurred, the output of the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started at this timing ti11b. At this time, notification by display or notification by a lamp may be performed. In other words, even when the movable process based on the effect pattern during the change of the symbol is not executed, if a situation occurs in which the movable body moves from the original position due to a sticking action or a wire approach, the start of the change of the symbol or the change of the symbol Without waiting for the restoration processing timing at the end, the timing of the execution of the “restoration processing for the movable body that has not been restored to the normal state (the movable body that is not at the original position)” at that time (during symbol change) is triggered. However, when the restoration processing is performed (or when the restoration of the movable body fails to return to the normal state in the restoration processing), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Is to be performed. Alternatively, when the movable body moves from the original position due to a sticking action or a wire entry, a process of moving the movable body by a driving force from a drive source (such as a motor) (a movable process that is not based on an effect pattern) can be executed. It may be moved to the original position in this processing. In this case, if the movable body could not be moved to the original position by such a movable process, even if the design was in the middle of a change in the symbol, at that time, “the movable body that was not at the original position was targeted. The execution timing of the “restoration process” is established. When the restoration processing is performed (or when the restoration of the movable body to the normal position (return to the original position) fails in the restoration processing), an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is assigned to the channel. Will be played back.

  In short, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, even though the specific movable decorative body is not performing an effect operation based on the effect pattern. That an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is performing an effect operation based on the effect pattern. It is important to ensure that the game is not executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the wrongdoing is suppressed from performing the wrongdoing, while the illegal Is expected to be prevented from being adversely affected. The condition for performing the notification process according to the movable body abnormality during the period in which the symbol variation is performed is as follows: "The specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation based on the rendering pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the rendering operation. After adopting at least the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the body, for example, `` failing the restoration process performed in response to the occurrence of the abnormality '' or `` that the abnormality has occurred under a specific situation '' Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when a specific movable decorative body is operated in accordance with the effect pattern, the notification processing corresponding to the movable body abnormality will not be performed as a trigger, and therefore, the specific movable It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body during the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is made at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time during regular visits.

  In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 180, at timing ti17, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body, thereby detecting a movable body abnormality. In addition, in the example of FIG. 181, at timing ti11b, an overload is applied to an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body, thereby detecting a movable body abnormality.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing when the player performs the operation. May be effected.

  In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to a channel for a predetermined period of time and reproduced. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

  In addition, if the abnormality notification is not executed on the sufficient condition that “the specific movable decorative body is performing an abnormality operation based on the effect pattern and that the specific movable decorative body has occurred”, the subsequent steps are performed. However, even if the abnormal state is left unresolved, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. Further, it is desirable that a game or an effect be developed while the abnormal state is maintained without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

  After the abnormal notification sound is assigned to the reproduction channels 00 and 01 for a predetermined period of time and reproduced by the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality, even if the movable body abnormality remains, the reproduction channels 00 and 01 are vacant channels. When the game is started in this state, it is desirable that the effect sound is output in an unsuppressed manner even if the movable body abnormality remains.

  In the above-described example, even in a situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not being executed, the restoration operation is performed on the effect movable body having the movable abnormality when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this regard, if the restoration operation succeeds in the restoration operation, it is also possible to perform a movable process for testing whether or not the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred can operate properly. Good. In other words, as a result of performing a restoring operation on a production movable body in which a movable abnormality has occurred, if the operation fails, it is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that an illegal act has been performed. However, as a result of performing a restoring operation on a staging movable body in which a movable abnormality has occurred, it is difficult to understand whether there is a high possibility that cheating has been performed if successful It will be. Therefore, if the restoration is successful in the restoration operation, fraudulent acts are performed through the movable process for testing whether the production movable body different from the production movable body in which the movable abnormality is occurring can operate properly. It is desirable that the determination as to whether or not there is a high possibility is continued. Such a movable process may be further performed when the restoration fails in the restoration operation.

  The restoring operation performed in the situation where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is not executed and the restoring operation performed when an abnormality occurs in the condition where the movable effect based on the effect pattern is executed are the processing contents related to the restoring operation. (For example, the number of retries) is desirably different from each other.

[Restoration of multiple movable decorations]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited, even if a special result is obtained by the determination means according to the winning, there is no available space in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated. In the case where the number of vacant channels is 0, it is not possible to assign a special sound to a channel in response to the special result being obtained, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the inability to output the special sound. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different driving sources and provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormal By assigning sound data) to channels and reproducing them, the number of channels used is prevented from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously for a plurality of movable decorative bodies. Was. In addition, the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body can no longer properly operate, and is the same as that exemplified in “Abnormality notification during production in accordance with the production pattern”. is there.

  However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has been increasing, and merely associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all the movable decorative bodies is not sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly report the status of the aircraft. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and a different abnormality notification sound is output to the channel depending on which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the group has an abnormality. By allocating and reproducing the information, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be appropriately notified even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

  Also in this example, when a movable body abnormality has occurred, as described in the example of “abnormality notification during production in accordance with the production pattern” (see FIGS. 180 and 181). Is performed. Therefore, even in this example, even if various games (symbol change, big hit game, etc.) occur during the execution period and are detected, the notification processing (output of the notification sound) by the pachinko machine 1 is performed. , An abnormal display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, abnormal lighting by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. In addition, similarly, during a period in which various games (design change, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern) When a movable body abnormality is detected during the execution of the movable decorative body based on the (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game, a notification process by the pachinko machine 1 is performed ( The output of the notification sound, the abnormal display in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600, the abnormal lighting by various lamps, and the like are not performed.

  However, in this example, if a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, the abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and brought into the reproduction state is changed to only one of the groups corresponding to the specific group. On the other hand, a process of performing a restoring operation on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred is executed. According to such a configuration, even when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected that the channels are given a margin and the risk of running out of empty channels is reduced. In addition to the above, it is possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it is expected to reduce the channel use time through the efficiency of the processing itself when abnormalities occur. . It should be noted that the contents of the restoration process and the respective processes at the time of success and failure are described in the above-described example of “abnormality notification during the effect according to the effect pattern” (see FIGS. 180 and 181). ).

  Here, the mode of dividing the plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups is required to be a mode suitable for reporting the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided, for example, on the door frame 3 side. A plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable production unit 3200, a back left movable production unit 3300, a back side) In the case of grouping into two groups, the right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, the lower back movable production unit 3700, etc., there is an abnormality in the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3. It can be transmitted to the hall side according to the type of the abnormality notification sound whether the occurrence of an abnormality or the occurrence of an abnormality in the board-side movable decorative body, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. So is the ability. In other words, when an abnormality occurs in the board-side movable decorative body, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed by an amount that makes contact more difficult than when an abnormality occurs in the frame-side movable decorative body. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound according to the movable body abnormality, but depending on its type, is not noticed by the player side (the unpleasant feeling Without pachinko machine 1), it is possible to secretly inform the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of fraud is high.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as the notification processing by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a game board side effect display As described above, the abnormal display in the display area of the device 1600 can be executed. In this regard, in this description example, in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, as a notification mode by display on the game board effect display device 1600, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups, and any of the groups is used. It is desirable to perform different notification displays depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for occurrence of an abnormality than the case of "notification by sound", whereas the information transmission function for notifying the details of the abnormality is excellent. It has the property which was. Therefore, in the above-described “notification by display”, the grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of performing the “notification by sound” in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in properties. In this case, it is desirable that a different display be performed depending on which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the uniquely divided groups has an abnormality.

  In other words, in this case, for example, the movable decorative body A and the movable decorative body B are classified into groups when the movable decorative body A has a movable body abnormality and when the movable decorative body B has a movable body abnormality. Depending on whether or not there is, as a notification content displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, despite the fact that the abnormality notification sound reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, Is a first notification mode in which different displays are performed ", and" a second notification mode in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced and the notification content displayed are the same even when any movable body abnormality occurs. And the "third notification mode in which the alarm notification sound reproduced and the notification content displayed are different even when any movable body error occurs". Become this It is possible to provide a more granular notification manner by notification by the two different contents of the sound and display.

  FIG. 182 shows an example of the assignment status of each channel and the situation on the movable decorative body side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at a specific timing during a period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is a time chart.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at timing tj11, the game board effect display device 1600 displays The sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern that is being developed is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and has already been reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

  In this symbol change (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player can occur over a period up to the timing tj15. Then, when an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is detected within this period (a period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception) is ended with this as a trigger. Thus, effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is performed. If an operation (for example, the operation button 410) by the player is not detected within the operation valid period (effective period of effect reception), effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed after timing tj15. The effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is assumed that at timing tj14, an operation performed by the player is accepted. Therefore, at the timing tj14, based on the fact that the operation performed by the player has been received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect for performing the specific movable decorative body, and the channel effect is performed. The effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and reproduced.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, at timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the timing is higher than the timing tj13 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation. It is assumed that these movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In FIG. 182 (b) and FIG. 183 (b) to be described later, a dotted area indicates a period in which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred, the above-described restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred is executed. That is, in relation to this restoration processing, even if the operation performed by the player is accepted at timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side The movable body abnormality is detected for the frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side. Each situation is assumed.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side The processing mode is different between D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and simultaneous operation may cause interference due to contact with each other. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration processing is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate using the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern about mutual interference including the relationship with the above, restoration processing is performed at the same time at the timing tj12, so that quick abnormal recovery of each movable decorative body is enabled.

  In such a configuration, the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 is performed for a long time from timing tj12 to timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in, the restoration processing can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side until the operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player ends. It is assumed that neither the restoration process for A, B, or C nor the restoration process for the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 end. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the operation is effective. Even if an effect is received at any timing within the period (effective period of effect reception), processing is performed so that when the effect is received, the effect operation triggered by this is not performed.

  That is, in this case, if an effect reception occurs during the period in which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative object is being executed, it is obvious that the specific movable decorative object cannot be effected as a result of this. Also, even if an effect reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is completed, mutual operation with another board-side movable decorative body that is still in the stage of executing the restoration process There is a fear of interference. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is received at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, a display effect when the movable effect is performed on the game board effect display device 1600 is executed, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, an effect sound (operation effect sound) at the time of performing the movable effect is allocated and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred perform the movable effect. In this case, the light is emitted only in the light emission mode. In short, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all restoration processes are completed successfully). Only when the timing at which the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is performed arrives, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, and Depending on at which timing within the operation validity period (effectiveness period of effect reception) the effect is received, the process is performed such that whether or not the effect operation triggered by this effect is performed when the effect is received is changed. Becomes

  That is, in this case, first, when the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timing tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform a staging operation after the restoration processing is completed (the restoration processing is successful). Always arrives, and even if the other movable decorative bodies A to C, D, and F are performing the restoration processing, there is no concern that they will interfere with them. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, an operation by the player is accepted during any of the operation valid periods (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, an effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, a display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed on the channel. Are produced and assigned, and various light-emitting units, including lamps mounted on the movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred, emit light when the movable performance is performed. It will emit light.

  On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration processing ends. Therefore, when an operation by the player is received within a period before the restoration process is completed in the operation valid period, the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state, and thus the specific movable decorative body is still in the abnormal state. The effect of the body is not performed, and a display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Then, various light-emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred only emit light in the light-emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when an operation by the player is received within a period after the end of the restoration process (success in the restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C and F are restored. Since there is no fear of interference between them even during the execution, the normal production control (movable body, display production, production sound, light emission), including the production operation of a specific movable decorative body Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is completed (success in the restoration processing). . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is performed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed on the channel. The effect sound at the time (operation effect sound) is allocated and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred emit light in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay.

  Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 182 will be described. In this example, when notifying the notification sound in response to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side. , C, and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side. A movable decorative body in which an abnormality has occurred belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on whether there is a certain notification sound.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 182, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation usually cannot occur during proper game play and cannot occur as a result of wrongdoing. It is likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tweaking all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may become troublesome, and it is required to end the notification state early.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, it is detected that a movable body abnormality has occurred in each of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. At timing tj12, as described above, the restoration processing on the board-side movable decorative body and the restoration processing on the frame-side movable decorative body are simultaneously started, whereas the notification sound output is output from the frame-side movable decoration. The abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, but the abnormality notification sound common to the panel side corresponding to the panel-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is allocated to the channel. Output.

  That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is eliminated, or the predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as a time until a time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, which is the side that takes a longer time to complete the restoration process, “the board-side movable decorative bodies A, By assigning only the common board-side abnormality notification sound corresponding to the B and C sides to the channel, the common board-side abnormality notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be obtained. The restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F can be ended during the reproduction, and the "common abnormality notification for the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sides" After the output of the "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid a request for the output of the "frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F" to be avoided. The notification process can be completed in a simpler manner.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 182, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, The “board-side common anomalous notification sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is reproduced by being allocated to a channel over a period up to timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Thus, the “frame-side common abnormality notification sound corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F” is not reproduced. In this case, as described above, the control of the assignment of the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

  On the other hand, in the notification process by the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the notification process according to the movable body abnormality, the above-described “notification by sound” is performed by utilizing a difference in properties from the above-described notification sound. In a mode different from that described above, the above-described grouping is performed in a mode in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and thus, different displays are performed depending on which of the movable decorative bodies belonging to the uniquely divided group has an abnormality. ing. That is, in this case, for example, assuming that the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body E ends, this is taken into account. The “notification by display” is maintained, and the “notification by display” is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, The corresponding “notification by display” is maintained, and the “notification by display” ends at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D ends. Therefore, even if the restoration processing of the specific movable decorative body is completed first, depending on the execution state of the restoration processing of the movable decorative body grouped with the specific movable decorative body, the restoration processing may be performed more than the specific movable decorative body. Later, the “notification by display” corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration processing has been completed may be ended first.

  According to the example of FIG. 182, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds corresponding to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. When a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to the respective notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced. Is not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound, and the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. In addition, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state, it is necessary to individually perform restoration processing on these movable decorative bodies in a predetermined order. On the other hand, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the restoration processing for these movable decorative bodies is performed simultaneously. This makes it possible to reduce the total time required for the restoration process for the movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the playback state as compared with the movable decoration body corresponding to the notification sound in the playback state. While one specific notification sound among the notification sounds is being reproduced, all the movable decorative bodies can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It becomes possible to avoid it.

  That is, in this embodiment, the plurality of movable decorative bodies are grouped into the board-side movable decorative bodies and the frame-side movable decorative bodies, and the restoration processing corresponding to each of these groups is performed simultaneously. Not limited to In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated by two or more groups (in the above example, the panel side and the panel side) that can operate without being affected by the operation status of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. And the restoring process can be executed independently for each group, and for a plurality of movable decorative bodies (D to F) belonging to at least one of the groups (the frame side in the above example), 182 and 183 as long as they are selected as movable ornaments that can operate without being influenced by each other's operation conditions and all of them can be restored at the same time. It is possible to configure so as to obtain the operation and effect described above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time during regular visits. In addition, the detection method of the movable body abnormality is not limited to the detection of the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing when the player performs the operation, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at the specific timing determined by the production pattern. It may be the one that causes it.

  In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to a channel for a predetermined period of time and reproduced. You may make it perform the process which reduces.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, the movable body abnormalities have occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol change is being performed. Although the description has been made assuming the situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the jackpot game or when the game of the special symbol is in a state of waiting for progress (for example, during a demo screen), the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative body D, Even when the movable body abnormality occurs in each of E and F, each process corresponding to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 182, the restoration processing is performed on all the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap each other. And However, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other even when they are simultaneously operated are included in the board-side movable decorative bodies, the movable decorative bodies of the board-side movable decorative bodies are determined based on a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be simultaneously performed only on some movable decorative bodies that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 182, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the movable body abnormality in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Although it is assumed that the timing for determining whether or not the occurrence has occurred is the same, these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 183, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined that the frame-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are restored, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is terminated earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is terminated. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "common board side abnormal decorative sound corresponding to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" ends, the "frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side It is possible to avoid the request for the output of the "common alarm sound common to the corresponding frame side".

  Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 182, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It may be configured to have a processing structure in which it is determined that the operation has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a notification process corresponding to the movable body abnormality and a restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F Are not performed, and after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C correspond to each other. During the notification process, it is desirable to perform the restoration process of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. It should be noted that, as a result of waiting for the determination process to determine whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed while the notification process corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

  When a specific movable body among the board-side movable bodies is in a state of being processed as "an abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation", the board-side movable body itself is normal but has an abnormal state. A movable body that is not subjected to the effect operation in relation to the “specific movable body” can be included. On the other hand, in the frame-side movable body, even if any of the board-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation”, the abnormal state of the specific movable body There is nothing that will not be used for the production operation due to the relationship described above, and if it is normal, all of them will be used for the production operation. Even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as "an abnormal state that is not subjected to the rendering operation", the other frame-side movable bodies are rendered if they themselves are normal. It is provided for operation. In addition, even if any of the frame-side movable bodies is processed as an “abnormal state that is not subjected to the staging operation”, if the board-side movable body itself is normal, all of them are Is provided for a staging operation. That is, by adopting a configuration in which the movable effect is realized in a wider space as the pachinko machine 1, the number of movable bodies provided for the effect operation can be increased irrespective of the abnormal state of the other movable bodies. It has become.

  For each movable body illustrated in FIGS. 182 and 183, when a movement abnormality occurs in an effect operation according to an effect request such as an effect pattern or a big hit effect, a restoring operation performed accordingly fails. Even in such a case, no abnormal notification sound is output. However, even if the symbol is changing, when a predetermined condition such as the detection of a fraudulent act is satisfied, a restoring operation is performed on the movable body in which the movable abnormality has occurred. In this case, it is desirable to output an abnormal notification sound based on the fact that the restoration operation has been performed but the restoration has failed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, there may be a case where a plurality of operations (for example, continuous hitting of the operation button 410) on a predetermined operation unit are prompted to perform an operation effect a plurality of times corresponding to each operation. However, in recent years, in a predetermined validity period in which such an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, even if the predetermined operation means (the operation button 410) is not operated a plurality of times, the predetermined operation means is not required. Multi-operation function (automatic operation) in which an effect mode when multiple operations are performed only by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press or the like) that maintains the operation state for a relatively long time appears. It is increasingly equipped with a continuous hit function.

  In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function), when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed, a single operation (a single operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time. ) May be reminded to the player as if the player were repeatedly performing (such as the feeling of a fast repeated tapping). It can be said that it is important for suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game player or the like and for promoting the use of the function by various players. However, if the effect change (for example, operation sound) is made simply when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses in the operation state, the same applies to the player. Even if it is intended to perform a single push operation, the short operation time (the time during which the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so that the effect reception can be performed multiple times. The number of effect receptions for one single operation is stable due to the occurrence of the operation sound (multiple operation sounds are generated) or the effect reception only once (one operation sound is generated). There is a concern that the interest in playing games may decrease due to discomfort caused by not doing so.

  In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous tapping function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, similarly to the case of an operation by a single press, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) caused by the reception of the effect is performed. Etc.) only once. After the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, no new effect reception (operation sound) is generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After the predetermined interval time elapses, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect is accepted is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. In other words, in this case, a time margin is provided between the generation of the first effect reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second effect reception (operation sound). While performing the operation according to the above, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of uncomfortable feeling due to the instability of the number of effect receptions, and to determine whether the operation is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time only by performing the operation by so-called long press. The effect that looks like this is feasible.

  However, from the player's point of view, providing time allowance between generating the first effect reception (operation sound) and generating the second effect reception (operation sound) is itself. This is a waste of operation effects, and the number of effects reception (operation sound) per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (simple continuous hits when performing an operation by a so-called long press). There is a concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the slow speed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in a single operation mode, the operation on the operation means is long. As in the case of the operation (such as long press), the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation means, it is as if the single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. (Such as the feeling of a fast repeated hit) can be made to be remembered by the player. Accordingly, all operation modes can be adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect when the operation is performed by a single push (whether the effect is a single effect change or a plurality of effect changes). Even if this is the case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the number of times of effect changes (for example, operation sounds) per unit time.

  FIG. 184 is a time chart illustrating an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic continuous hitting function). Here, description will be made assuming that the operation button 410 is employed as the operation means. In other drawings including FIG. 184, the specific sound output outlined in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the reception of the effect corresponding to the operation performed on the button 410, The specific sound output in black in the figure indicates a specific sound generated following the specific sound output in white in the figure when no effect is received when the operation of the operation button 410 is not performed. It is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds be the same without any difference.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), a mode in which the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in a predetermined effective period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given (single-shot operation) It is assumed that a single operation has been performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at the same time. Processing for starting the output of the display (display pattern during operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after outputting the specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which no operation is performed (a period between timings tx12 and tx13 in the figure), a specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is intermittently performed in this situation. It is possible to output it.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 has been completed at timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the completion of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if the operation by the player is not detected at all until the grace time TY1 elapses, the specific sound (for example, “picone” )), A specific sound (for example, “picone”) accompanying an operation on the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

  Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), five times (N times) from the start of the grace time TY1 to the elapse thereof. It is set to have a time length such that a minute specific sound (for example, “picone”) can be output. Thereby, even if an operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given, a specific sound accompanying the operation (a sound corresponding to the effect reception). Is a specific sound output at least five times (N times) at the timing of operation detection, and four times (N− times) output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even after no operation. (One time) and the total number of specific sounds).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace period TY1 ends during the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. Even when the timing tx13 at which the time TY1 ends, the specific sound being output is cut off (for example, “pico”) at the timing tx13 (output interruption processing, other processing, etc.). 184) is not performed, and after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound (the first to fourth specific sounds in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a)) that has been output up to that time tx13 An output (sound waveform) in the same manner is made to appear. In other words, if a specific sound accompanying an operation is interrupted on the way, it becomes unclear whether the operation has been performed multiple times or not, resulting in an operational feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. May be difficult for the player to remember (it may be assumed that the sound is only a specific sound generated in a pseudo manner in the non-operation state). It is expected that the solution will be appropriately resolved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period TY1, a situation in which a new operation is no longer accepted will not be accepted. Until the grace period TY1 ends, a specific sound (for example, “picone”) is output each time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined validity period ends, it is necessary to avoid that the number of effect receptions becomes unstable when an operation by a single push is performed. Needless to say, the player can be made to remember a feeling as if he / she performed an operation within a period exceeding a predetermined validity period, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be improved. In this sense, a display (for example, a remaining time display in which the validity period is continued) that allows the player to recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continued or ended is provided. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) of the specific sound under the condition that it is possible to recognize that the state has been ended.

  It should be noted that the “specific sound output accompanying the operation” in the figure is not a signal waveform accompanying the specific sound output, but a volume waveform of the specific sound that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses. (Removed waveforms) are conceptually shown. As is apparent from FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is consumed before the time required for the output of the specific sound of the previous output to finish outputting to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is output. On the other hand, sound data of a new specific sound is output in a form overwritten on a specific channel, which makes it possible to output a specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous tapping operation was performed. It is expected that the player will be able to remember a special feeling.

  Incidentally, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode of performing 1 SHOT reproduction (corresponding to “1 SHOT” in the drawing) for reproducing the target sound once each time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound may be reproduced. Loop playback (corresponding to “LOOP” in the drawing) that repeats playback every time the automation time TY2 elapses may be used. Further, a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds output continuously and intermittently as one sound data may be reproduced. In a mode in which a plurality of specific sounds are reproduced as one sound data, not all the specific sounds are necessarily output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), with respect to the display output on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation display pattern accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand leaves from and no operation is performed (the period between timings tx12 and tx13 in the figure), the display content of the operation display pattern evolves a plurality of times in this situation. It can be done.

  For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from timing tx11 has been completed at timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, setting the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length based on the completion of the operation state (detection state) is as described above. It is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 to the time when the set grace time TY1 expires. Is executed, the display content of the operation-time display pattern can be advanced.

  The content of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as shown in FIG. 185. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 185, “display scene 1” is a moving image depicting a state in which the ally character grasps the sword and is about to draw a sword, and “display scene 2” is a ally character. This is a moving image depicting a state in which the character draws a sword and cuts off the ia. “Display scene 3” is a moving image depicting a state in which the ally character is fighting with the enemy character with the sword in the first mode. , “Display scene 4” is a moving image depicting a situation in which the ally character is fighting with the enemy character with the sword in the second mode, and “display scene 5” is a moving image in which the ally character and the enemy character It is a moving image which depicts a situation where a fight with a sword is performed in an aspect.

  After the operation display pattern accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11, the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed as the specific sound is output intermittently, so that the ally character can be displayed as an enemy character. This makes it possible for the player to memorize the feeling as if the content of the effect of fighting with the character is progressing in response to a plurality of operations. It should be noted that each of the display scenes 1 to 5 is not necessarily a moving image, and may be a still image. In addition, in the game board effect display device 1600, in addition to the display pattern at the time of operation, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. One of these effect displays may include an image that changes effect (color change, etc.) each time an effect is received by an operation by the player, but it is recognized whether or not an effect is received. In order to make it difficult to perform, it is important to display an image smaller than the operation display pattern.

  Here, in the operation-time display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The time length is set so that at least five (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. Thereby, even if an operation is performed in a single operation mode within a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given, at least five display contents of the operation display pattern (M ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 sequentially displayed (evolved) even when there is no operation thereafter) And the total number of display contents).

  In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during output of the display scene 5). Is reached, unlike the case of the specific sound, the operation display pattern is terminated by interrupting the display scene 5 without cutting it to the end without cutting it. In other words, unlike the case of a specific sound that has no progression, the display pattern at the time of operation that has progression in the production content is intentionally interrupted in the middle of the display scene, so that the display content is maintained if the operation is continued. It gives the player the impression that he may have been able to make further progress, and this is expected to encourage further operation by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed until the grace time TY1 starts and ends. It can be said that setting to "1" is more desirable for prompting further operation by the player. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 is displayed between the start and the end of the grace period TY1. Is more desirable.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace period TY1 and the elapse of the grace period TY1 and a new operation is no longer accepted, the predetermined validity period is set. At the end of the period (a state in which the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted and a display showing the result as the operation-time display pattern is performed. This will be described later.

  Note that the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progress according to a predetermined schedule after the display scene 1 is displayed, regardless of the operation mode. May be set in advance according to the time from when the specific sound is output to when it is output again (automation time TY2), or may be set irrespective of the time (automation time TY2). It may be something. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display and occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 185, display scene 1 includes “from the state of holding the sword, There is a display change due to "moving image drawing with sword pulled out", and display scene 3 has a display change due to "effect generation when ally character fights enemy character". It is more desirable. If a display scene having such a display change is used, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene has been caused by the reception of the effect, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene It is expected that the sense of incongruity will be resolved without strictly matching the above. In addition, a plurality of display scenes need not always be prepared as the operation display pattern, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined effective period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (such as continuous hits) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that an operation is performed in a long mode in which the operation is maintained. Therefore, at the timing tx21, similarly to the case of the timing tx11, detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Processing for starting output of the accompanying specific sound and output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation are performed.

  Also, in the operation maintaining period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, as in the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13), the identification is performed every time the automation time TY2 elapses. Sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be output sequentially according to a predetermined time and order. The display content of the hour display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 184 (a).

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), first, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodically monitor (determine whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detection of a falling edge in a detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having the predetermined time length is not set. A process of outputting a specific sound (for example, “picone”) ”and a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order” are performed. In other words, during the operation maintaining period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), “Every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is detected, and the determination that the operation is detected is made. A process such as outputting a specific sound (for example, "picone") based on the operation detection status is determined every time the automation time TY2 elapses. A process such as "display content is advanced based on the determination" is not performed, and "periodic monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)" is performed. "A process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone "every time the automation time TY2 elapses)" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) in accordance with a predetermined time and order. Process "and that the next output is to be carried out respectively. The “periodical monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)” is executed as a process that is executed a plurality of times during the lapse of the automation time TY2. Is what is done.

  Thereafter, as a result of “periodical monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”, the operation on the operation button 410 is continued ( When the timing tx22 at which the determination that the operation state has been completed comes, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the determination result. The held grace time TY1 is set. However, at this time, “a process of outputting a specific sound (for example,“ picone ”) every time the automation time TY2 elapses” and “a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are performed according to a predetermined time and order. The "sequential output process" is executed continuously over the period up to the timing tx23 until the grace period TY1 ends, even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends. In other words, in this case, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) is changed to the state in which the player's hand leaves the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to timing x23) straddling the transition timing, the specific sound can be intermittently output in a single processing mode in which the output is performed again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation-time display pattern can be continuously output in a single processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

  According to such a configuration, in producing the specific sound output mode at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the specific sound output mode at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b), respectively. Thus, the processing mode (program) related to the output of the specific sound can be shared between them. Similarly, the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 184 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 184 (b) are respectively shown. In creating them, a processing mode (program) related to the output of the operation display pattern can be shared between them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 184 (a), at the timing tx12, as a result of “periodic monitoring (determination) as to whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)”. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. In addition, the state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the state in which the player's hand leaves the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to timing x13) straddling the timing, the specific sound is output intermittently in a single processing mode in which the specific sound is output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. The operation display pattern is continuously output in a single processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output in accordance with a predetermined time and order.

  Thus, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as when the operation is performed in a so-called long-press mode. The specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is output intermittently. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single push (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). This makes it possible for the player to remember a feeling as if the action is being performed (such as a feeling as if a rapid continuous hit is being performed). Thereby, while stabilizing the reactivity of the effect when the operation is performed by a single push (whether it is a single effect change or a plurality of effect changes), any of the operation modes (single press, Even if “long press” is employed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the number of times of the effect change (specific sound) caused by the operation per unit time.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 184, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode (FIG. 184 (a)), and the operation is performed in a so-called long-press mode (FIG. 184). Although the same effect change is produced in (b)), in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), in effect, one effect is received at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. While the sound output is performed only once, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (b), the effect is received four times each time the automation time TY2 elapses from the timing tx11. The specified specific sound output is output four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, at least a specific number of production receptions is required, or each time a production is received, a production lottery is performed and a specific lottery is performed according to the result. In the case where an effect of a type that produces an effect is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 184 (a), since only one effect reception has actually occurred, a specific effect is caused to appear. That is not something we can expect. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the effect reception is not performed, the specific sound output without the black in the figure is intentionally performed, so that the effect reception actually occurs so much. Even if it is a situation where it is not possible to expect a specific production result to appear, it is possible to operate multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring Even if the player who is not good (such as a slow hit speed) performs a single operation, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much effect reception has been made only by confirming the specific sound output one by one. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been performed, it is possible to add a level of visibility to how many effect receptions have occurred.

  In the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after sequentially outputting the display scene 1 to the display scene 5, the display scene 3 is output again, and thereafter, the grace time TY1 is timed up, or By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or a specific production result appears within the predetermined validity period and the production condition is satisfied, the ally character and the enemy character and the sword are repeatedly output. A depiction of a single discussion is made. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific production result is such that the ally character defeats the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight, and the specific production result is obtained within a predetermined validity period. Does not appear, it is desirable to display, at the end thereof, a rendering effect result at the time of failure in which the ally character has been defeated by the enemy character as a result of such a sword fight.

  Thus, the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode (FIG. 184 (a)) and the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long-press mode (FIG. 184 (b)), the specific sound accompanying the operation is output intermittently a plurality of times, and the display pattern at the time of the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule to progress. By doing so, even a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times is encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in practice, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation on the operation button 410 is often performed as a multiple tap operation in a single-push mode. It is important for the player to remember the operational feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation each time in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling in which an effect is received by one operation at a time is completely reflected as an effect, a player who is good at performing a plurality of operations is more advantageous than a player who is not good at performing a plurality of operations. Since the performance becomes as if it were a certain effect, it is required to achieve both of the performance elements (operating feeling, effect fairness) in such a trade-off relationship.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, in order to secure an operational feeling that the effect is received by one operation at a time, an effect with an immediateness to the operation is set as “operated. Focusing on the fact that "whether a sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed) when the operation button is pressed" Each time an operation on 410 is performed in a single-push mode, a specific sound corresponding to the effect reception is output according to the operation timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), in the period from the timing tx31 to the timing tx32 of the predetermined effective period, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple-shot operation in a single-shot mode. Suppose. Then, every time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment triggers the detection of a new specific sound with respect to the previous specific sound (the specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output so that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. As described above, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode, the specific sound is output intermittently a plurality of times. When the operation of the operation button 410 is performed again while the player is playing the game, a new specific sound is output in such a manner that the specific sound in the output state is chopped (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. Can be explicitly indicated that the specific sound is newly output at the timing when the effect is performed and the effect is accepted.

  In this embodiment, even when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in a single-push mode or when the operation is performed by a long press, the specific sound of the previous output is completely output. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound elapses, so that the sound data of the new specific sound is output over the specific channel with respect to the previously output specific sound. This is as described above. In this case, however, the specific sound is output at an accurate rhythm every fixed time (automation time TY2), whereas the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple tapping operation in a single-shot mode. In this case, the specific sound in the output state is chopped every time the operation timing by the irregular player arrives, and a new specific sound is output. This makes it possible for the player to appropriately remember the operational feeling that the effect reception is occurring.

  Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), every time an operation is performed on the operation button 410 during a predetermined validity period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). A process of monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in a period of timings tx31 to tx32 at which the operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a multiple-stroke operation in a single-shot mode, the operation is continued each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. As a result of the periodic monitoring of whether the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and a predetermined time length is set accordingly. The grace time TY1 is set (not shown).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace time TY1 is completed (time-up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is released. Thus, the state is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state) is performed. Therefore, during the period from the timing tx31 to the timing tx32, each time the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state or the non-operation state, the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. The state transition is performed very quickly between the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), after six consecutive tapping operations are performed between the timings tx31 and tx32, the user becomes tired of multiple consecutive tapping operations. It is assumed that the time required is significantly longer. For a player who is not good at performing such a plurality of operations, after the timing tx32, it is not possible to perform a plurality of continuous hitting operations. It is feared that the game entertainment will be reduced due to the decrease. However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is ended. The processing for outputting is performed as described above. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repetitive operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace period TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. As long as the player can perform the repetitive operation within a shorter period of time, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, so that the player can feel the sensation as if a fast continuous operation is being performed. Become like

  For example, at timing tx33, if it is determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed as a result of periodic monitoring as to whether or not the operation state from timing tx32 has been continued, based on the determination, A grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, a specific sound is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the operation is not performed by the player, although the time required for the repetitive operation significantly increases. The specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output by performing the process of causing the operation to be performed. However, these specific sounds are output as black specific sounds (seventh to ninth specific sounds) in the figure in a situation where no effect reception has occurred.

  In this regard, the black specific sound (the specific sound from the seventh to the ninth) in the drawing can be generated only until the grace period TY1 elapses after the previous operation state ends. However, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), regarding the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. The setting is canceled (the time does not increase) based on the operation. At the same time, at timing tx34, the specific sound in the figure (the tenth specific sound) is output in response to the reception of the effect in which the specific sound in the output state is cut off (interrupted). At the same time, the state is returned to the state where the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

  However, such an operation state is also terminated at the timing tx35, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the monitoring. Based on the determination, the grace period TY1 having a predetermined time length is determined. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where no operation is performed by the player, the black specific sound (the eleventh to fourteenth specific sounds) in the drawing is output again, and the delay is given. When the player finally performs the operation at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 elapses, the black specific sound (the 14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In this way, the specific sound outlined in the figure (the fifteenth specific sound) is output.

  As described above, even if the time required for the repetitive operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repetitive operation is performed within a time shorter than at least the grace time TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. As long as it can be performed, the specific sound outlined in the figure at the timing when the operation is performed by the player and the specific sound outlined in the figure periodically in the situation where the operation is not performed by the player Is output, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently, so that the player can remember the feeling as if a rapid continuous operation is being performed. Therefore, according to such an aspect relating to the output of the specific sound, it is possible not only to ensure the operational feeling that the effect reception has occurred by one operation at a time, but also to a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times. Even in the non-operation state, the specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently by the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state. , And production fairness).

  However, even in the case where the specific sound is output in such an aspect, in the operation display pattern that plays the role of informing the effect result based on the operation within the predetermined validity period, a plurality of times. If the manner in which the display content progresses is greatly different between a player who is good at performing the operation and a player who is not good at performing the operation multiple times, after all, a player who is not good at performing the operation multiple times is more likely to be operated. There is a possibility that a player who is good at performing the operation a plurality of times may have an effect as if it is advantageous, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the display time of the operation display pattern does not evolve stepwise in accordance with the generation timing of the specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 increases. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the operation mode.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (a), as described above, it is not assumed that after the timing tx32 of the predetermined valid period, the time required for the repetitive operation is significantly increased. However, until the set grace time TY1 times out, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed again to cancel the setting of the grace time TY1. Therefore, the timing at which the grace time TY1 times up within the predetermined validity period and ends (the specific end timing) does not arrive.

  When the operation is performed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 186 (a), the display of the operation-time display pattern (the game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. Thereafter, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 185 are predetermined as the operation-time display patterns regardless of the operation state, even though the speed of the continuous operation is greatly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed in sequence according to the set schedule, so that it seems that the fairness of the production between the player who is not good at performing multiple operations and the player who is good at performing the multiple times is maintained Will be able to do it.

  However, even if the manner in which the display content as the operation display pattern progresses is the same, the number of times that the effect reception accompanying the operation has actually occurred depends on the player who is not good at performing the operation multiple times and the operation It is inevitable that a player who is good at the game will be different. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, at least a specific number of production receptions is required, or each time a production is received, a production lottery is performed and a specific lottery is performed according to the result. In the case where a type of effect that causes the effect to appear is performed, it is also easier for a player who is good at performing the operation multiple times to cause a specific effect to appear. Significant significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such staging significance, in terms of sound and display effects, stride fairness is maintained between players who are poor at performing multiple operations and players who are good at performing multiple operations. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it can be suppressed that the entertainment interest of a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times is reduced by making it look like it is performed.

  Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation by the long press is performed, the mode related to the progress of the operation display pattern is as follows. Since the same is assumed, it is expected to prevent occurrence of a situation in which button degradation is accelerated due to an excessively rapid hit operation.

  By the way, the example shown in FIG. 186 (b) assumes a case where the operation on the operation button 410 is not in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined validity period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 times up and ends comes. (The process of sequentially displaying and developing the display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that time.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, with respect to the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends in the output state comes. Even if this is done, processing (such as output interruption processing or processing of interrupting by overwriting with another sound) such that the specific sound in the output state is cut off (for example, “pico”) at the timing tx37 is performed. As described above, after the timing tx37 arrives, an output (sound waveform) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output until then appears as described above. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is not changed. If the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the sound is muted, the player can feel that a specific sound accompanying the operation can be output continuously and intermittently as if a fast continuous operation is being performed. It is possible to make it happen.

  In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), before the black specific sound (the tenth specific sound) output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the specific sound outlined in FIG. 2 is generated twice in a form in which the output of the tenth specific sound is interrupted, the specific sound outlined in black in FIG. It can be seen that is output continuously and intermittently. In the example shown in FIG. 186 (b), the specific sound is output continuously and intermittently, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily stopped at the timing tx37. . After that, it is clear that the display content is advanced again from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 at which the specific sound outlined in the figure is output again.

  187 is a predetermined validity period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple-time operation function (automatic multiple-stroke function) described with reference to FIGS. 7 is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when an operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timings tx41 to tx48) when a specific effect pattern that causes the occurrence of is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 187, at a timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given occurs, and at a timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period, the player performs Assuming that the operation is started, also in this effect example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern during operation) associated with the operation are respectively performed. The process for starting is performed.

  However, in this effect example, when an effect on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined validity period, a specific sound output outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability. The output process can be executed.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in the situation where the operation of the operation button 410 is not performed and the effect is not received. In this embodiment, the black specific sound output in the figure is hard to be distinguished from the white specific sound output generated in the timing when the effect is received (the same example in this effect example). ). Also, as described above, the display content at the time of operation that appears on the game board side effect display device 1600 is designed to progress the display content according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if an operation is performed by a long press or a plurality of operations within a predetermined validity period, it is possible to recognize how many effects are received by these operations. It can be said that the situation is difficult. Thus, in this effect example, when an effect on the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined validity period, a specific sound output outlined in the drawing is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated at a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing the process of outputting at 50%, it is possible to predict to some extent how much effect reception has occurred through such special sound output status.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 187, when a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45) has elapsed since the start of the predetermined validity period, two consecutive tapping operations at timings tx42 and tx43 and a timing tx44 Each of the long press operations causes the effect reception for a total of nine times to occur, and the specific sound output in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated nine times (for example, the first to ninth in the figure) ), The number of production receptions per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, during a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) from the start of the predetermined validity period, the operation in the single operation mode requires a long time such that it cannot be said to be a continuous hit, and the timing tx46 is required. , Tx47, the reception of two effects occurs, and the specific sound output outlined in FIG. 2 corresponding to these receptions occurs twice with a certain time interval (in the figure, the tenth sound output). , The eleventh outlined specific sound), the number of times the effect is received per unit time is relatively small.

  However, when checking the output state of the specific sound and the output state of the display pattern during operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started by performing the above-described black specific sound output. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined valid period starts. In any of the extremely early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), the display scenes are only changed in a manner that the display scenes can be switched according to a predetermined schedule. Just checking the output status may indicate that the number of production receptions per unit time is high. Whether there is in the stomach situation it can be seen that is hard to determine.

  In this regard, when the output state of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the specific sound output outlined in the figure is generated is checked, a relatively early period (timing) after the predetermined valid period starts. (tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started. It is possible to predict to a certain extent how many effect receptions have occurred based on the output situation. Further, according to such an output mode of the special sound, it is possible to keep to a certain extent which of the specific sound output in white and the specific sound output in black in the drawing occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming entertainment of a player who is not good at performing the operation a plurality of times is appropriately maintained. In this sense, although the special sound can be generated when the specific sound output is generated, the special sound is output based on satisfying an output condition different from the generation of the specific sound output. For example, it is required that the special sound is not necessarily generated even if the specific sound output is generated.

  Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when an effect reception is generated may be changed according to the number of effect receptions generated within a predetermined effective period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the specific sound output in the drawing and the specific sound output in the drawing is occurring.

  In addition, in view of the fact that the output frequency of the special sound is made lower than that of the specific sound, the special sound has a time value from when the specific sound is output to when it is muted or a time value longer than the automation time TY2. It is desirable to be set as one. Note that, in this example, the time value is set to be twice as long as the “automation time TY2”. Further, when outputting a new special sound while the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output a new special sound.

  However, in such a pachinko machine 1, since the same effect as in the case where the operation is performed a plurality of times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by long pressing, the number of players who perform the operation a plurality of times is reduced. However, there is a concern that the significance of the effect requiring a plurality of operations will be lost. Therefore, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 187, the operation by the player is long-pressed during at least the period after the operation by the player is started at the timing tx42 in the predetermined effective period (timing tx41 to tx48). A state where the operation is performed as a single operation mode between a state where the operation is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state where the operation is performed as a single operation mode (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48) The display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when a certain display condition is satisfied.

  That is, in this case, in order to confirm the specific image, it is necessary to perform the operation as a single-shot operation, not at least a long-press operation. Performing the round operation (such as repeated hits) can have a meaning in the performance, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In addition, in this effect example, in order to check the specific image, the condition that only the operation is performed as a single operation mode is not a condition, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless a specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself is increased. Therefore, each time a predetermined validity period occurs, the specific image is operated multiple times (such as a continuous operation) without using the automatic continuous operation (automatic multiple operation) function. ), It appears that you are trying to display a specific image that is highly difficult to appear, and you do it multiple times without using the auto-hitting (automatic multiple operations) function It is expected to encourage others to understand what they do.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 187, a specific non-operation time (in this case, twice as long as the “automation time TY2”) elapses without a new effect reception occurring from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. In addition, the fact that an effect hit has been obtained in a predetermined effect lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed is referred to as the “specific display condition”, and the display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period ( (Specified display). In this regard, in the predetermined effect lottery, when a jackpot has been won in the jackpot determination (or an effect situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined validity period (the jackpot expectation degree is high). In the case of the production status), the production hit is obtained with a probability of 70%, whereas when the big hit is determined to be a big hit (or the operation is performed within a predetermined validity period). No matter how many times the game is performed, in a production situation in which a success display cannot be made to appear (a production situation with a low jackpot expectation), a production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within the predetermined validity period, it is suggested that the degree of expectation of the appearance of the big hit symbol is high, and the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained. The “specific display condition” is not limited to this, and may be “a specific non-operation time (here,“ automation time TY2 ”) without a new effect reception occurring from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. Elapsed time) and only one of the following: "The effect has been won by the predetermined effect lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition". The display of the specific image (specific display) may appear, or another condition may be adopted as the “specific display condition”.

  In addition to the above-described types of the predetermined effect lottery mode, for example, there is an effect state (an effect state in which a big hit expectation degree is low) in which a success display can appear depending on an operation mode within a predetermined validity period. In some cases, the effect per win is obtained with a probability of 0% (or the effect lottery itself is not performed), however, no matter how much operation is performed within a predetermined validity period, a success display cannot appear. In the case of (the production situation where the big hit expectation is low), the production may be achieved with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, since the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, there is no need to perform an awkward operation for causing the specific display to appear. Can be recognized within a predetermined validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use, as the specific display, the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187, when a new effect is received while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the identification is performed at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on condition that a state where no operation is performed by the player (a state where no new effect reception is generated) is maintained. I have.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 187, in order to make a specific effect result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is necessary to at least require that an effect reception more than a specific number of times occurs. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the eleventh effect reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( In this case, a process of displaying a success display as an operation display pattern in the form of “interruption” is performed. The contents of the success display include the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as defeating an enemy character who was fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable to be related. Further, when the success display appears, it is desirable to indicate that the expectation of winning the big hit is high in the big hit determination.

  Further, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the eleventh effect reception (the eleventh white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined validity period is terminated at that time, and a new effect reception is performed. Will not occur. Therefore, at a timing later than the timing tx47, a specific sound or special sound outlined in the figure does not newly occur, and a specific display does not newly appear.

  FIG. 188 is executed under the same processing conditions as the effect example shown in FIG. 187. However, although the operation in the single operation mode by the player is at an interval shorter than the grace time TY1, the continuous hit is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect which appears when it is repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

  As shown in FIG. 188, even when the operation in the mode of a single operation by the player is repeated for a long time, as long as those operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1, After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within a predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the display pattern at the time of operation is displayed according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within the predetermined validity period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if about 20 consecutive hit operations were performed. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a person who is performing the continuous tapping operation seriously cannot understand the meaning of performing the continuous tapping operation, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined valid period is “Tx1”, the length of the grace period TY1 is “Tx2”, and a specific effect result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined valid period. When the minimum number of effect receptions required to appear is “EU”, these numerical values are set so that the relationship [“Tx1 / Tx2” <EU] holds. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeatedly performed at the last moment when the grace time TY1 elapses, and the specific sound and the operation-time display pattern are continuously output, the production situation is produced by these operations. The number of effect receptions that occur is less than the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to cause a specific effect (success display) to appear within a predetermined validity period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it is possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It is expected that the entertainment interests of those who are playing will be maintained appropriately. In order to obtain such an operation effect more reliably, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to cause a specific effect (success display) to appear within a predetermined validity period is as follows: Strictly, it is required to set a numerical value calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2” as a numerical value larger than the integer value obtained by rounding up to an integer.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the minimum number of effect receptions (EU) required to produce a specific effect (success display) within a predetermined validity period is calculated by “Tx1 / Tx2”. Since the value is set to “11 times” which is twice or more the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 at which the predetermined validity period ends. Become. In other words, in this case, a failure display appears due to a shortage of the number of operations, so that it is an effect situation where it is not possible to recognize whether the big hit expectation is low or high.

  Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment enables the display of a specific image to appear only in a state where the operation is performed as a single operation and when a specific display condition is satisfied. It is. In this regard, in this effect example, when the “specific non-operation time” minimum required to display the specific image is “Tx3”, the relationship “[Tx1 / Tx3” <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so as to perform. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make the specific display appear each time the user performs one operation within the predetermined validity period, the number of effect receptions that occur within the predetermined validity period is limited to within the predetermined validity period. In this case, the number of effect receptions (EU), which is a minimum required for the appearance of a specific effect (success display), is reduced. That is, in this case, a direct effect selection function of performing an attempt to make the specific display appear until the risk of the specific effect (success display) not appearing is performed. Since it is not possible to easily make an attempt to make it appear many times, the rendition of the attempt will be enhanced, so it is expected to improve the entertainment interest of the game Become like

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 188, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 in the display state at that time is cut off ( (Interruption), a process of causing a failure display to appear as an operation display pattern is performed. The contents of the failure display include the effect contents of portions (display scenes 3 to 5) that are repeated in the operation display pattern, such as losing an enemy character who had been fighting with a sword in display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable to be related. Further, when the failure display appears, it is desirable that the big hit determination indicates that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is low.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the specific sound which is in the output state when the predetermined validity period is ended regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. Is not cut off (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently thereafter, those specific sounds will be muted during the success display or failure display, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

  In this embodiment, a grace time TY1 is set after the operation state of the player is completed, and the specific sound output in black in the non-operation state in the non-operation state is set until the grace time TY1 elapses. This is performed at least four times, but the number of times of “specific sound output without black in the drawing” generated in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having a length at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specific sound output in black in FIG. Since it occurs, it is possible to make the player feel as if the continuous hit operation (a plurality of operations) has been continued even in the non-operation state.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. Thus, a depiction in which the ally character solely makes a fight with the enemy character with the sword appears. Therefore, a specific display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit may be performed in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2. According to such a configuration, if the specific display is missed, it is not possible to confirm again unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. Can be provided between the disadvantage of being wastefully consumed and the disadvantage of not being able to confirm the specific display.

  Further, in this embodiment, a continuous tapping operation in a mode in which the effect reception is generated at an interval shorter than the interval at which the effect reception is performed when the operation by the long press is performed (the automation time TY2) is allowed. Thus, it is possible to realize an operation effect with a high degree of freedom by the player (see FIG. 186). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous tapping operation is performed, the progress of the display scene in the operation-time display pattern is the same as when the operation by long-pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform the high-speed continuous tapping operation, and thereby it is expected that excessive operation of the operation button 410 is suppressed and the risk of breakage or the like is reduced. Will be done.

  In addition, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined validity period, when performing a type of production that requires at least a specific number of productions to be received, only an operation by long pressing within the predetermined validity period is performed. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception more than the specific number of times occurs. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception of the specific number of times or more occurs only by performing the operation by the long press for a half of the predetermined effective period.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, a time (specific non-operation time) that is twice as long as “automation time TY2” elapses without a new effect reception from the timing at which the previous effect reception occurred. Although the display of the specific image (specific display) appears when the user performs the operation, the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as the specific non-operation time, any time value that is twice or more of the “automation time TY2” and within a range in which the grace time TY1 is an upper limit value (the grace time TY1 or less) is used. In a state in which two or more black specific sounds are output in the non-operation state (a state in which a continuous tapping operation is performed in the non-operation state), It is not possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appeared based on the fact that the number of pseudo operations in the non-operation state (the number of times of outputting the specific sound with black dots in the figure) reached a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine in which the plate operation unit 400 is provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of performing the pressing operation by the player and presenting the effect image to the player has been described. With reference to FIG. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 189 is a front view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 190 is a right side view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 will be described.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 stores a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, a flange section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 capable of forming a sword.

  The sword decoration 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword section 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword removal direction and the sword placement direction. The sword section 5010 is usually in a sword-pulling state in which the sword body section 5011 is housed in the sheath section 5020. In the sword-drawing effect, the sword section 5011 is in a sword-drawing state in which the sword body section 5011 can be visually recognized by a player. Then, the sword section 5010 in the sword-drawing state can function as an operating means for receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player and returning to the sword-pulling state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an execution opportunity of a sword effect with the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect.

  The effect patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is performed after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, a pattern in which the sword-drawing production effect is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance. There is a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is not performed even though there is a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is not performed or the sword-drawing production is not performed. Further, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing production, Two patterns, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member, are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 191 (A), the presence or absence of the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is randomly selected according to the type of the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the plurality of types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for a large hit at the time of a big hit, a variation pattern for a small hit at a small hit, and a variation pattern for a miss at the time of a loss, and a variation having an advantageous result for a player. The setting is such that the probability that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, and in the case of the variation pattern for the outlier variation. Performed with a 20% probability. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the outlier fluctuation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the execution of the sword-drawing effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation effect. Even when the type of the variation pattern is the same, when the sword-drawing preparation effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed is set higher than when the sword-drawing operation is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern has a result that is advantageous to the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of advantage, the execution of the sword-drawing preparation effect is set such that the probability of executing the main sword-drawing effect is increased. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for the loss variation, the probability of executing the sword-drawing main effect is higher than when the sword-preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for the small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation shift effect.

  Also, when the sword-drawing production is performed, the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance, and the probability that the sword-drawing production in the form with the aura member is performed is higher as the variation pattern has a more advantageous result for the player. Is set to Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by the sword movement of the sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword body portion 5011) itself capable of receiving a sword placing operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 192, 193) and the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword 5010 (sword body 5011), and the sword 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 194 and 195).

  FIG. 192 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) itself. A sword-drawing state, (C) shows a second sword-drawing state. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 193 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is a sword-inserted state in which the blade 5011 is housed in the sheath 5020. As shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, as shown in FIG. Becomes the first sword drawn state. Then, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing main effect has the blade 5011 further pulled out from the sheath 5020 and most of the second sword can be visually recognized by the player. State. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state can function as operating means capable of accepting a sword-pulling operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade removal operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 is sheathed when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivery state (FIG. 192 (A)) to the first sword-drawing state (FIG. 192 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 193 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 193 (B)) inside the section 5020, and the blade section 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword state to the second sword state (FIG. 192 (C)). Although described later, the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is moved to the maximum, so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade part 5011 as shown in FIG. 193 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. A pinion 5033. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by the driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into the rightward movement of the rack 5031a and the leftward movement of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade part 5011.

  An LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated.

  Here, the operation timing of the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword-delivery state to the first sword-drawing state. The example in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state after deforming is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (including a mode in which the operation is stopped midway, not limited to a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the maximum) ).

  FIG. 194 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020. The second sword-drawing state is shown. FIG. 195 is a vertical sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 195 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out from the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 193 and 194 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 194 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for storing the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011) is the same as the aforementioned sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided on itself moves in the left-right direction, it moves in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 (the sword state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade part 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword-put state. (1st sword state ⇔ 2nd sword state) This enables the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) to be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to appear as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely stored state) is stored in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 in a completely housed state, and is a hollow cylindrical aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011; , A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated by the driving means (not shown) so that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in front view, and both pinions are engaged with each other. The linear motion is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 195 (B), stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second bladed state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship in accordance with the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword placement state ⇔first sword state ⇔second sword state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (union) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (not only the fully appearing state in which the sword is fully actuated but also the halfway appearance in which the action is stopped halfway) (Including a state with an aura member in a state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so that the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player in the first sword-drawing state from the sword-pulling state.

(Example of sword-drawing production using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, a sword-drawing effect using the sword-effect operating unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, there is a case where a sword preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the drawing), and an effect pattern in which the sword drawing effect is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the diagram). The transition of the screen of the rendering display device 1600 and the transition of the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be described with respect to the rendering patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing rendering is performed. FIG. 196 to FIG. 200 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation validity period of the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which are variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (FIG. 196 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display area, and an effect image indicating execution of the sword-drawing effect (movable of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the central display region. Specifically, after an image (FIG. 196 (X2)) in which two samurai face each other and start iai (FIG. 196 (X2)), an image of one samurai holding a handle and holding a sword in the sheath (FIG. 196 (X3)) is displayed. Here, an effect indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is movable is performed by an image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword rendering operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 192 (A)).

  Next, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of the variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIGS. 197 (X4) and (X5), the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a face with closed eyes of a samurai holding a sword is displayed in the above-described image, and the eye area is enlarged and displayed with time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state, so that a sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. Note that, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the sword-drawing main effect is more likely to be executed thereafter than in the case where it is not performed. Therefore, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect can also be said to be an expectation effect in which the expected degree of execution of the sword-drawing main effect is indicated by the movement of the sword decoration 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, the player can expect the sword decoration body 5001 to further change to the second sword-drawing state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first drawn state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the aura member is provided. On the other hand, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration 5001 may maintain the sword-inserted state, and the image shown in FIG. 196 (X3) may be kept displayed.

  Here, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the subsequent sword-drawing production is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath 5020 at the timing of the sword-drawing preparation transition production effect (see FIG. 193 (A)). )) To the open state (FIG. 193 (B)), the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade part 5011 is deformed. At this time, in the sword decoration body 5011 in the first drawn state, the portion from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the habaki 5011a becomes visible to the player. Since it is provided below, even if the aura member 5030 moves to the maximum, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 is visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same time as the timing at which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means capable of accepting a sword placing operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation depends on the form of the operating unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the completion of the sword-drawing preparation effect, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-preparing transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat bleeds into the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 197 (X6)), and the image of the samurai giving up at the timing when the fluctuating display of the center decoration is stopped is displayed. And a stop mode different from the right side decorative pattern, that is, a stop mode (here, “6”) (FIG. 197 (X7)). At this time, the state of the decorative sword 5001 is returned from the first drawn state to the cut-out state at the time of FIG. 197 (X6), and the cut-out state is maintained. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decoration 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is performed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect ends, an image in which Iai slashing is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is connected to the second sword-drawing device. State. Here, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state, the aura member 5030 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is not visible. A form without an aura member that allows the blade portion 5011 that is not deformed to be visually recognized is provided.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199, a description will be given of a case where the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is in a form without an aura member. When the sword-drawing effect starts, the image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the above-described enlarged image of the samurai's eyes with his eyes closed in FIG. 197 (X5). 198 (A1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 198 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state at the time of FIG. 198 (A1), and the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when a predetermined period elapses after the decorative sword body 5001 is in the second drawn state, the sword decorative body 5001 is placed in a sword placing operation by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player has jumped out of the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of holding down and pushing the blade 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect for prompting the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same form as the second drawn sword state of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message of “put the sword!” (FIG. 198 ( A3)). Note that the LED of the internal LED board 5011c of the sword decoration body 5001 blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, and the operation effect image is displayed on the front in superimposition with the immediately preceding Iaia slashing scene image (FIG. 198 (A2)). (See FIG. 204 (G2) described later).

  Then, during the operation validity period, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation of grasping the handle 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and putting the sword body part 5011 in the sheath part 5020, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-putting state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that results in an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with a symbol type hit notification (FIG. 199). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, a cut effect image is flashy displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 199 (C1)), and the center decoration symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the image of the opponent's samurai is defeated, and the image of the conclusion of Iai is stopped at the center of the screen in the same stop mode as the left side decorative pattern and right side decorative pattern, that is, the big hit mode (here, "7") It is displayed (FIG. 199 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of order, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 199 (D1)), and the centrally-decorated symbol that has been variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the center decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern at the center of the screen together with an image in which the opponent samurai cannot be defeated at the timing of the stop display, that is, a detached mode (here, “6”) Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 199 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a case will be described in which the sword decoration body 5001 to be in the second sword-drawing state has a form with an aura member. When the sword-drawing effect is started, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the above-described enlarged image of the warrior's eyes with his eyes closed in FIG. 197 (X5). 200 (B1)), the image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 200 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state at the time of FIG. 200 (B1), and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first sword state to the second sword state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second drawn state so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member in the second sword-drawing state before the operation validity period starts. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform a sword-pulling operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 makes it possible to reliably recognize a change in the degree of expectation. If a long time is required for the operation, there is a concern that a player may cause an erroneous operation. Therefore, when a series of movements from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state are performed as in this example, the player can recognize the aura member 5030, and the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. It is preferable that the operation validity period be started immediately.

  The images in FIGS. 200 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 198 (A1) and (A2) described above. It is not possible to determine whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp which of the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member. Thereby, the sword decoration body 5001 can be noticed before the sword decoration body 5001 functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means, and enjoy the operation effect without being confused. Can be. Note that the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not need to be the same as described above, and may be any image that resembles an image so that the player can be directed to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in samurai images (differences in eye colors and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation effective period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form as the sword decoration 5001 with an aura member. It will be displayed (FIG. 200 (B3)). Subsequent effects are the same as in FIG. 199 described above, and a description thereof will not be repeated. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect image in FIGS. 199 (C1) and (D1) may be displayed more gorgeously than the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period in the sword-drawing effect in which the sword-preparing transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 201, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an iaido effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is first shifted from the sword-inserted state as a sword-drawing preparation effect. The state changes to the drawn state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern with the form with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state. It is provided so as to be invisible to a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword removal state, and if the sword decoration body 5001 changes, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. Can not do. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and the possibility of the aura member-attached form is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased. Even if the main sword-drawing effect is not performed, a sword-movable suggestion effect (FIG. 196 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggested effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state can be captured.

  Then, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect ends, the sword-drawing main effect is subsequently started, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2). After that, the operation validity period starts after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation validity period is reached, an operation promoting effect using a sword related to a series of Iaido effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, if a sword placing operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 returns from the second drawn state to the sword-delivered state by the sword-drawing operation by the player. Then, the operation validity period set in advance ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby ending a series of Iaido effects ( Time t5). Note that the operation validity period may end when a player's operation is detected, as indicated by a dashed line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-inserted state when the operation valid period ends.

  Here, during a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword state to when the operation validity period starts, the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (aura member). A period longer than the operation validity period (time t4 to t3) is secured as a mode check period in which it is possible to check whether the mode is the attached mode or the light emission mode. In other words, even if the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operable by the player is in the operation position (second sword removal state) functioning as an operation means, operation acceptance is immediately started (operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final state of the operation unit at the operation position. This allows the player to check the final mode before operating the sword decoration 5001, to increase the expectation for the subsequent deployment (for example, to increase the expectation in the case of the configuration with the aura member), and to prepare for the mind. Because the operation validity period starts as soon as the second sword state is entered and the state of the operation means can not be confirmed, it shifts to the operation effect in a hurry, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. Can be dispelled.

  Also, the sword decoration effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in a series of Iaido effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decoration 5001. An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is set as an associated effect. This makes it possible for the player to impress the switching of the function of the sword decoration body 5001 with a surprisingness and a variety of effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest caused by a uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can be.

  In the above-described production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) itself and the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the frame 2020 and is combined with a frame-side member (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deformation or uniting) the aspect of members (sword section 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. In addition, the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword-pulling state, first sword-pulling state, second sword-pulling state, form without an aura member and form with an aura member) is such that a game ball is sent to one starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is selected by acceptance (see FIG. 191). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display has an advantageous result for the player due to a change in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, and raises the player's interest in the operation means (sword decoration body 5001). Because of this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, before the decorative sword 5001 changes to a second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by a player, the degree of expectation is indicated by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword-deposited state to the first sword-drawn state. doing. The appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state indicates the degree of expectation. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first sword extraction state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (operation position). Therefore, the player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation is high. In this mode, there is a concern that the player may operate erroneously even though the operation means is not yet at an operable position at the time when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001 of this example. Since the state change to the position and the expectation suggestion proceed simultaneously, the erroneous operation as described above can be prevented.

  In the above-described first drawn state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is drawn out of the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visually recognizable in a single sword state. At this time, the amount of sword removal in the first sword-drawing state is less than the maximum amount of sword removal in the second sword-drawing state (operation position). Here, when the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the second sword-drawing state, it is in a completely appearing state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword-drawing state, the player can have higher expectation at the time of the first sword-drawing state, You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

  Also, in the case where a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) can be visually recognized by the player in the first sword-drawing state, it is required that the aura member is provided at the stage of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can understand and place great expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing performance is not executed in the subsequent development becomes extremely large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect, and an effect with a high level of entertainment for the game can be provided.

(Modification 1-Sword-drawing using the operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 202 to 205, a case where a sword-drawing effect is performed in the reach effect, and the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-drawing effect is triggered by a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. FIG. 202 to FIG. 204 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. FIG. 205 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 of the first modification and the operation timing of the operation means. In addition, the same description as the above-described sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 196 to 201) will be appropriately omitted.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect Regarding the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation buttons 410 The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, an Iaido effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 202 (Y1)), and an effect indicating the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 202 (Y2)). Then, when the operation effective period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation effective period are performed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 202 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. The light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword-drawing preparation effect and the sword-drawing effect are not performed and the result is a disconnection, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image indicating the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the operation buttons 410.

  Also, in the case where the main sword drawing effect is performed after the execution of the sword preparation transition effect, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 203 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, white characters of “Tenchu” are displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 203 (F1)), and an image is displayed in which the ally samurai is about to put his hand on the sword. (FIG. 203 (F2)). Next, a sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (form with an aura member) is started (FIG. 203 (F3), FIG. 204 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) by the main sword-drawing effect, FIG. 204 (G1) is different from the samurai Iai image shown in FIG. 204 (G1), an image in which lightning is running is displayed in an interrupted manner on a blackout screen as shown in FIG. 203 (F3). ) And the degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai according to the strength of lightning.

  Subsequent effects are the same as those in FIGS. 198 (A2), (A3) and FIG. 199 described above. An operation validity period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs in order to function as an operation means that can effectively accept the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword putting operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 204 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit / miss) is notified by the sword putting operation by the player (FIG. 204 (G3) or (FIG. 204 (G3)). G4)).

  Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 205, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration 5001 will be described. Modification 1 is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), an operation validity period of the operation button 410 is generated at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates (time ty) during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration 5001 starts to change its state, and changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. Here, in the first drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the sword decoration 5001 is operated to function as the operating means. An effective period is generated, and an operation promoting effect to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (time t3), and when the player operates during the operation effective period of the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is finished (time t5). When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation valid period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the final form (the second form) at the end of the operation valid period. The shape and the state of the aura member may be changed at a stroke. In addition, the state change timing from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state is changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the state changes to the first sword-drawing state and then to the second sword-drawing state after a certain period of time. It may be. In addition, if the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation validity of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is switched to the second operation at the end of the operation validity. The sword is returned to the sword-drawing state.

  In the first modification, the timing of the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 by the player. The start timing of the sword decoration of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the start timing of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tx). As described above, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword removal operation and sword placement operation) depending on which of the operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation validity period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decoration 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is deformed and the state is changed to change the state with the aura member). In the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  In addition, based on the operation of the operation buttons 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an effect image (FIGS. 203 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 204) corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration 5001. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation buttons 410 can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage aura sword production using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210, based on the first modification, the appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decoration 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade part 5011. A case in which the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. FIGS. 206 to 210 are examples of effect transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect of the second modification. The description of the same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 levels. The aura level 0 indicates a completely accommodated state in which the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player (FIG. 195 (A)). The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state (see FIG. 4) in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second drawn state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sword-inserted state, so that the player can visually recognize the figure to the maximum. 195 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears so as to be visible to a player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears so as to be visible to a player by two thirds of the full appearance state.

  In this case, there is no performance pattern ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the drawing) in which the sword-preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the final form (a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 (in the figure) (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration Explanation of operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described modification 1, the final form (the form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410. A stage operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed or the sword main effect is not performed, that is, in the effect pattern in which the state of the sword decoration 5001 does not change even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 203 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 207 (H1) and (H2)).

  Also, there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect, but the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 202 (Y1) to (Y3) of the first modification (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword body part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword body part 5011 in the sword-pulling state, and appears completely when the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 207 (I1)). The sword decoration body 5001 according to the first modification has the aura member 5030 in the form of the aura member 5030, and the second modification has the aura member 5035 in the second modification. 203 (F1) and (F2) → follow the same effect transition as FIG. 204 (FIG. 207 (I1) (I2) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  Also, in the case where there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect but the sword-drawing main effect is performed, a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise, 1 Until the operation of the first operation button 410, the same effect transition as before is followed (FIGS. 206 (Z1) to (Z3)), but after the first operation, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. The aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5035. The image displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 207 (I1) described above (FIG. 208 (J1)).

  Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 208 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

  First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the mode without the aura member), even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the stage operation effect is finished (hereinafter, no operation request of the operation button 410 is made), and it is notified that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 208 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 has no aura member, and follows an effect transition similar to that of FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204 of the above-described first modification in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0. (FIG. 208 (J4) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the completely accommodated state to the one-third appearance state. Become. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 208 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated in green to indicate aura level 1.

  Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed. At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (FIG. 209 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the ３ appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) notifying that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. (White characters) are displayed, and an image indicating the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 1/3 appearance state, and in the presentation mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. Following the same effect transition (FIG. 209 (K3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 出現 appearance state to the ／ appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 209 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated in red to indicate the aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promoting effect of illuminating decoration is performed (FIG. 209 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Hereafter, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) notifying that the user is to return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. Are displayed, and an image indicating the aura level is displayed (FIG. 210 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 2/3 appearance state, and in the presentation mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2 (FIG. 203 (F2) → FIG. 204) of the first modification. The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (M1) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 出現 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 210 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating the aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the stage operation effect is finished (hereinafter, no operation request of the operation button 410 is made), and a sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword state. An image notifying that returning is made (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 210 (L2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as that of FIG. 203 (F2) of FIG. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 210 (L3) → FIG. 204 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  In the above description, the degree of merging with the blade part 5011 of the aura member 5035 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises, so that the range visible to the player is widened (the degree of appearance is increased). Not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the aura level determined without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character of “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) is determined. A stock type merging may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is merged with the blade portion 5011 at a stroke so as to have an appearance corresponding to the level. Also, the target of increasing the appearance in a stepwise manner is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011). For example, the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) may be changed from the first sword state to a second sword state in a stepwise manner.

  As described above, in the second modified example, while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operating means is in the movable state, the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410. It is possible to provide a simple operation effect, and to further enhance the interest of the game than in the first modification. In addition, since a plurality of operation opportunities are given to the player to develop the effect step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the effect and prevent the interest in the effect from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable even in a subsequent effect, the player can feel the lingering sound of the operation effect.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 211 to 213 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points mainly differ from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-inserted state functions as an operating means, and detects a sword-drawing operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Operable up to the front center.

  When the moving symbols form the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 211 (A1)), and the start image of princess reach is displayed (FIG. 211 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a specific decorative member SDY (robin) that can be moved in the vertical direction. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to a player. I have. At this time, the sword decorative body 5001 is in a sword state.

  In the princess reach effect, after the image of the princess heading to the back of the screen is displayed (FIG. 211 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image indicating the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 211 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started to start the operation validity period for receiving the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to perform the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 212 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 or the specific decoration member SDY is moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. Is also good. Then, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword-drawing operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the sword body portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 in a sword-put state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation in which the sword section 5010 (or the handle section 5012) moves or vibrates up and down so that the player can feel an operation different from the own sword-drawing operation via the handle section 5012 grasped by the player. I just need. In addition, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after detecting the operation, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, it is possible to reduce unnecessary contact (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) with the sword decoration 5001 and prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. Can be.

  The aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the sword-drawing operation by the player here, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword-drawing operation according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is not overlaid on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and is stationary above the display area (initial state). State) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 212 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 212 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is centered on the front surface (the lower part of the display area below the display area of the effect display device 1600). (D2) (FIG. 212 (D1)) Then, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second sword-drawing state (FIG. 212 (D2)) Note that, at this time, a plurality of patterns of princess shadows displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (such as the degree of expectation of hitting and the game profit when hitting).

  Then, after the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into the second sword-drawing state by the sword-drawing operation by the player, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawing state is set. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 212 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. The image of the surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (FIG. 213 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation is performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a hit, a princess with a smile is notified of the hit. An image is displayed (FIGS. 213 (E1) and (E2)), and an image notifying of the loss is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it is lost (FIGS. 213 (F1) and (F2)).

  Note that, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. If the player is unable to move because he / she is grabbing when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. Even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, the production itself proceeds, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is performed at the movable effect timing in the horizontal direction of the sword decoration 5001 (FIG. 212 (D3)). If it is held at the performed position, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, the effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the movable effect of dropping of the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) progress regardless of whether the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed. The game progress does not stagnate because it is configured to play. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movable effect when the holding of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is released, or may be configured not to perform the movable effect. You may.

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decoration member SDY that suggests the operation effect (operation validity) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and movable by the sword-drawing operation (up and down movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (in the operation position). To the left). That is, based on the sword-drawing operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword-drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the operation value of the player and the player's willingness to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right direction after operation) by a player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that the left-right movable movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed for the purpose of performing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and an effect integrated with the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Although the operating position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operating position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration operation is performed in a state where the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed by displacing to the left (left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example by the player is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword-drawing operation of pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from below), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in a direction (the left-right direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the up-down direction) at the time of the operation of the player.

  Further, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be determined. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually check for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movable performance of the sword decoration body 5001 thereafter, and preventing the movable body from being damaged due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the mobile production cannot be performed due to the contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is issued to release the player's hand, and an operation is required during the operation validity period. Even after the end of the detection notification operation, even the contact of the operating means is prohibited, so that the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other effect pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 216. FIGS. 214 to 216 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect including an operation effect of the operation buttons 410 used in various aspects. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggesting effect indicating an expectation at which a change during execution is a big hit as an operation effect of the operation button 410 is performed, and an operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which an operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state (FIG. 214 (A)), first, the operation valid period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is The operation is started, and an operation promoting effect for urging the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 214 (B)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-put state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which a degree of expectation effect is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 214 (N1)), an image indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed (FIG. 215 (N2)). After that, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 215 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the effect indicating the degree of expectation for the variable display during execution. Alternatively, a character that changes the currently held display may appear.

  In a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 214 (M1) in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, a message of the title “chance of sword removal” and an operation description “a sword is required”) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 216 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword-drawing state and the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is moved in small increments in the initial state in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 216 (M3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the current fluctuation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when the player's sword placing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 216 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (the role of the hand) is returned to the initial state again, the big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the hand of the role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, message of “brilliant”) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M5)). On the other hand, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is out of order, when the player places a sword, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is only stopped at the initial state by the small movement. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the loss (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 216 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting a degree of expectation and developing an operation effect of another operation means (sword decoration 5001) can be performed. At the time of operating, it is not possible to specify the subsequent deployment. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's interest in operating the operation buttons 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in playing a game, which is a concern due to a monotonous effect after the operation.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword placing operation) are different between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001). (The pressing operation of the operation button 410) is requested by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation instead of shining.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword putting operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As a first operation opportunity, the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means that is effective in the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration body 5001 rather than the operation button 410 that has a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable.

(Other effect pattern 3 using decorative sword 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect. Here, the pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not moved based on the pressing operation and is displayed in the out-of-position mode, the symbol display in the out-of-position mode is changed again and the player is provided with an operation opportunity again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when operation opportunity of sword decoration 5001 is given / R when operation opportunity of operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 217 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , A message of “moving the movable body with a single button hit” is displayed (FIG. 217 (B)), and then the operation valid period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 217 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the sword-put state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one time), and may be repeated hits (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state during the operation period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, if the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivery state to the second sword-drawing state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is movable and has a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is completely dropped from the initial state. (FIG. 218 (O1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (robin material) has been released is displayed with an image (a decorative pattern of a decorative symbol) indicating a big hit. A stop mode “777”, a message of “excellent” is displayed (FIG. 218 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is stopped and the movable of the specific decorative member SDY is stopped, and the drop is movable. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in an off-center mode (“767”) is displayed in a swinging manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 219 (P1). Thereafter, according to the effect pattern to be set). The decorative pattern is developed into a pattern (FIG. 219 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode (“767”) or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image indicating that the fluctuating display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-position mode of FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 219 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state, is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the screen, and is operated in the center of the screen by either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 Is displayed (a face with closed eyes of a friendly warrior) in which is enabled (FIG. 219 (P4)). Then, as the time elapses, the displayed eyes of the samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is moved in small increments in the initial state in the initial state (FIG. 219 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) will be performed. At this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated and decorated in a fast blinking manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be moved up and down by changing the sword decoration state to the first sword removal state. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (robin) is performed. It should be noted that the pattern in which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat permeates the samurai's forehead of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 220 (R1)). Then, while the small decorative member SDY (small handpiece) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for urging the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 220 (R2)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emission decoration is stopped.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 220 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 216 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Next, the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state again, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (robin) has been released is displayed on the screen. At the center is displayed an image that informs the big hit (decorative design stop mode "777", "spectacular" message) (FIG. 220 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the variable display is incorrect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (screws) is stopped by a small amount, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a mode shifted from the center of the screen (“767”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 220 (R5)).

  In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operation means, the image (sword decoration) in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the light. (Decided image) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulled state to the second sword-drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 221 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410. Can be grasped by actually looking at the decorative sword 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (moving hand) is moved in small increments, the predetermined period elapses in the second sword state, and when the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 221 (Q2)).

  Then, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, if a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 220 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 221 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in a case where the fluctuation display result is out of order, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as that of FIG. 220 (R5) is followed (FIG. 221 (Q5)).

  As described above, the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (storage material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so that the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. It is possible to provide suggestions, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, even when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can be indicated by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect instead of shining.

  In addition, although the example of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 was mentioned in FIGS. 211 to 221 described above, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the entertainment interest can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo continuous production using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 222 to 236, a description will be given of a pseudo-sequence effect using the sword decoration 5001 whose form is stepwise changed in accordance with the number of times the pseudo-run change (re-change) is continued. Pseudo continuous production is a production that temporarily stops the display of the change of the decorative pattern and re-fluctuates. And so on. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to be stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, in the case where a fluctuation pattern for performing pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, pseudo continuous production of a production pattern that can be selected by lottery of production contents by the peripheral control board 1510 will be described below. Will be described.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. As the form of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, there are provided two types, that is, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword decoration 5001 used for pseudo continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be capable of changing the shape of the handle 5012 in two stages, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3. And an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visually recognizable. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the above-described aura member 5035, but operates in the left-right direction similarly to the above-described aura member 5030. FIGS. 222 (A) to 222 (D) are diagrams showing the type (step change) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-putting state, and show the step 0 to the step 3 in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes any one of the stage 0 to the stage 3 according to the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the stage 0 form is a form in the normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 192 (A) and 194 (A), and an initial state in which no operation is required for any component. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 222 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the pattern portion 5012 is spread and movable so as to be divided into two from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 222 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 to stage 3 modes here allow the shape to be changed without causing the decorative sword 5001 to be in the second sword state. Further, the sword section 5010 capable of accepting an operation by the player and the non-operating sheath section 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body as an operation section of the operation means, so that a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be.

(Example of pseudo continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 223 to FIG. 236, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (A), the main control board 1310 allows the sword LV1 weak change pattern, the sword LV1 strong change pattern, the sword LV2 weak change pattern, the sword LV2 strong change pattern, the sword LV3 weak change pattern, and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. When any one of the six types of variation patterns is selected, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to the six types of variation patterns, respectively. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, specific effect patterns (the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) are provided. When the change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected. When the change pattern is the sword LV2 weak change pattern (sword LV2 strong change pattern), the sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern) is selected, and the change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern). ), Any one of the sword LV3 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) Selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the presence / absence of an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the case where the operation opportunity is given The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is set (see FIG. 231 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to one to three times of the continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-variation). “Weak” and “strong” correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Further, the “pseudo sword LV1” is provided with an opportunity to select the sword decoration body 5001 for the first time of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), and the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is continued by making a selection not to be operated by the player. Is an effect that can be acquired. Also, the “simulated resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern for providing the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 for the first time of the pseudo continuous change (rechange). This shows that the pseudo repetition variation (re-variation) is performed again after the completion of the drop production of the special decoration member SDY (robin) based on the first operation opportunity of the variation. The details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of the pseudo-run change (re-change) increases, that is, as the morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 progresses. The lower the falling position of the object is, the higher the expectation is. However, when the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (half curtain) is a half-fall, the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change) is one. The degree of expectation is set to be the same as in the case where the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is a full drop with a few effect patterns. Specifically, the simulated continuous change (re-variation) is performed once and the sword LV1 with half-fall is expected to have a weak effect pattern of 29%. The expected degree of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is two times, and the half-fall sword LV2 is the expected degree of the weak production pattern of 40%, the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is 2 The expected degree of the sword LV2 strong effect pattern of the first and second drops is 50%, the continuation number of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) is 3 times and the half-fall sword LV3 weak effect pattern is 50%, the expected level of the pseudo-run variation (re The fluctuation degree) is set to be 3 times and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern of all drops is expected to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect patterns are set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected variation pattern, even for the same effect pattern, and the higher the degree of expectation, the higher the expectation degree. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern and the sword LV3 weak change pattern, respectively. Becomes The expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 strong change pattern and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. Also, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the degree of expectation of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 231 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 223 to 230 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 232 to 236. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition example of a pseudo continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIG. 224 to FIG. 226 are diagrams illustrating transition examples of an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is being performed. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of an effect after operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (dropping effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) during a pseudo continuous change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. is there. 228 and 229 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect transition example that is a feature of the pseudo-sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo-sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition example that is a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. 232 to 236 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (robin) in the pseudo continuous production, and FIG. 232 shows a sword LV1 weak performance pattern (sword LV1 strong performance pattern). 233 is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 234 is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. , FIG. 236 shows the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. Hereinafter, a description will be given along an effect transition example in a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the reaching of the reach state after the start of the variable display.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 223 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (storage item) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the screen is visible from the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword-putting state of the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B) and (C), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes a start image indicating the start of the simulated continuous effect (effect information notification “Large chance if 100 bodies can be destroyed” message, warrior Is displayed, which indicates to the player that the pseudo continuous production is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), the three decorative symbols which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are again changed for the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, although there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sword role) and the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the first pseudo repetition change (rechange). ), A sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) starts, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run variation) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are notified. Can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) at the stage.

  Then, when the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), it is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time point of FIG. 223 (D) described above. The simulated continuous sword design is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration design is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display that is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration body 5001 when pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. , That is, after the start of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). The form change timing of the sword decoration 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-running change (re-change). May be started at the same time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state while being enlarged and displayed. The sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform a sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operating means. No, that is, an operation opportunity suggestion image (warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. In the subsequent effects, a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective (an effect pattern in which “LV1” is added to the name) and a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 are not effective (name) are performed in accordance with an effect pattern set in advance. And an effect pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is appended. In the following, an example of effect transition will be described in order for nine types of effect patterns.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / Sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 227, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. The effect transition example in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and an operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the above-described FIG. ), An operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image (FIG. 224 (T1)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 224 (T2)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is promoted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the second drawn state (stage 1 mode) same as that of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Pay the sword!”. (FIG. 224 (T3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an expectation notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (storage item) according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second drawn state to the sword placed state by the sword putting operation by the player, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). Then, as shown in FIG. 227 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that of FIG. An expectation notification image (“100 defeat!”) For notifying the expectation of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo consecutive fluctuation (re- fluctuation).

  When the set effect pattern is a “weak” effect pattern, when a player's sword-drawing operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (draper) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a half-fall state. The half-fall state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. . Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second drawn state to the sword placed state by the sword putting operation by the player, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is returned from the half-fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that of FIG. The expected degree notification image ("50 body defeat!") For notifying the expected degree of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Then, similarly to the “strong” effect pattern, the display of the expected degree notification image at this time allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  When the sword placing operation by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword delivery state. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a decorative pattern in a normal mode, and a reach effect is started. You. As for the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. As described above, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword placing operation is required, the player grasps the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (border role), and performs the reach effect. I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the later reach productions are the same, it is possible to have a different feeling of expectation each time, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and further suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest for uniform productions. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 (B) and 232, operations of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow object) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives a player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) half-falls by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 232, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) changes from the initial state to the all-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the whole fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / Sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 224 and FIG. 225, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). After tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 223 (G). Image (image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-pulling state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (S2 in FIG. 224). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the second pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo continuous change) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo continuous change (reperform) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and understand which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the second pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 224 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is broken left and right and the first decorative portion 5012a is visible (FIG. 224 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 224 (S4)). In addition, the form change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the katana state to the second sword removal state may be set to be the same. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 2 mode) in which the player can perform sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operation means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 225 (V1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 225 (V1) is displayed ( FIG. 225 (V2)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 225 (V3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 2 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 225 (V4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, an expectation degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed. Further, when the player does not detect a sword placing operation during the operation validity period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 displays In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword delivery state. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 233, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draper) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. In the period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 233, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 225 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 225 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) changes from the initial state to the all-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the whole fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak effect pattern / Sword LV3 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 225 and FIG. 226, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern for enabling the sword decoration 5001 as an operating means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is used at the second operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) shown in FIG. 225 (V1). Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, the effect transition shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. In the display area, a continuation image (an image in which the warrior's eyes are closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The folded sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword-keeping state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 225 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode, to notify the player that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (FIG. 225 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, in the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-change) is displayed. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) starts, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo consecutive change) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and understand which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 225 (V6) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the decorative sword body 5001 is changed from the stage 2 form to a stage 3 form in which the second decorative section 5012b projects above the first decorative section 5012a so that both decorative sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 225 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 225 (V8)). In addition, the form change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the katana state to the second sword removal state may be set to be the same. Also, the form of the sword decoration 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-run changes, and may be changed in a plurality of steps at the final stage. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 mode) in which the player can perform sword-pulling operation as an operating means, that is, to play a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 226 (X1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 226 (X2)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 226 (X3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 3 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay your sword!" (FIG. 226 (X4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 227 described above, an expectation degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed. Further, when the player does not detect a sword placing operation during the operation validity period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, effect display device 1600. A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-sequence fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has been completed without performing the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed in the display area of (). FIG. 229 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, when the operation validity period ends, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial form of the sword delivery state. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 234, operations of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draft) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 during which the first pseudo-run variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are different. In the period T2 in which the sword decoration 5001 is operated, no opportunity is given to operate the sword decoration 5001. In the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give the operator an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 234, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 223 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 224 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) changes from the initial state to the all-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and the expectation of the expectation corresponding to the whole fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern / pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, the sword decoration 5001 is made effective as an operation means in the first pseudo-running change (re-change), but the pseudo-running change is performed by the player not selecting the operation. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-fluctuation) is set. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform a positive operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (T1), the operation opportunity of FIG. 224 (T1) is given to the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation selection image ("Is there an opportunity !?" message) indicating that this is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z1)). )). Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect of prompting the selection of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form) same as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are displayed together with the message of “putting or selecting a sword”. The image is displayed (FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern and sword LV3 strong variation pattern). The subsequent effect transition greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword-pulling operation by the player during the operation valid period is performed. If detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 227) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 228 (Z2) described above regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). Is completed, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the second sword-drawing state in the stage 1 form to the sword-pulling state in the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to perform an operation (“Was it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 229 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 229 (W3)).

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the sword placement operation by the player during the operation validity period is performed. If detected, the operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern as in FIG. 227 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 227 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), in the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3), a variable display using a decorative pattern in a normal mode is performed (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 227 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, if the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the operation valid period in which is performed ends, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time indicates that no operation opportunity is provided at the first operation providing timing from the above-described FIG. 228 (Z2), that is, shifts to a continuous image (FIG. 224 (S1)) indicating the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, the above-described FIG. ) → FIG. 226 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 227 (U5).

  As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) differs greatly in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given in accordance with the variation pattern selected on the main control board 1310. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and start the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described below, but you will reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the expected degree that you knew if you originally operated . When the selected change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed on the occasion of the selection operation, it is possible to enjoy the effect by the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the operation is performed, the effect (continuous change of the shape of the sword decoration body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is overlooked, and the form of the sword decoration body 5001 is initialized. Will return to the form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained in accordance with the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310 which cannot be known to the player is exactly opposite, and the operation in the operation valid period during which the operation is effectively accepted is a game. It provides a novel effect that brings operation results that are disadvantageous to the user. Further, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation effect of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in the game interest caused by a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is reduced from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 mode, and the operation opportunity is provided again. Conventionally, a predetermined number of operations are required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two (LV1 and L3) operation opportunities can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player's operation. At the opportunity, the grant ends, and a novel effect reflecting the intention of the player can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate for an operation effect that does not shine instead, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, depending on the operation of the player, the stage form may be changed from the initial form to the stage 1 form. You can only see the changes up to that point, leading to reach production. Since the player can perform the operation selection without being bound by the selected variation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player a more real feeling that his own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form. . If the sword decoration 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped and the operation ends, or the form is further changed (level-up), and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the stage 3 is formed. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). As described above, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 231 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. Note that, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own sense of choice, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern in accordance with the variation pattern and effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Next, referring to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 235, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draper) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 during which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 of the stage 1 form is used. As an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is originally provided three times, the specific decoration is provided. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol change in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns. If the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo-run variations (re-variation) are continued, and the second pseudo-run variation is performed. In the period T2 in which the (re-variation) is performed, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated by the operating means. To give the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls half by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 235, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → FIG. 228) (Refer to (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 228 (Z2)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) continues (when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is set), the sword is set. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state with the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 224 (S1)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 224 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 224 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 225 (V1)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 225 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 225 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 225 (V7)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 225 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full fall state (see FIG. 227 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is not continued (when the sword LV1 weak change pattern or the sword LV1 strong change pattern is set), the sword is set. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Simulated resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 230, after following the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, it appears as if it enters into the reach production as it is, and then the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation) is revived An effect transition example when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  The pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-described FIGS. 223 (A) to (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) to (T3) Follow the production transition. Then, when an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern, FIG. 230 (U3), FIG. 230 (U4), and FIG. After tracing the effect transition of (UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-run variation with the pseudo-sword design is restarted again. In the case where the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, similarly to other effect patterns, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword placement state at the end of the operation effective period, In place of FIG. 230 (UA1) → (UA2) described above, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-repetitive fluctuation (re-fluctuation) ends without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft). A fleeing image (“Enemy, fleeing!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

  The resumption of the simulated continuous change (re-change) is based on the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 230 (UA3). Is temporarily not displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design in which the decorative design of the right and left decorative designs is not prepared, specifically, the pseudo continuous sword design in a mode indicating the form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo continuous change). Then, the player is notified (FIG. 230 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image and the effect level 3 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form are displayed on the pseudo continuous sword design. At this point, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001, and the initial form (sword-put state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 230 (UA4)) immediately before the start of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration 5001 in the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) and face it.

  Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo continuous sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 230 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the sword decoration body is set so that the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001 and the re-change of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the initial form to a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration section 5012a, and the second decoration section 5012b operate so that both decoration sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decoration body. (FIG. 230 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 230 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once in a plurality of steps from the initial form to the third form, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the player can perform the sword-pulling operation is made effective as an operating means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. 226 (X1) to (X5) for giving an operation opportunity When the operation by the player is detected after the effect transition of the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, The type of drop production of the "robin" is determined. If the operation has been detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is once in a half-fall state, so that the level is raised and the above-described FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) is reached. → Expectation notification effect by full drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (robin) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the half-fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) as shown in FIG. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

  In addition, when the operation by the player is not detected in the operation opportunity of validating the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation validity period ends similarly to other effect patterns. At the same time, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the sword-putting state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border hand), but the pseudo continuous change (re-change). Is displayed (see FIG. 229 (W2)), indicating that the pseudo run has been completed (see FIG. 229 (W2)).

  As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern is traced, and when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored again, the level jumps to the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form Is performed in the same way as the effect of the second level (the effect of the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in the basic effect pattern), so that the player is surprised and has a stronger sense of expectation than the other effect patterns. You can face. In addition, the player is not distracted even if an operation opportunity is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is half-dropped. The game can be enjoyed with the expectation of the revival of the pseudo consecutive fluctuation (re- fluctuation).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231 (B) and FIG. 236, the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (silver role) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means, An operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, irrespective of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), a drop effect (speculation of expected degree information) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, the period in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is completed, the display temporarily returns to the decorative pattern of the normal mode, and then the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decoration 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, changing the form into the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, in the case where a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the period T1, a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed. In addition, in the period T1, when the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is not performed in the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) falls by a half of the operation by the player. An effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 236, when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 223 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 223 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 224 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 230 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 230 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 229 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (see FIG. 230 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation) is restored (FIG. 230 (UA4)). )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is resumed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 230 (UA5)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 230 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 226 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 226 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is changed from the initial state to the full drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 227 (U1)). Then, at the end of the simulated continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to the total drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is changed from the initial state. The state is changed to the half-fall state (see FIG. 227 (U3)), and an expectation notification image of the degree of expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 227 (U4)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the simulated continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 229 (W2)). ))), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production using the sword decoration 5001, in the sword LV <b> 2 production pattern and the sword LV <b> 3 production pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the pseudo continuous change times are twice and three times, respectively. In the case of less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state each time the pseudo-running (re-fluctuation) is performed to make the player operable, but a valid operation period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the katana state without performing (without giving an operation opportunity to the player). For this reason, the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in the pseudo continuous change (re-change), the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial form when the player performs a sword placement operation on the sword decoration 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect for the player by the operation of the player. Let the player choose the operation carefully. Therefore, the user can be interested in the operation of the sword decoration 5001, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to operate and a decrease in the interest in playing games.

  Further, the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until an operation valid period is generated), so that the player's expectation and interest are raised stepwise, and the game is played. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that, during the period from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operation state and the second sword removal state (operation position) to when the operation valid period is generated, the player operates in the operation position at the operation position (form, light emission, movable). , Etc.) is desirably provided for a period during which it can be sufficiently confirmed. Thereby, the player can confirm the operation state before operating the sword decoration 5001. Therefore, the operation validity period is generated as soon as the second sword is drawn, and the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the transition to the operation effect immediately.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 was shown by a form, it is not limited to this. Each effect form, such as a change in the light emission form or operation form of the sword decoration 5001, may be made to be able to be changed stepwise in accordance with the number of times of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

(Application to look-ahead production)
In the above description, the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-reach-reach effect has been described. The case where the present invention is applied to a look-ahead effect is described below. Hereinafter, a case will be described as an example where the third hold is a prefetching effect target and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetching effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, the same effect as in the above-described FIGS. 223 (B) to (F) is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 is different in that the second sword is limited only when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as that of FIG. 223 (G) → FIG. 224 (S1) to (S4) is performed. 225 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIG. 226 (X1) to (X3) in the next variation display (that is, variation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs). Will be As described above, in the pre-reading effect, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation validity period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 to be prefetched is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. From the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 227 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetch effect is ended.

  The state change from the sword decoration state of the sword decoration body 5001 to the second sword removal state is limited to the generation timing of the operation validity period. It may be performed at the start. The same effect as the pseudo-reach-reach effect is achieved in the pre-reading effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, a pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 among a plurality of operation means is enabled by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). . Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (border role), the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is located at the initial position. There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) for generating the operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the initial position even during the operation validity period. Is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Indicates that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, an example of an effect transition example according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
237 and 238 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 237 (A)), it is determined in advance that the operation button is set to be valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operation means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. This is displayed (FIG. 237 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (main part) maintains the initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (main curtain) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation valid. Let it. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is at the initial position, the operation buttons 410 are enabled at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the operation button 410 is valid, as shown in FIG. 237 (C), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (main curtain) maintains the initial position. Let it. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 237 (D), an operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (the hand-painting material) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting a player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed. Also, at this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled.

  If the operation on the effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is detected in the above-described FIG. The specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (the role of the hand) is returned to the initial state again, the big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the hand of the role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)).

(2nd suggestion pattern)
FIG. 239 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled during the reach effect, similarly to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure showing the example of transition of the reach production performed. Note that FIG. 240 shows that, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is enabled once without operating the sword decoration 5001 and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern in which the operation of the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 239 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is one of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. This is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position. Moved little by little in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is operated at the suggestion position, the operation valid period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation valid is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is set to be effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is valid, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting a player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating an operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled. Further, even when the operation of the operation button 410 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 239 (AA2), an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when an operation of the player is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is moved from the state in which the specific decorative member is operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decoration member SDY (storage material) may be moved from the state in which it is moved to the suggestion position without returning to the initial state to the entire falling state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective for operation is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 239 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 237 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 238 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (the role of the hand) is returned to the initial state again, the big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the hand of the role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 238 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In the second suggestion pattern, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and may include a plurality of operation patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in operation is different, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) is moved to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled for operation, Until the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 239 (AA1) to (AA3), the operation button 410 becomes operation effective once, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes active. A step-up pattern is provided to enable the operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 240 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is an operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 in which it is determined in advance that the operation is valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) similar to that in FIG. 239 (AA1) described above and display of a specific decorative member SDY (robin) are performed in small steps (FIG. 240 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (draft) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 240 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 238 described above is not performed, and the switching indicating the operation effective operation means is switched. A suggestion image (most blackout images) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operating means that is enabled to operate is operated from the operation button 410 through the sword decoration 5001. A switching notification image (a message of “a chance to draw a sword” and a message “I want you to put a sword”) is displayed (FIG. 240 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 239 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 238) after the operation promoting effect in the aforementioned second suggestion pattern.

  Note that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without making the operation of the button operation 410 effective (no operation promotion effect) at the time of FIG. 240 (BB2) described above. It is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present example, before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is validated is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (draft material) is generated. ) Indicates that the position can be changed, and an operation means that is effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 237 (B)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 indicates that the operation is valid. In the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the expected degree of operation is high and the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the suggestion position (in FIG. 239 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001) Has a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective. For this reason, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, and thus suggests before the operation. Enhance the entertainment of the production.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is gradually moved in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Then, the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (border effect) is also used for reporting the result after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 238). , And a decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is enabled by the movable body becomes effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. In addition, when the operation means to be operated is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration 5001 changes to the second sword removal state, but also the operation means to be operated is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once enabled in the state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is located at the suggested position (or after it appears that the operation is enabled). Ii) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decoration 5001 can be operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Further, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, there is an expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that there is a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in gaming interest. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, an operation effect suggestion image before the operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is enabled is displayed. At the same time (FIG. 237 (B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 239 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is displayed in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indicating position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move up and down in small increments between the initial position and the suggesting position. After that, when the operation validity period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the operation suggestion to the player by the first suggestion pattern is made. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. The entertainment of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the performance determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the specific performance is displayed on the gaming board side performance display device 1600. Perform the effect with the pattern. In the production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for satisfying a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, it is possible to execute a specific-operation effect (an effect indicating the degree of expectation for granting a privilege or the like) based on establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision suggested as a result of the specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation means provided for such an operation effect (an operation that indicates the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated, etc.) In addition to the button 410, another operation means (such as a sword decoration 5001) can be further provided. In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating the operation button 410), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as a sword decoration 5001) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given only occurs. It is configured so that the player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) related to privilege provision is higher than in the case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The expectation degree regarding the privilege provision suggested when an operation opportunity is provided to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest when the stage is in a stage where the effect has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001). Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means during the specific effect reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the entertainment interest through such operation-related effects. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) having such a staging characteristic. In this case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunity is given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect accepting period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect accepting is enabled),
-After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is activated (allowing to accept the effect) is started, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect is accepted). The first effect mode in which a valid period (effect accepting period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (allowing to accept an effect) without starting an effect of “specific operation-related effect”. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating a valid period (effect accepting period) are prepared, and by executing any of these effect modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect). A valid period (production accepting period) is set to be generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where a period occurs in which an effect on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation units (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) can be accepted for effect. Regardless of whether or not a period occurs in which an operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) that is different from the specific operation means can accept the effect, a common (specification) is performed prior to the generation of the period. ) Can be executed, so that it is possible to give an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect, and such an effect can be provided. By performing the operation while the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started, the effect corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001). An effect reception period is to be generated, and at least at the time when the effect is started, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) has a corresponding effect reception period is generated. Should be kept confidential. In addition, for each of the operation-related effects exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. (The effect display may appear) or a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. A means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) may indicate which operation opportunity is given (displaying the effect result display), and the operation-related effect is executed until any timing. Whether to do so can be changed as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively used as a plurality of operation means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of the operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any of the production acceptance periods occurs after the execution of the common (specific) operation-related production, and the common (specific) In the case where any of the effect reception periods occurs without performing the operation-related effect of (1), the contents of the effect may be omitted. However, in the case where any one of the effect reception periods occurs while the common (specific) operation-related effect is not being executed, the content of the effect is as follows. Or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword decoration 5001. " Further, in each of the following effect examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed when the reach state is formed. May be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the operation is performed, or may be generated during the execution of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

  Each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined with the effects of each of the different examples described below, and can be appropriately combined with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined with a different example effect described later by partially replacing it. When the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to effect each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of the different examples described later.

[First production mode]
241 and 242 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the effect example (1st effect mode) performed.

  FIG. 241 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 241 (b) illustrates an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started while performing the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ illustrated in FIG. 241 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display which moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 241 (c) shows both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 as the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 241 (b) progresses. In a state where each of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) is stopped and displayed in the area, an instruction display (here, "operate") that prompts the user to operate any of these operation means, and an effect reception A bar indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which one of the effects can be accepted. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 241 (c)) is obtained in both the situation where the effect on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the effect on the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted. There is no other than being displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) are operated before at least one of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. 241 (b) and (c) for a period until after an operation on at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) has been enabled to receive an effect. I'm trying to perform a production.

  Therefore, in each of the effect examples described below and other examples thereof as well as the effect examples, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 241 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is thereafter performed (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect is performed). It is only necessary that it occurs during (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is left unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be rendered. It is possible to indicate that the operation for one is to be able to accept the effect. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily need to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the effect, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. In the case where the reception period occurs, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is executed (start of the effect) to when the effect reception period is generated to be the same.

  Further, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unknown which one of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation on any one of the operation means (“Operation "), And always operate a specific one of the plurality of operating means, regardless of how the plurality of operating means are capable of accepting the effect. May be displayed. In other words, the same production mode appears as the operation instruction both in the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect is kept secret.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) illustrated in FIG. 241 (c), it is confidential whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can be effected or not. , When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is set to be able to receive the effect, or when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not set to be able to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting unit is provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are not illuminated. Both may emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect condition in which the image shown in FIG. 241 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Whether it is in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, or in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Are set to be in one of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) of the plurality of situations occurs, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). Expectations related to the award of the privilege are higher than when the situation occurs. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). Is desirably set lower than the rate at which (a situation in which is added) occurs.

  Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), when any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is present, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Is performed (whether “FF” is progressed in the figure) or in one of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 (when “GG” is advanced in the figure), an effect is received and an operation effect according to the operation is performed (FIGS. 242 (d) and 242 (f)). Is performed.

  In the operation effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 242 (d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!”). In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively low, and “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high. A plurality of effect modes may be prepared, and any one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the reception of the effect, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of the privilege grant. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed, and by causing any of these effect modes to appear in response to the effect reception, Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute a control for bringing the operation means into an operation state (a state different from a non-operation state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), despite the fact that the player has performed an operation on the operation button 410, the operation is performed in response to the effect reception. The control that reciprocates the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the sword decoration is not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of the operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and the operation effect on the operation button 410 is executed, Even when the button 410 is not operated and the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. "Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword-drawing operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed at the sword placement position in response to the effect reception. It is possible to execute a control for maintaining the sword at the sword position (sword-drawn state) instead of returning to the (sword-drawn state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword placement position (sword-pulled state) to the sword-drawing position (sword-pulled state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state where it is maintained in such a sword-pulled state. At times, a staging effect is performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to make the player feel the feeling that the operation effect is being performed due to the operation of the sword decoration 5001.

  After the operation-time effects (FIGS. 242 (d) and (f)) are performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 242 (e). However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 or the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Even when it is executed, the sword decoration 5001 is not operated (sword placement position (sword placement state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started). Control to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword in the drawn state) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 241 and 242, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) out of the plurality of operation means (the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001) 5001), in both cases where the effect can be received and when the effect cannot be received, a common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) operation is started. While an operation-related effect is being performed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 is set to be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are each produced. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is an effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is set to be capable of accepting an effect without being enabled, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed. In combination with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting effects, the sword ornament body 5001 is capable of accepting effects. You can be deceived as if you weren't. In other words, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 which is the side where the production with relatively high expectation is performed when the production is received. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to add interest to which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period is not generated) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect reception period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, if the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required to execute the effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected but the operation itself is performed based on the detection. Control may be performed to end the effect acceptance period for the means at that point. According to such a configuration, there is a risk of losing an operation opportunity.Therefore, it is possible to urge a user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect and perform the operation carefully. become able to.

  Further, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although they are executed, these operation-time effects may have different effect contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , A unique effect sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted.

  In addition, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set. The effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the effect acceptance period is set. 241 (c), an operation-time effect may be performed when an operation is performed on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (c). In other words, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is set and an operation is performed on the first operation means, When another effect mode is executed as the operation effect, when the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed (No. When the first operation means is operated during the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. At the same operation, an effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In the case where another effect mode is caused to appear as the operation effect, the second operation mode is not performed in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as the effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed is defined by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is acceptable for the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set so as to correspond to any of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the effect is received, the same operation effect is made to appear, whereas in the third situation, when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode described above (which is different from the operation effect in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-described effect example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), in the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (f), similarly to the production situation shown in FIG. 242 (d), no operation by the player is performed. The control for operating the operating button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately. However, as for the control for operating the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has not been performed, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns earlier than before returning to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the gaze of the player is returned naturally to the game board 5 side.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY. Examples of the “operation” of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. This is not limited to the effect example, and the same applies to other effect examples.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 243 to 246 show that a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect indicating the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result, it is suggested that an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means occurs. It is a figure which shows the production example (2nd production mode) which suggests that the production acceptance period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 will generate | occur | produce.

  FIG. 243 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 243 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 243 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In which the lightning image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 243 (c) shows a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in which the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. In the display area of the device 1600, an effect is performed in which the opponents are pressed against each other to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are described as follows: "The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area? ”, And when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect is accepted for the operation button 410. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 243 (b) and (c) is determined by either the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 or the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001. , A specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods. "

  243 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG is in a predominant state in which it remains in the display area, and the figure on the right illustrates the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation where it is predominant to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance status changes every moment as time passes.

  FIG. 244 (d) shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), and the button image BTG is left in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to this effect content, an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 244 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is set to emit light, so that the operation of the operation button 410 is promoted.

  The effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is not only a case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.), but also without the specific operation-related effect. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is preferable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher than that.

  Regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 244 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 via a specific operation-related effect is performed, a specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio in which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without going through (FIG. 244 (d)) is performed. Is desirably set to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a stuttering effect described later when a specific operation-related effect has passed.

  FIG. 244 (e) shows that, as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts a state in which a production is performed during operation.

  The at-operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e) is the same as that in FIG. 242 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, even if the operation is performed by the player on the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the effect reception. This is the same in that control for reciprocating with the position (control for setting the operation state) is executable. In addition, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively low, and “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high. A plurality of effect modes may be prepared, and any one of these effect modes may be displayed in response to the reception of the effect, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation of the privilege grant. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect that does not perform an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Thus, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for granting a privilege. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 244 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 244 (f), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed. In this case, control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to a non-operated state (sword-inserted state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the sword in the drawn state) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 245 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the display area. An effect depicting the remaining state is being performed (second effect). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 245 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be effected (the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "draw a sword" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001). In particular, in this effect example, only the operation unit including the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be set to the light emission state) is set to the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

  The effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 243 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is set higher than that. Furthermore, if the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed without a specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be higher than in the case, and the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 245 (h) shows that, as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a picture of how the production is performed during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), and displaces the specific decorative member SDY to the front side of the display area. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Note that, here, the effect form such as "hot heat!", Which indicates that the expectation is relatively high, is displayed according to the effect reception, but it is suggested that the expectation is relatively low. May be displayed. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing the display region in the forward direction is not performed is provided, and one of the effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation for granting a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described multiple modes ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 222 to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible, and depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation regarding the grant of a privilege such as a big hit can be determined. The height is suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 245 (i), even if the effect at the time of operation (FIG. 245 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decoration 5001 is not returned to the sword-pulled state, but is kept in the sword-pulled state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, and thereafter (during a period during which the reach production is performed), the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword-delivery state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further provided, and at that time, an operation effect in accordance with the operation to the katana state is further executable.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) in two stages, and the first-stage operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) and the second-stage operation (Operation to the katana state), the effect at the time of operation will be performed in accordance with each operation of the sword decoration state. It is expected that the game entertainment for the operation can be suitably maintained even during the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed to the time when the second-stage operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation effect according to the second-stage operation have different effect contents.

  Also, in the case where an operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) according to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second-stage operation opportunity. In the performance at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the first stage, whether the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained at a position (a sword-drawn state) at which a second-stage operation opportunity (an operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-pulled state) can be given. It may be executed as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of no. In other words, when the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword-pulling state without being maintained in the sword-pulling state, it is practically impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state). Obviously, The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 245 (h)) according to the operation of the first stage, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the drawn state, the predetermined time has elapsed (the reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword-inserted state) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operation state (reciprocation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is at least half the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword state). Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 246 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 244 (d). Thus, an effect that depicts a state in which the button image BTG is left in the display area is performed. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the effect illustrated in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the effect illustrated in FIG. 244 (d) or the effect illustrated in FIG. 246 or one of the effects shown in FIG. 246 (j). It should be noted that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j), an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in ()). Thereby, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something will be recognizable.

  FIG. 246 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. There is a directing effect.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), all effect elements (button images BTG) that suggest that the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation where it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) appears. This makes it possible to give a doubt as to whether or not the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, in this case, the mode of the lightning image IZ is changing (appearing to disappear), and the remaining time until a clear indication of which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  FIG. 246 (i) shows that as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a production that depicts the situation.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the appearance of the haze MY suggests that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur. Will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the mode of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. Suggests that the time remaining is even less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (i) further progresses and haze MY is hidden, a sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. Even if it is performed (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, so that the gaming entertainment is maintained. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG (FIG. 244 (d), FIG. 246 (j)). The effect on the sword decoration 5001 is confirmed by checking whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 243 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and thereby it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 246 (k)). When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and displays the button image BTG, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration is displayed. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 246 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 246 (j) and (k) are also kept secret from which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, after the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, in the effect example shown in FIG. 245 (h) of the effect example (second effect mode), FIG. In the same manner as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 1, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operation means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY. Examples of the “operation” of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include modes such as “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. This is not limited to the effect example, and the same applies to other effect examples.

[Third production mode]
247 to 250 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show another effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 247 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 247 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 247 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will soon be able to receive the effect.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated. By this, it is easy to make it possible for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to be able to accept the effect immediately after the effect display related to the operation has not been performed on the effect display device 1600 side. Make it recognizable. Note that, here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 from the initial position to the operation position. They operate at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation means has a time left before the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not have the effect reception period at all until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) operate respectively. Therefore, when there is still time left before the effect acceptance period occurs, or when the effect acceptance period does not occur at all until the symbol change ends, the entertainment interest for those operations will be changed. It can be maintained suitably.

  Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is not performed by the effect display on the effect display device 1600, but by each operation (FIG. 247 (b)) of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in this way. After the start, basically the same effect development as in the second effect mode is performed.

  For example, first of the effects shown in FIG. 247 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. 243 (b), the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (b), a state where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated from the initial position (the position at the time of non-drive). It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is suggested that any of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 247 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are at positions different from the initial positions (positions at the time of non-driving) after a specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is given.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with a case where an operation opportunity is immediately given without performing the operation-related effect. In the case where the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally finished, it is necessary to operate the operation device on the side which can receive the effect at least to the operation position. Therefore, the effect related to the operation is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), during the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. At different positions (for example, an intermediate position), it is positioned as an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It is possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in operation-related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position, so that the effect reception period of the operation This makes it possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect illustrated in FIG. 247 (c) progresses and the effect illustrated in FIG. 247 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed as “movable operation button”. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to “410”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 243 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. Are positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

  Note that in the effects shown in FIGS. 247 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in an initial position (non-drive position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in an operative state at a position different from the initial position (non-drive position). In this way, by making the form of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the form of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, the matching thereof will be soon. It is possible to indicate that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) is generated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is displayed at the “operation position”. The effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (d), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d), the operation button 410 is operated in the operation position, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the initial position. (The position when not driven) and the operation position. That is, in this case, the operation button 410 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, so that the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

  Note that, as the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), “display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated, and an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “press”, an effect display, or the like) is performed. (A bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement to the operation position” mode, whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. The mode 410 is different from the mode in which the mode has been moved to the operation position. As described above, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation buttons 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position.)

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 248 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 244 (e), the operation button 410 has been returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword decoration body 5001 is operating at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 248 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 248 (g), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. 244 (f) has also been described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed by operating the sword decoration 5001. 245 (g), except that the instruction content related to “press” is displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “moved to operation position” mode. It is content.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from any of the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 has been operated at the operation position. That is, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), so that the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Will be done.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) is also “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state where the sword decoration image SYG is moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an instruction display for prompting the operation (characters such as “push-in”) is performed. Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode that has been moved to the operation position”. As described above, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG appearing as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is reduced. It will be possible to suggest in advance that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be buried (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 moves to the operation position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 245 (h). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 249 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 245 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. And the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position).

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 249 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 249 (j), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 244 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 247 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “ Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 246 (j).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 246 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position ( (A position at the time of non-driving) and an operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. Will be able to do it.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. They are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 246 (l). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. They are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the haze MY be closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operation position, not to the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 250 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 249 (h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 250 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 250 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 248 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (k) and (l) are also kept secret from which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, when an effect is received by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 during an effective period generated after a specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect is received. Accordingly, the sword decoration 5001 on which the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIG. 242 (d), FIG. 244 (e), etc.). However, it is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which no operation is performed be in an operating state. Examples of the operating state include a mode in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to another place and stays, a mode in which it vibrates, and the like. It is possible to adopt. Also, in the validity period generated after the execution of a specific operation-related effect, if the operation button 410 and the sword decoration object 5001 of the sword decoration object 5001 are operated to receive an effect, the effect is also accepted. It is desirable that the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to an operation state (vibration or the like).

  In addition, as for such an effect in which the “operation unit on which the operation is not performed” is in the operating state, the effect after the operation in accordance with the operation is “expected degree (a rate at which a big hit symbol appears,“ 0 ”, Appears when executed in a high mode of “including“ 100 ”), and the post-operation effect according to the operation is“ the expected degree (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). It may not appear when executed in a "low manner".

  In addition, when the post-operation effect is performed by operating one of the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001), the “operation unit on the other side on which no operation is performed” is also activated. Alternatively, when the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other side, the “one operation unit on which the operation is not performed” may not be set to the operating state.

  Note that, in this effect example (third effect mode), a drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and a drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. Or the same driving source.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, a basic operation is performed. Is provided with an operation opportunity only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, an operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. When a “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” appears as a result of the performance of the specific operation-related performance, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. An operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 out of the body 5001, and when an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, an operative effect on the sword role object is performed. In this regard, in the operation effect on the button side, the effect at the time of success (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the effect at the time of failure (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) are based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination. Either one of them is to appear, but also the production at the time of operation on the sword role side, the production at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the production at the time of failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the jackpot determination (The specific decoration member SDY is not operated), and the effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  It should be noted that the button-side operation effect and the katana-side operation operation effect are the same as for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, as well as the effect as to whether the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it content.

  Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to a specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is determined. Opportunities are given to them. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of an effect where an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation device regardless of the effect of any effect, such as pressing between specific operation devices. There may be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-drawing state), or a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-pulling state for one operating means (Operation of (1)), an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given may be performed, and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a mode according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is caused to operate in a state different from both the sword-pulling state and the sword-drawing state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in the sword-pulling state or the sword-pulling state when the effect result of the sword is displayed.

  Also, when the symbol change in the hold state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol change, and when the symbol change is in the hold state (the The effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol change) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side without the operation opportunity are given. For both of them, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when a symbol change in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a hold state (within the execution period of a symbol change that has been digested earlier than this), the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable that a plurality of operating means provided be operated respectively.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images need not always be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that an effect reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the effect acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even if the production mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed simultaneously while the specific operation-related production is being executed is adopted, the button image is not displayed when the specific operation-related production is finished. One of BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (the image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) displayed in this manner is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute the specific operation-related effect with respect to any of a plurality of operation means by executing the specific operation related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ). It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks, and when lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and By causing the sword decoration image SYG to appear from the rock when the lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the effect progress to the effect shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 245 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, the effect can be made to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 244 (d) or FIG. 245 (g). In short, it is desirable that the effect be developed so that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a specific effect is obtained when an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is generated and when an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effect (start of the effect) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. In addition, it is desirable that after the specific operation-related effect is performed, it is preferable that the effect reception period be generated for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (effect during operation) can be generated depends on which of the effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operation unit of the plurality of operation units may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, the user did not perform the operation based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operation means on the side (e.g., FIG. 244 (e)), control is performed to return the operation means on the side that has not been operated to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, the operation is not taken as a reference, and depending on at which timing in the effect reception period the operation is performed, the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated until the operation is terminated. It is desirable to make the lengths of time periods different.

  That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the shorter the remaining time of the effect reception period, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted depending on whether or not to operate the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on at what timing of the effect reception period the operation was performed (according to the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time up to (such as "Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was accepted and the effect was performed at the time of operation") The length of time for appealing to the player can be made different, so that the entertainment of the game can be maintained appropriately.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect has been operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect at the end of the effect reception period. May be operated.

  In addition, from the start of the specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (such as the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG), the side with a high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is displayed. May be performed to indicate the rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. Although a movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable body (here, a moving object that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed) Operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) can more reliably operate the specific movable body based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. Desirable for enabling.

  In addition, from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (such as a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG), the image corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect accepting period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means. This makes it possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was terminated, even though it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest during the game. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Thus, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with a high degree of expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the entertainment interest when the player recognizes that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  In the case where the effect accepting period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operating means while the specific operation related effect relating to the plurality of operating means is being performed, When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) appears as an effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the reproducibility as the specific operation-related production during a period from the start of the production of the specific operation-related production to the presentation of the production result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation unit having the higher degree of expectation among the plurality of operation units. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect reception periods, when an operation is performed by a player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation. However, even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses. An automatic button effect state described later, in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation is performed earlier than that, may be set. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated without operating each time the effect accepting period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed in such an automatic button effect state, the effect accepting period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if the operation means is not operated on the corresponding side during the effect reception period, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed.

  However, even if the automatic button production state described later is set, during the stage in which a specific operation-related production is being performed, only the operation buttons 410 of the operation means are intentionally accepted during the production acceptance period. Is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (the automatic button function is disabled). After that, even if an effect reception period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect reception period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operating means is operated is performed without doing so (making the automatic button function work). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect based on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. Is expected to be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the setting change relating to the ON / OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol change is not executed but also during the period in which the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to make it. For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred while the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button effect state can be changed. When the effect state is in the ON state, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated during the effect reception period, an operation effect according to the operation is performed, and in addition, the automatic button effect state is set. The setting can be changed from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation-time effect by an operation performed by a player while maintaining the on-state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation for the operation means different from the operation button 410 is enabled, and when the operation is performed on the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the effect being executed is changed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when the automatic button effect state is changed from the on state to the off state.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration 5001 is imitated as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. In the state where the displayed sword decoration images SYG are displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) Period) and, when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode as long as it gives an operation opportunity (effect reception period) to the sword decoration 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 244 (d) and 248 (e), the effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. 245 (g) and 249 (h) instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 245 (g) and 249 (h). Is also good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the portion displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started) are displayed. Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is displayed). 244 (d), 245 (g), 248 (e), and 249 (h) in the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display relating to the provision of the operation opportunity is performed by using substantially the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). Being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (a), a first shield having a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) in which the operation button 410 is incorporated in the design is held. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 251 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it is implicitly suggested which of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least a part of the operation means such as a shape and a part design.

  Further, as for the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may be performed as an effect indicating a different degree of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. Also, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. May indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the degree of expectation is higher when displayed in a specific display mode than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  For the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of the effect (preferably an effect situation with relatively high expectation), When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), it is displayed (desirably, it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is directed only to the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). When the button image BTG is displayed, the effect reception period is performed not only for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG but also for another operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) which does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a different interest to the operation from the case where the button image BTG appears in the effect situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decoration 5001.

  Further, when a button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG during the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and It is desirable to indicate that the game is in a production situation with a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period If 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operating means that is being generated at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation of the operating means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period is as follows. When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the special operation effect is not performed. Even when an operation unit different from the unit is being operated, an operation effect at the time when the operation unit (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is obtained as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when operating the operation means is performed without operating the corresponding operation means during the effect reception period. It is desirable to make the automatic button function work. However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even if the effect accepting period is generated for both the operation means and another operation means, even if no operation is performed, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. It is desirable that only the operation effect at the same time as the operation is performed, and that the special operation effect that appears only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

  However, during the effect reception period, another time before the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) appears by the above-described automatic button function, When the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined production condition is satisfied, the special operation production is performed according to the production reception, and the specific timing is reached. It is also desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state even after the end of the effect reception period. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (effect at operation, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is executed). In a case where the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, another effect means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is to generate an effect acceptance period. Becomes

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating operation button 410” or If any of the “sword decoration images SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” is displayed, and if the effect is received by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) which is an effect content that suggests a high degree of expectation, and an effect content that suggests a relatively low degree of expectation The second operation effect (for example, an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) can be caused to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively higher at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. Is performed, and the first operation-time effect that has the effect content suggesting is performed. However, if the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception during the effect reception period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is generated using the button image BTG (first time). Of the sword decoration body 5001 when the execution is performed based on the reception of the operation for the operation button 410 when the display mode is displayed, and when the sword decoration image SYG (the second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (the button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is performed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (the sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed Since no demerit is produced on the effect result as compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means” can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer objects). In other words, in the timer effect for the effect of “giving the operation means to the operation means”, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. , So that the effect at the time of operation can be enjoyed. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the production target of the timer effect, when an operation on the operating means is performed, an effect result advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery and Make sure that any of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as the production target of the timer production, the ratio of producing the production result advantageous to the player is higher than in the case where the production target of the timer production is not made. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is performed with the effect of “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001)” appears, the “operation opportunity for the operation means,” A specific operation-related effect using “giving” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, a specific operation-related effect on which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). It is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the game is played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously progressed to one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) immediately before it. However, it is difficult to understand which of the effects should be watched, which may lead to distractions and consequently a decrease in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, and the count value It is desirable to start an effect of “specific operation-related effect” after the value has reached a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). Note that the following timer effects correspond to the above-described notice-side timer effects, and are executed as a result of performing various processes in accordance with the timer effects.

  FIG. 252 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 252 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (here, countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 252 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 252 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not been executed yet, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is for. I have.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this example of the effect, while it is unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed, the count value is first set to a predetermined value ( Here, the count reaches “0”) and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), an effect of “specific operation-related effect” is started. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the above is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, even though two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), the effects are sometimes time-consuming. Since overlapping in a series is avoided, each different effect can be enjoyed.

  However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect is It is not possible to recognize whether the game was performed as a game, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and before a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the effect of the timer effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect was directed to “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 252 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("sword sword decoration"). Is given by the player), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be started in the effect condition recognized by the player side, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction), and this also indicates that “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration body 5001 is a target for the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  Note that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to “giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration object 5001” but also when other effects are directed. May be performed when becomes zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 does not function as an effect indicating the type of effect that the timer effect is directed to, but as an effect indicating that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the start of the effect to be directed, and the timer effect is set as the target of the effect. At the same timing as or before the production that suggests a production type is started, the production that suggests the production type that the timer production is directed to is performed during the execution state. It is important to make sure that

FIG. 252 (d) illustrates an effect situation in which an effect of “specific operation-related effect” has been started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect that indicates the effect type targeted by the timer effect for the effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 has also been completed. However, it is important to perform the effect indicating the effect type targeted by the timer effect and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect is started.

  252 (e) to (h) after the “specific operation-related effects” start to be produced, the contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 243 (c). ), 245 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 247 (d) and 249 (h) to (j), so that the details are omitted.

  In addition, as the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 252 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. You may make it executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point where a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) in accordance with the timing of starting (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is indicated as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given ( Expectations for big hits are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer production, the specific operation-related production and the timer production will be produced at the same time, but when the production situation where the production is produced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related production Even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering values are the same (the degree of expectation for granting (big hit) is not The same). In other words, in this case, since it is possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related production itself, even if the specific operation-related production and the timer production are performed simultaneously, any production It is possible to avoid a situation where the user does not understand whether the user should pay attention to the information and distracts his / her attention. However, in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game, when a production pattern in which the specific operation-related production and the production of the timer are produced at the same time appears, the bonus is given more than when the production pattern shown in FIG. 252 appears. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the type of the effect target ( Although "sword sword" is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as an effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is set as a timer target among a plurality of effects that can be set as a timer target, a display indicating which of the effects is a timer effect may not be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect on whether or not to be given. However, prior to providing an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the effect reception period being generated), a first precursory effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is provided to the sword decoration 5001. Does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production acceptance period). An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may be made to appear. When performing these precursor effects (the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect), the time required for the performance (the precursor effect) is set shorter than in the case where a specific operation-related performance is performed. It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when an effect appears, in order to enhance the entertainment interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is provided, for example, the fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of standing in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize by overlapping the specific image (a position on the layer that is behind the specific image). Thereafter, the specific image is gradually changed to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed), so that the button image BTG gradually increases. It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the user. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode related to such an indication effect will be described later.

  Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, and the like) having different degrees of expectation regarding the privilege grant (big hit), As the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it becomes possible to give an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and that no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration A second indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is important that the contents be executed as different effects. In addition, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

  Such an indication effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that this is a higher concept including. As for the precursor effect including “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 253, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursor effect is performed in any of these effect modes. Depending on whether it has been performed, it is suggested to indicate how long the effect reception period that occurs in response to the precursor effect has a length of game entertainment when the precursor effect is performed. It is more desirable to achieve this.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of an effect when a plurality of types (an indication effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the indication effect.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (a sign effect A), the sign effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (a) (foreboding effect A), when the foreboding effect A is performed, the same time length is obtained even if an operation opportunity is given to any operation means. The effect reception period (valid period) T1 that is held occurs.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 242 (d), (f), 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T1 at that time. Is being done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (b) (the precursor effect B1), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change started, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed. An indication effect B1 is to be started. The precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but one that is executed before an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation When the indication effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation device (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is caused to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is displayed. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation effect different from the above-described operation effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect accepting period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (b), an effect accepting period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length) from T1. Thereby, depending on which mode (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) performs the precursor effect, it is suggested how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is. It is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game when the indication effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (c) (a sign effect B2), the sign effect B2 is started when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Like the sign effect B1, the sign effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect" but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, an effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a different time length from the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. An effect reception period) T3 is generated.

  Note that also in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (such as a character display such as “press”) that prompts an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2, or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. Display) is displayed. Further, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is performed, and a process of terminating the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (c), an effect accepting period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect having a relatively high expectation is executed, despite the fact that the precursor effect B2 having a relatively low expectation concerning the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that the effect reception period (valid period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect has been performed is created, and the precursor effect B2 is generated. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest when the game is performed. Note that in this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant be different between when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

  The indication effects B1 and B2 are specified by causing the same effect mode to appear from the start of the effect to the timing in the middle of the effect, and by causing different effect modes to appear after the timing has elapsed. The operation means may be provided with the effect of determining which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such a staging property, and the staging effects B1 and B2 may be set such that the staging is started when a different time elapses after the symbol change is started. The indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (the precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 253 (d) (the precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is applied to any of the operation means even if the operation opportunity is given. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that has is generated.

  Also in the effect reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect C ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 242 (d), (f), 244 (e), FIG. 245 (h), FIG. 248 (f), FIG. 249 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T4 at that time. Is being done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect accepting period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is, as shown in FIGS. 253 (a) and (d), the effect accepting period corresponding to the precursor effect A. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than the precursor effect A, as long as the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related performance” described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the entertainment interest when the precursor effect C is performed is suitably maintained. Will be able to

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 253, the effect reception period (valid period) is associated with the types of the precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, so that the effect reception period is set. (Effective period) was suggested. However, by setting such that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2) having a predetermined time length differs for each type of precursor effect, the effect reception period (effective period) ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as that of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 248 (e), the operation button 410 is operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operation position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state). Have been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating as it looks. In this case, when the result of the effect is displayed even though the specific operation-related effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the width of the effect is significantly narrowed. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 254 and 255, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding (BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect content when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 254 (a) to 254 (c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the effect that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the state of the effect, as shown in FIG. 254 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect” but only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 side only. Assuming that the precursor effect has been executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon. In the indication effect (the indication effect in other examples is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means to which the operation opportunity is to be given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Need not necessarily be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration body 5001 soon after the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It will be.

  In the indication effect shown in FIG. 254 (a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a relatively low expectation blue aura and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a relatively high expectation red aura Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents as to which of them is finally left in the display area appear. Therefore, in this effect situation, it is recognizable that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon, but the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decoration image SYG or the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation is obtained. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 254 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, whereby the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation rendering situation. It will be suggested that an effect acceptance period will be generated for. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (b), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa) is displayed. .

  FIG. 254 (c) illustrates an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“press-in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 for an operation is displayed. "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Further, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received during the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sword-inserted state. Will be maintained. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means (here, the operation target side) is operated. The effect image (in this case, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) simulating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side. Are stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 254 (d) to 254 (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal gaming state, the effect that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (d), in the state of the effect, assuming that a precursor effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is started. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given soon.

  FIG. 254 (e) shows an effect state in which a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this state of production, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as a production result of “specific operation-related production”. Have been. In the display shown in FIG. 254 (e), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (such as the button image BTG) is displayed.

  FIG. 254 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-drawing state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword-drawing state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the drawn state during the effect reception period (the sword decoration image SYG). Is stopped), while the sword decoration 5001 is configured to continuously perform upward displacement slowly over a period until the effect reception period ends, and is set in different states. I am trying to.

  In the effect reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration 5001, an effect is received when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword-put state, and the effect is received. The effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-inserted state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 254 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration 5001 is continuously operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a stopped state.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. In the stoppage state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 254 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state. The other side is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect can be expanded in width, and the entertainment of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and its depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is produced. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  One of the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a sign effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed but also when a specific operation-related effect as a sign effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG simulating the sword decoration 5001 appears, any one of the effects is displayed. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, it is determined whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation. Can be further provided. Regarding the technique, in addition to the effect example of FIG. 254, the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof may be appropriately adopted.

  Then, when giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or is recognizable, and it is unknown whether or not the appearance of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is drawn). (Such as a recognizable display state) is made to appear by the production progress. Thereafter, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is of high expectation (for example, the outline image of the effect image imitating the operation means) It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) in order with further effect development. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after the progress of the effect, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation (for example, if the operation unit is operated). After canceling the outline state of the simulated effect image), the button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined to make a display state in which only the outline can be recognized). And an effect pattern for further effect development may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, a white state of the sword decoration image SYG) , So that the color can be checked, etc.). Note that, in this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the higher expectation side (for example, red), it is more than when the display mode on the lower expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further performance progress occurs.

  FIGS. 255 (a) to 255 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (d) to (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 255 (a), the indication effect as “specific operation-related effect” has been started, but the indication effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a second character holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) that imitates the sword decoration 5001 (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) Is depicted, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. Like that.

  FIG. 255 (b) shows an effect state in which an effect result of a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (the sword decoration) to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 255 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 251 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is in a non-display state). While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) are the same. The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 255 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 255 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 255 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 255 (c), when the production acceptance period occurs, the sword decoration 5001 starts operating from the sword-pulling state to the sword-drawing state. As shown in FIG. 255 (d), the sword decoration 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 255 (e), as long as there is no operation by the player, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state at least until the end of the effect reception period, and (Operation from the sword-drawing state to the sword-putting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 255 (c) to (e), a motion (movement in the rotation direction) that is completely different from such a motion (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character is described as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the drawn state. The operation is performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)) within the effect reception period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the change, and the display change progresses by an amount corresponding to the passage of time. Also, the sword decoration 5001 is brought into the sword-drawing state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 255 (c)) to the end (FIG. 255 (e)). Is completed, but even if the loop processing is performed, it is not affected by the loop processing, and the sword is kept in the drawn state. In addition, when performing the operation to the katana state with respect to the operation target role 141 during the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and The loop processing is terminated, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in a sword-inserted state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period, The operation modes (operations that play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for the effects) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( The effect can be expanded, for example, it can be executed with the background being continued), and the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 255, the effect contents (display in which characters face each other) appearing when a precursor effect (FIG. 255 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 255 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character (sword decoration image SYG are different from each other) while the special background (full moon) is displayed. The image is displayed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), so that it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, in the indication effect, the effect is produced by using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing property. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting benefits, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  In the case of a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of the effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether or not an aspect with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when an effect is received during the period. The expectation degree concerning the privilege provision may be suggested using the background image appearing when the precursor effect is performed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255, when an indication effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the indication effect. Although it was decided to perform the effect within the period, the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means (or a specific operation form among a plurality of operation modes) ) When the effect acceptance period occurs when the special indication effect when the operation opportunity is given) is performed and both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the indication effect are changed. An effect may be executed. The point is, "an operation-related effect (an indication effect) relating to an operation on the operation means can be generated, and as the operation-related effect (an indication effect), an effect associated with the first effect is received by an operation by a player. At least one operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect relating to a second effect different from the first effect is received by an operation performed by the player can be generated, and are displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation prompting image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation prompting image has not yet been displayed is continuously displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image to another background image when the second operation promotion image is not yet displayed. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promotion image and the second operation promotion image do not have to be the same image, and for example, a button image BTG, a sword decoration image SYG, a gauge display, or "press!" For example, can be adopted as appropriate. Also, the “first effect” and the “second effect” may be post-operation effects that are different from each other. For example, the “first operation-related effect in which an effect regarding the first effect is received” is an effect reception It is possible to exemplify an effect as to which aspect appears as a conversation notice when the effect is made. As the “second operation-related effect in which an effect is accepted for the second effect”, an effect is accepted. It is possible to exemplify the effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates at the time. At this time, no matter which aspect appears as the conversation notice, the effect design is such that the ratio of the big hit symbols appearing (including 100%) is higher when the specific decorative member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. Regarding the “second operation-related effect in which an effect relating to the second effect is received”, an operation reception effect described later with reference to FIG. 178, FIGS. 390 to 393, 395 to 398, FIG. (Operation acceptance effect under BGM suppression) may be executed. On the other hand, regarding the “first operation-related effect in which an effect regarding the first effect is received”, an operation reception effect (operation under BGM non-suppression) described later with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. Reception effect). Further, each of the different examples of these operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted. The background image is not necessarily a still image, and the background image may not necessarily be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a state in which a river flows or a state in which characters are dueling, A display in which the range in which such a still image or a moving image is displayed is slid (a display in which the coordinates move) is also included. In other words, if the displayed contents are displayed in chronological order or coordinate connection, the background image can be said to be "continuously displayed". On the other hand, "changing a background image to another background image" does not necessarily mean that the image is displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is time-series or coordinated. Also included are images that suddenly change or are replaced (switched) into “images having different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the effect reception period)” that are not physically connected. In addition, an image that changes to a “black image” or is replaced (switched) is also included. In other words, if there is no connection in the description content in time series or coordinates before and after the change, it can be said that "the background image is changed to another background image". In order to make it easier to recognize that a change has occurred in the background image in this manner, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, or the like) for hiding the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display the display area over at least half the area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of the display area, and to display the second operation promotion image together with a new background image after the display. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed in one variation pattern. As described above, the timing at which the background image is changed to another background image may be before the effect reception period occurs, or may include the timing at which the effect reception period occurs, including the timing at which the effect reception period occurs. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 255 (b) may be omitted, and the effect may progress from FIG. 255 (a) to FIG. 255 (c)).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 255, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 starts before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation may be performed). The performed operation may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter, the stopped state may be maintained.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001), a display for changing a background image when an effect acceptance period occurs, and a case where the background image is changed There may be a case where the display is not performed. Then, in this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period is generated, the expectation regarding the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period is generated. Is desirable.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. In this case, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 242 (d), 244 (e), and 245 (h), as the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side, the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is used. 410) is also operated so as to improve the performance of the operation-time production after a specific operation-related production. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production, the operation-time production after the specific operation-related production depends on the result of the production. In this case, an effect state appears when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are operated, or the movable state provided on the game board 5 side. While an unsuccessful effect state in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time effect performed without a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific effect) Depending on the result of the effect, either the movable member provided on the game board 5 or the movable member provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the effect. Only when the success situation where only the operation appears, the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described effect modes and specific operation-related effects according to the other examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation of granting a privilege is higher than that of the privilege. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the button image is displayed in a mode in which a princess character is added (specific mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation concerning the privilege provision may be higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. When the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (specific rendering manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. Note that, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation relating to privilege provision is higher than when displayed in a normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 256 (a)) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 256 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of a specific operation-related effect being performed. )) May be prepared. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same between the case where the first effect pattern appears and the case where the second effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and also to provide the button image BTG and the sword. It is possible to provide completely different fun, such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, when such a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related production, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 256 (c), when the specific rendering mode is in a stage where the rendering result (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) of the specific operation-related rendering has not yet appeared. This may be displayed in advance from (for example, during the stage of the production of the specific operation-related production). According to such a configuration, although the specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). Appearing), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, and therefore, even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed, it may be such as "a foreboding effect by a princess character". It is possible to provide a directing effect having a completely different purpose.

  The sword decoration body 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof has a sword part (stem part 5012, blade body part 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 that can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 212, a second operation in which a sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit is given an operation opportunity. The above-described specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of (1). The sword portion (handle 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably supported by one main body support portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword part (handle 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of operation (operation), the other side has a structure capable of operation (operation). Is formed.

  However, in the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different only when any of the effect results appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, the effect image imitating the sword part of the sword decoration 5001 (and the effect image thereof) (Instruction prompting for operation) is displayed, the player may be more likely to make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the effect reception period decreases every moment, the operation of correcting the operation error is first performed on the player side, and then the operation in the original correct mode is further performed. It is difficult to do that, and even if a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectation was performed, the production acceptance period would end before the production was accepted. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  The sword decoration body 5001 includes a mode such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword portion and a mode “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath portion, and a plurality of complicated operations that do not have such a reverse relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the appropriate side, and the effect acceptance period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

  Therefore, when performing the above-described specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the original state, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation effect is performed in accordance with the effect reception.

  FIGS. 257 and 258 show an example of an effect in a case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 257 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 257 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 257 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b), a first effect that simulates the first operation mode of operating the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state. An image OX and a second effect image TX simulating a second operation mode of operating the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 to move in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously displayed, it is suggested that an operation opportunity in any one of these operation modes will soon be able to accept the effect. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration body 5001 simulating the sword portion is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In both of the effect images TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode may occur.

  FIG. 257 (c) shows the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode, with the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 257 (b) progressing. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect accepting period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 257 (c), when the first effect image OX is left and the situation is dominant, the display such as “pressing in” is visible. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized in a situation where the second effect image TX remains predominant while remaining. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized according to the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be displayed because there is a risk that the effect is erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 257 (d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 257 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area and the first effect image OX is displayed in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, no effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) occurs, and the first operation mode does not occur. When an operation is performed, an effect is received, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 257 (d), an effect accepting period relating to the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. That is, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a time remaining in the effect reception period) is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 operates from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  FIG. 258 (e) shows that, although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, an operation (erroneous operation) according to the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode is performed. It shows the state of production when performed by a player.

  That is, in this effect example, even if the effect accepting period related to the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received is received. (In this case, “just as it is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 258 (f), the content of the specific notification is changed (here, “calm down”) with time so that the player can regain the calmness. It has become. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify with short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 258 (g) shows that the operation on the appropriate side (first operation mode) is performed in the effect situation (effect accepting period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 258 (e) and 258 (f). As a result, a state in which an effect is accepted and the above-described operation effect is performed in accordance with the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to a non-operation state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (the state of the operation error), the effect reception is properly performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when a player makes an erroneous operation, the user is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not always necessary to carry out detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player has panicked, so that performing notification of complicated contents may have an adverse effect. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received, notification by effect or sound only is used instead of display by message. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation has been performed incorrectly, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed based on the performed operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. Thus, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the appropriate side.

  On the other hand, depending on a player (especially an elderly player), it may be assumed that a situation may occur in which a certain operation-related effect causes an erroneous operation before the effect acceptance period occurs. For example, when an operation (for example, lateral movement of the sheath) is performed on the second operation unit even though an operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath) is not issued, the first operation is performed. It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period relating to a specific operation effect occurs only on the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side. In this case as well, how the player operates There is a concern that people may not be able to recognize it.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation unit (sheath part) is given an operation opportunity is performed, Although there is no operation instruction (remaining time bar display) to the operation unit side of the second operation unit (for example, the state shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c)), the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted even when an operation is performed on. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that it is sufficient to operate the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity will be given soon while maintaining the operation state", or a message display. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or a notification only by sound. In any case, despite performing the operation, by confirming a special situation such that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation on the appropriate side is thereafter performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be a good way to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) (the state in which the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), the first operation unit (for example, , Even when the effect reception period for the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 has been moved to the left, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect is performed according to the operation. Becomes

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception that occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the original state, the effect reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will be made before the effect reception period occurs Also, when the game occurs, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  However, during a period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is provided with the operation opportunity, the effect result is indicated and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be intermingled with the content of the notification (display of instructions, etc.) during the production reception period, and the player will be more confused. There is a concern. Therefore, the effect result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The above-described specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and the first period and the second period are sequentially performed after the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the above-described effect form and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the effect form of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to any one of the above-described plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 222). From the stage 0 mode to any one of the stage 1 to stage 3 modes). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to one of the above-described modes, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it do. Alternatively, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described multiple modes.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in”, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and a sword decoration 5001 Is displayed in the same manner as the sword decorative body 5001 at that time (stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 222). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image 5001 is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the confirmation of the sword decoration image SYG can have any fun. And the production performance during the production reception period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure directing performance during the directing reception period.

  At this time, by making the aspect expressed in the sword decoration image SYG higher in the degree of expectation than in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to further enhance the reproducibility during the effect reception period. This is desirable in order to ensure a favorable situation. For example, in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. To be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the effect reception period is appropriately maintained.

  In order to obtain such an effect, it is only necessary that the number of the production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side be larger than the number of the production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration 5001 side may be one. In addition, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword decoration 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

  However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made to differ in this way, some players may have a discomfort that false display is made. There is concern that this could reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the stage 0 to the stage 3 shown in FIG. 222). Is prepared, and when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the mode of the decorative image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape is changed by further deforming and merging the sword decoration image SYG, may be operated in a mode not appearing in the sword decoration body 5001, or may be operated in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in such a manner that it does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, a rendering effect that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a concern that a false display is made and a discomfort is caused. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be improved by providing a performance that is beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

  Even when the sword decoration image SYG has a special mode as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided in each mode prepared as the mode of the sword decoration 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 222). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form. That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. It is desirable that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the special mode, it is suggested that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, regarding the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect illustrated in FIGS. 223 to 230) is performed. You may make it apply.

  For example, assuming that the production state is as shown in FIG. 226 (X1), the next production progress is to the production state shown in FIG. 259 (a) in addition to the production state shown in FIG. 226 (X2). And the production pattern to produce the production will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 226 (X1). A continuation image indicating that no opportunity is given (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is in the sword-pulling state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode, to notify the player that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (FIG. 259 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the pseudo-sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo-run variation (re-variation). A sword image indicating (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot be changed. The special mode according to this effect example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 3 mode. Is maintained, the state is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state.

  Then, after that, an operation expiration effect for generating an operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 and for prompting a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the specially-shaped sword decoration body 5001 is displayed while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode), An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pause the sword!" (FIG. 259 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 259 (e), when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected during the operation validity period, a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is performed according to the set effect pattern. While the expectation notification effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when a symbol change is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is changed within the symbol change. The first indication effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. In addition, when the symbol change is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol change. The second warning effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. In addition, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, a third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. An effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this regard, these predictive effects are executed as different effect contents, but as the effect contents, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears,
-After that, at a position where it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image, an effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・ After that, the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display area (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first predictive effect, a display effect using the “cloud effect” (display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second predictive effect, “flame effect” is specified as the specific image. Effect (display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image that simulates the operation means. In the third predictive effect, the display effect (water effect image that simulates the operation means) is displayed as the specific image. If the type of the specific image is made different, for example, by making a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it can be recognized that the second predictive effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the “water effect” is used. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third predictive effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated is performed. Will be done.

  In the case of performing the sign effect (at least one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the operation means. In the case where such a configuration is applied to either the first sign effect or the second sign effect, the effect image simulating the operation means has a display mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, red) and a display mode with a low degree of expectation. Since an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the user is not sure of which of the display modes (for example, blue) the image is displayed, the effect during the effect reception period is given. Characteristics can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third symptom effect (specific operation-related effect), it is convinced that an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the user cannot have the effect, it is possible to improve the performance in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 261 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 260 and FIG. 261, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the first sign effect is performed. However, the effect example is not the first sign effect, but the second sign effect or the third sign effect. It is also possible to apply to an indication effect.

  FIG. 260 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 260 (b) shows an effect state in which the effect of the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 260 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. Or reducing the area in which the specific image is displayed).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 261, at timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is changed. The generated button image BTG simulating the operation button 410 and an instruction display for prompting operation of the operation button 410 (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. FIG. 260 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the ratio of performing the operation effect in a mode of high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), it is unclear whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is performed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode and the first display mode. The effect can be advanced without being convinced which of the two display modes will be displayed.

  Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 260 (c), the user is not sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to indicate that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the production situation shown in FIG. 260 (c) has occurred, the “cloud effect” is displayed while the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued. Is completely hidden (FIG. 260 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (d).

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). In the case of ()), it is possible to provide the effect of rendering the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  In order to enhance the directivity during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (time t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period between the timings t2 and t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during a period (timing t3 to t4) during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period during the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more appropriately enhanced. Will be able to

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, an effect condition in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize first appears, and after a predetermined time from the condition, the effect condition is determined to be difficult to recognize. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect reception period occurs, the effect pattern (third precursor) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode of higher expectation. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect in which the value of watching the button image BTG becomes higher as the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 260, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”. The display was made so that the visibility was maintained. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be made difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being convinced of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

  Also, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 260, the above-described or later-described “reception allowable sound” may be output. In this case, the “acceptable sound” is output from the state in which the operation button 410 is hardly visually recognized by the “cloud effect”.

  Further, when such an “acceptable sound” is output in any one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (a rate at which a big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation before the entire appearance, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be improved.

  When an effect reception (operation) is performed in a state in which the “acceptable sound” is output, it is desirable that the “acceptable sound” in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, as for the “acceptable sound”, each configuration described above or described later may be appropriately adopted.

  The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be seen slightly behind it, but even with such a configuration, the visibility is maintained. .

  The “cloud effect” itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (a ratio at which a big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”). In this case, although the function of the operation button 410 functions to make it difficult to visually recognize, when a high degree of expectation is indicated, an improvement in gaming interest is achieved.

  Between the time when the “cloud effect” is displayed and the time when the cloud effect is completely hidden, a later-described effect method for setting a specific effect sound (BGM) in a suppressed mode or in a silent output state, or in a non-output state is described below. You may make it employ | adopt. In this manner, the specific effect sound (BGM) in the suppressed state, the output state in the silent state, or the non-output state is output to the output in the non-suppressed state even at the time when the operation is performed by the player. It will not be returned.

  In the case where such an effect is applied to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, the effect image imitating the operation means after the start effect is started is clear. Even if the length of time until the image is visually recognizable (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is imitated after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the same time (the time until the specific image is hidden) until the image is made visually recognizable. In addition, when such a rendition is applied to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, an effect that imitates the operation means after the sign effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to have a plurality of effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image simulating the operation means is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) in which the effect image simulating the operation means is relatively hard to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. It may be made to gradually change toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easily visually recognized. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance in such a display mode is itself. May be performed as an indication effect, or in a display mode in which another display is performed as an indication effect, the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Is also good.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. ) May be executed only when the event occurs. That is, at the point in time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is concealed which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect, and as a result of the effect being developed, a plurality of Since the effect acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means will occur, it may be delayed to determine which of the plurality of operation means to operate, rather than being operated by the player. The production acceptance period may end before all remaining time has been consumed. In this regard, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later occurs, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any of the operation means appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function Since the effect is received by any of the above and the effect after the operation is always executed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Auto button production state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is executable, and control is performed in this automatic button effect state. When an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, Even if the operation by the player is not accepted in the above, a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change as in the case where the operation by the player is accepted for the effect within the effect acceptance period can be executed. I have. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect will be generated after the operation when the operation is performed without the need to operate each time the effect acceptance period occurs. Will be able to In addition, regarding the automatic production function, when this function is performed, the same production reception as when the operation is actually performed may be performed, so that the processing corresponding to the production reception may be performed. Instead, the same processing as when an effect is received may be performed.

  In the embodiment relating to the “automatic effect function” described below, the techniques, effects, settings, and the like related to the above-described operation may be appropriately combined or replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operating means is operated a plurality of times to automatically switch the button. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation of the operation button 410 alone may be performed a plurality of times, or the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation unit may be performed a plurality of times.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by being operated once, and such operation is simplified, The setting to the automatic button effect state is enabled while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, some players want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether the validity period has occurred. If the setting to the automatic button effect state is made simply by operating, the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 is changed for a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to operate it once in a mode (so-called “long press mode”) maintained for 2 seconds. Accordingly, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is positively performed during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, regardless of whether the valid period is generated, the automatic button effect state is set. Erroneous setting is made less likely to occur. In addition, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state is not performed even if the operation is performed in a long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. .

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in a state where the state is set, the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is also used. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be released by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed on the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). Is selected and the "various settings" screen is displayed, and the "various settings" screen is displayed by a third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is released.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled only by operating the operation button 410 once. The setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled while keeping an eye on the effect progress during the symbol change. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed), the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state The automatic button effect state is released only by detecting that the button operation has been performed (only by operating in a single operation mode). In other words, the fact that any operation has been performed on the operation button 410 indicates that the desire to perform an operation on the operation button 410 has appeared. By releasing the state and returning to the normal effect state at an early stage, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410 is in effect. An effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 or the like is set) Occurs, and even if an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is not received during the effect reception period, an operation (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) by the player is performed during the effect reception period. It is possible to execute processing (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the effect is received. According to such a configuration, whether a period in which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be accepted for the effect occurs, or another operation means (for example, In the case where the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether or not a period during which an operation on the sword decoration body 5001) can be effected occurs, the effect result Even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is set to accept the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate, so that such a specific operation-related effect can be enjoyed with confidence. .

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target occurs while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When the operation on the first operation means is not performed during the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation on the first operation means is performed on the effect. Yes (first automatic directing means),
The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001 or the like) of the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When it occurs, when the operation on the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation on the second operation means is performed is executed. Possible (second automatic staging means)
Regardless of whether the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period, The automatic processing by the first automatic production means or the automatic processing by the second automatic production means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is set as the operation target Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of those periods Therefore, you can enjoy the production with peace of mind.

  However, when the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed since the first side effect reception period occurred. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period has occurred. The effect may be made to progress within the symbol variation as occasionally. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of the first side production reception period. Since the effect is received and the effect is automatically generated after the operation, it is possible to function as a surprise effect.

  It should be noted that when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operating means within the symbol fluctuation period as compared to when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The rate at which the effect reception period is performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the effect reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate during the effect reception period also increases. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the function, the effect accepting period can be generated with higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that both of the effect accepting period for the first operating means and the effect accepting period for the second operating means increase. However, it is more desirable that the degree of the occurrence ratio be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production acceptance condition is satisfied within the production acceptance period, the production after operation can be executed (post-production production execution means),
A process of establishing an effect receiving condition based on an operation performed by a player during an effect receiving period is executable (player operation receiving means);
When the operation is not performed by the player during the effect reception period, a process of establishing the effect reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing during the effect reception period can be executed (automatic effect reception means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. You are going to. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player himself / herself to operate until the automatic staging function functions is given, and the option to cause the staging acceptance by the operation by the player is also left. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time has elapsed since the first side production reception period occurred. When it is assumed that the effect development within the symbol variation is performed such that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the `` specific time '' or the `` specific time '' Any time different from the above is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

  Here, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period, Then, a process for generating an after-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed.

  Similarly, during the symbol change execution period when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect accepting period for an operation means (such as a sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect accepting operation is performed. Even when an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, a process of generating a post-operation effect according to the reception of the effect and a process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the “post-operation effect in response to the effect reception”, an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. It is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the operation on the body 5001 is accepted.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (specific effect mode) (A desire to end the state). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the specific production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period relating to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button provided with an operation opportunity within the effect reception period The process of terminating the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in effect by performing only one operation on the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (only by operating in a single operation mode) (The process of performing the effect after the operation) is performed, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and to develop the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

  However, during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed), the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change to the automatic button effect state or cancellation of the automatic button effect state) The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the symbol change execution period. The degree is to be raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not permitted only for the purpose of changing the setting relating to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to enhance the sense of premium when the game is played and to maintain the entertainment interest. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration 5001 out of the plurality of operation means. By operating the control button 410 or other operation means a plurality of times, the automatic button effect state can be set or canceled.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation to the automatic button effect state is not required without the operation on the sword decoration 5001. The setting can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the “long press mode”, the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not permitted for the purpose.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case where the setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is the symbol when the automatic button effect state is controlled. An effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the fluctuation, and an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is effected during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the operation appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without losing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Become like

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation means include, when in the automatic button effect state, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect without operation during the effect reception period." In addition to the operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) that can be targeted by the "draft function", the special operation means that is not targeted by the "automatic directing function that generates an operation-time production without operating during the production reception period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when an operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, The post-operation effect according to the effect reception indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if an operation on the special operation means is not received within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect was received may appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the above-mentioned effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the above-mentioned effect is received, it may be made to appear.

  Also, with regard to the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in a long press mode), an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during a period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword decoration body 5001 or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means) It is desirable that this should not be allowed even if an effect reception period has occurred. In other words, if the operation button 410 is operated (operated in a long press mode) during the effect acceptance period for an operation means different from the operation button 410, an automatic button effect state is generated. In the middle of the effect reception period, the "automatic effect function for generating an effect at the time of operation without operating during the effect reception period" is activated, so that the original effect reception (operation of an operation means different from the operation button 410 is performed) May be generated without any operation, and from a player who is ignorant of such an automatic button effect state, whether the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred or the operation button 410 It may be confusing that a production acceptance period for different operation means has occurred, which may reduce the interest in gaming. This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can execute a precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period, but controls the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the production acceptance period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) It may be configured to be executed as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to make an advance recognition as to whether or not there is an effect state in which the automatic effect function can function within the specific effect reception period, and the effect can be enjoyed with confidence.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the production acceptance period occurs, the specific image is directed to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning falls toward the specific region) may be displayed outside the area (a precursor effect). In other words, in this case, at the time of the production acceptance period, by checking the movement of the production image different from the specific image, the user is gazing at the place where the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the non-display state is about to appear. Can be encouraged, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a situation where the specific effect reception period ends due to the player's operation not being in time, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state can be executed by the operation of the player. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect based on the game. As an example in which the state setting and the setting release can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "the automatic button effect state is controlled while the normal game state is controlled, but the big hit game state Or the automatic button effect state is canceled when the state is shifted to the high-probability time reduction state, or the automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as “generating an effect pattern to be released when a predetermined time has elapsed since the generation of the automatic button effect state” or “generating an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol changes are executed” It is possible to adopt such a control mode and the like. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled to the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting and cancellation of the “auto button effect state” are not performed. Such a process itself disappears.

  In addition, the timing at which the above-described automatic production function functions may be a time when the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the production reception period may be left. The timing may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). If the above-mentioned automatic production function functions when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing thereafter, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions similarly to the case where the operation is actually performed. At that time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if no operation is performed while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends ( It is important that the above-described automatic production function is activated at a specific timing within the period) and the production after the operation is started in accordance with the automatic production function. That is, in this case, if the above-described automatic staging function does not function even though the specific timing within the staging acceptance period has arrived, the post-operation staging is generated by the player himself / herself operating after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make the user feel uneasy when being controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, "erroneously controlling the automatic button effect state despite not being controlled to the automatic button effect state"). , The effects may not be confirmed after the operation "," The automatic effects function may not work due to some trouble, and the effects may not be confirmed after the operation "). Will be able to

  The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described. They may be used in combination as appropriate.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, it is premised that when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When an effect reception period that can occur also occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that is executable only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific validity period relating to the specific display effect is performed, if the operation is not performed within the specific validity period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated. It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement of performance by allowing generation of a specific display performance). Of course, even if a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, the automatic production function may not be able to function during another production reception period set when a specific display production is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific validity period when a specific display effect is being performed, it is possible to enjoy a VIP feeling due to the fact that the operation of the automatic effect function can be saved and the trouble of operating can be saved. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately enhanced. Note that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from being able to function in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed. If the function cannot be performed, the above-described operation and effect when a specific validity period occurs when a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions) occurs. It is possible to expect. In addition, even when such a specific validity period occurs, if the player does not perform an operation until the specific timing within the specific validity period arrives, the above-described automatic staging function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the effect after the operation according to this.

In addition, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination.
-If a first specific validity period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is performed at a timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific validity period occurred. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto,
-If a second specific validity period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific validity period has occurred The automatic production function described above functions at the time when has elapsed, ends the second specific validity period, generates a post-operation production in accordance with this, and furthermore,
-If a third specific validity period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific validity period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation until the end of the process, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed cannot appear may be performed when in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs when the effect is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation is performed from the time when the effect reception period occurs. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described automatic production function functions, or the above-described automatic production function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed, Even if the effect reception period ends, the above-described automatic effect function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is checked which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, when the second predetermined time has elapsed, the above-described operation can be performed. The effect can be made to progress with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic effect function functions as described above or whether the automatic effect function described above does not function at all. Note that all of the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are when the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called “operating button”). The effect is received when a single operation is performed, and an effect is generated after the operation.

  Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are executable only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. As described above, when the display is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Also, a first specific display effect (first specific validity period) and a second specific display effect (second specific validity period) are prepared, and the third specific display effect (third specific validity period) is prepared. Need not always be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when an effect is received during the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

  In the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions during the effect accepting period (when the effect is accepted, The automatic staging function worked for the bar display (display in which the image changes (in this case, the area changes) as time elapses) indicating the remaining time of the staging available time so that it is possible to recognize whether only the time was left) The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which this is not displayed at the time but displayed. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the “bar display” continuously displayed at the time when the automatic effect function functions, the effect accepting period is set to the first specific effective period ( The first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the production reception period has elapsed, is a period during which the automatic production function functions, and the second specific effective period (relatively after the production reception period has occurred) (A period during which the automatic effect function is activated when the second predetermined time, which is a later stage, has elapsed).

  In this sense, when the first specific valid period (the period during which the first predetermined time elapses after the production acceptance period has elapsed and the automatic production function functions) occurs, and when the second specific valid period ( The big hit expectation degree differs from when a second predetermined time elapses after the effect reception period occurs and when the automatic effect function functions) (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, in the case where the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit expectation occurs when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It will function so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In the case where a post-operation effect is generated by an operation by the player during the effect reception period, the “bar display” may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic effect function As in the case where the function is operated, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the “bar display” is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body. Is also good.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, when the post-operation effect is generated by operating the above-described automatic effect function, first, an operation object suggestion image (for example, an operation object operation) indicating an operation means to be operated during the effect reception period. Even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, the effect image after operation is generated without displaying the operation object suggestion image without displaying it. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, and the like) of the operation object suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated, and the operation means that has been set as the operation object It is only necessary to be able to recognize which of the two is in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation object suggestion image may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is performed, the effect after operation may be generated in a state where the operation object suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. When the above-described automatic production function functions, such as when the automatic production function functions within the above-described first specific validity period or when the automatic production function functions within the above-mentioned second specific validity period, The post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden.

  Also, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectation degrees, both the operation target suggestion image mode and the post-operation effect mode are provided. Can be checked at the same time, and the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or operation by a movable decorative body, for example. There may be.

  Further, when an effect for generating an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation effect”, the operation effect is not related to this. May be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, or the like) having no character. However, in this case, if the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, the “operational effect” and “another It is desirable that the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to be performed is higher than that in a production situation where “specific production” is performed in parallel. In other words, when the “operation-related effect” and “another specific effect not related to this” are in parallel, the effect is not accepted in the “operation-related effect” and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since "another specific effect not related to this" is in the execution state, the decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed, while "operational effect" is executed but "another effect not related to this In the production situation where "specific production" is not executed, if there is a case where the production is not accepted in the "operational production" and the production is not executed after the operation, there will be a situation where no production is executed Therefore, it is inevitable that the entertainment interest will decline. Therefore, if the “operational effect” is executed but “another specific effect not related to this” is not executed, the “operational effect” and “another specific effect not related to this By making the ratio of the above-described automatic staging function function higher than when the staging is in the staging situation in which the staging is performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the operation-based staging occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, an indication effect performed before the effect reception period occurs, an effect in which the operation means to be operated operates, and the like are executed as an “operation-related effect” or an effect related thereto. It can be said that. In addition, for example, assuming that the special effect is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function will increase. Will be able to In this case, it is desirable to execute the effect as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, assuming that the effect occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect) and is executed as an effect that ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic production function functions in a high ratio, and it is possible to provide the production with a sense of tension. In this regard, in the case where “another specific effect” is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, an indication effect), the “another specific effect” is performed a plurality of times within one symbol change. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning when "another specific effect" is executed is high Thus, it is possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not an effect acceptance period will occur.

  Further, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations, Until the 1000th loss variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any one of the plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not made to function. On the other hand, when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed). Then, when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value is operated by the operating means (any one of the plurality of operating means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player during the effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function is operated and the player performs an operation during the effect reception period. The same process as that performed at the time of performing the post-operation effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of the losing fluctuation reaches a specific value, “the player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing fluctuation is continuously executed. Did not produce any results despite having been encouraged to do so. "Even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions automatically, even if there is no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game entertain, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment. In this case, during the effect accepting period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the execution is executed. A special display image (for example, different from the display image (for example, “Operating”) that appears during the effect reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss variation up to 999) "If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.) is desirable. Further, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value is consumed, the symbol variation is performed each time the symbol variation is consumed until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In (effect pattern), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, and a special display image (for example, “ If it is troublesome, I will act on your behalf "), and even if there is no operation by the player during the production reception period, the above automatic production function will function and it will respond to the production reception It is desirable to execute a process that always produces an effect after the operation.

  Note that when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss fluctuations are executed. The number of remaining fluctuations up to the 1000th loss fluctuation may be displayed.

  In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss fluctuation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested until the number of executions reaches a specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can be generated, but the symbol fluctuation when the loss fluctuation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value is used. Alternatively, the effect may be developed such that only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side does not occur. According to such a configuration, since an operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of the effect acceptance period from having an expectation of itself. Will be able to gain. However, this production example says, "In spite of the fact that the loss fluctuation has been continuously executed, there has been no achievements despite prompting the player to operate each time the production acceptance period occurs. As if it felt the responsibility up to now, even if there is no operation by the player, in view of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always makes the automatic effect function work, In order not to have any further expectation, an effect acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001) should not be generated.

  Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). The second operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) of the plurality of operation means can be generated both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In the second effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the user, the event cannot occur when the control is not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible to generate when it is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and to increase the effect when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is set. Can be suitably maintained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
Displaying a mimic image of the operating means (operating object suggesting image indicating the operating means to be operated) (mimic image displaying means);
-If an operation is performed by the player while the mock image is displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, a post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means);
・ After the production acceptance period, if a specific timing arrives without operation by the player while the mock image is displayed, the production after operation can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the mimic image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the “advantageous mode for the player” when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving unit and the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving unit. It is possible to generate a post-operation effect in the above.

  In addition, in the case where the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern from the player's side that the automatically generated effect after the operation cannot be grasped to which operation means. Therefore, in the case where the above-described automatic effect function is caused to function to generate an effect after operation, first, a mimic image (operation object suggestion image indicating operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the effect after operation is generated in a state where the mimic image is displayed without being displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, and the like) of the operation object suggestion image is not necessarily the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated, and the operation means that has been set as the operation object It is only necessary to be able to recognize which of the two is in the state where the effect has occurred after the operation. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect occurs due to the operation by the player during the effect reception period, the operation object suggestion image may be hidden in a state where the post-operation effect has occurred, or the above-described automatic operation may be performed. As in the case where the effect function is performed, the effect after operation may be generated in a state where the operation object suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mimic image is displayed, or the light emission by the lamp provided on the game board 5 or the movable decorative body. May be executed as an operation based on.

  At this time, if the mock image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation, even if the effect has occurred after the operation, the expected degree (mim image Display mode) can be confirmed.

  The mimic image that is continuously displayed in this way is hidden after the effect after the operation has occurred. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time has elapsed after the first side production reception period has occurred, and the specific time since the first side production reception period has occurred. In the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when different times have elapsed, the time from the execution of the production after the operation to the hiding of the mimic image should be different from each other. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if there is no operation, by confirming the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mimic image, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

  In addition, when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when a post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, a big hit is determined by the big hit determination. May be different from each other.

  In addition, when an effect accepting period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player is generated while being controlled to a specific effecting state (automatic button effecting state), two displays during the effect accepting period are performed. One of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed during the effect reception period, the effect is always received (the automatic effect function is always functioning) and the effect is performed after the operation according to the effect reception. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, an effect reception (automatic effect function is performed) is performed, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. And when Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. In other words, if a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the player forgets to operate, a decline in game entertainment due to the inability to confirm the post-operation effect is unavoidable, When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, even if the player forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the gaming interest does not decrease so much. Therefore, a highly expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. If the player forgets to operate the game at any time, the automatic presentation function must be activated during the presentation reception period to avoid a decline in game entertainment caused by forgetting to operate the game, while maintaining a low expected display mode (for example, a blue operation mode). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, play the game so that you do not forget to operate by not necessarily making the automatic production function function during the production acceptance period And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expected display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. You may not be able to appear. Further, during the effect reception period, any of three or more display modes may appear.

  In each of the characteristic techniques described below, other examples relating to the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and executed.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic staging function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described another example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the operation is not performed. A process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change as when the operation is performed for the effect may be executable. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not accepted during the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted. The effect pattern (automatic effect function) that does not execute the effect for the effect may be generated. In this case, in the automatic button production state, when the operation by the player is not received within the production reception period during the production reception period, when the automatic production function does not function, the symbol variation is more than when the automatic production function functions. In the above, a process in which the effect in the symbol variation is advanced so that the expectation degree (ratio) in which the big hit symbol appears is reduced. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol change in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an effect on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be accepted. The above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 241 to 261) regarding whether a period occurs or whether a period during which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be performed is generated. See)). In this regard, in the automatic button production state, during the production reception period that occurs in response to such specific operation-related productions, compared to the production reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related productions, It is possible to execute a process in which the effect in the symbol variation progresses so that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function when the operation (effect effect reception) is not performed within the reception period is increased. At this time, the rate at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as an effect indicating that the above-described automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it is possible to perform the game, it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 is given more than when the operation result indicates that the operation button 410 is provided with the operation opportunity. It is set so that the expected degree of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol variation in the execution state becomes higher when it is indicated that the symbol is given. However, in the automatic button production state, when the operation (production reception) is not performed within the production reception period generated in response to the specific operation-related production, the ratio of the above-described automatic production function to function is determined by the operation button 410. It is more preferable to set the same ratio when the operation opportunity is indicated to be provided and when the operation opportunity is indicated to the sword decoration 5001.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect situation of a relatively low expectation (indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production), the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic production function will function should be reduced. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by the effect of each other are performed in parallel, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264.

  FIG. 262 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is three, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  FIG. 262 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 262 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press” "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 has been received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is specified as a specific decorative member SDY (draper). Etc.), and in a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” Where the degree of expectation is relatively low, “heat” which is relatively high in the degree of expectation, etc.) in the display area. Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the specific effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the ratio of 60% Thus, the above-described automatic production function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the effect on the operation button 410 is not received within the specific effect reception period. As a result, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception is performed is not performed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. After the operation is performed within the specific effect reception period, the post-operation effect having the same content as when the effect is received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed. In both cases, the post-operation effect is generated due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the form displayed in the display area is the same as each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (e), the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect receiving period has occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the specific effect reception period is generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”, or the specific effect reception period is set as “the above-described automatic effect function”. Is determined (selected) on the basis of the result of the jackpot determination at the time of performing the symbol variation, as a result of whether or not to generate as a non-functional effect reception period. As a result, in the specific effect reception period, 60% is determined. , The automatic effect function does not function, and the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant selection, "the effect reception in which the above-described automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-described automatic staging function does not function '' will be generated, and if a jackpot has been lost as a result of the jackpot determination, a selection table for the lost match is referred to, and the selection table for the lost match is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “an effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, during the specific effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, and the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, if the specific effect reception period is to be generated as “the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions”, the “ Which of these periods should be generated so that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when it is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function Is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination.

  According to such a configuration, the automatic production function is activated when a production reception period in which it is determined that a high expectation aspect (such as “hot heat!”) Appears as a post-operation production when the production is received. When the effect is accepted, the effect is automatically produced when an effect accepting period is determined in which it is determined that when the effect is accepted, a mode with a low degree of expectation (such as “chance!”) Appears as an after-operation effect. The ratio at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, it is determined whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is not performed during the effect reception period. By confirming, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to the symbol change in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "after the operation itself, which could have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, the effect itself cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that directing disadvantages may occur, a novel directing effect that allows the player to exercise directing selections such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the directing reception period" As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  However, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), even if the automatic production function functions when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production acceptance period, the post-operation production is expected. Since a mode with a low degree (such as “chance!”) Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic staging function is performed, the degree of expectation is relatively high, Such continuous suggestions of the degree of expectation (suggestions due to the functioning of the automatic staging function, suggestions according to the mode of the staging after the operation) will realize stunning staging characteristics, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest in the game. Will be as expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), even when the automatic production function does not function when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the production reception period, the production reception is not performed. In this case, there is a possibility that a high expectation aspect has appeared in the post-operation effect that should have appeared, so that it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (c) (a situation where the automatic production function did not function and the production did not appear after the operation) appeared, the production situation (automatic production function shown in FIG. 262 (d)) appeared. Has worked, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation is lower than when an aspect with a low degree of expectation appeared as an effect after operation).

  FIGS. 263 and 264 show an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by the automatic effect function when an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) occurs in the automatic button effect state. Specific examples are shown.

  FIG. 263 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is three, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled). , “Setting auto button”) appear continuously.

  FIG. 263 (b) illustrates a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 (a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ illustrated in FIG. (May be an effect) indicates an effect state in which the effect is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. , A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity is kept secret. . However, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific operation-related effect was started, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation appears, An effect state indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in a state to be operated appears as the second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the sword decorations 5001 with the highest operation is given the operation opportunity is indicated.

  FIG. 263 (c) shows that as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b) being performed, the operation button 410 is to be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. Shows that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the operation button 410 has been received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c), the specific decoration member SDY (such as a curtain) as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception. Any one of a plurality of modes (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation or “heat” with a relatively high expectation) in the display area that has a different degree of expectation during the directing operation. Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect accepting period is ended when the effect is accepted without exhausting the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect accepting period (when the effect accepting does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. Does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused about which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate An operation may not be able to be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 263 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. The effect in the symbol fluctuation so that the ratio of the above-described automatic effect function to be operated when there is no operation (effect reception) during the effect accepting period is higher than in the accepting period (see FIG. 262 (b)). Can be executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as “an appropriate operation cannot be performed during the effect reception period and an effect corresponding to the operation may not appear”. The fun of which of the bodies 5001 is activated can be provided through the specific operation-related effects. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that indicates the degree of expectation based on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed after the effect is performed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the effect level of the automatic effect function is high (in this case, “Auto button high accuracy”) continues. It appears to appear.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic production function did not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. As long as the effect reception has been performed, the post-operation effect that would have occurred has not been executed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function does not function. In the production situation shown in FIG. 262 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when production reception is not performed), the above-described automatic production function is activated. It is desirable that the degree of expectation is made higher than in the case where the user does not do so.

  Further, when the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 80%, the production is performed as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed and the effect reception is performed during the reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, “Chance!” Or “Intense heat!”) Is displayed. In both cases, the post-operation effect is generated due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the form displayed in the display area is the same as each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (f), the effect progresses in a state where the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific effect receiving period has occurred.

  On the other hand, FIG. 264 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration 5001 should be operated as a second effect with relatively high expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 263 (b). Shows that an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, “ A character display such as "Pause the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) are displayed. Note that, at this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operating button 410, and also moves the sword decoration 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Operation is allowed.

  Here, assuming that an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was performed is performed. However, when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (g), an operation on the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c). Out of a plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation or “hot heat!” With a relatively high expectation) The ratio of appearance in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. In addition, when an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time is consumed during the specific effect reception period. 263 (c) is the same as in the case of the effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (the effect reception was not performed). In the case, the effect reception is generated in the effect condition shown in FIG. 263 (c) even though the effect condition has a higher expectation than when the effect condition shown in FIG. 263 (c) occurs. As in the case where the automatic rendering function is not performed, the automatic rendering function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the automatic rendering function functions at a rate of 80%.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation (FIG. 263). (See (c)), the ratio of the above-described automatic production function is not changed by this (the production result of the specific operation-related production). It is possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects are performed in parallel, so that an unfavorable effect is produced in one of the effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment at the time. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 263 (c), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception is not performed), the above-described automatic production function is activated. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when no effect reception is performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic production function did not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 264 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 was not received within the production reception period. However, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if the effect reception has been performed is not executed. Then, after this, the effect is developed in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the specific effect reception period occurs. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 264 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed during the effect reception period (when no effect reception occurs), the above-described automatic effect function functions. 262 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception is not performed), the above-described automatic effect function is activated. It is desirable to make the expectation higher than in the case where it did not work.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic staging function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation was received and the effect was received during the effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception during the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) is effected, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" Or "hot heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to an operation performed during the effect reception period. In both cases, where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same as each other. After that, as shown in FIG. 264 (j), the effect progresses in such a manner that the reach state is formed a predetermined time after the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect has occurred.

  It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “ Is generated as an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function, as in the case of the effect reception period in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 262 (b)). At the time of execution, a decision (selection) is made based on the result of the jackpot determination, and as a result, the above-described automatic production function functions at a rate of 20% during the production acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related production. In other words, the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit determination, the selection table for the winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the relevant selection, "the effect reception in which the above-described automatic effect function functions. Period) or an `` effect reception period in which the above-described automatic staging function does not function '' will be generated, and if a jackpot has been lost as a result of the jackpot determination, a selection table for the lost match is referred to, and the selection table for the lost match is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, an “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions” or “an effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function” is generated. As a result, in the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)), the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and is 80%. , The above-described automatic effect function functions.

  Similarly, an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) is also generated as an "effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions". In such a case, the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the symbol change is stopped, as compared to the case where the above-described automatic effect function does not function. It is determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination as to which of these periods is to occur.

  It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs during the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 263 (c) and 264 (g)) and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. An effect may be executed as a different effect from the effect reception period (see FIG. 262 (b)). However, even in the case of executing as a different effect, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  The sword decoration 5001 used in the effect example shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be a sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 263 and 264, an example in which “the effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 243 to 246 is described. The “effect using functions” may be applied to any of the specific operation-related effects in FIGS. 241 to 261.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect accepting period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button production state from being accepted within the state, the “setting operation to the automatic button production state is not accepted” state is performed before the production acceptance period occurs. , It is desirable to generate at least from the stage of the effect shown in FIG. 263 (b) (stage of effect in which a specific operation-related effect has been started) and to continue this until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform an operation for setting to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has been started, this will not be accepted. Can be provided only for those who are playing games continuously while maintaining the `` automatic production function '', and the game can be continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state It will be able to provide directing value for doing.

  Also, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 262 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g)) )), A first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) or a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration) Image SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function functions" occurs compared to when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to make the ratio in a high level.

  Also, an effect reception period during which a specific operation-related effect is not executed (see FIG. 262 (b)), and an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 263 (c), FIG. 264 (g)) )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the “automatic effect described above” is displayed. The effect accepting period in which the function functions "may always be in a state of occurring.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is not possible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which could have been confirmed only if the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. Provide a source of information on whether to use a staging selection such as "Do not dare to operate the operation button 410 during the staging acceptance period" given the risk that a staging demerit may occur. Can be expected, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each “specific operation-related effect” illustrated in FIGS. 241 to 261 and FIGS. 263 and 264. Is desirably generated as a period having a longer time than an effect reception period (eg, FIG. 262 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused about which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is activated, and as a result, an appropriate Operation may not be able to be performed, but it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation by providing a long time for the production acceptance period corresponding to "specific operation-related production". Will be expected.

  In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 263 and 264, in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation-related effect”, it is considered that the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions is set to be relatively high. For example, it is possible to set the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, whether or not the automatic effect function functions. It can be said that this is desirable in order to maintain the rendition of the game for a longer time and to improve the entertainment interest of the game. Note that, in this case, the timing at which the automatic production function functions is performed when the first time has elapsed since the generation of the production period during the production acceptance period in which the “specific operation-related production” is not performed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, it is possible to make it come when a second time longer than the first time has elapsed after the occurrence of the period, the automatic effect function It is important to maintain the performance of whether or not works for a longer time.

  In addition, in the effect reception period in which the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed and the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the time from the start to the end of the period. Even if it is made different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge is reduced. It is desirable to only vary the speed. In other words, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect” occurs, the period continues for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without executing the “specific operation-related effect”. As it can be made to think that the automatic production function is functioning, it is possible to appropriately maintain the production performance as to whether or not the automatic production function works Will be able to do that.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264, the first effect reception period (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs, and even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated during the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect accepting period that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, a second display that occurs without executing the specific display effect is performed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period rather than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio ("60% -40%", "20% -80%") at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of the effect reception period as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is “first automatic button effect state”, the ratio of the function of the automatic effect function depending on the type of the effect reception period is different from the distribution ratio (“50% −50%”, “10%”). % -90% "), so that the automatic production function always functions regardless of the type of the" second automatic button production state "and the type of the production acceptance period when the production acceptance period occurs. The third automatic button effect state may be further prepared, and may be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal production state in which the automatic production function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always performed in the automatic button production state (the first automatic button production state, the second automatic button production state, the third automatic button production state). Or an effect may be executed.

  Further, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 262 to 264 may be modified as follows and executed. That is, when the automatic effect function functions during the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred. At the timing within the effect reception period), the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the first effect reception period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. However, in the case where the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 262 (b), the timing (first time) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect reception period occurred. The automatic effect function described above does not function at the timing within the first effect reception period), and then the first effect reception period ends without the post-operation effect being executed (the after-operation effect is not executed thereafter). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function functions, and the second effect reception period or the third effect is performed. The effect reception period is ended and a post-operation effect corresponding to the end is generated. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 263 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 264 (g), the second effect reception period or The automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, and thereafter, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without performing the operation after the operation. Ends the effect acceptance period (the effect after the operation is not executed thereafter).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, the player has enough time to allow the effect to be received by the player's own operation before the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with your mind. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the function of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and Since there is not much time left for the player to operate himself when it does not function, it is necessary to provide a game with a sense of tension even though the automatic staging function functions at a high rate. Will be able to

  In the above-described modified example, in the first effect reception period, the case where the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the first effect reception period) and the case where the automatic effect function does not function However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the second effect reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic staging function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic staging function does not function (by any kind of trouble), the time for the player himself to operate Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, a similar effect can be expected.

  In addition to the effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 262 to 264, in other effect examples, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. For example, the control may be performed based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be constantly controlled as the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Also, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state may not be performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Operation unification control when in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced according to the player's own operation (to end the automatic button effect state) Aspirations). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when an effect reception period for a specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the effect reception is performed. A process for ending the automatic button effect state by performing only one operation on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is to be given within the period, and the operation in response to the effect reception An effect (a process that may cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unification control in an automatic button effect state). As a result, even if the desire to end the automatic button production state and to develop the production depending on the player's own operation occurs within the production reception period, switching of the production mode by avoiding the loss of operation opportunity Can be performed smoothly.

  As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state is performed when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. .

  On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is released when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 are not operated when the effect reception period is not generated. An operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state in which the effect reception period is occurring, if an operation is performed on the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 or the like) to which an operation opportunity is to be given during the effect reception period. Then, the process of terminating the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (the process that may cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in a state in which the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred, the operation is not received, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play the game using a selfish game technique such as "operate and develop the effect only when you like while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode)". It can be assumed that some desire to do so. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is further provided in the door frame 3. When the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration 5001) is performed during the effect reception period for the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect A process for ending the state (specific production state) and a process that may cause a change in the production are respectively performed (operation unified control in the automatic button production state), but are controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state). If the operation on the special operation means is performed during the effect reception period for the specific effect while Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where the automatic button effect state is to be ended and an operation game is to be actively performed thereafter, the operation on the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is performed within the effect reception period. If the user wants to rarely perform the operation while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), the user may perform an operation on the special operation means within the effect reception period. Only by appropriately using the operation means as described above, a game desired by the player can be realized.

  Hereinafter, the operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 267.

  FIG. 265 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holds is one, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows a state in which the effect reception period in which the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is received while the reach state is formed occurs in the effect state being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, “auto button effect button”). "Setting in progress") appears continuously.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, also during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a lower display is shown). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, actually, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in which no change occurs are allowed.

  FIGS. 265 (b) to 265 (d) show that the operation of the operation button 410 was not performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 9 shows a state in which a post-operation effect having the same contents as when an operation is performed and an effect is received is performed. At the time when the above-described automatic production function is activated, the production acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended. Any operation opportunity for the (operated button) 1410 will be lost.

  In other words, in the post-operation production according to this production example, a staged production progress appears, and any of the production results in a plurality of modes (FIGS. 265 (c) and 265 (d)) having different degrees of expectation can be obtained. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol change (determined based on the result of the big hit determination), first, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion Smoke image). Then, when the effect progresses to the effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 265 (c), the specific effect image shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, the effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high-level effect result, as shown in FIG. 265 (d), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) illustrated in FIG. 265 (b) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (a) to (d) will appear as a basic effect progression when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-described automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIG. 265 (b) to FIG. 265 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless an operation is performed by the player. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), a desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced by the player's own operation (automatic button effect state (A desire to end). Such a desire often occurs when an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but for a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for terminating the automatic button production state and the operation for allowing the operation to be accepted, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the entertainment interest of the game may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is detected that the operation has been performed. Based on the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, a process of ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect in response to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unification control in button production state). At the time when the operation on the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect function can no longer function, and special operation means ( In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button 1410 described as “PUSH” is also lost.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the operation is performed during the effect reception period and the effect is received, as shown in FIG. 266 (e). As a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the effect progresses to the effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 266 (f), the specific effect image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, the effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively less expected is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high-effect effect, as shown in FIG. 266 (g), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) illustrated in FIG. 266 (e) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of “Nakayoshi”) indicating that the effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation is displayed.

  However, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of terminating the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 266 (e) to (g), after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indicated display (here, “auto button is being set”) is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the process of terminating the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggestive display (here, “auto button release”) is displayed (see FIG. 266 (e)).

  As described above, in the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also special operation means in which no change occurs (in the figure, “PUSH” is described) Button 1414). Then, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 performs the operation by itself only when desired (without switching the production mode) while maintaining the automatic button production state. As described above, it is provided to enable a selfish game technique such as "produce an effect."

  Therefore, also when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), as shown in FIG. 267 (h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as an after-operation effect in response to the effect being received within the effect reception period. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), a specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. As the smoke image gradually disappears, an effect image (in this case, the fortune of "Kichi") indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed. When the effect progresses to a high effect effect, as shown in FIG. 267 (j), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 267 (h) gradually disappears. In the process, an effect image (in this case, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") indicating that the effect result is an effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed. Note that at the time when the effect on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is accepted, the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 265 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect The function cannot be performed, and the opportunity for operating the operation button 410 is also lost.

  However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. Is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 267 (h) to (j), even after the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display (here, “auto button is being set”) is continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 in the effect reception period generated in FIG. A special operation that cannot appear when the operation is performed, when the above-described automatic staging function functions (FIG. 265 (b)), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266 (e)), or the like. Directing can appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 267 (j), the above-described automatic effect function functioned on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (effect after operation) appearing in the case (FIG. 265 (b)) or when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 266 (e)), an effect display that is shining and shining is additionally displayed. I am trying to. An effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally performed instead of the glittering effect display.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed within the effect acceptance period related to the fortune telling effect, the effect change content When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the production acceptance period for the fortune production. The content of the effect change produced in the case is different from each other. Then, in this case, when the above-described special effect (here, a brilliant effect display) appears, “the operation of the operation means is performed and the effect after the operation according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is After the operation, the user can recognize that the setting is not canceled and the state is maintained, while enjoying the effect after the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 267 (i), even when an effect image (in this case, a fortune of “Yoshi”) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, special The effect (in this case, a glittering effect display) can appear.

  In addition, such special effects (here, a brilliant effect display) are added to the above-mentioned post-operation effects at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effects are displayed. When an effect is additionally appeared, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol fluctuation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is useful for the player to perform an operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 It is feared that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when an operation is performed on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the special effect (here, glittering) is performed. When the effect display) does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a) or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol by the symbol change becomes lower than the case where the symbol change occurs.

  According to such a configuration, the operation on the “special operation means (the button described as“ PUSH ”in the figure) 1410 causes the“ operation on the operation means to be performed and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears. In order to create `` the state in which the automatic button production state is not canceled and continues to be set '', there is a staging effect such as `` It can be suggested that the rate of appearance of big hit symbols due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low '' Since there is a risk to be obtained, it is expected that the entertainment interest can be appropriately maintained by causing the player to exercise such a staging selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), although the same effect form as the example shown in FIG. In this situation, it is possible to recognize that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change is lower than the examples shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 267 (i), while it is made possible to recognize that the situation has a low degree of expectation, the effect form is shown in FIGS. 265 (c) and 266 (f). By making them the same as in the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in the production situation where the production selection failed. This makes it difficult to grasp the game entertainment, which is expected to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if any of the staging selections is performed within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a), the staging machine shown in FIG. 265 (b) or FIG. 266 ( e), a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed as shown in FIG. 267 (h) and the like, but the specific effect image is relatively displayed as the post-operation effect. The effect may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the production mode with a high degree of expectation (here, the fortune of “Nakayoshi”) appears or the special application appears in a different ratio.

  Further, even if any staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 265 (a), this is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and staging modes having different degrees of expectation. (Here, the fortune of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi”) may directly appear as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp the state of the production when the production situation (FIG. 267 (i)) in which the production selection has failed has occurred, the production modes with different degrees of expectation ( Here, it is desirable to display a specific effect image (in this case, a smoke image due to an explosion) first when any one of “yoshi” or “nakayoshi” appears as an effect after operation.

  Also, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), it is possible to perform an effect whose degree of expectation is suggested, so that it is possible to determine whether to take the above-described effect risk. You may.

  Further, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button effect state when the state is in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means that has already been prepared may be used.

  In the effect reception period generated in FIG. 265 (a), whether a period during which an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) can be effected is generated, Alternatively, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261)) regarding whether a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be performed is generated. May be generated as a result of the execution.

  Further, during the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect in which an operation opportunity to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. A reception period (refer to FIG. 265 (a)) and a second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH”) 1410 in the drawing may be included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs, the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) is lower than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate at which the symbol change appears before the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio at which the specific operation-related effects described above (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appear depends on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period has occurred. It will function as a suggested effect.

[Stable automatic effect processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which of the operation means are operated" Can accept the production acceptance period. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, and any operation means within the special effect reception period. If there is no operation, whether to activate the automatic production function for any of the plurality of operation means (Which of the plurality of operation means causes the same change to the production as when the production was accepted) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" When the production acceptance period of "occurs, it is not" whether there is a possibility that a production result with a higher expectation will appear "but" whether there is a possibility that a production result with a lower expectation will appear " Processing that activates the automatic production function for an operation means different from the “operation means that can generate a production that may produce a production result with a lower degree of expectation” (stable automatic production Process) is executable.

  According to such a configuration, among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when an effect is received for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period, the effect mode with the lowest expectation is: When the automatic production function is functioning, it will not be possible to appear. It can be avoided suitably.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270.

  First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and a normal effect state is set. In FIG. 268 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The player can select one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in a state where the reach state is formed in the effect situation being performed by the player. The effect display indicating that the special effect reception period is to be started indicates the effect status. In this effect situation, although both the effect reception for the operation button 410 and the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 have not yet been activated, the operation button 410 and the sword have not been activated since the situation. The operation button 410 is in a light-emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword-drawing position in order to prompt the user to determine which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on effect display device 1600, a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

  FIG. 268 (b) shows a special effect reception period (one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 268 (a). This shows an effect situation in which an effect reception period which can be selected by the user) has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display on the effect display device 1600 (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG), and the operation buttons that have appeared since the time of the effect condition shown in FIG. While the state of the sword decoration body 4101 and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained, an instruction display for prompting an operation on either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed). A corresponding downward arrow and a bar indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period are displayed.

  Here, in the effect state shown in FIG. 268 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “wave” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Have been. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a special mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting the effect.

  That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the post-button operation effect. After the fact that the action has been performed is displayed (FIG. 268 (c)), the production result indicating that the smaller the number destroyed is, the lower the expectation is and the larger the number destroyed is, the higher the expectation is. And an effect (FIG. 268 (d), FIG. 268 (e)) in which one of “100 defeat” is made to appear based on the result of the big hit determination. For example, in the effect after the button side operation when the big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) at a rate of “60%”. In the effect after button-side operation when the big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 268 (d) appears at a rate of “60%”, and the rate of “40%” It is possible to make the effect form shown in FIG. 268 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when an effect is received for the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the effect after the sword decoration 5001 is first displayed as the post-sword-side operation effect ( FIG. 269 (f)), as the production results suggesting that the lower the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and that the greater the number of defeats, the higher the expectation, the results of “1 body destruction”, “100 body destruction”, and “ An effect (FIG. 269 (g) to FIG. 269 (i)) of causing any one of “777 defeat” to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the effect after the sword side operation when the big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) at a rate of “50%”. The effect mode shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of “40%”, and the rate of “40%” in the effect after the sword-side operation when a big hit is lost. 269 (g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 269 (h) appears at a rate of “50%”, and the effect shown in FIG. 269 (i) appears at a rate of “0%”. It is possible for aspects to appear.

  In addition, in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, regardless of which of the rendering after the button side operation and the rendering after the sword side operation is performed, the rendering mode in which the number of defeats is small. Has a lower degree of expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same effect mode (for example, the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 268 (e), the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 269 (h), the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 270 (e) described later). Although the degree of expectation may be different, it is desirable to make them the same.

  In such a configuration, a special effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) is generated, and the special effect reception period is generated. Can operate different operation effects (effects after button-side operation, effects after sword-side operation) depending on the type of operation means operated on the side that was operated during the effect reception period. It is possible to improve the monotonous directing effect as much as possible, and to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In particular, operating the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) does not cause the same degree of expectation to be indicated, but the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means). Only when the second operation means is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 269 (g)) indicating that the big hit symbol is unlikely to appear in the symbol change (symbol change in the execution state). Since it is possible to appear the effect mode of “defeat one body”, it is desired to see the effect (effect after operation on the sword side) on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) until such a risk is taken. It will be expected to maintain the interest in games by giving conflicts and stimuli to them.

  In this case, the effect after button-side operation is “a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation” among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. In this case, the function as a relatively stable post-operation effect is achieved in the sense that the appearance risk of “(the effect mode of“ single defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g))” is eliminated. In addition, the effect after the sword-side operation is the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation degree (here) of the effect mode that appears when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is an appearance risk of “the production mode of“ one-body destruction ”shown in FIG. 269 (g)), it will function as a post-operation production that relatively includes disturbance.

  Furthermore, in this effect example, between the time when the effect condition shown in FIG. 268 (a) appears and the time the effect condition shown in FIG. 268 (b) appears (in this case, during the special effect reception period), The rendering mode shown in FIG. 268 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the rendering mode appears, it is easier than when the rendering mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the ratio of occurrence of the "specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (in this case, the production mode of" single defeat "shown in FIG. 269 (g))" is low. It is possible to carry out production progress in the form of. This ratio may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, until a risk that a “specific production mode with the lowest degree of expectation (in this case, the production mode of“ single body defeat ”shown in FIG. 269 (g))” may occur is assumed. As a material for determining whether to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it is possible to use the effect of whether or not the effect shown in FIG. 268 (ab) has appeared. 268 (b), it is expected to appropriately improve the game entertainment when the special effect reception period occurs.

  In the normal production state, if the special production reception period shown in FIG. 268 (b) occurs but no production is received within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not function, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 270 (a) to 270 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), FIG. 270 (ab), and FIG. 270 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that a display indicating the effect (here, “Auto button is being set”) appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that a special effect reception period is started appears. From the time point till the end of the special effect reception period, the effect is the same as in the above-described normal effect state (FIGS. 268 (a), 268 (ab), and 268 (b)). Be advanced.

  However, as described above, if neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the effect result with lower expectation (here, FIG. 209 (g), the automatic rendering function is enabled for an operation button 410 different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate a rendering in which there is a possibility that the “single body defeat” shown in FIG. Processing (stable-side automatic effect processing) can be executed.

  That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration 5001 is operated during the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 270 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. By doing so, the same change as in the case where an operation on the operation button 410 has been received in the special effect reception period is generated for the effect. Therefore, as the effect after the button-side operation, first, it is displayed that the effect has been accepted for the operation button 410 (FIG. 270 (c)). 270 (d) and 270 (e), in which one of "50 defeats" and "100 defeats" appears as an effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation based on the result of the jackpot determination. ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, of the plurality of effect modes that can be generated when an effect is received for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, the degree of expectation is the lowest. The production mode (here, the production mode of “single defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function is functioning. In such a case, an effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears due to the automatic effect function. "

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special presentation reception period, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 270 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the presentation mode appears , The production after the sword-side operation is performed while the ratio of appearance of the specific production mode having the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of “single defeat” shown in FIG. 269 (g)) is low. Since an opportunity to be able to enjoy is provided, it is expected that the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is appropriately encouraged.

  In the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 268 to 270, a special period in which a period in which an operation on the operation button 410 is effected and a period in which an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is effected are generated at the same time and are ended at the same time. Although the control is performed as the effect reception period, it is not always necessary to simultaneously generate these periods. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is directed and the period in which the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are directed are overlapped in a part of the period, the periods are separated. It may be generated at a timing.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from the plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect is determined that “a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. Is performed "may be necessarily generated. In other words, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time when the design change is started with a specific effect pattern, "which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs. Should you do the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing it? ", And so on, you can think about a production strategy that assumes a special production reception period will occur . For example, it is possible to confirm “how much noticed production was performed in what type of production (expected degree)” until a special production acceptance period occurs. The result can be used as a material for determining which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and the game until the special effect reception period occurs It will be possible to appropriately maintain this for entertainment.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 or an operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 during the special effect reception period, an automatic effect function is also provided. Is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the big hit determination at the start of the symbol change or at the time of the effect reception (or at the time of the function of the automatic effect function). It is desirable to do so.

  Also, even if the special effect reception period is in an effect state in which a special effect reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001. When the effect display (FIG. 268 (a), FIG. 270 (a)) indicating that a special effect reception period is to be started is being performed, setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to be performed. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select any one of the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the `` effect display '' has started, it will not be accepted, so you will continue playing while maintaining the automatic button effect state "Stable automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state" can be provided only for those who are playing, and production for continuous playing while maintaining the automatic button production state Value can be provided.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 269 (g)”) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword-side operation is performed using the button-side operation. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique production mode different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production was performed, the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” was performed after the button-side operation. It may be executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 defeat” shown in FIG. 268 (d)). Is performed, as a result, even if a “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” appears, the same appearance as the production mode that can appear when the production is performed after the button side operation appears for the purpose of viewing. Operation button It is possible to make it difficult for a third party who does not know which one of the 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated to recognize that there is an effect situation in which the degree of expectation is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect situation such as “a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception” is displayed. Despite this, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) depends on whether the effect status is caused by an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation on the sword decoration 5001. ), The degree of expectation of the appearance of the big hit symbol will be different, so it will have more fun as a production using multiple operation means It becomes possible to.

  However, this is a case where the “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation effect is executed as the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when the button-side operation effect is performed. However, as for the “special production mode with the highest expectation” in the post-sword-side operation, a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the button-side operation is performed (for example, It is desirable to execute this as “(777 body defeat) shown in FIG. 269 (i).” According to such a configuration, “specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the production after the sword-side operation. Appears, it is difficult to recognize that a third party who does not know which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated has an extremely low level of expectation. However, when the “special production mode with the highest expectation” appears in the production after the sword-side operation, even if the third party does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated, This makes it easy to recognize that there is a production situation in which expectations are extremely high, so that the player can take the above risks without worrying about the eyes of a third party. It is possible to enjoy the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (the effect after the operation on the sword side). What is necessary is just to be recognizable. For example, the uniqueness with respect to other effect modes may be ensured by executing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect state of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. i)) can appear, and when the “777 defeat” effect mode (FIG. 269 (i)) appears, any other effect mode (FIGS. 268 (d) and 268 (e)) , FIG. 269 (g), and FIG. 269 (h)), the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the symbol variation appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the appearance mode of the “defeat 777 body” (FIG. 269 (i)) appear. In this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 269 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 268 (e) by the lower the degree of expectation of the production mode shown in (g). Becomes

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, effects after the button side operation (FIGS. 268 (c) to 268 (e)) and effects after the sword side operation (FIGS. 269 (f) to 269 (i)) ), A common production mode (here, the production mode of “100 defeats”) can appear, but the common production mode should not appear. Is also good. Further, in the effect after the button-side operation, only the display change appears, but in the effect after the sword-side operation, in addition to the display change, the movable body operation or the lamp emission may be made executable. Further, the effect after the button-side operation and the effect after the sword-side operation do not have the commonality as the effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as different effects.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, when the effect reception is performed, including when the effect is received by the function of the automatic effect function, first, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Although the display (FIG. 268 (c), FIG. 269 (f), and FIG. 270 (c)) that indicates whether or not the effect has been accepted appears here, the degree of expectation is indicated without the display appearing. An effect that causes an effect result to appear may be executed.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 to 270, the effect state of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 269 (FIG. 269 (f) to FIG. 269 (i)) is performed as a result of the effect (FIG. i)) appears, the specific operation-related state described above is higher than when any other effect mode (FIGS. 268 (d), 268 (e), FIG. 269 (g), FIG. 269 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) appear until the symbol change is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword decoration body) on the higher expectation side It is desirable that the rate at which an operation opportunity is given to 5001) be increased. According to such a configuration, in the rendering examples shown in FIG. 268 to FIG. 270, it is possible to suitably encourage the user to perform an operation on the sword decoration 5001 on the side with a higher rendering risk.

[Direction reception process according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
The first display effect can be displayed during the effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted, and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the first display effect is displayed. And a process of generating a first expected effect (a post-operation effect indicating the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and an effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 During the period, the second display effect can be displayed, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is displayed, the second display effect is displayed based on the reception of the effect by the operation. It is possible to execute a process related to a plurality of different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect different from the first expected effect (after-operation effect indicating an expected degree). That.

  In such a configuration, the effect type as the expected effect (effect after operation) that appears during operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed during the effect reception period. Therefore, not only the game entertainment at the time of the operation can be enhanced, but also the game entertainment from the occurrence of the effect reception period to the operation can be appropriately enhanced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when at least the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect acceptance period (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted within the effect accepting period. When an effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed or an effect condition in which the second display effect is displayed during an effect accepting period in which an effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted appears, the effect acceptance is performed. Processing for generating the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed even if the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period Is executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, when the effect state in which the first display effect is displayed during the effect accepting period appears, the operation button 410 is operated. The first display effect is executed irrespective of whether or not the operation button 410 is operated when the effect state in which the second display effect is displayed during the effect reception period appears. Regardless, the second display effect is executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed during the effect accepting period, the user is concerned about forgetting to operate. It will be possible to enjoy the production without any.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when an effect reception period for generating an after-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when there is no effect reception period for generating an effect after the operation. And
An effect situation in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect accepting period allowing the effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the first display effect is displayed. In the case where an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in the above, a process of generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed respectively (effect shown in FIG. 271 described later). See progress),
An effect state in which an effect reception period in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled and an effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted has occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the above, the process of generating the second expected effect (the effect after the operation) is performed, but the process of terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 272 described later). See production progress),
An effect in which the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, an effect accepting period for allowing effect accepting (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (the effect after the operation) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (the effect after the operation) is performed. The processing for terminating the effect state is also not performed (see the effect progress shown in FIG. 273 described later),
-The automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, and no production reception period allowing production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the first display production and the second display production. When an operation on the operation button 410 is performed in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process of generating a first expected effect (effect after operation) and a process of generating a second expected effect (effect after operation) Are not performed, and each process such as a process of ending the automatic button effect state is performed according to each effect state (an effect receiving process according to a display type).

  According to such a configuration, when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the first display effect has appeared and the second display effect has not appeared, the first display effect appears. Is not performed and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the second display effect is appearing. In addition to making the first expected effect and the second expected effect different, the expected effect (effect after operation) itself does not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. There is a possibility that the processing for ending the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to appropriately improve the entertainment of the game when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the effect accepting process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 275.

  FIG. 271 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 271 (a)) in the symbol change execution period is “effect reception (operation) for operation button 410”. Shows an example of an effect when a first effect pattern that can be set as an effect accepting period in which “allows” is executed.

  In the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect effect acceptance period in which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, as shown in FIG. , A button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) appears. (First display effect).

  Then, if an effect on the operation button 410 is received at a timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), the symbol change (in the execution state) based on the effect reception. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") indicating the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears in the pattern change) is executed (first expected effect). Also, at this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled based on the effect reception and returned to the normal effect state, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 has not been completed without exhausting the remaining time. Will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 at which the effect was received, the display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, “Auto button is being set”) that has appeared up to that point in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) "Are also hidden.

  However, in this case, regardless of which of the timings tb11 to tb13 the effect is received, at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the first post-operation effect ( The first expected effect) is not completed yet, and is in the process of being executed, so that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained over the period of the timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. It is desirable in doing.

  FIG. 272 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is “effect reception (operation) for operation button 410”. Shows an example of an effect when a second effect pattern that can be set as an effect accepting period in which “is permitted” is executed.

  In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect accepting period in which the effect accepting (operating) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, as shown in FIG. , "Haunted OBK with present box" appears (second display effect).

  Here, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated is not necessarily generated when the “haunted OBK with the present box” is displayed. Therefore, an instruction display for urging an operation on the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 272, the haunted OBK with the present box can be displayed within the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. A second post-operation effect (in the figure, a character display of “hot fever”) indicating the expected degree of appearance is executed (a second expected effect).

  However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This is to be maintained. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here,“ auto button is being set ”)” displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

  Regardless of the effect reception during any of the timing tb21 to tb23, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 272 (d), the second post-operation effect (second operation) generated by the effect reception Is not completed yet, and is in the process of being executed, in order to maintain the game entertainment appropriately over the period from timing tb21 to timing tb23 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. Is desirable.

  FIG. 273 shows that the second post-operation effect is generated during the period of timing tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 273 (a)) in the symbol change execution period while the automatic button effect state is being controlled. This shows an example of an effect when the third effect pattern for displaying “a haunted OBK with a present box” is executed even though the effect reception period has not occurred.

  In the third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a haunted OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

  However, as described above, in the effect situation in which a haunted OBK with a present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation effect in which even if the operation button 410 is operated, the degree of expectation is suggested. Since it is not necessarily generated, an instruction display for urging an operation on the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) does not appear.

  In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 273, the haunted OBK having the present box can be displayed within the period from timing tb31 to tb33. However, the haunted OBK is displayed as shown in FIG. In this period, the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and (c), even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed while the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation, The effect (the effect after the first operation, the effect after the second operation) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed over the period from timing tb31 to tb33.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (the peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the effect reception period for the effect after the operation has not occurred. In this case, basically, processing for terminating the automatic button effect state (setting release) is performed. However, even when the effect accepting period for the effect after operation has not occurred, the process is illustrated in FIG. 273. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in such an effect state (an effect state in which a haunted OBK with a present box is displayed), a process of generating an effect after the operation and an automatic button effect state are performed. The production is to be advanced so that none of the processing for ending is performed.

Therefore, when the mode (haunted OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 273 (b), which is the same mode as FIG. 272 (b), is displayed, the second operation shown in FIG. 272 (c) is displayed. Even when the operation button 410 is operated in expectation of the occurrence of the second effect (the second expected effect), the effect change does not occur, but the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled. This can be continued. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
Even in the state where the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 has been enabled is enabled, and when the effect reception period for the post-operation effect has not occurred, If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the detected timing is “within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33 at which the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed”, and When the timing is within the period between the timings tb31 and tb33 when the ghost OBK is displayed ", the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the timing at which the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed is displayed. If it is not within the period from tb21 to tb23 ", processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is performed. Approach to (the method to set the period of timing tb31~tb33, as the prohibition period in accordance with the setting release of the automatic button directing state)
In the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23 when the haunted OBK with the present box is displayed, a method of detecting whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated or not performing the operation itself is adopted. Is possible, and any method may be used to realize it.

  FIG. 274 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of the timing tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 274 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol change is “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is performed. This shows an example of an effect when the above-described first effect pattern that can be set as the “permissible effect reception period” is executed, but the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13.

  As described above, in the first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 to generate the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” arrives, the effect display is performed as shown in FIG. 274 (b). In the device 1600, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display urging the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a downward arrow display and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). Display) appears (first display effect).

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 274, the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period from the timing tb11 to the time tb13, but when the timing tb12 ′ before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Function, thereby producing the same change in the effect as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (c), at timing tb12 ′, the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) based on the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function. A first post-operation effect (in the figure, a fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12 ′, the “display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here,“ auto button is being set ”)” which has been displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is continued. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12 ′, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), at the timing tb13, the first post-operation effect (first operation) generated by the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the expected effect) is not completed yet and is in the process of being executed, in order to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game over the period from the timing tb11 to the timing tb13.

  FIG. 275 shows that, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period of the timing tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 275 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is performed. This shows an example of an effect when the above-described second effect pattern that can be set as the “permissible effect reception period” is executed, but the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23.

  As described above, in the second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” comes, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), the effect display In the device 1600, “a haunted OBK with a present box” appears (second display effect).

  Here, as described above, when the “haunted OBK with a present box” is displayed, unlike when the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Display that prompts the operation of the operation button 410 (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). There is no.

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 275, the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23, but when the timing tb22 ′ before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Function, so that the same change as when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed is produced for the effect. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), at timing tb22 ′, the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the running state) based on the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function. A second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "hot fever") is executed (second expected effect). However, also in this case, the effect reception period generated from timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is continued without being canceled. Becomes Therefore, at the timing tb22 ', the "display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled (here," automatic button setting is in progress ")" which has been displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 is continued. Will be displayed.

  Also, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22 ′, at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 275 (d), the second post-operation effect (second operation effect) generated by the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable that the expected effect of the game is not completed yet and is in the process of being executed, in order to appropriately maintain the game entertainment over the period from the timing tb21 to the timing tb23.

  Incidentally, although illustration is omitted, although the above-described third effect pattern (see FIG. 273) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, since the effect reception period for generating the second post-effect is not generated in the first place, the above-described automatic effect function cannot function, and the automatic button effect state is released. Needless to say, it will be continued (that is, no change will occur).

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, effects that progress with different contents are executed between the first display effect shown in FIG. 271 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 272 and 273. According to which of the first display effect and the second display effect is displayed, the type of the post-operation effect (the first In addition to making the expected effect and the second expected effect different, the expected effect (effect after operation) itself may not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. That is, the processing for terminating the automatic button effect state is not performed. Therefore, diversity as an effect using the operation buttons 410 is ensured, and it is possible to appropriately improve the entertainment of the game when the effect using the operation buttons 410 is performed.

  It should be noted that the first display effect has a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. Also, the second display effect may have a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first display effect, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, a button display is performed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. Has become.

  In addition, the first expected effect may include a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. The second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed as effect contents having no relation to each other. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, in the first expected effect, the fortune image is displayed, but in the second expected effect, the fortune image is not displayed, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. The suggestion has been made. By executing one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect as a movable effect or an effect by lamp display, the contents may have no relation to each other.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when the second display effect appears as the effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol change, “effect on the operation button 410” A second effect pattern in which it is determined in advance (for example, by a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change) that the "effect effect acceptance period in which acceptance (operation) is allowed" occurs, and a second display effect appear. The third effect pattern, which is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change, and the like) that the “effect accepting period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” does not occur when the We decided to prepare. However, after preparing the second effect pattern in which it is determined that the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” occurs when the second display effect appears, A determination (lottery) as to whether or not to generate the second expected effect is made based on the effect reception being performed within the “effect reception period in which the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted”. FIG. 271 shows that a second expected effect is generated when a specific result is obtained in the determination and a second expected effect is not generated when the specific result is not obtained in the determination. 275 may be realized. In addition to the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect is appearing, the “effect accepting period in which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation button 410 is permitted” may not occur. The above-described third effect pattern that is determined in advance (for example, in a determination process performed at the start of a symbol change) may be further prepared.

  When the second expected effect is generated as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is performed. The rate of appearance of the big hit symbol in the symbol change (symbol change in the execution state) may be higher than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410. desirable.

  In addition, when the second display effect is performed, the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261) is performed more until the symbol change is stopped than when the first display effect is performed. It is desirable that the ratio of occurrences during the period be high. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the specific operation is performed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the related effects (see FIGS. 241 to 261) will be performed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the interest in the game.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed and the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273). (Refer to (b)) is displayed, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function. However, even if an operation is performed, the second expected effect is not always generated. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 272 (b) and 273 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect is displayed. If the effect function is enabled, when the second display effect (see FIG. 272 (b) and FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed according to the automatic effect function described above. It is feared that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 271 (b)) is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIG. 272 (b), FIG. 273 (b)) is displayed. ) Is displayed, the above-described automatic effect function is disabled, and it is not known whether or not the second expected effect will occur even if it is operated when the second display effect is displayed. For example, the second expected effect may not be generated.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when displaying the haunted OBK, an “effect accepting period in which the effect acceptance (operation) for the operation means is permitted” is generated while the haunted OBK is displayed. You may do so. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 271 to 275, when displaying a haunted OBK, the automatic effect function functions within the “effect effect period in which effect effect acceptance (operation) for the operation means is permitted”, Even if the operation is performed, the effect that the ghost OBK is displayed may be continued at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33 without hiding the ghost OBK.

[Auto repeat function in automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. However, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as continuous hitting of the operation button 410) on predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception each time the operation is performed, and performs an operation operation corresponding to the operation multiple times. May be asked. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to operate the above-described automatic effect function when a specific effect accepting period in which such multiple operation effects are performed occurs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is provided in a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous hits) is given. Effect when the operation is performed a plurality of times simply by performing a long-term operation (so-called long-pressing or the like) for maintaining the predetermined operation means in an operation state for a relatively long time without operating the. Equipped with an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous tapping function) that makes the mode appear, and the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous tapping function) is performed by performing an operation on a predetermined operation means in a long operation mode. When an operation is performed, an effect is received each time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and a post-operation effect is generated a plurality of times in accordance with these operations. It is set to be executed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous tapping) is given when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation on the operation means is not performed during the specific effect reception period, the operation on the operation means is performed in a long operation mode during the specific effect reception period and the operation is automatically performed. As in the case where the multiple-time operation function (auto-hit function) functions, a process for generating an effect according to the effect reception is performed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

  According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous hitting function is activated when an operation by a so-called long press is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as continuous tapping) is provided. Thus, when at least the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the above-described automatic continuous tapping function is activated appears even if an operation by a long press is not performed during the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even when the automatic production function is activated when a specific production reception period in which a plurality of operation receptions are required in the automatic button production state occurs, the specific production (operation reception) within the specific production reception period. The player can enjoy the performance without complaining about the frequency of occurrences of the game.

  FIG. 276 (a) shows that when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous tapping)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which the operation button 410 is given" is executed, and the operation of the operation button 410 is performed a plurality of times in a single operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. Shows an example of the effect when performed over.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (a), in this effect example, each time the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the single-shot operation mode within the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) (the operation button 410 Each time it is detected that the player has moved from the position to the operation state (in this case, every time a rise is detected), an effect is received in accordance with the operation, and a specific effect (after-operation effect) is executed in accordance with the effect reception. . When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (reception of an effect) reaches a specific number of times, or when a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received is satisfied. In addition, an effect mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition is caused to appear, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  Here, although omitted in the figure, during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), a specific time from the start of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception to the end of the specific effect (operation effect). In some cases, a new effect reception (operation detection) may be performed. In such a case, the specific effect (effect after operation) that is in the middle of execution at the time of receiving the effect is interrupted, and a specific effect (effect after operation) according to the reception of the effect is newly generated. In this way, it is desirable to appropriately maintain the operational feeling (effect responsiveness) when the player operates. In addition, unless a new effect is received again during the execution of the specific effect, the newly generated specific effect (effect after operation) is to be ended when a specific time has elapsed from the start. Become.

  FIG. 276 (b) shows that when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous hits)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which the" is given "is executed, and the operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An example of an effect when an operation is performed on the button 410 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 276 (b), in the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13), while the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained in a long press manner, the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 has elapsed after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) has occurred based on the operation detection (effect reception) at the time of the occurrence (operation effect reception). Auto-hit function) is executed. As this processing (automatic continuous tapping function), for example, “operation detection (reception of an effect) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in an operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect) A new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated based on the “acceptance”). When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (reception of an effect) reaches a specific number of times, or when a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received is satisfied. In addition, an effect mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition is caused to appear, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (a) shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as continuous tapping)”. An example of an effect when a specific effect pattern that can be set as the "specific effect reception period to which the" is given "is executed and no operation is performed within the specific effect reception period is shown.

  First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed at all and the timing tc13 is not executed. At that point, the specific effect reception period ends.

  On the other hand, assuming that no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tc11 to tc13) while the automatic button effect state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. The automatic effect function described above functions at a timing tc12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect reception period occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect (every predetermined time t1 elapses) similarly to the case where the above-described automatic continuous hit function functions. Then, a process for producing a post-operation effect) is executed.

  As this processing (automatic effect function), for example, "Each time a predetermined time t1 elapses, operation detection (effect effect acceptance) is performed, and a new specific effect (effect effect acceptance) is performed based on the operation detection (effect effect acceptance). A post-operation effect) is generated. Further, when the above-described automatic production function functions at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous beating function is activated to use the automatic continuous beating function. A new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated based on (effect reception). When the number of times that the operation button 410 has been subjected to the operation detection (reception of an effect) reaches a specific number of times, or when a specific effect condition such as a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received is satisfied. In addition, an effect mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested according to the satisfaction of the specific effect condition is caused to appear, and the specific effect reception period is ended at that time without exhausting the remaining time. .

  FIG. 277 (b) shows that when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period of timing tc11 to tc13 in the symbol variation execution period is set to “operation opportunity of operating the operation button 410 a plurality of times (such as repeated hits)”. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which the"? "Is given is executed, and in the specific effect reception period, the operation on the operation button 410 is long-pressed while the above-described automatic effect function is functioning. It shows an example of the effect in the case where it is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), the automatic effect function described above functions at the timing tc12, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a), whereby the first specific effect at the timing tc12. Is generated, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated each time the predetermined time t1 elapses, similarly to the case where the above-described automatic continuous hitting function is activated (or by operating the automatic continuous hitting function). Is performed.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in a long-press mode at the timing tc12a when the processing by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, at the timing tc12a, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected while in the automatic button effect state, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). However, in this effect example, the effect is not accepted even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a. Then, after the specific effect (the effect after the operation) according to the effect reception is prevented from being generated at the timing tc12a, the process (the predetermined time t1) that is executed before the automatic button effect state is released from being set. Each time elapses, the process is continued without terminating a new specific effect (effect after operation).

  According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-described automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the operation by long-pressing at any timing in the state is performed. Even if is started, the rhythm or tempo related to the generation of the specific effect (the effect after the operation) does not change due to the operation, and the effect of the effect does not delay, and the effect is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (after-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a manner to be continued until after the operation mode by the long press is started. Therefore, in the automatic button production state, even if the above-mentioned automatic production function is functioning within the specific production reception period, the player can perform the operation without worrying about adverse effects on the production in the execution state. This allows the player to appropriately perform the operation. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (b), the effect state is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 277 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at timing tc12a, The same mode will appear as the mode of the specific effect that appears during the specific effect reception period.

  In addition, the process that is already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued until after the operation mode by the long press is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an automatic tapping function that works when an operation by long press is performed during the specific effect reception period, and a function that does not operate during the specific effect reception period The same processing (processing of generating a new specific effect (after-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is performed regardless of which of the automatic effect functions functions. Nothing else

  However, after the start of the long press operation by the player at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is consumed, and the fact that the operation button 410 is in the operation state is determined. Is performed (processing for generating a new specific effect (after-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) on the condition that the above determination is made. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state when the predetermined time t1 based on the specific effect executed last time is consumed, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated at that time. In other words, the process that has been executed since the automatic button effect state (the process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is ended.

  In the example of the effect using the automatic continuous hitting function shown in FIG. 276 (b) and the automatic effecting function shown in FIGS. 277 (a) and (b), the predetermined time t1 is determined based on the timing at which the specific effect ends. A process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) after the lapse has been performed (the automatic continuous hitting function, the first mode as the automatic effect function), but instead of the timing at which the specific effect starts, Alternatively, after a predetermined time t2 has elapsed, a process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) (a second mode as an automatic continuous hit function or an automatic effect function) may be executed. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than a specific time required from the start of the specific effect to the end thereof, but preferably, the predetermined time t2 is from the start of the specific effect to the end thereof. Is set to be shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the process of being executed, a new specific effect is executed in a form of interrupting the specific effect, so that only the operation by long pressing is performed, or Even if no operation is performed, it is possible to have a feeling as if the single operation is repeatedly performed at a high speed, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately maintained.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 277 (b), when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed before the timing tc12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of the timings tc11 to tc12), at that time, The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated). At this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation on the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (auto-hit function) for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operating state. Each time, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, when an effect is received while the specific effect is in the process of being executed, the specific effect in the state of being executed is interrupted in response to the effect reception. Although the new specific effect is to be generated, a new specific effect according to the reception of the effect may be generated in parallel with the specific effect in the middle of execution without terminating the specific effect.

  As described above, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 276 and 277, when a new single operation is performed and an effect is received while the previous specific effect generated by the single operation is in the process of being executed, While a new specific effect (effect after operation) is generated according to the effect reception, when the previous specific effect generated by the functioning of the automatic effect function (or auto continuous hit function) is in the middle of execution Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state by a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (effect after operation) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation state is already performed. (A process of generating a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses) is continued. After this, if the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect has elapsed (in the case of a long-press operation), the processing that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for the predetermined time) The processing that is performed each time the time elapses) is further continued, so that the automatic button effect state is terminated while the operation system effect in the execution state is suitably continued from the automatic button effect state. It is possible to shift to a state in which an operation-based effect is performed by the operation by, and thereby it is expected that the player's awareness of participation is enhanced.

[Setting process for automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can operate the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the execution period of the symbol change. The settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state can be made and canceled, and such simplification of the operation allows the settings and cancellations related to the automatic button effect state to be maintained while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect during the pattern change. I can do it.

  However, if the setting or cancellation related to the automatic button effect state is performed during the execution period of the symbol change, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not assumed at the start of the symbol change, and the processing load increases. It is feared that it will have an adverse effect on the decided production progress. In this regard, the types of the “effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination” include at least “a first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”; Depending on the type of the effect pattern, the setting and cancellation related to the automatic button effect state are not always executed promptly because the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the prompting instruction display appears cannot be set. In some cases, no problem occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state, the pachinko machine 1 during the execution period of the symbol change is performed. By making the processing mode related to the setting and cancellation of the automatic button effect state different from each other, an increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

  FIG. 278 shows the symbol variation in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set” when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three. Is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for releasing the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. . It should be noted that the first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

  As shown in FIG. 278, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, the “first effect display period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the “effect pattern”. Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, in the state in which the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is permitted), the effect progress as the first effect pattern is made. .

  In this effect example, it is assumed that a release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been operated. Is done.

  Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is released in this manner, the operation on the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure) ) Is detected. When an operation on the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, an effect is received, an effect is performed after the operation corresponding to the effect reception, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is received when the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. It is not accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed, the effect is received, the effect is performed after the operation, and the automatic button effect state is released. The operation is also accepted, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (terminated).

  Furthermore, in this effect example, it is assumed that a setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the drawing after the end of the specific effect reception period in this manner. The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) while the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been set to the operation state.

  In this effect example, if the symbol change is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, the hold state is set after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol change is stopped. The next symbol change is digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 278, in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is being executed, the specific effect in the period in which the first effect pattern is executed is performed. When the operation on the operation button 410 is performed when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol change has been started in the “first effect pattern in which a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set” in the state where the automatic button effect state is controlled. Also, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, the specific effect reception period can be generated with the automatic button effect state released, and the player can operate it It is possible to suitably maintain a game entertainment at the time when a desired desire arises. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the release operation is received before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends and the first operation is performed. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

  Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is being performed in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set”. Is also allowed. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 278, it is assumed that the setting operation is received after the specific effect reception period ends, but the setting operation by the player is performed within a period before the specific effect reception period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol change is started in the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect receiving period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears can be set” in a state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect receiving period occurs. By operating the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in a period earlier than the above, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state This is also possible, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the user wants to enjoy the effect after the operation by the automatic effect function.

  In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol change, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) relating to the effect contents in the first effect pattern is required. It is desirable that this is always generated during the specific effect reception period even if is obtained. In addition, the specific effect display is allowed to appear during the symbol change period, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect reception period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state ends. It is desirable to make the production progress as follows. According to these configurations, it is possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs by confirming the effect content that appears during the execution period of the symbol change, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. The user can select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Also, at this time, with respect to the specific effect display, it is possible to provide an indication as to whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect is likely to be performed in a highly expected manner when an effect is received within the specific effect reception period. If it is performed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that the automatic button effect state will be used for a determination on whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

  Further, the specific effect display includes at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display. When the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. The setting (or cancellation) of the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player from the end of the specific effect reception period to the time when the specific effect reception period occurs can be permitted, but when the second specific effect display appears, If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player during the period from the appearance of the second specific effect display to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment of the game from when the display appears until the specific effect reception period occurs.

  FIG. 279 shows a state in which the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, and the second effect pattern (a loss variation in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears cannot be set) )), A symbol change is started, and an example of processing when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart shown.

  As shown in FIG. 279, when the automatic button effect state is currently controlled and the number of holds is in the effect state of three, “the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the “2 effect patterns”. Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 278, the automatic button effect state can be released (a release operation is permitted), even during the execution period of the symbol change. An effect progress is made as the second effect pattern.

  In this effect example, it is assumed that a release operation by the player is detected at a timing td21 shown in the drawing, and the automatic button effect state is released from the setting based on the detection of the release operation. (Finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release of the setting of the automatic button effect state during the change of the symbol is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 has been operated. Is done.

  In other words, it seems that there is little merit in terminating the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, normally, when the design fluctuation in the suspended state is consumed, the possibility that the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” is increased. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (a desire to end a specific production state).

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set but also during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. Also, the automatic button effect state can be ended by an operation by the player. Therefore, it is possible to end the automatic button effect state in advance when the “first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set” is still in the hold state, and thereby, the “first effect pattern in the first effect pattern” The automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect acceptance period is set, and the operation of the operation means (the operation button 410) must be performed without delay, for example, can be avoided.

  Furthermore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that after the automatic button effect state is released in this way, a setting operation by the player is performed at timing td23 shown in the figure. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the specific effect reception period is not set, the second effect pattern is being executed. (Even if the operation button 410 is changed from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern During the period in which is executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted (the automatic button effect state is not set). Note that, in place of this, even when the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is performed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, The setting operation by the player is not accepted during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed.

  That is, even if “setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state” is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation during the specific effect reception period. Also, even if it is operated, the effect is accepted and the effect is executed after the operation. In view of such a fact, during the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, even if the setting operation is performed, it is necessary to quickly set the automatic button effect state. However, if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect reception period that can occur after the next symbol change is consumed, no problem is considered to occur.

  In this regard, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 279, during the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set, the setting operation by the player is performed within the period. However, the automatic button effect state is not set until the period ends (while the symbol change is being executed), and the symbol change according to the second effect pattern is terminated and the symbol is stopped (losing). When in the state of "symbol stop" (in the figure, at timing td24), the automatic button effect state is set based on the setting operation. As described above, during the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed even if the player performs the operation, and the set timing is set to the symbol timing. Since it is carried over after being stopped, the processing load increases due to a change in the setting relating to the effect state that has not been determined at the start of the change of the symbol (due to an operation by the player) occurring during the execution of the change of the symbol. This can be suitably suppressed.

  Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the symbol change is stopped, the state is set to the automatic button effect state, and the hold state is set. The next symbol change is digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, unless the player performs a release operation, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 279, in a state in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is being executed, of the period in which the second effect pattern is in the execution state, Regardless of the timing at which the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably suppress the processing load from increasing due to a change in the setting of the effect state that has not been determined at the start of the symbol change occurring during the execution of the symbol change (by an operation by the player). Become like

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, it is assumed that after the symbol change of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped, the next symbol change that has been in the suspended state is started. However, at the time when the design change of the second effect pattern is stopped (losing design stop), even if the next design change is not on hold, the automatic button is pressed when the design is stopped (losing design stop). The setting to the effect state is performed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 279, when a setting operation is performed by the player during a period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set, the second effect pattern Is set to the automatic button effect state when the symbol change is stopped, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it is essential that the automatic button effect Any setting may be used as long as the setting to the effect state is not allowed and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state be made in the state of the symbol stop (losing symbol stop) or during the period in which the next symbol change is executed. In other words, at the time when the next symbol change is started, if there is an effect state such as "the setting change related to the effect state is determined within the symbol change", the effect is produced according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to make progress, it is possible to preferably prevent the processing load from increasing due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol change.

  In this case, even when the next symbol change is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), when the symbol is stopped (losing symbol stop) or the next symbol change is executed. It is desirable that the setting to the automatic button effect state be made within the period of time. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the second effect pattern, the determination as to which effect pattern the next symbol change is to be executed is made. , The timing of setting the automatic button effect state after the symbol is stopped can be postponed.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is set to the operating state during the period in which the second effect pattern is being executed to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed only thereafter. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is ended while the next symbol change is in the hold state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change is performed. When the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the second effect pattern is in the state of symbol stop (losing symbol stop).

  In addition, apart from the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction prompting the operation appears cannot be set (loss variation)”, the “second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set” "3 effect pattern (hit change)" is further prepared, and when a setting operation is performed by the player during the period in which the symbol change is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be performed within the setting.

[Prohibition period for setting automatic button production state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can operate the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the execution period of the symbol change. The setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation enables the setting relating to the automatic button effect state to be performed while keeping an eye on the effect progression during the symbol change. ing.

  However, if the processing including the setting to the automatic button effect state and the specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting are always permitted by the operation of the player during the execution of the symbol change, the tension may be increased. Inappropriate production may reduce the entertainment interest. Therefore, during the period in which the symbol fluctuation according to the result of the big hit determination is performed, at least in the state where the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting by the operation by the player is performed. In a permissible gaming machine, it is preferable that a prohibition period in which the specific processing related to the effect is not permitted can be started between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that the prohibition period will occur, so that even if the specific effect reception period does not occur, the operation means (such as the operation button 410) does not occur during the prohibition period. ) Is required to be performed, and the player's consciousness of participation in games and effects can be appropriately maintained.

  Hereinafter, an effect example in which “setting processing to an automatic button effect state” is adopted as the “specifying process relating to the effect” will be described in detail. However, the “identifying process relating to the effect” is not limited thereto. You may make it apply as another process, such as the process of changing the production mode in which the first character plays the leading role, to another rendering mode (the production mode in which the second character plays the leading role).

  FIG. 280 shows that, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation starts in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period (specific effective period) in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”. FIG. 281 is a time chart illustrating a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed during the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 281 is an effect example when the effect is advanced in the third effect pattern; FIG. The third effect pattern may be either a hit change or a loss change, and may be the same as the above-described first effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (a), when in an effect situation that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the “third effect in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in the “pattern”. Then, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern in a state where the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is permitted), while the symbol change is being executed. .

  However, in this effect example, when the symbol variation is performed in the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears can be set”, timing te11 (prior to the occurrence of the specific effect reception period) In FIG. 280), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not permitted is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), in this prohibition period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibition period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 281 (b), an image in which a chain is attached to a padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect in which characters such as "automatic setting invalidity" are displayed is executed. Have been.

  The prohibition period thus generated is ended when a timing te12 at which a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 arrives. However, no matter how many operations (operations on the operation button 410) are performed until the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 281 (c) and (d), the above-described specific effect (prohibited image) ) Is not changed at all.

  Then, when the prohibition period ends at timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is hidden, and the process returns to the state in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. Then, after that, when the above-mentioned “sign effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 281 (e)), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 281 (f)). In the example illustrated in FIG. 281 (f), the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is set, but the effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is provided. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 280 and FIG. 281 (f), the specific effect reception period is generated in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set. The above-described automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even in the case where the “third effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears, which can be set” is executed in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 280, before the prohibited period starts. If the automatic button effect state is set to the special effect effect reception period, it is possible to set the automatic button effect state to be set in the automatic button effect state. The above-described automatic effect function can be operated at a specific timing during the reception period.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not performed at the timing when the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state, but when the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state. It may be executed when it has been maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the time has elapsed. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is operated and maintained for two seconds within a period of less than two seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. The setting to the automatic button effect state can be permitted. Therefore, the specific effect (image during prohibition) is not generated at the timing te11 at which the prohibition period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 280, but is generated in a manner delayed from the timing te11. Is desirable.

  282 and 283 are diagrams illustrating modified examples of the prohibition period (here, the prohibition period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to “specific processing related to effects such as effect settings”.

  That is, as described above, in the effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 280), the first specific time (for example, 25 No matter how many operations (operations on the operation buttons 410) are performed until this operation is completed after the elapse of (seconds), not only the setting operation is not accepted, but also the specific effect (image during prohibition) Has not been changed in any way.

  However, in the following modified example which will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the point that the prohibition period is “the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end” is described. Is the same, but when a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the generation of the prohibition period, an operation (operation button) by the player for ending the prohibition period early is performed. This is different from the above-described effect example described in detail with reference to FIG. 280 and FIG.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (a), when in an effect situation that is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, "the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol variation has started in the “3 effect patterns”. Then, in this modification as well, the effect progression as the third effect pattern in a state in which the automatic button effect state can be set (a state in which the setting operation is allowed), even during the execution period of the symbol change. Will be done.

  In addition, at timing te11 (see FIG. 282) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. 280 and FIG. 280. In addition to the start of a prohibited period that is not performed, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in the prohibited period. This is the same as the effect example described above with reference to FIG.

  However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 282, a period from the timing te11 to a timing te11a at which a second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11 (a period in which release is impossible), as shown in FIG. In this case, no matter how much operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed during the period, no change occurs in the specific effect (prohibited image) (see FIG. 283 (c)). In the period from the timing te11a to the timing te12 (the timing at which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the occurrence of the inhibition period) to the arrival of the timing (the period during which release is permitted), the operation by the player is performed. When (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, a process in which the prohibition period can be ended early can be executed.

  More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibition period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation on the operation button 410), the timing te11a comes first in the effect display device 1600. The special image that has not appeared in the period up to (the period in which cancellation is impossible) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), an image NJG indicating the remaining time as the prohibition period is displayed as the special image.

  That is, in the prohibition period according to this modification, when the timing te11a comes, such an image NJG appears (see FIG. 283 (d)), and the prohibition period cannot be released (see FIG. 283 (d)). From the timings te11 to te11a), it can be suggested that the period has been shifted to a period (timings te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, whereby the prohibition period is indicated in the remaining time. Can be functioned as an effect as to whether to end early.

  Then, when the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the inhibition period is allowed in the inhibition period, the operation button 410 is changed to the operation state. Based on this, a process for ending the prohibition period early is executed. Thus, after the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player is accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

  Here, in this modified example, when the prohibition period is terminated early by the first operation (operation on the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect change based on the first operation. Can be executed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed, and a character such as "successfully released" is displayed, thereby causing an effect change. Thereby, the specific effect (the image under prohibition) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

  Then, in the state where the prohibition period has been terminated early, if a second operation (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within a period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for two seconds), the setting processing to the automatic button effect state can be performed. In this case, on the effect display device 1600, a display (here, “auto button is being set”) appears as the effect setting is performed.

  Then, after this, when the above-mentioned “foreboding effect” or “specific operation-related effect” is performed (see FIG. 283 (f)), a specific effect receiving period in which an instruction prompting an operation appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 283 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 283 (g), the effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 is set, but the effect reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is provided. It may be set as a period.

  In this regard, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), since the specific effect reception period occurs in a state where the automatic button effect state is set, the effect within the specific effect reception period is set. If the operation by the player is not performed until the specific timing arrives, the above-described automatic effect function functions. However, even if it is the production example shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283 (g), the first operation is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the cancellation of the invalid period is permitted, and the invalid period is first set. 280 and 281 (f), unless the process is terminated early and the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not performed by performing the second operation in the state of the early end. It goes without saying that the same production situation will appear.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 280 to FIG. 283, the specific effect accepting period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” ends. The specific effect accepting period may be generated immediately after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is completed (in connection with the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period occurs while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state remains in the prohibition state. It is possible to increase the player's participation awareness when the effect reception period is not occurring.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, when an effect is received within a specific effect reception period that occurs thereafter. Any one of a plurality of effect modes having different ratios of an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation as the post-operation effect and a ratio of a large hit symbol appearing due to a symbol change in the running state may be made to appear.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
In the third state in which the effect image of FIG. 283 (e) appears, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, “padlock”) in which the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit symbol due to the symbol change in the execution state is different. , And multiple rendering modes with different degrees of destruction of images with chains attached to
When in the second state where the effect image of FIG. 283 (d) appears, when the above-mentioned third state is reached, “a specific third effect mode (a plurality of third effect modes) Of the plurality of second production modes (for example, “a plurality of production modes in which the colors of the image NJG are different”) in which the ratio (expectation) at which the “third production mode most advantageous to the player” appears differs among the aspects. Spawn one of them,
-When in the first state in which the effect images of FIGS. 283 (b) and (c) appear, when the second state is entered, the "specific second effect mode (multiple Among the first production modes (the second production mode that is most advantageous to the player) among the first production modes (for example, “a plurality of production modes with different background image colors”). , Etc.) is desirably executed. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibition period or the process in which the prohibition period ends early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested in stages by the effects related to each other. As a result, it is expected that not only can the entertainment interest during the prohibition period be appropriately maintained, but also that the prohibition period can be promptly ended and the player's participation awareness can be increased. In this sense, the first and second effects are performed as an effect in which the movable decorative body is inoperable, and only the third effect, which directly leads to the early end of the prohibition period, is movable. It is desirable to be able to execute as an effect mode of operating the decorative body. When a specific third production mode among a plurality of third production modes appears, a predetermined movable decoration body is operated, and when a third production mode different from the specific third production mode appears, a predetermined movable decoration is displayed. The body may not be moved.

  Also, for the effects illustrated in FIGS. 281 (e) and (f) and FIGS. 283 (f) and (g), for the operation button 410 of a plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like). The above-described effect (specific operation) regarding whether a period in which an operation can be accepted for an effect or a period in which an operation on another operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) can be effected occurs. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 241 to 261).

  Further, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 280 to 283, it has been described that the specific effect accepting period is always generated after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, the specific effect reception period does not necessarily have to occur, and after the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed” occurs, the symbol fluctuation stops without the specific effect reception period occurring An effect pattern that can be performed may be prepared.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 280 to 283, in the “prohibition period during which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed”, an effect pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, the super reach state) It is desirable that an effect pattern (for example, an effect pattern in which a super-reach state occurs) having a relatively higher expectation of a big hit has a higher appearance ratio than an effect pattern in which no hit occurs. That is, in this case, despite the appearance of an effect pattern with a relatively high jackpot expectation, an opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period is forcibly lost. It is possible to encourage the player to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of winning the jackpot will increase.

  However, if the setting process to the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period, it is inevitable that the interest of the player who wants the automatic button effect state to occur is reduced. As shown, when a certain period of time has elapsed, the prohibition period can be released early by the player, and when released, the setting operation by the player to the automatic button effect state is returned to a state where it is again permitted. Is desirable.

  Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target set by the operation by the player may be other operation means such as the touch panel, the sword decoration 5001, and the cross key, in addition to the operation button 410. Further, the prohibition period may be ended early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used in setting the automatic button production state, or when setting the automatic button production state, The prohibition period may be ended early by operating the operation target to be used. However, when the prohibition period is ended early by operating the operation target used in setting the automatic button production state, the operation modes (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

  As described above, in FIGS. 280 to 283, an example of the effect in which the “specific process related to the effect” employs the “setting process to the automatic button effect state” is shown. Not limited to However, regarding the “specific processing related to the effect”, regardless of which type of symbol change is performed as the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means Desirably, it can be performed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect accepting period (in the case where the above-described alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period and the second specific valid period). Is not performed, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed. Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment can operate the predetermined operation means (for example, the operation button 410) even during the execution period of the symbol change. The setting relating to the automatic button effect state can be made, and the simplification of such an operation enables the setting relating to the automatic button effect state to be performed while keeping an eye on the effect progression during the symbol change. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation operably provided between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force as the operation means. Means (here, sword decoration body 5001), and in an automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player operates the movable operation means (here, sword decoration body 5001) within the effect acceptance period. Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic production function) for causing the same change to the performance as when the operation is performed can be made executable.

  By the way, when an effect acceptance period for such movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 204 (G2), the movable operation means is moved to the original position by a predetermined driving force. There is a case in which the player is first moved to the operation position, and an operation opportunity is given to the player to operate the movable operation means in the moved state. At this operation opportunity, the effect may be received by an operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position, instead of an operation of returning from the operation position to the original position.

  However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), and accordingly, the movable operation means (here, If it is impossible to drive the sword decoration 5001) from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) cannot be given properly, and the effect reception is not performed. There is a concern that the effect cannot be generated after the corresponding operation. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), and as a result, the movable operation means (here, Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 204 (G2) occurs while the sword decoration 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the sword decoration body 5001) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. , It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) for causing the same change to the effect as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected within the effect acceptance period. .

  According to such a configuration, even if any abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the movable operation means cannot operate, the automatic operation function is used to enable the movable operation means. The effect after the operation using the operation means can appropriately appear.

  However, when some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) and the movable operation means cannot operate, the operation itself on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is performed. Due to the difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is required to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button The setting to the effect state (specific effect state) cannot be performed, and after all, the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) cannot be generated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Is generated, the same effect change as when an operation is performed on the operating means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is generated. Processing can be executed (automatic production function). Then, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001). I am trying to be.

  That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation on the general push-type operation button 410, An automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be generated. Therefore, even if an abnormality or a failure occurs in the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) during the execution period of the symbol change, the operation of the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Is performed, it is possible to appropriately generate an after-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001).

  In order to appropriately secure the operability at the time of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is required. It is important that it is provided as operating means that is basically not driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so as not to be subjected to the above-described restoration processing in the case of abnormality or failure. I can say.

  However, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) will be set.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol change. Then, a restoring process for returning the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to the normal (original position) is executed. Note that the restoration processing can be executed as the above-described processing contents. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to the original position is performed. , Is repeatedly executed with a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) as an upper limit until the original position is properly restored.

  According to such a configuration, by confirming that the restoration processing is started for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) at the start timing (or the end timing) of the symbol change, the movable operation is performed. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of abnormality or failure. Furthermore, as a result of the execution of the restoration processing, it is confirmed whether or not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position. The player determines whether the state where the abnormality / failure has occurred due to the successful restoration processing of the decorative body 5001) has been resolved, or whether the state where the abnormality / failure has occurred due to the failure of the restoration processing has been continued. You will be able to recognize. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the state in which the restoration process has failed and the abnormality / failure has occurred is continued, the operation on the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Is set, even if the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred, the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be controlled. An after-operation effect according to the effect reception can be appropriately generated.

  However, after confirming that the restoration process has failed for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if it is performed, the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that it is not possible to properly generate an after-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special effect reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) can be generated. No matter which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoring process for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) (the restoring operation (5 (The time when the second operation is repeated up to the maximum number of times (for example, three times)) and the time (here, 2 seconds) required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). The process of making the effect progress so that the special effect receiving period is not generated only after the elapse of the time is made executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the design change is started in an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation is started. Even if the means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality or failure has occurred before the special effect reception period occurs. Then, since the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be performed, the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is properly performed. Can be generated. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs while the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or failure, the special effect is produced. The same change as in the case where the operation on the movable operation means is performed within the reception period is caused for the effect.

  FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an example of such effect processing.

  As shown in FIG. 284, in the example relating to the effect processing, if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001), the movable operation means (here, Thus, a restoration process for returning the sword decoration 5001) to a normal state is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. The setting operation for the automatic button effect state requires two seconds. In addition, the special effect reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the post-operation effect according to the reception of the operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) is performed. It takes 10 seconds.

  In view of such time setting values, first, as an effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate a special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration processing), 2 seconds (setting operation), 3 seconds (special effect reception) A period longer than "30 seconds", which is obtained by adding the period (period) and 10 seconds (effect after operation), respectively, and "17" obtained by adding 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the effect is advanced so as to generate the special effect reception period at a timing later than “second”, the symbol change (in the state where the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is abnormal or faulty, occurs. It is not possible to ensure the above-described performance when the performance pattern that can generate the special performance reception period) is started.

  Therefore, in the drawing, as the plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol change times of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are respectively assigned are illustrated. However, in the effect patterns A to C to which only a time shorter than “30 seconds”, which is the additional time, is allocated, only effect development in which a special effect reception period cannot occur is executed. . On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned, a special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation starts. After that, at a timing before “17 seconds (addition time of 15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation)”), only the effect development in which the special effect reception period cannot occur can be executed. In order to secure the above-described rendition when a symbol change (an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period) is started in a state in which the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration 5001) has an abnormality or a failure. I have to.

  In the example of the effect processing, a special effect reception period can be generated in all of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned additional time “30 seconds” is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than “30 seconds” is assigned.

  However, in reality, if the special effect acceptance period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoring process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the restoring process fails. If a setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed immediately after recognizing that the effect has been performed, a special effect accepting period is generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is impossible to do it. In other words, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually requires time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If the above-mentioned time setting values are not designed on the assumption of such time values, it can be said that there is no effectiveness in the above-mentioned operation and effect.

  In this regard, the design including the time value is performed in such a manner that a plurality of operations are performed and a post-operation effect is generated each time the effect is received. Second), and a long press validity period (for example, 10 seconds) in which an effect is received and an effect is generated after the operation is performed when the operating means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time or more. In the validity period (effect accepting period), even if the operation is started after the validity period is generated, the operation or long press is performed a proper number of times and the proper time until the validity period ends. It can be performed over.

  In view of such a fact, among the above-described time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple-operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long-press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) is used. Is desirable. That is, in this case, as the effect patterns (fluctuation patterns) that can generate the special effect reception period, “15 seconds (restoration processing)”, “8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)”, A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds" obtained by adding "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (effect after operation)", respectively, and "15 seconds" (Restoration processing) "and" 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) "are added. A special effect reception period is generated at a timing later than" 23 seconds "or" 25 seconds ". Thus, the effect is advanced, and only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as an effect pattern that satisfies the condition.

  Note that the multiple operation validity period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press validity period (for example, 10 seconds) are not necessarily generated in the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. May be generated in another effect pattern. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, Is to set the length of the validity period on the side of occurrence in place of 2 seconds (setting operation). If the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple-operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long-press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), the valid periods are set. It is desirable to set the long side of in place of 2 seconds (setting operation).

  Also, in the gaming state in which the time-saving function is enabled, since it is required that the symbol fluctuations are successively digested in a shorter time, in the gaming state in which the time-saving function is enabled, each of the above-described time settings is set. May not necessarily be designed. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period may occur during the period in which the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001). Therefore, even while the restoration process is being performed on the movable operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001), the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means while the restoration processing is being performed on the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001). Can be executed, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process and the post-operation effect on the movable operation means (the sword decoration body 5001 in this case) are performed in parallel can be realized. Note that this processing is not limited to the game state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to a game state in which the time saving function is not enabled. Will not be performed.

  In the example of the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 284, the effect using the movable operation unit may be executed as any of the effects illustrated in FIGS. 190 to 261. . When a specific operation-related effect is performed, the “effect using movable operation means” shown in the figure is realized as an effect that sequentially performs a specific operation-related effect, a special effect reception period, and a post-operation effect. The Rukoto.

  Also, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is controlled only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, an effect may be received for the movable operation means within the special effect reception period even if no operation is performed, and the post-operation effect may appear. In addition, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, at least during the change of the symbol in the normal game state, there is an operation opportunity for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). A special effect reception period to be given does not occur, but an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (operation button 410 in this case) which is not a target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of an abnormality or a failure is generated. Is possible. The effect accepting period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (in this case, the operation button 410) which is not a target of the above-described restoration processing in the case of an abnormality or a failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (a specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the design relating to each of the above-mentioned time settings may be performed. It is possible to ensure the above-described performance when a performance pattern that can generate a special performance reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or a failure has occurred.

  In the example of the effect processing, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. May not necessarily be performed by the operation of the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or the setting itself to the automatic button production state is not performed, and the automatic production function always functions. It may be provided as a game machine that can be used.

[Post-operation production suggesting the automatically accepted operation target]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the first reception effect (effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) according to satisfaction of a predetermined effect condition is executed. Even if the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed during the period, when a predetermined timing within the period in which the first reception effect is executed arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. After the same operation as above, the effect is executed. Further, an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed during a period in which the second reception effect (an effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) according to the establishment of the production condition different from the predetermined production condition is performed. Similarly, when a predetermined timing within the period in which the second reception effect is executed arrives, an effect reception is automatically generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed is performed. Is to be executed. Therefore, when the reception effect occurs, even if the operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to which the operation opportunity is not given is erroneously operated, the operation opportunity is lost during the operation, and the operation is performed. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to confirm the post-production. The “predetermined production condition” and the “production condition different from the predetermined production condition” can be separately established as the result of the production determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination.

  However, if an effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know due to “looking aside” or the like, and a post-operation effect in accordance with the effect reception may be executed, the post-operation effect becomes an operation target. This occurs when the player is not involved in any operating means (for example, operating button 410). That is, in this case, since the player side cannot recognize which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is the post-operation effect that occurs due to the operation on the first decoration effect and the second reception effect. If the degree of expectation is different, there is a concern that the player cannot recognize it and the entertainment interest of the game decreases.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the symbol changes, the ratio at which the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (the ratio at which the first reception effect is executed) is determined by the different effect condition. Judgments relating to various effects (effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination) are performed so as to be higher than the satisfied ratio (the ratio at which the second reception effect is executed), and based on the result of the determination, the symbol variation within the symbol variation is determined. The control for the production is performed. Thereby, even when the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to predict that it is relatively likely that the first reception effect has been executed. Become.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception is automatically generated, the “image suggesting the type of operation target (first image 1 is equivalent to the button image BTG, and the second reception effect is equivalent to the sword decoration image SYG). After the operation based on the reception, the effect is started. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the post-operation effect is executed while the “image indicating the type of the operation target” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the user from being unable to recognize which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is the post-operation effect that has occurred due to the operation.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, color and transmittance) and the display position of the “image suggesting the type of the operation target” may be the same before and after the effect after the operation occurs. However, it may be different, and the point is that the type of the operation means to be operated is represented as a display on the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect is started after the operation. I just need. Further, when the post-operation effect is generated based on the reception of the effect generated by the operation by the player, the “image indicating the type of the operation target” may be hidden when the post-operation effect is generated. As in the case where the above-described effect reception is automatically generated, the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player is started while the “image indicating the type of the operation target” is not displayed and is maintained in the display state. You may do so. However, considering the simplicity of the design and the processing load, regardless of whether the effect reception is automatically generated or not, the "image suggesting the type of operation target" is not displayed and is maintained as a display state. Therefore, it is desirable to start the post-operation effect based on the operation by the player.

  FIG. 285 shows an example of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of starting the effect after the operation while the “image suggesting the type of operation target” is not displayed and maintained as a display state when the effect reception is automatically generated. It is a time chart shown. FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect display appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the effect pattern that is effected in the manner illustrated in FIG. 285 is executed. In the effect example, description will be given assuming that the effect reception can be automatically generated.

  That is, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the specific effect pattern in which the period of the timings tf1 to tf3 in the symbol change execution period can be set as the “effect accepting period in which effect accepting (operation) is permitted”. 286 is started based on the result of the big hit determination, as shown in FIG. 286 (a), the effect display device 1600 first performs a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol).

  In this specific effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), prior to the arrival of the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) in the symbol change execution period, the effect acceptance (operation) is to be accepted soon. As the suggested indication effect, a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246 (a specific operation-related effect illustrated separately from this) may be performed. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 243 to 246, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. , A common display effect is performed, and while the common display effect is performed, which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity is kept secret. . However, when the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low degree of expectation. An effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state where the sword decoration 5001 should be operated appears as the effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated as the second effect result having a relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the operation buttons 410 having a low degree and the sword decoration 5001 having a relatively high degree of expectation is given an operation opportunity is indicated.

  FIG. 286 (c) shows the result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b). As a result, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285), the operation is performed as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation. An effect state indicating that the button 410 is in a state to be operated appears, and the effect state in which the first reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started (based on the result of the big hit determination). The first effect condition (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 286 (d) described later appears) or the second effect condition (an effect in which an effect result shown in FIG. 286 (e) described later appears) in the effect determination to be performed. And the effect state) when the pattern is satisfied.

  In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation for the operation button 410 is prompted. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which an effect can be accepted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated during the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is permitted, and the predetermined timing (here, Here, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  That is, in this case, the same change as in the case where the effect is received by the operation on the operation button 410 within the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set to allow the effect reception is caused to occur in the effect. Becomes Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, based on the result of the effect, "the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) does not operate, and a chance !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600. 286 (d)) or “Specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 286 (e)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  However, in any case where the post-operation effect is executed, the post-operation effect is started in a state where the mimic image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not displayed and is maintained. Therefore, even if an effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, the effect after the operation is performed in accordance with the "effect reception for the operation button 410" (relative expectation degree). Can be recognized after the operation on the lower side.

  Note that, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 285, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the effect reception is automatically terminated at the timing tf2 when the effect reception is automatically generated, as shown in FIG. It will be. After this, while the effect reception is not allowed, the effect is started after the operation with the mimic image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The mimic image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing tf5 at which the effect is ended after the operation arrives.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from the start of the effect after the operation to the end of the effect, a mimic image of the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) which has been set as the operation target is displayed. A period (timing tf2 to tf4) and a period in which the same image is not displayed (timing tf4 to tf5) appear. Therefore, even if the effect is started after the operation while the mimic image imitating the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) which is the operation target is displayed, the mimic image is not displayed. It is expected that the feeling of tension caused by having to confirm the effect after the operation before the operation is properly maintained.

  In this effect example, the period between the timings tf2 and tf3 and the period between the timings tf3 and tf4 are set to the same length. According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is automatically generated, when the time that is twice the “remaining time indicated by the bar display” elapses, the operation means (here, the operation button 410), it is possible to recognize that the mimic image imitating is hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the mimic image from being overlooked. It is expected to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment when the game is played. In this case, the bar display may not be hidden when the effect reception is automatically generated, but may be continuously displayed.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) has been performed, the effect state is different from the effect state shown in FIG. 286 (c). 287 (f) (the third effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 287 (g) described later appears) in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination) or the fourth effect condition. An effect condition (an effect situation in which an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 287 (h) to be described later appears) may appear.

  Also in this effect situation (FIG. 287 (f)), as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which the effect acceptance is allowed) appears to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. At this time, the point that the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state is also the same as the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c).

  However, in the effect state shown in FIG. 287 (f), the button image BTG (a simulation image imitating the operation button 410) is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode in which a flame is worn). 286 (c), the rate at which the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation (relative degree of expectation as the post-operation effect) than in the normal mode (in this case, the mode in which the flame is not collected) that appeared in the effect situation shown in FIG. It is suggested that a high production result (in this case, a ratio at which “extreme heat !!” appears) is high.

  Also, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated during a period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the effect reception is permitted, and a predetermined timing (here, Here, it is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at the timing tf2 (see FIG. 285).

  In this regard, even when the effect reception is automatically generated when the button image BTG is in the effect state displayed in the specific mode, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), the button image BTG is in the normal mode. As in the above-described case where the effect reception is automatically generated in the displayed effect state (FIGS. 286 (d) and (e)), the "specific decorative member SDY (draft) does not operate and the effect display device is displayed. At 1600, a low expectation mode effect in which a chance is displayed (see FIG. 287 (g)) ”or“ Specific decorative member SDY (robin) is activated, and heat is displayed on effect display device 1600. The displayed high expectation mode effect (see FIG. 287 (h)) "is executed as an effect after operation (the same change as when an effect is accepted by an operation on the operation button 410).

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (g) and (h), regardless of the manner in which the post-operation effect is executed, the simulation image imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden, and The post-operation effect is started while this is displayed in a specific mode (here, a mode of wearing a flame). Thereby, even if the effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, not only that the effect after the operation is performed in accordance with the “effect reception for the operation button 410”, but also a specific mode of high expectation It is possible to recognize that the button image BTG has been displayed (here, in a mode of wearing a flame).

  That is, in this effect example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the post-operation effect, the operation is performed while the mimic image of the operation button 410 is displayed in the specific mode. When the post-effect is started (for example, see FIG. 287 (g)), the post-operation is started while the mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode (for example, (See FIG. 286 (d).) Since the rate of appearance of the big hit symbols is higher than that of FIG. 286 (d), it is possible to recognize such a difference in the effect even after the effect is started after the operation, so that the entertainment interest is suitable. Will be expected to maintain.

  Also in this effect example, the timing at which the period during which the effect is accepted, the timing at which the simulation image (specific mode) imitating the operation button 410 is hidden, and the period between timings tf2 and tf3 are set. The point that the period between the timings tf3 and tf4 is set to the same length is as shown in FIG. 285, and is the same as the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). is there.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, at the timing tf1 (see FIG. 285) after the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) has been performed, the timing is shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f). In any of the effect situations, the effect condition shown in FIG. 287 (i) (fifth effect condition (effect result shown in FIG. 287 (j) to be described later) appears in the effect judgment performed based on the result of the big hit judgment. Effect pattern) or the sixth effect condition (an effect state in which an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 287 (k) described later appears) is presented.

  In this effect situation (FIG. 287 (i)), as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG (a simulated image of the sword decoration 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area. At the same time, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, a character display such as “put the sword”, an arrow display in the lower right direction, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which effect reception is allowed) Appears. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 to which the operation opportunity is to be given moves to the operation position, whereby the operation to the original position by the player is allowed.

  Also in this production example, the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) that is the operation target is operated during the period (FIG. 285: timings tf1 to tf3) set so that the production reception is permitted. Instead, it is assumed that the automatic rendering function for the sword decoration 5001 is activated at a predetermined timing (here, timing tf2 (see FIG. 285)) within the valid period.

  In this regard, also in the case where the effect reception is automatically generated while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the effect condition in which the button image BTG is displayed as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k). 286 (d), (e) or FIGS. 287 (g), (h)) in which the effect is automatically received when the special decoration member SDY (draft material) operates. In the effect display device 1600, a low-expected mode effect in which a chance is displayed (see FIG. 287 (j)) ”or the“ specific decorative member SDY (draft) ”operates, and the effect display device 1600 displays The high expected mode effect (see FIG. 287 (k)) in which "Intense heat!" Is displayed is performed as the effect after the operation (the same change as when the effect is accepted by the operation on the sword decoration 5001). Has become.

  However, here, as shown in FIGS. 287 (j) and (k), the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed, regardless of the manner in which the post-operation effect is executed. The production is started after the operation without changing the display. Thereby, even if an effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is performed in accordance with the "effect reception for the sword decoration 5001". Become.

  That is, in this effect example, even if the same effect mode (for example, chance!) Appears as the effect after the operation, the operation is performed while the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed. When the post-effect is started (for example, see FIG. 287 (j)), the post-operation effect is started while a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode or a specific mode. (See, for example, FIG. 286 (d) and FIG. 287 (g)), the rate of appearance of the big hit symbols is higher, so that it is expected that the gaming entertainment can be suitably maintained. .

  Also in this effect example, the timing when the period in which the effect is accepted is ended, the timing when the mimic image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001 is hidden, the timing tf2 to tf3. 285 and the period from timing tf3 to tf4 are set to the same length, as shown in FIG. 285, and in the case of the example described above with reference to FIGS. 286 (c) to (e). Is the same as

  According to the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation object suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectation degrees. It is possible to simultaneously check both the mode of the image and the mode of the post-operation effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the above-described effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 285 to 287, the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 286 (c) appears, the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 287 (f) appears, and FIG. 287 (i). The same effect content as the effect after the operation is made to appear when the effect situation shown in FIG. However, instead of this, the effect situation shown in FIG. 286 (c) and the effect situation shown in FIG. 287 (f) are (a situation where a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs). , The same post-operation effect is generated, but in the effect condition shown in FIG. 287 (i), a different operation is performed (this is a condition in which a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001). A post-effect (for example, an after-operation effect shown in FIG. 269) may be generated. Further, in the effect status shown in FIG. 286 (c), the effect condition shown in FIG. 287 (f), and the effect condition shown in FIG. You may make it appear. When these alternatives are adopted, the indication effect shown in FIG. 286 (b) may not always be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 285 to 287, after executing the “forecast effect (here, a specific operation-related effect) illustrated in FIG. 286 (b)” indicating that a reception effect will occur soon, “Reception effect where operation opportunity is given to operation button 410 (effect situation shown in FIGS. 286 (c) and 287 (f))” and “operation opportunity is given to sword decoration 5001” The reception effect (the effect status shown in FIG. 287 (i)) "is generated, but the reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 287 (i)). It is not always necessary to generate the indicated production situation). That is, in this case, after a precursor effect indicating that a reception effect will occur soon is executed, at timing tf1, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is shown in FIG. 286 (c). 287 will be displayed. However, even in such a case, the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect is started after the operation. Depending on whether the simulated image is displayed in a normal mode or in a specific mode with a high degree of expectation (here, a mode of wearing a flame), the degree of expectation for the post-operation effect differs. Therefore, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  It should be noted that in this case, it is desirable that the contents of the indication effect are executed as those which cannot appear in the indication effect when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Further, there is a common precursor between a case where the mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode and a case where the mimic image is displayed in a specific mode having high expectation (here, a mode of wearing a flame). It is desirable to execute the effect, and as a result, the effect is advanced so that a mimic image imitating the operation button 410 appears in a normal mode or a specific mode.

  Also, a mimic image of the operation button 410 is displayed in one of three or more modes including a normal mode and a specific mode, and the degree of expectation differs depending on which of these modes is displayed. You may do so. However, in the above-described effect example, even if a mimic image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in any of these modes at the timing tf1, the post-operation effect is started while the mimic image mode is displayed. It will be.

  Further, after the appearance of the specific precursor effect, “the effect condition shown in FIG. 286 (c)”, “the effect condition shown in FIG. 287 (f)”, and “the effect condition shown in FIG. 286 (c)” Similarly to the above, on the effect display device 1600, a mimic image imitating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode. However, when there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is not activated and the effect after operation May not be performed (not shown). " That is, in this case, when a reception effect in which a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode occurs, it is determined whether the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled when there is no operation by the player. Since it becomes possible to make it difficult, it is expected that a feeling of tension when a reception effect occurs (a feeling of tension as to whether or not the player should operate by himself and start the operation after the operation) is suitably maintained. Become so. On the other hand, when a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in a specific mode, even if there is no operation by the player, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled and the effect after the operation always occurs. As a result, the fact that the degree of expectation is high is suggested, and the entertainment interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

  It should be noted that, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is imitated in the effect display device 1600, not in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 286 (c), but in the effect condition illustrated in FIG. 286 (c). When the mimic image is displayed in a normal mode, but an automatic production function for the operation button 410 is not activated when no operation is performed by the player, and a production situation (not shown) in which the production is not executed after the operation is generated. Means that if the operation on the operation button 410 is not performed before the end of the effect reception period, the effect after the operation is not executed. However, also in this case, when the effect reception period is over and the effect reception is in an unacceptable effect, the image imitating the operation button 410 should not be hidden, and should be displayed in the normal mode. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, despite the occurrence of a reception effect in which a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in a normal mode, an effect is produced in which the operation is not performed by the player and the post-operation effect is not executed. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation has ended, and when a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 is displayed in the normal mode in the next reception effect, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. In particular, it is expected that the player is encouraged to operate without excessive expectations.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, the display mode of the mimic image simulating the operation button 410 or the mimic image simulating the sword decoration 5001 is changed. The effect is started after the operation in a state where these mimic images are displayed in the changed display mode. However, the mimicking the operation button 410 in the display mode and display position during the effect accepting period is performed. The effect may be started after the operation in a state where an image or a mimic image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed.

  The post-operation effect that is started while the mimic image imitating the operation button 410 or the mimic image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is displayed is a display effect on the effect display device 1600 and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be any one of an effect, an effect by sound, and a movable effect by a decorative accessory, or an appropriate combination of these effects. As will be described later, a first post-operation effect that is started while a mimic image imitating the operation button 410 or a mimic image imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and a mimic image or sword decoration imitating the operation button 410 The second post-operation effect started after timing tf4 at which the mimic image imitating the body 5001 is hidden may be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, the operation is performed while displaying the mock image imitating the operation button 410 or the mock image imitating the sword decoration 5001. Later production was started. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the effect is started after the operation while displaying the mimic image of the operation button 410 or the mimic image of the sword decoration 5001. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be executed in the same process.

  In the above-described effect example shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, similarly to the effect example described later, a mimic image simulating the operation button 410 and a mimic image simulating the sword decoration 5001 are dynamically displayed. Alternatively, the post-operation effect may be started in a state where the dynamic display is maintained.

  In addition, when a precursor effect indicating that the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is about to occur is generated, and then the reception effect shown in FIG. 286 (c) is executed, the operation button 410 is also pressed. The effect may be started after the operation while the simulated image is displayed.

[Direction after operation that makes it difficult to recognize the timing of automatic reception]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic staging function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the validity period in which the staging is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, if the player wishes to generate an after-operation effect in a state where such an “auto-effect function” can be activated, a predetermined effect within the period during which the reception effect is performed Must be operated before the specified timing (timing at which the automatic production function is activated), and if the player himself tries to operate it, the validity period as the reception production is correspondingly It will be substantially shortened. Therefore, in the situation where such a reception effect is being executed, it is not possible to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, or to display an image suggesting the elapsed time (remaining time) since the validity period has occurred. If there is a case where confirmation is performed one by one, by the time the player himself tries to operate it, the effect reception may be automatically generated, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a model image simulating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) which is a target of effect reception is replaced with a plurality of model images (for example, the operation button 410). "How to move a specific operation means" by displaying as a moving image by sequentially displaying a plurality of mock-up images in which the operation states (operation states) are different from each other The method of operation is suggested. When the mimic image is displayed as a moving image in this manner, a predetermined predetermined mimic image of a plurality of mimic images is displayed as an image to be displayed first, and thereafter, a plurality of mimic images are displayed in a predetermined order. By displaying the mock-up images sequentially, it is only necessary to see how far the display of the moving image has progressed, and the elapsed time since the specific reception effect (valid period) has occurred Recognition is also possible.

  In other words, in this case, the operation method of "How to move the specific operation means" and the specific reception effect are executed only by looking at the mimic image simulating the specific operation means which is the target of the effect reception. It is possible to simultaneously recognize the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period (valid period). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required for the player to understand the operation method and the remaining time after thinking of operating himself, so that the operation can be operated before the effect reception is automatically generated. It is expected to encourage.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the process of automatically generating the effect reception can be executed at a timing after half of the period during the specific reception effect is executed. In this case, the user is prompted to perform the operation before the effect reception is automatically generated.

  However, even if these processes are performed, it is not possible to completely prevent a situation in which the effect reception is automatically generated before the player himself operates. Therefore, it can be said that it is more important to take measures to make it difficult for the gaming interest to decrease even if the situation occurs. In the case where the countermeasure is taken, the above-described process of “prompting the user to be able to perform an operation before the effect reception is automatically generated” may not necessarily be performed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, even when the effect reception is automatically generated, the process of displaying the mimic image as a moving image is continued without being stopped. In other words, by continuously displaying the mimic image as a moving image even after the effect reception is automatically generated and the operation is started after the operation, a predetermined time (moving image) after the effect reception is automatically generated. (While the image is continued), it is difficult to recognize that the effect has started after the operation, and the operation by the player is performed while the mimic image as the moving image is continuously displayed. For example, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect was started after the operation by the operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the operation by the player is performed after the "automatic generation of effect reception", it is as if the effect change occurred due to the operation. In order to give a good impression, the post-operation effect is executed as a staged effect. As a result, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect change after the second stage was caused by the operation by the player, and the "automatic generation of effect reception" deprives the player of the operation opportunity. It is expected that it will be difficult to give a good impression.

  FIG. 288 shows a simulation image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating a specific operation means (sword decoration body 5001 in this case) targeted for effect reception when a specific reception effect is generated. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying an image (here, a plurality of mimic images in which the operation state (operation state) of the sword decoration body 5001 is depicted differently) as a moving image by sequentially displaying the images. is there.

  Now, assuming that a specific reception effect is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and a period in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the specific operation means (here, First, a sword decoration image SYGa (predetermined simulated image) shown in FIG. 288 (a) is displayed as a "first displayed image" as a simulation image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001). At this time, a bar display indicating the remaining time in which the effect reception is allowed is also displayed in a state where the gauge is full.

  Here, the sword decoration image SYGa shown in FIG. 288 (a) is a moving image of a “simulated image of the sword decoration body 5001” when a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. In displaying the image, the image is always selected as the “first displayed image”. That is, the state in which the bar display of “Gauge full” is displayed within the period in which the effect reception is allowed may be said to be the state in which the sword decoration image SYGa is displayed, and these images correspond to each other. It can be said that.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) to (f), the bar display indicating the remaining time is described as a moving image whose gauge amount decreases with time (a plurality of gauges having different gauge remaining amounts). The sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a moving image in which the amount of operation (the amount of operation) increases with time. The images SYGb to SYGf) are displayed in a predetermined order.

  According to such a configuration, only by looking at the movement of the sword decoration image SYG that appears when a specific reception effect occurs, an operation method of “how to operate the sword decoration body 5001” and It is possible to recognize both the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period during which the effect is accepted (which can be grasped based on the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). Become like Therefore, it is expected that it is unlikely that the timing at which the effect reception automatically occurs before the operation by the player is performed even though the player himself tries to operate the operation. become.

  Here, in the specific reception effect, the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) in the period in which the effect reception is permitted (the timing after half of the period during the specific reception effect is executed) ), The production reception is automatically generated. Therefore, when the player intends to operate the sword decoration body 5001, it is required to operate the sword decoration body 5001 until the moving image as the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the “sword decoration image SYGd”. Becomes

  By the way, if it is decided to execute a specific reception effect so that the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d) even if there is no operation by the player, “sword decoration image SYGe” and The “sword decoration image SYGf” can be said to be an image that cannot be displayed irrespective of whether or not the player has performed an operation. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing shown in FIG. 288 (d), the “sword decoration image SYGe” or the “sword decoration image SYGf” Is intentionally displayed, which will be described later.

  289 to 291 show that a specific reception effect in which a mimic image imitating the sword decoration 5001 is dynamically displayed has occurred, but the operation by the player has not yet been performed until the timing at which the effect reception automatically occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the effect which appears when it is not in time. In the effect example, description will be given assuming that the effect reception can be automatically generated.

  FIG. 289 (a) shows an effect in which the number of reservations is 2 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Indicates the situation.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows that the specific moving image TDG is displayed based on the fact that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 289 (a). This shows the effect status that has been started to be displayed. Note that the “predetermined effect condition” includes, for example, storing a constant value of scores accumulated in the effect.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect state of generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 is set in a state of waiting for execution (up to three times). ) It is possible to execute the process of waiting. In this regard, in FIG. 289 (b), in the effect display device 1600, the display of “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is started within the frame of the first coin, and the “sword stock” is displayed. The display state in which the count value is changed from “0” to “1” is performed, so that “the effect mode of generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” is in the effect state in which the execution state is newly awaited. Is suggested.

  Here, the specific moving image TDG according to this effect example is to be displayed as a moving image by sequentially displaying the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e) in a frame in the shape of a coin. Has become. Then, after the “image shown in FIG. 255 (b)” is displayed and the images shown in “FIG. 255 (e)” are sequentially displayed, a series of these displays (FIG. 255 (b) to ( e)) is repeatedly performed by loop processing.

  FIG. 289 (c) shows that a predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied again after the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” shown in FIG. 289 (b) starts to be displayed. Based on the above, an effect state in which a new “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” different from the “specific moving image TDG (specific moving image TDG)” already started to be displayed is started. Is shown.

  That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the “state of effect for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” is set to the execution waiting state (maximum). It is possible to execute processing for waiting (up to three times). In this regard, in FIG. 289 (c), in the effect display device 1600 in which “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed in a frame in which the first coin is formed, the second coin is displayed. In the frame in which “” is displayed, the “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” is newly displayed and the count value of “sword stock” is changed from “1” to “2”. It is suggested that the two “states of producing an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” are in an effect state of waiting for execution.

  Here, in this production example, when newly displaying “specific moving image TDGb (specific moving image TDG)” in the frame in which the second coin is formed, the frame in which the first coin is formed Is performed in synchronization with the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” that is already being displayed in the display. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment performs a process of updating the timer value of the predetermined timer for the specific moving image TDG at predetermined time intervals. , The image corresponding to the timer value (any of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to 255 (e)) is selectively displayed as the “first displayed image”.

  For example, assuming that the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated every predetermined time within the range of “1” to “4”, if the above-referenced timer value is “1”, FIG. ) Is selectively displayed as the “first displayed image”, and when the timer value referred to above is “2”, the image illustrated in FIG. 255 (c) is displayed as the “first displayed image”. 255. If the timer value referred to above is "3", the image shown in FIG. 255 (d) is selectively displayed as "first displayed image". If the referenced timer value is “4”, the image shown in FIG. 255 (e) is selectively displayed as “the image to be displayed first”. After the new display of the specific moving image TDG is thus started, every time the timer value of the predetermined timer is updated, an image corresponding to the updated timer value is newly set as “specific moving image TDG”. The image is displayed, and the image that has been displayed is hidden. By performing such processing on the specific moving image TDGb in the first coin and the specific moving image TDGb in the second coin, respectively, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb is displayed as moving images synchronized with each other regardless of their display start timings (in FIG. 289 (c), both the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed in FIG. As the image shown). The method of displaying the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb in synchronization with each other is not limited thereto, and another method may be employed.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment determines that the specific timer TDG is not displayed at all for the update processing for the predetermined timer at every predetermined time (for example, the state shown in FIG. 289 (a)). In addition to the above, the processing is also performed in the case where the symbol change is not performed), so that the “specific moving image TDGa (specific moving image TDG)” is displayed in the frame of the first coin. When the display is started, which one of the images shown in FIGS. 255 (b) to (e) is selected as the “image to be displayed first” is changed in each case, and this is determined indefinitely ( The “first displayed image” changes according to the timing at which the predetermined effect condition is satisfied). That is, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, during the period in which a specific reception effect is performed, the “image displayed first” is a predetermined “moving image as the sword decoration image SYG”. (FIGS. 288 (a)-(f)) "and" moving images as specific moving images TDG (FIGS. 255 (b)-(e)) "in which the" first displayed image "is undefined. Are displayed.

  After the specific moving image TDGb is newly displayed, the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are displayed and developed as moving image displays synchronized with each other, as shown in FIG. 289 (d). .

  Then, while the specific moving image TDGa and the specific moving image TDGb are being displayed as a moving image display synchronized with each other, the above-mentioned execution waiting state “the production mode of generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” Is fulfilled (second production condition), the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment displays in the first coin as shown in FIG. 289 (e). By performing a display in which an effect operation (predetermined motion) such as a coin toss appears on the “specific moving image TDGa”, it is suggested that “an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” has been started. I am trying to do it. Also, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a process of changing the “sword stock 2” displayed so far to “stock is being released”, and a “specific moving image TDGa” with respect to the background image. An effect change (effect) associated with the appearance of the effect operation (predetermined movement) is generated.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when an effect operation (predetermined movement) such as a coin toss appears in the “specific moving image TDGa”, as shown in FIG. 289 (f), the “specific moving image TDGa” Is performed without returning to the original position, and the “rendering mode of generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” is executed, whereby the player can display the specific moving image TDGa. Gaze is encouraged. Note that, here, as an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001, first, a display such as “chance of sword removal” and “I want to put a sword” are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 to the operation position is performed.

  After that, the specific moving image TDGa that has performed the predetermined movement will continue to be displayed from before the movement while keeping the moving state. Therefore, even when the specific moving image TDGa is moved, the specific moving image TDGa is displayed as a moving image synchronized with the specific moving image TDGb displayed in the second coin. The specific moving image TDGa according to this embodiment is displayed in a different state from the state before the movement (here, a state in which the specific moving image TDGa is slightly laterally rotated). Is in a state in which an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity has been started.

  Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the “presentation mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001”, as shown in FIG. Is given, a specific reception effect is started. In the specific reception effect, a mimic image of the sword decoration body 5001 is dynamically displayed in the form shown in FIG. 288, whereby a sword decoration image appearing when a specific reception effect occurs. Just by looking at the movement of the SYG, an operation method of "how to operate the sword decoration body 5001" and an elapsed time (a sword decoration image SYGa) As described above, it is possible to recognize both the starting point and the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG.

  Therefore, also in this effect example, if a valid period corresponding to a specific reception effect occurs at the timing shown in FIG. 290 (h) and (i) (corresponding to FIGS. 288 (b) and (c)) after the “bar display indicating remaining time allowed” is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 288 (a), respectively. In such a manner, the display is progressed respectively.

  However, in this effect example, it is assumed that no operation is performed by the player within the valid period corresponding to the specific reception effect, and is shown in FIG. 290 (j) (corresponding to FIG. 288 (d)). When the timing comes, an effect reception is generated by the automatic effect function, and after the operation according to the effect reception, the effect is started.

  In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment displays the mimic image (sword decoration image SYG) as a moving image even when the effect reception is automatically generated within the specific reception effect as described above. The processing is to be continued without stopping. That is, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), the mimic image (sword decoration image) as a moving image after the effect reception is automatically generated and the effect is started after the operation is started. SYG) is continuously displayed as it is, thereby recognizing that the effect has been started after the operation for a predetermined time (while the moving image is continued) after the effect is automatically received. If the operation is performed by the player while the sword decoration image SYG is continuously displayed (within the periods shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)). By this operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the effect was started after the operation.

  Further, in this effect example, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued at least (within the period shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)), after the operation. Regardless of whether the first effect result (FIG. 290 (m)) and the second effect result (FIG. 290 (n)) having different expectations are produced, the same (common) effect mode (the expectation degree is different) is obtained. (A mode not suggested) appears (first stage effect change). Here, as shown in FIG. 290 (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l), the sword decoration 5001 is set to “the mode in which the aura member 5040 appears” as the “same effect mode”. The effect corresponding to the aura member is also displayed on the sword decoration image SYG displayed on the display device 1600.

  Then, after the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, the “special decorative member SDY (draft) and the effect are produced. The display device 1600 displays a low expectation mode effect in which a chance !! is displayed (see FIG. 291 (m)), or the "special decorative member SDY (draft)" operates and the effect display device 1600 heats up! Is displayed (see FIG. 291 (n)) "is further executed as the post-operation effect (second-stage effect change). Further, while the degree of expectation is suggested by the post-operation effect, drive control for returning the sword decoration 5001 and the aura member 5040 to the original positions is performed.

  According to the configuration in which the post-operation effect is executed as a staged effect in this manner, the operation by the player corresponds to “automatic generation of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d))”). Even if it is not in time, when the display is delayed while the dynamic display as the sword decoration image SYG is continued (until the timing shown in FIG. 290 (l) (FIG. 288 (f))). Then, since the post-operation effect (second-stage effect change) is performed in a manner in which the degree of expectation is suggested, the user has the impression that the effect change has occurred due to the operation. It is expected that it is difficult to give the impression that the operation opportunity by the player has been robbed by the "automatic generation of effect reception".

  In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, in a specific reception effect (FIGS. 290 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 291 (k) and (l)), the validity period corresponding to the reception effect is An image to be displayed at the time of starting (an image to be displayed first) is a predetermined “moving image as a sword decoration image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f)”), and the image is undefined. Each time, a different “moving image as the specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))” is displayed. That is, the progress in the “moving image as the specific moving image TDG (FIGS. 255 (b) to (e))” is not the “moving image as the sword decoration image SYG (FIGS. 288 (a) to (f))”. May be recognized by the player side, a situation may occur in which the elapsed time from the start of the specific reception effect may be erroneously recognized, but according to the above configuration, the specific reception effect As a result of misrecognizing the elapsed time from the start of the game, a situation occurs in which the operation by the player cannot be made in time for “automatic generation of effect reception (timing shown in FIG. 290 (j) (FIG. 288 (d))”). Even in this case, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

  Incidentally, the specific reception effect described above with reference to FIGS. 290 and 291 is also basically effected in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at the timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (g) appears, and at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, the effect situation shown in FIG. 290 (j) appears. Has become. However, at the timing tf2 shown in FIG. 285, only the post-operation effect that does not indicate the expected degree is executed, and the timing tf4 shown in FIG. 285 at which the moving image continued as the sword decoration image SYG is hidden. It can be said that this is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Note that in this effect example, the above-described another example of FIG. 285 may be applied.

  Also, in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated to when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends to the time when the moving image is not displayed may be set as the same length of time. desirable.

  In addition, a plurality of modes are prepared as the specific moving image TDG, and a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as a mimic image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) that simulates an operation means to be operated. Then, when the predetermined effect condition (first effect condition) is satisfied, it is determined which of the plurality of modes is to be displayed as the specific moving image TDG, and the specific moving image TDG is displayed in any of these modes. Depending on whether it is performed, a mode having a high expectation may easily appear as the mimic image (here, the sword decoration image SYG).

  In the above-described effect example, the case where the second effect condition is satisfied after the two specific moving images TDG are displayed and the “effect effect of generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” is executed. However, the second effect condition may be satisfied in a state where only one specific moving image TDG is displayed. In addition, even when the second effect condition is satisfied (when the specific motion image TDG shows a predetermined motion), the “effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” is not necessarily performed. It may not be executed. For example, any one of a plurality of effect modes including “an effect mode for generating an operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001” may be selectively executed. Further, in the above-described effect example, such a specific moving image TDG may not necessarily be displayed, and a specific reception effect may be started when a predetermined timing comes during a symbol effect. It may be.

  Although the “simulated image (here, sword decoration image SYG)” and the “bar display having the same length” are displayed within the validity period in which the effect reception is permitted, the effect reception is permitted. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different lengths of validity periods may be executed. That is, in this case, the speed at which the gauge amount decreases in accordance with the length of the validity period is varied for “bar display”, but for the “simulated image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)”, Regardless of which one of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the operation method regarding “how to operate the operation target (in this case, the sword decoration 5001)” and And the elapsed time from the occurrence of the period during which the effect is accepted (which can be grasped based on the movement amount (operation amount) of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa). It is desirable that display progress as a moving image be performed in the same manner so as to be possible. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed, the “simulated image (here, sword decoration) Image SYG) ", it is possible to ascertain the elapsed time from the acceptance of the effect. Then, based on the elapsed time grasped in this way, by checking whether the remaining gauge amount of the bar display is large or small, it is possible to determine which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed. Can be recognized. That is, usually, the first reception effect and the second reception effect often have different degrees of expectation. Therefore, by recognizing the type of the reception effect, the post-operation effect is started. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

  In the case where the first reception effect and the second reception effect described above are prepared, it is desirable to set the times from the occurrence of the effective period to the automatic generation of the effect reception being different from each other. When the different times are set as described above, the time until the effect reception is automatically generated is erroneously recognized, and as a result, a situation in which the player himself tries to operate but cannot do so in time may occur. However, according to the rendering example in which the dynamic display using the “simulated image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” is continued or the rendering is performed stepwise after the operation, such a situation may occur. Also, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is appropriately suppressed.

  In the above-described effect example, when a mimic image (here, a sword decoration image SYG) imitating an operation means to be operated is displayed as a moving image in a specific reception effect, as shown in FIG. The operation from the position to be performed (see FIG. 288 (a)) ”to the“ position at which the operation has been completed (see FIG. 288 (f)) ”is adjusted according to the length of the valid period as the specific reception effect. We decided to make the display progress. However, one operation from the “operation start position (see FIG. 288 (a))” to the “operation completed position (see FIG. 288 (f)”) is not necessarily adjusted to the length of the validity period. For example, the “operation start position (see FIG. 288 (a))” and the “operation end position (FIG. 288)” may be performed until the validity period ends. (Refer to (f)).). In short, the image displayed at the time when the validity period corresponding to the reception effect starts (the image displayed first) is predetermined, and thereafter, the moving image is displayed in the predetermined order and progress speed. If progress (sequential display by a plurality of images) is performed, an operation method of "how to operate the operation target (in this case, the sword decoration 5001)" and effect reception are allowed. Both the elapsed time since the occurrence of the period (the movement amount of the sword decoration image SYG starting from the sword decoration image SYGa (in this case, the movement amount including the number of reciprocating movements) can be grasped, respectively) It is possible to recognize.

  In the above-described effect example, the “after-operation effect that is executed stepwise” performed based on the effect reception may be another mode. For example, in a state where a moving image as a mock image simulating the operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is continued, "light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5" is set to 1 After the operation at the stage, the effect is started. Then, after the moving image as a mimic image imitating the operation means (in this case, the sword decoration body 5001) to be operated is not displayed, the light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5 is set. Is performed as a post-operation effect in the first stage, the “display effect on the effect display device 1600” or the “movable effect by the decorative accessory” (or at least one of them) is performed in two stages. It is started as a post-operation effect for the eyes (in the second-stage post-operation effect, a production target different from the production target used in the first-stage post-operation effect is used). According to such a configuration, the “light emission effect by the lamp provided on the game board 5” is changed to the “display effect on the effect display device 1600” or the “movable effect by the decoration accessory” (or at least one of them). Is expected to function as a sign effect, and even if this is recognized as an effect after the first-stage operation, a sense of incongruity (a predetermined time has passed since the effect was accepted) Until the post-operation effect, it is possible to provide an after-operation effect without a sense of incongruity that the post-operation effect using the effect display device 1600 or the post-operation effect using the decorative accessory is not executed.

  In addition, the same effect target (for example, a light emission effect by a lamp provided on the game board 5) is used for the first-stage post-operation effect and the second-stage post-operation effect, and is then set as the operation target. In a state where a moving image as a simulated image imitating the operating means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) is continued, an after-operation effect (light-emission effect with a lamp) is performed in such a manner that the degree of expectation is not suggested. In this way, after the moving image as the mimic image is hidden, the post-operation effect (light emission effect using a lamp) may be developed as a mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested.

  A plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation were prepared as modes of a moving image as a mimic image of the operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated, and the moving image was displayed in any of these modes. Even in such a case, the moving image may be continuously displayed even after the effect reception has occurred in both cases.

  Even if a mimic image of the operation means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is displayed as a moving image, if the operation of the operation means is not performed within the validity period, the effect is produced. A special reception effect in which no reception occurs may be generated by establishing an effect condition different from the effect condition for generating the specific reception effect. In other words, in this case, the effect reception is automatically generated by displaying the “moving image based on the same mimic image (here, the sword decoration image SYG)” and the “bar display having the same length”. It is now possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the "specific reception effect" and the "special reception effect" in which the effect reception is not automatically generated is provided, and provide a tense reception effect. Will be able to do it. However, in the case of "specific reception production" where the production reception is automatically generated, and in the case of "special reception production" where the production reception is not automatically generated, it is necessary to make different production contents appear as the production after the operation. It is desirable to make the user recognize which reception effect it was when he performed. In addition, an effect pattern that enables only one of "special reception effect" where the effect reception is automatically generated and "special reception effect" where the effect reception is not automatically generated, or both of them are generated at different timings By preparing an effect pattern that can be made, at the time of symbol fluctuation, by executing any of a plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, at a predetermined timing within the symbol fluctuation, A “specific reception effect” or “special reception effect” may appear.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, a moving image as a simulated image of an operation means to be operated (in this case, a sword decoration 5001). , The post-operation effect is started while the progress related to the dynamic display is continued, and the post-operation effect is executed stepwise. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation performed by a player, a moving image as a simulated image of the operating means (in this case, the sword decoration 5001) to be operated is displayed as the moving image. It is desirable to start the post-operation effect while continuing the progress related to the target display, and to execute the post-operation effect stepwise so that the post-operation effect is executed by the same processing.

[Post-operation effect that suggests the type of reception effect that was automatically received]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic staging function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the validity period in which the staging is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the pachinko machine 1 having such an “automatic effect function”, the effect reception is automatically generated even if the player forgets to operate, so that the player has an operation opportunity. There is a concern that not only the feeling of tension at the time of giving the video will be eliminated but also a mere display effect in which a predetermined moving image flows.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to generate the first reception effect and the second reception effect in which the time from the generation of the period in which the effect reception is allowed to the automatic generation of the effect reception is different. Above, the remaining time image (for example, a bar display) and the mock image (for example, a button image BTG) displayed at the effect reception are the same as each other. That is, in this case, it is encouraged that the second reception effect is erroneously recognized even though the first reception effect has occurred. "Even if the timing at which the production reception should automatically occur after the period during which the production reception is permitted has occurred, the production reception does not automatically occur (or the timing at which the production reception should automatically occur has not yet arrived. (The stage was not automatically staged, but the stage was automatically received.) ", And it was possible to properly maintain the tension until the stage was automatically generated. Will be as expected.

  However, even if the first reception production has occurred, if the time until the automatic production of the production reception is erroneously recognized as the second reception production that is different from this, It is not possible to understand whether progress has been made, and there is a concern that gaming interests will decline. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the bar display indicating the remaining time as the effective period is continuously displayed even after the effect reception is automatically generated. In other words, in this case, even when it is not possible to recognize which of the first reception effect and the second reception effect is being executed during the valid period in which the effect reception is permitted, the effect reception is automatically generated (the operation after the operation starts. ) By checking how much gauge is left as a bar display when performing, it is possible to recognize whether the first reception effect or the second reception effect was being executed After the operation, the effect can be started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although the same sign effect is generated and the same mimic image and the same bar display are displayed when the validity period is generated, the pachinko machine 1 has the same effect. It is possible to execute an effect progress in which an effect reception is automatically generated and an effect reception is not automatically generated within the validity period. In such a configuration, even if an indication effect or a reception effect occurs, it is not possible to determine whether or not an automatic reception will be performed within the validity period, so that the reception effect can be performed with a sense of tension. become able to.

  FIG. 292 and FIG. 293 are diagrams illustrating examples of the first reception effect and the second reception effect in which the time from when the period in which the effect reception is permitted (valid period) to when the effect reception is automatically generated is different. is there. In the effect example, description will be given assuming that the effect reception can be automatically generated.

  FIG. 292 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Is shown.

  FIG. 292 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 292 (a). Indicates an effect state in which a precursor effect is being executed, which indicates that the effect is to be accepted soon.

  FIG. 292 (c) shows an effect state in which the first reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is started after the precursor effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) is performed (the result of the jackpot determination). In the effect determination performed based on the first effect condition (the effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (e) described later appears) or the second effect condition (the effect result shown in FIG. 292 (f) described later). 2 shows an effect state) when the appearing effect pattern is satisfied.

  In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation for the operation button 410 is prompted. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which an effect can be accepted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  However, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the effect reception, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing during the valid period. It is assumed that it has been done. FIG. 292 (d) depicts a state in which the automatic rendering function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (valid period) of the first reception rendering, and the automatic rendering function is activated. Then, the same change as in the case where the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 within the validity period set so that the effect reception is permitted is caused for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, a low-expected mode effect in which “the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) operates and a chance !! is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 292 (e)) or “Specific decorative member SDY (draft)” operates, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 292 (f)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)), the "remaining time as a period in which the effect acceptance is permitted" is shown. The “bar display” is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation in a state where the bar display is maintained. By confirming how much gauge is remaining at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is determined to be “after the period during which the effect is permitted (effective period) occurs. Is different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, in which the time until the automatic generation of the second reception effect is different. In other words, usually, the first reception production and the second reception production often have different production expectation degrees. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

  On the other hand, in this production example, after the production situation shown in FIG. 292 (a) appears, the production situation where the precursor production shown in FIG. 293 (g) appears instead of the precursor production shown in FIG. 292 (b). (In the performance determination performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third performance condition (the performance pattern in which the performance result shown in FIG. 293 (j) described later appears) or the fourth performance condition (the performance pattern shown in FIG. 293 (k) described later) In the case where an effect pattern in which the indicated effect result appears or an effect condition in which the fifth effect condition (effect pattern in which the effect condition shown in FIGS. 293 (l) and (m) described later appear) is satisfied) appears There is.

  Then, after the indication effect is performed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 293 (g), the second reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 starts as illustrated in FIG. 293 (h). Will be done.

  However, in the second reception effect, although the time from the occurrence of the period during which the effect reception is permitted to the activation of the automatic effect function is shorter than the first reception effect, As shown in FIG. 293 (c) and FIG. 293 (h), a button image BTG (simulated image of the operation button 410) and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the validity period (the gauge length is also the same) ) Are the same images as in the case of the first reception effect.

  That is, in this case, the first reception is performed regardless of whether the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (c) is occurring or the production situation shown in FIG. 293 (h). It becomes difficult to recognize which of the production and the second reception production is occurring, and it is possible to give a sense of tension at which timing the production reception occurs.

  Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the effect reception, and the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated at a predetermined timing during the valid period. It is assumed that it has been done. FIG. 293 (i) depicts a state in which the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated in the execution period (valid period) of the second reception production, and the valid period is generated. When the automatic effect function is activated at a timing earlier than the second reception effect, the same change as in the case where the effect is received by the operation of the operation button 410 is caused to the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, based on the result of “the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is operated and the chance display !! 293 (j)) ”or“ Specific decorative member SDY (robin) operates, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 293 (k)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  Regarding this point, in this effect example, even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 293 (j) and (k)), “showing the remaining time as the period during which the effect acceptance is permitted. The “bar display” is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation in a state where the bar display is maintained. By confirming how much gauge is remaining at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is determined to be “after the period during which the effect is permitted (effective period) occurs. Is different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, in which the time until the automatic generation of the second reception effect is different. In other words, usually, the first reception production and the second reception production often have different production expectation degrees. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

  However, in this effect example, even if the precursor effect in the mode shown in FIG. 293 (g) and the reception effect in the mode shown in FIG. As shown in l), an effect situation (fifth effect condition) in which the validity period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated unless an operation is performed by the player can be made to appear. ing.

  In other words, in this case, a precursor effect having the same contents (see FIG. 293 (g)) is generated, and the same bar image and the same bar display (including the gauge length and how to reduce the gauge, etc.) are generated even when the valid period is generated. Is displayed as the second reception effect in which the effect reception is automatically generated within the valid period (see FIGS. 293 (i) to (k)), and the effect reception is performed. May be executed as a third reception effect that does not automatically occur (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)). In such a configuration, even if an indication effect in which a specific aspect appears or a reception effect in which a specific aspect appears is displayed, it is not possible to determine whether or not automatic reception will be performed within the validity period. To be able to perform reception effects.

  Moreover, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 293 (m), even when the validity period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the effect period ends and the effect reception is completed. Is not allowed, the "bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the effect reception is allowed" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, by confirming that a production situation has occurred in which no production has been performed after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount is "0", it was a reception production in which the automatic production function was not enabled. Can be recognized, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Although "?" Appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 293 (m), no effect change may be made.

  Further, in this effect example, although the type of the precursor effect is different (see FIG. 292 (b) and FIG. 293 (m)), the same mimic image and the same bar display are displayed when the effect is received. However, since the time until the automatic production function is activated is different (see FIG. 292 (c) and FIG. 293 (h)), when the precursor production is missed, To be able to provide rendition of whether the automatic production function is activated at an early timing, whether the automatic production function is activated at a relatively late stage, or whether the automatic production function is not activated at all. It will be possible to perform the reception production with a sense of tension. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the precursor effect has been performed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (b), it is possible to recognize in advance that a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is always activated will occur. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  Note that, in this effect example, the display mode is different between the sign effect shown in FIG. 292 (b) and the sign effect shown in FIG. 293 (g), but these are executed in the same display condition. It may be. In other words, in this case, even if both the indication effect and the reception effect are confirmed, the operation opportunity is kept confidential at which timing the automatic effect function is activated and further whether the automatic effect function is activated in the first place. Can be granted.

  Incidentally, each reception effect described above with reference to FIG. 292 and FIG. 293 is also basically effected in the same manner as the effect example shown in FIG. 285. That is, at timing tf1 shown in FIG. 285, the effect state shown in FIG. 292 (c) or FIG. 293 (h) appears, and at timing tf2 shown in FIG. ) Or the effect states shown in FIGS. 293 (j) and (k). However, in the example shown in FIG. 285, there are cases where the automatic production function cannot be activated, and the timing tf2 when the automatic production function is activated according to the established production conditions (production pattern). It can be said that the effect is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 285 in that the effect may be advanced, and that the effect is started after the operation with the bar displayed. Note that in this effect example, the above-described another example of FIG. 285 may be applied. Also in this effect example, after the operation, the effect may be started while the mimic image imitating the operation means is left in addition to the bar display. In the case where the effect is started after the operation while leaving the mock image imitating the operation means, the mock image may be continued as a moving image as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289.

  Also, in this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated to when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (timing tf2 to tf3). ) And the time (timing tf3 to tf4) from the timing when the period originally set as the effect reception period ends to the time when the bar display is not displayed may be set as the same length of time. desirable.

  Also, in this effect example, when the effect is started after the operation with the bar displayed, the staged effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time from when the second reception effect occurs to when the effect reception is automatically generated and the bar display is hidden is longer than the time from when the first reception effect is generated to when the effect reception is automatically generated. It is also desirable to set a short time. According to such a configuration, when the bar display is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 292 (d), it is clear that the effect reception is not the second reception effect in which the effect reception is automatically generated at relatively early timing. (In the case of the second reception effect, it should have been already hidden), so that the user can enjoy the remaining validity period while considering the possibility of the first reception effect.

  In this production example, when the reception production in which the automatic production function is not activated is the third reception production, the production pattern (FIG. 293 (l), (m)) for generating the third reception production is not necessarily prepared. You may.

  The first reception effect and the second reception effect may be sequentially generated within one symbol change. However, when the second reception effect, which has a relatively short time until the automatic effect function is activated, is performed, after that, the first reception effect may occur until the symbol is stopped, When the above-described first reception effect is executed, the time until the automatic effect function is activated is relatively long, after that, the second reception effect is prevented from occurring until the symbol is stopped. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who recognizes that the time until the effect is received by the execution of the first reception effect is relatively long when the second reception effect occurs. It is expected that a situation in which an operation opportunity is lost due to the automatic generation of the effect reception is appropriately suppressed.

  Also in the above-mentioned effect example, the mimic image simulating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. Then, when the first aspect with a low degree of expectation appears, the automatic effect function is not necessarily activated (third reception effect), but when the second aspect with a high degree of expectation appears, the automatic effect function is always activated. (First reception effect or second reception effect).

  In the above-described effect example, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, and when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs. , The third reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)), and the same operation after the effect reception is performed (operation of the specific decorative member SDY (draft)). Is performed. However, when the first reception effect (see FIGS. 292 (c) to (f)) occurs, when the second reception effect (see FIGS. 293 (h) to (k)) occurs, Different post-operation effects may be performed when an effect is received (see FIGS. 293 (l) and (m)) and when an effect is received.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function, or when the validity period ends without activating the automatic effect function, the operation is performed with the bar displayed. The effect that started the production and the production situation where the production did not start after the operation appeared. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the effect after the operation is started with the bar displayed, so that the effect after the operation is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[A precursor effect that also functions as an effect that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic staging function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the validity period in which the staging is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having such “automatic production means”, the production reception is automatically generated even if the player forgets to perform the operation, so that an operation opportunity is given to the player. There is a concern that not only will the nervousness at the time of disappearing, but also that the mere display effect merely causes a predetermined moving image to flow.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can generate a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function” and an automatic reception effect that is a target of the “automatic effect function”. That is, in this case, the effect reception is not always automatically generated, and thus, it is expected that the feeling of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function” has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneously recognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, This will result in the loss of the opportunity to receive a performance reception, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may decline. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the indication effect is performed in a special mode, the automatic reception effect is always generated as the reception effect corresponding to the indication effect, so that the automatic effect function is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a loss of an opportunity to produce an effect reception because the player cannot understand whether or not is activated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the precursor effect is being executed in the special mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect is an automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function”. When the indication effect is terminated and the reception effect (automatic reception effect) is actually generated (valid period), the reception effect is displayed as “automatic effect. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the effect is an automatic reception effect that is a target of the “function” or a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function”. For example, in both the non-automatic reception effect and the automatic reception effect, by displaying the same operation means as an operation target and a mock image simulating the operation means, a bar display having a gauge amount of the same length, or the like. This makes it difficult to recognize which reception effect is occurring.

  According to such a configuration, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated after the reception effect is started once. Difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that a tension that suggests whether or not the “automatic effect function” is enabled or not is appropriately maintained while the effect reception is automatically generated. .

  FIGS. 294 to 296 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which it is suggested whether or not a reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is enabled is generated depending on the mode of the precursor effect. Here also, a description will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be automatically effected). Since a reception effect that is not an activation target can also occur, a display such as “Auto button is being set” is not performed.

  FIG. 294 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Is shown.

  FIG. 294 (b) shows an effect reception (operation) during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a). Shows an effect situation in which a precursor effect is being executed, suggesting that the effect is to be accepted soon.

  Here, the indication effect shown in FIG. 294 (b) occurs when the timing tg1 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives, and a simulation image imitating the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. It is displayed as an effect image (special mode) that moves in a swirl toward a part that appears later. Then, when the sign effect is executed in such a special mode, the automatic reception effect targeted by the “automatic effect function” always occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the sign effect. Thus, during the period in which the precursor effect is performed, it is possible to know in advance that the "automatic effect function" will be activated in the reception effect thereafter. In the indication effect according to this effect example, a display such as "Auto button!" Appears, but this need not always be displayed.

  FIG. 294 (c) illustrates an effect state (effect performed based on the result of the big hit determination) when the timing tg2 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives after the indication effect illustrated in FIG. 294 (b) is performed. The determination indicates a first determination condition (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 294 (e) described later appears) or a second determination condition (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 294 (f) described later appears). The reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is just started.

  In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation for the operation button 410 is prompted. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which an effect can be accepted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  Then, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 294 (c), when a predetermined timing within the validity period arrives without any operation by the player, the effect reception is automatically generated ("automatic effect function" is activated), The same post-operation effect as when a player performs an operation is provided. However, as described later, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c), whether an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated has occurred or a non-automatic effect in which the “automatic effect function” has not been activated. It is difficult to recognize whether a reception effect is occurring. That is, in this case, if it is overlooked in which mode the precursor effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is enabled after the reception effect is started once. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is desirable to maintain a feeling of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated while performing an effect (a precursor effect of the special mode) indicating whether the “automatic effect function” is enabled. Will be expected.

  Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the effect reception, and the operation button 410 is operated at a predetermined timing tg3 (see FIG. 296) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic production function for is activated. FIG. 294 (d) illustrates a state where the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing tg3. When the automatic production function is activated, the production acceptance is permitted. Within the validity period set as described above, the same change as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 is caused for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, based on the result of “the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is operated and the chance display !! 294 (e)) ”or“ Specific decorative member SDY (draft) ”operates, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 294 (f)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 295), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 294 (e) and (f)). The "bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the reception of the effect is permitted" is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation in a state where it is maintained. That is, although detailed description is omitted, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), the effect reception is automatically performed after the period (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs. The first reception effect and the second reception effect with different times to occur are prepared, and by checking how much gauge remaining amount at the time the effect starts after operation, It is possible to recognize whether the reception effect is "a first reception effect or a second reception effect, in which the time from the generation of the period during which the effect reception is permitted (valid period) to the automatic occurrence of the effect reception is different". I am trying to be. In other words, usually, the first reception production and the second reception production often have different production expectation degrees. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately. Note that, also in this effect example, the above-described configuration ("bar display" is not hidden and is maintained in a state where Each configuration other than (starting the effect after the operation) may be appropriately adopted.

  Also, in this effect example (including the effect part described later with reference to FIG. 295), a mimic image display described in the item of "effect after operation suggesting an automatically accepted operation target" is left. You may make it employ | adopt the structure which starts an effect after operation as it is. In this case, each configuration other than the above-described configuration (starting the effect after the operation while leaving the mimic image display) described in the same item may be appropriately adopted. Further, in this case, the configuration for generating the post-operation effect while the bar display is not hidden and left is not necessarily adopted, and may be omitted.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 294 (a) (here, it is in the reach state, but may be in the non-reach state), FIG. 295 (g), an effect state in which the indication effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) appears (the third determination condition in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination (see FIG. 295 (j), an effect pattern in which an effect result appears, or a fourth determination condition (an effect pattern, in which an effect result shown in FIG. 295 (k) described later), or a fifth determination condition (FIG. 295 ( 1), an effect situation in which the effect situation in which the effect status shown in (m) appears is satisfied.

  Here, the indication effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is generated when the timing tg1 (see FIGS. 296 (a) and 296 (b)) arrives, and the operation button 410 to be operated is reproduced. Although the two mock images described above are displayed as an effect (specific mode) until they approach each other and overlap, the mock image imitating the operation button 410 to be operated is not necessarily used in the precursor effect. Is also good. Then, when the indication effect is executed in such a specific mode, when the automatic reception effect targeted by the “automatic effect function” occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect, and when the “automatic effect function” In some cases, non-automated reception effects that are not targeted may occur as reception effects corresponding to the indication effect, and during the period in which the indication effect is performed, the subsequent reception effects will be displayed in the automatic reception function. ”Will not be able to know in advance whether it will be activated. In the indication effect according to this effect example, a display such as "Auto button?" Appears, but this need not necessarily be displayed.

  FIG. 295 (h) shows an effect state when the indication effect shown in FIG. 295 (g) is performed and the timing tg2 shown in FIG. 296 (a) has arrived. The reception stage where the opportunity is given has just been described.

  In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an operation for the operation button 410 is prompted. An instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which an effect can be accepted) appears. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  Then, as described above, in the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h), the effect reception is automatically generated within the validity period without any operation by the player (the “automatic effect function” is activated); If there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the effect is not received within the validity period (the “automatic effect function” is not activated). As described above, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 295 (h), a button image BTG (a simulated image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410, and the remaining time in which the effect acceptance is allowed , And the bar display is only displayed, and it is difficult to distinguish from the effect situation shown in FIG. 294 (c). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension until the effect reception is automatically performed while performing the effect (a precursor effect of the special mode) indicating that the “automatic effect function” is enabled. Will be as expected.

  In this regard, in the case where an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated has occurred, if the timing tg3 (see FIG. 296 (a)) arrives without operation by the player, the figure As shown in 295 (i), an effect situation appears in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated right now. After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change occurs in the production as in the case where the production is received by the operation on the operation button 410 within the validity period set so that the production reception is permitted. Will be done. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, based on the result of “the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is operated and the chance display !! 295 (j)) or “Specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 295 (k)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, even if the effect is performed after the operation in any of the modes (FIGS. 295 (j) and (k)), the "remaining time as a period during which the effect is permitted to be accepted" The bar display indicating "" is not hidden, and the post-operation effect is started in a state where this is maintained. By confirming how much gauge is remaining at the time when the effect is started after the operation, the reception effect is determined to be “after the period during which the effect is permitted (effective period) occurs. Is different between the first reception effect and the second reception effect, in which the time until the automatic generation of the second reception effect is different. In other words, usually, the first reception production and the second reception production often have different production expectation degrees. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately.

  However, as described above, this effect example is a case where the precursor effect in the specific mode illustrated in FIG. 295 (g) and the reception effect in the mode illustrated in FIG. 295 (h) are sequentially displayed. Even if there is no operation by the player, there is a case where the effect is not received within the validity period (the "automatic effect function" is not activated). Then, in this case, when the timing tg4 arrives without any operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 295 (l) and FIG. An effect situation (when an effect pattern is selected according to the establishment of the fifth determination condition) in which the effective period as the effect ends will appear.

  That is, in this case, when the precursor effect of the specific mode (see FIG. 295 (g)) is performed, the same effect image and the same bar display are displayed in the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. However, there are cases where the effect reception is automatically generated within the effective period (see FIGS. 295 (i) to (k)) and when it is not automatically generated (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)). Therefore, it is possible to perform a reception effect with a sense of tension.

  In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 295 (m), even when the validity period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the effect period is ended and the effect reception is completed. Is not allowed, the "bar display indicating the remaining time as a period during which the effect reception is allowed" is maintained without being hidden. Therefore, by confirming that a production situation has occurred in which no production has been performed after the operation even though the gauge remaining amount is "0", it was a reception production in which the automatic production function was not enabled. Can be recognized, and it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Although "?" Appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 295 (m), no effect change may be caused.

  In this effect example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from the automatic reception of the effect to the end of the period originally set as the effect reception period (see FIG. 296 (a)). Timings tg3 to tg4), and the time from the timing when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends to the time when the bar display is not displayed (the timings tg4 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)). Are desirably set as the same length of time.

  Also, in this effect example, when the effect is started after the operation with the bar displayed, the staged effect as described with reference to FIGS. 290 and 289 may be performed.

  Also, the time during which the bar display remains when the automatic effect function is activated (timing tg3 to tg5 shown in FIG. 296 (a)) and the time during which the bar display remains when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timing be the same as the timings tg4 to tg5a) shown in FIG. 296 (b).

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIGS. 295 (g), (h), (l), (m)) and the automatic reception effects (FIGS. 294 (b) to (f)) are sequentially performed within one symbol change. May occur. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, thereafter, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the automatic reception effect is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect is thereafter lost in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, in the reception effect. It is expected that such situations will be appropriately suppressed.

  Also in the above-mentioned effect example, the mimic image simulating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect having a low degree of expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated. May appear only when a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated has occurred.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through the sign effect of the special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i)) generated through the sign effect of the specific mode -(K)) and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through a precursor effect in a specific mode. The operation of the specific decorative member SDY (movement of a curtain) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through the sign effect of the special mode and an automatic reception effect (FIG. 295 (i) to (k) of FIG. )) And a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the indication effect of the specific mode, so that different post-operation effects are performed when the effect is received. It may be.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect that occurs through a special-mode precursor effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) and an automatic reception effect that occurs through a specific-mode precursor effect (FIG. 295 (i)) -(K)) and a non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the precursor effect of the specific mode at the same timing tg1 after the symbol change is started. The effect is started, and the reception effect is started at the same timing tg2. However, these start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, these effects are executed in different effect patterns.

  294 (b) and the sign effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (g) may have different effect times. For example, the sign effect of the special mode shown in FIG. 294 (b) is set to a relatively long effect time so that it is difficult to overlook it, and the sign effect of the specific mode shown in FIG. 295 (c) is overlooked. If the production time is set to be relatively short so that it becomes easier, it is easy for oversight to occur only when a precursor effect that is inconvenient for the player appears, and the entertainment Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In the above-described effect example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) that occurs through the special effect precursor effect, the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, and the automatic reception effect that occurs through the specific condition precursor effect ( 295 (i) to (k)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 295 (l) and (m)) generated through the precursor effect of the specific mode, the operation button 410 is set as an operation target. You may do so. Further, in the automatic reception effect (see FIGS. 294 (d) to (f)) generated through the precursor effect of the special mode, a case where a reception effect with the sword decoration 5001 as an operation target occurs and an operation button 410 There may be a case where a reception effect with the operation target may occur. It should be noted that when a reception effect with the sword decoration 5001 as an operation target is generated, the mock image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, the specific mode) is executed and the part of the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, if at least a part of the precursor effect (for example, a part of the spiral effect) is left for a predetermined time after the start of the reception effect, and this gradually disappears, the reception effect can be reduced. Even after the validity period starts, it can be understood that the automatic effect function is activated in the early stage. It should be noted that only the indication effect of the special aspect among the indication effect of the special aspect and the indication effect of the specific aspect may be retained even after the reception effect is started.

  In this effect example, when a precursor effect in a specific mode (FIG. 295 (g)) appears, a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function” always occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. Thus, during the period in which the precursor effect is performed, it may be possible to recognize in advance that the “automatic effect function” will not be activated in the subsequent reception effect. That is, in this case, if the operation by the player is not performed after the reception effect shown in FIG. 295 (h) occurs, FIGS. 295 (l) and (m) appear sequentially, and FIG. 295 (i) (K) will be omitted.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 294 to 296, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function or when the validity period ends without activating the automatic effect function, the operation is performed with the bar displayed. The effect that started the production and the production situation where the production did not start after the operation appeared. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the effect after the operation is started with the bar displayed, so that the effect after the operation is executed in the same process. It is desirable.

[Reception effect that also functions as an effect that suggests whether it will be automatically accepted]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic staging function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the validity period in which the staging is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having such “automatic production means”, the production reception is automatically generated even if the player forgets to perform the operation, so that an operation opportunity is given to the player. There is a concern that not only will the nervousness at the time of disappearing, but also that the mere display effect merely causes a predetermined moving image to flow.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the precursor effect is executed in a specific mode, a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function” occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect. In some cases, an automatic reception effect, which is an object of the “automatic effect function”, may occur. That is, in this case, the effect reception is not always automatically generated, and thus, it is expected that the feeling of tension until the effect reception is automatically generated is appropriately maintained.

  However, even though a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function” has occurred, it may not be operated as a result of erroneously recognizing that an effect reception occurs without an operation by the player, This will result in the loss of the opportunity to receive a performance reception, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may decline. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the precursor effect is executed in the specific mode, the reception effect corresponding to the precursor effect occurs in either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect. Although it is difficult to recognize or not, during the validity period after the reception production started, by displaying a display that can recognize that the reception production is occurring in the automatic reception production In addition, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to produce an effect reception without understanding whether the automatic effect function is enabled.

  297 to 299 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which it is possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is enabled only in the reception effect among the precursor effect and the reception effect. Here also, a description will be given as an example of an effect when the automatic effect function is enabled (automatic effect mode, or a gaming machine in a state where the automatic effect can always be automatically effected). Since a reception effect that is not an activation target can also occur, a display such as “Auto button is being set” is not performed.

  FIG. 297 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations is 3 and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in an effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. Is shown.

  FIG. 297 (b) shows the effect reception (operation) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 297 (a) (here, in the reach state, but may be in the non-reach state). Shows an effect situation in which a precursor effect is being executed, suggesting that the effect is to be accepted soon.

  Here, the indication effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is generated when the timing th1 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives, and includes two simulations imitating the operation button 410 which is the operation target. It is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the images come close to each other and overlap. In particular, in this production example, the first mimic image is displayed such as “Relief” indicating that the “auto production function” is activated, and the “auto production function” is activated or concealed. The effect is displayed as an effect (specific mode) until the second mimic image displayed as “pounding” approaches and overlaps with each other. When the indication effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) appears, an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is enabled occurs as a reception effect corresponding to the indication effect, and an “automatic effect function” is performed. Since both the non-automated reception effect that is not activated and the non-automated reception effect occur, while the precursor effect is being performed, either the automatic reception effect or the non-automatic reception effect is performed after the precursor effect is performed. It is difficult to recognize what will happen. It should be noted that in this precursor effect, a mimic image of the operation button 410 to be operated does not necessarily have to be displayed, and whether an automatic reception effect or a non-automatic reception effect occurs after the precursor effect is performed. What is necessary is just to make it difficult to recognize.

  FIG. 297 (c) shows a first mimic image in which a display such as “Relief” indicating that the “automatic production function” is activated as a result of the indication production shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed. , Among the second mimic images that are displayed such as “pounding” in which the “automatic staging function” is activated or concealed, the first mimic image that is displayed as “reliable” is left, The effect state in which the second mimic image on which the display such as “throb” is displayed is hidden (the first determination result in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination (the effect result shown in FIG. FIG. 297 shows an effect pattern that appears, or a second determination result (an effect pattern in which an effect result shown in FIG. 297 (f) described later) appears. Such an effect situation appears when a timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a)) arrives. At the timing th2, a reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 starts. Will be done.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, a first mimic image in which “Relief” is displayed as a button image BTG (a mimic image of the operation button 410) corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area. And an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which effect reception is allowed) appears. It has become. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  In this regard, the case where the first simulation image (safety) is displayed in the reception effect is defined as “the effect reception is automatically generated when a predetermined timing within the validity period arrives without any operation by the player (“ automatic effect function ” Validation), and the automatic reception effect in which the effect after the same operation as when the player performs the operation is performed. Therefore, by confirming that the first simulation image (reliable) is displayed when the reception effect is generated, it is confirmed that the “auto-effect function” is being executed as an automatic reception effect. It becomes possible to recognize.

  According to such a configuration, while the indication effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, the “automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is enabled” is set as the reception effect corresponding to the indication effect. It is possible to grasp that the "automatic reception effect in which the automatic production function is enabled" is being executed when the reception production is started, while concealing what happens later. Become so. That is, in this case, until immediately before the reception effect is started, while the tension is appropriately increased by concealing whether or not the “automatic effect function” is enabled, after the reception effect is started, By making it possible to grasp this, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to produce an effect reception without understanding whether the “automatic effect function” is enabled or not.

  Then, in this effect example, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period set to allow the effect reception, and at a predetermined timing th3 (see FIG. 299 (a)) within the valid period. It is assumed that the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. FIG. 297 (d) illustrates that the automatic production function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated at the timing th3. When the automatic production function is activated, the reception of the production is permitted. Within the validity period set as described above, the same change as in the case where the effect is accepted by the operation on the operation button 410 is caused for the effect. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of symbol change, based on the result of the “special decorative member SDY (draft), the effect display device 1600 displays a chance !! 297 (e)) ”or“ Specific decorative member SDY (draft) ”operates, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 297 (f)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  In this regard, in this effect example (including the effect portion described later with reference to FIG. 298), even if the post-operation effect is executed in any of the modes (FIGS. 297 (e) and (f)). However, the simulation image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation while the image is maintained. Thereby, even if an effect reception is automatically generated where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is being performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". With the notation such as "safe", it is also possible to recognize that "the effect is automatically generated after the operation due to the automatic effect function being activated".

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), during the period during which effect reception is allowed, as shown in FIG. Will be terminated. After that, while the effect reception is not permitted, the effect is started after the operation with the mimic image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410 being displayed, but the operation button 410 is imitated. The simulation image (button image BTG) is hidden before the timing th6 at which the effect is ended after the operation arrives.

  According to such a configuration, during the period from the start of the effect after the operation to the end of the effect, a mimic image of the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) which has been set as the operation target is displayed. A period in which the simulation image is displayed (timings th3 to th5) and a period in which the same image is not displayed (timings th5 to th6) appear. Therefore, even if the effect is started after the operation while the mimic image imitating the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) which is the operation target is displayed, the mimic image is not displayed. It is expected that the feeling of tension caused by having to confirm the effect after the operation before the operation is properly maintained.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, after the sign effect shown in FIG. 297 (b) is performed, the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs instead of the reception effect shown in FIG. 297 (c). In some cases, it is possible.

  That is, FIG. 298 (g) shows the first model in which a display such as “Relief” indicating that the “automatic production function” is activated is performed as a result of the indication production shown in FIG. 297 (b). Of the images and the second mock image with the display such as "pounding" in which the "automatic directing function" is enabled or concealed, the second mock image with the display "pounding" is left. , An effect state in which the first mimic image in which the display such as “safety” is displayed is hidden (the third determination result in the effect determination performed based on the result of the big hit determination (the effect shown in FIG. 298 (i) described later) An effect pattern in which the result appears, or a fourth determination result (an effect pattern in which the effect result shown in FIG. 298 (j) described later) appears, or a fifth determination result (shown in FIG. 298 (k), (l) described later) Production pattern that shows the production situation Shows the case) the emission) is obtained. Such an effect situation appears when a timing th2 (see FIG. 299 (a) or (b)) arrives. At the timing th2, an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The reception production will be started.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, as a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 (a simulation image imitating the operation button 410), a second simulation image in which a display such as "pounding" is displayed is displayed in the display area. In addition, an instruction display (here, a character display such as “press”, a downward arrow display, and a bar display indicating the remaining time in which an effect can be accepted) appears. It has become. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is to be given is in a light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

  In this regard, the case where the second simulation image (throbbing) is displayed in the reception effect is defined as "the effect reception is automatically generated when a predetermined timing within the validity period arrives without any operation by the player (" automatic effect function " Enable), and when the automatic reception effect in which the effect is displayed after the operation is performed when the operation by the player is performed, and when the effect reception is not generated without the operation by the player. , A non-automatic reception effect in which the effect is not executed after the operation ”is executed. Therefore, by confirming that the second simulation image (pounding) is displayed when the reception effect occurs, it is difficult to recognize whether the “automatic effect function” is enabled or not. You will be able to understand and this will keep you nervous.

  According to such a configuration, while the sign effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is being performed, and while the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (g)) corresponding to the sign effect is being performed. In either case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the “automatic effect function” is activated, so that a sense of tension can be maintained.

  Then, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “automatic reception production in which the automatic production function is enabled”, the timing th3 (FIG. 299 ( 298), an effect situation appears in which the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is about to be activated right now, as shown in FIG. 298 (h). After that, when the automatic production function is activated, the same change occurs in the production as in the case where the production is received by the operation on the operation button 410 within the validity period set so that the production reception is permitted. Will be done. Here, based on the result of the effect determination performed at the time of the symbol change, based on the result of “the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is operated and the chance display !! 298 (i)) or “Specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated, and high heat mode effect is displayed on effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 298 (j)). )) Is executed as a post-operation effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, no matter which mode (FIGS. 298 (i), (j)) the post-operation effect is performed, a simulation image (button image BTG) of the operation button 410 is obtained. ) Is not hidden, and the effect is started after the operation in a state where it is maintained. Thereby, even if an effect reception is automatically generated in a place where the player does not know, it is possible to recognize that the effect after the operation is being performed according to the "effect reception for the operation button 410". , "Dokidoki" notation means that the "automatic reception function in which the automatic production function is enabled" is confidential. It is possible to recognize that the situation is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the reception detection shown in FIG. 298 (g) is executed as “non-automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled”, the timing th4 (FIG. 299 ( b)), the effect situation in which the validity period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated, as shown in FIGS. 298 (k) and 299 (b). (When an effect pattern is selected according to the fifth determination result being obtained).

  Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 298 (l), even when the valid period as the reception effect ends without the automatic effect function being activated, the effect period is ended and the effect reception is completed. Are not allowed, the "simulated image (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410" is not displayed and is maintained. Therefore, the effect was not automatically generated as a result of the effect that the effect was not automatically generated in a state where the "automatic effect function is enabled and the automatic reception effect is activated", and the effect was not performed after the operation. You will be able to recognize that you are in a situation. Although “?” Appears in the diagram shown in FIG. 298 (l), no effect change may be caused.

  In this effect example as well, in the same manner as in the effect example shown in FIG. 285, the time from when the effect reception is automatically generated to when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends (see FIG. 299 (a)). Timings th3 to th4) and the time from when the period initially set as the effect reception period ends to when the mimic image is not displayed (timings th4 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)). Is desirably set as a time of the same length.

  Further, the time during which the mimic image remains when the automatic effect function is activated (timing th3 to th5 shown in FIG. 299 (a)) and the time during which the mimic image remains when the automatic effect function is not activated ( It is desirable that the timing be the same as the timings th4 to th5a) shown in FIG. 299 (b).

  The non-automatic reception effects (FIGS. 298 (g), (k), (l)) and the automatic reception effects (FIGS. 297 (b) to (f)) can occur sequentially within one symbol variation. You may do so. However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, thereafter, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the automatic reception effect is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect is thereafter lost in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, in the reception effect. It is expected that such situations will be appropriately suppressed.

  Also in the above-mentioned effect example, the mimic image simulating the operation means may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (first mode and second mode) having different expectations. The first aspect having a low degree of expectation can be displayed in both the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated and the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not activated. May appear only when a reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated has occurred.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first mimic image displaying “Relief” is displayed, and a second mimic image displaying “Dokidoki” are displayed. The automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second mimic image on which a display such as “throb” is displayed are displayed. Then, the same post-operation effect (such as the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) is performed. However, an automatic reception effect in which the first mimic image displaying “Relief” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)) and an automatic reception displaying the second mimic image displaying “Dookido” are displayed. When an effect is received between the effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which a second simulation image displaying a “pounding” is displayed. After each operation, a different effect may be performed.

  In the above-described effect example, an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the first mimic image displaying “Relief” is displayed, and a second mimic image displaying “Dokidoki” are displayed. Of the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)) and the non-automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)) in which the second mimic image on which the display such as “pounding” is displayed is changed. Although the indication effect is started at the same timing th1 after the start and the reception effect is started at the same timing th2, these start timings are not necessarily the same. As described above, these effects are executed in different effect patterns.

  A reception effect in which a first imitation image displaying “Relief” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)), and a reception effect in which a second imitation image displaying “pounding” is displayed (FIG. 298) (H) and (k)), the length of the effective period in the reception effect may be different. In particular, in the reception effect in which the second mimic image displaying “pounding” is displayed (see FIGS. 298 (h) and (k)), the first mimic image displaying “safe” is displayed. By setting the effective time shorter than the reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)), the tension in the effective period can be more appropriately maintained.

  In addition, an automatic reception effect in which a second imitation image displaying "pounding" is displayed (see FIG. 298 (h)), and a non-automatic display in which a second imitation image displaying "pounding" is displayed. The length of the effective period in the reception effect may differ from that of the reception effect (see FIG. 298 (k)). In particular, in the non-automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is not activated (see FIG. 298 (k)), the non-automatic effect effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated is more effective than in the automatic reception effect (see FIG. 298 (h)). By setting a short effective time, it is possible to more appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the effective period.

  In the above-described effect example, the case where the operation button 410 is used as the operation target has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in an automatic reception effect (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which a first mimic image displaying “Relief” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)), a sword decoration 5001 is to be operated, and a second display such as “Pounding” is displayed. An automatic reception effect in which a mock image is displayed (see FIG. 298 (h)), and a non-automatic reception effect in which a second mock image in which a display such as “throb” is displayed (see FIG. 298 (k)). Then, the operation button 410 may be set as an operation target. It should be noted that when a reception effect with the sword decoration 5001 as an operation target is generated, the mock image displayed during the reception effect is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG.

  In the above-described effect example, a part of the period in which the precursor effect (special mode, the specific mode) is executed and the part of the period in which the reception effect is executed may overlap. For example, at least a part (for example, a predetermined effect or the like) of the precursor effect is left in such a manner as to completely or partially overlap with the mimic image only for a predetermined time after the start of the reception effect, and this is gradually reduced. , It becomes difficult to grasp that the automatic production function is activated in the early stage even after the validity period of the reception production is started. Note that a reception effect in which a first imitation image displaying “Relief” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)), and a reception effect in which a second imitation image displaying “pounding” is displayed (see FIG. 297 (c)). 298 (h) and (k)), at least a part (for example, a predetermined effect) of the precursor effect entirely or partially overlaps with the mimic image only in any of the reception effects. It may be left in the form.

  In this effect example, the reception effect in which the second simulation image displayed as “throbbing” is displayed may be generated only as a non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the “automatic effect function”. That is, in this case, if the operation by the player is not performed after the reception effect shown in FIG. 298 (g) occurs, FIGS. 298 (k) and (l) appear sequentially, and FIG. 298 (h) (J) will be omitted.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, when an effect is received by the automatic effect function or when the validity period ends without activating the automatic effect function, after the operation with the mimic image left, The effect that started the production and the production situation where the production did not start after the operation appeared. However, in terms of processing load, even when an effect is received by an operation by the player, the effect after the operation is started while the mimic image remains, and the effect after the operation is executed by the same processing. It is desirable.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, a precursor effect corresponding to a reception effect in which a first effect image in which a display such as “Reliable” is displayed is displayed, and a second effect image in which a display such as “throb” is displayed Is the same as the forerunning effect corresponding to the reception effect. However, on the condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a normal effect (see FIG. 297 (b)) is used as a precursor effect corresponding to a reception effect in which a first mimic image in which a display such as “Relief” is displayed is displayed. (See Reference). For example, if a flame effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is added to the precursor effect, "the degree of expectation is high" and "the automatic production function is enabled" are determined by a predetermined value. Since it is suggested in advance only when the production condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game while maintaining the sense of tension when the effective period occurs.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, a simulation imitating the operation means to be operated when an effect is received or when the validity period ends without activating the automatic effect function. The display mode of the image is changed, and the effect after the operation is started while the mimic image is displayed in the changed display mode (or the effect is not started after the operation). The effect after the operation may be started (or the effect after the operation is not started) in a state where the mimic image is displayed with the display mode and the display position during the period.

  The post-operation effect that is started while displaying a mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated is a display effect in the effect display device 1600, a light-emitting effect by a lamp provided in the game board 5, an effect by sound, and Any one of the movable effects by the decorative accessory may be used, or an appropriate combination of these effects may be used. Also, a first post-operation effect that is started while a mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed, and a timing th5 at which the mimic image simulating the operation means to be operated is not displayed. The second post-operation effect started thereafter may be executed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, similarly to the above-described effect example, a simulation image simulating the operation means to be operated is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display is maintained. After the operation, the effect may be started in a state where the operation is performed.

  In the above-described effect examples shown in FIGS. 297 to 299, a notation such as “relief” or “pounding” is added to the mock image, and the appearance as the mock image is changed so that the reception effect is performed. It was decided to make a suggestion as to whether the "automatic production function" will be enabled. However, a special image that is displayed only when the “automatic effect function” is activated may be displayed during the period during which the reception effect is performed (effective period), and this is not necessarily displayed as a model image. You don't have to. In this case, it is desirable that the special image displayed separately from the mock image is not hidden, and that the effect is started after the operation while leaving the special image. Similarly, the notation “pounding” may be displayed separately from the mimic image, and the post-operation effect may be started (or the post-operation effect is not started) while leaving the image.

  In the above production example, by making the display such as "relief" and "pounding" different during the period when the reception production is performed, it is suggested that an automatic reception production in which the "auto production function" is enabled has occurred. I decided to do it. However, instead of this, an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated is generated by changing the mode (light emission mode, operation state (presence / absence of vibration), etc.) of the operation means to be operated. A suggestion may be made as to whether or not it is done. Alternatively, during the period in which the reception effect is performed, both the display such as “relief” and “pounding” and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emission mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), and the like) are made different. In this case, any one of the display such as “relieved” and “pounding” and the mode of the operation means to be operated (light emission mode, operation state (presence or absence of vibration), etc.) may be adopted. It is desirable to continue the state only and to end the state and start the post-operation effect in order to shift the gaze to the newly generated post-operation effect.

  In the above-described effect example, when an automatic reception effect in which the “automatic effect function” is activated occurs, a display such as “safety” is made within a period even earlier than a precursor effect to the automatic reception effect. A specific display mode suggesting that a reception effect in which the first mimic image is displayed may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the specific display mode is not displayed at least before the reception effect is started, for example, within a period from the start of the indication effect to the end thereof.

  In the above-mentioned production example, after displaying a specific image (throbbing) suggesting the possibility that the "automatic staging function" may not be activated during the period in which the precursor production is being performed, the specific image (throb) is displayed. The reception effect may be started in the form of changing to a special image (secure) that has been hidden until now. Even with such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize that the “automatic effect function” is activated during the period in which the precursor effect is being performed, and the tension is appropriately maintained when the effective period occurs. Will be able to do it.

[Improvement of production effect using automatic production function]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic staging function for the operation target is enabled at a predetermined timing within the validity period in which the staging is permitted, and the operation is performed without any operation by the player. It is possible to generate a post-production. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a device for improving the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is provided by creating a novel performance utilizing such an “automatic performance function”. I have to.

  FIG. 300 is a diagram for explaining a novel effect using the automatic effect function. More specifically, a reception effect is generated based on the number of suspensions (0 to 3) that maintain an unexecuted state when a symbol change is newly consumed, or an automatic effect function is enabled. It is a distribution table of random numbers to be used for the effect determination of whether or not. The total number of random numbers is “100”, and any one of these random numbers is acquired, and by referring to which of the distribution tables the acquired random numbers are distributed, a reception effect is generated. Or an effect determination as to whether to activate the automatic effect function. Note that, also here, an example of an effect when the automatic effect function can be activated (automatic effect mode or a gaming machine in a state where automatic effect can always be effected) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 300, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first production situation (for example, specific When the reception effect occurs in the digested pattern fluctuation (production pattern) when the number is less than the number “2”), this is the “non-automatic reception effect that is not subject to the automatic production function” However, in the second production situation (for example, a situation where the game is continued to some extent) and the number of reserves is large (for example, a situation where the number is larger than the specific number “2”), the accepted production is performed within the symbol fluctuation (production pattern) digested. Is performed, so that the ratio of the effect is higher than the ratio of "non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function".

  In this case, in the case of the symbol change (staging pattern) started when the number of holds is still small, the ratio of generating “non-automatic reception staging not subject to the automatic staging function” is set to be relatively high. On the other hand, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the rate of generating the “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function” is set to be relatively low. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the automatic reception effect targeted by the “automatic effect function” also has the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of holds is small. The occurrence ratio is made relatively high, and the occurrence ratio of the symbol variation (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large is made relatively low. However, the degree of change in the occurrence ratio is assumed to be more gradual (mild) than in the case of non-automated reception effects that are not subject to the “automated effect function”. The ratio of "non-automatic reception effects not targeted for the effect function" decreases as the number of holds increases.

  According to such a configuration, when the number of reservations is small, the rate of occurrence of a reception effect is not an automatic reception effect but a non-automatic reception effect when the reception effect is generated is higher than when the number of reservation effects is large. Therefore, when the game is just started and the number of reservations is small, it is possible to increase the consciousness of the player to participate in the game and to promote enthusiasm. In addition, if the game is continued to some extent and the number of holds is large, the ratio of non-automatic reception effects will decrease, so another effect ( Calm effect). As described above, by changing the directivity related to the operation while the game is continued, it is expected that the user is less likely to get tired of the game and that the entertainment of the game is appropriately maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described configuration, when the above-mentioned another effect (calm effect) is tired and the player tries to quit the game, the effect of raising the sense of participation in the game by decreasing the number of reservations is reduced. Since it reappears, it is expected that such a change in the directivity will discourage game interruption.

  An important point of the invention relating to this production example is to change the ratio of the “auto production function” to be activated by increasing or decreasing the number of reservations, thereby changing the production performance related to the “auto production function”. It is to create. Therefore, the occurrence ratio of the reception effect may or may not be different between the symbol variation that is consumed when the number of reservations is small and the symbol variation that is consumed when the number of reservations is large. It can be said that there is a technical characteristic in how the ratio of the “automatic effect function” to be activated changes when the reception effect occurs within the symbol fluctuation.

  For example, of the "non-automatic reception effects not targeted by the automatic production function" and the "automatic reception effects targeted by the automatic production function", only the "non-automatic reception production not targeted by the automatic production function", The occurrence ratio differs between when the number of holds is small and when the number of holds is large, and for `` automatic reception effects that are targeted for the automatic The occurrence ratio may be the same between a certain time and a time when the number of suspensions is large. That is, in this case, for the “non-automatic reception effect that is not a target of the automatic effect function”, for example, the random number distribution shown in FIG. In the pattern change), the occurrence ratio is relatively high, and in the case of a symbol change (effect pattern) started when the number of reservations is large, the occurrence ratio is relatively low. However, for the automatic reception effect that is the target of the “automatic effect function”, the same occurrence ratio (for example, the value of “automatic reception function” shown in FIG. Regardless of the number, they are all set to "20").

  According to such a configuration, a level that ensures that the same post-operation effect is performed even when there is no operation by the player (the rate of occurrence of the “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function”) As such, this will be uniform regardless of the number of holds. Therefore, even if the occurrence ratio of the “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function” is changed according to the number of holds, even if the player forgets to operate, the uniformity does not depend on the game situation. Security can be provided.

  In addition, as for "non-automatic reception effects not subject to the automatic effect function", there are a plurality of effect modes (the display contents during the reception effect are different, the effects after the operation are different, the operation objects are different, etc.). Is prepared, and based on the result of the effect determination at the time of the symbol change, the non-automatic reception effect is generated only in one of the effect modes, and the non-automatic reception effect is sequentially performed a plurality of times in two or more effect modes. It may be made to occur in some cases. That is, in this case, the rate of occurrence of “non-automatic reception effects not targeted by the automatic effect function” means the rate at which at least one of the effect modes occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation.

  In addition, as for the “automatic reception effect that is an object of the automatic effect function”, there are also a plurality of effect modes (a display content during a reception effect is different, a post-operation effect is different, an operation target is different, etc.). Is prepared, and based on the result of the effect determination at the time of symbol change, the automatic reception effect is generated only in one of the effect modes, and the automatic reception effect is sequentially generated a plurality of times in two or more effect modes. There may be a case. That is, in this case, the occurrence ratio of the “automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function” means a ratio at which at least one of the effect modes occurs within the execution period of the symbol variation.

  However, when the non-automatic reception effect is executed, the automatic reception effect can occur thereafter, but when the automatic reception effect is executed, thereafter, the non-automatic reception effect cannot be generated. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, a person who mistakenly recognizes that the automatic reception effect is automatically generated by the execution of the automatic reception effect is thereafter lost in the reception effect in which the automatic effect function is not enabled, in the reception effect. It is expected that such situations will be appropriately suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, only one of the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function” and the “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function” during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. Although described as an example of occurrence, "a non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic effect function" and "an automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic effect function" may be sequentially generated. In this case, in the table shown in FIG. 300, the total number of random numbers obtained by adding the distribution value of “no reception effect” and the distribution value of “reception effect present” exceeds “100”.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in at least one of the “non-automatic reception production not targeted by the automatic production function” and the “automatic reception production targeted by the automatic production function”, the operation means to be operated is 2 There may be more than one. For example, a random number value of “20” assigned to “automatically accept function” when the number of reservations is “0” is assigned to the first operation unit with an operation opportunity, On the other hand, it may be possible to further distribute the operation opportunity.

  The determination as to whether to generate the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted for the automatic production function” and the determination as to whether to generate the “automatic reception effect targeted for the automatic production function” are performed when the design changes. It is desirable to be performed as one of the effect determinations according to the result of the big hit determination.

  As described above, in the above-described effect example, when the number of reservations is large, the “non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function” is less likely to occur. In this regard, when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs despite such a situation where the number of holds is large, compared to the case where the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs when the number of holds is small, If the rate of occurrence of the "automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic production function" is further increased within one symbol change in which the "non-automatic reception effect" has occurred, only when the number of reservations is large, The "non-automatic reception effect" can be made to function as an effect that suggests that an "automatic reception effect" will occur (an effect that suggests before the indication effect for the automatic reception effect). This also makes it possible to make the effect of the automatic effect function different. In addition, as a method of increasing the rate at which the “automatic reception effect” further occurs within one symbol change in which the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs, instead of increasing the occurrence ratio of the “automatic reception effect” itself, It is preferable that the effect condition for generating the “automatic reception effect” is also easily satisfied in accordance with the effect condition for generating the “non-automatic reception effect”.

  Also, in the situation where the number of holds is the largest (the situation where the “non-automatic reception effect” is the least likely to appear), when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs, the one symbol change in which the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs The "automatic reception effect" may always be generated within the above. According to such a configuration, the “non-automatic reception effect” can be caused to function as a precursor effect to the “automatic reception effect”, so that the effect of the automatic effect function can be varied. become.

  When there is a situation (valid period) in which a “non-automated reception effect” has occurred, and when there is a situation (valid period) in which an “automatic reception effect” has occurred, a mock image or background image that simulates the operation means It is desirable to make the display contents different. In this case, the display image is displayed when the “non-automatic reception effect” occurs (valid period) and when the “automatic reception effect” occurs (valid period). For at least the different part, it is desirable to generate a production reception while leaving it undisplayed and to perform the production after the operation. This is as described in the example of the effect of “Post-effect”. If a different part (simulated image of the operation means, etc.) is not hidden and left as it is, and the effect is received and the effect is performed after the operation, the operation target is automatically received. Or another example, etc. described in “Post-Operation Effect That Suggests”.

  Regarding each of the above-described configurations and modifications of the rendering example (improvement of rendering effect using the automatic rendering function), the non-automatic reception rendering not included in the automatic rendering function, and the automatic reception rendering targeted in the automatic rendering function. Each effect may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples in which the effect can be generated.

[Automatic directing function prevents channel waste]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is limited (for example, 32 channels), even if a special result is obtained in a jackpot determination according to a prize, a channel to which sound data is to be assigned is determined. In a situation where there is no vacancy (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), a special sound corresponding to a special result obtained cannot be assigned to a channel and cannot be output (or a sound which is already in a reproduction state). Is forcibly stopped), and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the pachinko machine 1 starts the symbol variation until the symbol variation ends. During the period, while performing the process of developing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern in the effect display device 1600, the process of allocating the sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproducing the sound. Do. Then, when the display effect on the effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing in the symbol fluctuation period, the sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the predetermined channel, and the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. Generates a reception effect on the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.). As a result, when the effect reception is generated, the sound of “BGM playback” is maintained in a suppressed mode or a state in which the sound is output in a silence state, while a big hit symbol (a special display mode in the effect pattern) is changed by the symbol change. A special effect sound indicating the expected degree of appearance is output in a non-suppressed manner (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested in the special effect may be 100%.

  In other words, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the effect reception, the sound of “BGM playback” is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. Therefore, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which there is likely to be room in the use state of the channel. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special production sound while removing anxiety, such as "maybe there is no available space in the channel and the special production sound cannot be output". Can be performed, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that data relating to various effect sounds, such as a plurality of BGM data, is stored in a predetermined storage means. Become.

  By the way, when specific BGM data (sound of “BGM playback”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is to be assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or silence, it is generally assigned to a channel. It is assumed that the processing of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) (processing of changing the volume initial value defined in the sound data and lowering it) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppression process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating a validity period for effect reception), a sound ("" It is possible to provide the player with an operation opportunity (generate a validity period for effect reception) after setting the “BGM playback” sound) in a suppressed mode or in a state where the sound is output in a silent state.

  However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, an effective period of effect reception is to be generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, when the operation (reception of an effect) is performed within the validity period, the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume can be returned to the initial value. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM playback" in advance so that the specific music is caught at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player performs an operation, the sound data of “BGM playback” is switched to the sound data of “BGM playback dedicated for special effect sound playback”, and this is switched. It is also conceivable to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of “BGM playback” is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects from the stop of the specific effect pattern to the end of the effect, the timing of the symbol stop, and the like. If the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing or is uncertain (depending on the player), if the operation (effect reception) is triggered, the sound of “BGM playback” is newly reproduced. In addition, there is a concern that a so-called sound gap may occur between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that, resulting in a decrease in gaming interest. In short, in view of the fact that "the remaining time from the reception of the effect to the end of the symbol change is also undefined", the length corresponding to the undefined remaining time at the timing of the reception of the effect It can be said that it is difficult to newly assign the BGM data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) to the channel.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ("BGM playback" sound) corresponding to the specific effect pattern are stored. For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super-reach production, sound data during the second half of the super-reach production, etc.) are determined in a time series prescribed by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Processing for sequentially assigning to channels is performed. The specific sound data (one sound material) among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM playback” corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When the predetermined channel is allocated to the predetermined channel in a time-series manner, the reproduction is started by being allocated to the predetermined channel from the timing before the valid period of the effect reception in the specific directing pattern occurs, and the valid period ends. Then, the reproduction is performed while maintaining the assignment state to the predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the reproduction.

  In this regard, in a specific section (special period) when the specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, compared to the other sections, a suppression mode or a process related to sound output with no sound. Is performed in advance (stored as silence data), and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series defined by the sound generation schedule data, The time-series relationship is such that an effective period of effect reception occurs in a part of the section (special period). In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the validity period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The special production sound according to the reception of the production is performed over the two sections in the specific sound data after the end of the (partial section) (the other section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed manner on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, super sound data, Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach effect to the predetermined channels in the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, without performing volume adjustment from the initial value. In both cases, it is possible to create a “suppression mode or a state in which sound is output in a silence (special period)”. In addition, when an operation performed by the player is accepted in the “suppressed mode or the state in which the sound is output without sound (special period)” created in this way, a special process is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is “suppressed or output in a silence state (special period) regardless of the effect reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after this, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) ends in a manner that the special sound effect is sunk into the reproduced special sound effect. Since the data content of the other sections (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” can be secretly returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It is possible to provide an effect sound without discomfort. That is, in this case, when an operation by the player is accepted in a state in which the sound of “BGM playback” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, the special effect sound is not suppressed by a highly immediate process triggered by the operation. Thus, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that.

  As described above, “BGM playback” corresponding to a specific effect pattern is suppressed in a certain section (special period) when viewed in chronological order, or sound is output in a silence state compared to other sections. Is set in advance, the data content (silence data or the like) defining that the process according to (1) is to be performed. However, in the “suppression mode or the state in which silence is output (special period)”, the volume from the initial value is set. The volume may also be reduced by adjustment. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an adverse effect due to noise from a channel to which BGM data is allocated.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern is being reproduced, in the section (normal section) different from the special section described above. Also, a reception effect for the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) is generated.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is limited, a reception effect occurs in a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which sound data is to be allocated (a situation in which the number of vacant channels is 0). When an operation performed by the player is accepted, a production sound corresponding to the production reception may be output in the form of suspending the output of any production sound in the reproduction state, or the production sound may be accepted in response to the production reception. The output of the produced sound itself has to be stopped. And in this case, a production situation that lacks the excitement, such as a failure to win a big hit, such as "the production sound is forcibly terminated midway or no production sound is played even though the production was accepted" Therefore, the player also has a consciousness that the user does not want to generate such a poorly aroused performance situation (a consciousness that the performance reception should not be generated by the operation).

  Then, there is a concern that the operation by the player is not easily performed even though the reception effect is generated, and it is difficult to improve the game entertainment. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned "technology for automatically generating a reception effect" is simply applied contrary to the player's intention of "do not want to generate an effect reception", the entertainment interest of the game is adversely reduced. It could be done.

  On the other hand, as for the developer, in the reception production with confidence and thought, regardless of the state of the channel usage, it is necessary to generate a production reception by aggressive operation by the player and perform the post-operation production. It is possible to assume that there is a desire to have fun.

  Therefore, as described above, in the above configuration, first, in the section from the time when the specific BGM data is allocated to the channel to the time when the allocation is completed, a special section in which the specific BGM effect sound can be output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. And a normal section different from the special section. Then, in the normal section, “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic production function” can be generated as the above reception effect, and in the special section, “automatic reception production subject to the automatic production function” It can be generated as an effect.

  That is, in this case, in the “normal section in which the specific BGM production sound is not suppressed or silence and can be output in the normal mode”, it is determined whether or not to produce a production reception (by estimating the channel availability). Since the right of selection is left only to the player, the reception effect is automatically generated contrary to the intention of the player, such as "There may be no room in the available channels, so let's not make the reception of the production" This can be preferably avoided (the use of channels is prevented from being wasted by the automatic presentation function).

  On the other hand, in the “special section in which the specific BGM production sound can be output in the suppressed mode or in silence”, the impression that the specific BGM production sound is out of the channel assignment and a spare channel is created (as viewed from the player side). Even though the channel feels like a vacant space). Therefore, it is possible to actively encourage the player to perform the operation while removing the feeling of anxiety such as "maybe the channel is full and the special production sound may not be output". Naturally, even if the operation by the player is not performed, by automatically generating the reception effect, the feeling that `` If the effect reception occurs anyway, let's generate the effect reception by the player's own operation next time '' You can be encouraged to become.

  FIG. 301 is a time chart showing an example of the assignment status of each channel when such processing is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when such processing is executed will be described with reference to FIG. Note that, in this effect example, the special section is described as a silent section in which silence data is set, but may be a suppression section in which data in a suppression mode is set.

  As shown in FIG. 301 (a), during a period in which a specific effect pattern according to the result of the effect determination is being executed, at timing tm11, it corresponds to the specific effect pattern that is being developed. The sound of “BGM playback” is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 and has already been played back (here, stereo playback). The sound of "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol change from the start of the symbol change to the end thereof when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is to be executed. (Sound material) may be reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol variation may be divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each of those periods may be May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In any case, in the example shown in FIG. 301, one sound data (one sound) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period in the diagram including the timing tm11 (a part of the symbol variation period). (Materials) are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and (b), one sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is at a timing At tm14, the sound is reproduced in the silent section in which the silent data content (silent data) is set. As a result, even if the volume of the “BGM playback” sound corresponding to the specific effect pattern is not adjusted from the initial value, the sound can be output without sound while being assigned to a predetermined channel. .

  According to such a configuration, in the silent section after the occurrence of the timing tm14, an atmosphere is provided in which the use of the channel is likely to have a margin as much as the sound of “BGM playback” appears to be off the channel. On the other hand, in the normal section before the timing tm14 occurs, the atmosphere where the use of the channel is unlikely to be provided by the amount of the “BGM playback” sound occupying the channel is provided. Will be done.

  That is, although not shown, timing tm14 is generated for various sounds different from the sound of “BGM playback” (for example, a notice sound, an effect sound accompanying the validity period, a winning sound, and the like). In both the subsequent silent section and the normal section before the occurrence of the timing tm14, an appropriate channel is assigned to each of the channels and the channel is set to the reproduction state. In particular, in the normal section, multiple sounds are often output simultaneously to enliven the production or to indicate that a change in the game situation such as winning or payout has occurred. It is difficult to grasp whether the channel is being used (whether there is a spare channel) or not, and the sound of “BGM playback” is always in the playback state, so there is not enough room in the channel usage. Atmosphere will be provided. The reproduction channels “00” and “01” are dedicated channels for allocating the various error sounds described above, and the number of channels usable as effect sounds is also reduced.

  In this effect example, when the timing tm12 arrives in a normal section in which there is not enough room in the channel usage status, a normal operation for giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) is performed. Generate a reception effect. As shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and 301 (b), when an effect is received by an operation performed by the player within the operation valid period A (timing tm12 to tm13) for the in-normal reception effect, as shown in FIGS. As one of the post-operation effects in response to the effect reception, “special effect sound A” is assigned to an empty channel (in the figure, channels “08” and “09”) and reproduced. On the other hand, if all of the channels to which “special effect sound A” can be assigned are in use at the time the effect is received within the operation validity period A, one of the sounds in the playback state is forcibly applied in the middle. Either the “special effect sound A” is assigned to the channel in the form of termination and the reproduction is performed, or the process of not reproducing without assigning the “special effect sound A” to the channel is performed.

  However, as described above, in a normal section in which the use situation of the channel does not seem to have room, some players have a sense that the effect reception should not be generated. Therefore, in this effect example, the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) that occurs in a normal section where there is not enough room in the channel usage status is referred to as “non-automatic reception effect not subject to the automatic effect function”. Is to be generated. As a result, the right to select whether or not to produce an effect during the operation validity period A is left to only the player. Automatically generating a reception effect contrary to the player's intention, such as "Let's do it," can be suitably avoided (prevention of useless use of channels by the automatic effect function).

  In other words, unless an operation is performed by the player on the operation means to be operated in the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) without the effect reception being generated. ) Is ended, and no post-operation effects including “special effect sound A” are executed, and the subsequent effect progresses.

  On the other hand, in this effect example, as described above, when the timing tm14 arrives, a silent section appears in which the use condition of the channel seems to have a margin. Then, when the timing tm15 arrives in such a silent section, an in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) for giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) is generated, While removing the feeling of anxiety such as "Maybe there is no room in the channel and it may not be possible to output special production sound", we are actively promoting that the production will be accepted by the operation by the player This is also as described above. Note that when an effect reception occurs within the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) for the soundless reception effect, as shown in FIGS. As one, "special effect sound B" is assigned to an empty channel (channels "10" and "11" in the figure) and reproduced.

  In this regard, regarding the presentation effect within silence (operation effective period B) according to this production example, anxiety such as "maybe there is no available channel and it is not possible to output a special production sound" has been removed. In view of the state, this is to be generated as “automatic reception effect that is targeted for the automatic effect function”. In other words, in this case, the player will no longer have the intention of "do not generate a production reception because there may not be enough available channels," so the reception production is automatically generated against the intention of the player. It is possible to reliably execute the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception within the silence reception effect (operation validity period B) while appropriately avoiding the effect.

  In addition, in the silence reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this production example, regardless of the presence or absence of an operation by the player, until a predetermined timing tm15a within the operation valid period B arrives (operation Effect), or at the latest when the timing tm15a arrives (when the automatic effect function is activated), an effect reception is necessarily generated. Then, as shown in FIGS. 301 (a) and (b), while the "special effect sound B" is in the reproduction state as one of the post-operation effects corresponding to the effect reception, the "BGM reproduction" is performed. The relationship is such that the timing tm17 at which the sound of “” changes from a silent section to a normal section comes.

  According to such a configuration, the silent section of the specific sound data (sound of “BGM playback”) ends in a manner that the “special effect sound B” is inserted into the reproduced “special effect sound B”. Since the data content of the section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, the sound of “BGM reproduction” can be secretly returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode, It is possible to provide an effect sound without discomfort. That is, in this case, when an effect is received in a state where the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output as silence data, the reproduction of “special effect sound B” is started in an unsuppressed manner by a process with high immediateness triggered by this. While doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound gap in the BGM between various effects and the timing of symbol stop after that. As described above, in order to return the sound of “BGM reproduction” to an output in a secretly unsuppressed mode, the above-described reception effect in silence (operation valid period B) is set as an object of the automatic effect function. It can be said that it is important to generate it as “automatic reception effect”.

  Note that during the operation valid period B (timing tm15 to tm16) according to this effect example, the symbols during the symbol change are changed so that all the channels to which the “special effect sound B” can be allocated do not become in use. Execution periods for various notice effects are set respectively.

  FIG. 302 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) will be described in more detail.

  As described above, the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) according to this effect example is a normal reception effect in a period in which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm12 in the section, it is generated as “non-automatic reception effect not targeted by the automatic effect function”. Although illustration is omitted, when the in-normal reception effect (operation validity period A) occurs, a sign effect (for example, FIG. 293 (g)) suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the player. ), But it is desirable that the indication effect is executed as a display content different from the indication effect performed when the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is generated.

  When the operation valid period A corresponding to the normal reception effect is generated, the operation valid period A is terminated due to the effect reception accompanying the operation within the operation valid period A, or the operation valid period A within the operation valid period A is generated. Until the operation validity period A ends without any operation being performed and no effect reception being performed, the mode described with reference to, for example, FIGS. 293 (h) and (l) (or another example thereof) Thus, an image prompting the operation, an image indicating the remaining time, and the like are displayed. Then, when an operation is performed within the operation effective period A and an effect is received, in addition to outputting “special effect sound A” as one of the effects after the operation, FIGS. 293 (j) and (k) ), Another post-operation effect is further executed in the mode described with reference to () or another example thereof. In the case where the effect after the operation is performed stepwise, it is desirable to first output the “special effect sound A” in advance. On the other hand, when the operation validity period A is ended without any operation being performed within the operation validity period A and no effect reception is generated, for example, the mode described with reference to FIG. In another example), an effect situation appears after the operation validity period A ends.

  Here, the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) according to this production example is set as a period from the timing tm12 to the timing tm13 when the “time Ta” has elapsed, and the normal reception effect (operation valid period). When an effect reception occurs in A), the "special effect sound A" is output for "time Tc" longer than "time Ta".

  In other words, in this case, even if an operation is performed by the player immediately after the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) occurs at the timing tm12 and the effect reception is generated, the “special effect sound A” is not generated. As shown in FIG. 302 (a), the signals are allocated to the channels and output until timing tm13a after timing tm13. On the other hand, if an operation is performed by the player immediately before the timing tm13 at which the in-normal reception effect (operation effective period A) ends, an effect reception is generated, the “special effect sound A” is displayed in FIG. As shown in ()), the signals are allocated to the channels until the further delayed timing tm13b and output.

  According to such a configuration, the “special effect sound A” corresponding to the in-normal reception effect (operation effective period A) sets the channel over a wider range, such as timing tm12 to tm13b, which is twice or more than the operation effective period A. It can be understood that it can be used. This means that at timings tm12 to tm13b, at least four channels (BGM in stereo and special effect sound A in stereo) can be used, and that there is no room for empty channels.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 302 and 303, in the normal reception effect according to this effect example, the “time Ta” as the operation effective period A is changed to a later-described silence reception effect (operation effective period B). ) Is set to a time shorter than “time Tb”. This makes it possible to relatively shorten the time (timing tm12 to tm13b) until the output of the “special effect sound A” is completed, and by the generation of the effect sound accompanying the normally accepted effect. It is possible to preferably suppress occurrence of a situation in which channels are insufficient. Also, by making the time as the operation effective period A relatively short in this way, it is possible to show that there is not much room in the empty channel, and during the period in which the automatic production function cannot be activated, It is also possible to create a directing effect that makes it difficult to select whether or not to operate.

  Note that, in this effect example, the output of the “special effect sound A” is terminated at the latest before the timing tm14 for switching to the silence section arrives (FIGS. 302 (a) and (a)). b)). In this regard, according to the above-described configuration in which the timings tm12 to tm13b are relatively short, silence occurs relatively early after the normal reception effect is generated while maintaining the relationship between the timings tm13b and tm14. It is also possible to make a section appear, and it is possible to suitably eliminate stuttering.

  FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining in more detail the technical features of the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) according to this effect example. Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) will be described in further detail.

  As described above, the normal reception effect (operation valid period B) according to this effect example is a silent sound within a period in which specific sound data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to a specific effect pattern is reproduced. Based on the arrival of the timing tm15 in the section, it is generated as “an automatic reception effect targeted by the automatic effect function”.

  As described above, the illustration is omitted, but when the in-silence reception effect (operation validity period B) occurs, a precursor effect indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the player (for example, FIG. 292 ( b)).

  In this regard, although the illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example also performs the predetermined timing even when the symbol variation is performed in a predetermined effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination. Is received, BGM data (sound of “BGM reproduction”) corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern can be output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. However, when the “period of outputting in the suppression mode or silence” is generated in the predetermined effect pattern, after a predetermined time (a certain period) has elapsed from the generation of the period, no reception effect is generated. Thus, the production progress is made to return the BGM data (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) to the production state output in an unsuppressed manner.

  In view of the pachinko machine 1 in which such an effect development (predetermined effect pattern) can appear, the above-mentioned precursor effect (for example, FIG. 292 (b)), it is started after the timing tm14 at which a silent section appears, so that it is difficult to recognize whether or not a reception effect occurs at the time when a silent section appears, and it is nervous. It is desirable to maintain the feeling. Also, at this time, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is higher in the effect development in which the reception effect occurs in the silent section than in the effect progress in which the reception effect does not occur in the silent section.

  Incidentally, in the above-described predetermined effect pattern, the method of outputting the BGM data (sound of “BGM playback”) in a suppressed mode or a silent state is not limited to a method of setting the data contents (volume initial value) itself to the suppressed mode or the silent state. Instead, this may be realized by performing volume adjustment from an initial value. That is, in the predetermined effect pattern, the reception effect cannot be generated while the BGM data (the sound of “BGM reproduction”) is output in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the BGM data (the “BGM reproduction” of the “BGM reproduction”) cannot be generated. Since the timing for returning to the production state in which the sound is output in a non-suppressed manner is not indeterminate but is determined in advance, even when the volume adjustment is performed from the initial value, the above-described sound shift and the like are not performed. No inconvenience occurs.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 303 (a), if an operation valid period B corresponding to the in-silence reception effect has occurred, the effect reception accompanying the operation within the operation valid period B has occurred. For example, FIG. 292 (c) until the operation validity period B ends, or until the operation validity period B ends due to the fact that no operation is performed within the operation validity period B and the effect reception is automatically generated. , (D), an image prompting the operation, an image indicating the remaining time, and the like are displayed.

  Here, the reception effect within silence (operation valid period B) according to this production example is set as a period from timing tm15 to timing tm16 when “time Tb” has elapsed, and the reception effect within silence (operation valid period). When an effect is received within B), the “special effect sound B” is output for “time Td” longer than “time Tb”.

  In other words, in this case, even if the operation by the player is performed immediately after the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs at timing tm15, the effect reception is generated, the “special effect sound B” is not generated. As shown in FIG. 303 (a), the signal is allocated to the channel and output until the timing tm17a after the timing tm17 returning to the normal section. On the other hand, at a timing tm15a (a timing at which a specific time (<time Tb) has elapsed since the operation valid period B occurred) at which the automatic production function is activated in the silent production (operation valid period B) within the silence. When the effect reception is automatically generated, the “special effect sound B” is allocated to the channel until the further delayed timing tm17b and output, as shown in FIG. 303 (b).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the setting process by the player in the “automatic effect mode” is not mounted, and the operation by the player when the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs. If there is no, at the timing tm15a, the "automatic effect function" is always activated and the effect reception is automatically generated. Accordingly, although the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) itself occurs as a period that can be continued from timing tm15 to timing tm16, it is substantially continued only from timing tm15 to timing tm15a. It can be said that it is a period that cannot be obtained. That is, in this case, it is impossible that the effect is accepted within the period from the timing tm15a to the timing tm16. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of the effect, such a disguise period (timing tm15a to tm16) is performed. , The reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) is intentionally generated as a longer period (timing tm15 to tm16) including the above.

  According to such a configuration, unlike the above-described normal reception effect (operation valid period A), there is room in both the number of available channels and the remaining time as the operation valid time B. In such an atmosphere with a sense of security, it is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player, and thereby it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, in order to make the remaining time as the operation effective time B seem to have a margin, the gauge amount on the bar display indicating the remaining time of the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) becomes full at the timing tm15. After the display as the tongue state, it is desirable that the display is made so as to decrease in a mode (speed) at which the value becomes zero as the timing tm16 arrives. Further, in this case, the timing tm15a arrives in a state where the gauge amount related to the bar display is left, and the effect reception is automatically generated. Therefore, the mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f) (or As in the case of another example), the "special effect sound B" is started to be output while the bar display is not displayed and is continuously displayed, so that the normal reception effect (operation validity period A) is started. It is desirable to be able to recognize that the "automatic effect function" has been activated. The bar display thus left is not displayed while “special effect sound B” is in the output state.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the operation effective time B can be substantially shortened than the time recognized by the player (the remaining time indicated by the bar display). For example, if it is assumed that an operation is performed by the player immediately before the timing tm16 when the in-silence reception effect (operation validity period B) ends, an effect reception may be generated. Is assigned to the channel until the further delayed timing tm17c, as shown in FIG. 303 (c), and is output. In this case, the “special effect sound B” corresponding to the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) has a possibility that a channel can be used over an extremely wide range, such as the timing tm15 to tm17c. It can be understood that only the spare channel is lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, as described above, the operation effective time B is substantially shortened (timing tm15 to tm15a) with respect to the time recognized by the player (timing tm15 to tm16). By doing so, the period during which “special effect sound B” according to the reception effect within silence (operation effective period B) can use the channel is determined from the range (timing tm15 to tm17c) shown in FIG. 303 (b) (timing tm15 to tm17b) can be narrowed, and the free channel can be given a margin by that amount.

  However, in the above-described effect example, even if the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is regarded as a substantially shortened period (specific time from timing tm15 to timing tm15a), it is normal. This is set as a longer time than the time Ta set as the internal reception effect (operation validity period A). Employing such a configuration is important in creating an atmosphere with a sense of security that seems to have room for both the number of available channels and the remaining time as the operation effective time B. You can say that.

  Further, in the effect example relating to the silent section described above, the "discomfort caused by returning the sound of" BGM playback "when the operation by the player is received a predetermined time without returning to the non-suppressed mode when the operation is received" is further enhanced. In order to make it difficult to remember, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound B to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, while attention is paid to the special effect sound B having a large initial volume value, the sound of the BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  In addition, in the example of the effect relating to the silent section, the special effect sound B is generated based on the effect reception, but only when a specific effect condition according to the fluctuation pattern or the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. The special effect sound B may be generated based on the reception of the effect. In addition, even when the specific production condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing tm15. (For example, failed sound). Regardless of the operation performed at any timing within the operation validity period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is also desirable to shift to the same manner as in the above-described effect example.

  However, in the case where a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced instead, the reproduction time is made shorter than in the case where the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section after the reproduction of the sound or the like is completed. In this case, even when the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the sound of the BGM reproduction is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is set to the reproduction of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Is set to arrive after the end of.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced, the symbol change is stopped in a loss mode without returning the sound of the BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. Is also good. In this case, at the timing tm14, the assignment of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

  In addition, when the special effect sound B is generated, the display change and the movable effect for operating a predetermined movable body are performed together based on the effect reception, so that the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction is reduced. It is desirable to make the sound of the BGM reproduction secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal section. In this case, when the special effect sound A is generated, it is desirable that only a display change based on the effect reception be performed, and that a movable effect for operating a predetermined movable body is not executed.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output silently in some sections. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Anything can be used. Here, examples of the suppressed aspect include an aspect in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, and an aspect in which the frequency of vibration of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is set by setting a time-series period in which the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel itself is suppressed or silenced. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence only by reproducing this without making adjustments. However, it is not always necessary to set the time series period in which the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to the predetermined channel itself is suppressed or silence. For example, at the timing tm14, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is not set. Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (or mute). That is, in this case, even if the effect reception is generated at the timing tm15a, the process of raising the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is not performed with the effect of the effect reception. . Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing tm17 comes, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) is performed. On the other hand, when the specific production condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of “BGM reproduction” is specified while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound or the like) is being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value from the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of “BGM playback” may be set to a specific value after the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (such as a failed effect sound) is completed. (A process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the symbol fluctuation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the restriction process is performed so as to make it difficult to generate a new sound assignment to an empty channel at least during a period from a predetermined timing before the timing tm14 arrives to a timing tm17. Is desirable. In addition, as such a restriction process, for example, a specific game which has no relation to the result of whether or not a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol change during execution, such as a hold winning sound, a general electric production sound, a volume adjustment sound, etc. It is desirable that the sounds be subject to restriction and that the specific game sounds subject to the restriction not be reproduced without being newly assigned to the channel.

  When it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is to be played on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing tm14 arrives. (It is desirable that the sound is effect sound or dialogue sound, not music, so that the sound does not overlap with the sound), and the timing tm14 arrives while the specific effect sound is being played and the BGM is played. Is desirably output in a suppressed mode or silent. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction has been set to the suppression mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of the specific effect sound is ended before (or at or before) the timing tm15 at which the special effect sound B (or the predetermined effect sound) can be output. This is desirable in relieving anxiety that the special effect sound B is not output.

  When it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol change according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of the BGM playback is started from the timing at which the special effect sound B (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable that the effect sound be output on a plurality of channels until the timing tm17 when the suppression mode or the silence state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound B are output, the sound of the BGM reproduction can be easily mixed into the effect sound, and the sound of the BGM reproduction can be output. It is possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the normal mode.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example may also be provided with a setting process by the player according to the “automatic effect mode”. That is, in this case, when the “automatic effect mode” is set, the automatic effect function is activated when a predetermined timing comes even within the normal reception effect (operation effective period A), and the effect reception is generated. . On the other hand, if the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) occurs when the automatic effect mode is set, the automatic effect function is activated when a predetermined timing before the above-mentioned timing tm15a comes. It is desirable that the effect be enabled and the effect reception be generated.

  In the example of the above-mentioned effects, the execution periods of various announcement effects and the like during symbol fluctuation are set so that the number of available channels does not become 0 even during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A). You may make it. The point is that the sound of “BGM reproduction” is continuously output in a non-suppressed manner, so long as it provides an atmosphere in which the user feels that there is no room in the available channels. Conversely, the number of vacant channels may become zero even during the execution period of the in-silence reception effect (operation valid period B). In short, it is only necessary that the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, so as to provide an atmosphere in which it is felt that there is room in the available channels.

  In the above production example, "special production sound A" is allocated to channels "08" and "09", whereas "special production sound B" is allocated to channels "10" and "11". The "special effect sound A" and "special effect sound B" may be assigned to the same channel.

  In the above-described effect example, the precursor effect for the in-silence reception effect (operation effective period B) is set to be started after the timing tm14 at which the silent period appears. However, the indication effect may be started before the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears, and the timing tm14 at which the silent section appears during the execution of the indication effect may come. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect such as whether or not a silent section appears while the indication effect is being performed.

  In the above-described effect example, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target in the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). In the normal reception effect (operation valid period A), the operation is performed as a reception effect with the operation button 410 as the operation target, whereas in the silent reception operation (operation valid period B), the sword decoration body 5001 is set as the operation target. It may be performed as a received reception effect. In this case, different simulation images (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) during the execution period of the normal reception effect (operation valid period A) and during the execution period of the silent reception effect (operation valid period B). When the effect is started after the operation in the reception effect, the mimic image is not displayed as in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 287 (or another example thereof). Alternatively, the effect may be started after the operation while the display is continuously displayed.

  In the above-mentioned effect example, in the specific effect pattern, the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) is generated only once during the normal section, but the non-automatic reception is performed during the normal section. A normal reception effect (operation effective period A) as an effect may be generated a plurality of times. However, it is desirable that the post-operation effects be executed in the normal reception effects. On the other hand, in a silent section in a specific effect pattern, while the “special effect sound B” is being reproduced, the “sound of BGM reproduction” is secretly output in a non-suppressed manner. It is desirable that the effect (operation effective period B) is generated only once. Then, it is desirable that the post-operation effect by the normal reception effect (operation effective period A) and the post-operation effect by the silent reception effect (operation effective period B) have different effect contents.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of another condition different from the condition of symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when a game ball is received in the starting port (the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004), a determination regarding a hit is made. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit symbol is displayed, and then a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained is executed, and after the big hit game, the player has an advantage. It can be controlled to the appropriate gaming state (time saving state, probable change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an effect in accordance with the result of the hit determination (for example, various announcement effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect in addition to the effect pattern). , Etc.) can be executed, thereby maintaining the game entertainment until the big hit game is performed, as described above.

  However, by merely performing an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, the display change on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) becomes monotonous and it is difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the display content and the movable state of the effect display device 1600 can be determined even when another condition irrelevant to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (the start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied. A process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the decorative body can be executed. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operation rate for a long period. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition irrelevant to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol change (the start condition of the symbol game) is established, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the methods listed below can be envisaged as the methods for generating. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a technique different from any of the techniques listed below may be adopted. However, a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. Is in a state of “0”), the above-mentioned different condition must be satisfied. Even if the different condition is satisfied in this situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
-A method of periodically performing a production lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuation, and assuming that the specific result is obtained by this production lottery as "the establishment of another condition".-The cumulative number of times of operation for specific operation means Is determined to be the above-mentioned "establishment of another condition" that the predetermined number is satisfied.-The time is measured by the RTC (real-time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a (or the main control MPU 1310a) (for example, when the power is turned on). The time from the start is measured), and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, the above-mentioned “satisfaction of another condition” is used.

  In general, in a pachinko machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, another condition is assumed to be satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing arrives Because it is common to require a relatively long time (at least a few hours, for example), the display contents or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite such a long time. If an impossible situation occurs, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as a symbol game start condition. Can be generated based on the satisfaction of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located at the original position in spite of the situation that should be located at the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the symbol change may occur. When the corresponding restoration operation timing has arrived, it is possible to start processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body, while the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even when a predetermined restoration operation time has arrived, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is not started, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at the predetermined time within the specific state can be started. .

  In other words, in this case, in a specific state that can be generated based on a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game being established, the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation according to the symbol variation side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the specific state, the movable body abnormality is determined in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. By restoring, it is expected that the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 304, an example of the processing content when operating the movable decorative body when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 304, for the sake of convenience of explanation, when the elapsed time from the power-on is determined to have reached a predetermined time using the RTC function, the display contents different from those before the RTC state ( A specific state), and a process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (the specific state). " As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. As described above, it is also possible to appropriately employ the techniques described below when other techniques are employed.

  If the RTC state (specific state) is in a state before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches the predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time and an RTC state (specific state) is generated, and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on this, the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed. As described above, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the satisfaction of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) irrespective of the situation of the symbol fluctuation, so that the flow of the game up to now can be improved. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it were changing. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is caused to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), If a jackpot is won during the period from the occurrence of the period (RTC state) to the end thereof, when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state), the production progress by the production character which cannot appear (normal state) ( It is more desirable to provide a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, even at timing Rt1 slightly before such timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), a condition irrelevant to the situation of the symbol variation is established. Based on the fulfillment of the condition (the fulfillment of the first condition), the front display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the fulfillment of the second condition) can be executed. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this example determines whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the lapse of time since the power is turned on. Is determined to have arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and if it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decorative body) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. . The “previous display” can be executed as, for example, a display such as “RTC state is coming soon” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations result in a big hit determination. It is suggested to the player in advance that the game is not based on the game (it does not have any jackpot expectation degree), so that it is possible to appropriately avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. Will be able to

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at least in the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) that does not show any degree of expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) is not displayed so as not to be displayed. In other words, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process for causing the game to start is started, it is expected that the player's interest in the game is prevented from deteriorating due to an erroneous recognition by the player.

  Here, the “previous display appearing at the timing Rt1” and the “movable body operation appearing at the timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display not conforming to the pattern variation” and correspond to “the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the pattern variation”. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated irrespective of the execution state (including the execution or non-execution) of the symbol change at those timings. However, depending on the execution state of the symbol change, a situation in which preparation for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is not completed (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are returned to their original positions despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). There is a concern that processing for sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may not be performed even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, There is a case where a movable effect using the movable decorative body C is executed. However, during the execution of the movable effect, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state (here, when the RTC state occurs) arrives. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of execution cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative bodies that do not conform to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change comes, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also the various types of pachinko machine 1 included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in the movable abnormality determination (abnormality determination), predetermined movable decorative bodies are determined with respect to the movable decorative body to be determined in the form following the abnormality determination processing. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), early restoration of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is enabled. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state may be reached during the execution of the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) on the movable decorative body. When there is, at least a movable decorative body in the middle of the restoration operation among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation” described above. Can be assumed.

  The “restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation” is, for example, a symbol variation start timing (a timing at which a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a is acquired when the symbol variation is started) or a symbol variation. It can be executed as at least one of the stop timings (the timing at which the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) is executed (the restoration process is executed based on the command acquisition). It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 1511a) shown in FIG. 304, first, at least when the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives, the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative body A and the movable decorative body B) used in the period , The movable decorative body C) is prohibited so as not to be used as a movable effect in accordance with the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, whereby the movable member operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the body) can be suppressed from being unable to be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, even if an effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if there is a case where the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern, there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at the timing Rt1, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That was mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, when there is a symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, “what kind of expected The display which is not shown at all times (display from timing Rt1) "is not hidden at this time, but is displayed over the period up to timing Rt2a at which the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect is displayed in the effect display device 1600 despite the fact that the RTC state (specific state) occurs and the symbol variation is actually performed. Only the display in which the effect pattern by the symbol is hidden and no expected degree is shown appears. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state progresses. It is expected that it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the symbol variation (in the figure, the B variation (losing) in the drawing) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display not showing any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)” which has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is changed. The display which shows the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” comes. At least until the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is prohibited. In this state, only the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by disabling the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited. Deterioration of interest will be suppressed.

  As such prohibition processing, it is determined whether or not the situation is to be prohibited at the start of the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, C fluctuation), and when it is determined that the situation is to be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (FIG. In the meantime, C fluctuation itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (at least a movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body is changed according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Even if the period until the operation in the specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed "is completed, the movable effect (the period until the symbol change is completed) is completed. The execution of the movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) is not allowed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the timing for making the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) appear after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a which is later than the original timing Rt2. Is likely to decrease. However, the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, but the production bonus due to the occurrence of the RTC state (when a big hit is won between the time the RTC state occurs and the time it ends), the special production mode is controlled. ) Does not occur at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the symbol fluctuations that have been digested first after the occurrence of the RTC state are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the time when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, the B fluctuation (losing) in the drawing), which was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, is terminated (stopped) (before the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, C), a period until the operation is completed) may be assumed. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which “display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)” is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 304, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (around timing Rt2) is subject to the effect of the RTC effect. It is not.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), at least after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives, the movable decorative body is specified in the specific mode by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is finished ", the restoration process triggered by this even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change has arrived By prohibiting this (a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation) is performed. The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be suppressed from becoming impossible due to the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol changing side is performed. The process of causing the symbol change to be prohibited is performed, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored in a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the movement, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the above-described specific mode will be more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example illustrated in FIG. 304, when the game is controlled to the normal game state and the symbol is changed in accordance with the jackpot determination (in the figure, the A change (losing)) is being performed. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “RTC state will soon appear” on the background display of the effect display device 1600 appears as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation. Then, the symbol change (in the figure, the A change (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as “RTC state is coming soon” and the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 comes at a stage when the symbol change is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, the three movable shapes of the movable decorative body do not conform to the symbol change. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. The “display not according to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

  Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A, During the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, even though the symbol variation (in the diagram, the B variation (losing)) is being performed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display is controlled as a period in which none of the display on which the degree of expectation is indicated, the movable effect on the symbol variable side (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation), and the restoration process on the symbol variable side are not executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 304, during the period of timings Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The control is performed as a period in which neither the movable body operation indicating the degree) nor the symbol-variation-side restoration processing is executed (second restriction).

  Note that the control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both of the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the expected degree) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the expected degree) are not executed) It is executed even if the symbol change in the period is not the loss change but the one performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit change). That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the middle of execution at timing Rt2a, the big hit symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who expected to be in the RTC state can enjoy the surprising effect beyond the expectation. After the big hit symbol appears, a big hit game state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially performing operations.

  Also, as described above, with respect to the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which even the decoration symbol is not changed and the degree of expectation is not shown), the symbol change which was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrived is not changed. The display is not displayed at the stop timing Rt2a, and a specific background after the occurrence of the RTC state (eg, “during the RTC state”) is displayed instead. Further, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (“RTC state” or the like) is displayed, an effect display (expected degree is indicated) according to the variation pattern. Will be executed as usual. However, for the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the timing after the timing Rt2a arrives unless the processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Is also maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the jackpot determination, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected, Although the display in the liquid crystal, the sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the like are executed as usual, the movable decorative body is not operated.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 304, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. , C (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) until the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change (here, the start of the symbol change). Timing, stop timing), the restoration process (the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state) triggered by the timing is prohibited. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at the timing Rt2a, at the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (losing in the figure)). )) (Recovery operation time) has come. In these recovery operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. No processing is performed.

  However, in the period between the timings Rt2 and Rt5 (when the timing is abnormal, the timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side, first, at the timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A enters the abnormal state. It is determined whether or not it is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A means, for example, that the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (first position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body A to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on a result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B means, for example, that the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (second position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. This can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C means, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (third position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body C to the original position.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (e), when the timing Rt5 after the operations of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially completed comes, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. The “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the design variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in an abnormal state in any of the abnormality determinations, a process of causing the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is executable. However, while a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) are performed when the RTC state occurs, a predetermined state is determined for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. If the player feels that the player is performing the restoring operation, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable (Sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C) is not performed independently as an operation, but is performed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. . That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. In addition, it is possible to appropriately prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 304 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, an abnormal state including an operation of restoring (restoring) the movable decorative body B, not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation). The processing for operating (special operation) in the operation mode described above can be executed. Thereafter, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B may be the same as the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B, or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred. Until the timing to operate is reached, this is intentionally left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. Then, when the timing to operate the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoring operation instead of the normal operation mode. It is possible to restore the abnormally movable movable body B while appropriately maintaining the effect mode at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state has been performed. , A decrease in gaming interest can be suitably avoided.

  In addition, in the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. The operation is started at an intermediate stage, and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) arrive. Since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is performed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), regarding the “special mode including the restoring operation” when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “normal operation” As long as the movable decorative body B is restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the “mode”, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position may be used.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, at timing Rt1, only a display (eg, "RTC state soon") that does not show any degree of expectation appears as display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”). May be switched to. However, even when the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any degree of expectation (design variation). Is important.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoring operation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in the specific mode is set as the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy the conditions based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation on the side of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, it is determined that “the symbol fluctuation does not conform. Display "and" the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design fluctuation ". However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation on the main control MPU 1310a side, “display not conforming to pattern fluctuation” or “behavior of a movable decorative body that does not conform to pattern fluctuation” May be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 304, “after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, 3 During the period until the movable movable bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated), so that the restoration process on the symbol variation side is not performed, and thereby the RTC state is set. The operation of the movable body in a specific mode in the (specific state) (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) is made difficult to occur due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and eventually, the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed. It is feared that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is also performed during the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 305 is a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 304. “During the period between timings Rt1 and Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C of various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. This is different from the example shown in FIG. 304 in that "restore processing is not executed".

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 305, during the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state, abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or , Restoration processing) itself. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display that does not conform to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state is coming soon”) is displayed, this is restored. It is left unattended in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 305, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed before executing the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed to determine whether any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is determined that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived and FIG. , The processing described above (processing relating to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, an abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is separately performed again, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, an operation in a normal mode (see FIG. 304 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, an operation in a special mode (see FIG. 304 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is performed.

  On the other hand, prior to executing the processing relating to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, the abnormality determination is performed, and as a result, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality. In such a case, the restoration process is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is that "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in the abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 305 (f), at the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation timing in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet come. It is assumed that as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started", any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is determined to be abnormal. Then, while maintaining the “state in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal has been maintained. Will be executed.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 305 (e) and (f), compared to the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal, the RTC state in the RTC state is not exceeded. The arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b in the drawing), and a period created by such a delay (the timings Rt2 to Rt2b in the drawing) is used. Thus, after the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation timing in the RTC state can be reached. Thereafter, when the movable body operation timing in the RTC state arrives, the processing described above with reference to FIG. 304 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 305 (f), it is assumed that, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 304 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the normal state, respectively, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation” when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Is terminated, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 305 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 304 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in a mode (movable decorative bodies A and C are in a normal state and movable decorative body B is in a special mode) according to each determination result. When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation” at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is ended, and the symbol-variation-side restoration process is inhibited (the inhibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (reconstruction operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if a movable abnormality occurs during the movable body operation immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body operations (here, three (The sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be appropriately maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 305, when there is an abnormality in the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing is sequentially performed on the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state, and then the RTC state is restored. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored increases, a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state are performed. ) Is delayed for a longer time, but a series of movable body operations when the RTC state occurs can be executed in a normal mode. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable decorations may be performed in parallel, and in this case, a delay time until a series of movements of the movable body when the RTC state occurs is started can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 305, if the player side feels that the predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, it may be awkward to play the game. Is likely to decrease. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to timings Rt5a and Rt5b including a restoring operation appearing at timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations when an RTC state occurs”. This makes it difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal situations, a display (such as an error code) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 305 (f) and (g) as well as in the example shown in FIG. 304 (f), during the period when the restoration operation (restoration processing) is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination or during the period when the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination). Display (error code etc.) does not appear. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and FIG. At the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially start operation after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings. There is no such thing as causing a change. These facts also make it seem that only a “series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state” is being performed, and perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. This is important in making recognition difficult.

  Note that, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 305 and the other example, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state. Not limited to the above, the movable decorative body (one, two, three or more or the like) used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is determined based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition). What is necessary is just to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation timing in the specific state that occurs.

  Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, operably provided. An operation button 410, a sword decoration body 5001, etc., and a board-side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movable effecting unit 3200, a specific decoration member SDY (a mattress) )) May be used.

  However, for example, in FIG. 304 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 305 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state), the operating means is used. When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, even after the timing Rt2a arrives, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means is used. A situation where “operation not conforming to symbol fluctuation” is being performed may occur.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display that has been displayed up to that time “display without any expected degree (from timing Rt1) Display) is not displayed at this time, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol change (in the diagram, a C change (loss)) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the change in the symbol change is performed. As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern or the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) which is also used as the operation means is not provided. Despite being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means, A situation that causes confusion in the production can occur. In the period between the timings Rt2 and Rt2a (and the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2 before that), only a display that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation (a display that does not show any degree of expectation) appears. Even if a symbol change (in the figure, a C change (losing)) is performed, no operation opportunity is given within the period.

  In spite of the fact that the specific operation means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being subjected to the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operation means is determined according to the result of the big hit determination. In the case where the presentation time for the given operation opportunity has come, the presentation display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation unit. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is determined that the specific operating means is originally provided with an operation opportunity. It is possible to suggest to the person appropriately. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation on the specific operation unit, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a failure or abnormality due to the operation performed on the specific operation unit in the operation state. Will be as expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation unit is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation of the specific operation unit is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress of the effect. Therefore, of the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operable operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative bodies 5001) provided on the door frame 3 side, the operation effect in the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is provided. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the ratio of occurrence of the operation effect in the symbol variation is relatively high. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when the operation is performed (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) be executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be able to operate (for example, vibrate) or the sword decorative bodies 5001), the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) having a relatively low ratio of operation effects in the interior of the movable decoration body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in a state in which the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is being used for a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the movable decorative body ( For example, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an effect timing for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination to the sword decoration 5001) comes.

  In addition, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is moved to the movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When using as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is performed independently of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform the operation using the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 304) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 305) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected (delayed or the like) by performing these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performing a restoration operation, the movable decorative bodies are provided on the door frame 3 side while eliminating the possibility of interference with the movable decorative bodies. The operation by the frame-side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the rate of occurrence of operation effects within the symbol variation is relatively low When the time required to complete the operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol variation according to 5001)) is set to “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination has been executed. Even in this case, as long as at least “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the symbol change (start of the effect pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, even if a symbol change having any effect pattern is started at timing Rt2a in FIG. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) Operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, so that the effect of the RTC state can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

  In addition, as described above, in consideration of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only in a symbol variation after a symbol variation that has been first digested after the RTC state occurs, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, The operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) of the sword decoration body 5001) that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the design variation that is digested first afterwards must be started later than this, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is delayed by the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Can be provided with a margin for completing the operation that does not conform to the symbol fluctuations in advance.

  Also, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoring operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation, or to perform the normal operation in the form following the restoration operation and the subsequent operation. The “special mode including the restoring operation” in this case also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  The operation performed when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) includes “normal state”, “special mode including a restoring operation”, and “restoring operation”. Unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, even when any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed in a normal mode or a mode when an abnormality is determined, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) An operation opportunity can be provided to the user.

  Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (RTC) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is reduced. It is no longer possible to accept effects, and there is a concern that gaming entertainment may decline. Therefore, when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed in the normal state, and the time from the timing Rt2 required until the completion is set as the “special time”, the big hit determination is performed. Even if any of the effect patterns according to the above are executed, as long as neither the “specific time” nor the “special time” has elapsed since the symbol change started (the effect pattern started), In order to prevent a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001)), each effect pattern (inside the operational opportunity giving timing). It is desirable to perform the setting according to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. Is desirably prohibited so that the timing Rt2 arrives while the abnormal state is intentionally maintained.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A in which the operation sequence is early, or the movable decorative body that requires a long time for the restoration operation) is not changed. When an abnormal state occurs during the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body is prohibited, but the movable decorative body is different from a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body is late in operation order). When the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body requiring a short restoring operation is in an abnormal state within the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The processing (restoring operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC occurs. This is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in a normal state if the operation can be completed during the operation.

  The timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the RTC state occurs, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. The timing may be different.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (the peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state in which the specific state has not occurred), it responds to a symbol change. When the restoration operation timing (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body can be executed. However, if such a restoration process is performed irrespective of the state of the effect, it is annoying, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may decrease.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned “start time of symbol fluctuation” is set as “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Then, as shown in FIG. 306, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processing. Will be executed.
The effect pattern is set based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is started, and the effect pattern set is changed according to the set effect pattern. In particular, based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is acquired when the process for making the effect progress and the symbol change is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change), For performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example illustrated in FIG. 306, it is assumed that a “specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm <b> 2 within the symbol variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect development concerning the “specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to be operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation appears in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern is executable, the effect pattern (a relatively expected degree of expectation) that is in a direct relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in an effect pattern having a paired relationship (an effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation" is performed. You. In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a stage relationship with each other in effect (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body, and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body), at the specific timing tm2 (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate). Can be executed, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by such effect.

  However, if the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation may still be in an execution state at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol change is started, the specific timing It becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a state where it cannot perform a staging operation despite the arrival of tm2. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol fluctuation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the effect of the effect on the “specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2” among the effect patterns, and the predetermined progress for the specific movable decorative object When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change) appears in parallel, until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation, The process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the movable decorative body "is terminated. In addition, various methods can be adopted as “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”. The process in which the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached is executed. "

  More specifically, with respect to the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of the abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time it takes to be done will be different. For example, when only the first restoration operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body and the abnormal state is resolved and the original movable position is restored (restored), the “recovery of the specific movable decorative body by a predetermined restoration operation” is performed. The timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times that this operation is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) is repeated. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is postponed so as to shift to a later time. At the latest, when the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but the restoration operation is performed once more, the timing exceeds the timing tx. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration state is terminated. Become like

  In addition, when it is assumed that performing the restoring operation for a specific movable decorative body once requires x time, one symbol is set so that a relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. An upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and when the upper limit number n is reached, even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state.

  According to such a configuration, the effect development relating to the specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative object to operate at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative object are respectively performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, at the specific timing tm2, the specific movable decorative body is not restored. Since the movable decorative body is brought into the stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decorative body is in a stop state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, it is possible to give a hope that the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in actuality, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decorative body has an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result in which an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When not provided, it is possible to exemplify a "display effect that appears in advance in such a manner as to inspire whether or not a specific display result appears", and the specific movable decorative body is " That operates based on the effect received by the operation by the player (or that the effect is received but does not operate) "," the effect that causes a specific display to prompt the operation by the player " Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 306, the specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx at which “the process of performing the predetermined restoring operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed. It is assumed that the status has been changed to normal. As described above, at the start of the change (or the “restoring operation timing” such as the last stop of the symbol), the specific timing tm2 in the symbol change arrives after being restored to the normal state even if it is in the abnormal state. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to perform a specific movable decorative body in a staging operation.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation timing arrives. Becomes That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to include a movable decorative body that performs a multi-stage movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body requires a longer time until its restoration process is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, or an effect pattern having a relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the time is shorter than the time required for the specific timing tm2 to arrive after the symbol change starts (more preferably, the time required for the predetermined effect to be performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, each time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner. It could be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU 1310a side. When the special effect pattern is selected based on the transmitted command, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol change corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the particular movable pattern is selected. The control is performed so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the design change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress according to the special effect pattern And a process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (a period until the symbol is stopped). Does not end the restoration process, and continues this.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the original movable position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoring process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale mode (for example, the normal diagnosis is performed even after the restoration, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed). Since the special effect pattern can be performed, the special effect pattern functions as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player is also carefully restored as described above. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with confidence. In this regard, in this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses in the big hit determination. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait” is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) and (d), the timing tm11 comes when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Thus, when the special effect pattern is performed, the restoring process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and continued after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, the constraint that “even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration processing must be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed” is eliminated. This makes it possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

  However, at timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case where the effect of holding the game is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation timing (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) comes. At this time, if it is assumed that the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not being located at the original position). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body may be newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the processing content naturally has a limit, and failure to adequately cope with abnormalities may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 307A (b) and (d), the restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Sometimes, when the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start time) has arrived, the restoration process in the execution state is not terminated but is continued over the next restoration operation timing. . According to such a configuration, even if the suspension during the execution of the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is in any state, the message "Even though the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, The constraint that the restoration process must be performed for each unit in which the symbol change is performed "is removed, so that the restoration process in a more full-scale mode can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 307A (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol change being started when the restoration process is being performed on a specific movable decorative body, the new symbol change is started. In some cases, a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a symbol variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 307A (a) to 307 (c), the processing is started from timing tm11 irrespective of the state of the game or the effect (and the state of the restoration, etc.) after the end of the special effect pattern. As for the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the processing within a time shorter than the time required for performing the predetermined effect). Even in such a configuration, in addition to the time of the timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movement can be performed for a relatively long time until the time of the timings tm12 to tx ends. The restoration process for the decorative body can be performed continuously.

  After the special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, if a situation appears in which a special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed, After the restoring process is not completed within a new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoring / diagnosis) and straddling three or more symbol variations (effect patterns) (after one restoring process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 307A, at the timing tx at which “the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the state is reached. As described above, by performing one restoration process over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol change start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally can be obtained. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decorative body can be produced at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal at the timing tx, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol change is terminated from the timing tx, and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoring operation timing further arrives. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body has not been executed, each time the restoration operation timing (here, the symbol change start timing) arrives, the specific movable decorative body is set. In some cases, the restoration process for the movable decorative body is started many times. If the specific movable decorative body is broken to such an extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced by simply repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the number of times of execution of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. (Despite the above, when it is not restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable that the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above-described predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, the special effect patterns for a predetermined upper limit number and the special effect patterns are displayed. One restoration process may be continued so as to straddle the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, it is not restored from the abnormal state even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the “+1” -th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without ending. As described above, regarding the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation timings, the predetermined upper limit number is set regardless of how many times the restoration operation timing arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat the count as a single restoration process so as not to end it, so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

  By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation timing corresponding to a symbol change), a board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back decoration unit). In addition to the middle movable effecting unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain), the frame-shaped movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner described above. You. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, and the like) which is also used as an operation means is provided. However, there is a case where restoration (return) is performed in a mode different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol change is performed, the operation operation giving effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A system effect pattern (eg, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 252) is prepared. Then, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 252 (f))" “Process for generating an effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))”, and further “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”) and bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period ) (See FIG. 252 (f)). " Then, as a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, pushed in operation) and the effect is received, based on the effect reception, the “special decorative member SDY (draft material) ), Etc. (refer to FIG. 252 (g)) and “Process for causing a change in display content (refer to FIG. 252 (g))”. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body that is effected in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A.

  However, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, and is not performed normally. While being executable when in the state, the “process for generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001” and the “process for performing a display for prompting the operation” are performed when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state. It can be executed both in a certain time and in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player who has viewed the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is received, “Processing for effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (robin)” and “Processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are performed. In addition, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 is subjected to an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part is operated, thereby causing the abnormal state. May naturally be eliminated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided and the sword decorative body 5001) which is also used as the operating means is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a return process of applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307A). Restoration processing) at the respective timings of “the above-described restoration operation timing (in this case, the start timing of the symbol change)” and “after the effect is received by the player's operation in the effect pattern of the movable operation system”. Executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body is aimed at timing such as when the symbol change starts or stops (more precisely, after the start or after the stop). While the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the timing at the time of starting or stopping the symbol change, as well as another unique timing (during the change period) Of these, the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) is aimed at a timing at which an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation by the player) to eliminate the abnormal state. ) Is performed, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in the abnormal state can be quickly restored. .

  FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 returns to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 308, an effect pattern of the movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 during the period in which the symbol change is performed) is executed. It is assumed that “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, or effect reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and the effect is received (timing tm22) during execution of the bar display indicating the remaining time of the game (timing tm22), it is determined that the “special decoration member SDY (draft)” or the like is displayed. The process of effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body and the process of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 308, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 306 and 307A is caused to perform as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 308, at the timing tm22 when the effect is received, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 does not return to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that has performed the effect operation based on the effect reception It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (the board-side movable decorative body) and cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are respectively performed, and the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. Neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying the determination is performed, and the determination that the abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is performed along with the specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification is performed. This means that the decorative sword body 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if an abnormal state is notified, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of reach of the player (gaming board 5)”, and this is an abnormal state. This is because, as a result, the player cannot help anything, and merely emphasizes that the mobile effect is not executed, which may promote a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 308, while performing the “process of performing a specific movable decorative body for performing the operation” based on the reception of the performance at the timing tm22, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body. Although it will occur, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” to be performed as usual. It is desirable to make it difficult. Then, after this, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern change is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, at the timing tm23, the already-suspended symbol fluctuation is immediately (eg, after 0.6 seconds) digested (started), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 306 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol change. ), The timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, at the start of symbol change) for the sword decoration 5001, the "specific movable decoration" A process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the body "and a process of performing an operation (applying a driving force) so as to return the original position to at least a part of the operations are performed in parallel. In addition, the timing at which the “processing for causing the sword decoration 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it starts).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is resolved and the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since the continuation does not occur, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of annoying when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is started / terminated and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decorative body 5001 is started / terminated are the same. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  As for “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 307A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue even after the end of the special effect pattern, the design fluctuation in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoring operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled, the process (one restoring process) can be executed without ending the process. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoring operation ”can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 307A). That is, in this case, also regarding the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It is executed in the form of the following, but it should be finished regardless of the restoration state between the start of the next symbol change and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives. Become.

  After the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( If a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that at the timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively ended, but the restoration has failed. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. The symbol change is stopped at the timing tm24.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific movable decorative body is subjected to an external force (no driving force by a motor or the like is applied) within a period of timing tx to tm2 within a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to a normal state), the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body during the period from timing tx to tm2 can be said to be an abnormal situation. In such a low reliability situation, even if a specific movable decorative body performs a staging operation, there is a high possibility that it will fail, so avoiding this will suppress the decline in gaming interest. It can be said that it is desirable in doing.

  Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the state returns to the abnormal state, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. That is, when the restoration process for the decorative sword 5001 fails and the notification is performed each time the abnormal state is returned again, a misunderstanding is given as if the player is liable that the abnormal state is not resolved. Since it may be impossible, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality occurrence from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) arriving after the timing tm24 causes the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament to be changed. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state. Then, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 308, the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is removed. Assuming that the effect has been accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is directed by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is thereafter changed to the original. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). At this time, in consideration of the fact that the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect, a period in which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (one time) Is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body returns to the original position). It is desirable to end the processing before the return is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being performed. However, in view of the fact that there is a few chances that the return possibility of the sword decoration body 5001 that has not been able to be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the original position. When the process of applying the driving force to return to the normal state (return operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is restored to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is finished. The process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position is continuously performed (the return operation to the sword decoration 5001 is performed again) so that the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, so that the player can recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if the return process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 308, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) to the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, The effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are in the normal state, and the pattern change is stopped at the timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 308, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) used also as the operating means is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol change), a restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is received) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even in the abnormal state, the original state is maintained. Since an opportunity to return to the position is given more, and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning using at least an external force) are used as a method of returning, an abnormal state is eliminated. The likelihood of a game being played is increased, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position after the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player has been started. The driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player) in this process, it is necessary to perform the process differently from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, this process is performed in a simple manner such that the return process is completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the return status, and if the return fails, a more full-fledged operation will be performed at the next restore operation timing. It is desirable that a proper return process be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 308, the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed by that number of times. Nevertheless, even if a new restoration operation timing (in this case, a symbol change start timing) has arrived, the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not to be newly started even if the restoration operation is not started from the abnormal state. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player after the operation system effect pattern is started, the sword decoration body 5001 is removed after the effect reception. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after the effect is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be restored by external force (operation by the player) is increasing. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the process without giving up, even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is abandoned. Therefore, “the process of generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 252 (f))”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”), and bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period (See FIG. 252 (f)) "), it is important that the process is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is abandoned.

  Also, the first operation opportunity is provided so that the sword decoration 5001 is pushed in the state where it is located at the operation position (operates to a specific detection position), and is pushed when the sword decoration body 5001 is at the original position (to the specific detection position). If the operation means is provided such that the second operation opportunity may be given to the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state, the effect may be accepted even if the effect is received at the second operation opportunity. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect reception is generated at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the operation amount of the operation part is relatively small, and it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been eliminated is naturally low.

  In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player, the process of giving a driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily performed. It may not be executed on the condition that it has been performed, for example, may be executed after the end of the effect reception period.

  Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 304 to 308, the symbol change start time (and further, the timing after the reception of the effect) is exemplified as the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol change. The timing may be a predetermined timing at least on condition that the symbol change is executed. For example, the timing may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time. When the symbol change stop time is used as the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoring process is started based on a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol change is stopped. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the held specific effect pattern arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern which has been stored and consumed. Will be performed.

  In addition, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may have a different appearance frequency depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special production state, the normal production state It is desirable that the game can be played such that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than in the case of the above.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 307A, the abnormal state is maintained for a period after the next effect pattern corresponding to the symbol change is started. , One restoration process for the movable decorative body can be continuously executed. However, in this case, even if a new restoring operation timing (for example, a symbol change start timing) arrives while one restoring process is continuously executed, the restoring process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. Since it is not started, and it is continued without ending one restoration process that is already in the execution state, a movable object different from the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is It is important to determine at what timing the restoration process for the other movable decorative body is started when the decorative body newly enters an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed at a new restoring operation timing (next (The start time of the symbol fluctuation). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from a specific movable decorative body during a period from the timing tm11 elapse to a new restoring operation timing (a start timing of the next symbol change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both methods 1 and 2”, or “both methods 1 and 3” is employed to perform the restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

  Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such as “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body”, When a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoring process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) ), The restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed is treated as valid, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing). A restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference occurs between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of the movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such as “both a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, and a specific After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) is determined based on the arrival of the new restoring operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoring operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not been executed yet is treated as being effective. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body), it is necessary to wait until one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies will be expected.

  Method 3: At least in a case where both the specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring operation time (a next symbol change start time). Without performing the restoration process on the other movable decorative body (panel-side movable body), after waiting for the completion of one restoration process on the specific movable decorative body, The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration body that is not in the execution state yet. Will be treated as invalid with respect to any of the restoration processes for, and unless one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, No processing is performed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take a sufficient measure against the abnormality, so that it is expected that the speed at which these movable decorative bodies deteriorate is reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C, a mode (methods 1 to 3 and the like) when a new restoring operation timing (symbol change start timing and end timing, etc.) arrives during execution of the restoring operation will be described. It will be described in detail.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the sake of convenience of description, as the movable decorative bodies that can perform a staging operation, a first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned “specific movable decorative body”), a second movable decorative body, At least a third movable decorative body, a fourth movable decorative body, and a fifth movable decorative body are provided. Then, when only one of the movable decorative bodies is not in the normal state, the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state are “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”. Regardless of the “movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, or the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decorative body which is not in the normal state is a restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change (design) The restoration operation (restoration process) is started when the start timing and the end timing of the fluctuation have arrived.

  However, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, all of the movable decoration bodies that are not in the normal state perform the restoration operation at the same time triggered by the restoration operation time. When the (restoration process) is started, there is a concern that the user may not be able to concentrate on the effect in accordance with the design change and may be intrusive.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this description example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives, a part of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state. Only the restoring operation timing can be triggered to start the restoring operation, thereby avoiding that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation at the same time. Thus, a restoring operation in a manner according to the situation is realized.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 307B, the timing tm32 at which the symbol variation (first time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts has arrived (recovery corresponding to the symbol variation). When the operation time has arrived), an abnormality has occurred in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that Note that the “abnormality” here means that the detection means detects the “abnormality”. However, the “abnormality” is not necessarily required to be in the situation where the “abnormality” is detected. May simply mean that there is an “abnormal” situation (undetected state).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), restoration processing is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body are started in parallel. As for the movable decorative body, the standby operation is not performed and the standby state is maintained in the abnormal state. This prevents all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation at the same time, thereby realizing the restoring operation according to the situation.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example waits for the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) for the third movable decorative body that has not been restored at the timing tm32 and has been left in the abnormal state. Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. This makes it possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation at the same time. become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration operation is not started at the timing tm32, and the fifth movable decorative body which is kept in the abnormal state is set when the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) comes. Also, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Thereby, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel in a combination that prevents concentration of the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm34 when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is finished. The "third movable decorative body" or the "fifth movable decorative body" does not start the restoration operation when the restoration processing on the decorative body is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 307B, the restoration process for the fourth movable decorative body is terminated after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is terminated. The third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and does not maintain the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed. Does not start the restoring operation.

  That is, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration processing (restoring operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm32 comes, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is completed.

  The fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoring operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is restored. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the (restoration operation) to end.

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) of the plurality of movable decorative bodies, so that it is possible to cope with the pattern variation. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, although the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state earlier than the “third movable decorative body”, the “first movable decorative body” Is completed, the restoration process for the "third movable decorative body" is started first. As described above, by not performing the restoration processing in the order of the abnormal state, it is possible to preferentially return to the normal state from the movable decoration body having a high production importance, and it is possible to appropriately enhance the gaming interest. It is expected to be maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol change (second time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol is changed. It is assumed that a timing tm35 (a restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (the third time) is started comes. Such a restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, the third movable decorative body does not use such a function as the restoring operation timing, and continuously executes the restoring process (restoring operation) across the restoring operation timing (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, if the design change (third) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the design change (third)” The third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307B, in the third movable decorative body, the timing tm32 ( It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm31 before the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the symbol change). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from the timing tm32 (timing tm34).

  However, the third movable decorative body is after the timing tm32 (recovery operation time corresponding to the symbol change) and during the period when the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration processing (restore operation). The normal state is maintained until “timing tm33”, which is the timing of the first movable decorative body, even if an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, as in the example shown in FIG. 307B. ) Is desirably started on the basis of the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the end of ()) ends. In other words, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 arrived before the timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. The details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process be continuously executed so as to straddle the timing tm35. Also, at the timing tm35, the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and at the timing when the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body executed across the timing tm35 is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that has not been performed can be started earlier than the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decoration with high production importance It will be possible to return to normal with priority from the body. The “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the fact that the restoration processing (recovery operation) for the “third movable decorative body” which was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm32 (recovery operation time) has arrived is completed. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 is started. The “restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm32. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and each of these restoring processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the “five movable decorations” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, the restoration processing for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed, and the “fifth movable decorative body” is not performed. Is determined to be abnormal. As a result, when it is determined that the state is abnormal, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, if the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started with the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is changed to “the symbol variation (1 The timing tm42 ”at which the“ time ”ends (losing stop) and the next symbol change (second time) is started (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change has arrived), and the process is not ended nor is being executed. And when the timing tm42 arrives, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” Are assumed to be in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( (Restoration operation timing). As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, if the design change (second time) is to execute a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the "movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the pattern change (second time)" The first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. " That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42). However, in this case, for the fourth movable decorative body, the restoring operation is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution, but the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, The movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body do not start the restoring operation and wait in an abnormal state. This prevents all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation at the same time, thereby realizing the restoring operation according to the situation.

  In particular, for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 307B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and not executing the restoration process (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 307C, when the first movable decorative body is in a state of “not in a normal state and performing a restoration process (restoration operation)”, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) ), The restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives.

  That is, the situation in which the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoring operation) over the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) means that the first movable decorative body returns to the normal state (returns to the original position). Thus, it can be said that the player side is in a state where it is taking care of the "first movable decorative body" in such a state. Then, in such a situation, if many movable decorative bodies newly start the restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the effect according to the design change, and it becomes aroused. It is a concern.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, of the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 307B) capable of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body Regarding the above, even in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration processing is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body that is being executed. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration processing of the second movable decorative body is not started in parallel with the first movable decorative body in the middle of execution, and Until the restoration process for the decorative body is completed, it is maintained in a standby state. Then, in a state where the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body has been completed, it waits for a restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 307C) to newly arrive, and based on the arrival of the timing tm45, The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body 2 is started. Thus, when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to the normal state, many movable decorative bodies are prevented from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation). Will be eliminated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decorative body that has not been restored at the timing tm42 and has been left in the abnormal state at the timing tm42, as in the example shown in FIG. Instead of waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. This makes it possible to return all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage while avoiding that all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation at the same time. become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as for the fifth movable decorative body in which the restoration operation is not started at the timing tm42 and the abnormal state is maintained, as in the example shown in FIG. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) has arrived, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. Like that. Accordingly, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operations in parallel in a manner that hinders concentration on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, the restoration processing for the fourth movable decorative body is completed before the timing tm44 at which the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body is finished. When the restoration processing for the decorative body is completed, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, and the “fifth movable decorative body” do not start the restoration operation.

  In other words, the third movable decorative body starts the restoration process (restoring operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (recovery operation) is not started when the timing tm42 comes, and the specific movable decorative body (here, the first movable decorative body) is in an abnormal state. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the restoration process (restoration operation) of the first movable decorative body is completed.

  The fifth movable decorative body starts the restoration processing (restoring operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (recovery operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body is restored. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after waiting for the (restoration operation) to end.

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) of the plurality of movable decorative bodies, so that it is possible to cope with the pattern variation. Restoration processing can be performed while suitably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol change (second time) ends (losing stop) and the next symbol is changed. It is assumed that a timing tm45 (a restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (the third time) is started arrives. Such a restoration operation timing functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, the third movable decorative body does not use such a function as the restoring operation timing, and continuously executes the restoring process (restoring operation) across the restoring operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration processing (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, if the design change (third) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decorative body, “movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the design change (third)” The third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state before the timing at which is started. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time of the start of the symbol change, even when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state at the time when the movable effect using the movable decorative body is started. Then, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, in the third movable decorative body, the symbol change (first time) ends (losing stops), and the next symbol change (second time) tm42 ( It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm41 before the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the symbol change). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from the timing tm42 (timing tm44).

  However, as for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (recovery operation time corresponding to the symbol change) and during the period when the first movable decorative body is executing the restoration processing (restore operation). The normal state is maintained until "timing tm43", which is the timing of the first movable decorative body, even if an abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, as in the example shown in FIG. 307C. ) Is desirably started on the basis of the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the end of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 arrived before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state. The details of the “restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)” are as described in the section “Restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm32 (restoration operation)”.

  In this case, the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoring operation timing) arrives, but becomes abnormal when the timing tm42 (restoring operation timing) arrives. Since the restoration process (restoring operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that has not been performed can be started earlier than the “fifth movable decorative body”, the movable decoration with high production significance It will be possible to return to normal with priority from the body. The “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the fact that the restoration process (restore operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in a normal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) has arrived is completed. Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 is started. The “restoration process using the restoration operation timing at the timing tm42 (restoration operation)” is a restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body in a program executed based on the arrival of the timing tm42. And a restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body, and a restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body, and each of these restoring processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is present, The restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the “five movable decorations” is started. If the “third movable decorative body” is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the “first movable decorative body” is completed, the restoration processing for the “third movable decorative body” is not performed, and the “fifth movable decorative body” is not performed. Is determined to be abnormal. As a result, when it is determined that the state is abnormal, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable decorative body” is in a normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the “fifth movable decorative body” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. Becomes

  According to such an example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body is not in the normal state (not in the original position because it is not in the state to be movable) (the first state). Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation timing (the symbol variation ( Regarding the movable decorative body (first movable decorative body) executing the restoration operation triggered by the start timing of the first), the restoration operation is not performed again, and the restoration operation timing is ignored and the execution is continued. However, for the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that has not performed the restoration operation, the restoration operation can be started with this timing as an opportunity without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42). In other words, in this case, the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state may or may not ignore the function as the restoration operation timing, depending on the situation where they are placed. , A restoration process suitable for the situation can be realized.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 307C, the “first movable decorative body” performs the restoration operation when the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the design change (first time)) corresponding to the design change comes. If the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (second time)) corresponding to the symbol change arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body performing the restoration operation again comes. This restoration operation can be continuously executed without performing the restoration operation again when the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol change (second time)) is triggered. In other words, in this case, it takes time to return to the normal state, and as a result, even if the restoration operation timing arrives again while the restoration operation is being performed, this is ignored, so that the state is being executed. The restoring operation can be continued without interruption, thereby prompting the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to return to the early state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is being performed over a plurality of variations, another movable decorative body (third movable decorative body) is used. When an abnormality has occurred, the third movable decorative body does not start the return operation at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change, and the third movable decorative body is in the middle of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not performed again at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is restored. Immediately after the “restoring process (restoring operation for the first movable decorative body)” that has not been started when the timing (timing tm42) has arrived, the restoring process (the restoring operation for the third movable decorative body) ends ( Since the restoration operation is started, the restoration processing is not performed in parallel for the movable decoration body of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders concentration on the effect) among the plurality of movable decoration bodies. In addition, the plurality of movable decorative bodies can be returned to the normal state relatively early.

  In the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the third movable decorative body enters an abnormal state at the timing tm43, the restoration operation timing of the third movable decorative body has not yet arrived after the abnormality. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body executed across the restoration operation timing)”. ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) (the second movable decorative body (the second movable decorative body) The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 arrived before the timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the normal state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoring operation) so as to straddle the restoring operation timing, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, a movable effect can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to normal. With such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state early by the timing when the movable effect is started.

  In addition, during the execution of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body, even if the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation arrives a plurality of times, all of them are ignored and the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body is performed. It is desirable to continue.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship of performing a restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel as shown in FIG. 307B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 307C, when a new restoring operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decorative body is executing the restoring operation, the second movable ornament at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the decorative body is not started, and the restoration operations are not performed in parallel. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent many movable decorative bodies from newly starting a restoration process (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to return to the normal state.

  Then, when a new restoring operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body is completed and the normal restoration is completed, the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm45. I'm going to start. According to such a configuration, the restoration process (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started immediately after the situation in which the first movable decorative body takes time to return to the normal state is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body starts after waiting for a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) to arrive, it is possible to concentrate on the effect. The environment can be suitably adjusted.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is terminated due to failure, a new restoration operation timing (after the restoration process (restoration operation) ends) When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it is no longer possible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decorative body, the movable effect using only the second movable decorative body is restored by using only the second movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it executable.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 307 (C), after the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and the normal restoration is completed, a period until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) comes. When the first movable decorative body returns to the abnormal state again, when the new restoring operation timing (timing tm45) arrives, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are respectively restored. It is desirable to start processing (restoring operation) in parallel.

  In the example described above, even if the restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is to be terminated due to failure (not returning to the original position), the first movable decorative body is restored. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is to be terminated due to failure (not returning to the original position), the restoration process (reconstruction operation) for the third movable decorative body is performed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the (operation).

  In the above-described example, when the third movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state at the time when the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed (timing tm34, tm44), the first movable decorative body is not in an abnormal state. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decorative body newly enters an abnormal state during the execution period of the “restoring process (recovery operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” thus started, the fifth movable decorative body is restored. When the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation), and a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives It is desirable to perform a restoring process (restoring operation) on the third movable decorative body. However, if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body has not been completed yet and is in an execution state at the time when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change has arrived, the restoration operation time has arrived. When the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” does not start when the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” ends, and the restoring operation timing after the end of the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” comes It is desirable to start the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and the restoring operation is not triggered by the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) of the fourth movable decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoring process (restoring operation). I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even with the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), a new moving object is newly created during the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) has arrived, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation so as to straddle the restoration operation timing.

  When there is a movable decorative body in a state where the restoration processing (restoration operation) is being executed and a movable decoration body in a state of waiting for the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation), the effect display relating to the symbol variation is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state in which visual recognition is impossible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, the above-described notification according to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state is performed. The restoration processing (restoration operation) already in the execution state is continued without interruption, and the restoration processing is also performed on the movable decorative body in the waiting state for the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation) when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to newly start (restoration operation).

  When there is a movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restore operation) is being executed or a movable decorative body in a state of waiting for the execution of the restore process (restore operation), these movable decorative bodies are used in the pattern fluctuation. When the execution timing of the movable effect arrives, the driving force for the restoration process (restoring operation) is applied to the movable decorative bodies, but the driving force for the execution of the effect is applied. It is desirable that there is no (no staging operation) in order to realize an early return to a normal state. However, a driving force for performing the effect is not given to these movable decorative bodies, but the light emission mode according to the movable effect is such that the light emission mode provided in each movable decorative body is displayed. It is desirable to make the part emit light normally. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect (light emission effect) constituting the movable effect is appropriately executed. , "0", and "100") also appear in the "movable decorative body that is not in a normal state", and the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In addition, the restoration process (restoring operation) is not performed even if the restoring operation time has come again for the movable decorative body in a state where the restoring process (restoring operation) has failed, so that at least the power supply is continued. It can be said that as long as the movable decorative body is not operated in a movable effect. However, even in the movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing at which the movable effect using the movable decorative body is executed arrives, the movable effect itself is not executed, but the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) be performed properly. That is, in this case, the light emitting mode different according to the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including “0” and “100”) is “the movable decorative body in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has been failed. ”, And it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  In addition, the movable decorative body in a state in which the restoration processing (restoration operation) is being executed, the movable decorative body in a state of waiting for the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation), and a state in which the restoration processing (restoration operation) has failed. The movable decorative body may be one that enables the light emitting unit to emit light as usual even when another effect is performed.

  The restoring operation timing may include not only one that arrives in response to a symbol change but one that arrives under another condition. When the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives under a condition different from the symbol variation, the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed. When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started (executed) in a non-notification state without performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without performing the restoration process (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and the restoring operation is not triggered by the restoring operation timing (timing tm42) of the fourth movable decorative body that has not been subjected to the restoring process (restoring operation). I'm trying to get started. As described above, even when the first movable decorative body is in a state where it takes time to return to the normal state, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change arrives, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored and is not ignored. The “fourth movable decorative body” to be started is used for an important performance such as when a winning result is derived by a symbol change or when the big hit game is started or executed. Desirably.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, with respect to the third movable decorative body, the case where the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” successfully returns to normal (reference position detection) and fails (reference position) Regardless of whether the process is terminated (completed) or not, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body". It is desirable to do so.

  Also, based on the fact that the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends with failure to return to normal and the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends. This is a case where the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” that has been performed is completed with the normal return being successful, and the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the symbol variation in which the normal return was successful. In the state, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the next symbol change arrives, the “restoration process (restoration operation for the first movable decorative body)” is not performed and “the restoration process for the third movable decorative body ( (Restoring operation). "

  However, at this time, at the point in time when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol change arrives, the “fifth movable operation” started based on the completion of the “reconstruction process (restoration operation for the third movable decorative body)”. When the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the decorative body” is in the execution state, “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration body” and “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration body” are performed. Are not performed, and the “restoration processing for the first movable decorative body” is triggered by the “restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation” that arrives after the “restoration processing for the fifth movable decorative body (restoring operation)” ends. It is desirable that the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" be performed without performing the "restoring operation".

  After the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” is successfully completed and the restoration is completed, the “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body” is performed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the “restoration process (restore operation) for the third movable decorative body” is executed so as to straddle the restoring operation timing corresponding to the next symbol change. In this case, it is desirable that the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not started at the restoring operation timing. That is, in this case, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" arrives after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" has been successfully or failed to return to normal. Is started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 307C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol change (second time) arrives, among the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state, the symbol change (1 For the first movable decorative body that is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not performed again without restoring the restoration process (restoration operation). And continue to execute this. Also, regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and after the “restoration process (restore operation) for the first movable decorative body” is completed, the end is determined. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the result. In this regard, if the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again while the “restoration process (recovery operation) for the third movable decorative body” thus started is executed, the “third movable decorative body” is returned to the abnormal state. When the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the body" is completed, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is not started based on the end, but the restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol change is determined. It is desirable to start “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” based on the new arrival.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” has not been completed, and is being executed (striding over the restoration operation timing). It is desirable to ignore the restoring operation timing and wait until the “restoring process (restoring operation for the third movable decorative body)” ends. Then, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is started at the restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol change arrived after the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is completed. It is desirable to make it.

  That is, in this case, when both the “first movable decorative body” and the “third movable decorative body” are in an abnormal state, the “first movable decorative body” is restored such that the “first movable decorative body” is returned to the normal state in advance. If the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change arrives when the third movable decorative body is not in the normal state, the first movable decorative body performs the restoring operation even though it has a relationship in which the processing is performed. When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decorative body is not executing the restoration processing) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decorative body is (In a situation where the restoration process is being executed), so that the restoration process according to the situation can be realized.

  The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting change unit capable of changing the winning probability for hit determination and the selection probability for effect patterns. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable that the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation be used as the same timing (for example, at the start of symbol variation).

  The first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body are provided with movable decorations provided at positions where the player can contact them. The body may be included. And in this case, since the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can touch is considered to be most likely to be in an abnormal state, the restoration operation time arrives regardless of the state of the other movable decorative bodies. Then, it is desirable to provide the "fourth movable decorative body" for starting the restoration process (restoration operation).

  After providing the light guide plate on which the light guide pattern is displayed in front of the movable decorative body, the effect of displaying the light guide pattern even during the restoration process (restoring operation) on the movable decorative body is not limited. It is desirable to make it executable so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The “first movable decorative body” and the “second movable decorative body” shown in FIGS. 307B and 307C are prepared so as to have an effect relationship in which each of them becomes an operation state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" may be provided with decorations related to each other, or may be operated at the same time as a movable effect based on a symbol variation (effect pattern). (Such as completion of characters and character strings) should be prepared as shaping. The third movable decorative body is prepared so as not to be used when forming a specific movable effect or one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same mode (operation at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  For the “first movable decorative body”, “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body”, a game board The components provided on the side 5 and the components provided on the door frame 3 may be separately arranged.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “ Although the fifth movable decorative body is provided, the “second movable decorative body”, “third movable decorative body”, “fourth movable decorative body”, and “fifth movable decorative body” are provided. May not necessarily include all of the movable decorative bodies, and may include “one” of the movable decorative bodies, or “two” or “three” as appropriate. Even with such a configuration, it should have the technical features described with reference to FIG. 307B and FIG. 307C (in what form the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decorative body”). Becomes

[Operational penalty for operation unit that can produce strobe light]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) by the player is changed with respect to the volume by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although illustration is omitted. A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In any of the states where the player is in the game, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operation units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operation units may be roughly handled. If any failure occurs, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation buttons 410,
-A sword decoration body in which the sword portion 5010 (sword body portion 5011, handle portion 5012, flange portion 5013) is movable (variably) between a sword placement position and a sword removal position by a predetermined operation (sword removal operation, sword placement operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 192 and 222)
Even if no operation opportunity is given, the “operation to remove the sword 5010 (sword body 5011, handle 5012, flange 5013) from the sheath 5020 (sword removal operation)” or “sword insertion” If the “operation” is repeatedly performed, a failure may occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, an effect light emitting unit (not shown) is provided for each of the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the flange part 5013, and the blade part 5010 (the blade part). 5011, the handle 5012, and the flange 5013) have a special detection unit (not shown) that can detect whether the sheath 5020 is at a specific position (original position) where the sword is placed. Then, at least during the period in which the demo screen is displayed (a non-game state in which game effects and symbol fluctuations are not executed according to the jackpot determination), the sword unit 5010 is identified as a result of detection by the special detection unit. When it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least in the non-game state in which the symbol variation is not performed, the sword unit 5010 is shared by the effect light emitting units (sword body unit 5011, handle unit 5012, and flange unit 5013) by a predetermined operation. As a result of being displaced to a certain position, if it is detected that the operation unit is not located at a specific position, an effect restriction period can occur, so that the handling of the operation unit can be suitably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the “change of the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound” and the “set value related to the emission brightness (brightness set value)” The above-mentioned effect change period is generated in a state in which any of "change" is acceptable by an operation by the player. However, as described later, during this production restriction period,
-Regarding the effect sound, even if the set value (volume set value) related to the output volume is changed, the effect sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume set value, and the volume is adjusted. While the confirmation sound is not output,
-With respect to the effect lamp, when the set value (luminance set value) related to the emission luminance is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword unit 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 The (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, and collar part 5013) are not emitted at the luminance according to the luminance setting value, but are provided in a part different from the detected sword part 5010. With respect to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), a process is performed in which the effect light emission at a luminance corresponding to the set value is enabled. That can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the above-described effect restriction period occurs, both the change of the set value related to the volume and the change of the set value related to the brightness can be accepted, but the change related to the volume setting is possible. The degree of restriction differs between the processing and the processing related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with respect to the production sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the production sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. Also, by preventing the output of, the player is given a sense of tension (perhaps he has done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting units (sword unit 5011, handle 5012, and flange 5013) provided in the “sword unit 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, but the effect lamp provided in a portion different from the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player has the changed effect. By enabling the effect light emission (for example, light emission in accordance with the timing at which a specific notice effect is performed) in a form in which the luminance setting value is reflected, due to the rough handling of the “sword unit 5010”, It is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the production while warning that the production restriction is imposed as being recognizable. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamp on the game board 5 where the game ball flows down or wins, the effect light emission is performed as normal, in a manner in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected. Is desirable. With this, it is possible to appropriately warn that "the player has a willingness to start the game or to encourage the end of the game", and to issue a warning about handling the operation unit roughly. become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the release conditions for the respective restrictions are different depending on the restriction on the processing related to the volume setting and the restriction on the processing related to the luminance setting. . In particular, the "processing related to volume setting" on the side where relatively strict restrictions were imposed at the beginning should be greatly improved to the normal state relatively early so as to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, at the beginning, the processing related to the luminance setting, which was a relatively loose restriction, showed an improvement trend, but the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some In some cases, the restriction is left, so that it is expected that the tension will be maintained moderately over a long period of time, and that rough handling will not be repeated.

  FIG. 309 is a time chart showing an example of restrictions on volume setting and luminance setting when a penalty is generated for an operation on sword section 5010.

  Now, assuming that the game is in a non-game state in which no game is executed, such as in a demonstration screen, and is in a normal state in which no error state or penalty has occurred, in this state, as shown in FIG. Execution of processing for changing the set value (sound set value) by the player with respect to the sound volume is permitted. When the volume setting is changed, a process of adjusting the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting (a process of reflecting the volume setting as the volume) is executed, and the adjusted volume is adjusted. , A volume adjustment confirmation sound is output.

  In the same state, execution of a process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. When the brightness setting value is changed, a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount) is executed, and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. It will be.

  In the same state, the pattern LED (the effect light-emitting unit in the handle 5012), the flange LED (the effect light-emitting unit in the flange 5013), the blade LED (the effect light-emitting unit in the blade 5011), and the LED outside the operation unit (the game) All of the effect lamps on the board 5 are in the “normal light emission” state. The state of “normal light emission” corresponds to “a state in which light emission is maintained” as long as the lamp is provided as an effect lamp that constantly maintains light emission regardless of the state of the effect. However, when provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied is permitted. (Light-off state) ", and does not necessarily need to be in a light-emitting state. Further, it is desirable that the sheath portion 5020 be provided in a translucent manner so that the light emission mode of the blade LED can be checked even in the sword-inserted state.

  However, as shown in FIG. 309, as a result of performing the predetermined operation at the timing to1, the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011, handle section) despite the non-game state where the operation effect cannot occur. Suppose that the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment detects that the sheath 5050 is not in a katana state relative to the sheath 5020 (detects that it is not at a specific position (original position)). Then, first, the first effect suppression state is to be generated.

  In the first effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, execution of processing for changing the set value (volume set value) by the player with respect to the volume is allowed. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the process of adjusting the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is not executed, and the volume adjustment is not performed. No confirmation sound is output.

  In the same state, execution of a process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by the player regarding the brightness is also permitted. In this regard, when the luminance setting value is changed, the pattern LED (the effect light emitting unit in the pattern unit 5012) in the sword unit 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1. , A flange LED (effect light emitting unit in the flange unit 5013) and a blade LED (effect light emitting unit in the blade unit 5011), the process of adjusting the light emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (the luminance setting value Is not executed, but the LED outside the operation unit (the effect lamp on the game board 5) that has not been moved (displaced) by the predetermined operation is determined based on the changed luminance setting value. The process of adjusting the light emission luminance (the process of reflecting the luminance set value as the light amount) is executed. Further, in the same state, although it is possible to adjust the light emission luminance of a part (LED outside the operation unit) of the plurality of effect lamps, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the adjustment is performed. Like that.

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect suppression state, although both of the change in the set value related to the volume and the change in the set value related to the brightness can be accepted, the change related to the volume setting is possible. The degree of restriction differs between the processing and the processing related to the luminance setting.

  That is, with respect to the production sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the production sound is not output in a form in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output. Also, by preventing the output of, the player is given a sense of tension (perhaps he has done something that should not be done).

  On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting units (sword unit 5011, handle 5012, and collar unit 5013) provided in the “sword unit 5010” operated by the player. The effect light is not emitted in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, but is not moved (displaced) by a predetermined operation, and an effect lamp (operation operation) provided on the game board 5 where the game is performed. The external LED) emits an effect light in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected (for example, if a game is started in this state and predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, a specific announcement effect is performed). (E.g., light emission in accordance with timing). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game and the effect while warning the rough handling of the “sword unit 5010”.

  More specifically, in the first effect suppression state, the pattern LED (the effect light-emitting portion in the pattern portion 5012) continues to emit light in a predetermined light emission luminance and light emission mode (light emission for penalty). For example, even if the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value is not reflected, and the symbol variation is started according to the result of the big hit determination. Even if a light emission request occurs, a light emission mode corresponding to the request does not appear.

  In addition, the flange LED (the effect light emitting portion in the flange portion 5013) can emit light as usual even in the first effect suppression state, and the effect lamp always maintains light emission regardless of the state of the effect. If it is provided as a "state where light emission is maintained", and if it is provided as an effect lamp that emits light based on a predetermined effect condition being satisfied, it is referred to as "a predetermined effect. The state is a light emission waiting state in which the light emission state is permitted when the condition is satisfied. However, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the flange LED does not emit the effect light in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected, and thereby the sword is cut off. Also in the unit 5010, it is possible to warn about the rough handling of the "sword unit 5010" while permitting the light emission effect to encourage the continuation of the game.

  In addition, the blade LED (the effect light emitting unit in the blade unit 5011) is controlled so as to continue the light-off state in the first effect suppression state. For example, the light emission request according to the result of the big hit determination is started when the symbol change is started. Even if this occurs, it does not respond to this. Therefore, in the blade LED, even if the luminance setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the effect light emission cannot be performed in a form in which the changed luminance setting value is reflected.

  On the other hand, no restriction is imposed on the LED outside the operation unit provided outside the sword unit 5010 that has been moved (displaced) by the predetermined operation, and the above-described “normal light emission” state is continued. It will be. Therefore, when the brightness setting value is changed in the first effect suppression state, the changed brightness setting value (if in the light emitting state) can be reflected, and the symbol variation is started and the light emission according to the result of the big hit determination is started. When a request occurs, a light emission mode corresponding to the request appears.

  In such a configuration, the restriction is imposed only on the effect lamp provided in the “sword unit 5010” that has been moved by the predetermined operation, so that the game board 5 where the game is performed is limited. When only the gaze is focused, the light emission luminance appears to be adjusted as usual when the luminance setting value is changed, and thus the first effect suppression state is occurring. There is a concern that it will not be recognized. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect suppression state, the luminance setting value is changed by an operation by the player, and the light emission luminance of a part (LED outside the operation unit) of a plurality of effect lamps is changed. Even if the adjustment is made, the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Thereby, even when the “sword section 5010” is not visually recognized, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is in the restricted state, and the “sword section 5010” is returned to the original position. You will be able to prompt.

  Then, at timing to2 after such a first effect suppression state has occurred, an operation of positioning the sword section 5010 to the sword delivery state is performed, and it is detected that the sword section 5010 is in the sword delivery state (identification). If the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs a process of shifting from the first effect suppression state to the second effect suppression state.

  In the second effect suppression state, as shown in FIG. 309, with respect to the sound volume, all the restrictions in the first effect suppression state are released, and the sound is processed as normal. A state in which both the execution of the process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume and the execution of the process of outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound are allowed as well as the execution of the process of changing the volume set value is allowed. Has become.

  On the other hand, regarding the luminance, the “restriction on the luminance adjustment confirmation sound” of the restriction contents in the first effect suppression state is released, but the “partial restriction on the luminance adjustment” is not released and is continued. It is supposed to be. Therefore, in the second effect suppression state, execution of the process of changing the brightness setting value, execution of the process of adjusting the emission brightness of the LED outside the operation unit among the plurality of effect lamps, and output of the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are performed. Although the execution of the process is permitted, the process of adjusting the light emission luminance of the effect lamp included in the sword unit 5010 among the plurality of effect lamps is in a state where the execution is not allowed (restricted state). It will be maintained as it is.

  That is, the second effect suppression state is a state that is generated based on “the sword 5010 is detected to be in the sword-arranged state” in the first effect suppression state, and the sword 5010 is already in the specific position (original position). Position), and it can be said that rough handling has been eliminated. In response to this, the "process related to volume setting" on the side where relatively strict restrictions were initially imposed is promptly and greatly improved to the normal state, thereby strongly promoting the continuation of the game. The main purpose is.

  However, after the first effect suppression state occurs, if all the restrictions are immediately released simply by returning the sword section 5010 to the specific position (original position), the function as a penalty is insufficient. There is a possibility that rough handling of the “sword part 5010” may recur. In this regard, according to the above configuration, in the first effect suppression state, when “the sword section 5010 is detected to be in the sword-arranged state”, the state is shifted to the second effect suppression state. Regarding the luminance, the “restriction on the luminance adjustment confirmation sound” of the restriction contents when the first effect suppression state is set is released, but the “partial restriction on the luminance adjustment” is not released and is continued. Like that.

  In other words, in this case, since the effect of the “sword portion 5010”, which has been subjected to rough handling, itself is limited, the atmosphere in which the rough handling of the “sword portion 5010” is more difficult to be performed (“ May be broken. "

  On the other hand, in the second effect suppression state, since the rough handling of the “sword unit 5010” has already been eliminated, the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is performed ( A situation where the player concentrates on the game) is a desirable situation. In this regard, in the second effect suppression state, the luminance setting value is changed when the player is gazing at the game board 5 where the game is performed (a state where the sword 5010 is not visually recognized). Sometimes, the luminance setting value is changed by the operation of the player so that the light emission luminance can be adjusted as usual (appears to be in a normal state). When the emission brightness of the outside LED is adjusted, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output. This allows the player to concentrate on the game and avoid repetition of rough handling of the sword section 5010.

  According to such a second effect suppression state, the “processing related to the luminance setting” on the side that initially imposed a relatively mild restriction shows a tendency to improve, but is subject to rough handling. By restricting the "sword part 5010" to a limit, the player is allowed to maintain a moderate sense of tension for a long period of time to prevent the sloppy handling from being repeated, Will be expected to focus on

  In the second effect suppression state, some of the effect lamps (pattern LED, tsuba LED, and blade LED) of the plurality of effect lamps are excluded from the adjustment target of the light emission luminance. When the light emission luminance of the effect lamp (LED outside the operation unit) is adjusted, a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is output in the same manner as when the light emission luminance is adjusted in a normal state. In other words, in this case, even if the second effect suppression state occurs, it is not a situation in which the operation by the player is not accepted, but a situation in which the player can react by the operation by the player as in the normal state. Appeal can be made, and the continuation of the game by the player can be appropriately encouraged.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the emission luminance is adjusted only for some of the effect lamps (LEDs outside the operation unit) in the second effect suppression state, the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state. The same brightness adjustment confirmation sound as in a certain case is assigned to a channel and output. As a result, even if the situation can be adjusted only partially, it is expected to give a sense of security as if the player has already returned to the normal state and to encourage the user to continue the game. However, when the second effect suppression state is terminated and the state is shifted to the normal state, the luminance of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a manner that the luminance setting value at that time is collectively reflected. It is important not to output the adjustment confirmation sound in order to make it appear as if it has already returned to normal.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the second effect suppression state. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (timing to3), a process of terminating the second effect suppression state and shifting to the normal state can be executed.

  In other words, the transition condition from the “first production suppression state in which the production restriction degree is relatively severe” to the “second production suppression state in which the production restriction degree is relatively weak” is set to “the operation by the player”. This makes it possible to establish this at an early stage, thereby preventing the desire to continue the game from being reduced. However, the condition for transition from the “second production suppression state with a relatively low degree of production restriction” to the “normal state” is that “a predetermined time has elapsed since the second production suppression state occurred”. It is not allowed to establish this early. By adopting these transition conditions, it is possible to effectively warn about sloppy handling while appropriately maintaining the desire to continue the game, and thus to prevent recurrence. Become like

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 309, a plurality of effect lamps provided in the "sword unit 5010" which is subject to rough handling. Some of the effect lamps (here, the tsuba LED and the blade LED) of the (pattern LED, tsuba LED, and blade LED) are in the case where the second effect suppression state is ended and returned to the normal state. Are allowed to emit light only in “limited”.

  More specifically, for the Tsuba LED and the blade LED, it is possible to emit light as normal, but even if the luminance setting value is changed, the changed luminance setting value is reflected. Instead, the effect light emission is performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value. That is, in this case, in particular, with respect to the collar LED, after the first effect suppression state occurs, only the effect light emission under the same limitation is continuously performed, thereby reducing the possibility that a failure has occurred in part. It is expected that the user will be made conscious and that the rough handling of the “sword unit 5010” will be prevented from recurring. Alternatively, even after the production suppression state ends and the normal state is established, it is possible to function as a history of the production suppression state occurring before that, and expect stable operation as the pachinko machine 1. Will be able to do it. In addition, the effect restriction left for the tsuba LED and the blade LED may be maintained as unremovable. However, for example, when a different condition such as clearing the RAM or shutting down the power supply is established. It is desirable to be able to release.

  According to such a configuration, even after the first effect suppression state ends and the process related to the volume adjustment is returned to normal, the process related to the brightness adjustment needs to be further stepwise improved. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of tension for a longer period of time while maintaining a desire to play.

  Note that, in the first effect suppression state (further, the second effect suppression state), in addition to the non-game state (during the demonstration screen, etc.), the game execution state in which the game is being executed (the symbol according to the result of the big hit determination) Even when the sword unit 5010 is in a fluctuating state or a jackpot game state), it can be generated based on detection that the sword unit 5010 is not in a sword-pulling state (detection that it is not in a specific position (original position)). It is desirable to do. In other words, even in the gaming state (such as during a symbol change according to the result of the big hit determination), the sword section 5010 should not be roughly handled in a state where the operation opportunity is not given, and is used for promoting the game and the effect. This is because it is desired to be properly handled.

  However, even in the situation where the state is controlled to the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309, the reception relating to the change of the luminance setting value is performed when the game is in the game execution state (symbol variation is in the execution state). When the brightness adjustment corresponding to this is performed, it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. In other words, when the state is shifted from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, at least the processing side related to the volume adjustment is released from all restrictions, so that the feeling of tension is properly maintained. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible. On the other hand, in order to strongly encourage the continuation of the game, it is important to greatly improve the restriction on the “processing related to the volume adjustment” on the strict side until then.

  In this regard, “when the tension cannot be maintained well” means that the game is restarted by neglecting the situation in which the second production suppression state has occurred (the situation in which the first production suppression state in which the production restriction is strict has ended). It is assumed that the situation has occurred, and conversely, in a situation where the game has not been resumed, it is also assumed that the nervous state can be maintained well. Therefore, even in the second effect suppression state, when the symbol variation is in the execution state (game resumption) where it is assumed that the nervousness is not properly maintained, the brightness adjustment confirmation is not intentionally output, and the “luminance By looking only at "processing related to adjustment", it can be expected that an appropriate sense of tension will be given by making it appear that the first effect suppression state has not been improved from the first effect suppression state.

  In this sense, in the situation where the “second effect suppression state” shown in FIG. 309 is controlled, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the change in the volume setting value is accepted and the volume adjustment is performed accordingly. May be set so as not to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even when is performed. In addition, regarding such special processing (processing for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and processing for not outputting the luminance adjustment confirmation sound) when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the second effect suppression state ends and the restriction is one. The present invention may also be applied to a situation where a normal state is returned in a state where the copy is left behind. In other words, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound comes to be output during the game execution state, or if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound or the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning cannot be understood, and This is because you may not be able to concentrate.

  In the above-described example, the handle LED, the flange LED, and the blade LED are provided. However, the sword section 5010 may have at least the handle LED as an effect lamp. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a willingness to play by showing a gradual improvement while warning the rough handling of the “sword part 5010” in the first effect suppression state and the second effect suppression state. It is possible.

  In the above-described example, as soon as “the sword unit 5010 is detected to be in the sword-arranged state” in the first effect suppression state, the state is shifted from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”. The processing is performed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, based on a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from “detecting that the sword unit 5010 is in the sword-putting state” in the first effect suppression state. Then, a process of shifting from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state” may be performed. According to such a configuration, while permitting a relatively early transition from the “first effect suppression state” to the “second effect suppression state”, the effect restriction is not performed for at least a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is possible to maintain the strict first effect suppression state. The predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set to be shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) required from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof. Desirable, but not necessarily limited to this.

  Further, in the above-described example, the cause of the effect restriction is the predetermined operation on the operating means (sword unit 5010), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if it is a specific object that is not the operation target of the player (for example, an object that can move between the first state and the second state, such as the decorative movable body or the door frame 3), this is subject to rough handling. If it is forcibly displaced, it may cause a failure. Therefore, after at least providing a "lamp subject to the effect restriction such as the above-described pattern LED" as an effect lamp for a specific object, it is determined based on the fact that the specific object is not located at the original position. It is desirable to generate the effect suppression state as described above. That is, in this case, regardless of whether the specific object is in the non-game state or the game state, the first effect suppression state as described above is performed based on the detection that the specific object is not in the first state (original position). Then, based on the detection that the specific object has been returned to the first state (original position), the second effect suppression state is generated as described above, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the occurrence. Then, the state is returned to the normal state (or the normal state with a limitation).

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Further, in the above-described example, when a change to the volume setting value is received a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state” and the process is shifted to the “second effect suppression state”, the “second effect suppression state” is used. At the time of transition to the “state”, the volume is adjusted in such a manner that the contents of multiple changes to the volume setting value up to that time are collectively reflected. In addition, when a change to the luminance setting value is received a plurality of times in the “first effect suppression state” or the “second effect suppression state”, and the state is returned to the normal state at timing to3, the state changes to the “normal state”. Then, the luminance of the pattern LED is adjusted in such a manner that the contents of the change to the luminance setting value up to that time are reflected all at once. Such a method of collectively adjusting the set value change at a certain timing (including the presence or absence of the output of the adjustment confirmation sound) at such a time is described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Can be realized by appropriately adopting. In this case, the timing to2 at which the volume setting value is collectively reflected is different from the timing to3 at which the brightness setting value is collectively reflected, so that the way to return to the normal state can be seen stepwise. As a result, it is possible to make it appear as if the player has already returned to normal, or to have a tendency to recover, and thereby to motivate the player to continue the game. The predetermined time from the occurrence of the second effect suppression state to the end thereof may be about 10 seconds.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

[Brightness adjustment at abnormal notification]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although not shown, various pachinko machine 1 provided with the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). A brightness adjustment button is provided for a production lamp (a lamp subjected to production control by the peripheral control MPU 1511a), and when it is determined that the luminance adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various production lamps is played. It is possible to execute a process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a user (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, if there is an effect lamp that is in a light emitting state at the time when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, a process of adjusting the emission luminance of the effect lamp based on the changed luminance setting value ( (A process of reflecting the luminance setting value as the light amount). At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  Note that, for a staging lamp that is not in a light emitting state at the time when the luminance setting value is changed, when a light emission request is made based on the result of the jackpot determination, a luminance according to the changed luminance setting value is used. It will be in a light emitting state. More specifically, if it is provided as a production lamp that always maintains light emission regardless of the production situation, the light emission according to the changed luminance setting value is immediately performed as soon as the change in the luminance setting value is received. The light emission mode is changed to the luminance mode. However, when the effect lamp is provided as an effect lamp that emits light when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (an effect request in accordance with the jackpot determination), the predetermined effect is applied. At the timing when the effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission is performed as the light emission luminance according to the changed luminance setting value. That is, until the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the effect light emission at the light emission luminance corresponding to the changed luminance setting value is maintained (light emission waiting state).

  In addition, regarding the change acceptance according to the brightness setting value and the adjustment processing according to the changed brightness setting value, the player can be operated in both a state where the symbol is not changed and a state where the symbol is changed. Executable by each of the operations described above.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific abnormality is detected as illustrated in FIG. 156, an abnormality notification is performed in accordance with the abnormality type. If the type of abnormality detection is unlikely to be present, there may be a case where the player wants to continue the game as it is. In other words, if the notification of the abnormality is performed as a result of performing the abnormality notification despite the fact that the abnormality is not serious and the abnormality is small, and the player ends the game, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. There may be disadvantages due to the decline.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 has entered a specific state (for example, a state where a right gate has passed (abnormal game) in a non-time saving state). Of the plurality of effect lamps, some effect lamps (e.g., effect lamps provided on the game board 5) can emit light by effect (during effect light emission or effect light emission conditions). The abnormal notification light emission can be executed by using at least the specific effect lamp (for example, the effect lamp provided on the door frame 3) included in the other effect lamps in the waiting state (light-off state) until the above. And

  Then, even during the execution period of such anomaly notification light emission, every time an operation is received by the player, a change in the luminance set value can be received, and the light emission by the effect remains enabled. In some of the effect lamps, the emission luminance can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value, whereas the specific effect lamp has the changed luminance. Irrespective of the setting value, the abnormality notification light emission is executed only at a predetermined luminance setting value.

  According to such a configuration, even when the abnormality notification light emission is being executed, the brightness setting value is changed every time an operation is received by the player, although the lamp is partially out of the plurality of effect lamps. Is reflected, and the effect light emission is executed with the reflected luminance setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately encourage the player to continue the game while notifying the hole side of the abnormality.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a change in the brightness setting value is received during the execution of the abnormality notification light emission in which the brightness adjustment target is limited to a part. Even in this case, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily output, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output again when the remaining time until the end of the period in which the brightness adjustment target is limited is reduced. Is set to appear, so that it is possible to suggest to the player that it is at a stage where normal abnormal light emission will be permitted soon after the abnormal notification light emission ends. I have to.

  FIG. 310 is a time chart showing an example of the light emission mode of the effect lamp during the abnormality notification period according to the specific abnormality detection.

  As shown in FIG. 310, at a timing tp1 when a game is not executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, passing through a right gate in a non-time saving state (abnormal game)) Is detected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) based on the detection.

  In this lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), effect light emission is performed for some effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the drawing) of the effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1. The abnormality notification light emission will be performed using the other effect lamps (corresponding to the “LED-B group” in the drawing) while keeping it enabled. It should be noted that the abnormality notification light emission does not necessarily have to be performed using all of the other effect lamps, and may be part of the other effect lamps (for example, specific effect lamps provided on the door frame 3). May be executed using only

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific state (for example, a state where the right gate passes (abnormal game) occurs in a non-time saving state, etc.) occurs, some of the effects For the lamp (corresponding to the “LED-A group” in the figure), a light emission effect is performed in the same manner as when the specific state does not occur. While notifying, the player is encouraged to continue the game properly.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even in the state where the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) has occurred, the change acceptance regarding the luminance setting value is allowed. Then, in some effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-A group” in the figure) which are set to “do not perform abnormality notification light emission”, the light emission luminance is similar to that during the lamp warning period. It can be adjusted based on the changed luminance setting value (immediately changes if the light always emits, or waits for light emission at the changed luminance setting if the light emits in response to the production request). (Adjustment can be reflected).

  On the other hand, for other effect lamps (corresponding to “LED-B group” in the figure), even if the luminance setting value is changed during the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), the change is performed. The abnormal luminance setting value is not reflected, and the abnormality notification light emission is performed only at a predetermined luminance setting value (adjustment reflection is impossible). In other words, in this case, some of the effect lamps and the other effect lamps can emit light in the same period in which different luminance setting values are reflected. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the abnormality notification light emission that is not related to the state is being performed. In this sense, it is desirable that the effect light emission be able to change the luminance set value only in a range equal to or less than the luminance set value adopted by the abnormality notification light emission.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when such anomaly notification light emission is being performed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not necessarily emitted even if a change in the brightness set value is received. It does not output. That is, until the timing tp2 when the remaining time until the period in which the brightness adjustment target is limited to a part is less than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) arrives (timing tp1 to tp2). Even if the luminance setting value is changed and the emission luminance of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted, control is performed so as not to output a luminance adjustment confirmation sound. Then, based on the arrival of the timing tp2, when a change in the luminance setting value is accepted (when the emission luminance of some of the effect lamps is actually adjusted), the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output again. Is trying to cause a situation.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission, if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output despite the change of the brightness setting value, the remaining time until the end of the period is completed. While it is possible to recognize that the situation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), when the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output when the brightness setting value is changed, the period is ended. It becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Therefore, even if the abnormality notification light emission itself does not change and the state is continued, it indicates to the player that the situation is internally toward a normal state (improvement). Therefore, even if the abnormality notification light emission is performed for a relatively long time, it is expected that the desire to continue the game is appropriately promoted.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, all the effects are produced even during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission (timing tp2 to tp3) in which the luminance setting value is only partially reflected (the LED-A group). The same sound as when the lamp is in a normal state in which the luminance setting value can be reflected is output as the luminance adjustment confirmation sound, thereby giving a sense of security as if the lamp has already returned to a normal state. It is configured to suppress a decrease in entertainment interest during the period in which the abnormality notification light emission is performed. However, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310, at timing tp3 at which the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission ends, even if the brightness setting value has been changed a plurality of times before, the brightness setting value at that time is changed. Will be performed in such a way that it is reflected collectively on the other effect lamps ("LED-B group", which had been performing the abnormal notification light emission until then). In this case, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound Is important to make it appear as if it had already returned to a normal state.

  In the above description example, when the game is in a non-game state in which the game is not executed, such as during a demo screen, a specific state (for example, a state in which the right gate has passed (abnormal game) in a non-time-saving state). The description has been given as an example in which the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection that the occurrence has occurred. However, it is detected that a specific state (for example, a state in which a right gate has passed (abnormal game) in a non-time saving state, etc.) has been detected in a game state in which the game is being executed (a symbol fluctuation state, etc.). Also in this case, a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated based on the detection.

  When a ramp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3) is generated in a game execution state in which a game is being executed (a symbol change state, a big hit game state, or the like), basically the same as in the above-described example. It is. However, in this case, regardless of whether or not a period (timing tp2 to tp3) has arrived after the timing tp2 when the remaining time is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), a lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp1). In tp3), it is desirable not to output the brightness adjustment confirmation sound. In other words, the state of being in the game execution state means that the game is just being continued by the player, so it is assumed that the possibility that the game will be terminated is extremely low. Therefore, even if the situation can be returned to the normal state soon (timing tp2 to tp3), by maintaining the control in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, “the abnormality notification light emission is still being executed. It is more desirable to make accurate information such as "" recognized as a player. Further, in this case, even after the execution period (timing tp1 to tp3) of the abnormal notification light emission ends and the game returns to the normal state, the state in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained as long as the game execution state is continued. You may do so. If the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the game execution state or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, the meaning may not be understood and the user may not be able to concentrate on the game.

  In the above-described example, when the game is changed from the non-game state to the game execution state during the period between timings tp2 and tp3 in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output (symbol change starts). In such a case, for example, "the control in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output (the non-audible control at the timing tp1 to tp2)" is re-executed based on the game execution state. Then, the "control for not outputting the brightness adjustment confirmation sound" is maintained until the timing tp3 arrives or until the game execution state is ended.

  Further, in the above-described example, for example, even when the remaining time is less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), a period (timing tp2 to tp3) after the timing tp2 arrives, If a specific state (for example, a state where right gate passing (abnormal game) has occurred in a non-time saving state, etc.) during the period is detected again, the above-mentioned point is detected from the time of the detection. It is desirable that the processing relating to the abnormality notification light emission (processing after timing tp1) be redone. That is, in this case, even if the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output, the state is returned to a state where the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output.

  In the above-described example, when the timing tp3 arrives, all the effect lamps are shifted to the normal state in which adjustment based on the luminance setting value can be performed. However, in the lamp warning period (timing tp1 to tp3), a plurality of effect lamps are prepared as effect lamps that cannot be adjusted based on the luminance setting value, and when the time tp3 arrives, these effect lamps are used. Although only a part can be adjusted based on the luminance setting value, at least a specific effect lamp cannot be adjusted based on the luminance setting value even in a normal state after the timing tp3 has arrived. You may do so. According to such a configuration, since the restriction on the brightness adjustment is left for a specific effect lamp, even after the lamp warning period ends and the lamp returns to the normal state, the lamp warning is performed before that. The pachinko machine 1 can function as a history in which a period has occurred, and stable operation as the pachinko machine 1 can be expected. Note that the restriction left for a specific effect lamp may be maintained as unremovable. For example, the restriction may be releasable by clearing the RAM or shutting down the power. Is desirable.

  Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output as the same sound as the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and it is not possible to confirm which “confirmation sound” was output. It is desirable to make something recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

  Further, during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission according to the above-described example, it is desirable that the change of the set value relating to the volume of the effect sound is also accepted based on the operation acceptance by the player. In this case, the “processing related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment” during the execution period of the abnormality notification light emission can be realized by appropriately adopting the contents described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168. Note that, in this case, the “processing related to the notification sound and the volume adjustment” described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168 may be ended (the volume is collectively reflected) when the timing tp3 arrives. The processing may be terminated (collective reflection of sound volume) when tp2 arrives. In such a configuration, the timing tp2 at which the volume setting value is collectively reflected is different from the timing tp3 at which the luminance setting value is collectively reflected. It is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game by making it appear as if he / she has already returned to the normal time or having a tendency to recover.

  Further, in the above description example, the specific state is exemplified as “a state in which the right gate has passed (abnormal game) in a non-time saving state”. (The state in which the door opening abnormality or the magnetic detection abnormality has occurred, etc.).

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

[14. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by audio output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, display of an image, and the like, and various elaborate effects are attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes an effect according to the game state of the game. I do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

  In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effect displays using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially specified in time series. By preparing a control process for realizing a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols in accordance with the scenario data, there is an advantage that various effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. The scenario data can also include BGM designation. In this case, the sound source IC outputs the designated BGM, so that the sound corresponding to the display screen can be output.

  However, in gaming machines, more elaborate effects are required. In the above-described related art, it was difficult to perform various effects by linking a plurality of effect devices, such as sound output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, the BGM cannot be changed while the image display according to the scenario data is being executed. In addition, when outputting a sound effect in response to a user operation during image display, display of an image and output of BGM are stopped, and a sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect ends, the BGM and the image display are restarted from the beginning, regardless of how far the BGM has been played, giving an uncomfortable feeling. Regarding the lighting and blinking of the lamp, depending on the game state, it is controlled by an individual program regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize various lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a main command from the main control board 1310, and executes a game effect. In the present embodiment, each component for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after describing the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment, the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 311 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. 5080.

  The input command analysis unit 5010 receives an input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). The layers will be described. In the present embodiment, a layer is set for each effect division such as a background or a character, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed. Is output. As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (action) of the character is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the character. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect data (scheduler data) and improve the development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying an effect for each layer.

  The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and obtains effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions instructing a predetermined process to be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the rendering device in order to be performed in order to control the rendering in each rendering device. Data. The effect block data includes “liquid crystal effect block data” for executing the effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, “liquid crystal pattern block data” for variably displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, sound (sound), There are three types of “sub-effect block data” for controlling a lamp, an accessory, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, a function corresponding to each rendering device is called, and rendering device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

  The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured as software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. Has been realized. The effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit may be used, and may be configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, details of the configuration of modules and the like that realize the above-described functions will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all may be configured as hardware.

  In the present embodiment, a system module 5100 for driving each rendering device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, and the like, as modules relating to effects. An effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command is also included.

  The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In the present embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, and has a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal and evaluates the checksum value. If the received command is not determined to be correct, the received command is discarded and a correct command If it is determined, it is transferred to the command analysis module 5200.

  The main command includes information indicating the contents related to the performance among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the presence or absence of a game ball winning the starting winning opening, the result of a special figure lottery, and a change pattern (change time) of a special symbol can be included in the main command. When the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the output of a sensor such as opening of a door or the like, the operation of a start lever or a stop button, the rotation or stop of a reel, the success or failure of a stop, and the like can be mentioned. Note that the commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included according to the model of the gaming machine and the content of the effect.

  The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is a command related to an effect. If it is determined that the command is for an effect, the command is passed to the effect control unit 5020.

  The effect control unit 5020 specifies a layer to be effect-controlled from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, a block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

  The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, operation of an accessory, and the like.

  When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing a liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, a background, a character, an identification pattern, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and a character, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is transferred to the effect display devices (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display device (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1600, the door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated by, for example, a method of expanding character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command on a frame buffer at a specified position.

  When the effect block number is determined, sub effect block control section 5320 executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of a lamp, a sound, and a motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs an operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

  The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at one frame interval and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect device at 1 millisecond interval are included in the scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices. included. As described above, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it is possible to execute an effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, if 1f corresponds to the update interval of the drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. In addition, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to promptly respond to a malfunction in the operation of the accessory.

  The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, as an example, three types of effect control of sound (sound) output, lighting / flashing of a lamp, and operation of an accessory are described. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without any particular distinction as being the same except for the execution cycle. Hereinafter, the outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described.

  First, a description will be given of a case where an effect by sound (sound) output is executed. When the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a sound output function (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the designated parameters. Note that a plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound effects by different schedulers, and sounds can be output simultaneously. . The sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

  Next, a case where an effect by a lamp is executed will be described. When the sub-effect block data includes scheduler data for ramp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the ramp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a lamp control function (for example, HP PLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the designated parameters. Note that a plurality of schedulers can be activated as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

  The lamp module 5600 creates the lamp drive data every cycle (one frame or one millisecond), and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is output to the next operation of the lamp data creation in response to the increase in the lamp system or the increase in the lamp control processing time due to the overlapping of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, the processing related to the creation of the lamp data only needs to be completed within the processing cycle.

  More specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously generated lamp driving data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and the respective lamps are turned on and off. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. Note that the same applies to the case of controlling the lighting and blinking of the LED, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced by the LED unless otherwise specified.

  Lastly, a case where a driving device (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the accessory is controlled will be described. When the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for controlling the drive device, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for the drive device (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for controlling the driving device (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the driving device module 5700 generates lamp driving data based on the designated parameters. Note that a plurality of schedulers can be activated as in the case of sound output, and a plurality of drive devices can be controlled in parallel.

  The drive module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In the present embodiment, the creation and output of the motor drive data are performed at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs it to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using the DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each drive device is not the same timing as the timing output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, and the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. Output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all the motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame period becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the wait time until the completion of the serial transmission is reduced to zero by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU used. In such a case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and a latch signal is output by a DMA completion interrupt, whereby the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission can be reduced to zero. At the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect drive photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel-serial control IC.

[18-2. Data configuration]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, a call function for taking in other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the call function, temporarily executes another scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. This makes it possible to use general-purpose effect contents in various situations, as in the case of calling a subroutine in a general program.

  This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect unique to a gaming machine as described below. In the gaming machine, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players may be able to find a subtle difference in the content of the effect during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general effect contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, so that such a subtle difference can be resolved, and it is difficult to predict a lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

  As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function for switching effect contents according to a game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processing specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of execution of the conditional branch function, determines the game state based on the main command, and executes the effect contents according to the game state. . By doing so, it is possible to deal with a variety of diversified game states with one scheduler data. The game state used for the conditional branch includes, for example, a result of a lottery performed during the game, presence / absence of operation of a button or the like by a player, and the like. In the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, a stopped state of a rotating reel may be used, and in a pachinko machine, a winning state in a starting winning opening may be used. Alternatively, the condition may be branched depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

  The effect contents after the conditional branching can also have various configurations. For example, after the conditional branch, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by a conditional branch, the process may return to the process before the branch. According to the latter aspect, for example, after a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

  As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and for example, can include a display device for displaying an image. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image, such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display, can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared in a bitmap.

[18-3. Basic concept of staging control]
FIG. 313 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is a sub-effect performed by executing scheduler data including a function will be described, and in particular, a sound (sound) output will be described as an example.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 (the sub effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the effect device when executing the effect. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes a function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

  The sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for reproducing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being reproduced, "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase reproduction, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and control specified by parameters or the like is executed. When receiving the execution of the sound function, sound module 5500 generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source.

  The output of the sound corresponding to the designated channel is controlled by the function processed by the sound module 5500. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the description will be made on the assumption that the number of channels is 4 for easy understanding. The sound output from each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. Note that the speakers [1] to [4] shown here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

  The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated at the lower right of the figure. The work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo playback flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not to perform stereo output. The output volume is a volume for each channel. The loop attribute is a specification of whether or not to repeat playback. These pieces of information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

  As described above, in FIG. 313, the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment has been described by taking sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function for controlling each rendering device is called and processed by a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to each rendering device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the effect control of the gaming machine has been described above. Subsequently, a flow of the effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 314A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As described with reference to FIG. 312, when the main command is received from main control board 1310, effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command using command analysis module 5200, and notifies effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

  The effect control unit 5020, based on the layer data table, each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer for performing an effect related to the variation pattern), a hold layer (a layer for performing an effect related to the hold effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of a communication error layer (a layer for reporting a communication error), a notification layer (a layer for performing various notifications), and an abnormality notification layer (a layer for performing abnormality notification). Acquisition and update management of the effect block data number corresponding to each layer are performed. The obtained effect block data number is transferred to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, if the effect block number is a variable pattern layer, based on the variable pattern number, a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variable pattern, a liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variable pattern, and a sub effect block data for each variable pattern Determined from the combination number table. The unit of the division of the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) which is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start of the change of the special symbol until the stop of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect contents and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of effect blocks based on the effect block number, it is possible to synchronize the effects by each effect device. In addition, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern layer is on the rearmost side, and the abnormality notification layer is on the foreground. It is a configuration for.

  When receiving the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, effect block control section 5040, a scheduler control section (liquid crystal effect block control section 5310, liquid crystal design block control section 5311, sub effect block) corresponding to each layer. The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal design block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing an effect.

  For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start winning are displayed. 5053 is obtained. At the start of the change of the special symbol, a change start command or the like is transmitted, and the change pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, a command is also transmitted when an error or a warning is reported, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously performed.

  When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler executing unit 5331 executes the liquid crystal effect. The effect 1f scheduler is activated. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 is instructed to the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  When the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal design block data 5052 from the liquid crystal design block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal design block data number, the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 Starts the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the processing of the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 is instructed to the liquid crystal module 5400. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The process in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

  Upon acquiring the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies an execution cycle (one frame or one millisecond) based on information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053 and the like. Then, when the execution cycle is one frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler is started by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 is used to activate the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

  Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 has no difference depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data commonly used by schedulers having different execution periods, thereby reducing the data capacity. Further, it is possible to quickly respond to a change in the execution cycle of the effect device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, thereby enabling scheduler data to be shared, preventing the same kind of trouble from occurring at a plurality of locations, and realizing a reduction in data capacity. it can.

  Here, a specific example in which the same schedule data is executed simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 314B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of step-up notice of the present embodiment. For the step-up notice, four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed, and by executing an effect that develops the effect contents step by step, the player is expected to see the fluctuation display result of the symbol. Suggest degree.

  In the step-up notice 1, when the step-up 1 effect is executed, the notice effect ends. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 2 effect ends. The effect is similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effect is ended after the end of the step-up three effects and the step-up four effects, respectively.

  In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also execute the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound effect, different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage (stage) of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, in order to display the same lamp pattern at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

  In addition, when the LCD production of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the current step-up notice, so that a plurality of step-up effects are simultaneously performed. There is a period to be done. As described above, in the lamp effect, the same scheduler data needs to be executed for the subsequent step-up effect. However, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a plurality of schedulers can execute the same scheduler data simultaneously is used. Has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed in each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods are overlapped.

  Specifically, in the case of executing the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) in the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect. The notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicately) without defining the same scheduler data redundantly. You are realizing to run.

  The sub-production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-production 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls a module (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the control-targeted production device, and defines it in the sub-production schedule data 5073. Instruct the processing of the specified function. Each module processes the function instructed to be executed based on the designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of scheduler data execution]
FIG. 315 is a view for explaining the flow when the scheduler data of the present embodiment is executed. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect contents based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and controls the various effect devices by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700. Control. FIG. 315 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

  In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. The effect management pointers are prepared by the number corresponding to the effect number, but here, only five are exemplified. In the example of the drawing, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

  In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 315, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may have a configuration in which the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other. The scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then stores the scheduler data in the scheduler data. What is necessary is just to perform a process. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search is not required, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 315, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of functions and parameters in principle. The function is, as described above, a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module of the operation of the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify a parameter may be provided.

  The functions are classified into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (drives), and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. Users are functions that do not belong to these groups. The specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, the “call” function is specified at the address A2. The “call” function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily shift to the address designated by the parameter and perform the processing of the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the saved pointer value described above.

  After the address A2, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the “call” function. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and the process returns at A3n. When the effect command ends these processes, the “call” returns to the specified address A2, and shifts to the process of the next address A3.

  As described above, by utilizing the “call” function, the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n can be taken into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced, and the creation load can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players may be able to find a subtle difference in the content of the effect during the lottery and guess the lottery result or the like. On the other hand, in the present invention, the general effect contents can be utilized in various scenes by calling, so that such a subtle difference can be eliminated, and it becomes difficult to predict the lottery result and the like. That is, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being spoiled.

  Although the “call” function can be used as described above, the scheduler data 5401 according to the present embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "character object operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "lamp operation number set". This is because it merely specifies a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

  In the example shown in FIG. 315, next, NOP (wait) is executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As described later, in the present embodiment, the processing is repeatedly executed by a timer interrupt. Therefore, in the “NOP” function, if the value of the parameter Prm [031] is not 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 ends the scheduler data processing once without performing the subsequent processing. Then, processing for shifting to the function at the next address is performed.

  In the present embodiment, a voice operation number and the like are specified using a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 314A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are separately prepared, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. The layer specified by effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the system module layer (see FIG. 314A). In the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

  Similarly, the scheduler data after the address A11 of the conditional branch is defined by the function and the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 315, no conditional branch is provided after the address A11 of the conditional branch until the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the above-described block BL1, it is possible to specify an accessory command (address A22), a voice operation number (address A21), and the like without considering a conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, the block BL3 or the like may be fetched by a “call” function.

  In the scheduler data, a conditional branch and a “call” function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 315, if the condition of “random number value ≦ Th1?” Is given to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Next, after the address A2 (address A2 + 1), if an address A41 (not shown) is called under the condition of “Th1 <random number value ≦ Th2?”, The address A31 and subsequent addresses are read according to the random number value. Is performed differently. In this way, if different addresses are called in conditional branches corresponding to random numbers, the effect contents can be switched at random by random numbers, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Hereinafter, switching the effect content in this manner is referred to as “effect lottery” in this specification.

  In the production lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only some of them may be switched. When switching all, the contents of the display, the sound, and the lamp may all be specified in the scheduler data called by the “call” function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and unify the other parts after returning from the "call" function do it.

  Further, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for effect lottery by using a conditional branch and a “call” function in the scheduler data. In this case, the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently perform an effect lottery. As a result, there is an advantage that the effect mode realized by the combination is very diversified and the interest can be further enhanced.

  However, regardless of the result of the effect lottery of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the drive device, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize an effect without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has contents in which the effect ends at the same time. It is not an essential requirement that the production ends at the same time, and these production times may not be the same.

  The effect lottery using the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect content can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the driving device. For example, at the time when the production lottery is instructed, when the driving device is performing the eight-character distribution operation and other operations are restricted, the driving device module 5700 prohibits the production lottery relating to the driving device. You may. Similarly, for the display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited according to the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

  As described above, the effect lottery is to switch the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize various effects more than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound (sound) output control]
Subsequently, a function of the sound module for controlling the sound output will be described. FIG. 316 is an explanatory diagram illustrating functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio. In addition, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

  After specifying the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Although any identification information can be used as the voice action number, as in the case of the above-mentioned effect number, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice action number table and the processing load when referring to the table. There is an advantage that it is possible.

  The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 includes functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the example shown in FIG. 316, a “call” function is defined at the address SA2. After executing a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs processing of the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

  At address SA3, phrase playback is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter, and reproduces it.

  Further, an example of the structure of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. The phrase number is identification information given to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, any identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as a phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

  The channel is an output channel specified at the time of phrase playback. The left and right pan pots and the upper and lower pan pots are the left / right / up / down output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of a sound to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a reads out sound source data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces sound. The loop is a specification of whether or not to reproduce the sound repeatedly. “Stereo” is a designation of whether or not to perform stereo output.

  Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. The work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operation state indicates whether each layer is operating. The voice number indicates the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In the present embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 316, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the processing proceeds. The timer value indicates a waiting time until the next function is executed. This is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially reduced as the time elapses. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

  The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of the call and the loop multiplexed by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the process after the address SA31 called by the “call” function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the “call” function (second call), the call nest The number is two. When returning to the first call after finishing the second call, the number of call nests is reduced to one. The same applies to loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repetition count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Subsequently, the function of the lamp module for controlling the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 317 is an explanatory diagram illustrating functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lighting / flashing control of the lamp. Similarly to the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

  When specifying the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed with reference to the lamp operation number table. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although any identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, as in the case of the above-described effect number, using the storage address can reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and the processing load when referring to the table. There is an advantage of making it possible.

  The ramp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

  The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, like the effect data (FIG. 315). The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the ramp will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 317, a “call” function is defined at the address LA2. After executing a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs processing of the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

  At the address LA3, a gradation pattern setting is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. The lamp scheduler 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other, and turns on the lamp with the designated gradation data 1 and, when the time designated by the timer value elapses, switches the lamp with the gradation data 2. Lights up. Here, an example is shown in which two types of gradation data are specified. However, when three or more gradation data are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processing for the addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp ends. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it stops (address LAn).

  Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the figure. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number indicates the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In the present embodiment, the head address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer indicates a waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is sequentially subtracted as the time elapses. The lamp executes the next function when this value becomes 0. The gradation data timer indicates a waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 317, when executing the gradation data specified in the address LA11, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data is shifted from gradation data 1 to gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 ends and the processing shifts to the processing of the address LA12.

  The ramp pointer is an address of scheduler data 5601 that is being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 317, the value of the ramp pointer sequentially changes to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the processing proceeds. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example shown in the figure, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the processing proceeds. The loop count is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive device control]
Subsequently, a function of the driving device module 5700 for controlling the operation of the driving device will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. Drive device module 5700 receives an instruction from scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified in a function included in scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive device. The driving device module 5700 can also perform processing by receiving requests from a plurality of schedulers.

  The control items of the drive device include, for example, a movement amount (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), a movement time, a movement speed (motor rotation speed), an excitation method, a trapezoid drive, a rotation direction, and the like. Further, an instruction to execute a return operation for returning to the home position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (stop the device while being biased to the limit position of the movable range when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed at a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function when the rotation starts and stops.

  The scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The function used in the scheduler data to control the driving device will be described later with reference to FIG.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. FIG. 318 to FIG. 320 are diagrams showing examples of functions in effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As described above, the functions are classified into groups of sequence control, lamp, sound, motor, and user. Hereinafter, functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
The functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of the effect. FIG. 318 shows an example of a sequence control function. Hereinafter, an outline of each function will be described.

  “STOP” is a function indicating the end of the scheduler data. “NOP” is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle of executing the “NOP” function. If the execution is performed at the frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment. If 30 is designated, it waits for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if it is specified as 30 times, it waits for about 30 ms. The “NOP_F_VALUE” uses the number of executions (the number of frames), the scheduler memory number, the mask value, and the comparison value as parameters. When the condition based on the scheduler memory number, the mask value, and the comparison value is satisfied, the “NOP_F_VALUE” function ends, and the condition If the condition is not satisfied, the conditional wait function waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

  “MEMW” is a function that uses the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value to the corresponding scheduler work area. “LOOPST” is a function for performing a repetitive processing (loop), and designates the head of the loop and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When “0” is set to the number of loops, an infinite loop is performed. “LOOP” is a function for designating the end of the repetitive processing (loop).

  “RET” is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the “call” function is set in the effect management table. “CALL” is the above-mentioned “call” function, which executes processing from a specified address (block), and sets information such as an address value and a label that specifies a call destination such as an address. In “CALL”, the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the call destination, the address saved by the above-mentioned “RET” function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

  “SUBC” selects a process to be called (a block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the “call” function is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBC” will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of the callee is completed by the “SUBC” function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the process next to the “SUBC” function).

  “SUBJ” selects a process to be called (a block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index, based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, a “JUMP” function to be described later is executed based on the designated condition. A specific example using “SUBJ” will be described later with reference to FIG. The process of the caller who executed the “SUBJ” function does not return to the process of the caller, but continues the process of the callee. “JUMP” sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues the processing from the specified address or label.

  “REQ” is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using “REQ” will be described later with reference to FIG. “REQF” is a function for activating another scheduler specified by the parameter, similarly to “REQ”, and the other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibited time specified by the parameter elapses. Prohibit booting. With “REQ”, control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, the “REQF” allows the scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a designated period, and, for example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It can be prevented from becoming disabled.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
The function belonging to the lamp group is a function for controlling the flow of the lamp effect. FIG. 319 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “HPPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process of lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In “HPPLAY”, the lamp is reset even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is designated by setting a gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

  “KPLAY” is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process of lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter, similarly to “HPPLAY”. In “KPLAY”, when a lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without resetting.

  “HPPLAY2” is a function for executing a ramp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter. The processing is the same as “HPPLAY”. “KPLAY2” is a function for executing ramp gradation data reproduction processing by specifying a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter, similarly to “HPPLAY2”. The processing is the same as “KPLAY”.

  “HPPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute a designated ramp gradation data reproduction process of reproducing the ramp gradation data designated by the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted at the time of reproduction by “HPPLAY” and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning, and the reproduction of the lamp gradation data by “KPLAY” is performed. Continue playback without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed using “KPLAY” while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is performed.

  The process of “HPPLAY2” is the same as the process of “HPPLAY” except that in addition to the function of “HPPLAY” described above, a layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by a parameter, and a layer is designated by a parameter.

  The processing of “KPLAY2” is the same as that of “KPLAY” except that in addition to the function of “KPLAY” described above, a layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is designated by a parameter, and a layer is designated by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound (sound))]
The functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. FIGS. 319 and 320 show examples of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “SPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if a sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. “SXPLAY” is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process of outputting a sound based on a phrase number designated by a parameter, similarly to “SPPLAY”. In “SXPLAY”, when the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. “STOP_PH” is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping reproduction of a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter.

  “PAN_PH” is used to calculate the phrase being played back from the voice output coordinate position at the start of execution of the “PAN_PH” function using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the designated transition time. “PAN_PH2” can specify a panpot start coordinate position by a parameter in addition to the function of the “PAN_PH” function. Like the “PAN_PH” function, the voice output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of the function execution This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

  "VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of the execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase or decrease the volume value at the transition time. “VOL_FADE_PH2” can specify a fade start volume value by a parameter in addition to the function of the “VOL_FADE_PH” function. Like the “VOL_FADE_PH” function, the volume value of the target phrase is set to the parameter at the start of the function execution. This is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value specified by.

  “VOL_PH” is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter using the volume value specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” is a function to mute the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” is a function for canceling the mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

  “SCPPLAY” and “SXCPPLAY” execute a specified ch tune reproduction process for reproducing a phrase corresponding to a phrase number specified in a parameter on a specified channel. If the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted during reproduction by "SCPPLAY" and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning, and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during reproduction by "SXCPPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using “SXCPPLAY” while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

  “PAN_CH” performs panpotting for a ch (channel) while “PAN_PH” performs panpotting for a phrase. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than the above, the processing is the same as “PAN_PH”. Regarding “PAN_CH2”, the above-mentioned “PAN_PH2” performs a panpot for a phrase, while performing a panpot for a ch. The ch is specified by a parameter, except that the phrase is changed to a ch. "And the processing does not change.

  The “VOL_FADE_CH” is different from the “VOL_FADE_PH” in that the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH” performs fade for a phrase, but performs fade for a channel. Processing does not change. Regarding “VOL_FADE_CH2”, while the above-mentioned “VOL_FADE_PH2” performs fade for a phrase, it performs fade for a ch. The ch is designated by a parameter and the phrase is changed to “ch” except that the phrase is changed to ch. Processing does not change.

  “VOL_CH” increases or decreases the volume value for a phrase, whereas “VOL_PH” increases or decreases the volume value for a phrase. The ch is specified by a parameter, and the phrase is changed to a ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as “VOL_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_ON_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH” performs mute (mute) for a phrase, but mutes (mute) for a ch. The ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as “VOL_MUTE_ON_PH”. Regarding “VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH”, the above-mentioned “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” cancels the mute for the phrase, whereas the mute cancels for the ch. The ch is a phrase specified by a parameter. The processing does not change from “VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH” except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)
The functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the output of the motor and the solenoid. FIG. 320 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

  "MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process for causing the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process for causing the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process for causing the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function Details (User)]
The function belonging to the user group is a function for executing control that does not belong to the group described above. FIG. 320 shows an example of these functions, and an outline of each function will be described.

  “MBUF_SET” executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a and the like. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by “COMMAND0” is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, and performs the same operation as the main command. “MEMC” executes a scheduler memory copy process of copying the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string in which functions necessary for executing a series of processes are defined in the execution order. Although one or more schedulers are provided for each management purpose, all functions can be executed by all schedulers, functions related to lamps are executed by a sound scheduler, and a scheduler for an accessory is executed. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each application, which can execute the functions for sound, and it is possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. There is no limit to the number of schedulers to be executed, and a plurality of registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an example of the scheduler definition according to the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition or the device to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

  First, an example of a scheduler relating to state transition will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure states SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  Further, there is a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data for controlling transition of an internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins a performance execution lottery, or transitions to another state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation I do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

  To the scheduler for sound, a background for controlling the output of the sound output with the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and output at the time of executing the notice effect. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound that sounds, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

  Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the scheduler related to the lamp includes a background for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp in accordance with the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH01) for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamp when the notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

  Also, a scheduler that controls the sound and the lamp in association with each other is defined. Such a scheduler includes a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound or turns on / off the lamp in order to notify the outside of a broken or clogged ball or an alarm that is detected when an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor. There are schedulers (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a general-purpose sound / lamp scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01 to 05) generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lighting / flashing of a lamp are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

  The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing a system operation, and a scheduler for executing motor ram clear scheduler data for performing a setting at the time of RAM clear. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing a motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of the accessory, and the like, for executing a motor accessory correction scheduler data for correcting the position of the accessory. (MOTHOS_SCH), and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the effect or the like.

  A general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the operation of a particular accessory and a general-purpose scheduler used without depending on the type of the accessory, etc. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 10).

  The processing cycle of the scheduler for the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for the management of the game state, the sound and the ramp (1f of this embodiment: about 33.334 ms). Has become.

  Although the number of schedulers for controlling each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled so as to dynamically increase or decrease in accordance with a game state or a notice. This makes it possible to activate each scheduler without depending on the number of effects and the like and the number of effects provided in the gaming machine, and it is possible to reduce restrictions for executing effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Direction 1)]
The functions used in the effect control and the outline of the types and functions of the schedulers that perform a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Hereinafter, scheduler data and specific application examples of the functions will be described with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production outline]
FIG. 322A is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the accessory controlled using the scheduler data according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322A, the gaming board 5 of this embodiment has a logo role 5001, a star role 5002 (a left star role 5002a, a middle star role 5002b, a right star role 5002c) and a hatchet role 5003. Is arranged.

  The logo combination 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the end of the effect. Further, in addition to the vertical movement, the logo character 5001 can perform an effect of vibrating up and down and left and right before and after the movement.

  The star character 5002 is disposed above the game area, the left star character 5002a is disposed on the left side, the central star character 5002b is disposed in the center, and the right star character 5002c is disposed on the right. Each star character 5002 can operate independently, and one or more star characters 5002 operate at a predetermined timing in accordance with the effect contents.

  The left star role 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Also, the medium star role 5002b moves downward, and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star role 5002c moves to the lower right, and can move to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. In addition, each star role 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or may return to an intermediate position and stop after reaching the final arrival position.

  The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet object 5003 can be dropped (moved) from an initial position (upper position) to an intermediate position and a lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet announcement notice, etc., it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once Operation mode is set. As with the logo role 5001, the hatch role 5003 can also perform an effect of vibrating up, down, left, and right before and after movement.

  Subsequently, a flow of a notice effect performed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 322B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star accessory notice, and a button (BTN) logo accessory drop notice will be described. It should be noted that the flow of the notice effect including the hatch notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 322B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of a notice effect performed in a series of variable display from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and a diagram illustrating a scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. is there. In the series of change display shown in FIG. 322B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the change. Thereafter, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group announcement, a star accessory announcement, and a button (BTN) logo accessory fall announcement are executed. In each announcement effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, output of sound, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed.

  Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each announcement effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice (FIG. 323), the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice (FIG. 324), and the star character in the star character notice The motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 325 to 327) for controlling the operation of the 5002 and the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (FIG. 328) for controlling the operation of the logo combination 5001 in the button logo combination fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 322B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) “LMP_SCH02”.

  FIG. 323 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" for controlling the lighting / flashing of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” is started, first, the function “SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC”, and is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_STP” and the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area “YKK_STP” stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”.

  The address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data is stored in the step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP”. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. The SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, the lamp is turned off at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with a step-up number of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on / off in a corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH01”.

  After that, the function “RET” is executed in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, thereby returning to the processing of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP” ends.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with a step-up number of 4 is stored in the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”, and the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is executed. The scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY) by specifying ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up, and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step Is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on / off in a corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the notice group 01 ramp scheduler data scheduler “LMP_SCH02”.

  Thereafter, by executing the function “RET” in the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4”, the process returns to the next process of the caller (scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP”). Further, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” ends.

  The step-up notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” will be described. First, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment). is there. Depending on the content of the notice, there is a case where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of a two-branch such as an IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment is increased and complicated, so that management such as correction is difficult. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is simply solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branch are one each. However, it is also possible to process a complicated conditional branch by one action by setting both to a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute the common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and there is no need to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to cope with a problem in the program, when the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branch processing may not be performed and the “SUBC” function may be terminated.

  That is, the function “SUBC” can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in the table format in advance, and call the selected scheduler data. In a mere conditional branch, it is necessary to define a condition according to the number of branches and set scheduler data of each branch destination. However, in the function “SUBC”, it is possible to easily add or delete a branch destination. In addition, it is possible to easily respond to the addition or change of the production contents, and to improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the change, and the notice is executed to the end by receiving the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

  The button cut-in notice belongs to notice group 02, and lamp scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is driven by notice group 02 ramp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) “LMP_SCH03” as shown in FIG. 322B. It belongs to a different notice group from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, so that the notice can be executed in parallel.

  FIG. 324 is a view for explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" for controlling a lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is started, first, the function “KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thereby, the designated lamp is turned on (flashes) for one second based on the gradation pattern data “PTA_CUT_STA”. At this time, the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since one frame corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, a function from “LOOPST” indicating the start of the loop to a function “LOOP” indicating the end of the loop is executed a maximum number of times. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” is executed at most 90 times.

  Describing the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, "0: button is OFF", and when the effect button is operated, "1: button is ON". Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. The contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” are rewritten by a button processing program outside the scheduler data.

  While “0: Button OFF” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” when the button cut-in notice button is OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. You. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB” of the caller's scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, when the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times, the process exits from the loop processing, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” ends.

  On the other hand, when “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the button cut-in notice button ON lamp scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is set in the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB”. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON” is a function “SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT”, and the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” includes the target scheduler work number “YKK_CUT” and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT”. Is executed with the parameters as parameters.

  The button cut-in notice lamp jump scheduler data address is stored in the button cut-in notice branch jump address table “TBL_LMP_CUT”. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. SUBJ_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, the lamp is turned off at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4 is stored in the button cut-in notice work area “YKK_CUT”, and the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed. In the scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4”, first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern “PTA_CUT_RED”) by the ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the weight processing of 150 frames is performed to continue for 5 seconds. Let it. At this time, the scheduler data is driven using the ramp scheduler “LMP_SCH03”. At this time, the scheduler data “SUBC_LMP_STP4” is driven using the scheduler “LMP_SCH03” for the notice group 02 ramp scheduler data.

  Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function “STOP” and returns to the caller scheduler “SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT”. do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT”: when the “STOP” function included in the “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” is executed, and when the “STOP” function included in the “SUBJ_LMP_CUT4” is executed from the schedulers “SUBJ_LMP_CUT1”. There is.

  The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump “SUBJ” will be described. First, the scheduler data for the lottery results can be called in one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result values in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, there is a case where the range of the lottery result value is several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as an IF sentence, the number of scheduler data for the judgment increases and becomes too complicated to manage the correction and the like. . In “SUBJ”, the above problem is easily solved by using the contents of the work memory as an index. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of the call address tables for branch are one each. However, it is also possible to process a complicated conditional branch by one action by setting both to a plurality. Secondly, since the “JUMP” format is used, different processing can be executed for each of the branched scheduler data after execution of the “SUBJ” function. Similarly to "SUBC", in order to cope with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, branch processing is not performed, and the "SUBC" function ends. You may do so.

  That is, the function “SUBJ” selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in the table format in advance, similarly to the function “SUBBC”, and selects the selected scheduler data. , And the same effect as the function “SUBC” can be obtained.

  Also, unlike the function “SUBC”, the function “SUBJ” continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller. ing. For example, when the effect content to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, the use of the function “SUBJ” can prevent the effect from being executed repeatedly. On the other hand, in the function “SUBC”, the process returns to the process based on the scheduler data of the caller, so that after the process of the callee has been performed, it is possible to execute a common post-process, thereby simplifying the process.

  Therefore, by using the function “SUBC” and the function “SUBJ”, it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and make the structure flexible to the processing branch. Further, since it is easy to handle additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination in the table format, development efficiency is improved, and it is also easy to respond to changes in game machine specifications.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character announcement]
Subsequently, the control of the star accessory announcement performed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When the special symbol change display reaches a reach and shifts to the latter half of the change, a group notice is generated, and a star character announcement is executed independently of the group notice. The notice of the star role is a plurality of types of star role 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). By operating, it notifies the degree of expectation of the symbol fluctuation. Specifically, the greater the number of appearances of the star combination 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the star role announcement in this embodiment is executed by driving the star role announcement motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH02” (left star role scheduler data scheduler). Is done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) may be used. .

  FIG. 325 to FIG. 327 are diagrams illustrating the contents of scheduler data for performing motor control in the star character announcement of the present embodiment. 325 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” for controlling the overall flow and the left star role 5002a, FIG. 326 is scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” for controlling the right star role 5002c, and FIG. 327 is a scheduler for controlling the middle star role 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is started, first, the function “SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA” is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed using the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star auditors announcement notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”, and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the star auditors notice notice work area “YKK_HYA”. . In the star auditors work notice area “YKK_HYA”, a lottery result value of the star auditors notice is stored, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star auditors announcement branch call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA”.

  The star character announcement notice call address table “TBL_MOT_HYA” stores the address of the star character appearance scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is a dummy call address indicating that no processing is performed. By preparing a dummy call address, it is possible to make the accessory inactive at the time of non-winning of the advance notice. I have. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a star character announcement. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is only the left star character 5002a, the SUBC_MOT_HY2a is the left star character 5002a, and the SUBC_MOT_H5002a is the SUBC_MOT_HY2a star. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star character 5002.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that a star role announcement that causes the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c to appear is executed in the star role preview work area “YKK_HYA”. “3” is stored, and the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” is executed. In addition, when operating only the left star role 5002a, the lottery result value of the star role preview is “1”, and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star role preview is operated. “2” is set as the result value.

  The scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_HYA3” first executes a function “MPLAY” corresponding to the motor reproduction process by specifying a parameter “PTA_HYA_LEF” indicating a pattern of an appearance operation of the left star accessory 5002a. At this time, the function “MPLAY” is executed by the motor scheduler “MOT_SHC02” in which the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is executed.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” by the function “REQ”. The function "REQ" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03”. Similarly, the function “REQ” is used to execute the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” of the medium star character 5002b using the scheduler “MOT_SHC04” for the medium star character 5002b scheduler data. In this embodiment, in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star role 5002a, the motor regeneration process (function “MPLAY”) for operating the right star role 5002c and the middle star role 5002b is executed. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star combination 5002 by a different scheduler, each star combination 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in a specified manner. After the completion of the wait processing, the function “RET” is executed, the process returns to the caller's star announcement notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1”, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” is ended by the function “stop”.

  Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC03” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” is started, as shown in FIG. 326, the parameter “PTA_HYA_RGT” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c is designated, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the right star role 5002c. After the completion of the wait processing, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

  Finally, the control of the medium star role 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. The middle star role 5002b appearance scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is executed using the middle star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler “MOT_SHC04” specified at the time of execution by the function “REQ”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3” is started, as shown in FIG. 327, the parameter “PTA_HYA_MID” indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the medium star character 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process “MPLAY” is executed. . Subsequently, a wait process “NOP: 300” for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the medium star role 5002b. After the completion of the wait processing, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are defined by the function “REQ”. , It is possible to operate the respective accessories in parallel. In other words, the operation of each accessory can be executed in parallel without performing any special control by executing scheduler data individually defined as needed. An advantage of executing the scheduler data in parallel is that, first, a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Further, when performing a plurality of operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, a minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which three types of characters are operated in parallel. However, if there is no problem with the operation of the character, more characters can be executed in parallel. As described above, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of characters can be operated in parallel without requiring complicated control, and a variety of effects can be easily realized.

[18-7-5. Motor Control for Logo Drop Fall Notice]
Next, the control of the logo character fall notification executed in the latter half of the change in the present embodiment will be described. The announcement of the drop of the logo accessory is executed independently of the announcement of the group and the announcement of the star accessory. The logo role drop notice is a notice effect in which a logo role model 5001 imitating a gaming machine logo falls vertically in front of the game board effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a bigger hit than usual is given. Is high.

  As shown in FIG. 322B, the logo role drop notice of this embodiment is performed by driving the logo role drop notice motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” by the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” (logo role scheduler data scheduler). Be executed. Note that the general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05 to 09) can also operate the logo accessory 5001.

  FIG. 328 is a view for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for performing motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is started, first, the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” of 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_LGO_GAT”. Specifically, the logo role 5001 rattles and vibrates. At this time, the motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” is executed at most 90 times.

  Describing the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_LGO” and the button logo role drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” as parameters. You.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO” and, based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to. Identify. The result of the lottery execution of the button logo accessory fall notice is stored in the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”. When the lottery for the execution of the logo character fall notice is won, "1: Execute the logo fall notice" is set. The result of the lottery execution of the button logo role drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo role drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”.

  As long as “0: Not Executed” is set in the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, the motor logo scheduler when the logo accessory drop notice is not executed is executed in the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”. The data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO” of the caller's scheduler “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” (function “LOOP”). Therefore, when the lottery of the button logo role drop notice is not performed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, then the process exits from the loop processing, the function “STOP” is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends. .

  On the other hand, when "1: Logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo role notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo role drop notice execution lottery is won, the button logo role drop is executed. In the announcement lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” at the time of executing the logo accessory fall announcement is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” is a function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO”, and the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” has the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button logo role fall notice button branch call address table. This is executed using “TBL_MOT_LGO” as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. When the effect button is not operated, “0: button OFF” and the effect button are operated. In this case, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo role drop notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: Button OFF”, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” when the logo role drop notification button is OFF in the button logo role drop notification button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF” is only the function “RET”, and returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the caller scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” (function “RET”). Thereby, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Therefore, even when the lottery for the button logo role drop notice is executed, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits the loop process and the function “STOP” is executed. Then, the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” ends.

  On the other hand, if “1: button ON” is set in the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”, the motor scheduler when the logo item fall notice button is ON is displayed in the button logo role drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO”. The data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON”. The function “COMMAND” is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, a command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the gaming board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN” in the same frame as when the command “COM_LGO_ON” is issued. The parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, a wait process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”. At this time, the logo role 5001 performs the dropping operation over 3 seconds, and stops at the dropping position for the remaining 1 second.

  Further, by executing the function “MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI”, an operation of moving the logo combination item 5001 from the drop position to the initial position is performed. Subsequently, weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the completion of the wait processing, the execution of the logo character dropping operation has been completed. Therefore, the function “MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0” is executed, the button logo character preview lottery result is rewritten to “0: not executed”, and the caller's scheduler is executed. The process returns immediately after the function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO” of the data “SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN” (function “RET”). Thereby, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”. Return to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO”, but since the button logo role announcement lottery result has been rewritten to “0: not executed”, the scheduler data “PTA_LGO_DOWN” for dropping the button logo role is executed. Instead, the remaining loop number processing is performed, and the execution of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” is terminated by the function “STOP”.

  As described above, the command is issued internally when the logo role 5001 is dropped, so that the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo role 5001 falls and at the timing when the logo role 5001 falls. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function “COMMAND”, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect devices in cooperation with each other at an appropriate timing as needed, and to execute a more interesting effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal on the sound source built-in VDP 1540 a using the function “COMMAND”. However, by processing the command issued by the function “COMMAND” on the program side, control is performed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result to a work area used by the subsequent scheduler, processing that cannot be controlled by the function command can be performed. An advantage of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as it is for processing timing, so that time management and execution determination by a program are not required. Also, it becomes possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user which are not determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation, issue commands using the function “COMMAND”, and perform the processing.

  In the present embodiment, the function “COMMAND” has a function of transmitting a command of a fixed value. However, instead of a fixed value, a work area is designated and the content of the work area is transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Example of applying scheduler data (when power is turned on)]
Next, scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, control from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on to the time when the game is started and the first variable display is started will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 329 is a view for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the gaming machine is powered on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When receiving the power-on command, the scheduler execution unit 5060 drives the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” with the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed, the sub internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and scheduler data corresponding to the sub game state (sub internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub internal state, for example, as shown in FIG. 329, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, and the like. Is done. At this time, the main game state is in a standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main gaming state and the sub internal state transit to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Subsequently, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 330 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and a relationship between these configurations.

  As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is activated or when a predetermined event occurs in game control on the main control board 1310, a main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. You. The main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 as described with reference to FIG. 312, and is analyzed by the main command analysis processing in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies a type of an event generated by the main command analysis processing, activates a corresponding scheduler, and executes scheduler data.

  Also, when the function “COMMAND0” (FIG. 319) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 in the same manner as the main command, and is analyzed by the main command analysis processing. Is done.

  When a main command or a command output by the function “COMMAND0” is received, a command for executing control in the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis processing. The generated command includes a command for starting the scheduler and a command for controlling various effect devices (sub internal output command).

  The command for activating the scheduler includes, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to a change in the game state on the main control board 1310 and a change in the sub internal state due to the progress of the control on the peripheral control board 1510, and a main control board such as a start winning. The scheduler data for executing an effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, besides directly starting a scheduler from a command, it is possible to start another scheduler by a function “REQ” included in scheduler data.

  On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (command for sub internal output) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the effect device is output based on a function “COMMAND” included in the scheduler data, in addition to being output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in the sub internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order stored from the beginning of the buffer.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by activating another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. Thereby, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts in units of scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, a plurality of types of effects can be implemented in parallel while realizing various effect controls, It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine, for example, by increasing the efficiency of the debugging work.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the command output processing by the function “COMMAND0” makes it possible to standardize the command analysis processing. This makes it possible to share the logic for selecting scheduler data by command analysis and the logic for determining function parameters, resulting in a problem that an enormous number of combinations of scheduler data must be managed in a table. Can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on in the present embodiment.

  As described with reference to FIG. 330, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing, and the scheduler is executed. The sub-status scheduler is activated by the activation process, and the corresponding scheduler data is sequentially executed. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub internal state, and further, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub internal state is output as necessary. .

  Describing the executed scheduler specifically, first, the state power-on scheduler data “SCH_STS_POWERON” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”. In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the command "COM_STS_TAIKI" for transitioning to the next internal state by the function "COMMANDO" is issued, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_TAIKI” in the standby state. After that, by executing the function “NOP: 900”, a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the command “COM_STS_MDEMO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_MDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis processing”, and the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_MDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_MDEMO” in the manufacturer demonstration state. Thereafter, by executing the function “NOP: 300”, the apparatus enters a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the command “COM_STS_KDEMO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in the “main command analysis processing”, and the state model demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data “SCH_STS_KDEMO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” is executed. Thus, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern “PTA_LAMP_KDEMO” in the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function “NOP: 900”, a standby state is established for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the command “COM_STS_GOTO” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_KDEMO” is processed in “main command analysis processing”, and the status goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed.

  Subsequently, when the status goto prevention scheduler data “SCH_STS_GOTO” is executed using the sub-state scheduler “SUB_SCH”, the function “KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO” is executed. Thereby, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data “PTA_LAMP_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. Further, by executing the function “SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO”, sound reproduction is started based on the sound data “PTA_SND_GOTO” in the goto prevention state. Thereafter, by executing the function “NOP: 450”, the standby state is established for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the end of the standby state, the command “COM_STS_TAIKI” for transitioning to the next internal state is issued by the function “COMMANDO”, and the scheduler is stopped.

  The command “COM_STS_TAIKI” is processed in the “main command analysis process”, and the state standby scheduler data “SCH_STS_TAKI” corresponding to the next sub internal state is executed. The gaming machine is ready to play at this stage, the game is started, and the game machine loops in this standby state until a game ball is won.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. More specifically, the function “COMMAND0” enables control as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting a command with the function “COMMAND0” instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. The number of main commands can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program on the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (Direction 2)]
Next, an example in which a hatchet role drop notice is executed instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo role drop notice will be described. The hatchet role fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control is performed such that the parameters used for the first half notice are passed to the second half notice.

[18-9-1. Production outline]
FIG. 332 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect in a series of change display from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the scheduler data for performing an effect, and the scheduler which is performed, and (B) is a figure explaining the position of the hatchet role 5003 in the hatchet role fall notice.

  In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 332 (A), a button (BTN) hatcher role first half fall notification, which is the first half of the hatch role fall notification, is executed in the first half of the variation display. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, the group notice, the button hatcher role first half fall notice continued from the first half, and the hatchet role latter half fall notice are executed. In each announcement effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, output of sound, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The details of the step-up notice are as described above.

  Next, the details of the hatchet role drop announcement will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (B). As described above, the hatchet role drop notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatch role first half fall notice and a hatch role late fall notice.

  In the first half of the button hatchet role drop notice, the notice effect proceeds by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the lottery for the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is won, the fall effect of the hatchet role 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter part of the hatchet role late notice, an effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatter late part fall notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

  If the player wins the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role and operates the production button at a predetermined timing, the hatcher role 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, when the hatchet role 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the lottery for the latter half fall notice is won, the hatchet role 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet role 5003 falls from the upper portion (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the notice of the fall of the hatcher role, and falls to the lower portion (lower position) in the latter half. It should be noted that when the lottery for the latter half drop notice of the hatchet role is won, regardless of the position of the hatchet role 5003, it falls to the lower part. Also, when the notice of dropping the hatchet role ends, the hatchet role 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 332 (B), the production of the hatchet role drop announcement is executed in six types of patterns. More specifically, when the result of the lottery execution of the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the directing button, and the second half fall notification of the hatchet role is non-winning (pattern 1). And winning (pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button hatcher role first half fall notice and the hatchet role late fall notice are not elected, the hatchet role 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from above. In the case of the pattern 2, the hatchet role 5003 is located at the upper part without dropping in the hatchet role drop notice, while the hatch role 5003 is selected from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half fall notice because the winning lottery was won. Fall at once.

  When the lottery for the execution of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice is won, the effect mode of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, in the hatchet role drop announcement, four patterns of rendering modes can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the effect button and the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet role second half drop announcement.

  In the case of winning the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role, without operating the directing button, and furthermore, when the result of the lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet role is not won, the hatcher role 5003 does not fall At the top (pattern 3). If the result of the lottery of the first half fall notification of the button hatcher role is won and the production button is operated, and if the result of the execution lottery of the second half fall notification of the hatchet role is non-winning, at the time of the production button operation, at the time of operating the production button, the hatcher role 5003 Falls from the top to the middle, and remains at the middle until the notice of the fall of the hatchet object ends (pattern 4).

  If you win the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatchet role and do not operate the production button, and if you win the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet role, you do not operate the production button, The hatchet role 5003 is located at the upper part without falling until the latter half fall notice is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half fall notice (pattern 5). Button hatcher role first half drop announcement execution lottery is won, the production button is operated, furthermore, if the hatchet role second half fall announcement execution lottery is won, at the time of production button operation, the hatcher role 5003 from the top It falls to the middle, and then falls from the upper part to the lower part in the latter half fall notice (pattern 6).

  As described above, in the hatchet role drop announcement of the present embodiment, six patterns of effect forms can appear. Hereinafter, scheduler data that controls the operation of the hatchet role item 5003 in the hatchet role drop announcement will be described. More specifically, the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for controlling the operation of the hatchet role 5003 in the button hatch role first half fall notice shown in FIG. 332 (A) and the hatch role second half A description will be given of the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” for the latter half of the hatch role, which controls the operation of the hatch role 5003 in the fall notification.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the fall of the hatchet object]
FIG. 333 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button hatcher role first half fall notification scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that performs motor control in the button hatcher role first half fall notification, which is the first half of the hatchet role fall notification according to the present embodiment. . As described above, when the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role is won, the operation of the production button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function “LOOP”, and the hatcher role 5003 is operated when the production button is operated. Perform the effect to make it. If the lottery for the first half drop announcement of the button hatcher role is not won, and if the effect button is not operated even after the winning, the process ends without operating the hatchet role 5003. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” for the button hatcher role first-half fall notice.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA” is executed to start drawing an effect when the gaming board side display device 1600 rattles the hatchet part 5003. After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT” is executed, and then the wait processing “NOP: 30” for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. Thus, the specified operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data “PTA_NTA_GAT”. Specifically, the hatchet object 5003 rattles and vibrates.

  Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive an input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function “LOOPST” is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between “LOOPST” and “LOOP” is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1” is executed 90 times at the maximum.

  Describing the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” uses the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA1” and the button hatcher role first-half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” as parameters. Be executed.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatcher role first-half fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1” and, based on the contents of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice work area “YKK_NTA1”, sets scheduler data to be a branch destination. Specify the start address of In the work area "YKK_NTA1", the result of the execution of the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatcher role is stored, and if the lottery for the first half of the fall notice of the button hatch role is not elected, "0: In the case where the lottery is won for the “non-winning” and the button hatcher role first-half fall notice execution execution, “1: the hatcher role first-half fall notice execution” is set. The result of the lottery execution of the button hatcher role first half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”.

  If "0: Not Win" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the button hatcher role first half drop notice work area, the button hatchet role thing in the button hatch role first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” when the first-half fall notice is not executed is selected. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON” is only the function “STOP”, and the result of the button hatcher role first-half fall notice lottery is “non-winning”. Therefore, the scheduler data without executing the button hatcher role first-half fall notice is executed. Terminates execution of.

  On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet role first-half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet role first-half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatch role first-half fall notice execution lottery is won. On the other hand, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” at the time of execution of the hatchet role drop advance notice is selected in the button hatchet role early fall notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_NTA1”. The content of the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN” is a function “SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” has the target scheduler work number “YKK_BTN” and the button hatcher first-half fall notice button branch call address. This is executed using the table “TBL_MOT_NTA1” as a parameter.

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatch accessory first-half fall notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be branched to based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo material fall notice, the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” stores the operation state of the effect button, and “0: button off” when the effect button is not operated. When the effect button is operated, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet role first half fall notice branch call address table “TBL_MOT_NTA1”.

  While the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN” is set to “0: button OFF”, the motor scheduler at the time of the button hatcher role first half fall notification button OFF in the button hatcher role first half fall notification button “TBL_MOT_NTA1” The data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" of the caller (function "RET"). Thereby, the process returns to the function “LOOP” of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”. Therefore, even if the lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatch role is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the process exits the loop process and returns to the function “STOP”. Is executed, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatcher role first half fall notification button is turned on in the button hatcher role first half fall notification button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". Hour motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” is selected. The contents of the scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON” first execute the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID” and issue the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect when the hatcher object falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID” in the same frame as the issuance of the command “COM_NTA_STA-MID”. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 120”, during which the hatcher 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

  Lastly, by executing the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1”, “1” is written in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, and the fact that the hatch role 5003 has moved to the intermediate position is recorded. Thereafter, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is ended by the function "STOP".

  When the first half of the button hatcher role, which is the first half of the notice of the fall of the hatchet role, ends, the second half of the fall notification of the second half, the hatchet role, starts. FIG. 334 and FIG. 335 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatcher role late fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that performs motor control in the latter half of the hatchet role fall notice of the present embodiment. is there. The motor scheduler “MOT_SCH01” is used to execute the hatch role late fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, like the button hatch role first fall fall scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1”.

  When the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” is started, first, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA” is executed, and the drawing of an effect indicating whether or not the hatchet object 5003 falls on the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 is started. . Thereafter, a wait process “NOP: 90” for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of the big hit becomes large when the hatchet role 5003 falls, the expectation of the player is enhanced by performing the effect drawing for three seconds.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”. In the function “SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler work area index branch call “SUBC” is executed using the target scheduler work number “YKK_NTA2” and the hatch agent late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” as parameters. .

  The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” and, based on the contents of the hatch role late fall notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2”, the scheduler data to be branched to. Specify the start address. Hatcher role late notice 2 work area “YKK_NTA2” stores the result of the execution of the hatchet role late drop notice execution lottery, and “0: non-winning” If the lottery for the execution of the latter half fall notice of the hatchet role is won, "1: execution of the second half fall notice notice of the hatter role" is set. The result of the lottery execution of the second half fall notice of the hatchet role corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” of the second half drop notice lottery result.

  Hatena role late fall notice 2 If “0: Not elected” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA2”, the hatchet role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2” The motor scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON” at the time when the notice is not executed is selected. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON” is executed, and the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” and the hatcher second half fall announcement lottery result non-winning branch call address table K_N_TBL_NBL Branch based on

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the hatch role late fall notice is not found in the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. The execution-time motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed, and the process returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

  When “0: initial position” is set, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON” is selected when the hatch role late fall notification is not executed in the hatch role late drop announcement lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2NON”. You. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed, and the process returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". Thereafter, the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is overwritten with “0: initial position”, and the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” ends.

  On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatch role first half fall in the hatch role late drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is selected when the notice is executed and the latter half fall notice is not won.

  With the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” at the time of not performing the first half fall notice and the second half fall notice of the hatcher role, the weight processing “NOP: 120” of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight processing executed here, as described later, when the hatchet part 5003 is at the lower position, it is a standby time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet object 5003 is originally located at the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

  After the completion of the weight processing, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet object 5003, a wait process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is returned by the function "RET".

  When “1: Hatchet late fall notice” is set in the work area “YKK_NTA2” of the hatchet role late notice 2 work area, the hatchet is set in the branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2”. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half of the bonus drop notice. In the scheduler data “SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN” is executed, and the value of the hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” for the scheduler and the branch call address table “NTBLYK” are divided based on the hatch agent fall notice 2 branch call address table “NTLAYK”. .

  If “0: initial position” is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA”, the hatch role first half fall notification is not performed in the hatch role late drop notice lottery result branch call address table “TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN”. The motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN” at the time of winning in the execution / second half fall notice is selected.

  In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is a command for causing the game board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 drops from the initial position to the lower position.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 240”, during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 has reached the lower position. Further, weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and drawing of the effect is continued on the game board effect display device 1600.

  After that, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed. The parameter “PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet object 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

  Subsequently, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed, and the above-mentioned scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is called, thereby returning the hatcher 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” by the function “RET”.

  On the other hand, when "1: intermediate position" is set in the scheduler hatch position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatch role first half fall in the hatch role late fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". When the notice is executed and the latter half fall notice is won, the motor scheduler data “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN” is selected.

  In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 335), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command “COM_NTA_MID-END” is a command for causing the game board effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 drops from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END” in the same frame as when the command “COM_NTA_STA-END” is issued. The parameter “PTA_NTA_STA-END” is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatcher 5003 to the lower position. Further, a weight process of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120", during which the hatcher 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

  Then, the function “COMMAND: COM_NTA_END” is executed and the command “COM_NTA_END” is issued at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position. The command “COM_NTA_END” is a command for causing the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet role 5003 has reached the lower position. Further, weight processing of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed by the function “NOP: 90”, and drawing of the effect is continued on the game board effect display device 1600.

  Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet role 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position with the timing for starting the operation of returning the hatchet role 5003 to the initial position, the function “NOP: 120” is used to make 120 frames (approximately). (4 seconds). This time is a time until the hatchet 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

  After that, similarly to the case of “SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN”, the function “MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function “CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON” is executed to return the hatcher 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” by the function “RET”.

  When the hatchet role 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”, the function “MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0” is executed, and the value of the scheduler hatch position information work area “SCH_MEM_NTA” is set to “0: initial position”. And ends the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2”.

  In the hatchet role drop notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet role 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, by writing the position of the hatchet 5003 in the first half using the function “MEMW” and acquiring the written position information in the second half, the position of the hatch 5003 can be specified. . This makes it possible to determine the amount of movement of the motor for each position of the hatchet 5003, and to call the corresponding scheduler data to execute an effect corresponding to the operation result of the effect button.

  Also, in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet part 5003, the common scheduler data is called by moving from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

  The function “MEMW” can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area at the time of executing the scheduler data and referencing it at the time of executing other scheduler data. This allows a value indicating a state or the like that is changed by the execution of a plurality of scheduler data to be specified at the time of execution of each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data in advance. This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, and to efficiently create and debug scheduler data and facilitate management. Further, in the present embodiment, a function for writing a fixed value is used. However, by specifying a work name with a function parameter instead of a fixed value, data transfer from the program side and processing based on command information are performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. The unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that information that is not determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined before the execution of the function "MEMW". This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (fluctuation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of announcement effects has been described above. The contents of execution of such a series of announcement effects are randomly selected based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific effect contents are drawn for each notice effect.

  Hereinafter, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, a procedure for controlling the execution of a series of preview effects, and a basic effect relating to the series of preview effects and the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the lottery other than the preview effect). The configuration of scheduler data for executing a background effect or a design effect which is effected and has a one-to-one relationship with a fluctuation pattern will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the reach occurs, or until the symbol stops when the reach does not occur (first half fluctuation), or from the occurrence of the reach until the symbol stops (second half fluctuation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. In addition, a time corresponding to the variation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the announcement effect within the assigned time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data on the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

  In addition, the rules for block division are as follows: when comparing basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns, the same basic effect portion is used as common block data, and the portion where the basic effect of the liquid crystal display differs is divided as block data. I do. Referring to FIG. 336A, in the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” has a normal variation of 6 seconds. Loss has occurred, the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the loss symbol design is performed. The normal fluctuation 6-second effect and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns. Therefore, the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) for the normal fluctuation 6 seconds and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for the loss stop are divided.

  The fluctuation pattern “10H02H” has a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the loss symbol effect is performed. Since the 12-second effect of the normal fluctuation is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) for the 12-second normal fluctuation, and the lost symbol design is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern “10H01H”. As the liquid crystal effect block data of the stoppage, the liquid crystal effect block data of the stoppage (LCD02_BLK) divided into the liquid crystal display blocks by the variation pattern “10H01H” is commonly used. Similarly, with respect to other variation patterns, similarly, portions that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and portions that have differences are newly converted to block data.

  As described above, by performing blocking, the common basic rendering portion becomes a unique number of block data, and all the variation patterns and basic renderings other than variation, such as big hits, are combined by unique liquid crystal rendering block data. Thus, it is possible to realize a basic effect such as a jackpot other than the fluctuation patterns and all the fluctuation patterns. Although it is important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, the main purpose of blocking is to produce a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when a specific basic production changes. That is, the change is reflected in all the fluctuation patterns using the block data.

  Regarding the liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, the format and function are completely different from those of the scheduler data of sounds, lamps, and accessories in the present embodiment in order to control the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. The configuration in which the rendering scheduler data for the effect and the rendering scheduler data for the notice effect are combined has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data for controlling sounds, lamps, character objects, and the like. The drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image or moving image material ID, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and color related to effects related to pictures, movies, and designs displayed on the background. It consists of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, such as information, alpha information, and the like. The information to be shown is embedded.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for causing the liquid crystal display device to variably display the identification symbol is defined as liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for changing the display of the identification symbol independent of the control of the other liquid crystal effects. For example, even when the display of the identification symbol is changed and displayed in a different manner, a common notice effect is provided. This can be performed by a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal effect. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the notice effect relating to the symbols are combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub-effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and additionally, information for specifying the variation display mode of the identification symbol is embedded.

  FIG. 336A is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each change pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the change pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 336B is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to a variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 337 is a diagram illustrating a sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

  The variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, a unique number that specifies the liquid crystal effect block data to be configured is held in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern number. For example, when the variation pattern number is “10H03H”, the first half variation includes “LCD03_BLK” indicating a normal variation for 12 seconds, the second half variation includes “LCD04_BLK” indicating a normal short reach, and “LCD02_BLK” indicating a loss stop. Is done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. As described above, by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, the configuration of the basic effect and the notice effect can be defined (realized).

  As shown in FIG. 435, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in the same effect period. For example, when the first half fluctuation is the normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, “LCD03_BLK” is used regardless of the content of the announcement effect actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of change, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each change pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 336B, the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating a combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the variation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. . The sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same production time) corresponding one-to-one with the liquid crystal effect block data having the same variation pattern number.

  As shown in FIG. 337, the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) contains information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. The sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined by a configuration (the same combination and the same production time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal design block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

  Next, an execution procedure of a notice effect based on scheduler data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the announcement effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, an outline of a procedure for performing effect control based on liquid crystal effect block data, effect control based on liquid crystal design block data, and effect control based on sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 338 is a diagram for describing the outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

  When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) “10H03H” is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number “10H03H” is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

  As described with reference to FIG. 314A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and assigns each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is obtained from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the liquid crystal design block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). I do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the effect devices to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of the effect devices in synchronization.

  Then, effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for all layers to liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and sub-effect block control unit 5320.

  Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal design block control unit 5311 is a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is a sub effect 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit. By 5333 (5334), block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes the normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal effect block data “LCD03_BLK” corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 executes the normal fluctuation 12 second liquid crystal design block data “ZUG03_BLK”. ", The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the sub-effect block data" SCH03_BLK "of the normal fluctuation 12 seconds.

  When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect contents is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the effect contents, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source, so that drawing is performed on the liquid crystal display device.

  When processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variable display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing liquid crystal effect block data.

  On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effects 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the content of the effect is executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be set to the execution cycle at the time of startup as a common use.

  As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designating function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp ("KPLAY"), a speaker ("SPPLAY"), and an accessory ("MPLAY"). It is configured to execute the designated effect by sequentially executing the effect data designating functions in a defined order. The effect data designating function is transmitted to a module (a lamp module 5600, a sound module 5500, a driving device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and effects are performed by various effect devices by each module.

  Further, other scheduler data can be called from the scheduler data by the function “REQ, REQF”. By executing the effect data designating function in the scheduler data called at this time, it is possible to control various effect devices. Further, by using the command transmission function “COMMAND” or “COMMAND0”, control can be performed not by a function but by a command. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designating function for controlling the operation of the accessory, the operation of the accessory and the drawing are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet accessory drop announcement effect. Can be performed.

  Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 339 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a sub-effect block data control start process for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer according to the present embodiment.

  The effect block control unit 5040 selects a fluctuating pattern layer by the effect control unit 5020 based on the fluctuating pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the fluctuating pattern-specific block data number corresponding to the fluctuating pattern. Control is started using the sub effect block data combination number table for each pattern (FIG. 337). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 337) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the case of the table shown in FIG. 337, if the variation pattern number is “10H01H”, “0” is set to the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern, and the variation pattern number is “10H03H”. For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

  Next, effect block control section 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern to “0” (step S7002). The process starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the designated row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). Thereby, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

  FIG. 340 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table by variation pattern based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to “0” (step S7012). Thus, the process is started from the first record of the variation effect-specific sub-effect block data number table specified from the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data number table.

  Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (Step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 342 (B)). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is extracted from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or a plurality of scheduler data are registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and a corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. When a plurality of pieces of scheduler data are registered, one or more pieces of scheduler data are made to correspond based on a lottery result of a notice or the like.

  Further, when the activation of all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data is completed, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index, and sets the sub-effect block data number table row index to the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). If the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern has been exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process ends. On the other hand, if the number does not exceed the number of row elements in the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern (the result of step S7014 is “NO”), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

  FIG. 341 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control updating process for each variation pattern, in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) configuring the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each variation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is periodically executed, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

  First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 obtains the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern using the row and column index for the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). Thereby, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (the background sub-effect block data, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) configuring the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified, and the sub-effect block data is defined. It is determined whether or not the executed scheduler is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is “YES”), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update processing ends.

  Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs the operation of all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (the background sub-effect block data and the sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined by the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. Is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data ("DATA_END") is determined. Is determined (step S7023). If the data is end data (the result of step S7023 is “YES”), since a series of effects has been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern ends.

  On the other hand, if the next column data is not end data (the result of step S7023 is “NO”), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data corresponding to the next column data. Then, a sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

  As described with reference to FIGS. 336A, 336B, and 337, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal design block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers can be synchronized. In addition, by performing the blocking, if the same fluctuation pattern, regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the effects, the number of activations of the effect blocks and the scheduler defined by the effect blocks will always be the same number, and the program Can be reduced, and as a result, quality can be improved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-effects schedulers, it is possible to cooperate the operations of various effect devices and execute a variety of effects without discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various effect devices must be independently developed and checked for operation in effect device units and block data units. And development efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of executing the basic effect and the notice effect of the fluctuation display corresponding to the change pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment. FIG. 342 (A) illustrates the timing of executing the basic effect and the notice effect, and (B) shows the configuration of sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the announcement effect. Although FIG. 342 (B) shows a combination of two types of sub-effect block data, that is, background block data and notice block data, the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

  As shown in FIG. 342, the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern constituting the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” is “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The variation effect-specific sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of the variation until the left symbol and the right symbol stop. The variation effect sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation effect-specific sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” corresponds to a period in which the middle symbol stops, the variation display result is lost, and the final symbol is displayed.

  In the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 342 (A), sub-effect block data related to the notice of step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, and notice of design stop, and sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. In the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK”, sub-effect block data related to the background and the sub-effect block data for the cut-in notice and the group notice are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block “SCH02_BLK”, the sub-effect block data relating to the background is defined without defining the announcement effect sub-effect block data. In the figure, the execution of the notice effects is not duplicated, but a plurality of notice block data may be defined and executed so as to overlap a plurality of notice effects. The contents of each announcement effect shown in FIG. 342 are as described above.

  Hereinafter, the effect control based on each sub effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 342 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described.

  In the sub-effects scheduler data relating to the background, normally varying 12-second background sub-effects block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. The normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. Therefore, the sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” is continuously executed until the end.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice, a function “NOP”, step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo role item fall notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block effect data are defined. The function “NOP” serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo role drop announcement sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo role drop notification are defined. The BTN logo role drop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo role drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH03_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be.

  At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect and the next liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal effect effect And between the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal announcement effect (symbol stop announcement) and the end of execution of the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK”. A "NOP" is executed and waits for a specified time. As described above, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the fluctuation pattern-specific scheduler block by the function “NOP”, the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal announcement effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function “NOP” of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern need not be provided.

  The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect device such as a lamp, a sound, and an accessory is defined as a common time for each notice effect. Thus, the time from the start of the control based on the sub-effect block data to the execution of each announcement effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

  Further, the time information at the time of executing the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data is managed not at the start of the variation but as a relative value from the time of the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data execution. Thereby, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, for each variation pattern, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of variation. Although different, the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern, so that the processing can be performed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern is also managed. It is managed by a relative value from the start of data execution.

  Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach. At this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the background, normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal short reach background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the normal short reach background are defined. The normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK”. Therefore, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is continuously executed until the end.

  In the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the notice, a function “NOP”, cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined. The function “NOP” is a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group announcement sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the group announcement are defined. The group announcement sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the group liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-described sub-effect block data.

  By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be.

  Further, in the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern, the number of sub-effect block data columns is the same as the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern “SCH03_BLK”. no problem.

  Finally, in the variation pattern-based sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”, since no effect related to the advance notice is performed, only the lost stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data relating to the background. In the losing stop background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined. The loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data relating to the background, and therefore has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK” ends.

  FIG. 343 is a view for explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. In the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal design block data for each variation pattern, only the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is different from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described using the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 314B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 344 is a diagram illustrating an image of creating a drawing data file in step-up effect units (step-up effect 1 to effect 4) using a video composition / motion creation graphic tool for a step-up notice for liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. is there.

  The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect, and is composed of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. As shown in FIG. 344, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by a tool in units of step-up effect.

  The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal announcement effects (step-up announcements 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, there are four types of step-up announcements as in this embodiment. Can be executed, it is necessary to change four drawing data files. Considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, a unique number of drawing data files are created for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

  FIG. 345 is a view for explaining the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the structure of step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, in this embodiment, four types of step-up notices can be executed, but (A) and (B) show step-up notices 1 and 2. In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up three effects and the step-up four effects are executed at predetermined timing.

  To explain the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice obtained at the start of the change, it is determined which one of the step-up notices 1 to 4 to execute. You. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is non-winning, the process ends without executing the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is step-up notice 2, Step-up notice Step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

  When the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 executes the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

  Further, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time designated by the parameter, and then executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Step 2 After the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed, the data to be executed next is “DATA_END”, and thus the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is ended.

  As described above, a plurality of variations of a single notice can be realized by combining the effect scheduler data of the notice with the smallest constituent unit.

  Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 345 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured to correspond to the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data in a one-to-one correspondence with the block configuration and the execution time. This makes it possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, thereby realizing an effect with a sense of unity.

  The step-up notice sub-effect block data is different from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the variation-specific sub-effect block data combination table “SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO”. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the obtained sub-effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it becomes possible to execute the basic effect and the announcement effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling the various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time. The effects can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is thereafter performed at a timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the effect contents such as the fluctuation pattern, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically acquired and the effect is executed at the defined timing It is possible to do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of schedulers can be activated and the schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, so that it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, and to improve the development efficiency. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and controls the rendering device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic device included therein) is updated, the common schedule is provided by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to effect control of the gaming machine for a long time.

  Note that the scheduler in the present embodiment may be realized by software or may be realized by hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use, and the used area of the memory may be released. By stopping the scheduler, the memory usage can be reduced. For example, the schedule data may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data has been completed, or the gaming machine may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine enters a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control using LCD production scheduler data]
Next, details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the effect targets, similarly to the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, output of sound, lighting of a lamp, operation of a driving device, and the like are to be controlled. However, in liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on a liquid crystal display device is to be controlled.

[19-1. LCD production scheduler function]
First, a function (scheduler function for liquid crystal effect) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the above-described liquid crystal effect block data. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function sends a command to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Send and execute the production. Also, when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler function, the attributes (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) of the object to be displayed can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. LCD production scheduler function]
FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described.

  Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In the present embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

  First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is, for example, to specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display target. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ” specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, to set the display position of the liquid crystal display target.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX” specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY” specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

  Next, a group to which a function for performing scaling (scale setting) of a display target (still image or moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of a display area for specifying enlargement or reduction when displaying the image on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored in a CGROM, or converting a coordinate unit. Or By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” belong to the scale setting group. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX” specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display target. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY” specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ” specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY” specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ” specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

  Next, a group to which a function for setting an angle when rotating and displaying a liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and specifying the angle for display, there is no need to store a plurality of rotated liquid crystal display objects, thereby suppressing an increase in storage capacity. it can.

  Functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” belong to the group for setting the rotation angle. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX” specifies the X-axis value, the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY” specifies the Y-axis value, and the function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ” specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ” rotates the liquid crystal display object by specifying an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value.

  Next, other functions will be described. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA” is an α setting process. Specifically, the α value is designated to set the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating the degree of transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not pass through the background color at all.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME” is a frame setting process, and specifically sets a frame value which is a drawing update interval of the liquid crystal display target. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval at which the liquid crystal display object is redrawn during the animation processing.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX” sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the screen in front or moved to the back. For example, if the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that the object is drawn on the rearmost side.

  The functions “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW”, “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW”, and “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information related to effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information incorporated in control information for performing drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch effect contents. , Or perform another production. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW” sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM or the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW” sets frame effect SW information in the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW” sets SW information defining special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The function “LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH” is a function for calling a sub-scheduler. By defining a highly versatile process as a sub-scheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, the process can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

[19-1-2. LCD production scheduler function parameters]
The example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, parameters specified when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described with reference to examples. FIG. 347 and FIG. 348 are diagrams illustrating an example of parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

  The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group, similarly to the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The group of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect and the group of the parameter are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement, a sub effect scheduler function, and the like.

  The sequence control parameter groups include “AAD_FRAME”, “AAD_POS”, “AAD_POS2”, “AAD_POS3”, “AAD_ALPHA”, “AAD_ANGLE”, “AAD_ENTRY”, “AAD_ENTRY_B”, “AAD_SKIP”, “AAD_SKIP_B”, “AAD_SCALE”, “AAD_ASCALE” and “AAD_ASCALE”. And so on. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

  “AAD_FRAME” is a parameter for specifying a frame value, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS” is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS2” is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_POS3” is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_ALPHA” is a parameter for specifying an α value that is the transmittance of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. “AAD_ANGLE” is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_ENTRY_B” is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SKIP” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SKIP_B” is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

  “AAD_SCALE” is a parameter for specifying a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE2” is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SCALE3” is a parameter for specifying an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SIZE” is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the effect SW includes “AAD_LCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_LCDSW”, “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM”, “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_KICKLCDSW”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY”, “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM”, and the like.

  “AAD_LCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of effect SWs registered, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_LCDSW” is a parameter that specifies the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit numeric values. “AAD_LCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  “AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of kick effect SWs registered, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_KICKLCDSW” is a parameter for specifying the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two numerical values having a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM” is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters for the footage setting includes “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY”, “AAD_SEQFOOT”, and the like. “AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY” is a parameter for specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SEQFOOT” is a parameter that specifies the index number of a still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes “AAD_ZUGARA” and the like. “AAD_ZUGARA” is a parameter for designating a symbol index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

  The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes “AAD_SUBENTRY”, “AAD_SUB”, and the like. “AAD_SUBENTRY” is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. “AAD_SUB” is a parameter for specifying a subscheduler function number, and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Effect control in a gaming machine has heretofore been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the rendering device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the variation pattern, and have been created by a programmer having advanced technology. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to execute various effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for the individual programmer, and the number of development steps is increased, and it is difficult to secure necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for a test for checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality has also increased.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is not possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for gaming machines is output by a tool for creating a liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

  Specifically, a tool that can create data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order is used. With this tool, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and effect blocks are grouped for each state such as fluctuation patterns and big hits to create effect common blocks. By combining a plurality of effect common blocks, a series of effect drawing such as a fluctuation pattern and a big hit is realized.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects on external inputs by the player occur, so that the combined effect common blocks are simply executed as they are. Then, it is impossible to realize all the effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when creating an effect common block using the above-described tool, an effect switch (effect SW) for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or calling a program for executing a predetermined control. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for performing drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is “ON” or “OFF”. When the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and, when detecting an incorporated effect SW, dynamically calls a program function based on the detected effect SW (callback). Do). Then, a display list command is created based on the information processed by the program function that has been called back, and it is possible to realize ON / OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect. It should be noted that the program function called by the callback can also perform effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). Further, it is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag or updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to realize the display or non-display of the drawing by the plurality of effect blocks, the effect and the replacement of the design, and the interactive effect to the external input by the player. .

  A program function for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect, which is called by the callback, is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created. Therefore, a designer or a plan creator who does not have a high level of program knowledge sets up the stage effect SW such that a predefined program function is called while setting stage effects such as images and moving images during stage design. Complex production specifications can be realized. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for each effect component, the development time can be significantly reduced. In addition, the effect contents can be edited based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect switch according to the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

  The effect SW number is associated with an effect SW group ID, an effect SW reset group ID, an effect SW attribute, an effect SW activation command address, an effect replacement information table address, and the like.

  The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the effect execution mode, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group the effect SW group belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group. By designating the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group collectively are set. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be designated.

  FIG. 350 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the effect SW group according to the present embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive, and the effect SW group includes one or more active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, it includes the head group number of active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SWs, and the head group number of passive effect SWs and the number of passive effect SWs.

  The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW reset information is information for specifying whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call up a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. The passive / active information indicates an evaluation SW evaluation method. The passive SW evaluates the production SW statically, and the active SW dynamically evaluates the production SW.

  The effect SW activation command address is an address of the effect SW activation command table. The effect SW activation command is a command string for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 351 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect SW activation command table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 351 illustrates an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and an effect SW activation command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table includes the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by Direction Switch in Step-Up Announcement Direction]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. Drawing 352 is a figure showing an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage at which the step-up notice effect is performed, and (B) shows the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display at each stage. An example is shown below.

  As shown in FIG. 352 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed in up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each step, an advanced effect to the next step is executed. . If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if not, the step-up notice ends as it is.

  Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect in which the display screen is filled with black ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of the filling. For example, when the black color is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow. Further, as the filling pattern, the degree of expectation increases as the number of positions where the filling is started increases, and the degree of expectation may change at the position where the filling starts. For example, when the filling is started from only the lower left corner, the degree of expectation is low, when the filling is started from the lower left and upper left two places, when the filling is started from the lower left, the upper left and the upper right three places. The degree of expectation increases in order, and the highest degree of expectation occurs when filling is started from four corners.

  Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, an extended effect to the next step-up notice is executed. The development effect is performed in a common manner halfway in order to increase the player's expectation regardless of whether or not the next stage actually develops. The case of the step-up notice 1 will be described. First, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (lightens), and characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. In the case of developing into the step-up notice 2, the ink is applied as it is and the display of characters becomes darker, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and are blackened and are not displayed.

  In step-up notice 2, a character corresponding to the degree of expectation is displayed. As for the character pattern, the degree of expectation increases in the order of “change”, “opinion”, “spirit”, “continue”, and “kill one blow”. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while enlarging an area to be filled with a combination of the variation of the black color and the fill in the step-up notice 1 with the characters displayed. Thereafter, when the screen is completely filled with black ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is gradually applied before the screen is completely filled with ink, and eventually the ink is completely removed, and the displayed characters disappear. Will be lost.

  In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black by the step-up notice 2, and an effect is gradually performed in which the ink is gradually applied from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which ink is applied. For example, when ink is applied only from the lower left, the expectation is low.When ink is applied from the lower left and upper left, ink is applied from the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation increases in the order of going, and the highest expectation occurs when ink is applied from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of ink removal and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all of the ink is removed, the development effect is successful, and the process proceeds to step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all of the ink has been removed, it means that the development effect has failed.

  The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the contents (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the expectation of the character pattern increases in the order of “game”, “opportunity”, “development”, “enthusiasm”, “hot fever”, “happiness”. As for the character color, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

  Next, a procedure for executing the above-described step-up notice by the effect SW will be described. FIG. 353 to FIG. 355 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 353 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all effect contents and effect SW in step-up notice 1. FIG. 354 (A) is a step-up notice 1 for executing step-up notice 1 for filling in black ink from four directions on the screen. LCD effect scheduler data and a drawing image. FIG. 354 (B) is red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. 3 shows the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawn image for executing the step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be painted. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

  FIG. 353 shows all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is classified by each drawing (lower left drawing ink, upper left drawing ink, lower right drawing ink, upper right drawing ink, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the effect content are described in association with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is 16 effects in each of 4 effects for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing sections, and 10 effects in total for 5 effects in each of the character failure and character success drawing sections, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, the effect that can be executed simultaneously in each drawing section is always one, and only one of the drawing sections “character failure” and “character success” is executed. The number is 5 effects in total of the drawing section "lower left", the drawing section "upper left", the drawing section "lower right", the drawing section "upper right", the drawing section "character failure" or the drawing section "character success".

  Further, a method for determining the effect of each drawing section will be specifically described in accordance with the notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, the lottery of the step-up notice 1 is performed, and the effect contents related to the ink drawing are determined. The effect contents related to ink drawing are, specifically, selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing section “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink appearing from the selected appearance location of the ink. Become. In addition, either the drawing section “character failure” or the drawing section “character success” and the contents of the character displayed at this time are displayed.

  Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image of the step-up notice 1 when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 354 (A). . As described above, the total number of effects in the step-up notice 1 is 26 effects, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes one drawing for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success drawing sections. Is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without performing any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. At the same time, black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen, and the characters of “change” are displayed faintly in the drawing category “character failure” and the drawing category “character success”. The character of "change" is erased in "failure", and the character of "change" is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

  Further, in FIG. 354 (B), the drawing section “lower left” is “red”, the drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing is based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1. A command is issued in which the section "upper right" is "red", the drawing section "character failure" is "spirit", and the drawing section "character success" is "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right". In the drawing category "character failure", the character of "spirit" is erased.

  At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the effect corresponding to the content of each issued lottery command is set to ON. Specifically, “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower left” for “red”, and “upper right” for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “red”. Then, “LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED” is set to ON, and “LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA” is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category “Character failure”. On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “character success” is “none”. Command is not effected, so that none of the effect switches is set to ON, but to an OFF state.

  From the above, red ink spreads from the drawing section “lower left” and red ink spreads from the drawing section “upper right” in all of the effects of the step-up notice 1, and “drawing” in the drawing section “character failure”. The effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying the character is set to ON in accordance with the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 355, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 354 (A), an effect for performing an effect in accordance with the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. A mechanism for performing a production replacement will be described.

  FIG. 355 is a view for explaining master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section and effect SW corresponding to replacement data replaced with the master data in this embodiment. 355 will be described in detail with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 355. The effect SW corresponding to the master data of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. And an effect SW corresponding to “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK”. On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The effect switch “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left is “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI”. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. The effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data on the CGROM is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

  The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating the display list command for drawing the effect, and defines the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. With the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” as a trigger (detected), a callback is generated, and the control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

  The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left ink production replacement table, determines all the production SWs registered in the lower left ink production replacement table, and specifies the production SW set to ON. I do. In this embodiment, since the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing section “lower left” is “red” and the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” is set to ON, “from the lower left” corresponding to the rendering SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED” The moving image number on the CGROM of “red ink” is specified.

  The replacement program function called by the callback transfers the specified moving image number on the CGROM of red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes the CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black black appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above movie number, the display list command is created using the movie number on the CGROM corresponding to the movie in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

  The characteristics of the effect replacement by the callback of the present embodiment are characterized by a low-level control structure (liquid crystal effect scheduler data in this embodiment, a data structure that is easy to change and is suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (the present embodiment). In the embodiment, a program function for replacement, a program function that is not suitable for change but that can execute complicated processing) is called up by a callback, so that it is possible to separate detection of replacement timing and replacement control from each other. It implements complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data as a data structure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is always performed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of the present embodiment by callback, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is adopted, and a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler is executed on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, it is necessary to perform the control. It is necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, which not only causes a problem due to the control change, but also affects the functions that were operating normally before the change, causing a new problem. There is a risk that it will.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback always executes the processing by the callback, regardless of the identifier (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW) for the callback, and the plurality of executions by the callback are performed. Judge whether it can be executed and the contents of processing in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, even when adding a new function or changing the function, there is no need to change the LCD production scheduler data structure, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. For this reason, the range of influence of the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a failure is reduced. Also, compared to the case where execution analysis of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is performed centrally by a single large program, execution analysis using multiple callback functions for realizing each function and liquid crystal effect scheduler data However, the structure and configuration of the program can be further simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been made specifically for the replacement of the effect.However, the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not limited to the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the symbols, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the The present invention is also applicable to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of another effect display device, and conversion of scheduler data.

  Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW “LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK” corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. When the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always a liquid crystal effect scheduler. The index SW on the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master exists only in the data, and exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in the order of thousands. In situations where game specifications are frequently changed or game specifications are added between the planning and development of a gaming machine and its introduction into the market, the consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW Is extremely difficult to maintain.

  In the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW of the master is incorrectly defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW for replacement. It is possible that the above index number is erroneously registered in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs between the command value of the effect lottery and the data number of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the effect SW on the replacement table, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. . Since an effect is set for each effect, it is possible that a special effect for a big hit that does not appear due to a change in a loss may appear, which is a fatal malfunction as a gaming machine. As in the present embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the master effect SW and the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect switch, it is possible to check the consistency by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. In addition, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem even if any data in the replacement table is defined. Therefore, the control method is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and must be replaced. A display list command is created using the index numbers on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

  In the step-up notice 3, as described above, black is gradually erased from part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the black ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In both the case of success and the case of failure, an effect is performed in which black is gradually erased from the vertex of the display area. (Layer) is defined. Further, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the results of the advanced effects are defined.

  The configuration and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group described in FIG. 355 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. It is.

  In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed, an effect SW flag (layer) according to the mode may be defined in the animation of the displayed character, or one type of effect SW flag ( Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set using a parameter.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rendering effect patterns for each appearance position or character content of black are individually defined, and by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON, different types of effects can be performed. Can be executed or a combined effect can be executed. Since the switching and combination of the effects simply switch the setting of the effect SW flag individually, the planner or the like who composes the effect simply sets the parameters using tools without the need to create new programs or other techniques. A variety of effects can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, dozens of drawing patterns can be realized only by combining four kinds of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black and two kinds of development effect display patterns. This minimizes the types of programs to be developed, improves the development efficiency of production control programs for gaming machines, and makes it possible to improve the quality of inspections of the developed production control programs. Can be.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 356 is a diagram illustrating a control procedure using the effect switch of the present embodiment, and particularly illustrates an evaluation procedure for setting the effect switch to ON. In the present embodiment, first, upon receiving a main command (main control command) that triggers the effect from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues a peripheral control internal command issued to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. An issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing a preliminary lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

  The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data. If there is data matching, the peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

  The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW determination command string is not of fixed length, and it is possible to combine a plurality of command values, a main control command value and a sub internal command value, or a peripheral control internal issued command value and a peripheral control internal command value. . For example, a variable start designation command value and a probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or a background designation command of a peripheral control internal issued command value and a command value of a lottery result of a mini character notice are defined side by side. It has become possible.

  By defining a plurality of commands side-by-side, for example, even if the same mini-character notice has different mini-characters displayed for different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and the mini-character command value is determined after specifying the background. For the first time, it will be possible to specify the effect of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini-charter notice side by side as in the present embodiment, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini-character corresponding to the background, It is not necessary to make multiple determinations, and for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, a corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since a plurality of effect SWs can be defined for the same command value, a plurality of effect SWs can be simultaneously activated with a single command value.

  The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, and is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all effect SWs by a combination of the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 356, when the command “0x103001” is received, “LCDSW_LEFDW_S1” of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, and therefore, the effect SW flag stored in the RAM. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

  As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 353 to 355, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding notice effect is executed. It is.

  In the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. Hereinafter, examples of these functions will be described. FIG. 357 is a view for explaining an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function has an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

  LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON based on a regular program or a callback program. The LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a regular program or a callback program, instead of starting the effect SW by a command.

  LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a regular program or a callback program. If the attribute of the effect SW is defined as “all reset”, the effect SW to be reset is determined based on the “reset target effect SW group ID” in the “effect SW information table” corresponding to the effect SW number. All the effect switches belonging to the group are set to OFF.

  LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of a target effect SW from a regular program or a callback program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function for acquiring a frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from a regular program or a callback program.

[20-4. Example of effect switch implementation)
Subsequently, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. 358 to 363 are diagrams each showing a part of a program code for executing control using the effect switch according to the present embodiment. Note that the program code shown in each figure is described in C language.

  As described above, the effect SW is set for each of the display target, the still image, and the moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set in all effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even when it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, a decision is made in the callback function not to execute the specific process, and the callback function is terminated.

  FIG. 358 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment. (A) is an example of a program code that defines the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of an effect SW group

  The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), effect SW group ID, effect SW group ID to be reset, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

  The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions such as effect SW for performing the same (same kind) notice effect, effect SW for hold display, effect SW for information, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

  The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for specifying an effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when “reset effect SW all” is specified in “attrib bit assignment” described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively designate the effect SWs for which the processing is stopped (reset) at the same time when the effect SW is switched. The reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits, similarly to the effect SW group ID, and a plurality of groups can be designated.

  The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. Bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 358 (B), and the contents will be described below.

  The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates an evaluation method of the effect SW, and is “PASSIVE” when the bit is “0” and “ACTIVE” when the bit is “1”. In the passive mode, even if a command to activate the effect switch is received a plurality of times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the rendering effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once. If a command to activate the SW is received a plurality of times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect has been received. Active is used, for example, when a button is pressed a plurality of times within the button valid period to display a rendering effect corresponding to the button press.

  The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

  The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for effect replacement at the time of evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to “1”, a predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of evaluating the effect SW defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. It is.

  The liquid crystal effect SW reset information is information for specifying whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group specified at the time of evaluating the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to “1”, at the time of the effect SW evaluation, the effect SWs belonging to all the groups set by the “reset target effect SW group ID” are set to OFF.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 358 (A). The effect SW command information address outputs defined command information when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and executes a new effect SW control and effect by the output command.

  The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when “1” is set in a bit of the replacement information of the effect SW control information (when “replacement is specified”). Is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of related effect SWs are set, they are managed as an effect group. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, an active effect SW number, a passive effect SW head ID, and a passive effect SW number.

  The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the passive effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the reset target effect SW group ID, if “reset effect SW all reset” is specified in the “attrib bit assignment”, the continuous SW group ID belonging to the effect SW group ID is specified. It is possible to simultaneously set the plurality of passive effect switches and the plurality of continuous active effect switches to OFF.

  FIG. 359 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program code defining an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 359, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to using the effect SW number as an index.

  By defining the effect SW numbers in an enumerated type in this way, when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, it is not necessary to directly treat them with numerical values, and the readability of the program can be improved.

  Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, wherein (A) illustrates the effect SW flag and (B) illustrates the effect SW information table.

  The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is to be executed on the callback function side that has called back (ON / OFF). As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, “1” (ON) is set, and when not executed, “0” (OFF) is set.

  The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 358 (A). Each element of the effect SW information table is read when the program is executed and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. The effect SW information table is stored in an array using the effect SW number as an index, similarly to the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all effect SWs is stored.

  Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 358 (A). FIG. 361 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and program data defining the effect SW replacement table. ) Shows a production SW replacement table.

  FIG. 361 (A) is program data showing the configuration of effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material numbers are stored.

  The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In the case of “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”, this corresponds to the case where the black color is black (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

  FIG. 361 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined. In the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After the definition of the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure. However, a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure does not matter.

  A specific replacement method first refers to the effect SW replacement table information, and evaluates all effect SW effect switch master data and effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued according to the result of the effect lottery. Here, description will be made assuming that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row in the effect SW replacement table is specified using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The line corresponding to the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data is the material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number for specifying a still image or a moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer Configuration]
Next, a layer for displaying an image or a moving image will be described. The layers can be used for general purposes by dividing the liquid crystal display target into a plurality of regions (layers and layers) and drawing the divided objects. For example, by dividing the background layer, even if the displayed character is changed, it is possible to draw with a common method.

  In the present embodiment, a table for storing layer information (layer information table) is separately stored and managed, so that a change in one layer does not affect other layers. Can be.

  FIG. 362 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines the layer information table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 362A illustrates a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and FIG. Indicates the contents of The above-described effect SW is also defined in the layer information table, and a callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table in the callback function based on the information of the effect SW is determined. decide. For example, when the effect switch (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, a river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 363 is a diagram illustrating an example of program data that defines the layer information table according to the present embodiment. (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (first half of the preliminary announcement), and (B) shows the contents of the layer information table (the preliminary announcement). The contents of the first 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half and the second half of the notice both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW similarly to the layer information table for the background.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362 (A), a layer information table for background, design display, first-half notice, big hit effect, accessory operation, hold display, and the like is defined.

  FIG. 362 (B) shows a background layer information table. In the effect according to the present embodiment, a sea background, a mountain background, and a river background are defined. Medium background, high probable medium background) are also defined. Further, a variation can be added, such as partially changing the background color, depending on the effect SW.

  FIG. 363 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the advance notice, in which a roulette advance notice, a blackout advance notice, a window advance notice are defined, and a notice clear command is also defined. FIG. 363 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the advance notice, which defines a step-up advance notice, a button mini-character advance notice, and a conversation advance notice. Is also defined. The notice clearing layer table is used to end the drawing of the notice to be executed in each notice's layer table defined in the notice's layer information table. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and “all reset effect SW” is defined by “attrib bit assignment”. When the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the effect SWs of the advance notice belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the reset target effect SW group ID are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is performed. Is completed, and is hidden. The notice clearing layer table is empty because no effect is performed.

  At the end of the area allocated to the list that stores the layer table or the table that stores the layer information, a termination determination record is stored. When the termination determination record is detected, it is determined that the data reading has been completed. It is possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the data amount (the number of records) without previously setting the number of elements for each list or table.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Next, an implementation example of a notice effect using liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described using a step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Direction Layer Table / LCD Direction Block Data]
FIG. 364 is a diagram illustrating an example of the liquid crystal layer table and the program data that defines the liquid crystal effect common block according to the present embodiment. (A) is a liquid crystal layer table of a step-up notice effect, and (B) is a liquid crystal effect common block. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 364 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks are the same as the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in pairs with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580), the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the callback function based on the information of the effect switch “LCDSW_STEPUP”.

  The liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” is defined in the order of effect switch, total number of drawn frames, loop start frame position, reproduction time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 364 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and the liquid crystal effect block is added or deleted so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased. For example, when adding the step-up notice 5, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the terminal.

  The effect switch controls the execution of the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value, similarly to the effect switch defined in the layer table. The total drawing frame number defines the total number of effect frames of the liquid crystal effect block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 in the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” on the first line.

  The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”. The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '', so after the completion of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '', the liquid crystal effect block `` LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 '' When loop playback is performed from the beginning or midway, the number of frames to be looped is added to the playback time, and the added frame number is defined as the total playback time. Step-up notice 1 Since the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block of “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” is (150) frames, if the second half of the 50 frames are looped twice after the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1”, the reproduction is performed during the total reproduction time. This can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames, and defining (100) frames at loop start frame positions. An effect in which a symbol fluctuates without being determined at the time of a pseudo continuous effect can be realized by using a loop reproduction function.

  Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the reproduction even though the total reproduction time and the reproduction time of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1” of the present embodiment are the same is due to some trouble. If the next presentation common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total reproduction time is exceeded, in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping.

  In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” in the case of executing the effects from the step-up notice 1 to the step-up notice 3 is performed by executing a lottery of the notice related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530 and then performing the step-up. A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice effect are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect switch “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” remains set to OFF because no step-up notice 4 command has been issued.

  After setting the effect SW, a callback is executed based on all effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, and a callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect switch is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect switch set to ON is executed. In the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON, so that the liquid crystal effect blocks “LCD_YKK_STEP_SUPP. On the other hand, since “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4” is set to OFF, “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4” is not executed. As described above, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect blocks using the effect switch. , And display / non-display of each effect can be switched.

  Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block in each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data defining the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

  In the content of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block serving as the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is two types of “LCD_NOP” and “LCD_NULL” and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. “LCD_NOP” is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and “LCD_NULL” is a function indicating the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2”, the leading (3) indicates that “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is 3). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is “LCD_NOP”, the wait is performed for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” is executed by the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). Thereafter, “LCD_NULL” in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2” ends.

  As described with reference to FIG. 352, at the end of the step-up notice of each step of the step-up notice, this is realized by using the weight of “LCD_NOP” in order to implement the development effect to the next step-up notice. doing.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” does not wait, and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1”. The liquid crystal effect block “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” executes a wait by “LCD_NOP”, waits for (120) frames, and then starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2”, so that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1” The liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2” starts executing when (120) frames have elapsed since the start of the execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step-up notice 2.

  Also, a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data can be defined in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order, and when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is defined continuously, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the number of execution frames is defined. And execute the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the next line.

  In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice 2, after the total number of functions is defined, a function NOP to wait while executing the step-up notice 1, a function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 to execute the step-up notice 2, Finally, a function LCD_NULL indicating the end of the scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are described similarly.

[23. Button mini character production implementation example]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which the operation of the effect button is prompted during the change of the symbol, and the effect is such that the mini-character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 366 is a view for explaining the outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini-character effect is executed when a main command is received or when a change is started, and a lottery is performed. In the button mini-character effect, when the effect button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. The first half effective period and the second half effective period are set in the reception period of the button operation input, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

  More specifically, if the player wins the button lottery effect production lottery and 90 frames (f) elapse from the start of the fluctuation, the button mini character first half valid period is set. The effective period of the first half of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the user to press the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the effective period of the first half of the button mini character. If you operate the button during the first half period of the button mini character, the mini character will be displayed. As will be described in detail later, when a button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by callback.

  When the button is operated during the second half period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed in the same manner as in the first half period of the button mini character. In FIG. 308, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. However, the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

  When the button is operated during the second half valid period of the button mini character, the mini character is displayed as in the first half valid period of the button mini character. In FIG. 366, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half of the button mini-character period. However, the character may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half of the button mini-character period. Characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 367 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 367, the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” corresponding to the button mini-character effect has the total number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the total number of the liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined in pairs with the number and the effect SW. In the present embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180), the effect switch “LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF”, and the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” are defined. Subsequently, a total number of drawing frames (150) frames, a rendering switch “LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT”, and a liquid crystal rendering common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002”, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” is first executed during the (180) frame. Thereafter, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal effect common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table “direct_layer05_common0002” is completed.

  Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” in FIG. 368 are the same as the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" which call the callback function for determining whether to execute the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects in which the active attribute is defined in the effect SW control information. SW. Therefore, a rendering effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram illustrating an example of the program data that defines the liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

  The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 369 are the same as the above-described liquid crystal effect block data. The process using each liquid crystal effect block data will be described. First, in the first half effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is executed, and a wait is performed for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIBEF” corresponding to the first half period of the button mini character is executed (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” is completed. In the second half effect, “LCD_NOP” defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” corresponding to the second half valid period of the button mini character is executed, and the wait is performed for (30) frames from the start of the change. Thereafter, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data “LCD_DIR_MINIAFT” corresponding to the second half valid period of the button mini-character is executed (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” ends.

  As described above, the effect SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are active effect SWs. When the command to perform is issued a plurality of times, the rendering effects corresponding to the effect SWs “LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT” are executed by the number of times issued. In addition, a callback is always generated every frame by the effect SW, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame after the button pressing control is completed until the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for effect rendering during the button effective period is created and controlled by the active effect SW, so that the period during which the callback is executed without separately determining the button effective period is set as the button effective period. Becomes possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting the button, the number of hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the count can be executed. Also, by calling sub-effect scheduler data including a function for controlling the lamp in the callback function, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation. Furthermore, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function for controlling the accessory, the operation corresponding to the number of button operations can be performed, and the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the button operation validity period ends can be executed. In the procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position, for example, an effect block including a function of causing the LCD device to wait by “LCD_NOP” until the button operation validity period ends and then returning the accessory to the initial position is executed.

[24. LCD production scheduler for design]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the announcement effect, it is possible to replace the drawn content according to the gaming state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be announced. Similarly, it is also possible to replace an identification symbol to be variably displayed in the variability display game when a predetermined condition such as a game state is satisfied. Hereinafter, an outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the change display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and a reel on which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is assigned to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a manner corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each style. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

  The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame similarly to the announcement effect, and the effect SW is assigned. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol on the CGROM and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined for the effect SW for identification symbol replacement. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, when the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, the river background, and the sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, the left symbol on the river background is R3, and the middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol on the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

  Further, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of the identification symbol. Reel arrangement means that identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0, and after 0, it returns to 1 and displays the identification symbol design and identification symbol. What defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols is defined as a reel index. A plurality of reel indexes can be defined.

  The table for replacing the identification symbol includes an identification symbol replacement table corresponding to a reel index and a reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, an index number on the CGROM of a still image or a moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

  The replacement of the identification symbol is performed using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, a work number for reel replacement on one or a plurality of RAMs corresponding to each reel index is defined. The reel replacement work is displayed when the identification symbol can be recognized as stopped or stopped by the player, such as a temporary symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-run variation or a fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of the change in accordance with the effect contents.

  The identification of the data for replacing the identification symbol will be described. When the callback is executed based on the rendering SW for the identification symbol replacement, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for the identification symbol replacement. The target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table based on the table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is extracted, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the replacement table corresponding to the identification symbol replacement table is specified, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Identify using the index replacement work number.

  In addition, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected in the same manner as the effect replacement, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used. The display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the effect contents are drawn.

  Further, by performing the replacement of the identification symbol every frame, even if an incorrect identification symbol is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately return to a normal display. Also, by setting the reels according to the game state, even if a problem occurs in replacement of the identification symbol due to an error, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

[25. Callback timing]
Next, a description will be given of the timing of occurrence of the callback when the effect SW is detected. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing section based on parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

  FIG. 370 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing section that can be determined in the callback function when the callback is performed by the effect SW according to the present embodiment.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A” generates a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A” generates a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. In addition, “LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B” generates a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B” generates a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, it is possible to determine whether the drawing is completed. It is possible to draw on the liquid crystal A with the trigger.

  For “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM”, a callback occurs before all drawing is started, and for “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM”, a callback occurs after all drawing is completed. By performing the judgment before starting drawing, it is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the required background color before drawing or to judge the end of drawing to instruct another effect device to execute the effect when drawing is completed. It becomes possible.

  For “LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM”, a callback occurs before drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and for “LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM”, a callback occurs after drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after drawing of a specific layer is completed. For example, when a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before the start of the layer drawing, the display of the notification with the higher priority can be drawn in an enlarged manner. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of the layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn in synchronization with the timing at which the symbol with the high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with the high expectation is obtained. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when stops.

  As described above, it is possible to specify the drawing section and execute the predetermined processing before or after the start of the drawing. Further, it is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 370, “LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK” can generate a callback before the common block drawing starts, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK” can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By performing a judgment before starting the common block drawing, it is possible to stop the execution of a specific liquid crystal rendering block corresponding to a single rendering constituting the liquid crystal rendering common block and stop rendering the rendering, or to perform the liquid crystal rendering common block By performing the determination after the end of the drawing, it becomes possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block that is different from the liquid crystal effect common block scheduled to be executed at the time of starting the fluctuation.

  “LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR” generates a callback before the start of drawing the liquid crystal effect block in the liquid crystal effect common block, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR” generates a callback after the completion of drawing the liquid crystal effect block. By performing the determination before the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed based on the result of the external input by the player. Further, by performing the determination after the start of the liquid crystal effect block drawing, it is possible to add a new drawing to the contents drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing contents of the liquid crystal effect block for drawing a single effect. Further, “LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST” can generate a callback before the start of the still image and moving image drawing in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and “LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST” can generate a callback after the completion of the still image and moving image drawing. By performing the determination before starting the drawing of a still image or a moving image, various effects can be replaced. Further, by making a determination after the completion of drawing of a still image or a moving image, it is possible to add a drawing of an effect according to the content of replacement of various effects.

  As described above, achievable control differs depending on the drawing section. Therefore, it is very important to determine the drawing section in various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Direction switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect schedule data for each liquid crystal effect block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine or the effect classification. Is done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

  When the effect is performed, images and the like are drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, the drawing based on the step-up notice 1 is performed on the notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 371 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing result of an individual layer and a drawing result of all layers at the time of performing a notice effect in the present embodiment.

  At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set in each layer. However, if these effect SWs are individually managed, the processing may be complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each of the layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the effect.

  For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SWs may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and each effect category.

  In this way, by grouping and managing the effect SWs, individual effect elements can be controlled collectively. For example, when the currently displayed background and the symbol display and the hold display according to the background are changed to another background when a new change is started, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer are classified according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in a callback function using a callback. As a result, it is possible to collectively hide the symbol display and the hold display according to the current background together with the background, and to perform the symbol display and the hold display according to the new background on the corresponding layer. It is possible to switch the drawing only for a required effect display from among a plurality of effect displays displayed in layers.

  Also, in an effect that spans the gaming state, for example, in a jackpot effect after the end of the change from the start of the change, the symbol is hidden and the background is changed to the effect of the big hit, but regarding the hold, the hold drawn during the change It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the above-described effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which all effect SW resets have been designated is performed by the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of the change. This can be realized by defining it in the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, all the effects are managed as a common block in units of blocks of a fixed length in order to increase the efficiency of controlling the complicated game effects. This allows the user to select a production block in accordance with the variation pattern and the result of the preliminary lottery, and to draw based on the selected production block, thereby realizing a series of productions such as variable display of symbols and big hits, and complex control. Without performing, the control which synchronizes the sub-production such as an accessory, a lamp, and a sound output with the drawing content was realized. In the common block, a period is set at a predetermined timing from the start of the symbol change to the symbol determination, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half change and the second half change, and are assigned to the change pattern. Was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  With such a configuration, the common block can be used for general purposes in a plurality of types of variation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence of the notice effect performed in the first half change and the notice effect performed in the second half change, the degree of freedom of the combination of the common blocks can be increased.

  However, as described above, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period, it is difficult to achieve an effect that continues from the start to the end of a change only by combining effect blocks of a fixed length. When performing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, the preceding common block and the following common block are associated with each other and the versatility is reduced, and each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control may be complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the effect. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it was necessary to create and control program codes individually instead of setting program data.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, in the present embodiment, not only performing a variable display of symbols and a series of big hits by combining effect blocks of a fixed length in all effects, but also the length of the effect block Is exceptionally not a fixed length, but a production block length adapted to the production period is allowed. Furthermore, by rendering effect blocks having different rendering times in combination, and rendering at the same time a rendering block that straddles the combined rendering block, a rendering effect that continues from the start to the end of the variation is realized.

  Examples of the effect over a plurality of periods include, for example, a countdown effect in which a number is displayed in a countdown manner at the start of a symbol change, and the countdown display is continued from the first half change to the second half change. FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block over a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment. FIG. 372 (A) is a timing of execution of display of a symbol and an announcement effect, FIG. The configuration of a liquid crystal announcement effect block using a common block over a plurality of periods is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 372, the first half fluctuation is “normal fluctuation 12 seconds” and the second half fluctuation is “normal short reach” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H”. As shown in FIG. 372 (A), in the first half change, a step-up notice and a BTN logo role item fall notice are executed, and in the second half change, a cut-in notice and a group notice are executed. The content of each announcement production is as described above. A countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

  In FIG. 372 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect using the common block (step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice), and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice The structure of the effect block of the countdown notice performed during the period until the end is shown. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

  The effect block of the countdown notice is constituted by a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the second half change ends after the liquid crystal effect notice block data, and the liquid crystal effect notice block data ends. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the step-up notice is started, and the function NOP that waits until the second half change is completed is a NOP that is executed after the group notice is finished. The same waiting time is set.

  As described above, by making it possible to set an exception during the execution period of the effect block, the operation of the common block can be performed more flexibly. In addition, by setting the standby time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the exceptional setting, such as a shift in the execution timing of another effect block. The control of the exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW, similarly to the other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
In order to enhance the interest of the game and to reduce the processing time related to drawing, drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out of the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Thus, processing such as reuse of an image, deformation, and additional drawing was performed. As described above, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various effect expressions have been efficiently realized.

  FIG. 373 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image written in each layer is written to write an image in a frame buffer. As shown in FIG. 373, conventionally, an image drawn on each layer is written in a frame buffer so as to be superimposed and then output to a display device.

  Specifically, first, a moving image or a still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer using a display list command. Next, the moving image or the still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Further, the moving image and the still image displayed on the notice layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, the moving image and the still image related to the reserved layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command, and the drawing data for one frame is created.

  After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. After a new effect is applied around the design to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, the drawing data is written back to the frame buffer and one frame of drawing data for the next display is created.

  By doing so, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in such image conversion according to the related art, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized. In addition to addition of a new drawing element to one frame of a liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data is added. It is limited to enlargement or reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on a drawing element drawn on each layer or each drawing element in a layer on a capture buffer.

  The reason that image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that drawing elements in each effect, for example, backgrounds, designs, and notices, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. Is overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since a drawing element is a set of colored dots (dots) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract a drawing element in a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element in the overwritten portion has been lost.

  At present, the need for reusing image data for one screen of a liquid crystal display that has been drawn has been reduced due to the improvement in the processing capability of VDP, but diversification of staging expressions has been aimed at improving the interest of games. Therefore, the load is expected to be increased due to the complicated drawing process.

  In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problem and perform more diverse effects, image data of one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. Rather than adding an image, when rendering new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display, it is possible to dynamically change the image during rendering in each effect display unit that composes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complex rendering expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

  More specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW for each effect block is included in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed during liquid crystal rendering, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect switch incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

  When changing the image, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect block in the called back program function are not drawn on the frame buffer, but are allocated on the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1540a separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (image display information temporary storage unit). Then, after the image is changed or a new image is added to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back on the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image of only a specific notice, adding a new image, replacing the effect of only the background, changing the image of the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and changing the image of the new image Additional can be realized.

  Hereinafter, a specific description will be given of a configuration in which an image drawn on each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the converted image is written in the frame buffer. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and writing the converted image file to the frame buffer according to the present embodiment.

  As described above, one or more buffers for image conversion called an off-screen buffer different from the frame buffer are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source. Then, the image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer are combined to enable complicated image conversion.

  More specifically, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and in each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when a display list command is created at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the rendered effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

  In FIG. 374, first, before starting drawing the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the symbol layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is applied to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting the display list command, an effect can be applied to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Subsequently, before the drawing of the notice layer is started, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the rendering of all the effect elements related to the notice layer has been completed, a display list command for rotating the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer in the function called back based on the effect SW is provided. create. By transmitting the display list command, each rotated notice is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten on the frame buffer.

  Finally, all effect elements of the suspension layer are written in the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

  By the above procedure, unlike the above-described conventional image conversion, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, drawing element unit constituting the layer, and regardless of the drawing order in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

  The present embodiment is characterized in that callbacks based on the same effect SW are performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the type of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 370 described above.

  Further, by performing the image conversion by the callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the object of the image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, at the timing of creating a display list command for drawing an image to be converted, an image is generated based on a lottery result value of a preliminary lottery or an interactive operation result by a user's external input. It is possible to determine a conversion method.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created on the basis of animation data stored on a CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source to draw a game effect. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in a buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the creation of the display list command for one screen, the external request DMA (transfer means) Was used to transmit the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

  However, at present, the effect specifications are complicated and the processing load is increased, so that the processing time such as a preliminary lottery process at the start of the change is increased. The processing time of the motor data creation processing is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time of the peripheral control such as the effect is performed at a predetermined cycle, when the processing with a high load as described above is performed repeatedly, the processing may not be completed within the cycle. .

  Synchronize game control by the main controller with production control by peripheral controllers based on the processing cycle, unless the processing can be completed within the cycle, except when the processing cannot be completed within the cycle in exceptional cases. Cannot be performed, and the progress of the game and the effect of the game by each effect device are separated from each other, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

  Therefore, it has been necessary to reduce the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for processing with a high load in the peripheral control processing such as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the peripheral control process, a relatively high load drawing process, in particular, the above-described animation data on the CGROM is analyzed, and the processing time for generating a native display list command that can be processed by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a is reduced. Means for reducing the processing time and reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

  First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 375 is a view for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 375, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module acquires various liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and analyzes and converts the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (display parameter values corresponding to the VDP register number and the register number) related to the display list command to be transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command executable by the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect switch is executed when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  Then, in the process in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a processes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA. Thereby, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA, and is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

  Upon receiving the transferred VDP native display list command, the sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

  As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the processing cycle following the creation of the display list command group. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group imposes a large processing load. In the case where a plurality of VDPs of different manufacturers are mounted on one gaming machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which some or all of the display list command groups can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 376 is a view for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in the present embodiment.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 376, first, the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module performs display list transfer setting for the external request DMA. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command from the peripheral control ROM 1530b, not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

  The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b in a manner similar to the case where the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. And an interrupt display list command.

  The external request DMA acquires the specified liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers the data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts a VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image in the frame buffer. Furthermore, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interrupt request is issued to the external request DMA. Thereafter, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  When detecting the interrupt from the sound source built-in VDP 1540a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the interrupt factor is the interrupt by the interrupt display list command in the interrupt processing module, and executes the callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and performs effect replacement and symbol replacement. The effect replacement method is the same as that described above using FIG. 361 and the like, and the design replacement method is also the same as that described above using FIG. 361 and the like. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data correspondence callback information table defines the effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command to restart display list analysis to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a. The sound source built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

  As described above, by processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list relating to all effects other than replacement. Instead, the transfer can be performed from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

  With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a associated with the display of an image, and to speed up image processing. Further, since the area used by the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

  Note that the peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list commands, and may process the infrequently used VDP native display list commands in a conventional procedure. As a result, the processing speed of frequently used display list commands can be shortened, so that the overall processing speed can be increased and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (moving image) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and processing of an image different depending on a model or a version is performed by a conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
Processors (CPU, MPU) used in game control and peripheral control (effect control) of gaming machines can basically handle integer and floating-point data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are a char (character, character) type, an int (integer) type, and a long (long integer) type, and have a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes, respectively. . The floating point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has a size of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

  Regardless of the CISC processor or the RISC processor, the processor used for the peripheral control of the gaming machine can read and write the data stored in the memory (ROM, RAM) in units of 1 byte at all addresses. Machine. Note that addresses for reading and writing a plurality of bytes of data are not limited to this. When the processor reads data of a plurality of bytes, the reading is always performed from a byte boundary, and when accessing beyond the byte boundary, an alignment violation occurs. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor.For example, instead of being able to continue processing, execution of the program is delayed due to multiple memory accesses, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. Roll around.

  However, in the development of current gaming machines, when a program for controlling a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during execution of the program, and the execution speed of the program may be reduced. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processing within a predetermined processing cycle, so that a decrease in the execution speed of the program may be a serious problem. In particular, since the production of a gaming machine is configured based on a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. A data structure is adopted.

  In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure including a plurality of information used for game control, when storing data corresponding to the data structure on a memory, Explicitly embed empty data between the areas where the is stored or at the end. By adjusting the data access start position by the processor and arranging information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of alignment violation and prevent the execution speed of the program from decreasing. Can be. Adjusting the alignment of data structures on all ROMs and RAMs is a huge task, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment using a data structure on a ROM or a RAM related to the conversion processing, the control processing related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control processing, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the above-described processing.

[Help image that promotes direction understanding]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared in correspondence with the type of the effect pattern selected above may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect pattern determination and preview effect determination are performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect contents according to the results of these determinations, so that the variation due to the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is performed. The effect is executed together with the expected effect (advertisement effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect related to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background description (background notice), it basically has an effect such as “how many values should be set for the appearance ratio of images with high expectations”. It is only done. Therefore, a fundamental problem such as "it becomes difficult to have a sense of expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectation (expected effect) appears" has not yet been solved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background description To display the background image used in the special mode different from that of the original image data. When the background image is displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation ( It is possible to suggest that the jackpot symbol appears at a higher rate.

Here, as the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, for example,
A process of displaying the original image data as rotated processed data rotated by a predetermined angle (such as rotation around any of the x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area);
Processing such as displaying original image data as mosaic processing data into which a predetermined degree of “blur” has been inserted can be exemplified.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the original image data is subjected to only a slight processing (such as a rotation processing or a mosaic processing). A special effect to display this (display in a special mode) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, even if a special effect in which only a small amount of processing is performed on the original image data is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to definitely detect and recognize the fact. However, in exchange for this, even if the special effect is not being performed, it is possible to remember the sensation and fantasy such as "Maybe it is in the state where the special effect is being executed" Therefore, even if a state in which an image (special effect) having a high degree of expectation does not appear is continued, it is expected that the feeling of expectation to the big hit is appropriately maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status regarding the “processing to be displayed in a special mode”, it is difficult to recognize even the possibility that the situation is highly expected. In the end, performing a special production can lose its meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image indicating whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being executed in response to an operation by the player. The process for causing the execution of the program is executable. According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed in response to the operation by the player, it is not possible to recognize whether the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed or not. Is expected to be suppressed, and as a result, expectations are appropriately maintained.

  However, the “help image” according to this description example does not explicitly indicate whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed, but includes the difficulty of recognition. ing. Because it is necessary to have such difficulty in recognition, even if it does not seem that the “display processing in a special mode” is being executed, it cannot be convinced that it appears. Can be left, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 377 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when a state transition is made between a non-game state in which a game is not executed (during a demo screen or the like) and a game execution state in which a game is executed. .

  FIG. 377 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 in a non-game state where a game is not being executed (during a demonstration screen or the like). As shown in FIG. 377 (a), the effect display device 1600 in the non-game state is a character image PG (here, a character image PG that is useful for checking “whether or not a special effect is being executed”). A guidance image AG indicating that a penguin-like character) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation unit (such as the operation button 410) is displayed. In this description example, a description and a character image PG are respectively displayed as the guide image AG.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a), when a start winning is generated and a game (a change in a special symbol according to the jackpot determination) is started, the effect display device 1600 first displays FIG. 377 (b). The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fluctuating effect by the decorative design SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background description (background notice), the motion of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. In this way, by causing the guide image AG to be automatically hidden when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the staging performance in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character simulating a penguin) can be appropriately appealed.

  FIG. 377 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the variable effect with the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display).

  If the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), the change effect with the decorative symbol SZ is newly started by digesting the hold information, so that the guide image AG is hidden. The effect situation shown in FIG. 377 (b) will appear again in the state where it has been performed. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 377 (c), if no hold information remains, the state is shifted to the non-game state (during the demonstration screen or the like) again. That is, in this case, the guidance image AG is displayed based on the fact that the state in which the game has not been newly started has been continued for a predetermined time since the fluctuation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 377 (b) is ended (stop display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 377 (a)) appears again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  Then, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” according to this effect example is a state in which the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in a “specific effect pattern” (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the effect judgment). And during a period in which a specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in a specific effect pattern).

  FIG. 378 shows a state in which the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ is being executed in the “specific effect pattern”, and an expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed largely as a background image is performed. 18 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the display device is in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state.

  In other words, in this effect example, at least when a “predictive effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is greatly displayed as a background image” is performed, a condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied is satisfied. A process of performing a slight rotation process on each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them (a process of displaying in a special mode) can be executed. I have. When a princess character (specific effect image) on which the “display in special mode” is executed is displayed, a princess character (specific effect image) on which the “process in special mode” is not executed is displayed. The rate at which the big hit symbols appear is higher than when it is displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the “processing for displaying in a special mode” has not been executed, and the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are included in the original image data. It is displayed as it is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (b), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated left three times and then displayed. 378 (c), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are shifted 6 degrees to the left in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c). The processing of displaying them after performing the rotation processing (processing of displaying in a special mode) is in a state of being executed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 378 (a) to (c), even when the “display in a special mode” is performed, each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is obtained. , Only a small amount of rotation processing is performed. In particular, in the figure, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 378 (a) to (c), but in an actual effect, FIG. 378 (a) according to the result of the effect determination ) To (c) are displayed, and no comparison can be made between them. Therefore, even when FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be convinced that the display is in the special mode, but it is difficult to ensure that the display is in the special mode. It is expected that the player is aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 378 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. It is difficult to be convinced that the request is left (to maintain a feeling of expectation) such as "it may be in a state displayed in a special mode".

  Note that the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is subjected to a rotation processing of 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left, and then displayed (processing of displaying in a special mode). ) May be executed as a process of performing a rotation process on each of the original image data separately and then displaying them, or converting each of the original image data into a single image and then May be executed as a process of performing rotation processing on the image and displaying the image.

  378 (b) and (c), the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the image shown in FIG. 378 (c) is displayed than when the image shown in FIG. 378 (b) is displayed. May be made to have a relationship of increasing. Alternatively, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed, the image shown in FIG. 378 (a) is displayed once, and then displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes every moment in the order of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c). You may make it do. Alternatively, both of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 378 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to determine the implementation status regarding such “processing to be displayed in a special mode”, performing such a special effect loses its own meaning. It could be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when at least the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed, the operation buttons 410 By performing an operation on a predetermined operation means such as the above, it is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image indicating whether or not the “process of displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

  FIG. 379 shows that the help image is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is largely displayed as the background image” is being performed. The display example on the effect display device 1600 at the time is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed (see FIG. 378), the operation (operation button 410), a character image PG (here, a character simulating a penguin) useful for examining “whether a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed” is used as a help image. It is displayed.

  More specifically, if an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player is performed in the situation shown in FIG. 378 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 379 (a) appears, and the situation shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 379B, the situation shown in FIG. 379 (b) appears, and the situation shown in FIG. 378 (c) appears. When an operation (such as the operation button 410) is performed by the player in FIG.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 379 (a) to 379 (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to determine whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is not specified whether or not “the process of displaying in a special mode” is being executed. Because we dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that the "process to display in a special mode" is being executed, we can strongly be aware of the possibility, Even if it does not appear that the “process to be displayed in a special mode” is being executed, it cannot be convinced that the hope for the feasibility of the process can be left and the expectation can be maintained. Will be made possible.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 379 (a) to (c), the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state where the “display in a special mode” is being executed. Irrespective of the execution mode or the execution mode, it can be displayed only at a predetermined position and in one mode having a ruler held in a horizontal direction. As described above, an image (here, a ruler) displayed so as to be extended in the horizontal direction without being affected by the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is caused to appear by an operation performed by the player, so that the image is displayed. (In this case, a ruler) can be made to function as a guide image (help image) for determining whether or not the “special effect (here, the tilt effect) is being executed”.

  In particular, in this effect example, the position overlapping with the image (princess character) to be subjected to the “processing in a special mode” is not affected by the “processing in a special mode” and is not affected by the horizontal direction. A guide image (here, a ruler) is displayed so as to extend. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to be subjected to the special processing, it is possible to further help determine whether the special processing is being executed. become.

  That is, in such an effect example, the special effect subjected to the “processing to display in a special mode” is a slightly inclined effect, and when the inclined effect is performed, the inclined effect is not performed. Expectation is higher than if not done. For this reason, the player operates predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether or not the tilted performance is being performed. It is arranged to have a difficulty in recognizing that the processing for displaying in a special mode is not definitely performed. Thereby, it is expected that the player is conscious of the possibility that the degree of expectation is high when it seems that the leaning effect is being executed, and even if it does not appear that the tilting effect is being executed, It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation), such as "the tilted production may be in a state of being executed".

  In addition, a guide image (here, a ruler) indicating whether or not the special effect (here, the tilt effect is being executed) is set as a target of the “process for displaying in a special mode”. An image (decorative design SZ, background image) at least partially overlaps and is displayed as an effect, and a guide image (a ruler in this case) is used alone to produce an effect (expected degree). ), It is possible to provide an interesting effect that the function is exhibited only for the first time by comparing it with an effect image (here, a princess character) that is already displayed.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, the effect can be advanced without displaying the reference image (the ruler in this case) depending on the selection (operation) by the player. If you are not confident that you are in a state where a performance (in this case, a tilt performance) is being executed, you can enjoy various ways of playing, such as not dare to perform operations by the player. Become.

  Note that, in this example of the effect, “the process of displaying in a special mode” is executed as “the process of displaying the original image data after performing the rotation processing”, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the original image data, image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to a rotation process and then displayed. Further, instead of performing the rotation processing on the image data, another processing or conversion may be added. In short, it is possible to execute a special process for converting the image into an image having a mode different from the normal mode and displaying the image, and in a situation where the special process can be executed, the special process is performed by an operation of the player. The above-described operation and effect can be achieved as long as the guide image can be displayed.

  By the way, in the above-mentioned effect example, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” can be executed when “the expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed. However, according to the result of the effect determination, the decorative symbol SZ may be made executable multiple times within a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It should be noted that, at this time, when the number of times of performing the “display in a special mode” is large, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbols appear is higher than when the number of times is small.

  Also, regarding the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case), the decorative pattern SZ is not only displayed when the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed. The display may be enabled by the operation of the player over the entire period from the start of the change to the stop of the change. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in the stop state, it may be possible to display the decorative symbol SZ by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, even if any background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, a process of causing the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) to appear is executed. Becomes However, in view of the fact that the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) is a “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image in each case. It is clear that the type differs depending on the type. On the other hand, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is changed in accordance with the type of the background image each time, the character image PG becomes a comparative reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an invariant and absolute image regardless of the effect state.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed among a plurality of predetermined display positions in accordance with an operation (such as the operation button 410) by the player. . However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

  FIG. 380 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 380 (a) shows an effect state in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this effect situation, the player has a suspicion that “the process of displaying in a special mode has been executed”, and performs an operation for displaying the comparison reference image (reference image). If so, a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at one of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 380 (b) to (d)) predetermined according to the operation mode. Is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the left position (FIG. 380 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 380 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 380 (d)) in the display area. ) Is performed to display the character image PG.

  As is clear from FIGS. 380 (b) to (d), the form of the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) itself is the same regardless of the display position. Since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) that can be the target of the “display in a special mode” is different, The easiness of determining whether or not the “performing process” is being executed is naturally different.

  For example, when a character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (c) (center position in the display area), the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) is to be compared. When the character image PG (in particular, a ruler in this case) is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 380 (d) (the right position in the display area). Since the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (standing sign). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the “processing to be performed” is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, a character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is set to a “display position suitable for comparison” that differs depending on the type of background image each time. Since the display can be performed by the user's operation, it is possible to suitably provide information for determining whether the “display processing in a special mode” is being executed.

  Note that, in this effect example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation units different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation units may be operated. Alternatively, the character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In a case where the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in a situation where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 (reception period). Can be enabled.

  Further, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler in this case) as a comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function alone as an effect (expectation), and therefore is required for comparison and judgment with a background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the image becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the expected effect (background image). Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the time when the display is performed by the operation by the player, it is desirable that the display is automatically hidden without any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially, a ruler in this case) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed and the type of the background image, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed. In some cases, it may not be enough for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to compare / determine whether the state is present. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is being displayed (within three seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear again is operated. When the character image PG is displayed, the time for continuously displaying the character image PG is extended. For example, every time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, the display may be hidden after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) based on the operated timing, so that the intermittent operation is performed until the player is satisfied. By performing a simple operation, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and the comparison and judgment can be made carefully.

  However, if such endless continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply permitted, it may be extremely easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. . That is, the player may always obtain a confident conclusion that "the special processing is being executed" or "the special processing is not being executed". Does not explicitly indicate whether or not the display process is being performed, but rather has the difficulty of recognizing it. "

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, By reducing the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler of the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm), the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is reduced. It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time the predetermined operation unit is operated again while the character image PG is displayed, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is extended in exchange for the extension. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) becomes smaller. Can be extended, but it is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it cannot be used for comparison with the background image, and the game entertainment interest may be reduced. It could be connected. Therefore, for the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the minimum ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum When the predetermined operation means is re-operated in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed is not extended, It is preferable that the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is not further reduced.

  Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. . That is, in this case, each time a predetermined operation unit is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is increased. Gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter gradually), and finally does not even appear. Only the user can be prompted to operate, and the rest is expected to concentrate on the original effect contents.

  Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the end of the fluctuating effect and the start of the next fluctuating effect. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as an extremely valuable production opportunity. Basically, only by looking at the background image and the decorative pattern SZ, the “special mode” is obtained. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 378) for estimating whether or not the “display process” is being executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 380 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by an operation on a predetermined operation unit after power-on (or RAM clear). Thereafter, each time an operation is performed on the predetermined operation means, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole becomes gradually smaller (here, the ruler becomes gradually shorter), and finally, it does not even appear. . However, when a specific detection is performed or when a specific condition is satisfied, a comparison reference image (when appearing at a plurality of positions, only a comparison reference image corresponding to any one of the positions) A process of increasing the display area as a whole (in this case, making the ruler longer) may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

  Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means for setting the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) to be different from each other, the operation is performed according to which of the operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In this case, the number of remaining times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means is set. It is desirable that, when an operation is performed, only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at a position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 380, when the first operating means is operated in the effect condition shown in FIG. 380 (a), the effect condition shown in FIG. 380 (b) appears. Becomes In the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (b), when the first operation means is operated again, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, this is changed. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, after this, even if the second operating means is operated, only the effect situation shown in FIG. 380 (c) appears, and the comparison criterion associated with the re-operation of the first operating means. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, only the effect state shown in FIG. 380 (d) appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means Is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at a specific position (for example, the center position shown in FIG. 380 (c)) (within 3 seconds), the comparison with the specific position (center position) is performed. When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is not operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is maintained in the display state. Therefore, it is desirable to newly display a comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left position) corresponding to the another operation means (first operation means).

  In other words, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position where it is difficult to compare with the background image due to the operation on the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be newly displayed at another display position. Thus, it is possible to add an interesting feature that searches for a position where the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to enhance the ease of comparison.

  Moreover, in the above-described configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already in the display state is not triggered by this. Display is not performed, and the display state is maintained. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased by that amount (here, two rulers are arranged) And the length in the horizontal direction becomes substantially longer), so that a background image that is difficult to compare appears, but the “display in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at a timing or the like where one really wants to know whether or not there is a certain one. However, this consumes two “the number of remaining times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear” set for each of the plurality of operation means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for the above, it can be said that the price for greatly improving the comparability is large.

  As described above, since the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed. In order to extend the time during which the PG) is displayed simultaneously, it is necessary to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether or not it is in the “state in which special processing is being performed” only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has appeared by the operation on the first operation means, or the cost is increased. In this case, it is necessary to make a quick decision as to whether or not to further operate the second operation means to greatly improve the comparability, and the disadvantage of the player is reduced by the delay in the decision. Since it is enlarged, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

  According to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timings at which the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden are different. In addition, the size (the length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs depending on the operation situation. Further, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation unit, “the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even when a specific operation unit is operated, but the comparison reference image is displayed when another operation unit is operated. (Character image PG) is displayed ", which operation means should be operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear. In addition to the determination, not only the type of the background image to be compared but also a determination factor can be added to provide more interesting.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed by the operation by the player, but the predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable that when the symbol change (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss earlier than this, it will be displayed as a non-display as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIG. 379 and FIG. 380, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, the effect contents in the display area are difficult to visually recognize. It will be difficult to concentrate on the production contents. As a result, if there is a case where the player does not notice that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG to be useful for the production will be discarded. It is desirable that the character image PG be hidden when this occurs.

  However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the big hit is stopped and may be continued in the display state until a predetermined time elapses. In other words, when the big hit is stopped, even if the player does not notice this, the big hit game will be started. It is expected to function as a production.

  In addition, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. Even when the user is gazing, the user can easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed. It is more desirable to adopt such a technique in order to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  That is, it is possible to set the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit) in which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear for each operation means (display position). If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, so that the user concentrates on the original effect. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) can be output as a sound, while the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is “processed to be displayed in a special mode”. Is allowed to be allowed only when it is not executed. As described above, regarding the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not used as the specific suggestion on the negative side (for example, the specific sound (for example, , The sound of a penguin), the player who hates such a specific sound concentrates on the original effect, and is likely to have a high possibility of executing the “processing to display in a special mode”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

  However, for a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “display in a special mode” is not executed. It is desirable that the sound output is not always allowed even if the case becomes. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image already displayed is small (the length of the ruler is changed)) by the operation by the player. When a specific sound (e.g., the sound of a penguin) is output as a sound, it is definitely recognized that the "process for displaying in a special mode" has not been executed. For example, when the sound of a penguin) is not output, there may be either a state in which the “display in a special mode” is executed or a state in which the “display in a special mode” is not executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the fun when a specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not output.

  Note that a specific sound (for example, a penguin squeal) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition even when any of a plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, only when a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means is operated, if the specific sound can be output under the above-described predetermined condition, the specific sound may be output, In the case where a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for determining whether the “display in a special mode” is being executed or the specific sound is not likely to be output, the “special mode” is displayed. It is possible to allow the player to select whether to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for determining whether or not the “display process” is being executed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state, the display time is reduced (the ruler is shortened) and displayed, so that the display is performed in a special mode. It is possible to suitably maintain the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the processing is being executed. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin squeals) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (for example, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large). For example, if the volume of the sound is made lower than that in the case where the sound of a penguin is output, the recognition difficulty when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is reduced to some extent. It is expected to be maintained.

  The size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are set so that the comparison reference image (character image PG) does not overlap each other when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 380). It is desirable to set each of. The amount of comparison material with the background image can be increased as much as each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, comparison between the background image seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG) is performed. It can be suitably performed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed with a small size (shortened ruler). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any mode may be used as long as it increases the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the process of displaying in the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation unit is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remain the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. It may be. That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, a portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with the specific transparency is made smaller (specifically, It is important to display the part that is displayed with the transmissivity shorter), and the part that is no longer displayed at the specific transmissivity may be hidden, or may be displayed with a higher transmissivity than the specific transmissivity. The display may be performed so as to increase the visibility difficulty.

  Also, as described above, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” refers to, for example, the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b), and the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c). Dynamic depiction processing for changing to a displayed state. When the “display in special mode” is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the “display in special mode” is terminated, for example, the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b), the display state is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a).

  In this regard, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from being displayed. It is desirable that the “processing for displaying in a special mode” be performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player while the “displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is being executed, While the comparative reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state changes from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). 378 (a) ", it is easy to compare / determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. become able to.

  However, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (the character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player when the “display processing in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c) is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b). 378 (a) is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (a) ", it is difficult to compare / determine whether the processing for displaying in a special mode is being executed. Will be able to In addition, the strategic nature by which the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended can be added.

  In addition, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) or a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be performed in a long time. In addition, in the period from when the decoration symbol SZ starts to fluctuate to when it stops fluctuating, a “displaying in a special mode” as a dynamic depiction process performed in a shorter time than a predetermined time (3 seconds); The “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process performed for a longer time than the predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined different timings.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is made non-display after a predetermined time (3 seconds) after being displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, the sound of a penguin), the output of the sound is interrupted in a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “display in a special mode” is executed, the specific sound is displayed after the “display in a special mode” is executed. (For example, the sound of a penguin) is suppressed from being maintained, so that the specific sound (eg, , The sound of a penguin) makes it unlikely that a staging situation would occur.

  In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) so as to straddle from before the “display processing in a special mode” is performed until after it is performed. Become. Therefore, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing is executed, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, for example, the display shown in FIG. The state changes from the state through the display state shown in FIG. 378 (b) to the display state shown in FIG. 378 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is configured from a character simulating a penguin and a ruler, only one of the character simulating a penguin and a ruler may be displayed. In short, it is only necessary that the comparison reference image (character image PG) which is not a target of the “processing for displaying in a special mode” can be made to appear by the operation of the player. However, if a reference image (ruler) indicating a length unit in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being performed. It is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 377 does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

[Prank prevention for multiple operation means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared in correspondence with the type of the effect pattern selected above may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect related to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although illustration is omitted. A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In any of the states where the player is in the game, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operation means (operation buttons 410, the sword unit 5010, the effect selection left button 331) are operated by the player. , An effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), and the like. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect by the decorative symbol is being performed. We are trying to maintain.

  However, if such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of these operation means becomes prominent, and thus the player is likely to be subject to mischief. As a result of the rough handling, if any one of the operation means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and the performance are remarkably deteriorated, and the entertainment interest of the game is inevitably reduced.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-game state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination is not executed (a state in which the above-described operation effect cannot be generated). In a situation where there is a high possibility that mischief has been detected due to detection of an operation by a plurality of operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is to be generated, thereby suppressing the handling of the operation means from being roughly handled. To be able to do it.

More specifically, in a state where the game has not been started (non-game state), of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means (operations which should not need to be operated) ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword section 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the staging lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. (Period) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation regarding the volume is accepted and the volume is not accepted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal operation as the non-gaming state is returned such that the operation reception regarding the luminance is permitted and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

  In the effect restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value relating to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume The setting value is not displayed '' and the change of the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted even if the operation for the brightness adjustment button is performed, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. '' However, only one of the processing relating to the volume adjustment and the processing relating to the luminance adjustment may be restricted.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment prepares a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period). As a result, it is expected to complicate the conditions for generating the production restriction period and to give a sense of tension such as "Is the hall side actually monitoring the mischief?"

  FIG. 381 is a time chart for explaining an example of a process of generating an effect restriction period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined effect restriction condition in a non-game state (during a demonstration screen or the like). is there.

  Now, a state in which the game is not started (non-game state) is controlled, and a state in which the standby display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, a demonstration screen, or the like) Is displayed). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332) are operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed. If the predetermined effect lamp is in a light emitting state at the time of the operation, a process of adjusting the brightness (using the brightness setting value as the light amount). (Reflecting process) is executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

  As described above, in the non-game state, when the player starts the game, the user operates the volume adjustment button and the luminance adjustment button so that the player can set the volume and the luminance to suit his or her preference. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected to prompt the player to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the luminance setting value according to the operation.

  However, as described above, in the non-game state, a mischievous operation may be performed on a plurality of operation means including the volume adjustment button and the luminance adjustment button. As a result, if an abnormality or a failure occurs even in one of the operation means, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced, and a decrease in gaming interest is inevitable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in the non-game state, any of the operation patterns is used. Based on the detection that the operation has been performed, a process of generating an effect restriction period (function restriction period) to which a penalty is imposed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) can be executed.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state, it is recognized that the condition concerning the effect restriction is satisfied. And
a. Triggering the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) in response to the detection of the operation on the sword unit 5010, and newly detecting the operation on the operation button 410 until the end of the first timer time; In addition, when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected, the timing of the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation of the sword 5010 is not detected until the time of the second timer is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set
b. Triggering of a third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) triggered by detection of an operation on the operation button 410, and newly detecting operation of the sword unit 5010 before the third timer time is completed; In addition, when the operation of the newly generated sword unit 5010 is detected, the timing of the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started, and the operation of the operation button 410 is not detected until the timing of the fourth timer time is completed. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set

  Note that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when the detection conditions for other operation patterns are satisfied. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. The first to fourth timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or the time may be measured using a different timer.

  Here, the “long press on the operation button 410”, the “continuous hit operation (multiple operations) on the operation button 410”, and the like are not required in a state where the game has not been started (non-game state). It can be said. However, these modes are modes in which an operation can be instructed in the operation effect in the game execution state, and therefore, even in the non-game state, when starting the game, the player is required to have some purpose (for example, wishing or running practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed by the user, and it has been relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, the “combination of operations for a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation in the order of“ sword unit 5010 → operation button 410 → sword unit 5010 ”)” which is a detection target for the purpose of mischief is set to the game execution state. It can be said that it is important to avoid being erroneously detected as being set so as not to be instructed as an operation at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the effect limitation period occurs relatively frequently and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is greatly reduced.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is noted that before and after the operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation on the other operation means (for example, the sword section 5010) is performed. As a condition, only when the operation of a plurality of operation means is disturbed within a relatively short period of time, the detection condition according to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and an effect restriction period (function restriction period) is generated. I have to. Therefore, a player or the like who touches only once each time, not due to the intention of mischief, can be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more suitably avoid a large decrease in the operation rate.

  Strict detection conditions in this way prevent the operation restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from dropping significantly, and also prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being distorted due to mischief. This is because it is assumed that the operation is performed in various combinations when the operation is performed, and even if the detection condition is strict, there is a high possibility that the detection condition will eventually be satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 381, first, at timing tq1 when in the non-game state, an operation on the sword section 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer expires. (The first stage).

  That is, as described above, in the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, three conditions (the sword unit 5010 → the operation button 410 → the sword unit 5010) are imposed as conditions for generating the effect restriction period. Each time is satisfied one by one, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one by one.

  At the timing tq1, the first stair of the three stairs up to the generation of the effect restriction period is ascended. The state of the first stage can be continued until the end of the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds), and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer expires, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state of the 0th stage by going down one staircase).

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is not completely consumed (the first stage state), and the operation pattern (Detection pattern) The “second-stage detection condition” among the three conditions of “a” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and detects the third-stage detection condition (here, the last detection time) until the second timer time is completed. (The detection condition of (2)) is determined (second state).

  That is, at the timing tq2, the user goes up the second stairs among the three stairs until the effect restriction period is generated. The state of the second stage can be continued until the end of the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds), and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword section 5010) is not satisfied. After the end of the second timer period, the state is returned to the original state in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied (the state at the 0th stage by descending two stairs).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 381, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is not completely consumed (second state), and the operation pattern (detection) The “third-stage detection condition (final detection condition)” among the three conditions included in the pattern a) is satisfied. Therefore, based on the detection, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays (reproduces) the display (reproduction) of the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed in the effect display device 1600. Let it start. At the same time, even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value relating to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Further, even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value concerning the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , Produce a production restriction. Then, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

  According to such a configuration, if a plurality of operations are performed so as to be disturbed, an effect restriction period occurs, so that the operation by the mischief can be suppressed.

  Also, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (go up the stairs), but if a time-out occurs in the middle of the road, All state levels are canceled to return to the original state. Thereby, even when the game is ended in a state where the state level is raised, it is also preferable that the production restriction period is unintentionally generated when a new player attempts to start the game. Can be avoided.

  In the process of increasing the state level (climbing the stairs) in this way, the operation means to be restricted when the effect restriction period occurs, such as the “volume adjustment button” or the “brightness” A case in which the “adjustment button” is operated may be assumed. However, these operation means (the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button) are set so that when the player starts the game, the operation reception is performed so that the volume and the brightness can be set to suit the user's preference. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much of these operating means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) is operated during the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or to affect the first timer time, the second timer time, or the like.

  In other words, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated by the mischief, the effect restriction period cannot be generated with this as a trigger. However, at least the already raised state level will not decrease due to these operations, and once the production restriction period has occurred, the production restriction target will be `` volume adjustment button '' or `` brightness adjustment button '' Since the operations for these are invalidated at all, the mischief for the “volume adjustment button” and the “brightness adjustment button”, which are not detected as the operation by the mischief, is also preferably suppressed. To be expected.

  Further, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used at the time of detecting a mischief, the operation pattern is sandwiched between “two operations (timing tq1 and tq3 in FIG. 381) on another operation unit (for example, the sword unit 5010)”. Regarding the “operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 381) for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)” as a form, the condition is that the operation is performed not a single time but a predetermined number of times. Is more desirable.

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword section 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within a fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the detection condition for the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the effect restriction period is generated. Further, the fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or different times. Further, the time may be measured using the same timer, or the time may be measured using a different timer.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition concerning the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. Also, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the sword section 5010, is detected again (a specific number (here, 2 times) larger than the number of times to be detected (here, 2 times)). In the third detection, the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset so that the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect restriction period is not generated. It is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is continuously operated n times (here, twice) at the timing during which the sword unit 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. The detection condition is satisfied, and the effect restriction period occurs. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated 1 time (> n times) between two operations on the sword section 5010, the effect restriction period is reduced. Since it will not occur, it is expected that it will be complicated to complicate the conditions for the production restriction period and to have a sense of tension such as "Isn't the hall side actually monitoring the mischief act?" Become.

  In order to increase the complexity, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword unit 5010 is performed again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is It is desirable that when the operation is performed within each timer time over (n times), the state is controlled to be different from the original state (the state may be different between m times and 1 times). . Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in the state controlled to these different states, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword unit 5010, the effect restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times), If the production restriction period can be generated (similar to the case where the operation is performed n times), the condition for generating the production restriction period is made more complicated, and "the mischief is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that a sense of tension such as "?" Also in this case, it is needless to say that a timer time is generated each time the operation button 410 is operated, and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of “predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))” that trigger the generation of the effect restriction period are prepared.

  Nevertheless, such mischief is very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages on the hall side. Therefore, for specific videos appearing during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content is such that it describes appropriate handling methods for games and productions, etc., so as to suppress a decline in gaming interest. It is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and “the operation reception relating to the volume is permitted. As a result, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation relating to the brightness is accepted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. "

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 382, at a timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the player starts the game. A case may be assumed in which, by generating a start winning, a transition is made to a game execution state in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, since the above-mentioned intended purpose of quitting the mischief and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet elapsed, End the production restriction period (function restriction period) for a certain item.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility that the reflection may be insufficient, and therefore, at least the fluctuation of the decorative pattern which has triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but `` Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the brightness is not output. Even if the brightness is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. "

  As shown in FIG. 382, when the game is shifted to the game execution state, the detection for the above-described “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether the control is performed during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the operation on the sword unit 5010 or the operation on the operation button 410 is performed, the first timer time or the second timer time is not counted as a trigger, and the effect restriction period does not occur. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the game execution state without waiting for the original continuation time as the production restriction period, the game is performed in such a manner that a part of the restriction contents during the production restriction period is left. Since the state is shifted to the execution state, reflection on the mischief can be encouraged without hindering the progress of the game effect.

  In addition, about a partial restriction | limiting period, the decoration symbol which is the trigger which complete | finished the production restriction period until the change display of the decoration symbol is complete | finished, and a decoration symbol is made into a stop state in the state which the number of hold | maintenance is 0 Until (until the non-game state), at least may be continued.

  At the timing when the game execution state ends and the game state shifts to the non-game state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 382), a predetermined safe time is set, and the time until the predetermined safe time elapses is set. It is desirable to continue the state in which the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated even in the non-game state. That is, in the situation where the game execution state has just ended, it is assumed that the excitement of the player is not cooled down and the operation on a plurality of operation means is performed too much. This is because if a penalty is imposed, the game may be immediately stopped. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game is shifted to the non-game state.

  In addition, when the game is shifted to the non-game state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that the reflection on the mischief may still be insufficient, so the partial restriction is performed until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again after the safe time has elapsed.

  Also, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol change time from the start of the display change of the decorative symbol to the stop. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the change display of the decorative symbol is immediately terminated, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is performed at least until the safe time is terminated. The invalidation state can be continued or the partial restriction period can be continued.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol fluctuation display is started after the effect restriction period (function restriction period) ends, the symbol fluctuation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol fluctuation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative symbols be displayed in a variable manner. According to such a configuration, the above-described partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  Further, in the above-described example, even if the detection approaching the occurrence of the effect restriction period is performed within the detection period for the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (in FIG. 381, a portion where fine dots are given), no detection is performed. Also does not appear. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output each time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the user goes up the stairs at which a penalty occurs), thereby prompting the user to stop the operation due to the mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operation means that has been detected. Similarly, every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the user goes up the stairs of penalty occurrence), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Is also good.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

[Prevention of noise due to adjustment confirmation sound at opening]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared in correspondence with the type of the effect pattern selected above may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect related to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although illustration is omitted. A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In any of the states where the player is in the game, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start a game for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently performed to start the game with a set value that suits his / her preference. However, in this case, every time the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is performed, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output, the adjustment confirmation sound reverberates in the hall and the atmosphere is ruined. It's an entertainment.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment does not allow the player to accept an operation related to volume adjustment or an operation related to brightness adjustment from when the power is turned on until a predetermined condition is satisfied. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", and the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be accepted. It is decided to be.

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume set value) and the luminance set value relating to the output volume of the effect sound are changed to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. In other words, in this case, the "specific value" that is automatically set is adopted as a set value of the volume that many players tend to like, so that many games can be played in a time period immediately after the hall is opened. It is possible to expect that it is difficult for a user to adjust the sound volume setting value and the brightness setting value to his or her own preference. The satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be that a certain time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that a predetermined command is received from the main control MPU 1310a, or that the peripheral control MPU 1511a The specific process may end.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the sound volume setting value or the sound volume setting value is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition or the arrival of a predetermined timing after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. Although a change in the brightness setting value is accepted, a special period (opening-only period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the change in the setting value is accepted is performed for a predetermined time (for example, one hour). First, it is generated. After such a special period (opening-only period) ends, when a change in the set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. I have. As a result, for a while after the opening of the hall (until the time required for completing various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), a state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output is maintained. Thus, it is possible to provide an opportunity to perform volume adjustment and brightness adjustment for starting a game with a set value that suits the user's preference.

  FIG. 383 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process related to a special period (a period dedicated to opening a store).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 383, assuming that power is turned on at timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment controls the volume of the player's volume until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in a state in which the operation for the adjustment and the operation for the luminance adjustment are not accepted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a winning start is not allowed, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during the restoration of the power supply appears or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (symbol stop display, demo screen, etc.) is not yet performed. Do not show.

  Thereafter, when a timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) comes, detection related to a game such as a winning start is allowed, and a game start waiting state ( (A state of waiting for a winning start). The effect display device 1600 also displays a stop symbol (standby screen), so that it is possible to recognize that the symbol is in a symbol change waiting state.

  At this time, while the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective "predetermined specific values", "acceptance of the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the set value is received, a special period (a period exclusively for opening a store) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such a store opening period can be continued until a timing tr2 at which a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed from the occurrence of the period comes, and when the period is ended at the timing tr2, the volume is reduced. When a change in the set value or the luminance set value is received, a period (normal business period) in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 has arrived, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the change of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and the background behind it are displayed. Various background images (images with lower priority in the layer than the decorative design) displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) are displayed when the transition from the store opening period to the normal business period has been triggered It will not be changed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) appears and the game start wait state is reached, until the timing tr2 comes (until the store opening exclusive period ends). During the period), the state in which the adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained, so that it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound from reverberating immediately after opening. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), the state automatically shifts to a state in which an adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by a new customer have settled down, finer adjustments while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value can be allowed. In addition, while the state in which the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen) is maintained, the system automatically shifts to the normal business period in which the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the store. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the control is performed during the store opening period during which the adjustment sound is not output until the adjustment is performed.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start waiting state is established (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume set value or the brightness set value is accepted, the change is made according to the set value changed in the effect display device 1600. Parameter display (parameter display on the volume side, parameter display on the luminance side) is performed. Therefore, by confirming the display of such parameters, it is possible to adjust the set value according to the user's preference.

  However, even if the output relating to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed during the period immediately after the opening of the store (a period exclusively for opening the store), the change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is reflected as the volume or the light amount. In the end, the atmosphere in the hall may be dyed in a single color of adjustment, and there is a concern that the atmosphere may be spoiled and spoiled. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the volume set value is received until the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume set value is reflected as a production sound. It is desirable not to. Similarly, regarding the luminance, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the luminance setting value is received before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed luminance setting value is regarded as the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (a period exclusively for opening the store), each player adjusts the setting value according to his or her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving the opportunity to adjust the set value according to the user's preference, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so that the atmosphere in the hall is reduced. It can be maintained suitably.

  It should be noted that a state in which the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the light amount may be maintained even after the timing tr2 arrives for only the luminance out of the volume and the luminance. In other words, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side where the power consumption is increased by the operation of the mischief before the game is started, and for the brightness whose power consumption is larger than the volume, the game is not started while the game is not started. It is desirable that adjustments not be reflected. Also, unlike the volume adjustment sound, it is not possible to confirm the degree of adjustment of the brightness adjustment sound, so that the brightness adjustment sound may not necessarily be output.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (the time as the exclusive period for opening the store has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variable display by the decorative symbol) starts based on the winning start. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is assumed that the frequency of these adjustments is greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening exclusive period based on the detection is ended early. Then, processing for shifting to the normal business period can be executed.

  However, during the decorative symbol fluctuation display period due to the start winning that ended the store opening period early, a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is received, and an adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. In such a case, it is assumed that many of the players will adjust the volume and the brightness after the period dedicated to the opening of the store has ended early, and this may lead to an overturn.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the store opening exclusive period is ended early and the normal business period is started. However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not permitted until at least the end of the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol generated by this (during the fluctuation).

  FIG. 384 is a time chart showing an example of a process when a game is started when the period is set to a store opening period (special period).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 384, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at the timing tr3 when the time as the special period has not yet been exhausted. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the processing for the exclusive opening period of the store is completed, and the process shifts to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This fluctuation suppression processing is performed while the fluctuating display relating to the decorative symbol is being performed. "Allows accepting changes in the volume setting value and the luminance setting value, and changing these setting values in the output sound in the output state. It is possible to execute processing to reflect the volume and the amount of light of the staging lamp in the light-emitting state, but to not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the luminance adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is changed. " The difference from the “processing during the store opening period” is that whether or not the decorative design is in a fluctuating state is displayed and the change in the set value is reflected as a volume or light amount. This is the case, and the contents of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remain the same.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, such a fluctuation suppressing process is changed to a non-gaming state (a state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Unless it is migrated, it will be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and at the timing tr4, the non-game state is set. If the number of holds is immediately returned to (the state where the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not passed since the opening of the store opening period that was terminated early. Even after the opening of the store), the special period (a period exclusively for opening the store) does not occur again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-game state after the timing tr4, a period (normal business period) in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when a change in the volume set value or the luminance set value is received. It will be controlled. In the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed luminance setting value is also the light amount of the effect lamp which is in a light emitting state. Has been reflected as. In addition, in the effect display device 1600, a stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that the symbol is in a state of waiting for change.

  A player who creates a situation such as "ending the opening period (special period) early and then immediately ending the game execution state" cannot be satisfied with the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, and once started It is assumed that the player has a desire to make more detailed adjustments until the game is interrupted. ) Is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

  In the above-described example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the store opening period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the store opening period (special period) occurs. Alternatively, it may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

  Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the luminance setting value to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be timing tr1 or a predetermined timing before the timing tr1. .

  Also, in the above description example, there is a technical feature in the configuration relating to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 is the same as described above. You may make it implement | achieve as a different process.

  Further, in the above description example, at the timing tr2, the decorative design and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative design and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

  In the above-described example, only one of the set values of the volume and the luminance may be changeable.

[Control for volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment performs an effect pattern determination on which of a plurality of effect patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute a notice effect determination as to whether or not the expected effect (a plurality of effects) is selectively made to appear. Note that, depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared in correspondence with the type of the effect pattern selected above may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and according to the result of the big hit determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice), the movement of the movable body (actor effect), and the like. Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function for definitively indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description and movable The expected effect related to the body motion or the like is provided as an effect having a “function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that the big hit is obtained”. That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is operated by operating the volume adjusting buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The change processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume set value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume set value (process of reflecting the volume set value as the volume). Will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is separated from the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332), although illustration is omitted. A brightness adjustment button is provided for various effect lamps provided (a lamp to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). When it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of the various effect lamps is determined. A process of changing a set value (brightness set value) by a player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the luminance setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the emission luminance based on the changed luminance setting value (a process of reflecting the luminance setting value as a light amount). It will be. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) relating to the brightness is decreased or increased.

  It should be noted that, regarding the change acceptance regarding such set values (volume set value, luminance set value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed set values, the state where the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed. In any of the states where the player is in the game, the game can be executed by an operation by the player.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a case where a first hit determination is performed in response to a game ball being received in the first starting port 2002 and a case where the second starting port 2004 is determined. In which the second hit determination is performed in response to the game ball being accepted, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed in accordance with the hit determination. After that, a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player can be given. However, the expected values for those benefits are set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

  In the above-described example, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 at a maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2,000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 at a maximum for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times. ing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the change of the volume setting value is accepted in a “game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed”, “ The first-side execution state in which the first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed, and "the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed." In any of the "second side execution states", the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is permitted in any of the states is set to be the same.

  According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range and the like, regardless of the state (the game start waiting state, the first side execution state, the second side execution state). As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment through sound adjustment according to each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound is changed when the game start waiting state and the first side execution state are in the above-described state. When this is done, a volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the “second side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

  In other words, in the "game start waiting state", the effect sound is not output because the game is not being executed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed. The subsequent loudness cannot be confirmed as audible sound. For this reason, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the set value (volume set value) relating to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  Also, in the “first side execution state”, although there is a situation in which an effect sound according to the first hit determination is output, this situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. In many cases, it is controlled to a state (low-probability non-time saving game state), and the effect cannot be expected so much. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while watching a portable device such as a smartphone when the player is in a gaming state with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is issued in order to surely notify the player of the change and the changed volume level to the player. Is desirably output.

  On the other hand, in the “second side execution state”, the effect sound according to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively high. ) Is often controlled. In such a situation, since the degree of expectation for the effect is high, the volume adjustment for enjoying the effect tends to be performed.Therefore, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, It may be difficult to hear the effect sound or BGM according to the double hit determination, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the “second side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed, thereby clearing the production sound, BGM, etc. according to the second hit determination. It is desirable to provide a chance to adjust the sound volume in an environment in which the user can listen to the game so as to appropriately maintain the game entertainment.

  However, in the “second side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the effect is increasing, and even after the second symbol change is stopped and displayed in the losing manner, it is likely that the second symbol change will again change and be changed to the big hit mode. It can be said that securing time (afterglow) for consciousness of the game is important for maintaining the entertainment interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing during the “game start waiting state” is performed immediately after being shifted to the “game start waiting state”, the processing related to the “second side execution state” may be performed. It is possible for the player to easily detect that the game has ended in the loss mode and has been shifted to the “game start waiting state”, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, when the process related to the “second side execution state” is completed and the process is shifted to the “game start waiting state”, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the “game start waiting state” is performed. Control so that the normal process (the process of permitting the change of the volume set value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume set value is changed) is not performed during the "game start waiting state". It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the transition from the “second side execution state” to the “game start waiting state”, “the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value has been changed. However, it is desirable that a process of not outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a process of not allowing the change of the volume set value itself be performed. However, the possibility that the "second-side execution state" is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the transition from the "second-side execution state" to the "game start waiting state" is more positively determined. In the same manner as in the "second side execution state", the process of "allowing the change of the volume setting value but not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It may be more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the “first-side execution state”, the degree of expectation for the effect has not increased, and basically, the first symbol change is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. Therefore, unlike the case of the above-mentioned “second-side execution state”, when the processing relating to the “first-side execution state” is completed and the processing is shifted to the “game-start waiting state”, the “first-side execution state” is different. The above-described normal processing (processing of permitting a change in the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed), which is also performed even in the “state”, is performed as it is. Is desirable.

  By the way, in a situation where the operation is controlled to the “first-side execution state”, a mischievous operation is performed such that operations on a plurality of operation means are disturbed and performed within a relatively short time due to a stress that does not easily win a big hit. It is concerned. That is, as a result of the rough handling, if any one of the operation means becomes abnormal or malfunction, the operability and the performance are remarkably reduced, and a further decline in the game entertainment is inevitable.

  Therefore, not only when the game is controlled to the “game start waiting state” but also when the state is controlled to the “first side execution state”, there is a possibility that the operation is detected by a plurality of operation means and a mischief is caused. May be high, the effect restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated in the above-described description example of “prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means (see FIGS. 381 and 382)”.

That is, in this case, a predetermined operation of the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 in any of the “game start waiting state (non-game state)” and the “first side execution state” If an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the sword section 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in a state where a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in a state where the game effect according to the big hit determination is being executed is displayed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value for the output volume of the production sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
・ Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, a change in the brightness setting value relating to the brightness of the staging lamp is not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. Is performed over a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if an image related to the “first-side execution state” appears before that. In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is not displayed, and the operation regarding the volume is accepted and the volume is not accepted. A normal state as a "game start wait state" or a "first side execution state" such that an adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and an operation reception relating to luminance is permitted and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output. Will be returned to.

  In addition, as for the detailed contents and other examples related to such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt the respective contents in the description example of “Prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means”. However, in this case, even if it is shifted from the "game start waiting state" to the "first side execution state" during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the production restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early. Various processes related to the effect restriction period are continued as they are under the same conditions as in the “game start waiting state”. As a result, it is expected that the mischief operation when controlled to the “first-side execution state” having a low degree of expectation is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the state is shifted from the “game start waiting state” to the “second side execution state” during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the “production restriction period ( Processing for Early Termination of Function Restriction Period) and its modified examples are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the “second side execution state” having a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  In the above example, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can also be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound shall be output as the same sound. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as the confirmation sound, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected production sound suggesting the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced. That's why.

  In the above-described example, only one of the set values of the volume and the luminance may be changeable.

[Period of own operation acceptance (valid period) itself]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. Etc.), it is possible to execute the effect determination (for example, the advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (the plurality of effects) is to be selectively appeared. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (such as notice effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of a plurality of expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, and the result of the big hit determination is performed. The fluctuating effect by the corresponding decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the above-described variation pattern determination, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the first variation pattern is obtained regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (“intrinsic reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is allowed when the based symbol effect progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of performing the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the announcement effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. When the symbol effect based on the variation pattern of No. 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing, an operation reception effect (“additional reception effect” described later) in which the effect reception is allowed can be generated. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, an operation reception effect (effective Period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns for generating an "intrinsic reception effect" and a plurality of second variation patterns for generating an "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared such that “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions, etc., means a predetermined change (direction) for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the valid period. At least one of a display change in the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound of the speaker, a change in the light emission by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is performed only after the operation. (Period) The effect of the effect itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
First operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern when an operation by the player is detected;
A second operation effecting means capable of executing an after-operation effect in such a manner that, when an operation by the player is detected, the elapsed time from the timing at which the operation is detected continues until reaching a predetermined time value; We are preparing for it.

  According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (effective period) itself is performed when the operation reception effect is performed by the first operation effect unit and when the operation reception effect is performed by the second operation effect unit. Is provided with a different effect, and it is expected to improve the game entertainment until the effect is performed after the operation.

  That is, in the operation accepting effect by the first operation effecting means, the post-operation effect is executed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed earlier or later during the validity period. Therefore, it can be said that performing the operation immediately after the validity period occurs is advantageous in that the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time and the effect is enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the operation accepting effect by the second operation effecting means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the validity period, the elapsed time from the operation timing is continued until reaching the predetermined time value. The effect is performed after the operation. Therefore, performing the operation at a later time without performing the operation for a while after the validity period has occurred can maintain the overall production time from the start of the validity period to the end of the production after the operation longer. It can be said that it is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  Note that, in this case, the effect generation condition of the operation reception effect by the first operation effect device and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect device are different. For example, in the operation accepting effect by the first operation effecting means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. The operation accepting effect produced by the second operation effecting means is such that the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. To obtain a special result, which can be realized when the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation accepting effect by the first operation effecting means occurs when the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first fluctuation pattern is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first fluctuation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement | achieve as what arises when it progresses to a timing.

  FIG. 385 shows a first example of performing the post-operation effect in such a manner that the effect is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the valid period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about operation reception production.

  Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has advanced to the timing tr1 while the first effect condition required to generate the “first operation accepting effect in which the effect reception is allowed” is satisfied. A first operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (valid period) ends when a timing tr3 at which a predetermined set time has elapsed without effect reception being received does not execute the post-operation effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception effect in which the effect reception is allowed, an image display simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. An operation promotion effect is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the permissible sound over the predetermined set time, and at a halfway stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

  Here, “the acceptable sound is output” means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1 and that the sound data is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the current sound data arrives at the timing tr1. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. Here, the term “set to a non-output state” means that the state of assignment to the channel of “sound data including acceptable sound” is maintained, and the state of assignment of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, the concept includes that the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player has been detected and the effect reception has been performed. The post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the first effect member) started in this manner is based on the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received during the effective period. The processing is terminated when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) has arrived. The “operation-based process using the first effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the effect reception being performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 385, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr1a within the valid period (timing tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the first effect member) The processing is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 385, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timing tr1 to tr3), an after-operation effect (operation-based process using the first effect member) Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation accepting effect, it is possible to perform the operation immediately after the validity period occurs, as an execution state as an after-operation effect (an execution state of an operation-based process using the first effect member). Is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the production.

  As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even if it is performed, the output state of the acceptable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 386 is a time chart illustrating an example of the second operation reception effect in which the post-operation effect is executed in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing is continued until reaching a predetermined time value.

  Now, assuming that a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has advanced to the timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the occurrence of the “second operation accepting effect where the effect reception is allowed” is satisfied. A second operation acceptance effect (valid period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (valid period) also does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 at which the predetermined set time has elapsed without effect reception being performed arrives. It is to end. A time value different from the predetermined setting time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined setting time in the second operation reception effect may be set. During the execution period of the second operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted, an image display simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display of how much effective time remains are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. An operation promotion effect is performed.

  Also when the second operation reception effect (valid period) is started, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. You. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment also does not continue the output state of the permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and does not continue the predetermined set time yet. At the timing tr12, which is a non-output state, so that it cannot be heard.

  Note that the “acceptable sound is output” here also means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr11, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that also includes making the “reception period of the acceptable sound” in the present sound data arrive at the timing tr11. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before to after the timing tr11 so as to straddle the timing tr11. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "permissible sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the “operation-based process using the second effect member” is performed as the post-operation effect based on the fact that the operation by the player has been detected and the effect reception has been performed. Regarding the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the second effect member) started in this way, even if the effect is received at any timing during the effective period, the effect reception is not performed. It is configured to continue until the elapsed time from the time when the operation is performed reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as an effective period). The “operation-based process using the second effect member” can be executed, for example, as a process of effecting the operation of the second decorative movable body based on the effect reception being performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr11a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (the operation-based process using the second effect member) The processing is performed from the timing tr11a to a timing tr14 at which a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 386, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr12a within the valid period (timing tr11 to tr13), an after-operation effect (operation-based processing using the second effect member) Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing arriving after the timing tr14) at which a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate the device at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period is generated, until the effect after the operation is completed after the effective period starts. It is possible to provide the effect of maintaining the effect time as a whole for a long time, which is advantageous in enjoying the effect.

  As will be described later, in the second operation reception effect also, an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-based process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the acceptable sound is not released, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 385 and FIG. 386, the first and second operation reception effects (effective periods) are given different effects to themselves, and the operation reception effects (effective periods) are different from each other. By generating the information based on the satisfaction of the condition, it is expected that the game entertainment from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the effect after the operation is suitably maintained.

  However, the following problem remains only by adopting the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period). That is, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is more advantageous to operate at an earlier time during the effective period in order to enjoy the effect, and to operate at a later time during the effective period is more advantageous to enjoy the effect. Since the preferred operation timing for enjoying the effect, such as the presence of the effect, is determined, the effect of the effect within the validity period is still poor, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, it is more preferable that the operation reception effect is executed as a special operation reception effect having a mode described below.

FIG. 387 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has advanced to the timing tr21 while the special effect condition required for the occurrence of the special operation reception effect has been satisfied, the special effect based on the progress to the timing tr21 is established. Generate an operation reception effect (valid period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (valid period) is different from the first and second operation reception effects, and a predetermined set time elapses and the timing tr23 comes without effect reception. Even if there is no operation, an effect reception is always generated within the validity period, and a post-operation effect described later is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined time in the special operation reception effect is set to a time value longer than the predetermined time in the first operation reception effect or the predetermined time in the second operation reception effect.

  Also, when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted (or that the effect reception has been permitted) is output. Is done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment converts the acceptable sound (FIG. 387) into the acceptable sound generated in response to the first and second operation acceptance effects (FIGS. 385 and 386). The output state is continued for a longer time. In this example, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 387 is also set to a non-output state at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage where the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed, so that it is not audible. However, the acceptable sound shown in FIG. 387 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 comes.

  In addition, the “acceptable sound is output” here also means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr21, and the channel is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept including that the “reception period of acceptable reception sound” in the present sound data arrives at the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptable sound” may be output from before to after the timing tr21 so as to straddle the timing tr21. Also, in the case of “turning to a non-output state” here, in addition to releasing the assignment state of the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept includes that the "permissible sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and the sound (including silence data) is reproduced thereafter.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, if an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect reception is performed, based on the effect reception being performed, the “first movable state” illustrated in FIG. The operation-based processing using the decorative body (first production member) ”and the“ operation-based processing using the second movable decorative body (second production member) shown in FIG. 386 are started in parallel. It is something to do. Therefore, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is started. However, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” started in this manner is performed at any timing within the valid period. Even when the effect is received, the process is terminated when a predetermined timing tr24 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has been reached, and the operation using the second effect member is performed. Caused operation ”is started. Regarding the“ operation caused by operation using the second effect member ”started in this way, even if the effect is received at any timing during the validity period, the effect is accepted. Is performed until the elapsed time from when the operation is performed reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as an effective period). To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 387, assuming that an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr21a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but among the post-operation effects, the “operation-based process using the second effect member” has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 387, if an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr22a within the valid period (timing tr21 to tr23), if the effect after the operation is “the operation caused by using the first effect member, The "process" is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-based process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect is determined in advance from the timing tr22a. This is executed until the timing tr26 at which the elapsed time value has elapsed (timing that arrives after the timing tr25).

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. If an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (valid period), “using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is reached. Operation-induced processing "and" operation-induced processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value ".

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the validity period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a price, the end timing of the “operation-based process using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the expiration of the validity period and is operated at a later time, the end timing of the “operation-based processing using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect is not changed. Although it is possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, a disadvantage arises in that it is not possible to maintain a long execution state of the “operation-based process using the first effect member” in the post-operation effect.

In other words, in the special operation reception production, there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for exciting the production,
-In exchange for shortening the time until the "operation-based processing using the second effect member" is completed, the execution state of the "operation-based process using the first effect member" is lengthened and enjoyed. (To operate early in the validity period), or
-In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-based process using the first effect member", should the time until the "operation-based process using the second effect member" end be extended and enjoyed? (Do you operate later in the validity period?), Or
-The time during which the "operation-based process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-based process using the second effect member" is terminated are gradually sacrificed, and the entire process is performed. To balance as a result (whether to operate early or late within the validity period)
The special operation reception effect itself can be given a strategic operation production effect such as this, which provides an operation reception effect that is less tiring and allows the operation timing to be selected according to the mood of the player Will be able to

  As will be described later, in the special operation reception effect, if an effect reception is performed when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the post-operation effect (operation-based processing using the first effect member, The operation-based process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptable sound is released at this time.

  Here, in the above-described example, when an effect is received within the special operation reception effect (FIG. 387), “the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes is reached. Used operation-based process "and" operation-based process using a second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value ". . However, even if a special operation acceptance effect occurs, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied (for example, if the player has failed to determine the jackpot or has failed to determine the predetermined effect) In this case, even if an effect is received within the special operation reception effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member” is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 387). It is more preferable that the "operation-based process using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. And "operation-based processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value." In this case, the effect content is equivalent to the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of them is executed. The feeling can be suitably maintained. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, “the operation-based processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “from the timing at which the effect is received” When the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the "operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time of the operation reaches the predetermined time value," the first operation accepting effect or the second operation It is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbols is higher than when the effect appears after the operation in the reception effect.

  However, despite the operation within the special operation reception effect, this is not detected well (detection error), and the effect reception may not be performed. As a result, the validity period ends without the effect reception being performed. In such a case, the player who saw that the “operation-based processing using the first effect member” was not performed even though the operation was performed was mistaken for the operation accepting effect in which only one of the operations was performed. Then, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, as for the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player during the valid period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the valid period, and the “predetermined in the effect pattern The operation-causing process using the first effect member, the execution state of which is continued until the given timing is reached "and" the operation-based process, which is continued until the time elapsed from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value, " It is preferable that the “operation-based process using two effect members” is executed. As a method for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation reception and an effect mode related thereto, any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. Can be used.

  In the above description example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect occur, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted is output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 385 to 387, the acceptable sound output when the special operation acceptance effect is generated is changed to the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance effect. It is used as an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a longer time than the acceptable sound output when the effect is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is allowed (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated or a gauge display indicating how much effective time remains is displayed). By confirming how long the permissible reception sound that is in the output state is continued, the operation reception effect is described as “the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. Operation-based process using the effect member "and" operation-based process using the second effect member continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value ". It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time during which the “operation-based process using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which effect reception is performed). When the operation reception effect is recognized as the “special operation reception effect”, there is a disadvantage that the strategic strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

  However, even if it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception effect, it is important that the strategic effect is left to some extent. Therefore, the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the allowable reception sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated is determined as “specified operation reception effect (effective period)”. It is preferable to execute the processing assuming that a non-output state is set when a specific time that is less than half of the “set time (timing tr21 to tr23)” has elapsed. According to such a configuration, the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation acceptance effect (valid period)” has elapsed. If the output state is maintained, it is possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Timing tr21 to tr23) "can be provided with a stunning strategic property in a state in which a half or more of the time remains.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for the acceptable sound output when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated, the effect reception is performed in the output state. Even if the output state is maintained, the acceptable state output when a special operation reception effect is generated, if the effect is received in the output state, the output state is forcibly terminated. I have to. In other words, in this case, when an effect is received in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect (a situation in which the specific time has not elapsed since the reception allowable sound was output), the operation acceptance effect Is a "special operation reception effect", and whether a more highly expected aspect appeared as a post-operation effect is an important concern. One of them (the operation reception effect is "special operation reception effect" ) Can be easily recognized only by checking whether or not the output state of the acceptable sound has been terminated upon the reception of the effect. For example, even if it is recognized that the output state of the acceptable reception sound is not terminated and that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is generated as a result, the user switches his / her feeling to "expect as an after-operation effect. It is expected to concentrate on "Is a high degree mode appeared?" In this case, “the effect design is designed so that the ratio of the new occurrence of the special operation reception effect increases until the symbol is stopped when the aspect with higher expectation appears as the post-operation effect. It is desirable.

  In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image display simulating the operation means used as an operation target in each operation reception effect, and how long the effective time is. An indication of whether the gauge is left is displayed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed. In this regard, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is received, the gauge state is left (displayed) and the "execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Operation-based processing using the effect member "and" operation-based processing using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect reception timing reaches a predetermined time value "are started. It is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize after the effect has been received based on the remaining gauge as a display which timing in the validity period the effect was received. In this way, it is possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-based process using the first effect member will end immediately or the like. As a method for starting the effect after the operation while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this manner, any one of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296 or an appropriate combination may be used. It is possible.

  In the special operation reception effect, by performing an operation-related display (a precursor effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted, if it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs It is desirable to tighten. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player suitably enjoys the strategic strategic effect over the entire period of the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (an indication effect) indicating the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted. However, for the operation-related display, it is assumed that this is executed as “a short indication effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function”. Desirable not to have.

  Here, as an operation-related display (a short indication effect with a poor timing suggestion function) performed by the effect display device 1600 before the valid period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs, For example, this can be realized as an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when “image display imitating the operation means” appears in a fade-in manner.

  FIG. 388 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process related to an operation-related display when the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is performed, and a process related to channel assignment of sound data including a permissible sound. is there.

  That is, in terms of ergonomics, when the validity period occurs, the suggestion image (operation-related display) is displayed several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to perform an operation so that an effect is received at a timing where there is no such effect. However, even though the validity period has not occurred for several frames, if the "image display simulating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode, the "operation means There is a possibility that an effect may not be received even if the operation is performed while the "image display imitating the game" is displayed, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 388, the timing trA several frames before the valid period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs. The operation-related display is started on the basis of the operation, but the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in a normal mode in a situation where the validity period has not occurred.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, a “permissible image that can be realized as a fade-in image in a state where“ image display imitating the operation means ”is displayed in a fade-in manner, a predetermined effect image, or the like. "Previous operation related display" is started. When the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11) arrives in a state where the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed, an “imitation of operation means” is displayed from the state in which the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. "Display" is shifted to a state of being displayed in a normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, at the time of occurrence of the validity period, a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 388, the output of the acceptable sound is not started at the timing trA, but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to be able to operate so that the effect is received at a timing shortly after the validity period occurs, the acceptable sound is also output several frames before the validity period occurs. It seems that it is desirable to make it happen. However, if the acceptable sound is output several frames before the validity period occurs, the output timing may be different from the appearance timing of “image display simulating operation means”. As a result, it may give a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is also possible to output a pre-permissible operation-related sound that is different from the acceptable sound. However, if the permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period of time, the permissible operation-related sound is not an independent effect sound, but may be heard integrally with the permissible sound. In the end, there is a concern that a sense of incongruity as if a sound shift has occurred may be caused.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, prior to the generation of the valid period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (operation-related pre-permission display) is displayed for several frames. On the other hand, the operation-related sound (operation-related pre-permission sound) is not intentionally executed, but is output only when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 388, the acceptable sound is output by allocating the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocating the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel is ended so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. I have. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 comes. It may be. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the “reproduction period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when an effect is received between timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 and tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended, and the image display that simulates the operation means is performed. "Is hidden. On the other hand, as for the "sound data including the acceptable sound", the assignment state for the channel is maintained, and the acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle as described above.

  FIG. 389 is a time chart illustrating an example of a process related to an operation-related display when a special operation reception effect is performed and a process related to channel assignment of sound data including an allowable reception sound.

  As shown in FIG. 389, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (the operation-related pre-permission related display) is performed from the time when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the valid period occurs arrives. However, the “period of timing trB to tr21” has a length that is more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the pre-permissible operation-related display displayed in the “expectation degree as to whether or not the post-operation effect performed when the effect is received is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation” or “the expectation degree at which the big hit symbol appears” As suggested, any of a plurality of presentation modes can be selectively made to appear. It should be noted that, in a situation where no valid period has occurred, the point that “image display imitating operation means” is not displayed in a normal mode is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG.

  For example, the content of “pre-permissive operation-related display” started at timing trB is different from that of “pre-permissible operation-related display” shown in FIG. 388, and “image display imitating operation means” is followed by ( A slightly story-like precursory effect such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward a location displayed at the timing tr21) and hiding the effect image at the location (described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 259) Any of the above-described “specific operation-related effects” may be applied). At this time, any of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. Then, when the above-mentioned timing tr21 comes while the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed, the “image display imitating the operation means” is displayed in a normal mode from the state in which the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. The state is shifted to the displayed state.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception production, as described above, at the time of occurrence of the validity period, the reception permission sound indicating that the production reception has been permitted is output. As shown in FIG. 389, the sound is output from the timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data allocated to the channel at the timing trB.

  In other words, as described above, in the special operation reception effect, before the expiration of the valid period, it is much larger than the "minimum time ergonomically required to enable operation immediately after the valid period occurs" "Permissible operation display" with high rendition is performed using a long time (timing trB to tr21). Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such a performance period (timing trB to tr21), a performance sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) corresponding to the “pre-permissible operation-related display” displayed during the same period is output. It is desirable to make it. In addition, since the production period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the production, even if the production sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) is output during the production period, the reception is permitted. Inconvenience that can be heard as sound integrated with sound cannot occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB comes, the pre-permissible operation-related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output, and these output states are changed to the timing tr21. Until now. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state where the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed is shifted to the state where “image display simulating operation means” is displayed in a normal mode, and the “pre-permissible operation-related display” is displayed. The state is changed from a state in which "sound" is output to a state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 389, one sound data including a reproduction section of “pre-permissible operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptable permissible sound” is used as a channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. The above-mentioned effect sound output is realized during the period from timing trB to tr22.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, a part of the sound data assigned to the channel in a manner of straddling from the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect is provided for the acceptable sound output when the valid period is generated. It will be output as a production sound reproduced in the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (for example, at the time of the occurrence of the indication effect), and the first half is an effect corresponding to the indication effect (allowable pre-operation-related display). The sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) plays to indicate the timing of the special operation reception effect, and after the validity period has occurred, the channel assignment is performed based on the effect reception. Since it is possible to appropriately release, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception has been performed. Note that the output method for “one sound data” including the playback section of “pre-permissible operation-related sound” and the playback section of “acceptable allowable sound” includes, first, the expectation degree (when the symbol variation is stopped). After preparing a plurality of sound data having different jackpot patterns, one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as a result of a jackpot determination (or a performance determination (such as a preview determination)). It is desirable that the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 be realized by selectively assigning the channels based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the playback section of “permissible operation-related sound (precursor effect)”, but is different in the playback section of “acceptable sound (operation accepting effect)”. It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended, and the “image display imitating the operation means” is not displayed. In addition to this, the assignment state of the channel for “sound data including the acceptable sound” is also terminated, and the output of the acceptable sound is forcibly terminated in the middle. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the acceptable sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the effect is received, it is determined that the special operation reception effect has been performed even after the effect has been received. Can be recognized.

  Note that, even with one sound data (timing trB to tr22), the section (first half) of the effect sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-permissible operation-related display) is in the playback state. In the present situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, the operation is not forcibly terminated. Only in a situation (timing tr21 to tr22) in which the section (second half) of the production sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the validity period is in the reproduction state, the allocation state to the channel is released based on the operation by the player. Becomes

  The one sound data (sound data including the pre-permissible operation-related sound and the permissible sound) is allocated before the timing trB, and is already allocated at the timing trB. Is also good. As described above, the assignment state for the channel may be continued after the timing tr22. For example, the assignment state for the channel may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself is kept allocated to the channel, but the “acceptable sound reproduction period” in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

  In the example shown in FIG. 388, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of allocating the “sound data including the acceptable sound” to the channel is ended so that the acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. I have. However, the “sound data including the acceptable sound” itself may continue to be assigned to the channel after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 comes. It may be. In other words, in this case, the sound data itself is left assigned to the channel, but the “reproduction period of the acceptable sound” in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the configuration shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, “a plurality of acceptable sounds having different lengths in which the output state is maintained” are prepared as the acceptable sounds accompanying the occurrence of the operation accepting effect, and the effect is accepted. Different permissible sounds are generated between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), which have different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the acceptable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the strategic strategy is narrowed, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) are performed. 2 operation reception effect) can be recognized.

  In addition, the plurality of acceptable sounds include a first acceptable sound (special operation accepting effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation performed by the player is accepted, and the output state continues. To be received (first and second operation reception effects). Therefore, when the operation is performed so that the effect reception is performed while the acceptable sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by checking whether the output state of the acceptable sound is terminated when the effect is received. It is possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable sound is originally to be in a non-output state when the validity period ends, and it is assumed that the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. If there is, it may be in the way of directing. In this regard, in the above-described example, the reception effect sound for which the output state is ended when the effect reception is performed is replaced with the first reception allowable sound (the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long). Special operation reception effect).

  That is, in this case, when an effect is received in the output state of the “second acceptable reception sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, since the time setting value for maintaining the output state of the second acceptable sound is short in the first place, the second acceptable sound will soon be in a non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely to hinder the effect. On the other hand, when an effect is received in the output state of the “first acceptable sound on the side where the time setting value for maintaining the output state is relatively long”, the original time setting for maintaining the output state is received. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so that it does not obstruct the effect.

  In addition, by confirming how long the output state of the acceptable sound is continued, it is possible to recognize whether the special operation reception effect or the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who tries, if the output state of the acceptable sound is maintained when the time set value for the second acceptable sound has elapsed, the first acceptable sound is not the second acceptable sound. Is output. In this regard, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is finished, it is possible to confirm that the first acceptable sound is in a non-output state when the effect reception is performed, It is possible to quickly confirm whether the prediction that the special operation reception effect is occurring is correct.

  In addition, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, when the valid period of the operation reception effect is generated, a pre-permissible operation-related display indicating that the valid period is about to occur is displayed. The operation-related display includes a first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time (see FIG. 388) and a second pre-permissible operation-related display with a long display time (see FIG. 389). In this regard, when the first pre-permissible operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is not allocated to the channel, and the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is set to the timing when the valid period occurs. By assigning the "sound data including the acceptable sound" to the channel, the acceptable sound is set to the output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-permissible operation-related display is not output, but it is possible to prompt the operation from the time when the effective period occurs without causing a sense of incongruity as if a sound gap occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-permissive operation-related display with a long display time is performed, “sound data including the acceptable sound” is transmitted to the channel from the time when the second pre-permissible operation-related display is performed. The state of assignment is set, and the acceptable section sound is set to the output state by setting the reproduction section of the acceptable section sound to arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation acceptance effect is generated (for example, when an effect effect is generated), and the first half is an effect effect (display before operation permitted). In addition to being able to suggest the timing at which a special operation reception effect is produced by the production sound (pre-permissible operation-related sound) flowing according to the Since the channel assignment can be appropriately released, the player can be made aware that the special operation reception effect has been performed even after the effect reception has been performed.

  That is, in the pre-permission operation-related display shown in FIG. 389, the pre-permission operation-related sound corresponding thereto is output, and the acceptable reception sound is further output when the valid period is generated. In the display, the permissible operation-related sound corresponding thereto is not output, and the acceptable sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  In addition, in the above-described description examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the “effect member”, an effect display device 1600, a speaker, an effect lamp, a movable decorative body, or the like can be used. In addition, as the “first effect member”, any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body can be adopted. As the “second effect member”, Any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body, which is different from the “first effect member”, can be adopted.

  Further, in the above description example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same as the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), and may be different. When the operation means to be operated is different, the mimic image displayed within each effective period is different.

  In the first operation accepting effect, the “operation-based process using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” is executed as an after-operation effect, "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "Execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives And “operation-based processing using the second effect member” performed as the post-operation effect. Further, an operation-based process using a rendering member different from the first rendering member and the second rendering member may be further executed. The originating process is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes.

  In the second operation accepting effect, executing the “operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the effect receiving timing reaches a predetermined time value” is performed as an after-operation effect. However, “the operation-based processing using the first effect member that is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives May be executed as the post-operation effect, respectively. " Further, an operation-based process using a rendering member different from the first rendering member and the second rendering member may be further executed. However, in the post-operation rendering according to the second operation reception rendering, any operation is performed. The initiating process is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception effect, “the operation-based processing using the first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” and “the elapsed time from the effect reception timing The operation-based process using the second effect member that is continued until the predetermined time value is reached "is executed as the post-operation effect. However, an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is determined. The used operation-based processing may be further executed. In the special operation reception effect, an operation-based process executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and a time elapsed from the timing at which the effect is received is a predetermined time. What is necessary is to mix the operation-based processing executed as being continued until the value reaches the value.

  In addition, in the above-described example shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to. By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the above-mentioned effective period with a staging strategic effect.

  In the first pre-permissible operation-related display having a short display time (see FIG. 388), the "expectation degree as to whether the post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted is performed in a high expectation mode" or the "big hit" Although the “expected degree of appearance of the symbol” is not suggested, in the second pre-permissible operation-related display having a long display time (see FIG. 389), the “post-operation effect performed when the effect is accepted” is expected. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation of whether the game is performed in a high aspect" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effect” set as a relatively long time value, by displaying any of a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed” It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether the effect is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

  Also, in the special operation reception production, even if the production reception is made at any time during the validity period, “the production by the first production member generated due to the production reception” is “the production due to the production reception. Making the relationship that the execution state is terminated earlier than "the effect by the second effect member to be generated" is necessary to make the player recognize that the effect contents are the same as the effect after the operation. desirable.

  In the above description examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, as the pachinko machine 1, the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect can be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not mounted and does not occur, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be generated because the second operation reception effect is not mounted, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation accepting effect and the second operation accepting effect are not mounted, so that they do not occur, and the special operation accepting effect may be generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined effect condition. .

  In the special operation reception effect shown in the above-described description examples shown in FIGS. 385 to 389, specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to a channel is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. Among them, a state in which the effect reception is allowed may be generated.

[More detailed production of acceptable sounds]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (e.g., advance notice effect) is to appear selectively. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorated design is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. If the pattern pattern based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), the effect is accepted. Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptable sound output when the operation accepting effect is generated differs depending on the result of the effect determination, so that the effect after the operation is executed in a highly expected manner. The rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped are indicated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result in the effect determination (such as a preliminary determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, an operation in which the acceptance of the effect is permitted Reception effects (valid period) can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated in the predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) generated when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the change pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific change pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, a change pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected change pattern (non-reach change pattern). It is desirable to prevent the selection or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). After the operation to generate the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body), the operation is performed. The effect of the reception effect (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed manner. During the execution of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity or the high expected fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) in the output, the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, or is not output (the reproduction period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data is over, or the channel is allocated). Is terminated, etc.), at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity can be generated.

  With such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, the output of the “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” in the non-suppressed mode (low expected non-suppression reception production) and the “BGM reproduction” (A specific type of effect sound) "may be output in a suppressed mode, silence, or in a non-output state (suppressed operation accepting effect). Since the ratio (expectation) of winning a jackpot differs according to the effect and the high expectation suppression reception effect), the directivity when the operation opportunity is given (when the operation opportunity is given) BGM reproduction (produced sound of a specific type) can be improved in entertainment interest by suppressing or not).

  However, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state when an operation opportunity is given. There is a concern that the directivity will be poor.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when a low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is set as a reception allowable sound. As an output. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the poor rendition when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, the acceptable sound output when the high expected suppression reception effect is generated is made smaller than the allowable sound output when the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. The sound is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time, so that it is possible to appropriately suppress the poor performance when the high expectation suppression reception effect occurs.

  On the other hand, in the high expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode, silence, or is in a non-output state. There is also an aspect that when a later production occurs, the production sound corresponding to this can be made to stand out, and in this regard, it can be said that this is useful in improving the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described later, with respect to the acceptable sound output when the high expectation suppression accepting effect is generated, the effect is accepted when the accepting sound is in the output state. And the output state is terminated based on the effect being received. As a result, the effect sound corresponding to the effect after the operation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation reception effect is described as “If no operation is detected within the set time in which the effect reception is permitted, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends. In addition to being able to be generated by the “non-automatic reception mode that is performed”, “the automatic reception mode that can generate a post-operation effect even when no operation is detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed” Can also be generated.

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated in the automatic reception mode, even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation by the player is not performed, and as a result, it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly, the output time for the production sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is shorter than when it was done.

  In the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as described later, if no operation is detected, an effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within a set time (automatic button function is enabled). The post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. In other words, in this case, the effect reception will always occur before the specific timing within the set time arrives, so that the effect reception may be performed within the set time within the time after the specific timing. As a result, the length of the effective period in which the effect acceptance is permitted is substantially reduced. As a result, unlike the case where the production is started after the operation after the set time is over, the automatic button function is activated in such a way that the production tempo is accelerated instead of producing the production delay. It can be realized.

  In addition, when the automatic button function is activated within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity is substantially lost even though the set time has not elapsed. For the fear of this, the player side is expected to actively operate at an earlier stage within the set time or to play a game with a sense of tension for the effect.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, the “gauge display of how long the effective time remains” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is performed until a specific timing at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to display the remaining time until the set time elapses, rather than indicating the remaining time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, the effect reception is always performed at a point in time before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes “0”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described later, not only the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode but also the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, It is possible to output a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect reception has been allowed or that the effect reception has been allowed. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately suppress a situation in which the effect reception is automatically generated due to the forgetting of the operation, and the effect reception cannot be generated by the user's own operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not output the operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode. Since the sound can be output as the above-mentioned acceptable sound, by confirming the type of the acceptable sound, the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, not in the non-automatic reception mode, occurs. Will be able to recognize that

  On the other hand, in the post-operation production, there is usually a production risk that is executed in a mode of low expectation. Therefore, it is not always necessary to perform the operation so that the post-operation production is performed in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. There is also an aspect that it is not necessarily. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the reception permission sound is output only for a time sufficient to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, the reception permission sound in the output state is output. By terminating the process relatively early, “time when it is possible to think about whether or not to produce an effect reception” is created while the reception-permissible sound is not output.

  However, even in the case of the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, if the reception allowable sound is supposed to be terminated early, there is a concern that a misunderstanding that the effect reception is no longer permitted due to the function of the automatic button may be caused. Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the allowable reception sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button has not yet functioned and the effect reception is permitted. This indicates that the player is in the state, and thus the player's operation can be encouraged with a sense of security that the automatic button has not yet functioned.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or is in a non-output state. The operation opportunity is given while the suppression reception effect (here, the high expectation suppression reception effect) that gives the operation opportunity or the “BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type)” is output in the non-suppression mode. While the non-suppression reception effect (here, the low expected non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the effect reception is allowed, or the effect reception is performed. There is a technical feature in that the reception-permissible sounds indicating that the sound is allowed are generated in such a manner as to enhance their unique performance.

  Hereinafter, such a technical feature will be described. In describing the technical feature, if the "acceptable sound" is described again, the "acceptable sound" indicates that the effect acceptance is permitted. The output is started within the set time, indicating that the effect reception is in an acceptable state, or the output is started before the set time in which the effect reception is allowed is started, and the effect reception is allowed. The sound is output as an effect sound such as “Pikeen”. However, in the case where the output state is set to be output before the set time at which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained across the timing at which the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (during the period during which the effect reception is allowed), and it is more important than the time from when the “acceptable sound” is output to when the set time occurs. It is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the “acceptable sound” to be longer. In this sense, the “acceptable sound” can be output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that the sound is output within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) in response to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

  In addition, the “acceptable sound” may be assigned to a channel and output as independent effect sound data (see FIG. 388), or may be another effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period)). )), Which is assigned to a channel and output as one effect sound data together with an indication effect executed before the occurrence of the effect or an effect sound output according to the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". (See FIG. 389), and the method of realizing it may be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low-expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, the “predetermined fluctuation” in the “low expected fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed”. If the "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. After that, the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol (such as effect depiction according to a predetermined fluctuating pattern or sound output of BGM reproduction according to the predetermined fluctuating pattern) is started, and a notice effect is performed within the execution period of the fluctuating effect. An effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) according to the selected “predetermined fluctuation pattern”. In addition, the effect pattern determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (main control side), including the effect examples described below, and the advance notice determination (sub-control) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. In the case of performing (control side), regarding the processing related to the announcement effect, the “fluctuation pattern determination” may be replaced with “effect pattern determination”, and the “fluctuation pattern” may be replaced with “effect pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination) corresponding to the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 390 (b). An operation reception effect (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted when the timing tr32 at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start is reached is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is as follows.
A “non-suppression reception effect (FIG. 5) that sets a set time during which the effect reception is permitted while the“ sound of BGM reproduction ”corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode. 390 (a), (b)), and if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the effect reception is permitted, the post-operation effect is not generated and "The non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 390 (j))" in which the set time is ended
As "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect".

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the occurrence of the operation reception effect is caused by the “sound of BGM reproduction” being in the suppression mode. Since the set time (valid period) in which the production is allowed to be accepted without the production performance such as suggesting is suddenly set (non-suppression reception production), the player is surprised. It becomes a form of sagging, and a delay tends to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if an operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is ended without any effect after the operation (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing an opportunity to produce an effect after the operation, it is possible to appropriately reduce a sense of tension when the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) is being executed. Will be able to maintain.

  However, although it is executed as such “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without the effect after the operation, contrary to the player's intention. If this happens frequently, there is a concern that the entertainment interest in games will be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Also, when the timing tr31 slightly before arrives, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr32. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the effect is accepted at the timing tr31 slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. It is expected that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) will be ended without producing an effect "will not occur frequently. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is generated. May be generated.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" And the "pressing!" , And a second permissible sound output as a message sound. However, as shown in FIGS. 390 (d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. The delay is likely to occur at the beginning of the movement when the user attempts to operate.

  By the way, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time (valid period) or execution in the non-automatic reception mode, It is considered that a player who strives not to miss an opportunity to produce a post-operation effect by repeatedly hitting the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) from the state where the effect reception is not permitted may appear. Can be However, in this case, the effect is started after the operation is accepted and the effect is started immediately after the operation is accepted. Therefore, the started effect is “the effect performed in response to the effect reception (effect after operation)”. Or it is difficult to recognize whether the event is automatically generated as a mere notice effect irrelevant to the effect reception, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 390 (particularly, in FIG. 390 (c)), in the low expected non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (valid period) occurs. When the effect is received at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (valid period) itself is ended, but the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is not terminated midway. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output is completed as one allowable sound (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 390 (g)). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether the event is being performed (effect after operation) or whether the event is automatically generated as a mere notice effect irrelevant to the effect reception. Kill as to become.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when an effect is received within a set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are performed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 390, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 switches the operation means set as the operation target in the low expectation non-suppression reception effect. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. As a display method of the mimic image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) can be adopted. Based on this, they are hidden (all are hidden at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a “special effect mode (automatic button effect state)” for enabling the automatic button function for all operation accepting effects for which an operation instruction is given. Alternatively, the setting to the “special effect mode” and the release of the setting may be made possible by an operation by the player. That is, in this case, even in the case of the operation reception effect that occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), in the state where the “special effect mode” is set. , "Non-suppressed reception effect", and will be executed in the "automatic reception mode" described above, and only when the "special effect mode" is not set, the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" Will occur. However, in the specification (especially, “more detailed rendition of acceptable sounds” and descriptions related thereto), unless otherwise specified, the “special rendition mode” is not set. The description is given as an example of an effect when the “special effect mode” is not mounted as the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 391 and FIG. 392 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  Now, in the normal game state (non-probable change / non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (extended holding), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, a high expectation of developing into "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" Assuming that a “specific fluctuation pattern” is selected from the “variation patterns”, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative pattern (such as a rendering effect according to a specific variation pattern or a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (advance effect) according to the result of (1) is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected “specific variation pattern”.

  However, as described above, in the effect (effect pattern) relating to the “specific variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 391 (b), no matter what result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination). Then, an operation reception effect (valid period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted when a timing tr42 (a timing in the SP reach state) at which a specific time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific fluctuation pattern is as follows.
"Suppression reception effect (FIG. 391 (a)) which sets a set time during which the effect reception is permitted while the" sound of BGM reproduction "corresponding to the variation pattern (effect pattern) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. , (B))], and even if no operation is performed on the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which effect reception is allowed, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is enabled), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception. Aspect (see FIG. 391 (j)) "
To be executed as “suppression / automatic reception effect”. As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a suppressed mode or a silent state, a method of setting a silent section (suppression section) in the data of the “sound of BGM reproduction” itself in advance or the method of outputting the “sound of the BGM” in the data itself. A method of changing the volume value of the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also called “second suppression operation reception effect”, and the suppression mode here is also called “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) relating to the high expected variation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) relating to the specific variation pattern), the “sound of BGM reproduction” is suppressed. Since a set time (valid period) in which an effect reception is allowed is set with an effect such as an output of a mode or silence indicating that an operation reception effect is generated (suppression reception). From the player's point of view, it is easier for the player to perform an operation immediately after the operation reception effect is generated. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated at the latest when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives. Because of this (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security without missing the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation reception effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is also the same as the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above with reference to FIGS. 391 (b), (c), and (g). As shown in the figure, when the timing tr41 slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the output of the "acceptable sound" is started and the timing tr42 is straddled. To maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, a state in which the effect acceptance is permitted at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently appear that "effects will be accepted by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation contrary to the will of the player" Become so. However, as described above, the “acceptable sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) occurs, and is generated, for example, in accordance with the generation timing tr42 of the set time. You may do so.

  However, the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM playback” is shifted from the state in which the sound is output in the non-suppressed mode to the state in which the sound is output in the suppressed mode or silence (or the state in which the sound is not output) is the same as that described above. In order to suitably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to (c), a relationship such as “length of timing tr40 to tr41> length of timing tr41 to tr42”. It can be said that it is important to set the timing so that it arrives considerably before "the output start timing tr41 of the above-described acceptable sound that precedes the set time" so as to have the property.

  In the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” described above. Unlike the case of "", the "acceptable sound" is not only the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikeen!" But also the second allowable sound output as a message sound such as "press!" Is also output when the timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained so as to straddle the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, the effect display device 1600 determines which of the plurality of operation units (the operation buttons 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) of the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that the mimic image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (at timings tr41 to tr42), it becomes possible to recognize the operation means. Operation becomes easier. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation target” When the operation button 410 is set as an operation target, a message sound such as "press!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword decoration 5001 is set as the operation target. In such a case, a message sound such as "Please sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the output of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is started at the same time. May be sequentially set to the output state. In this case, output of only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started from a state in which the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the “first allowable sound” is adopted as an effect sound output only for a relatively short time, and the “second allowable sound” is used. Is adopted as the production sound output over a relatively long time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) and (h), the output states of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” are maintained over different periods of time, It is desirable that the timings at which the state is ended (the timings at which the state is made inaudible) be different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time remains until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the “acceptable sound” is in. It is expected that it will be difficult for the user to frequently perform the effect by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation, contrary to the player's intention.
A first situation in which both the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” maintain the output state. • One of the output states of the “first permissible sound” and the “second permissible sound” is maintained. However, the other is in the output state (inaudible state). The second situation: Both the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” have ended the output state. Third situation (inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 390 and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” in the effect example illustrated in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, “Pikeen!”) Is output as the “first allowable sound”. That is, in this case, the message sound (the second allowable sound) among the acceptable sounds is output as an effect sound that is not output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, but the sound effect (the effective sound) (the acceptable sound) is not output. The first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, so that the “sound of BGM reproduction” is suppressed. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is permitted (first allowable sound), while maintaining the effect of the effect suitably (second allowable sound).

  Note that timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) when the acceptable sounds (first allowable sounds and second allowable sounds) are output prior to the set time (valid period) or the mimic image display. May be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be the time of two or more frames. That is, if it is possible to output a set time (valid period) or a mimic image display at least a little earlier, the player will be in a state where the effect reception is permitted, and Is likely to be recognized earlier by the preceding time.Therefore, the time until the set time ends and the timing when the automatic button function is activated are set. It is expected to prevent the user from forgetting to perform the operation within the period until the arrival.

  By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by activating the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (valid period). It is. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 (c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (c), the acceptable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is different. When an effect is received while the effect is received, the output state is terminated based on the effect being received. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) is interrupted at that point, and the state where the effect acceptance is allowed (see FIG. Since it is possible to recognize that the validity period has ended, "a state in which the effect reception has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which an operation opportunity can be lost)" Can be avoided from being misunderstood. In addition, when the operation is performed at a timing earlier than the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period) and the effect is received, the effect is produced at the time when the effect is received. Since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended, it goes without saying that the automatic button function is not activated even when the timing tr42A arrives.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, if an effect is received within a set time (valid period) (in the figure, timing tr42a), the effect display device 1600 (after the operation corresponding to the effect reception) is displayed. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period), at the specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to being rendered invisible (not visually recognizable), the effect sound output after the operation (effect sound) is maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 391, the effect sound output (effect sound) after operation is “BGM playback sound” regardless of the timing of effect reception at any time within the set time (valid period). Is desirably set so as to maintain the output state at the point in time when the timing tr44 at which the “” returns from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed mode arrives. On the other hand, in the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display), in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 391, the output state is ended at the timing tr44 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the output in the non-suppression mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the return of the “BGM reproduction sound” to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the switching of the content related to the display effect occur. It is expected to be greatly changed and to enhance the entertainment interest. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a method such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressed mode. In the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of the timing tr44.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) is set arrives, the effect display device 1600 switches the operation means set as the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A simulated image is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses is displayed. In this regard, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode, in consideration of the fact that a message sound (for example, “press!”) Is output as the second allowable sound, the non-automatic reception mode is also performed in the effect display device 1600. A message display (for example, “press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed by the user is displayed. As a display method of the mimic image, the gauge display, and the message display, for example, the methods shown in FIG. 206 (Z3) and FIG. 220 (R2) can be adopted. The gauge display and the message display) are not displayed (both are not displayed at the same timing) at a stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the effect reception being generated. The message display does not necessarily have to completely match the content of the message sound, and may be any message that prompts an operation.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i), before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period). , The output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), while the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. After the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. The display state may be maintained thereafter. Note that the set time (valid period) is ended when the effect is received, and in fact, it ends at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated comes. Therefore, the “timing tr43 at which the set time ends” strictly means the timing that ends when the set time is assumed to have continued, and the time set at the timing tr42. This is the timing that arrives after the lapse of the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect is received by detecting the operation of the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation object prompted by the message display. It is possible to indicate to the player that the situation is not the same. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is operated by mistake, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in both the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 390) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391), the operation reception effect Within the set time (valid period), a remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state in which the effect reception is allowed is completed can be performed. In the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 390), the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when this time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391), when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, the effect is not allowed even if the set time has not yet elapsed after the arrival of the specific timing tr42A. Therefore, if the “remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the state where the effect reception is permitted” is performed within the set time of such an operation reception effect (FIG. 391), it is normal. It is conceivable that the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 391), the effect reception is permitted after the specific timing tr42A has arrived. Despite the disappearance, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. It is displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so that the gauge amount also becomes “0”. However, here, the effect is not always permitted before the set time becomes “0”, so that the effect is not permitted when the gauge amount remains. State.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is left to be left, so that the player's intention On the other hand, it is possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity", so that in the next set time (valid period), the operation can be performed at an early stage regardless of the remaining gauge. Can be encouraged.

  Moreover, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 391) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception occurs due to the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the end of the set time (see FIG. 391). Gauge display) can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not elapsed, and at least the setting is not performed. Until the time has elapsed, the “dynamic display mode in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases” is maintained.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which the effect has been accepted by detecting the operation of the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or the message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is operated by mistake, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. Case ". That is, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operating means is to be operated after a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect generated at the timing tr32 in FIG. 390, there is no “case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. It is desirable to set a relatively short time, such as 3 seconds, as the setting time. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated may be set later than the timing at which three seconds have elapsed since the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the intention of the player. It is desirable to suppress occurrence of a situation in which opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation accepting effect generated at the timing tr42 in FIG. 391, when the operation means on the side which is not the operation target is operated, the side which is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state is maintained. It is desirable that an effect is received and an effect is performed after the operation, even if the operation means of (1) is operated. In other words, if a situation in which the effect is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means appears, the player may be confused, and in such a situation, the erroneous operation state may be interrupted and the appropriate Since it is difficult to further demand the operation of the operation means on the side, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, the effect will be accepted when the operation means on the operation target side is operated It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 391, it is possible to appropriately adopt the items described in the above-described “operation sound output processing under suppression (FIG. 178)” and other examples thereof. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 391 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception production, when the operation opportunity is given, the effect sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence, so that the production performance becomes poor compared to the non-suppression operation reception production. Is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the acceptable sound output when the suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is made smaller than the acceptable sound output when the non-inhibition operation acceptance effect is generated. The sound can be output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) having different times during which the output state is maintained are set as the first allowable sound. Any of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 390 (c) and (g) and FIGS. 391 (c) and (g), and the “time maintained in the output state”. Is set as the shortest form of the above-mentioned plural forms. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol appearing when the symbol change is stopped differs depending on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

  In addition, "which one of a plurality of modes is to be output as the first allowable sound" and "which one of the plurality of operation means is used as the operation target" are obtained as separate determination results in the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. Alternatively, it may be obtained as a single determination result within the above-mentioned announcement effect determination. However, regarding at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first permission is allowed regardless of whether the “operation button 410” is the operation target or the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. Also in the second mode and the third mode, selection is possible regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is to be operated or the "sword decoration 5001" is to be operated. You may do so.

  FIG. 392 is a time chart illustrating an example of the effect contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 392, the effect example is basically the same as the above-described effect example described with reference to FIG. Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the announcement effect determination, at the timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in the second mode longer than the first mode. Here, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

  According to such a configuration, the output state of the acceptable sound output when the suppression operation accepting effect is generated is longer than the acceptable sound output (first mode) output when the non-suppressing operation accepting effect is generated. Since it is possible to output the sound as a maintained sound, even when the “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state when an operation opportunity is given, the effect is preferably maintained. Will be able to

  In addition, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, the first allowable sound output in the second mode may be a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect illustrated in FIG. 390. It is desirable to do.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, there are “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the announcement effect determination. In this case, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is to be operated. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same mode (for example, “press!”) As in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment outputs the first allowable sound in the second mode as shown in FIGS. 392 (c) and (g). Also, by ending the output state of the first allowable sound (non-audible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also provided in this production example. It is possible to estimate how much time remains until the timing tr42A to be activated arrives from the output state of the acceptable sound.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” output in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 391 is terminated. By confirming this, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time remains until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, as compared with the case of the effect example in FIG. 391. become. Further, by outputting only the first permissible sound out of the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound in a longer mode (second mode), the player side firstly outputs the first permissible sound that is commonly used. 2 Based on the timing at which the output state of the permissible sound ends, the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" is estimated, and the first permissible sound is determined based on the normal estimation. Since it is possible to make a more detailed guesswork in a challenging manner by using the game, it is expected that the gaming entertainment is appropriately maintained.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 392, other items are the same as those in the effect example shown in FIG. 391. For example, when an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output is performed. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG.

  When the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392) occurs in the state where the “special effect mode” is set, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's intention, even if the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the message display will be displayed. It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing at which the effect is received or the timing delayed by the time described above). At this time, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive in the output state when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. When it is performed, it is desirable to function so as to arrive in the output state and end the first allowable sound output in the second mode halfway.

  In addition, the case where the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable reception sound) is output in the first mode and the case where the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable reception sound) is output in the second mode are as follows. In addition, not only the time during which the output state is maintained may be different from each other, but also different effect sounds may be used. For example, when the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable sound) is output in the first mode, an effect sound such as “Pikine” is output, and the first allowable sound (effect sound as the acceptable sound) is output as the second sound. In the case of outputting in an aspect, it is possible to output a production sound such as “gaogao”.

  In the above description example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as “a fluctuation pattern in which even the reach state is not formed”. However, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as a “variation pattern in which symbols are stopped without being in the SP reach state”. The effect example shown in FIG. 390 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns.

  In addition, it is desirable that the “suppression / automatic reception effect” exemplified in the above-described example cannot appear in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) in the normal gaming state. The “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in the explanation example can also appear in the high expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) including the “specific fluctuation pattern” in the normal gaming state. . In other words, even if the pattern is a high expected fluctuation pattern (a production pattern corresponding to the low expected fluctuation pattern), the non-reach state or the like is basically in a period before the stage of the SP reach state. 390, the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in FIG. 390 can also appear during the period. Even in such a configuration, when “suppression / automatic reception effect” appears (high expected fluctuation pattern), when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears (low expected fluctuation pattern or high expected fluctuation pattern). It can be said that the ratio (expectation) at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than that of the pattern change.

  In the low expected fluctuation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to) generated during the normal gaming state, “BGM playback (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in silence at the time of giving an operation opportunity. It is preferable that the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. This is the case where the “special effect mode” is not set, or the case where the “special effect mode” is not mounted as the pachinko machine 1.

  The length of time from "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated" to "timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the effect is accepted" is set to the minimum time (unit of control (processing)). For example, it may be one frame) or two or more frames. For example, the message display is visible at “the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated”, and such a visible state is at least “the timing tr43 at which the set time elapses after the effect reception is permitted”. If it continues until it arrives, it is possible to suggest the original length as the set time (valid period), and it is possible to recognize that the player has not performed the operation. Will be able to In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is displayed for “timing at which the automatic button function is activated” within a set time. It is desirable to output in the relationship described above (see FIGS. 391 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 392 (h) and (i)).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 391 (i) and FIG. 392 (i), “the time for which the message display is left after the effect is received (in the example in the figure, the timing tr42A to tr43 )) Also appears when an effect is received at another timing (FIG. 390 (e), FIG. 391 (e), etc.) due to the sharing of the program. By using the above program, it may be generated only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a in the example shown in FIG. 390 (e), and the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a in the example shown in FIG. 391 (e). Become.

  Further, in the above description examples (FIGS. 390 to 392), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect) using the speaker (second effect member). And the sound) are started at the same time, but a post-operation effect may be performed so as to shift the start time of these effects. For example, in a situation where the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (second production member) is started at timing tr42, the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) is performed on the production display device 1600 (first production member). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed yet, and the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display) is displayed according to the timing at which the operation-related display shown in FIGS. If started, the switching of the display effect can be performed smoothly.

  As described in the above-described “suppressed operation sound output processing (FIG. 178)”, in the example of the effects shown in FIGS. An effect (for example, the above-described “specific operation-related effect” or the like) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable that a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation of a big hit symbol be prepared as the precursor effect, and the precursor effect be performed in any one of the modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect sound output during the period in which the precursor effect is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the precursor effect sound depends on the execution mode of the precursor effect. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first allowable sound, the first mode and the second mode are displayed while a mimic image to be operated, a gauge display indicating the remaining time, and a message display of “press!” Are displayed. It is output in one of a plurality of modes including the mode.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 occurs, the specific sound (second sound) which is not output when the operation reception effect shown in FIG. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound of the aspect can be output as the permissible reception sound, it is possible to appropriately suppress the poor performance when the suppression operation reception production occurs. Will be able to Further, by confirming the type of the acceptable sound, it is possible to recognize that the operation accepting effect is occurring in the automatic accepting mode instead of the non-automatic accepting mode.

  Also, regarding the acceptable sound of the non-suppression operation accepting effect (FIG. 390), the first acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and the second acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output. On the other hand, as to the permissible sounds of the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output. Both of the two allowable sounds are output. Thereby, it is possible to suitably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in the non-suppression operation reception effect (FIG. 390) and the suppression operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 391). ) And a case where a different effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 390 and 392).

  That is, if a reception-permissible sound different from the normal state is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the effect reception is in a permissible state, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second permissible sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not output during normal times, while the first permissible sound (effect sound) is output as a sound that is also output during normal times. It is desirable. Then, while the acceptable sound is output in such a mode, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a production sound (second mode) which is not normally output at a predetermined probability. If the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit symbol is made higher than when it is output in the first mode, the "BGM playback (specification) In this case, it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance when the "type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a state where no sound is output. In order to obtain such an effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the notice effect determination. It is desirable that the ratio for determining that the second mode should be output is higher than the ratio for determining that the second mode is output.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 390) but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode (FIGS. 391 and 392). However, at the time of the occurrence, the effect reception is automatically permitted by forgetting to operate, since the reception of the effect has been permitted or a reception allowable sound indicating that the effect of the effect reception has been permitted may be output. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user's own operation opportunity is lost as a result.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within the set time (valid period). It is determined that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the effect reception corresponding to the operation detection being performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the effect after the operation within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. It is possible to make automatic buttons without differentiating the flow of the subsequent production from when there is no

  In the above-described production example, a message sound (second allowable sound) urging the user to perform an operation may be output as a reception allowable sound. If the message sound (second allowable sound) is not operated, It is not output in the "operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode" where the effect is not received, but can be output only in the "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" where the effect is received without operation. I have.

  That is, only in the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) directly expressing the effect of the operation is output, or various types of reception allowable sounds (first allowable sound, Although it may be considered to output the second allowable sound), in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk of being executed in a mode of low expectation, so that the post-operation effect is performed. The operation is not always good in improving the entertainment interest of the game. In this regard, the “operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode” is an effect in which it is permissible to make a selection such as “do not intentionally generate an effect after the operation”. Is not directly expressed as a message (second permissible sound), the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, and there is no right to select whether or not to produce a post-operation effect. It is desirable to output a message sound (second allowable sound) only in the “operation reception effect performed in the mode” or to output more types of reception allowable sound. In the “operation reception effect performed in the non-automatic reception mode”, if the set time ends without the effect reception being performed, the post-operation effect and effects related to this will not be performed. The production will progress without suggesting the degree. In the non-motion reception effect, no message sound is output in any of the operation reception effects, but in the “operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode”, the type of the message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes (“press!” Or “sword!”) Are prepared as message sounds (second permissible sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 are provided. In the example, depending on whether the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (based on the result of the announcement effect determination), any one of the plurality of modes is selectively selected. Output. In this case, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the corresponding message sound (“press!”) Is output, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It is suggested that “the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped” in the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, as compared with the case where the message sound (“sword sword!”) Corresponding to the effect is output. The ratio (expectation) at which the effect mode appears is set to be low. The ratio (expected degree) in which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not a sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal gaming state, the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received in the operation accepting effect in which the message sound is not output indicates that "the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped". The ratio (expectation) at which the effect form appears is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is received in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output. “The big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped. Is lower than the ratio (expected degree) in which the production mode suggesting "appears." In addition, the ratio (expected degree) in which the above-mentioned effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether a message sound (second allowable sound) is output" is a branch point for knowing the degree of expectation, and the message sound ( When the (second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the degree of expectation depending on the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, when the message sound (the second allowable sound) is output, the post-operation effect can be enjoyed under relatively high expectation. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the automatic reception mode so as to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked. On the other hand, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is not output, the degree of expectation becomes relatively low, and the “sword decoration 5001” used only when the degree of expectation is high becomes the operation target. Is gone. That is, in this case, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, so that the player has a selection right as to whether to generate the post-operation effect.

  In the operation reception effect performed in FIGS. 391 and 392, when a set time (valid period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 391 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 392 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (valid period) The output state is ended (inaudible state) before tr42A, whereas the display state of the message display is maintained even at the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. Further, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (not visible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time is ended comes. That is, in this case, when an effect is received by the operation of the player within the set time, the message display may be hidden at a stage where the set time has not elapsed according to the effect reception, but within the set time, When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“press!” Or “sword!”) Is continuously displayed at least until the set time ends.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (non-audible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect is received by detecting the operation of the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation object prompted by the message display. It is possible to indicate to the player that the situation is not the same. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is operated by mistake, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is activated (FIGS. 391 and 392), when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function at timing tr42A, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display). Will be left behind, so that it is possible to indicate that there is a risk of "losing the operation opportunity" contrary to the intention of the player, and by this, During the set time (valid period), it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the remaining amount of the gauge.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is activated (FIGS. 391 and 392), when an effect is received due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. Dynamic display is continued until the time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is no situation in which the effect has been accepted by the operation detection of the operation target prompted to be operated by the message sound or the message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side not prompted to operate by the message sound or the message display is operated by mistake, it is suggested that the effect reception due to the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, the same operation sound (the first allowable sound in the first mode) is output as the allowable operation sound in the operation reception effect illustrated in FIG. 390 and the operation reception effect illustrated in FIG. 391. Even if the operation reception effect of the operation is generated, it is possible to appropriately transmit to the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 391, the second permissible sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 is also output, so which of these operation reception effects is generated Can be recognized. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode in the specific variation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to), the ratio of execution in the mode illustrated in FIG. 391 is relatively high, and FIG. The ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392 is relatively low, and the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 392 is relatively high when stopped in the big hit symbol. That is, in this case, the first allowable sound is not the “first mode” and the “second mode” which is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, as compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the effect sound (the first allowable sound) in which the output state is maintained for a long time is maintained. 392), it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance when the "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. become able to.

  In addition, in the effect examples (suppression operation reception effect) illustrated in FIGS. 391 and 392, the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time. , The same allowable reception sound (first allowable sound in the first mode) as when the non-suppressing operation reception effect (FIG. 390) occurs. Then, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the effect sound (first state) in which the output state is maintained only for a short time A new effect is added by increasing the rate at which symbols are stopped at the big hit symbol than when the first permissible sound is output in the mode (FIG. 391). Thereby, while making it possible to recognize that the effect reception is permitted, it is possible to enhance the effect when the "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 390 to 392, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 392), the first allowable sound is output. If an effect is received during a period in which a sound is being output, this is set to a non-output (non-audible) state even during the output stage (see FIG. 392 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in the effect sound (first mode) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 390 and 391), the first allowable sound is output as the “suppression operation accepting effect. Or "operation reception effect performed in the automatic reception mode" (FIG. 391), and if an effect is received during the output, this is not output (non-audible) at that time. (See FIGS. 390 (c) and 391 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, even if an effect is received when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first allowable sound is in the output state also during the period of the timings tr41 to tr42, but during this period, the effect is not accepted even if the operation is detected. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppression operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the “BGM reproduction (the effect sound of the specific type)”, so that the post-operation effect is missed. If the possibility is relatively high and the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect may not be generated. Therefore, when these operation reception effects occur, it is assumed that some players hit repeatedly before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, there is a concern that it is difficult to understand whether the effect has occurred as an effect after the operation or a notice effect unrelated to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 390). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to make continuous hits. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize which of the above is output (output is stopped at an intermediate stage).

  In addition, even when the effect is received by the player's operation within the set time, the message display is not displayed within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. May be continuously displayed until the end of the operation, or the dynamic display may be continued until the end of the remaining time display (gauge display) within the set time (see the above description). And shared programs).

  In addition, as described above, in the post-operation effect, there is usually an effect risk that is executed in a mode of low expectation, so that the operation to perform the post-operation effect is performed in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. It is not always good. In this regard, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 390, if the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output only for a time sufficient to indicate that the effect reception has been permitted, it is relatively early. By using the mode (the first mode) that is ended at the first time, “time for determining whether or not to generate the effect reception” is created while the reception-permitted sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), there is no need to create such time, so that the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) may be output in a longer mode (second mode) to suggest that the degree of expectation differs depending on the mode. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable sound for a relatively long period of time, it is possible to indicate that the automatic button function is not yet activated, and there is a sense of security. Among them, the operation by the player can be encouraged.

  In the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391 and 392), the automatic button function is enabled even in the case of outputting the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 392). Before the timing tr42A arrives, the acceptable sound (the first acceptable sound) is set to a non-audible state, and the two acceptable sounds (the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound) are changed at different timings. I try to end it.

  As a result, it is possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptable sound (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. In the non-audible state, it is possible to indicate that the automatic button function is about to be activated if not operated quickly. In this case, in at least the longer-side mode (second mode) and the second allowable sound mode in which the output state is maintained longer than the first allowable mode of the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound are changed with time. It is desirable to change at least one of them in order to easily recognize how much time has passed.

  In the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 391 and 392, when an operation opportunity is given, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, whereby an after-operation effect is generated. In such a case, a stunning sound effect corresponding to the sound will be heard. In this regard, regarding the acceptable sound output when the suppression operation accepting effect is generated, if the effect accepting is performed while the accepting acceptable sound is in the output state, the effect based on the effect accepting is performed. Since the output state is terminated, the effect sound corresponding to the effect after the operation can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable sound.

  In the example of the above-mentioned effect, when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, even if an effect is received when the acceptable sound is in the output state, the output state is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained. And However, instead of this, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” has a relatively high degree of expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state in the (highly expected variation pattern) (effect pattern corresponding to). Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the effect, the effect is produced when the acceptable sound (even if the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the first allowable sound) is in the output state. This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, the case where the “suppression / automatic reception effect” has occurred has been described. In such a case, the production progress may be made in the same manner when the “non-suppression / automatic reception effect” or the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs.

  In addition, when a high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (FIG. 391) or the second mode (FIG. 392) can be output as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped is higher than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and it is possible to recognize the set time (effective It is possible to more appropriately maintain the entertainment interest within the period).

  At this time, in the third mode, it is desirable that the output state be maintained until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated comes. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the required time, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so that it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension within a set time (valid period) in which effect reception is allowed. Become Other items when the third mode is output, such as a point that the effect is received when the third mode is in the output state and the effect is received, are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. is there.

  It should be noted that the automatic button function may be always activated when the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) a specific fluctuation pattern arrives, or may be activated when a big hit is obtained. It is activated when the timing tr42A in the pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, when the timing tr42A in the specific fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives. It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within a set time (valid period). (Allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when a set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, the number of allowable reception sounds is “0” and the number of reception allowable sounds is “1” (first allowable sound). ) And the case where the number of acceptable sounds is “2” (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound), which indicates the degree to which the pachinko machine 1 “prompts the operation”. Will be able to

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the timing of hiding the display may be adopted.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 391 and FIG. 392, “BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state in a period from timing tr40 to tr44. The output state (e.g., the reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment has ended) may be performed. That is, in this case, at timing tr44, "BGM reproduction (specific-type effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and put into an output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, as described above, as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change) is obtained. If a particular variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as a performance determination (such as a preliminary determination), if the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, the effect is accepted. The operation reception production (valid period) for which
-"Suppression reception effect (FIG. 391 (a), (b)") which sets a set time during which the effect reception is permitted while "BGM reproduction sound" according to the fluctuation pattern is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. And FIGS. 392 (a) and (b))), and no operation is detected for the operation means set as the operation target within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the effect reception is permitted. Even if it is the case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is performed based on the effect reception. Is started (see FIG. 391 (j) and FIG. 392 (j))
To be executed as “suppression / automatic reception effect”.

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (notification effect determination), the sound effect (first allowable sound) out of the acceptable sounds may be output in any of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) among the allowable reception sounds is to be output as “press!” Or “put the sword!”, And the reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound) is determined according to the determination result. As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are output (FIGS. 391 and 392). Also, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and “put a sword!” As the second allowable sound. Is output, the degree of expectation is higher than when "press!" Is output. At this time, as the order of the high degree of expectation, "second mode & sword!", "Second mode & sword!", "First mode & sword!", "First mode & sword!" It is desirable to maintain the gaming interest when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  As described above, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to the above-described effect example, the first allowable sound is in an output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound. Sometimes, when an effect is received, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 391 and 392). Regarding the second permissible sound, regardless of whether it is output by "press!" Was interrupted.

  However, instead of this, if an effect is received while the first permissible sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode of the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the effect being received. When the effect is accepted when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without terminating the output state. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted halfway, and even if the expected degree cannot be recognized, the first aspect having the lowest expected degree among the plurality of aspects. Since it is possible to recognize that it is not the case, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest will be suppressed. In addition, even when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears in the post-operation effect, if the output state of the first allowable sound having the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation effect is displayed. In the first place, by re-recognizing that the effect state is unlikely to have an expectation, it becomes easy to accept the result that appears as the effect after the operation, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is prevented from remarkably decreasing.

  Even when such a modification is adopted, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined fluctuation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 390. The case where the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output in the second mode within the specific fluctuation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 392. That is, among the above-described production examples, the “production style shown in FIG. 391” when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the “suppression / automatic reception production” appearing in a specific fluctuation pattern is shown in FIG. 393).

  As shown in FIG. 393, the “producing mode shown in FIG. 393” is basically the same as the content described in “producing mode shown in FIG. 391” or the content described in another example thereof. is there. However, in the effect mode shown in FIG. 393, even if an effect is received at the timing tr42a in which the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted with the effect of the effect reception. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs within the specific fluctuation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode having the lowest expectation among the multiple modes (for example, , The second mode) (for example, FIG. 392 (c)), when an effect is received at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception as described above.

  According to such a configuration, when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs in a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. Even if this is done, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by confirming whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is terminated with this as a trigger. In particular, in this effect example (FIG. 391, FIG. 393, etc.), the first allowable sound is output in such a manner as to cross the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (valid period) from the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first allowable sound is not interrupted from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42 regardless of the mode, the first allowable sound is set as the first allowable sound. Can be made to function as a time for "discriminating" which mode is.

  In this regard, in the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared as that in which the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. And Thereby, even when the post-operation effect is started while the first permissible sound is being output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are not generated. The time during which each output state overlaps can be shortened, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 393, the first permissible sound output in the first mode can be output also in the effect example shown in FIG. 390 (see FIG. 390 (c)). Also, in the effect example, the output is not interrupted by the effect reception, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the presentation reception appears, the presentation can be provided as a presentation that does not cause discomfort.

  However, if an effect is received while the second allowable sound is in the output state, no matter which mode is output as the first allowable sound, it is determined based on the fact that the effect is received. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 392 (d) and 393 (d)). That is, in this case, the first allowable sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect is received early, whereas the second allowable sound has the effect that the effect has been received by operation detection ( The automatic button function may provide a function to indicate whether or not the operation opportunity may be lost), and by giving these different functions to the reception-permissible sound, when an operation reception effect occurs Can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, the acceptable sound output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 390 is generated may be always output in the first mode, or may be output in a special mode. However, even if an effect is received when output is performed in a special mode, it is desirable to maintain the output state without ending the output state. In addition, when outputting in the special mode, it is desirable that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol stops is higher than in the case of outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be performed in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390, the “BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)” maintains the output state in a non-suppressed manner, and the problem such as the poor performance is exhibited. Since there is no such effect, it can be said that it is more desirable that the mode as the first allowable sound can be confirmed even in the situation where the post-operation effect has been started, and that the degree of expectation can be recognized.

  In addition, in the "suppression operation accepting effect to give an operation opportunity while the specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state", the specific type of production sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner even in the non-audible state.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, in the pachinko machine 1, “suppression that an operation opportunity is given in a state in which the effect sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode, in silence, or in a non-output state” In the operation reception effect (FIGS. 391 to 393), the reception allowable sound output when the set time (valid period) is generated is set to one of “a plurality of modes in which the length of time maintained as an output state is different”. , Output is possible in a non-suppression mode, and the degree of expectation (the ratio of appearance of a big hit symbol) differs depending on the output mode. In this regard, also in the “non-suppression operation accepting effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in an uninhibited mode”, the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is also used. In addition to the case where the output is performed in the non-suppression mode in the first mode (FIG. 390), the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) in a mode different from the first mode (different length, effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output in a non-suppressed mode, and the degree of expectation (the ratio at which a big hit symbol appears) may be changed depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, the acceptable sound output when the “non-suppression operation reception effect” occurs and the acceptable sound output when the “suppression operation reception effect” occurs are both “output state”. It is possible to output in any one of a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different, and further, since the degree of expectation differs depending on the output mode, the “non-suppression operation accepting effect” In both of the “suppression operation reception effect” and the “suppression operation reception effect”, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment until the effect reception is performed.

  FIG. 394 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when a “non-suppression operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 394, in this effect example as well, the parts that are not specifically noted are basically the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 390. However, in the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, at the time of occurrence, an effect determination as to which of the plurality of modes to output the first permissible sound (for example, at the start of symbol variation) 394 (c) and (g), as a result of the effect determination, not the “first mode” but the “specific mode”. Is assumed, and the effect is such that the rate of appearance of the big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped is higher than that in the case of the output in the “first mode”. The specific mode is output for a longer time than the first mode.

  Here, in any of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the first allowable sound can be output in the first mode. This is described above (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)). That is, in this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, when the operation reception effect is generated, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated (FIG. 394), the first allowable sound is changed to the second allowable sound when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated. In the case of being output in two modes (FIG. 392), different effect sounds are output as different first allowable sounds over different times. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, the first allowable sound is output for a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time (see FIG. 390 and FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)), the degree of expectation (the ratio of the appearance of the big hit symbol) Indicates that the “first mode” is output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs, or the “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393)”). In this case, when the “first mode” appears when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs, the effect reception is performed. As for the degree of expectation (ratio) suggesting that a big hit symbol appears in the post-operation effect according to the “first mode” when the “suppression / automatic reception effect (FIG. 391 (or FIG. 393))” appears. Direction reception in case The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the degree of expectation in the case where different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound over different times (when the “second mode (FIG. 392)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 394)” appears) ( The ratio of the appearance of the big hit symbol) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of which of “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, one of the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs. The degree of expectation will not always be the same depending on whether or not they are present. Further, even when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the “suppression / non-automatic reception effect” when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound is output. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception production" is suggested.

  That is, in this case, regarding the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the expectations are different from each other even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it can be seen that there is no directing relationship with each other. . However, in practice, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the degree of expectation is set to be the same regardless of the effect sound and the output time, which are different from each other. You will be able to keep secret relationships secretly. For example, when a set time (valid period) in which production acceptance is allowed occurs, the case where “BGM playback” is suppressed and the case where “BGM playback” is not suppressed are usually (the acceptance acceptable sound is the first mode). In this case, when the effect is received, a different post-operation effect (different degree of expectation) is started, so that the effects appear to have no direct relation to each other. However, when the acceptable sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation performed when the effect is received while the effect that appears differently depending on whether “BGM playback” is suppressed or not is performed. It is expected to provide a surprising staging performance by giving the staging relationship a secret, such as allowing the same content (same degree of expectation) to appear as the post staging.

  In this case, in both the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” and the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first allowable sound. Is desirably set as the mode in which the output time is shortest among the plurality of modes regardless of the operation reception effect. Further, the “second mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated, and The “specific mode” as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” is generated. Are desirably different (for example, “the output time of the specific mode” <“the output time of the second mode”) in order to make it appear that there is no direct relation between them.

  In the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”, even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated at an intermediate stage regardless of whether the effect is received. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” with relatively low expectation is executed. In the situation where the first permissible sound is output in the “specific mode” that raises to the same expected level as the “suppression / automatic reception effect” with relatively high expectation, this is overlooked. It is possible to eliminate the possibility of the situation. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted when the effect is received in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393.

  In the above-described effect example, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” (FIG. 392), the first allowable sound is used in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. Expectations are the same when the specific mode is output (FIG. 394). However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first allowable sound for a longer time than in the “first mode (FIG. 391)” or the “second mode (FIG. 392)”. When the “third aspect” is enabled to be output, the “third aspect” is output instead of the “second aspect” as the first allowable sound in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, The setting is made such that the degree of expectation is the same as in the case where “specific mode” is output as the first allowable sound in “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect”. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 394, when an effect is received within a set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed as an after-operation effect according to the effect reception. At least a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in the state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) are performed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the length of the “time when the acceptable sound is output” is not the length of the “time when the sound data of the acceptable sound is allocated to the channel”, but the “long time”. It means the length of time required to be output as an audible sound.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, in order to make the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression / automatic reception production” appear to have no directing relationship with each other, the “second aspect” or the “third aspect” Regarding the “mode”, it is assumed that only “suppression / automatic reception effect” of “suppression / automatic reception effect” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” can be output. It is desirable to make it possible to output only with "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" among "automatic reception effect" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect". When the “second aspect” and the “third aspect” are prepared as output candidates in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, respectively, the “suppression / automatic reception effect” and the unique permissible sound (second Even if the third aspect) is output, the "unsuppressed / non-automatic reception effect" does not always have the same degree of expectation as when the unique acceptable sound (specific mode) is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the rendition as an acceptable reception sound that is output when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is generated.

  In addition, the non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (timing tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect relating to the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). As described above, an effect related to an expected change pattern (for example, a specific change pattern) may occur during an effect period before the SP reach state is developed.

  By the way, in the above-described effect example, as for the “suppression operation accepting effect” in which the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed, the degree of suppression is relatively low. A plurality of modes including at least a "suppression operation reception effect") and a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or non-output are prepared. Is also good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the sound volume may be set to “0”.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (valid period) in which the effect acceptance is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the effect of how much the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to suitably obtain the above-described operational effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It is desirable to make the (ratio of big hit symbols appear) different. Note that, here, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the degree of expectation (proportion) that suggests that a big hit symbol appears in “post-operation effect according to the effect reception” is “ When the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” has occurred, the degree of expectation (ratio) indicating that a big hit symbol appears in the “post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception” is lower. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  As for the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and even a reach state are not formed (or The reach state can be formed, but does not evolve to SP reach). The effect according to the low expectation variation pattern can be made to appear in any one of the effects described in “Strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect). )) May not be generated in the low expected effect pattern, but may be generated as an effect according to the high expected fluctuation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs is the degree of expectation when the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” occurs. It can be said that it is lower than degree.

  In order to more suitably obtain the above-described effects, it is possible to generate a “special effect state” that can be shifted based on the satisfaction of the special effect condition. Each time an effect is received during a set time (valid period) during which an operation prompting image (a simulation image, a gauge display, or the like) for prompting an operation is displayed, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, the effect sound of a specific type (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed every time a set time (effective period) in which effect acceptance is allowed occurs. Can be provided, and in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation direction, the degree of expectation is also suggested by such degree of production (how much is suppressed) As a result, it is expected to further improve the entertainment interest when the effect reception is permitted.

  In addition, an effect pattern (for example, a high expected change) in which “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be sequentially executed within the symbol change An effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern among patterns may be prepared. In other words, in this case, even if the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” on the side with a relatively low expectation occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation on the side) with a relatively high expectation level occurs. Reception effect) ”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is low (weak suppression mode). Will be able to

Further, in order to more appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, the production determination Regardless of which result is obtained as the (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific fluctuation pattern occurs when the effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, whereas “weak suppression mode (first suppression) Operation reception production))
-Even if the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if no special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination), even if the effect of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, it does not occur. It is assumed that when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination), the effect occurs when the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs in the effect according to the specific change pattern, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” in the effect according to the specific change pattern. When the effect is received in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”, the rate at which the post-operation effect is executed in a high expectation mode is higher than when the “” does not occur. Is desirable.

  In such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” always occurs, whereas the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”. Does not always occur, and when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, the post-operation effect with a high expectation in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” Is executed, the attention can be focused on whether or not the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, and the “weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the “first suppression operation reception effect”) occurs.

  FIGS. 395 to 397 show “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) in effects corresponding to high expected fluctuation patterns (for example, specific fluctuation patterns). )) Are time charts showing an example of an effect in the case where ")" occur sequentially. FIG. 395 shows an example of an effect in the case where an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (valid period) occurs. FIG. 396 shows a comparison after the set time (valid period) occurs. FIG. 397 shows an example of an effect when an operation is detected at a late stage, and FIG. 397 shows an example of an effect when an operation is not detected within a set time (valid period).

  Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (suspended digestion) and the determination of the variation pattern, the “specific variation pattern” of the “highly expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)” Is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect determination (such as a preview determination) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. After that, a variation effect of the decorative symbol (such as a rendering effect according to a specific variation pattern or a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific variation pattern) is started, and the effect determination is performed within the execution period of the variation effect. An effect (such as an announcement effect) according to the result of the (announcement determination or the like) is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) of the selected “specific variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the “specific fluctuation pattern”, the effect contents appearing after the timing tr40 (the timing in the SP reach state) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol has arrived. Is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. That is, first, when the timing tr40 comes, regardless of which result has been obtained as the notice effect determination, “a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as a “strongly suppressed state”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern of the decorative pattern) appears while the “strongly suppressed state” appears. When a specific time has elapsed since the start of the variable production, the timing within the SP reach state), the operation reception that allows the reception of the production is allowed regardless of which result is obtained as the preliminary production judgment. An effect (valid period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the “strong suppression mode” appears is referred to as a “second suppression operation reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the “specific change pattern”, when a timing tr51 (a timing before the SP reaches the reach state) at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change effect of the decorative symbol comes, the notice effect determination is performed. On condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception effect (effective period) in which effect reception is allowed is additionally generated with respect to the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the operation reception effect (non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of “effect (strong suppression mode)”, a process of suppressing the volume of “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)” under predetermined conditions can be performed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the effect according to the “specific variation pattern” is being performed, if no special result is obtained as the effect determination (such as the advance notification determination), FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 392 appears, that is, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” does not occur in the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression mode)”. Operation reception effect)) only occurs. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as a performance determination (such as a preview determination), as shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) Reception effect) "first occurs, and thereafter, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 further occurs.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, the effect contents after the timing tr40 has arrived are as described with reference to FIG. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), depending on the result of the effect determination (such as the advance determination), the first allowable sound is not the first mode illustrated in FIGS. 391 and 395 to 397. 392, such as the output in the second mode shown in FIG. 392, and the contents described above with respect to the effects shown in FIG. 391 and other examples and modifications are shown in FIGS. 395 to 397. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the effect contents (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)) after timing tr40 among the effect examples.

  As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, at a timing tr51 (a state in which the decorative pattern changes to an SP reach state), a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect (the effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern). When the timing before the operation is reached), the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
A set time (valid period) during which the effect reception is allowed while the “BGM reproduction sound” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output in a non-suppressed mode is set. When the effect reception is performed, the “conditional suppression reception effect (FIG. 395) changes the“ BGM reproduction sound ”from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low). (Refer to (a) and (b))), and if no operation is performed on the operation means set as the operation target within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the effect reception is allowed, The effect reception is not performed, and as a result, each process (the process of changing the “sound of BGM reproduction” from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode or the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, Sound) The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 397 (a), (b), see (f))"
Executed as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect". As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM playback” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the “sound of BGM playback” is assigned is set in the case of the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume). ) Can be changed to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than “0”).

  According to such “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (first suppression operation reception effect)”, as long as the effect is not received by an operation by the player, “specific type effect sound ( BGM playback sound) is not shifted to the “state in which the BGM playback sound is output in the suppressed mode”, so that it can be seen that the “unsuppressed reception effect” shown in FIGS. 390 and 394 has occurred. Become like That is, in this case, when the player operates, the state changes to “a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppressed mode”, and thus it is recognized for the first time that the effect is not the “suppression-accepted effect”. Because it becomes possible, it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of the game entertainment by the surprising effect.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (eg, notice determination). The variation pattern is set so that it can be selected only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone, etc.), and in the special effect state, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( FIG. 390, FIG. 394) shows a big hit symbol when the symbol change is stopped compared to a normal effect state in which a change pattern that can be generated depending on the result of the effect determination (such as a notice determination) can be selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 390, 394)” appears. As a result, the above-mentioned surprise effect elements can be combined with each other to improve the game entertainment.

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably obtain the above-described operation and effect, the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” can be generated in both the “normal effect state” and the “special effect state”. In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 390, FIG. 394) "and" suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIGS. 391, 392) "can be sequentially generated, and in the" special effect state ", one variation pattern (hit “Conditioned suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception” Effects (FIG. 391, FIG. 392) "occur sequentially. It is desirable that way.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect”, when the set time (valid period) ends without effect reception being performed, the “specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is output in the weak suppression mode ”, and the effect proceeds to the subsequent effects (FIG. 397). That is, in this case, which of "unsuppressed / non-automated reception effect" or "conditional suppression / non-automated reception effect" occurred, and by extension, "normal effect state" and "special effect state" Until it is difficult to recognize which situation it is, since the subsequent production will progress, the expectation is considered to be relatively low side `` While being output in an unsuppressed manner In this case, the operation by the player can be more positively encouraged even when the “operation reception effect (valid period)” occurs.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” occurs and a case where “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( 390) is generated, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the above-mentioned acceptable sound (first allowable sound) for the same time, which also results in "conditional suppression (weakness)". Suppression mode) It is made difficult to recognize which of “non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” has occurred.

In the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, similarly to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs,
When the timing tr50 slightly before the set time occurs, the output of the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
A point in which the second permissible sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (for example, a sound effect) is output; and a set time (valid period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated in the operation accepting effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. Each of the configurations such as the point at which the gauge display is performed is also adopted, and accordingly, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” and “non-suppression / Non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) "is made difficult to recognize. Therefore, as a display method of the mock image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 208 (J2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390)” occurs. It is desirable that the same mode as the effect example shown in FIG. 390 be employed for the timing at which the display images (simulated images, gauge display) are hidden based on the effect reception of the effect. desirable.

  Moreover, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)” according to the present embodiment, the set time (valid time) is also the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. If an effect is received at timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 395 (c) and 396 (c)) in which the “acceptable sound (first allowable sound)” is in the output state after the occurrence of the “period”, the setting is made. While the time (valid period) itself is terminated, the “acceptable allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is not aborted, and is output as the first allowable sound at the same timing (same as when there is no operation). The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 397 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the effect reception is performed by the operation of the player, simply by listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception” Effect (FIGS. 395 to 397) ”or“ non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 390) ”can be made difficult to recognize. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, a state in which the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction sound) is output in the weak suppression mode is set. Since it is necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained each time the effect is received.

  Also, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, if an effect is received within a set time (valid period), timings tr51a and 51b in the figure. ), As post-operation effects according to the reception of the effects, the post-operation display effects (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) using the speaker (second effect member). And at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker maintain the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, even if the effect is received at any timing within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received, in the state where the timing tr52 has not elapsed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound). It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, as for the acceptable sound and the operation-related display appearing in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 395 to 397)”, a different example or a modification from the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. It is desirable to use the same method as each other.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to the specific variation pattern is an effect. A process of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined period of time from the timing of reception.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect is received at a relatively early timing tr51a after the set time (valid period) is generated (FIG. 395), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is not sufficient). The timing tr53a of returning from the relatively low mode to the non-suppressing mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the period in which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppressing mode and the "sound of BGM reproduction" Is set to a relatively long interval (timing tr53a to tr40) with the period in which the is set to the strong suppression mode. On the other hand, when an effect is received at a relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (valid period) has occurred (FIG. 396), the timing at which the “sound of BGM playback” returns from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period in which “BGM playback sound” is in the weak suppression mode and the period in which “BGM playback sound” is in the strong suppression mode. Only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is provided.

  In other words, in this case, as the timing at which the player performs an operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is later (closer to the timing tr52), the period in which the “sound of BGM playback” is set to the weak suppression mode ends and “ The time until the period in which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode is shortened. Thereby, depending on whether the operation performed by the player is early or late in the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is completed arrives relatively early, and continuous It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing of appearance of the strong suppression mode after the weak suppression mode has been completed arrives at a relatively late timing. May not appear ", and thus, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that, in this effect example, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode (a predetermined time) is determined by the effect after operation (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is set to be the same as the execution time, but is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). This is desirable in order to make the post-operation effect stand out when the effect is received. Furthermore, even when the effect is received at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (valid period) of the “first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect)”, the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time during which the “sound of BGM playback” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the end timing comes before the timing tr40 of starting the strong suppression mode. Note that, in this effect example, the time between the timings tr51a to 53a and the time between the timings tr51b to 53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect according to one variation pattern,
A first suppression operation reception effect (a period from timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect) in which a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed at a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode). ), And a second suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (the after-operation effect is ended from timing tr40). Period)
Can be sequentially generated. As described above, the second suppression operation accepting effect is expressed as “a variation pattern that is not executed even though the effect mode (type of acceptable sound, operation target, etc.) may change depending on the result of the effect determination. On the other hand, the first suppression operation accepting effect can be generated on the condition that a special result has been obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination). ing.

  In addition, as described above, the first suppression operation reception production is also performed in the production determination (such as the advance determination) in the production according to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern) that does not generate the second suppression operation reception production. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect occurs, and the first suppression operation reception effect and the first suppression operation reception effect There may be cases where 2 suppression operation acceptance effects are sequentially generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period from “timing when the weak suppression mode is ended” to “timing when the strong suppression mode is started”, the effect reception is accepted in the first suppression operation reception effect. Since it is set as a variable period that is made variable in accordance with the performed timing, after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) ends, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is further performed. It is possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it will occur, and thereby it is possible to improve the game entertainment. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the rate of stopping at the big hit symbol) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs. In the variation pattern that generates the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is performed before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur, the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher expectation (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode) than when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur. Are executed).

  By the way, when an operation accepting effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) occurs, the degree of suppression is high (second suppressing operation receiving effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the mode). However, when the effect sound of a specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed, even if an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether in the strong suppression mode or in the weak suppression mode). In fact, it is difficult to guess, without comparison, whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode). This is especially true when the volume value of the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode is not made so large as to be suppressed, and this is a sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Is appropriately maintained, and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  In this regard, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 395 to 397, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are output when a set time (valid period) in which the effect reception is allowed occurs. The first permissible sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same period of time (in the figure, output in the "first mode"). That is, in this case, even if the first allowable sound is confirmed, it is possible to keep it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether in the strong suppression mode or in the weak suppression mode), This makes it possible to more appropriately maintain a sense of tension in the effect, and to attract more and more players to the effect.

  However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at all, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an effect element that is useful for estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is set within the period from the start of the operation reception effect to the end thereof. We will prepare as follows in a time-series manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a case where the above-described situation in which the first permissible sounds can be output as the same effect sound over the same time (output in the “first mode” in the drawing) appears. Even if there is, based on the first permissible sound, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated does not end in the middle of the output even if the effect is received in the output state, and is output for a predetermined time. On the other hand, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, when the effect reception is performed in the output state, based on the effect reception, The output is terminated prematurely (see FIGS. 395 and 396). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect, and either the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is performed. The first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, while increasing the sense of tension for the production by making it difficult to guess. Due to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the inability to make the guess.

  In addition, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (the second mode, the third mode, or the like) in addition to the first mode. ) Is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first permissible sound is output, the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode can be used even if the effect is not received when the first permissible sound is in the output state. Can be easily estimated, and it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained. However, in order to maintain a sense of tension in the effect, the output in a mode that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated (the second mode, the third mode, or the like) is higher than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to reduce the execution ratio.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the allowable sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound need not always be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation-related display (the display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is also performed by the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation. Since a difference is provided between the operation reception effect and the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears later than the acceptable sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. With such a configuration, a slight difficulty is left in estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, and the sense of tension for the effect is maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is assumed that it is not possible to infer the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptable sound and the operation-related display is finished. In addition, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation reception effect, both of the “effect by the liquid crystal display” and the “effect by the effect sound” are “performed for a certain period of time after the reception of the effect”. On the other hand, in the post-operation production according to the second suppression operation reception production, the “production by the production sound” is “performed for a certain period of time from the reception of the production”. Is an effect that ends when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation reception effect, the time from the end of “the effect by the liquid crystal display” to the end of the “effect by the effect sound” depending on the timing at which the effect was received. Becomes variable, and a large deviation occurs. By confirming such a deviation, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. .

  However, even if the presentation elements useful for estimation are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in a time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the entertainment interest of the game may eventually decline.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of the BGM reproduction is performed based on the effect reception being performed within the set time (valid period). In a mode of weak suppression. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the effect sound of the BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the situation where the set time (valid period) has not yet occurred, and in the strong suppression mode. A set time (valid period) is generated during the operation, and the effect can be received. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timings to be performed differ, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, unlike the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), no operation is detected within the set time (valid period). In such a case, the set time elapses without the effect reception being automatically generated (see FIG. 397). In other words, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (valid period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of the effect for the effect sound of the specific type (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Since it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation, it is possible to recognize that the effect is not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode.

  In the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the strong suppression mode is ended is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as a timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of setting the “BGM playback effect sound” to the weak suppression mode is set to be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  In addition, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above-described effect example, regardless of at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 395 and 396). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received. And the length of the period in which the post-operation production sound output (production sound) by the speaker (the second production member) is performed in parallel (see FIGS. 395 and 396).

  According to such a configuration, a directivity is generated in “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”, so that the game entertainment until the effect reception (operation) is performed can be appropriately maintained. Become.

  Further, in the above configuration, it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect is generated, so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The sound is output as the same production sound over the same time, and the production elements useful for discrimination are prepared so as to be scattered in time series. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest is suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension for the effect.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect having different execution modes of the post-operation effect can be intentionally mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time an operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension as to “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”. In order to obtain such an effect, in addition to the mode in which the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect are mixed in the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern It is desirable that the mode in which only the second suppression operation reception effect (or the first suppression operation reception effect) appears multiple times is executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the action and effect by the rendition of “when the effect reception (operation) is performed”, a specific type of effect in the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect. The output in the non-suppression mode may be maintained without suppressing the sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction).

  Also, regardless of at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) )), The length of the period during which the production sound output (production sound) is performed in parallel with the operation sound is not changed. For operation reception productions, the special result must be obtained in the production judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.). It is desirable that it can not occur as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by confirming the manner of execution of the post-operation effect, it can be inferred that the special result is obtained in the notice effect determination (that the expectation is in a relatively high state). This is different from the fluctuation pattern that always occurs irrespective of the result of the notice effect judgment (the pattern effect), and when it is recognized that the additional operation has been performed, it is expected to improve the game entertainment. Become like Note that, depending on at which timing within the set time (valid period) the effect is received, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member). The second suppression operation reception effect in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is changed, may be generated only as an effect (symbol effect) of the fluctuation pattern itself. Alternatively, both the case where the variation pattern itself occurs as an effect (symbol effect) and the case where the change pattern occurs under the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination) may be made.

  It should be noted that the weak suppression mode in which the “sound of BGM playback” is output with a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode may appear even when no operation opportunity is given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). It may be. That is, in this case, after the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the mode is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. Then, in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, as the number of times that the weak suppression mode appears including the first suppression operation reception effect increases, the suppression degree is further increased before the symbol variation is stopped ( If the second suppression operation accepting effect is further increased), the effect of the effect can be further improved through the state of suppression of “effect sound of BGM reproduction”. Further, when an effect is received within a set time (effective period) that occurs while the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is not set to the suppression mode, “whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (see FIG. The embodiment shown in FIG. 390 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 395) ”can be further added to the directivity.

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the “sound of BGM reproduction” may also be made to appear when no operation opportunity is given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined period of time, the state is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode without providing an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a directing effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated based on the effect reception being performed within the set time (valid period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) was adopted. However, instead of this, even when the first suppression operation reception effect occurs, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” starts before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect occurs. May be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (valid period) during which an effect reception is allowed is generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected, the "BGM playback effect sound" is generated when a predetermined timing comes, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (such as a notice determination). Since the mode is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) or not set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), the range of the effect can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect ends. It is desirable to arrive.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and FIGS. 395 to 397, in the second suppression operation accepting effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM playback effect sound” is strongly suppressed mode (suppression mode or The process of outputting without sound or in a non-output state) is terminated at the same timing as or before the end timing of the post-operation effect, but the end timing of the post-operation effect has come. It may be terminated later. Also, in this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (as long as the symbol change is not stopped), the “BGM playback effect sound” may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. Good.

  As described above, the acceptable sound does not have to be generated a little before the set time (valid period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (valid period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 and FIGS. 395 to 397, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, while the effect sound output (effect sound) after operation by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted. The process is terminated when a certain period of time has elapsed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. The effect may be terminated at a predetermined timing in the effect according to the pattern, or the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) And the effect sound output (operation sound) after the operation by the user may be terminated when a certain period of time has elapsed after the effect was received.

  The effect sound of the specific type to be suppressed (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is the timing at which the effect changes at the start of the design fluctuation or within the effect according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, the SP reach effect is started). Timing, etc.). On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an indefinite timing within the set time (the desired operation).

  The specific variation pattern described in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 391 and 392 and the specific variation pattern described in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397 may be different variation patterns, or may be the same. It may be a fluctuation pattern. The special effect state may be an effect state in which the big hit probability for the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the look-ahead effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the “specific type of effect sound” is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to set the “specific type of production sound” to a non-audible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or non-output (end of channel assignment)). Good.

  Further, in the rendering examples shown in FIGS. 395 to 397, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is set as an operation target and an operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the “first suppression operation reception effect”, the only operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the “second suppression operation reception effect”, see FIGS. 391 and 392. However, as described above, based on the result of the announcement effect determination, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when the sword decoration body 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) ) ". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (the second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that the sword decoration mode is not the weak suppression mode but the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect was received in the case of selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode) and the case of selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode). The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is:
A first operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the part touched by the player when the player operates) does not move when the set time (valid period) occurs; and the driving force is applied when the set time (valid period) occurs. An operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode for moving to a specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” assumes that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” gives an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is "a thing that can give an operation opportunity to a player in a state where it has been moved to a specific position" with reference to FIG. 198 (A3) and the like. As described above. However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a “first operation mode” and a “second operation mode”, and an operation opportunity may be given in any one of those modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
A non-suppressed operation accepting effect in which from the occurrence of a set time (effective period) to the execution of an effect after operation, while the effect sound of a specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed manner, and A suppression operation reception effect is provided in which the effect sound of a specific type (effect sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, or in a non-output state. Further, as the suppression operation reception effect,
A first suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, an effect sound of BGM reproduction) at a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppressing mode) (for example, the above-described “conditional suppression / non-automatic receiving effect”) )), And a second suppression operation accepting effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (eg, BGM playback effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (for example, the above-described “suppression / automatic reception”). Direction ")
Are prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception production,
-While the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (whether it is output in a suppression mode or in silence, or is in a non-output state), the first operation mode is applied to the operation means. (In this case, the suppressed non-movement reception effect to which an operation opportunity with the operation button 410 is given, and the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed in the strongly suppressed mode (the sound is output in the suppressed mode or silence) Or in a non-output state), a movement reception suppression under suppression in which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the state where the sword decoration 5001 is removed) is given to the operation means. By preparing, it is possible to further improve the performance when the operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 398 shows an example of an effect (movement reception under suppression) that appears in the case where the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode) in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect). It is a time chart shown. Note that, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), an example of an effect (a non-movement reception effect under suppression) that appears when “the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” This is as described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 395 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the effect after the operation).

  As shown in FIG. 398, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), also when “the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the second suppression operation reception In the effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), the part that is not particularly marked as “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)” is basically the same (FIGS. 391, 392, (FIGS. 395 to 397), the above-described related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (valid period) occurs. However, there is a problem as to when to perform the processing.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or short-change time short game state), first, as shown in FIG. 398 (c) and (h), Unless the timing tr40 at which the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode does not arrive, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, even if the set time in which the reception of the effect is permitted occurs, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is generated. Is not given, and only the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is given. That is, in this case, as long as the specific type of effect sound (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is not in the strong suppression mode, even if an operation opportunity is given, this is no longer the second operation mode. Can be suppressed from being operated in an operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both the case where the operation is performed and the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player, when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of the BGM playback) is in the strong suppression mode, is triggered by the message “Which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode gives the operation opportunity? , It is possible to suppress an operation error from occurring between them.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is provided until immediately before the operation opportunity is provided, the timing tr40 Tensions and entertainment interests are maintained in a suitable manner from the reception of the effect to the start of the effect after the operation. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (valid period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to the specific position. I am going to let it. Note that, here, when the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol change is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. In such a manner, the announcement effect determination is performed.

  However, in this case, immediately after the set time (valid period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed), the effect reception itself is in a permitted state. Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 398 (c) and (d), the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position is determined by the acceptable sound. The time is set to be shorter than the time until the output of the first mode having the shortest output time in (first allowable sound) is completed. Thereby, even if any mode (the above-described second mode, third mode, etc., in addition to the first mode) is output as the permissible sound (first permissible sound), the effect is received in the middle of the output state. Can be performed (output can be terminated halfway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is unlikely that a stuttering effect will occur.

  Also, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is determined by operating the operation receiving portion with the driving force and moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position. The movement is performed at a higher speed so as to be a shorter time than the time required to move from the position to the original position (see FIG. 398 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it is possible to show a state of making an effort to reduce the time substantially reduced as the set time (effective period), and to play the game due to the reduced time. It is expected that the dissatisfaction of people will be suppressed.

  Further, in order to more appropriately suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the set time (effective period) shown in FIG. The set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) of the mode and the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value having a length that is equal to or greater than "the time required to move the unit from the original position to the specific position". According to such a configuration, in the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that can more than compensate for the substantially reduced time is used. Since the set time (valid period) is generated, the entertainment of the game can be maintained appropriately. In this case, in order to make the program common, a set time having a similar length may be set when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, the effect is not substantially received at the timings tr42A to tr43 after the activation of the automatic button function, and the set time (valid period) is substantially reduced. In view of the above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) in the non-suppression mode illustrated in FIG. ) Or the set time (valid period) of the operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 395, “It is necessary to move the operation receiving unit from the original position to the specific position. A time value having a length equal to or greater than the sum of the "time" and the "time of the timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated" is set. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. Also in this case, in order to share the program, a set time having a similar length is set when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  Further, as described above, in the situation where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode, if there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the same figure is used. 398 (a), (h) to (l), an effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and based on the effect reception, the post-operation display effect on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). (Liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed at least as the operation effect after operation. However, in this case, as apparent from the comparison in FIGS. 398 (g) and (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) is shortened. Therefore, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 398 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the "speed when the operation receiving unit is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "moving from the original position to the specific position." It is intentionally slower than the "speed at the time," so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for the shortened execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), the operation receiving unit is configured to perform the movable effect (post-operation effect). Can be expected to function as a part of the game), so that the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 398 (h), the “movement effect from the specific position to the original position” by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation corresponding to the automatic reception of the effect (automatic button function). Although the process is started when a predetermined timing during the performance of the effect is reached, the process may be started at a timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated, similarly to the post-operation effect.

  However, no matter how slow the “movement from the specific position to the original position” is performed, this alone does not provide enough time for a movable effect, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the entertainment interest in the game. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position), a vibration effect of vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. Accordingly, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or a position near the original position) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving unit is determined by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”. It is designed to function as a movable stage. Thereby, it is possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the “operation receiving unit that has not been operated by the player”, and as a result of the effect reception being automatically generated, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Therefore, it is expected that the performance of the display effect (liquid crystal display) after the operation at the time when the execution time is shortened is appropriately maintained. In this case, if the operation receiving portion is caused to emit light in a state where the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, as for the movable effect period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the “operation receiving portion not operated by the player”, the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. , It is desirable to end the processing before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of the specific type is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, and the progress (switching of the effect) in the effect content corresponding to this can be smoothly promoted.

  Another difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that the second allowable sound (message sound) is a message sound such as “put a sword!”. In some cases, a message display such as “push-in” and a mimic image based on the “sword decoration image SYG” may be displayed as an operation-related display or an operation-related display, so that an operation error is less likely to occur. become.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), no operation opportunity is given in such a second operation mode, but the “specific type of effect sound” is set to the weak suppression mode. If an operation opportunity is given in the first place, an erroneous operation may be promoted when an incorrect recognition of either the weak suppression mode or the strong suppression mode is made. In this regard, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 395 to 397, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is set based on the “specific type of effect sound” in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the fact that the effect has been received without giving it, the useless feeling of tension and expectation that "the operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be given" may be given. It is possible to provide effects without giving them.

  In the effect example (second operation mode), even when an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit within the set time, as in the case where no operation is performed on the operation receiving unit within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (same timing) within a period in which the post-operation effect is being executed arrives, a vibration effect of vibrating the operation receiving unit is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of at which timing the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when a predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. Therefore, it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be ended soon and a new effect progress will appear.

  However, if there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, by starting the vibration effect early based on the effect being received by the operation, during the period during which the post-operation effect is being performed You may make it aim at the further improvement of entertainment interest. That is, in this case, when the operation on the operation receiving unit is performed within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when the operation on the operation receiving unit is not performed within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, if the effect reception is permitted when the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is not suppressed. , Or when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode, the rate of giving the operation opportunity in the second operation mode (0 Or may be 100).

  In each of the above-described effects examples (FIGS. 192 to 398), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated is set as a set time (valid period). It is desirable to set a time value that has a length equal to or greater than the sum of the "time from when the automatic button function is activated to the end of the set time" to the set time (valid period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (valid period) having a longer time value, which is more than the amount of time that is substantially reduced as a period in which the effect reception is allowed, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
-The operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) executed as the effect of the fluctuation pattern itself (symbol effect) based on the result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, and the fact that the special result was obtained in the effect judgment (e.g., notice judgment) An operation reception effect (additional reception effect) that is executed as an effect that is added to the effect (effect pattern) of the fluctuation pattern itself as a condition.
At least.

  In other words, the “intrinsic reception effect” is determined when a special result is obtained in the change pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination on which change pattern the pattern effect is executed) (a special change pattern is selected). Then, it is determined that the execution is performed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, even if the “additional reception effect” obtains “a predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” in the fluctuation pattern determination (even if the predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected), This is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that an “additional reception effect” is to be generated in the effect determination (e.g., advance notification determination) according to the selected variation pattern is obtained. Therefore, once the effect according to the variation pattern is started, the effect determination is determined rather than the occurrence of an “intrinsic reception effect” that is linked to the variation pattern (effect pattern) and whose occurrence is determined. It can be said that the occurrence of the “additional reception effect”, which is permitted depending on the result of the notice (e.g., the advance notice determination), is more useful for the player and more important for enhancing the interest in the game. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect according to the fluctuation pattern, if an “additional reception effect” occurs in the effect, the “additional reception effect” is displayed in the effect. Is greater than the case where the symbol change does not occur, when the symbol change is stopped, the big hit symbol appears (expectation).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the internal reception effect that can be generated during the normal gaming state, the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound of “BGM playback”) is suppressed or Whether or not the effect is accepted while the sound is output silently or in a non-output state, and whether the effect sound of a specific type (effect sound of “BGM playback”) is output in a non-suppressed manner In some cases, the production reception is permitted. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, the effect reception is not allowed while the output is performed in a suppressed mode or in silence, or in the non-output state, The effect reception is allowed while the effect sound of the specific type is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, when the effect acceptance is permitted, by paying attention to whether the effect sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state, an additional It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that a reception effect will occur, and it is expected that gaming entertainment will be maintained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the intrinsic reception effect that may occur when the game is in the normal game state is performed even if the operation is not detected within the set time in which the effect reception is allowed. The non-automatic operation in which the post-production is performed in an automatic reception mode capable of generating the post-production and the operation is not performed within the set time in which the production reception is permitted, and the post-production is not performed, and the set time is terminated. It may be executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that can occur when the player is in the normal game state is not executed in the automatic reception mode, but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal gaming state, by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically (automatic button function) within the set time, it is possible to recognize the possibility that an additional reception effect has occurred. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment interest until the effect is received will be maintained.

  FIG. 399 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 399, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, the advance determination according to the variation pattern 1), the announcement effect is performed. It is determined at least whether or not to execute A. As a result of the effect determination, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. If the timing effect is not determined to execute the notice effect A, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 arrives. The design effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect vary in the variation pattern 1 itself (design). Direction) is additionally executed. In addition, “additional execution” can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed so as to cover all the symbol effects based on the variation pattern 1 and make it invisible, or to cover only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 The announcement effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “ramp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “ramp effect based on the fluctuation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Further, in the case of the production sound, the “production sound based on the notice pattern A” is assigned to a channel different from the “production sound based on the fluctuation pattern 1”, so that it is based on the “change pattern 1 (production pattern)”. In addition to the effect sound, “effect sound according to the notice effect A” is additionally output.

  FIG. 400 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 400, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, a preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 2), “addition” is performed. At least a determination is made as to whether or not to perform a “target reception effect”. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390”. Therefore, if it is determined that the “additional reception effect” is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, the “additional reception effect” is changed to a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 390). When the timing tr31 of the above arrives, the symbol effect (effect pattern) is additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the end of the effect after the operation), and the effect of executing the “additional reception effect” is performed. If the judgment is not made, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the "additional reception effect" does not appear and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is only executed. Become.

  Here, as for the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, the output sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern 2 (predetermined fluctuation pattern) is maintained in the non-suppressed state. In this case, the first allowable sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr32, and the set time ends at the timing tr33 without the automatic button function being activated. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 390 and the like, description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) illustrated in FIG. 400 does not have a special affirmation as “the effect content when the low expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” illustrated in FIG. 390. The parts are basically the same, and the above-described related effects, other examples, and modifications can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 400, an example in which the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed in the above-described another example mode in FIG. 390. It is described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 400, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (valid period) (timing tr32a in the figure), it is determined based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, “after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on effect display device 1600 (first effect member)” and “after-effect sound output (effect sound) by speaker (second effect member)” as the after-effect effect. At least, but for the production after the operation,
The “display effect after operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) (liquid crystal display)” is ended at a predetermined timing that arrives after the timing tr33 regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
-"The effect sound output (operation sound) after operation by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing at which the effect was received. It will be.

  FIG. 401 is a time chart showing the effect contents appearing when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 401, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained in the effect determination performed at the start of the symbol variation (for example, the advance determination according to the variation pattern 3). Regardless of whether the sound is performed, at the timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the process of setting the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” to the above-described “strong suppression mode” is performed, and the “strong suppression mode” is performed. At the timing tr41 that arrives during the appearance of “,” an “intrinsic reception effect” is generated as a symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (from the timing tr41 to the end of the post-operation effect).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the “specific variation patterns shown in FIGS. 391 to 393 or FIGS. 395 to 398”. Therefore, for the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. 401, the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern 3 (specific fluctuation pattern) is in a strongly suppressed mode (for example, silence (volume 0)) (Output state or non-audible state such as non-output state), the first allowable sound is output when the timing tr41 arrives, and a set time (valid period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time When the “timing tr42A” before the ending timing tr43 arrives without any effect reception, the above-described automatic button function is activated. 395 to 398 ”, and the description is omitted here. That is, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) illustrated in FIG. 401 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 391, and is related to the above-described related effects, other examples, and modifications ( 393 and FIGS. 395 to 398) can also be appropriately adopted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal gaming state, during the period in which the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode, the symbol effect based on the fluctuation pattern is referred to as “intrinsic reception”. Although an “effect” may occur, an “additional reception effect” that is additionally executed with respect to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern does not occur. During the period in which the effect sound of "" is in the non-suppressing mode, "intrinsic reception effect", which is a symbol effect based on the variation pattern, may occur, and in addition to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern. An "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

  That is, in this case, when an operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” based on the fluctuation pattern is in the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is “additional reception effect” is excluded. As a result, it is possible to generate a set time (valid period) during which the reception of the effect is permitted in an environment in which the operation reception effect is concentrated in which mode is performed. . On the other hand, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is output in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to recognize that the additional reception effect may be occurring. As a result, it is expected to maintain the entertainment interest.

  In order to suitably obtain such an effect, in addition to the case where the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” appear in different fluctuation patterns 2 and 3, etc., one fluctuation pattern (for example, It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” can appear sequentially in the effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” occurs at a timing before the “intrinsic reception effect”.

  More preferably, in the effect according to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the non-suppression mode. "Are allowed to appear sequentially, and the" intrinsic reception effect "can further appear while the effect sound of" BGM reproduction "is in the strong suppression mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs depending on the state of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , A case where it is difficult to grasp which of the “additional reception effect” and the “intrinsic reception effect” has occurred (non-suppression mode) appears, and the suppression mode for the effect sound of “BGM playback” Through this, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, when an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode in the symbol effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern, It is desirable that the “additional reception effect” does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol change. According to such a configuration, at the time when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect may be “additional reception effect”. In addition to being eliminated, the possibility that an “additional reception effect” will appear until the symbol change is stopped will also be eliminated. In such a manner, the generated “intrinsic reception effect” is executed in such a manner that the generated “intrinsic reception effect” is executed in such a manner as not to have any sense of expectation. You will be able to concentrate.

  Also, when the “additional reception effect” occurs, the “intrinsic reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)” occurs after the “additional reception effect” has not occurred. As described above, it is desirable to increase the rate of execution in a mode having a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of effect after operation, etc.).

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is necessarily generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. You may. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as candidates for the variation pattern determination, "the strong acceptance mode is set, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is displayed. The “variation pattern that is not generated” is not included, and the “variation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode” is included. . Alternatively, even if the effect sound of “BGM playback” is set to the strong suppression mode, the period in which the strong suppression mode is performed without an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) may end. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are selected as candidates for the variation pattern determination, "the strong acceptance mode is set, but during the period of the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is displayed. A fluctuation pattern that is not generated ”and a“ variation pattern that generates an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when in the strong suppression mode ”are respectively included. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong” sound is generated. Even if the player does not notice that it is in the "suppression mode", it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is excluded based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, when the first allowable sound is "additional reception effect", Even if the output sound is output for the same time (output in the “first mode” in the figure) with the output sound, based on the first allowable sound, instead of “additional reception effect”, “ It is possible to recognize that an "intrinsic reception effect" has occurred. More specifically, the first allowable sound (see FIG. 400) output upon occurrence of the “additional reception effect” is terminated in the middle of the output even if the effect reception is performed in the output state. Instead, the sound is output for a predetermined period of time, while the sound of the "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" and is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated. The first allowable sound (see FIG. 401) is such that when an effect is received in the output state, the output is terminated midway based on the effect reception.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode”, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs, in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second allowable sound is also output, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred by checking whether the second allowable sound is output. It is also possible to recognize that it is. However, as described above, it is not always necessary to prepare the second allowable sound.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 400 and 401, an operation-related display (display for prompting an operation) that appears within a set time (valid period) in which effect reception is permitted. When the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “strong suppression mode” and the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs (with message display), the “additional reception effect” occurs In this case, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred is excluded.

  Also, in the “intrinsic reception effect” that occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the above-described automatic button function can be enabled, In the "additional reception effect", the automatic button function described above is not enabled, and this also excludes the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred. It is possible to recognize.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “strong suppression mode”, various effects other than the effect elements related to the “suppression mode” are performed. Since the element appears in a different mode from when the “additional reception effect” has occurred, it is relatively clear that the possibility that the “additional reception effect” has occurred has been excluded. It is possible to easily recognize, and it is possible to encourage concentration on the “intrinsic reception effect”.

  On the other hand, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, the common points between “additional reception effect” and various effect elements By making it difficult to recognize which of the “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” is occurring, the “additional reception effect” occurs It is designed to provide a directing effect that makes people aware of the possibility of being on the contrary.

  FIG. 402 is a time chart showing an effect content that appears when an “intrinsic reception effect” as a symbol effect based on a fluctuation pattern is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”. It is. Note that the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 corresponds to the change pattern when a change pattern different from the “variation pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401” is selected. May be generated as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) as the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 400 and 401 is selected, a symbol effect corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is generated. .

  As shown in FIG. 402, the “intrinsic reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppression mode” also occurs in the “intrinsic reception mode” in FIG. In the same way as in the case of the “target reception effect”, regardless of which result is obtained in the effect determination (advance notice determination), the event always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol effect arrives. It has become something.

  However, the first allowable sound (first mode) output when the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402 is generated is the first allowable sound output when the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400 is generated. As in the case of the sound (first mode), even if an effect is received in the output state, the output is not terminated midway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to determine which of the “intrinsic reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” is occurring based on the output. .

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first mode), and this point is also shown in FIG. It is the same as "additional reception production".

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the operation means to be operated is also displayed as an operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within a set time (effective period) in which effect reception is permitted. Only the simulated image and the gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed. In this respect, the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 400 is performed. Has become.

  Further, in the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword decoration 5001” is not set as the operation target. This point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  In the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, if the operation is not detected within the set time (valid period), the above-described automatic button function is not activated, and the effect after the operation is performed. The timing tr73 at which the set time (valid period) elapses without occurrence occurs, and this point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “non-suppression mode”, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “strong suppression mode”. Unlike the case where the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs, various effect elements are common to the time when the "additional effect effect" occurs, and the "additional effect effect" may occur Become conscious of gender.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, “intrinsic reception effect (intrinsic reception effect in which the automatic button function is not enabled)” Is generated, there is a case where the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, and a case where the set time occurs without outputting the allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the “additional reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set permissible sound (first permissible sound) is always output without generating the set time.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception is permitted while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, when an acceptable sound is output, the “intrinsic reception effect” is output. And the "additional reception effect", it is difficult to recognize which is occurring, but when the acceptable sound is not output, the "internal reception effect" instead of the "additional reception effect" It becomes possible to recognize that the state is occurring. Note that when the “BGM playback” production sound is in the “unsuppressed mode” and the “intrinsic reception production” is generated, it is determined whether or not the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output. It is desirable that the determination be made not in accordance with the effect determination but in accordance with the type of the variation pattern. The “intrinsic reception effect” in the non-suppression mode in which the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, and the “intrinsic reception effect” in the non-suppression mode in which the acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is not output. May be sequentially executed within the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

  Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, when an allowable reception sound (first allowable sound) is output, “intrinsic reception effect” and “additional reception effect” While it is difficult to recognize which of the above is occurring, when the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is “intrinsic reception effect”. Become like

  In the "additional reception effect", it has been described above that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the performance determination (advance determination). When the “BGM playback” effect sound is in the “unsuppressed state” and the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs, it may not be output (for example, the “specific” illustrated in FIG. 394). Embodiment "). However, for the different aspect, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first allowable sound is lower than that in the first aspect.

  Regarding the “intrinsic reception effect” shown in FIG. 402, for the part that is not particularly noted, another example or modification example of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 390 may be appropriately used.

  In addition, in the effect examples illustrated in FIGS. 399 and 400, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of symbol fluctuation.

  In the example of the effects shown in FIGS. 390 to 402, with respect to the mode of the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, a case where a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination and a case where the big hit is lost in the big hit determination And may be different. For example, when the big hit is determined in the big hit determination, the effect is as shown in the example of the production shown in FIGS. 390 to 402. The post-operation effect may be performed in a mode different from the effect example shown in 402.

  As described above, the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been realized by combining and executing a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs are described by program codes representing the operation contents of the effector and the control procedure for each content of the notice in addition to the command related to the variation pattern, and have been created by a programmer having advanced technology. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawing (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the gaming machine, it is required to execute various effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, a high level of technology is required for the individual programmer, and the number of development steps is increased, and it is difficult to secure necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the number of man-hours required for a test for checking the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality has also increased.

  Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, an effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. Instead of using a tool for creating LCD rendering effects, the program data for gaming machines is output, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving quality. I am trying to do it.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the effect. Each of the blocks is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether or not an effect based on the block is executable. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, blocks for the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are configured as time-series combinations. That is, when the starting condition for starting the symbol change is satisfied, first, an effect determination as to which type of effect is to be generated among the effects is performed, and when the result is obtained, the effect determination is performed. Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) is set to the ON state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result of execution is obtained, and the determination result of execution is obtained. The flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type that has not been set is maintained in the off state. As a result, after the symbol variation (fluctuation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (for each unit time (one frame)) to correspond to the block set to the ON state. Only the effect of the type is selectively executed.

  Here, as the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each variation pattern type, or may be prepared without depending on the variation pattern. If different data is prepared for each type of variation pattern, only blocks corresponding to effect types that may occur separately for each variation pattern will be configured as time-series combined scenario data, Only the flags (usability information) of the blocks determined to be executed among those blocks are turned on. On the other hand, when prepared as data commonly prepared for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to the blocks) corresponding to all the effect types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like. Then, only the flag (usability information) of a block determined as an execution target among those blocks may be turned on to operate. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the fluctuation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing read out while processing (analyzing) the block (see “described later”). In this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern will be prepared, and in this case, the scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern will be prepared. Scenario data that is not used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of variation patterns, so that the processing load and storage capacity can be suitably suppressed.

  However, due to the structure of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects for external input by the player, and the like occur, so that each block operated in the ON state is executed. By itself, it is impossible to achieve all the effects.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, processing identification information (effect SW) for executing an effect at a predetermined timing or calling a program for executing a predetermined control is included in a block or a block. Can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the processing identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of the program to be called, and is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an ON state may be prepared. Thereby, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, the processing identification information is determined according to the type of the acquired processing identification information. The called process is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or may indicate the number in a table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. It may be.

  The peripheral control board 1510 obtains (detects) the embedded process identification information in the execution analysis of the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like. Call (call back) dynamically. Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.) can be executed. It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting and updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling the program function based on the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of blocks, effect and replacement of symbols, and interactive effect for external input by the player.

  The program function called by the callback is built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and does not need to be newly created for each model of gaming machine. Therefore, even a designer or a plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge only needs to design and produce various effects, and otherwise sets processing identification information for calling a predefined program function. This makes it possible to easily realize this even for complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for each effect component, the development period can be significantly reduced. By performing a test using a flag (usability information) or process identification information without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and greatly reduce the time required for the test.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game control means (main control) capable of performing the judgment on the big hit and giving the privilege based on the result of the predetermined judgment (winning of the big hit) being obtained. A substrate 1310), an effect control unit (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processes related to various effects based on the fluctuation pattern according to the determination, and image data in a display area based on the process performed by the effect control unit. Image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for outputting the image data to the time-series image information (scenario data or block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.). Image information processing means capable of executing a process for displaying an image based on the image information.

  Also, in the time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data or block, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) according to the present embodiment, at least a part thereof may include processing identification information. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information and call a process corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while processing relating to the image is performed for each unit time (for example, one frame), processing relating to rendering elements (lamp, sound, movable body, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start timing from being shifted between the production elements when realizing one production in cooperation with different production elements. Become.

  In this regard, as described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern. Sections can be included. In such a configuration, in the case where the time-series image information itself, which is data for specifying the “process for displaying an image” in a time-series manner, includes process identification information, which is data for specifying that the process is to be read out. Since the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern can include a section in which the process identification information is acquired for each unit time, fine timing Thus, even when it is necessary to perform the rendering process, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a gap between the rendering process and the rendering by the display image.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state. Allowed special operation reception effects are executable. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when such a special operation reception effect is generated, and the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the user is in the state of being displayed is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data and blocks or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state. Will be expected to focus on However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the directing performance will be poor as much as the effect sound of the specific type is suppressed. In this regard, in the configuration described above, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when a special operation reception effect occurs and the permissible operation-related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are described below. Since the images are displayed based on the time-series image information different from each other, various effects can be realized with respect to the display effects, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if no operation is detected within the period in which the effect reception is allowed, a special operation reception effect that can generate an after-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when such a special operation reception effect is generated, and the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect. The permissible operation-related display that is performed when the user is in the state of being displayed is displayed based on different time-series image information (such as the above-described scenario data and blocks or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even after an operation is not detected within a period in which the effect reception is permitted, a post-operation effect can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation by the player is not performed, and as a result, it is not possible to confirm the effect after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the pre-permission operation-related display performed when a special operation reception effect occurs and the permissible operation-related display performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect are as follows: Since the images are displayed based on the time-series image information different from each other, various effects can be realized for the display effects, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads information corresponding to image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the blocks, and uses the read information as the liquid crystal display control information. It can be output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, as a block, a first type block that is read after a wait time (a wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing has arrived, and a block that is read without a wait time (a wait processing period). A second type block is prepared.

  More specifically, the first type block is defined as a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the fluctuation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. It is possible to constitute as what is read after passing through. For the second type block, for example, in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block, the availability information corresponding to the second type block Is set to the ON state, it can be configured to be read out without passing through the wait time (wait processing period).

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared by a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is expected that the reduction of the processing load and the memory capacity is expected, as well as the effect design and effect change can be facilitated.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect The second time-series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read while the processing based on the scheduler data) is in the execution state, and the second time-series image information is read. Then, the processing based on the second time-series image information is changed to the execution state in place of the processing based on the first time-series image information that is being executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of terminating the processing based on the first time-series image information halfway, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to the present embodiment will be described again. When the image displayed in is composed of “a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)”, the image is prepared separately for each of the image elements (layers). The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is used to read information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the process for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (the process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the “peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 95)” started for each frame. It is determined for each frame whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the “block”, and if there is such information, it is read out. A drawing list is created based on the information read for each frame and transmitted to the image control unit (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512). Thus, the image control unit (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and outputs the display image to the display area, thereby displaying the image on the effect display device 1600. Direction will be realized.

  Here, the “block” itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies “information (image number) corresponding to image data” for each unit time. In this case, the “liquid crystal” described above is used. Since it has a function as "effect scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" separately from "blocks", and this can be omitted.

  However, the “block” according to this description example specifies the type of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”. In this case, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is executed in a predetermined order, Alternatively, one of the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is selectively executed.

  Further, in the “block” according to this description example, the “liquid crystal effect” in which a schedule for each frame for information (image number) corresponding to “image data in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to the scheduler data, information about what to execute as "processing related to lamp emission", information about what to execute as "processing related to movable body operation", and information about what to perform as "processing related to sound output" It also includes information on whether to execute. That is, in this case, if a “block” for realizing a specific notice effect is read, based on the “block”, “image processing in the effect display device 1600” related to the specific notice effect, and “ Since the “process related to lamp emission”, the “process related to movable body operation”, and the “process related to sound output” are read and executed, respectively, different effect elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound ), When one effect (specific notice effect) is realized, it is possible to suppress the start timing from being shifted between the effect elements.

  As described above, the “block” constitutes one piece of scenario data together with another block or alone, and among the scenario data, the “block” for which the availability information is in the on state. By selectively executing (analyzing) only the effect, an effect in a mode corresponding to the result of the effect determination is executed.

  However, regarding the scenario data and the blocks, any data may be used as long as they have a relationship such as "Scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each indicating the content of the effect." There is no limitation on the detailed method of realizing it, including the provision of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”.

  FIG. 403 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using “scenario data” or “block” when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is a time chart. In FIG. 403, “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 403, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanation example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. The blocks (symbol block A, symbol block B, symbol block C, symbol block D) are configured as a time-series combination. However, in the present embodiment, scenario data such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data in which only one is prepared as a block indicating the content of the effect is included.

  Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this description example also includes “a configuration that can selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. In this case, by setting only the unusable information corresponding to the selected block out of the plurality of blocks to the ON state, and leaving the unusable information corresponding to the other blocks to the OFF state, the plurality of blocks are changed. Is selectively executable. Alternatively, the blocks according to this description example also include “a configuration that can selectively execute any one of the plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to the other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains off. Thus, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executable.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition relating to the symbol change (holding digestion) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first obtains information on the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information thus obtained also includes information on the variation pattern. The peripheral control unit 1511 reads out the scenario data corresponding to the information (the variation pattern) and associates the scenario data with the scenario data as a candidate to be executed. Effect determination as to which block (effect) of a plurality of blocks (such as blocks corresponding to a notice effect) is to be executed. Then, among the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for blocks (effects) for which the effect determination has been made to be executed, the availability information is operated (set) to an ON state, and the execution is performed. For blocks (effects) for which no effect determination has been made, the availability information is kept off.

  It should be noted that the usability information associated with each block (effect) is turned off (set) when starting a symbol effect (decorative effect by a decorative symbol), such as when reading scenario data. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read in this way, the above-described processing for operating (setting) the availability information of which block is turned on is performed.

  Here, the “block” for which the availability information has been turned on (set) when starting the design effect is executed (analyzed) immediately after the design effect is started based on the scenario data, or It is executed (analyzed) in a form following the other block (production) started based on the data, or executed at a timing after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for the scenario data or block ( Analysis). However, the blocks (effects) include “the ones that may be executed at a plurality of timings in one variation pattern”, “the ones that may be executed with a plurality of variation patterns”, and the like. In other words, when the design effect is started, if the availability information of all the blocks to be executed within the fluctuation is operated (set) to the ON state, "the effect mode in which the same contents appear is obtained. It is necessary to prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set simply because their execution timings are different. " In other words, in this case, different data is prepared in spite of the same effect content, and the effect is executed based on the data.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always executed, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect) is ) Is not operated (set) in the on state, and the symbol effect can be started in the off state. Such specific blocks (specific effects) include “appearance EF block E”, “operation waiting block E”, and “post-operation block E” in FIG. 403. Will be described later. Among these, the “post-operation block E” is executed as an effect (effect in which the effect content dedicated to the big hit is prepared) that clearly indicates whether the big hit has been won or lost.

  Also, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, even for a block (effect) obtained as a result of the effect determination as a result of the effect determination, the block (effect) is also executed in another variation pattern or another timing. If there is a possibility that the symbol effect may be performed, the symbol effect can be started in the off state without operating (setting) the availability information in the on state when the symbol effect is executed. Such blocks include “operation waiting block A” and “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” in FIG. 403, and these blocks will be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, it is assumed that the starting condition is satisfied at the timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in accordance with the type of the variation pattern. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the blocks associated with the scenario data read in this way and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is to be operated (set) to the ON state. Then, an operation (setting) is performed on the availability information based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer after the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed in this manner, so that the production progresses in a mode according to the result of the production determination.

  However, instead of this, the effect determination corresponding to the type of the variation pattern may be performed before the scenario data predetermined for each layer is read out in a form corresponding to the type of the variation pattern. Good. That is, in this case, the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data are obtained by the result of the effect determination executed before reading the scenario data. Respectively.

  Here, in “Layer 1” of the plurality of layers, the “background image” displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not executed (the symbol is stopped and the game is not executed). This corresponds to the scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in “Layer 1”, a new block is not read out when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block (normal background block) already in the execution state is continuously executed ( Analysis).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, which image data should be output at which timing as the "image data for background image" stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 "Liquid crystal effect scheduler data for a normal background", which is information (time-series image information) about. That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” for each unit time (one frame), and as a result, outputs “image data for background image (moving image or Each time information corresponding to “still image)” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with information obtained from another frame, and the drawing list may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. This allows the effect display device 1600 to display the background description (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background”. For the block and scenario data that correspond to this "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background", the timing at which the power-on processing ends and the corresponding effect state (normal effect state, high-accuracy effect state, special effect mode, etc.) ) Is preferably read out as a trigger, and the background image (background moving image) having the same content is preferably set as time-series image information to be loop-displayed at predetermined time intervals. Also, the information corresponding to the “image data for background image (moving image or still image)” is not created together with the information obtained from the other frames to create one information (drawing list). May be transmitted. The point is that the information corresponding to the “image data for a background image (moving image or still image)” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any form.

  Note that the normal background image displayed on “Layer 1” based on the normal background block includes an SP on “Layer 3” based on “SP reach background block” and “SP end background block” described later. When the background image at the time of the reach is displayed, the background image on “Layer 3” is preferentially displayed, so that it is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, as an internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of the SP reach is displayed on “Layer 3”, “Layer 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background” is displayed on “Layer 1”. And that the processing relating to the normal background image based on is continuously executed, and is not set to a non-executed state according to the processing state of the SP background image on “Layer 3”. Has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of the SP reach is completed, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. A "symbol block D" for displaying a stopped symbol is originally executed. As a result, when the big hit symbol appears, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the winning has been achieved, and it is possible to appropriately promote the understanding of the game.

  On the other hand, “Layer 2” corresponds to a scenario data block (symbol block) for “effect symbols (symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600)”. In the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 403, the development extends to the SP reach effect, and therefore, the “layer 2” scenario data is associated with “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the change before reach”. "Symbol block B" for associating "symbol block A" with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal reach variation" and "symbol for liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation" It is defined that the "block C" and the "symbol block D" which associates the "stop symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data" are sequentially executed (analyzed).

  However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the “effect design” is often displayed in a small size in the effect display device 1600. Back, and then the SP reach background will be displayed again. " That is, in this case, there is a concern that a deviation may occur if there is any abnormality by simply executing (analyzing) the display schedule relating to the “effect design” and the display schedule relating to the “SP reach background” for each layer. Therefore, the “symbol block C” associated with the “LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach variation” may be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, the processing related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect symbols.

  For example, at a predetermined timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” to be described later, the “processing for turning on / off the use availability information of the symbol block C” is called. By attaching the process identification information, the “symbol block C” and “symbol block D” can be executed based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, regarding the “symbol block C” and the “symbol block D”, the use availability information is left in the off state when the symbol effect is started, as well as the “symbol block A”. "And" Symbol block B "are not included in the scenario data, and are configured as different scenario data.

  Further, “Layer 3” corresponds to the scenario data blocks (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) relating to “background image after the start of the SP reach effect”. In this regard, the "background image after the SP reach effect has started" should not be displayed when the symbol effect is started, but should be started from the middle of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of “Layer 3”, a wait time (wait processing period) is set so as to function so as not to execute the block of “background image after the start of the SP reach effect” until the corresponding timing comes. I have. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (weight processing period) has elapsed from the start of the symbol effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed) and corresponded thereto. Since the information can be read for each frame, a background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

  That is, in this case, the blocks include a first type block (such as a block corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 403) read out after a wait time (a wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, A second type block (such as a block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, and layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 403) read out without passing the wait time (wait processing period) is included. The second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at all effect timings, thereby promoting a reduction in processing load and memory capacity. In addition to being expected, the effect design and effect change can be facilitated.

  In this regard, in the SP reach production, after the display production of the same content is started irrespective of the hit of the big hit, the production content for the big hit (for example, the production content in which the character wins, etc.) (E.g., the content of a character defeated) to indicate the jackpot determination result in many cases. At this time, the display effect having the same contents is executed regardless of the hit of the big hit until the middle stage of the SP reach effect. ) Or image data may adversely affect the processing load and memory capacity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect includes a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a loss, and a big hit. Blocks corresponding to different image data at the time of loss (SP end background blocks) are separately executed. This makes it possible to execute the SP reach effect while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, the “SP reach background block” is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is read. These processes are executed (analyzed) for each unit time. In the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, a section where the same process identification information is obtained for each unit time (one frame) is included. Thus, the effect reception period (valid period) is generated not by time management by a timer or the like but by frame management of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

For example, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 403, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. ), The processing identification information of “X1” is arranged for each frame from the timing ts31 immediately after the processing. Each time the process identification information of “X1” is read, the following “process X1” is read and executed.
Processing X1. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block C” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect reception period in which the effect can be received by the operation ( In the “process X1”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the “post-operation block C” associated with “layer 6” is turned on. (Operation). As a result, the “post-operation block C” is read for every unit time corresponding to the “post-operation block C”, and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler” associated with the “post-operation block C”. The "data C" is executed (analyzed) every unit time, and also the "process related to lamp emission" and the "process related to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing relating to sound output", etc., are respectively started, so that a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block C" can be generated.

  In addition, in the next frame in which execution of each process associated with the “post-operation block C” is started, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler” corresponding to the “SP reach background block” is also used. Data is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect accepting period) in which the process identification information (here, “X1”) is attached for each unit time, even in the next frame, the “SP reach background The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and the “process X1” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the “post-operation block C” has been started to be executed. When it is determined that the execution has been started, the “process X1” is terminated without further performing the process based on the operation detection information.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 403, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged at the timing ts31, but are read from the second process identification information (here, “X1”). In the “process X1”, an effect was received, and thereby “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C” associated with “post-operation block C” in “layer 6” was executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third and fourth process identification information (here, “X1”) painted out in the figure, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background” is lost. As the "data" is executed for each unit time, it is automatically read. However, every time the information is read out in this manner, a process such as "the operation X1 has been executed and the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information ("X1" in this case). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is disabled).

  On the other hand, if the effect determination is not made in “process X1” (it is determined that the effect after operation is not to be executed), the use of “post-operation block C” associated with “layer 6” The process X1 ends with the availability information kept in the off state. Until the section in which the same processing identification information (here, “X1”) is obtained for each unit time (one frame) ends, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler” is displayed for each unit time (one frame). The process identification information (here, “X1”) is read from the “data”, and the corresponding “process X1” is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the section ends with the fourth process identification information (here, “X1”), the fourth process identification information is read out and responded accordingly. When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the subsequent effect is advanced without executing the post-operation effect according to the "post-operation block C".

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the “SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out “process X1 that can produce a post-operation effect” from liquid crystal effect scheduler data is obtained. However, simply analyzing such information can effectively function as an effect reception period (valid period), so that the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Become.

  Note that FIG. 403 merely shows such a process as a concept, and in practice, the process identification information is not obtained only for four frames. If it is to function as an effect acceptance period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period occurring at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period occurring at another timing. As described above, such processing identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

In addition, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information (here, “1”) related to the operation effect is added even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “process in which effect determination as to whether or not to generate an effect after operation is performed”, but reads and executes the following “process 1”. Has become.
Processing 1. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) suggesting that an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect can be received by operation, and a player who is in a state where the effect reception period is occurring A process of turning on (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” for performing an operation waiting effect prompting an operation (the above-described simulation image and gauge display, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" separately from "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". However, the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” can be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become. That is, in this case, the execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is started at any timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings. The execution of the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” can be easily realized from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from the effect scheduler data, thereby facilitating and standardizing effect design. Can be suitably achieved.

  Here, when the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is executed (analyzed), the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” corresponding to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” is read. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. However, in the “appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting”, first, while the effect reception is not permitted, the “operation effect reception by operation” is performed. There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to an indication effect (appearance effect display or the like) indicating that an effect reception period (valid period) in which “can be performed” will soon occur.

  However, in the “appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting”, the effect waiting period is generated in the middle of the process, and the operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation (the above-described simulation image and gauge Display, etc.), a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the image information (moving image or still image) is obtained appears. Has become.

In other words, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data” executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, “Y3” is set for each frame from the timing ts42 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. Are attached so that the processing identification information items are arranged side by side. Each time the process identification information of "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Processing Y3. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block D” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y3”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by operation. ) ". Moreover, in the "process Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" from which the "process Y3" is read is based. Is operated (set) to the ON state of the availability information of the “after-operation block D” associated with the same “layer 6”.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are executed. As a result, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block D” is generated. In addition to this, the newly read “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is in the state of being executed and “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)”. Of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) of “Layer 6”.

  According to such a configuration, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) which no longer needs to be read out only by reading the" post-operation block D "because the effect determination is made. The effect scheduler data D) "and the process identification information of" Y3 "for reading the" process Y3 "can be substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform a determination or a process for terminating the above, so that it is possible to suitably attain simplification and commonality of the effect design. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the readout is performed from the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”. An effect is received within the “process Y3” thus performed, whereby “the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis). It is assumed that it has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “radiation portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is a section in which the “radiation portion” has been erased by overwriting (substantially). (Invalidated section).

  That is, the process identification information of “Y3” may be attached to the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” side, similarly to the effect reception period generated from timing ts31. However, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) associated with the same layer as the“ post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ” ) "Side, it can be said that it is possible to achieve such excellent operational effects.

However, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment uses, as process identification information for reading out a process relating to the operation effect, "[appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting ( In addition to the process identification information of the above “Y3” included in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D)”,
-The process identification information of "Y2" included in "LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" is prepared.

  That is, as described above, the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” is the same as the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” “layer 6”. , The process identification information of “Y3” is added to this when the “post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is executed. This is useful in that it is automatically erased (invalidated). However, “LCD appearance scheduler data for appearance EF & operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” includes “1” included in “LCD appearance scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)”. Is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information on the basis of the process identification information of "." Therefore, if the frame processing to which the processing identification information of “1” is skipped when the processing load is high, etc., the “display EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation The waiting block D) "itself is not executed, and the effect acceptance period (valid period) based on the process identification information of" Y3 "may not be generated.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as process identification information for reading out a process related to an operation effect (a process of performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect based on operation detection information), The process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are prepared, and the process identification information of “Y2” is provided on the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)” side. At the same time, the process identification information of “Y3” is attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)” side. As described above, as the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect, the predetermined wait time (the wait process) until the use availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. A period corresponding to a type 1 block read after a period of time, and a wait time (wait processing (wait processing)) in which the availability information is set to an on state in processing executed based on the type 1 block. By preparing both the blocks that are associated with the second type blocks that are read without going through the period, the above-described risk that the effect reception period (valid period) does not occur is reduced. Will be able to

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of “Y3”, when an effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned “post-operation block D” is operated to an on state. In addition, a display effect after the operation on the effect display device 1600 (after-operation effect) is executed. On the other hand, in the “process Y2” executed based on the process identification information of “Y2”, when an effect determination is made, “process related to lamp emission”, “process related to movable body operation”, “process related to sound output” Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even if the processing identification information of “Y3” is not read, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output by the processing identification information of “Y2”. Have been. The “processing Y2” and the “processing Y3” may be any as long as they can generate different post-operation effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are arranged at the timing ts42, but are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that an effect is received in the “processing Y2”, and a post-operation effect based on lamp emission, movable body operation, and sound output is thereby executed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read out the third process identification information (here, “Y2”) painted out in the figure, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” Is executed at every unit time, and is naturally read. However, every time the data is read out in this manner, a process such as "after the operation has been executed, the process Y2 is terminated" is executed in the "process Y2" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "Y2"). As a result, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
"The first special operation in which the effect reception based on the operation detection information is allowed, which occurs when the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or is in a non-output state. Reception Direction (Direction Reception Period) "
-Regardless of the production state (production mode), even if no operation is detected, a second special operation reception production that can generate a post-operation production (production reception period)
Is performed as described above (for example, see FIG. 178 and FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In the first special operation reception production, since the production reception of the specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silence state, or in a non-output state, it is allowed to concentrate on the operation production. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the directing performance may be poorer by an amount corresponding to the suppression of the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a state in which the reception of the first special operation reception effect is permitted when the first special operation reception effect is displayed when the first special operation reception effect is generated. The permissible operation-related display (such as the above-described mimic image and gauge display) performed during the (during the valid period) is displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of presentation effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a state in which the reception of the effect is permitted in the pre-permission operation-related display (an indication effect) performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated, and the second special operation reception effect. The display related to the allowed operation (during the valid period) (such as the above-described simulation image and gauge display) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of presentation effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

More specifically, in the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background” illustrated in FIG. 403, the effect reception is permitted while the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode. In addition, even if no operation is detected, a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that generates a post-operation effect can be generated. The process identification information of “2” is read to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of “2” does not read “process in which effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect is performed”, but reads and executes “process 2” below. .
Processing 2. Availability of “Appearance EF block E” for performing an indication effect (such as appearance effect display) indicating that an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect can be accepted by operation will soon appear. Processing to set (turn on) information

  According to such a configuration, apart from the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)”, a permissible pre-operation-related display (a sign effect) dedicated block (appearance EF block E) And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, it is necessary to prepare the “liquid crystal effect for SP reach background” for the “appearance EF block E”. The execution can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the “scheduler data”. That is, in this case, the execution of the "appearance EF block E" at any timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" Since the execution of the "appearance EF block E" can be easily started from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "data", the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Will be able to do it.

  Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation (expected degrees at which a big hit symbol appears) are separately prepared for the pre-permissible operation-related display (probable effect) and the permissible operation-related display, respectively. Since it is possible to appropriately combine which of them is to be executed, it is possible to make a variety of variations as a production, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. Become. In addition, when adopted in another variation pattern, an effect is realized such that, while the operation-related display before the permission (predictive effect) is in a common mode, the operation-related display during the allowable operation is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. Will also be possible.

  Here, when the “appearance EF block E” is executed (analyzed), the “appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” corresponding to the “appearance EF block E” is read and executed (analysis). Is done. When the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF” is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permissible operation-related display) by the predetermined effect display is changed from the “effect accepting section” to the “effect accepting”. Image information (moving image or still image) to be executed while straddling the “section where is permitted” is acquired.

  However, in the “appearance EF block E” and the “appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”, “processing that can determine an effect to generate an after-operation effect based on operation detection information” is performed. Since the process identification information is not added, the effect acceptance period does not occur based on the block or the scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when the timing ts52 is reached in the “SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”, “3” is set to generate an effect accepting period. Is read. The process identification information of “3” does not correspond to “the process in which an effect determination for generating an after-operation effect based on the operation detection information can be made”, but is data that associates the following “process 3”. .
Processing 3. "In the state in which the effect reception period is occurring, the availability information of the" operation waiting block E "for performing the operation waiting effect (the above-described simulation image or gauge display, etc.) for prompting the player to perform the operation is displayed. Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, apart from “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” and “appearance EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)”, The operation-related display during the permissible operation (the above-described simulation image and gauge display, etc.) dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting) Although it is necessary to prepare, the “operation waiting block E” may be started to be executed at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become able to. That is, in this case, the “operation waiting block E” is started to be executed at any timing in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” or at a plurality of timings, or the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is used. The execution of the “operation waiting block E” can be easily started from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from the “data”. Will be able to do it.

  Here, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts52 is also attached such that the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is arranged for each frame, similarly to the effect reception period during which the effect reception is permitted at the timing ts31, ts42. It may be configured as an effect section to be performed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period occurring at the timings ts31 and ts42, and the other effect reception periods are configured by the method described below. It may be.

  That is, in the effect reception period generated at the timing ts52, depending on the state operation (off state, on state) of the operation state flag, the effect reception is not permitted (off state), and the effect reception is permitted (on state). ). When this method is adopted, an effect based on the operation detection information is not performed in the process called based on the process identification information but in the “peripheral control unit steady process” shown in FIG. 95 for each unit time (one frame). It is desirable to make a determination.

  For example, each time the “peripheral control unit steady processing” is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and if the operation state flag is in the on state (the condition is in the effect reception period), the operation detection information Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination that an effect after operation is generated. When the effect determination is performed, the availability information of the block (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to the post-operation effect of the type according to the operation state flag that is in the on state is operated to the on state ( Setting).

  That is, in this case, the operation state flag is prepared for the type of the post-operation effect, and after determining the type of the operation state flag in the ON state, the post-operation effect corresponding to the type is determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the ON state. The process of turning off the operation state flag may be executed in the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect in the on state, or the availability information may be turned on. The processing may be executed in a process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) operated in the state.

  The processing procedure when such a method is adopted will be described again from the point where the processing identification information of “3” is read out at the timing ts52 and the “processing 3” is executed. Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for waiting for operation) "is read and executed (analyzed).

The processing for turning on the operation state flag may be performed in the above-mentioned “processing 3”, but in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler) In the first frame (processing timing) when (data E) ”is executed (analyzed), the processing identification information of“ Z1 ”associated with the following“ processing Z1 ”is read.
Processing Z1. Processing for turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is turned on (set) at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. By performing the process, the period in which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the “effect reception period”. While the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state, the permissible operation related display based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” (described above) (Simulated image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-permission operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permission associated with layer 6 The middle operation related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed such that the display periods thereof partially overlap.

  Here, the pre-permissible operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed closer to the near side than the during-permissible operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is preferentially displayed. It has become so. Therefore, at the time when at least a part of the permissible operation-related display is made difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation-related display, the effect reception is permitted. The present invention is designed to provide an effect that enables an effect reception to be performed under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not an aspect having an appearance appears.

  In this regard, when an effect is received at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which such an effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is used. The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” associated with No. 6 in the ON state is executed in the “peripheral control unit regular process” described above. Thereby, each process (a lamp, a movable body, a sound, and the like) including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “post-operation block E” is stored in the “operation waiting block E” associated with the “operation waiting block E”. Is performed in place of the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”, so that it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the “operation waiting block E” halfway. At this time, the process identification information of “Z3” described later included in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be naturally deleted (invalidated). Become.

Note that the processing for turning the operation state flag to the off state is performed when the processing for operating (setting) the availability information of the “post-operation block E” to the on state in the “peripheral control unit steady processing” described above. 403. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the first frame (“analysis”) after the above-mentioned “after-operation block E (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed). At the processing timing), the processing identification information of “Z2” is read out, and the following “processing Z2” corresponding thereto is executed, thereby executing the processing based on the “post-operation block E” after the end of the effect acceptance period. I am trying to do it.
Processing Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the pre-permission operation-related display (the appearance EF block E (the appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is left (displayed) in the screen. As described above, the effect may be accepted. Therefore, in the “process Z2”, it is determined whether or not the appearance EF block E (the appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, the process of terminating the process is terminated. Is desirable. However, after the “appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is continued without aborting, the image display based on the “post-operation block E” is changed to the “appearance EF use block E”. Priority is performed (displayed in front of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E) in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least the entire range in which the image display based on the block E is performed. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

  Also, in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, when the process at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), it corresponds to “process Z3” in order to end the effect accepting period. The processing identification information of “Z3” attached is read. Here, the case where “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54 means “post-operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6. This means that “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is not overwritten by “operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, that is, the timing ts54 comes. This means that the stage has not been accepted. However, the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as the “post-operation block E” when the effect is received even if the effect is not received between the timing ts52 and the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in “operation wait block E (operation wait liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, the following process is executed in “process Z3” executed based on the process identification information of “Z3” read at timing ts54. It is supposed to be.
Processing Z3. Among the operation state flags, a process of turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on. Operation (setting) processing is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, even if the effect is not received within the period, the same block as when the effect was received is read out and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when a player forgets to perform an operation. In addition, the post-operation effect is not executed after the end of the effect reception period (timing ts51 to ts52). The process for reading the same block as when the reception was made '' is performed, so that it is possible to realize a smooth production progress without causing a gap between when there is an operation and when there is no operation become able to.

  Further, according to such a configuration, the display image (simulated image or gauge display) based on the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be accepted for the effect by the operation by the player. In both the case where the effect is performed and the case where the effect is received by activating the automatic button function, a process of hiding the effect based on the effect being received (here, “operation Since the rear block E ") is executed, the effect can be developed in the same manner even when the player forgets to perform the operation, and a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed. Will be as expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 403, during the effect reception period generated from timing ts52, the above-described “first” executed during the generation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode is generated. Special operation reception effect ". In the “first special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. 403 as well, at the time when the effect is received, the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is not returned to the non-suppression mode but continues to be output in the suppression mode. Then, it is set so that the effect sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is returned to the output in the non-suppression mode during the period in which the effect is performed after the operation.

  The “specific type of production sound” means a sound of “BGM reproduction” (BGM reproduction for a normal background or an SP background). This is equivalent to the sound (BGM playback sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached “process related to sound output”. As the suppression mode and method, the above-described modes and methods can be appropriately adopted.

  In the above configuration, the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed (or the effect reception is performed even when the effect reception is not performed). Is performed, an operation reception effect in which the same operation is performed after the operation is performed), a pre-permissible operation-related display (block E for appearance EF) and a permissible operation-related display (operation waiting block) performed when the operation is performed. Regarding E), they are executed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). This makes it possible to realize a variety of presentation effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the operation reception effects (the first special operation reception effect and the second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images (displays related to pre-permissible operation) displayed by mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). , Permissible operation-related display) are displayed so that there is a period that overlaps with time. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance (for example, the above-described difficulty in viewing) involving the “pre-permissible operation-related display” and the “permissible operation-related display”, so that a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed. become.

  On the other hand, an operation reception effect, such as an operation reception effect generated at timing ts41, that occurs when the “specific type of effect sound” is not in the suppressed state (or a post-operation effect, if the effect reception is not performed, occurs) In the non-acceptable operation reception effect), the pre-permission operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is different from the operation reception effect at the timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation reception effect that suggests a jackpot hit by a post-operation effect), and occurs according to the result of the effect determination (advance determination). Since the display does not occur or does not occur, the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the determination results. Can be more beneficial.

  However, even in such a case where the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), the pre-permissible operation-related display is on one layer. The display and the permissible operation-related display may be overlapped with each other (for example, there is a time when both the pre-permissible operation-related display and the permissible operation-related display are displayed. It is desirable to execute those effects so that the part is in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize.

  The processing identification information read out based on the block of the permissible operation related display (operation waiting block E) based on the block of the permissible operation related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) May be operated such that the use availability information is turned on in the processing corresponding to.

  The operation reception effect in which the effect reception is permitted at timings ts52 to ts54 may be any one that is executed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect described above and the second special operation reception effect described above. 178, and FIGS. 390 to 393, 395 to 398, FIG. 401, and the like, which are executed as any of the operation reception effects described above (operation reception effects under BGM suppression). Is also good. In this case, among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 403, as for other operation reception effects, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 394, FIG. 400, FIG. Effect). Further, each of the different examples of these operation reception effects described later may be appropriately adopted.

  For example, different blocks are used for the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at timing ts42. In the reception effect, the same allowable sound may be output when the effect is received (the first allowable sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402).

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52, if an effect reception is performed during the output of the acceptable sound, the output state is terminated midway, but the operation reception effect (timing ts42) In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately set, such as maintaining the output state even when an effect is received during output of the acceptable sound (e.g., the first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 390 to 402). It is possible to adopt.

  By the way, regarding scenario data relating to SP reach production, a block corresponding to image data that can be shared at the time of a big hit and a loss (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to different image data at the time of a big hit and a loss (SP ending background block) and execute them sequentially as described above. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the transition from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP end background block” is performed during the period in which the post-operation effect is being performed. Is set to always arrive.

  That is, in the operation reception production in which the production reception is allowed at the timing ts52, the production is received (including the above-mentioned automatic button function) at any timing within the production reception period (timing ts52 to ts54). Even so, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is always executed (the time required to execute the post-operation effect). In the period during which the post-operation effect is always executed, a display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (display operation after operation on the effect display device 1600 (after operation Effect)) is performed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has a higher priority than the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the SP ending corresponding to the "SP ending background block". (Displayed on the nearer side than the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP end background block). In this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set to be longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E. The minute will function as a “period during which the effect after operation is always executed”.

  The transition from the “SP reach background block” to the “SP end background block” is performed during the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is performed. By doing so, the display of the block for the SP reach background (the block shared in the hit) and the display of the block for the SP ending background (the block used only in one of the hits) are completely different from each other. Even if the effect design is performed in such a manner, the player does not feel uncomfortable, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, the scenario data of “Layer 4” and “Layer 5” are not related to any image, and simply function as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed and is not involved in any image display. Data) (sky time-series image information). Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed on layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  There are two kinds of methods for such a data calling block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling). First, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 4”, a timing ts21 at which a process is called at the start of a symbol change. A wait time (wait processing period) is set so as to prevent the data calling block B (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling) from being executed until. When the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the “data calling block B” is executed (analyzed). As a result, the “data calling block B” corresponding to the “data calling block B” is obtained. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for calling data is executed (analyzed).

Here, the process identification information of "X2" is added to the "data calling block B" or "data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data calling block B" for each unit time. Each time the process identification information of “X2” is read, the following “process X2” is executed.
Processing X2. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block B” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In this “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, the section in which the process identification information of “X2” is attached for each unit time is referred to as “effect effect reception in which effect reception can be performed by operation”. In the “process X2”, when the effect determination is performed, the availability information of the “post-operation block B” associated with “layer 6” is turned on. An operation (setting) is made to the state. As a result, the “post-operation block B” is executed (analyzed), and the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” associated with the “post-operation block B” is executed per unit time ( Analysis), “processing related to lamp emission”, “processing related to movable body operation”, “processing related to sound output”, etc. associated with the “post-operation block B”. When the execution is started, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block C” can be generated.

  Note that, even in the next frame in which the execution of each process associated with the “post-operation block B” is started, the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” is also displayed. Executed (analyzed). Therefore, when an effect is received in the middle of a section (effect accepting period) in which the process identification information (here, “X2”) is attached for each unit time, the “data calling block B” is also displayed in the next frame. The process identification information (here, “X2”) is read from “(liquid crystal display scheduler data B for data calling)”, and the above-mentioned “process X2” corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” also includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the “post-operation block B” has been started to be executed. When it is determined that the processing has been started, the “processing X2” is ended without further performing the processing based on the operation detection information, which will be described in the “processing X1” above. As you did.

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in “process X2” (it is determined that the effect after operation is not to be executed), the use of “post-operation block B” associated with “layer 6” The process X2 ends with the availability information kept in the off state. The “data calling block B (data calling block B) Process identification information (here, “X2”) is read from the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)”, and the corresponding “process X2” is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 403, since the section ends with the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out and responded accordingly. If the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the post-operation effect according to the "post-operation block B" is not executed, and the subsequent effects progress.

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is performed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the “data calling block B” is used. The same process identification information (X2) for reading out “process X2 that can produce a post-operation effect” from “(liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data calling)” is obtained. However, simply analyzing such information can effectively function as an effect reception period (valid period), so that the effect design can be facilitated and shared. Become.

  Here, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4” does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information “X2”. Does not read the “operation waiting block”. Therefore, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect reception is allowed in a state where the mimic image and the gauge display are not performed. "

  According to such a configuration, "data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data having different set values of the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without passing the wait time (wait processing period). A substantial weighting function operates in the calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling). That is, in the data calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling), no image information or processing identification information is read out until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is output when the timing ts11 arrives. Is read. However, the process identification information of “4” does not read “process in which effect determination is performed as to whether to generate an after-operation effect”, but rather reads and executes the following “process 4”. Has become.
Processing 4. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) suggesting that an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect can be received by operation, and a player who is in a state where the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A” for performing an operation waiting effect (such as the above-described simulation image or gauge display) for prompting an operation to an ON state.

  According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare the data calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data calling) separately from the "appearing EF & operation waiting block A", the "appearing EF & operation" Regarding the "waiting block A", the process identification information of "4" is added from a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from the "data call block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". Since it is possible to appropriately call up the game, the effect design can be easily facilitated and shared.

  Here, when the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is executed (analyzed), the “appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” corresponding to the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A” is read. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. However, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A”, first, while the effect reception is not permitted, the “effect by operation” There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to an indication effect (such as appearance effect display) indicating that an effect reception period (valid period) in which reception is possible will soon occur is obtained.

  However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for operation waiting", an effect waiting period is generated in the middle of the process, and the operation waiting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation (the above-described simulation image and A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a gauge display or the like is obtained appears. In this section, the same process identification information is obtained for each unit time (one frame). It has become.

That is, in the “appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, “Y1 "Are attached so that they are arranged side by side. Each time the process identification information of “Y1” is read, the following “process Y1” is read and executed.
Processing Y1. Processing for performing an effect determination as to whether to generate an after-operation effect corresponding to “post-operation block A” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the section in which such processing identification information (here, “Y1”) is attached for each unit time is referred to as “the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by operation. ) ". In addition, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" from which the "process Y1" is read is based. Is operated (set) to the ON state of the availability information of the “post-operation block A” associated with the same “layer 6”.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block A” is read, various processes including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with the “post-operation block A” are executed. As a result, an after-operation effect corresponding to the “after-operation block A” is generated. In addition, the newly read “block A for post-operation (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for post-operation)” which is newly read out is “block A for appearance EF & operation waiting (block for appearance EF & operation Liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) for "layer 6".

  According to such a configuration, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A) which no longer needs to be read out only by reading the" post-operation block A "because the effect determination is made. Since the effect scheduler data A) "and the process identification information of" Y1 "for reading" process Y1 "can be substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform a determination or a process for terminating the above, thereby facilitating and commonality of the effect design. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 403, it is read from the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. An effect is received within the “process Y1” that is performed, whereby “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A” associated with “post-operation block A” in the same “layer 6” is executed (analysis). It is assumed that it has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “radiation portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is a section in which the “radiation portion” has been erased by overwriting (substantially). (Invalidated section).

  In “Layer 4”, an effect section in which processing identification information is added for each frame is set on the “data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)” side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from the “data calling block” such as “layer 5”. Also, in “Layer 4”, as shown in “Layer 5”, this is realized by operating a substantial weight function in the data calling block (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data). Is also good.

  In “Layer 5”, an effect section in which processing identification information is added for each frame is set on the block side read from “Data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. did. However, the effect section may be set in “data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” as in “layer 4”. Also, in “Layer 5”, as shown in “Layer 4”, this is realized by setting a wait for the data calling block (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself to wait. Is also good.

  In addition, in the example illustrated in FIG. 403, when the process identification information of “1” or “4” is acquired, it is suggested that “the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be received by operation” will soon occur. To perform an indication effect (such as an appearance effect display) and an operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation in the state where the effect reception period is occurring (such as the above-described mimic image or gauge display). The process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block” to the ON state is executed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the precursor effect (such as the appearance effect display), and the operation waiting period that prompts the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring (the above-described simulation image and gauge). For example, a process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for performing the operation (setting) may be performed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process in which effect determination can be performed” is obtained.

  Also, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag, similarly to the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set as being read at the same timing as each other. You may make it set.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the blocks are separately provided. However, these may be configured as one data.

  As for the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) from which information corresponding to the image data is acquired for each unit time (for each frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured so that information corresponding to moving image data over a period can be obtained. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is obtained only at the first processing timing (frame). After that, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed every unit time (one frame). It is not obtained, and only when the process identification information is attached, the corresponding process is executed.

  The block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) in which the availability information is set to the ON state may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing in which the availability information is set to the ON state, or the availability information may be set to the ON state. May be executed (analyzed) at the processing timing one step after the processing timing set in (1).

  Also, "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is obtained, the same information may be obtained as "information corresponding to image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same mimic image and the gauge display are displayed for the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result) ) Is obtained and when it is not obtained, an effect section (SP reach background block) where display data is shared, and a case where a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and not obtained It is configured to be executed in a manner divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. With such a configuration, when performing a background display effect for a specific reach, different display data is not used over the entire period between when a predetermined determination result is obtained and when a predetermined determination result is not obtained, but in the middle. Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55), and different display data is used only in the remaining period to indicate an error (determination result), the processing load and the memory capacity are expected to be reduced. Become.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the post-operation effect (step 6) is performed across (including) the timing ts55 in “layer 6” different from “layer 3” in which the background display effect for specific reach is executed. The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (Layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has a higher priority display (SP) than the background display effect (Layer 3) for specific reach. By displaying the image on the nearer side than the image display based on the reach background block or the SP ending background block), it is possible to obtain a “big hit (predetermined determination result) in layer 3” Switching from a production section where display data is shared between the case where no display data is used and a production section where different display data is used when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained ” (Or make it harder to see). Thereby, "the effect section in which the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (the predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained", and the case where "the big hit (the predetermined judgment result) is obtained" And the production section where different display data is used in the case where it is not obtained, even if there is a case where the production connection cannot be designed well, it is possible to hide (cheat) by the production after the operation. As a result, the effect design can be facilitated. In this sense, in the post-operation effect, it is desirable to execute a process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen.

  Regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) executed across (including) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, the operation is automatically performed regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed on a regular basis, “the effect section in which the display data is shared when the jackpot (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “the jackpot (the predetermined It is possible to reliably conceal the connection between "the effect section in which different display data is used when the determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, the timing ts55 at which the effect section switching occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. (If the end timing of the post-operation effect is shifted due to the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is performed when the effect is received at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect generated at the timing ts52. It must be set within the period before the non-display timing. In such a configuration, processing related to display (SP reach background block, SP end background block) is executed in “Layer 3”, but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, "the effect section in which the display data is shared when the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" The configuration in which the background display effect (Layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the “effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained” should be executable when the big hit has been won. It may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for losing) is executed even when the jackpot has not been won. , The display state of the background display effect (layer 3) can be maintained.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 403, the “post-operation block E” is read out as one of a plurality of blocks corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern based on the fact that the effect has been received within the period from timing ts52 to ts54. "Is prepared. Regarding the “post-operation block E”, the effect is automatically received even when no operation is detected within the period from timing ts52 to ts54 (by automatically generating the same program as when the operation is detected). Since it is generated (by executing), it is possible to provide an unusually interesting presentation effect.

  In this regard, although illustration is omitted, even when a first variation pattern or a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the “post-operation block E” is made executable. Is also good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, “SP reach background block” and “SP ending background block” of the effect contents according to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed. Similarly to the specific fluctuation pattern, the process identification information of “2” and the process identification information of “3” are read based on “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”. That is, in the first variation pattern, the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) are different, but the same pre-permissible operation-related display as the specific variation pattern (precursor effect) ) And permissible operation-related displays (simulated image, gauge display, etc.) are executed, and the same "post-operation effect" is used as the post-operation effect when an effect is received in the operation reception effect generated in this manner. Block E "is executed.

  Further, in the first variation pattern, the effect reception is automatically performed even if no operation is detected in the operation reception effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP end background block”. It is also the same as the specific variation pattern that the post-operation effect is executed so as to straddle (include) the switching timing with "" to hide the background effect switching.

  In addition, “the effect section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”; The configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the “effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained” is similar to the specific change pattern in the first change pattern. It may be set to be executable when a big hit is won, and may not be executed when a big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, different background effects (SP reach effects) are executed between the specific change pattern and the first change pattern, but the different background effects are not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same effect (effect after operation) always appears, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won, it is recognized that the jackpot has been lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when a big hit is won, the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern is hidden and one effect content always appears, so that it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, by displaying the "background effect" having different staging contents depending on the variation pattern without hiding it, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been lost. And the expectation can be maintained.

  On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” of the effect contents according to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” in the second variation pattern may have processing identification information of “1”, but may have processing identification information of “2” or “3”. The process identification information is not included, and immediately before shifting to the “SP ending background block”, an operation accepting effect that can generate an after-operation effect across the shift timing does not occur. .

  In this regard, in the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” according to the second variation pattern, at a predetermined timing while the effect acceptance is not permitted, process identification information of “5” not shown is acquired. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of “5”, “the process of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E to the ON state (process 5) is executed. It has become.

  Then, by setting the availability information of the “post-operation block E” to the on state, the “change of operation” is performed in the second change pattern as well as the “specific change pattern” and the “first change pattern” described above. The same post-operation effect based on the “post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” straddles (includes) the switching timing between the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block”. Is executed on another layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the effect design should be performed as a display related to the background effect. At the predetermined timing in the production section where no occurrence has occurred, the “post-operation block E” is deliberately executed as a block different from the background image block. Despite the situation, and even in the situation where even the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production (post-operation block E) when the production reception is performed in another variation pattern suddenly appears. Therefore, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

  According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, “the effect section in which the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (the predetermined determination result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”, and “the big hit” In the effect section in which different display data is used when (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained, even if it may not be possible to design a direct connection well, Can be hidden (cheats), and the effect design can be facilitated.

  In addition, “the effect section where the display data is shared between the case where the big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and the case where the big hit is not obtained”; In the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the timing of switching to the effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained, the specific change pattern or the second change pattern As in the case of the one variation pattern, the execution may be performed when the jackpot is won, and may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. According to such a configuration, when a background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific change pattern or the first change pattern is executed, a different background effect is not displayed when the big hit is won. In this way, the same effect (effect after operation) always appears, which makes it possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won. On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won, it is recognized that the jackpot has been lost at the timing when a background effect (SP ending background block) having a different content from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to In other words, in this case, when a big hit is won, the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern is hidden and one effect content always appears, so that it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been won. On the other hand, when a big hit is lost, by displaying the "background effect" having different staging contents depending on the variation pattern without hiding it, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit has been lost. And the expectation can be maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples, the operation accepting effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The processing identification information may not be added to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data), for example, a symbol block (symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data for symbol). ) Or a block for calling (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling) or another block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example thereof, in the process read out based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc. In the effect determination, the effect determination based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation unit is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be another operation unit. In addition, in all or a part of the above-described effect determination based on processing identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”, a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, It is determined which of the sword production operation units 5000 and the like is in a state in which an operation opportunity has been given, and whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity has been given (effect judgment May be determined). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword production operation unit 5000, etc.) should be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize an operation reception effect in which an operation opportunity is given only when the operation opportunity is given to any operation means, the process identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are shared. Will be able to do that. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both of the different operation means, and the post-operation effect based on the process identification information may be executed based on the reception of the effect of one of the previously operated operation devices. .

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 403 or another example, a plurality of pre-permissible operation-related displays in the appearance EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 with no movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 with movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410 And executing (analyzing) one of them according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, the blocks can be saved by commonly using the blocks subsequent to the appearing EF block E1 and the appearing EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). Become like

  In the example shown in FIG. 403 and another example thereof, processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to a block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data is used. By executing the read process, an operation for a specific operation unit can be accepted. However, in addition to this, regarding the predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, the processing (for example, the peripheral control unit regular processing) completely unrelated to the processing identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data , An operation may be received, and a change corresponding to the reception may be caused for the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the rendering progress due to the block, the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data, etc., the operation on the predetermined operation means can be properly received. It can be maintained suitably.

  Also, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on the process identification information of “X1,” “X2,” “Y1,” “Y2,” and “Y3.” Thus, all effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be made invalid. In such a configuration, layers can be saved.

  In addition, during the effect determination period, a part of each process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3” is converted into another process identification information by a player operation. Or the opportunity may be changed.

  A specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the start of the target variation, and may be used across a plurality of variations.

  The block may be used not only during the fluctuation but also during a hit game or the like. In addition, a block straddling during a hit game from a change or a block straddling during a certain change from a hit game may be provided, and the processing identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

  In addition, the type of the process identification information read according to the game state may be changed, for example, “Y3” is added only to the block (or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probable change state.

  Also, during error notification (abnormality notification) or the like, it is desirable that an error image be displayed or an error sound be output, but the block being executed and the process identification information be not deleted at all. As a result, the effect can be appropriately restored after the error is released.

  Further, among the inventions included in the example shown in FIG. 403 and other examples thereof, the described effects can be obtained without necessarily using a technique such as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or processing identification information. What can be performed may be realized by another method.

[Direction determination based on operation detection information before the validity period occurs]
Generally, when an effect reception period (valid period) in which an effect reception is allowed is generated, the above-mentioned “simulated image”, “gauge display (bar display)”, or the like is displayed according to the generation timing. In this regard, if the player plays the game for a long time or plays the game many times, it is possible to predict at which timing in the fluctuation pattern the “simulated image” and the “gauge display” are displayed. Then, some players may not be able to wait for the operation, and may operate at a timing anticipating that the "simulated image" or the "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if the operation is performed immediately before the "mock image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the effect acceptance period occurs), the "mock image" or "gauge display" is displayed. As if they were operating in a state where the effect is being received (the state where the effect reception period is occurring). As a result, the redo of the operation within the effect reception period (valid period) is delayed, and the effect is received. There was a case where the production acceptance period (valid period) ended without being done.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period generated at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403) according to this embodiment, the effect reception period (valid period ) Occurs, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect is determined by the automatic button function, and the effect after the operation can be generated as described above. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation, even if the redoing of the operation within the effect reception period (valid period) is delayed in the above-described situation. become able to.

  However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to remember the real feeling that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation by the player, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, as will be described later, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows the effect determination to generate the post-operation effect only during the effect reception period (valid period), but does not detect the operation state. Even if the effect is made within (immediately before) the period before the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, this is intentionally used as a target (judgment material) for the effect judgment. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect, the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period). After the operation, the effect is executed. That is, in this case, the player can also feel that the effect after the operation has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within (immediately before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specified time. When the effect reception period (valid period) occurs while maintaining the above, it is not determined that the effect reception is performed within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it is possible to fairly assign the effect receiving condition to the player, and it is expected that a decrease in the interest in the game is suppressed.

  Also, as will be described later, at least in the predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs from a predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of the fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame is started In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "simulated image imitating the operation means (or a gauge indicating the remaining time)" is not displayed yet. That is, in this case, since a period in which the effect acceptance is allowed internally occurs when the mock image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the mock image (or the gauge display) is displayed, the effect will be accepted and the effect may not be confirmed after the operation. It can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “effect accepting period (valid period)” according to this embodiment will be described again. “(Effective period)” refers to “a period from the start of the process of generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted to the end of the process”. Here, the details of the “process for generating a state in which effect reception is permitted” differ depending on the technique of realizing the “effect reception period (valid period)”, but for example, “operation state flag (see FIG. 403)”. , A process for setting a timer, and a process for calling a process for determining the effect acceptance based on process identification information (see FIG. 403). In other words, the “effect reception period (valid period)” corresponds to “the effect period (period) from when the process for generating the state in which the effect reception is permitted is performed until a predetermined time elapses”. The “predetermined time” is defined as “the time until the operation state flag is turned off” or “the time until the timer expires”. Time until it is done. " Then, in such an “effect reception period (valid period)”, a process of determining whether or not an effect is to be performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the “determination process as to whether or not an effect is received” according to the present embodiment, not only “operation state detection” performed during the “effect reception period (valid period)”, but also The feature is that "operation state detection" performed before the "effect reception period (valid period)" occurs is also targeted. It is general that such an “effect reception period (valid period)” is created, for example, as a period of about 100 frames.

  FIG. 404 to FIG. 409 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of processing performed before and after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. Note that, in each example described below, a case where an image is displayed using “block” or “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” described with reference to FIG. 403 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. Any method can be used as long as it is a general method for performing image control in units of frames. In addition, the “process for generating a state in which the effect reception is allowed” is also exemplified as “the process for turning on the operation state flag”, but is not limited thereto, and the “process for setting a timer”, “ The process of determining the effect reception may be a process that is called based on process identification information.

  FIG. 404 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period).

  Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, an effect reception period occurring at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 403) occurs in a specific change pattern, the “effect” in the “m” -th frame after the symbol change starts. It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state as "processing for generating a state in which acceptance is permitted". The reason why the operation state flag is turned on (set) at the halfway “timing t1 (m)” in the “m” -th frame is that the operation state flag is turned on (set). Processing ”Even if the processing itself is executed based on the arrival of the“ m ”-th frame, more precisely, the start timing of the“ m ”-th frame is related to the execution of other processing. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including that process, and the various processes are executed in a predetermined order. Because it is always the case.

  When the operation state flag is turned on in this manner, an effect section (effect accepting period) in which effect accepting is permitted occurs, and during the effect accepting period, every predetermined time, based on the operation detection information, A "determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect" is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, regarding the “determination process on whether to generate the post-operation effect”, as described above, regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is in the on state), the “peripheral control unit normal The processing is performed as “effect determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (one frame) in “processing”. And, by continuing this even after the effect reception period, even during the effect reception period, the `` determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect '' is performed based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals. (In the figure, they are executed at “timing t2 (m)”, “timing t2 (m + 1)”, “timing t2 (m + 2)”, and “timing t2 (m + 3)”, respectively). That is, in this case, the “determination process as to whether to generate the post-operation effect” is also performed in a frame before the “m” -th frame or the like, but the operation state flag is in the off state. In the situation, this is substantially invalidated as described above, so that it is omitted in the figure.

  Further, in this example, the order of the various processes performed when a new frame arrives is set to be “after the operation (operation of setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state”) rather than the order in which the “operation (setting)” is performed. The order in which the “determination process as to whether or not to produce an effect” is executed is set later, so that the operation is performed within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is turned on (set). Acceptance (judgment to produce a post-operation effect) can be made. However, regarding the order, it is not always necessary to first execute the “process of setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state”. May be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag has been operated (set) to the ON state, the “determination process as to whether or not to generate an effect after the operation” itself is not performed. The reception (judgment to produce the effect after the operation) is not performed.

  Conventionally, at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” -th frame, “processing for generating a state in which effect acceptance is permitted (here,“ processing for turning the operation state flag on ”)” is executed. Then, based on the operation detection information obtained during the period after the execution of the process (here, “the period during which the operation state flag is in the ON state”), the “ Judgment processing "is executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 404, at timing t2 (m), it is determined whether or not an operation has been performed within the period from timing t1 (m) to t2 (m) based on the operation detection information. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the effect is performed after the operation, and when it is not determined that the operation has been performed (or the operation state is detected but the length of time maintained as the operation state is not sufficient). When it is determined that the operation is sufficient), the effect is not executed after the operation, and at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, it is determined whether or not the operation has been performed within the period from the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1). A process of making a determination again based on the detection information is executed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for the operation and operates aiming at the timing in anticipation that the production acceptance period will occur, the production acceptance period will not be accepted As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (valid period) will end. Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows “effect determination for generating an after-operation effect” only during the effect reception period (valid period). Regarding the “state detection” itself, even if it is performed within (immediately before) the period before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, this is used as the target (determination material) for the operation detection determination. I dare use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, normally, "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more" is used as a determination condition in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like. Done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). "Even if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time period, it is determined that an operation has been performed, and a post-operation effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation is performed immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect, the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (valid period). After the operation, the effect is executed. That is, in this case, the player can also feel that the effect after the operation has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  There is no particular limitation on which of these operation detection information to use as a more specific configuration. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether or not the operation state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more for each frame. A frame in which the operation state is maintained (continued) over a period of time (for example, 3 ms) or more is left as a history as an “ON frame”, and a frame without a history as an “ON frame” is handled as an “OFF frame”. I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or may be left as an “ON frame” when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). It may be.

  As will be described later, in the “determination process as to whether or not to generate an after-operation effect” according to this embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left When the operation detection information is obtained in a mode in which are displayed, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an “ON frame” or an “OFF frame” at the end of the frame and retains the history. In the “determination process as to whether or not to produce an after-operation effect” performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in (2), the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−3” -th frame, the “m−2” -th frame, and the “m−1” -th frame are used as determination materials, and these are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. It is determined whether or not a history is left as a “frame”. On the other hand, when the history as the “ON frame” is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the “operation performed” at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 404 is performed. In the “determination process as to whether or not to generate the subsequent effect”, the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the “m−2” -th frame, the “m−1” -th frame, and the “m” -th frame are used as determination materials, and these are “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. It is determined whether a history is left.

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 404 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (valid period). Therefore, in the determination timings (in the figure, timings t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3)) in each frame after the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs. It is determined that the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “OFF frame” is left, and the effect is not received (judgment that the operation has been performed), but the effect after the operation is performed. Not executed.

  By the way, with respect to the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) occurs after the processing related to the display in the peripheral control unit 1511 is started and before it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for deciding which one to use as an image according to various determinations and creating a drawing list in response to the determination), The processing in the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) which has received the processing result (information about the image such as the drawing list) on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511 This also occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the side of ()).

  Therefore, in the related art, the processing related to the “effect during effective period (operation waiting block E)” by the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed in the frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs. (“M−2” th frame), so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the valid period from the “m” th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “the effect during the valid period (operation waiting block)” is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is that the state up to the “m−1” -th frame immediately before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is set to “the effect before the effective period (effect effect etc.)”. In addition to the “processing period for“ appearance EF block E ”), the period from the“ m ”-th frame during which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is referred to as“ production during the effective period (such as a simulation image or gauge display). The processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. As shown in FIG. 403, the processing period for the effect before the effective period (the “appearance EF block E” such as the effect effect) is continued even after the “m” th frame, and The processing period for the effect during the period (“operation waiting block E” such as a simulation image or a gauge display) may be overlapped.

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the “m” -th frame arrives (or a period thereafter), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to “production before effect period (effect production, etc.)”. It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, for a predetermined period after the arrival of the “m” th frame (the period during which the effect is performed during the valid period), the drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to “the effect during the valid period (simulated image, gauge display, etc.)”. A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 404, in the peripheral control unit 1511, up to the “m−1” th frame (or even thereafter), “effect before the validity period (appearance EF block E)” Is performed, and after the “m” -th frame, the processing related to “effect during the validity period (operation waiting block E)” is executed. In the effect display device 1600, in the “m” -th frame, "Effect before validity period (display based on appearance EF block E)" is still being executed, and "effect during validity period (display based on operation waiting block E)" is finally started in the "m + 2" th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, the effect is internally received from the time when the “effect during the validity period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is not yet displayed (the “m” -th frame and the “m + 1” -th frame). Is allowed, the player runs ahead, and as a result, he / she operates immediately before the “effect during the validity period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is displayed. Even in such a case, the effect is received, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 404, processing relating to “production before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E)” and processing relating to “production during the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E)” are performed. For convenience of explanation, the processing is executed for each frame in the peripheral control unit 1511. However, when these effects are displayed using moving image data, the peripheral control unit 1511 only needs to create a drawing list based on “information corresponding to moving images” at the start frame of the processing. That is, in this case, in each of the subsequent frames, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically reads and displays the image data. The processing may not necessarily be performed for each frame in the unit 1511.

  FIG. 405 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started in the “m + 1” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When the operation detection information in the side-by-side mode is obtained, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 405, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” -th frame (a timing before the timing of determining the reception of the effect). The "m + 1" -th frame itself also retains a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames to be determined (“m−2” frame, “m−1” frame, and “m” frame) Since the frame is an “OFF frame”, the effect is not received (determination that an operation has been performed).

  At timing t2 (m + 2) in the next frame “m + 2” -th frame, the three frames (“m−1” -th frame, “m” -th frame, and “m + 1” -th frame) to be determined are as follows. Since the histories of “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “ON frame” are left, the effect is not accepted (judgment that an operation has been performed) is not performed.

  Further, at timing t2 (m + 3) in the next frame “m + 3” th frame, three frames (“m” th frame, “m + 1” th frame, “m + 2” th frame) to be determined are The histories of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left, respectively, so that the effect reception (judgment that operation has been performed) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, since the “m + 1” -th frame and the “m + 2” -th frame are “ON frames”, the operation state is equal to or longer than the predetermined time over two frames in the effect reception period (valid period). It is possible to determine that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). In addition, since the “m” -th frame is an “OFF frame”, it is possible to determine that the operation has been started within the effect reception period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation has been performed properly within the period in which the effect reception is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. ) (Here, at timing t2 (m + 3)), an effect is received, and a post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to this is executed (started). Note that, in this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is performed when the effect is received, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of a frame or the like. Any processing may be used as long as the processing for turning off the operation state flag based on the effect reception is performed so that the operation determination processing is not (substantially) performed in the next frame.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m + 3), the post-operation effect (operation The processing relating to “post-use block E)” is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display according to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the “m + 5” th frame (not shown) after two frames.

  FIG. 406 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404.

  As described above, in the “determination process as to whether to generate an after-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, three frames in which histories as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left are stored. When the operation detection information in the side-by-side mode is obtained, the effect is accepted (determination that the operation has been performed), and the effect after the operation can be executed.

  Also, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows “effect determination to generate a post-operation effect” only during the effect reception period (valid period), but “operation operation”. Regarding the state detection ”itself, even if it has been performed within a period (several previous frames) immediately before the production acceptance period (valid period) occurs, this is detected by the operation detection target (determination). Material).

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such a timing is not used in the determination regarding the effect reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the timing t2 in the “m” -th frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three previous frames (the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) is transmitted to the effect reception. It is used in such a determination. In this example, these frames (the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) are called “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, respectively. As a result, the effect is received (determination that an operation has been performed).

  According to such a configuration, the “m−3” th frame is an “OFF frame”, and the “m−2” th frame and the “m−1” th frame are “ON frames”. This makes it possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) over two frames immediately before the production acceptance period (valid period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the “m−2” -th frame two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, In the example shown in FIG. 406, the effect is received within the effect reception period (valid period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) is performed in accordance with the reception. ) Is executed (started). When such a configuration is employed, as shown in FIG. 406, the effect reception period (valid period) itself ends in a very short time in which even one frame is not continued. Even if the operation is started immediately before the anticipation of the occurrence of the operation, the effect is considered to have been performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is generated. Will be able to do that. That is, in this case, the player can also feel that the effect after the operation has occurred due to the operation, so that the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  However, if the reception of the effect in such an aspect is frequently performed, the significance of the effect reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the effect reception is performed based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (valid period). Is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, it is possible to give a considerable degree of suspicion as to whether or not the “post-operation effect” is generated due to the operation opportunity being given. It is possible to expect that the operation is not started before the time period occurs.

  In addition, the method of realizing that "the effect is performed after the operation without displaying the mimic image or the gauge display" is not particularly limited. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing relating to the “effect during the validity period (operation waiting block E)” is performed from the “m” -th frame without intentionally considering the delay of two frames. Then, when an effect is received at timing t2 (m), a process relating to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed from the frame (“m” -th frame) for which the effect is received. Like that. As a result, as shown in FIG. 406, the process relating to the “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is executed without executing the process relating to the “effect during the validity period (operation waiting block E)”. Therefore, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 406, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Therefore, what kind of determination is performed based on the assumption and an effect corresponding to the determination is performed will be described. However, as shown in FIG. 407, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is not maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Even in the case of ending within the -1st frame, if the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (respectively, If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing described with reference to FIG. 406, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 406, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the effect reception period occurs, and is performed only during the period before the effect reception period occurs. However, the determination conditions (“m−3” frame, “m−2” frame, and “m−1” frame are “OFF frames” for the effect reception at timing t2 (m), respectively) , “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are recorded), the effect is received even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m). After-effect will be performed.

  Regarding such a configuration, the same can be said when an operation is performed within the effect reception period (valid period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 405, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is earlier than the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame, or “m + 2”. Even if the operation state has ended in the th frame, the determination conditions (“m” -th frame, “m + 1” -th frame, and “m + 2” -th frame are respectively “ As long as the “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” histories are satisfied), even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), FIG. The effect is received as shown, and the effect is executed after the operation.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the “determination regarding effect reception” is performed, and the timing when the “determination regarding effect reception” is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period earlier than the above (in this embodiment, when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), the operation targeted for operation is performed. An effect is received assuming that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the effect is performed after the operation.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the effect reception period (valid period) is generated is compared with the operation detection information in the “determination process for effect reception” performed after the stage reception period (valid period) occurs. If it is simply used as a judgment material, for example, the operation is performed when there is no sign effect (appearance effect) even when there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (valid period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that a person who will be able to accept the effect will appear. That is, if the operation in such a mode is permitted, the significance of the effect reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment detects whether there is an “OFF frame” and an “ON frame” instead of using only the “ON frame” as a determination target. In this way, the above-mentioned concerns are resolved. In this embodiment, ON and OFF are determined for each frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An effect may be received on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing ”. Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long before the rise or fall of the sensor signal has occurred before the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, or to determine how long the operation state is maintained. The above problem can be solved by judging how long it has continued.

  FIG. 408 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when an operation is started from the “m−3” -th frame in the effect reception period (valid period) illustrated in FIG. 404.

  As shown in FIG. 408, in this example, the operation started in the “m−3” -th frame three frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs is the effect It is assumed that the operation is continuously performed up to the “m + 2” th frame within the reception period (valid period). Also in this example, when the effect accepting period occurs, first, “determination regarding effect accepting” is performed at timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame. The operation detection information previously acquired (here, the operation detection information acquired in the “m−3” th frame, the “m−2” th frame, and the “m−1” th frame) is used as the judgment material. It is supposed to be.

  However, in this example, the “m−3” -th frame, the “m−2” -th frame, and the “m−1” -th frame have a history of “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, respectively. In this state, no effect is received (determination that an operation has been performed) as a result of the “determination on effect reception” at the timing t2 (m). In addition, in the “determination regarding effect reception” performed in the subsequent frame such as the timing t2 (m + 1), the “ON frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON” are determined for the three frames to be determined. Since only the history as the "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3" th frame is maintained, the effect is produced as a result of the "judgment for effect reception" performed in each frame. The reception (judgment that the operation has been performed) is not performed.

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the “m−3” th frame is temporarily ended, and a frame in which the history as the “OFF frame” is left is created, and then the operation is not performed again, the effect is accepted. (Judgment that an operation has been performed) can be prevented from being performed. As a result, even if the operation state is maintained even in a situation where no indication effect (appearance effect) is executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (valid period) will occur, the operation state is maintained based on this. It is possible to preferably avoid the effect reception being performed.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 405 to 408, when an effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the effect after the operation is performed without displaying the mock image or the gauge display. (See especially FIG. 406). However, in this case, it is not possible to remember the feeling that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest in the game may be reduced. However, the effect may be developed so that the mock image and the gauge display are always displayed. Note that, in this case, the feature that “at the time when the m-th frame is started,“ the effect during the validity period (operation waiting block) ”is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600” It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The technique for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited. This can be realized by setting the timing at which the “process” is performed so as to be opposite to the case of the example shown in FIG. 404.

  FIG. 409 shows the effect reception period (valid when the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state) is performed after the “determination process for effect reception” in the frame. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the period.

  As shown in FIG. 409, assuming that the “m” th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, the operation state flag is turned on (set). Done. As a result, an effect reception period (valid period) occurs. In the “m” -th frame, “determination process for effect reception” is performed after the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. Never.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m” -th frame, the timing at which the “determination process related to effect reception” is performed before the timing t12 (m). At this time, the “determination process for effect reception” itself is not performed, or the “determination process for effect reception” is performed, but the effect acceptance period (valid period) has not occurred. As a result, it is determined that the effect is not accepted.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect reception from being performed in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, regardless of the operation state, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets “the effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E )) Is always performed, so that a display image (effect during the effective period) corresponding to the process can appear on the effect display device 1600 in the “m + 2” -th frame after two frames. become.

  That is, in this case, the effect reception is performed after the effect reception period has occurred at least as long as the “m−2” frame, the “m−1” frame, and the “m” frame are each “OFF frame”. , "ON frame", and "ON frame", and the timing t11 (m + 1) in the "m + 1" th frame arrives. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs a process related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” based on the reception of the effect. At this time, the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) uses the preparation buffer (double buffering) of the double buffering based on the processing result regarding “production during validity period” processed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m” -th frame. Rendering processing has already been performed on the side of the buffer in the non-display state (refer to “processing in image control means” in FIG. 409).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 409, even when the effect is received in the shortest time after the effect reception period occurs, the effect display device 1600 displays the “m + 2” -th time effect during the validity period. Is displayed, and the display relating to the “post-operation effect” is performed in the “m + 3” th frame, so that the post-operation effect can be started after the mimic image or the gauge display is displayed. become.

  However, the method of starting the effect after the operation after displaying the mock image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 404, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame) in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the effect reception can be performed at the timing t2 (m). Therefore, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m), at the timing t2 (m), the processing related to the “effect during the valid period (operation waiting block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, a frame for performing the process related to the “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect reception being performed is one frame for the frame for which the effect reception has been performed. Will be delayed. Therefore, even when the effect is received at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, in the “m” -th frame, the effect during the validity period (operation waiting The processing related to “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the “m + 1” -th frame that is the next frame. . Such a “delay” occurs not only in the frame in which the effect reception period (valid period) occurs (here, the “m” -th frame), but also in any frame where the effect is received. . Even with such a method, after the effect reception period has occurred, even if the effect has been received in the shortest time, it is possible to start the post-operation effect after displaying the mock image or gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples, in the “determination processing for effect reception” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, the m-th frame is started more than the m-th frame starts. The “detection information from the operation detection means” acquired in the previous “m−1” -th frame is also used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples thereof, the “operation detection means from the“ m−1 ”-th frame obtained before the“ m-th ”frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2" -th frame are used as determination materials for the effect reception. In other words, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (in a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the validity period occurs) in anticipation of the production acceptance period (valid period), this is produced. Since the post-operation effect is performed assuming that the operation has been performed within the reception period (valid period), the player can also realize that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation. You will learn.

  In addition, even when the operation state is not maintained at the time when the “determination process for effect reception” in the m-th frame is performed, the “operation detecting means” acquired in the frame before the m-th frame is used. An effect reception can be performed based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the effect reception period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence (effective period of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs). However, since it is considered that the operation has been performed within the effect acceptance period (effective period), the effect after the operation is executed, so that the player can perform the effect after the operation due to the operation. You will feel the realities that have occurred.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame as an “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is changed to an “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed within the frame. Operation (setting) may be performed. In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection unit) acquired from the start of the m-th frame to the generation of the effect reception period (valid period) is also used as a determination material for the effect reception. Will be used. That is, in this case, the operation is performed in each of the “m−1” -th frame and the “m” -th frame (for example, the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), and the operation is performed in the “m−2” -th frame. When it is determined that the operation is not performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), the effect is received. According to such a configuration, the time required for the operation by the player to be used as the determination material is shortened, so that it is possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate reactivity.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 408 and other examples, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs, the situation is such that the mimic image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. When an effect is received within the m-th frame, the effect is performed after the operation without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only immediately before the effect acceptance period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence (effective period of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the valid period occurs). Although it is considered that the operation has been performed within the effect reception period (valid period) and the post-operation effect is executed, while the “after-operation effect is generated in this manner, Does not display the button image or the gauge display ", and an appropriate operation can be encouraged within the effect acceptance period (valid period). For example, if the button image or the gauge display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of the modes was displayed, and it is suggested by the mode. There is a direct disadvantage that it is not possible to grasp the degree of expectation.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 404 to 409 and other examples, the effect is not accepted when the effect accepting period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time. This makes it possible to prompt the user to perform an operation in an appropriate mode during the effect reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the effect reception period (valid period) occurs while the operation state is maintained not for a long time but for a time shorter than a specific time, the effect is received. Even if an operation is performed immediately before the period (valid period) in anticipation of the occurrence of a period (valid period), it is considered that the operation has been performed within the production acceptance period (valid period), and the post-operation production Is executed, the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  In addition, in order for the effect to be accepted, it is not enough that the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than a specific time, and it is also required that the operation state be maintained for a time longer than a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 409 and other examples, in the processing in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information has been obtained, the process regarding the post-operation effect ( Display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing relating to lamp light emission, processing relating to sound output, and processing relating to movable body operation), at least regarding the display processing in the effect display device 1600, "the information corresponding to the image data of the effect after operation is displayed. , The process of reading out information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511 when the effect is not received. I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, no matter what operation information is obtained in the m-th frame in which the effect reception period starts, the process (effect) in the m-th frame when the effect is not received. At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of display processing in the display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation is necessarily performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, a process (a process of reading out information corresponding to the image data of the effect after the operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) corresponding to the effect reception is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the effect is not received (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the “post-operation effect” is an effect started due to an operation by the player.

  Note that, as described above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 409, in the “m-th” frame in which the effect reception period starts, the effect determination can be performed based on the operation detection information. In the frame in which the determination has been made, “processing for reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and “the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed in the next frame. , Reading process in the peripheral control unit 1511 "may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processing related to the post-operation effect (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to the movement of the movable body), at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 is effect determination. In the frame where is performed, the processing when the effect is not received (the processing for reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed. However, at this time, of the processes related to the post-operation effect (display process in the effect display device 1600, processes related to lamp emission, processes related to sound output, processes related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “process related to sound output” Regarding the “process”, a process of reading “information on the light emission mode after the operation” or “information on the sound output after the operation” may be performed in the frame where the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the output of the lamp or the sound is started in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame in which the effect is determined or in the next frame.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 403, in a case where a method of displaying an effect image using a block is adopted, and when an effect is received by an operation, a “post-operation block” for executing the effect after the operation is executed. In addition, a “destruction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for destruction EF)” for displaying a destruction effect image until the operation promotion image such as a mimic image or a gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden is displayed. It may be executed. According to such an “extinction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for an extinction EF)”, for example, an image in which a mimic image or a gauge display fades out when an effect is received (an image that is gradually hidden). Can be displayed. Further, such an “extinction EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for an extinction EF)” may be executed when the effect acceptance period ends without effecting after the operation. The “disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)” is also attached to a background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for background) and an operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting). It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the ON state in the process read based on the process identification information.

  Regarding the “process for generating a state in which effect reception is allowed (process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state)” described with reference to FIGS. 404 to 409, the scheduler after the symbol change is started It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and may not necessarily be executed based on a frame.

  In addition, the “simulated image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed as an effect before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, when the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, the display mode may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner, or may be displayed in a blurred manner by another effect display. For example, it is required to display the “simulated image” and the “gauge display” in a different mode from the case where “the effect during the valid period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is performed. Also, at this time, in the effect before the validity period (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the “simulated image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without being displayed. .

[Further directivity for mimic image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns to execute based on the result of the big hit determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a prepares a plurality of expected effects (notification effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Of these, it is possible to execute an effect determination (e.g., advance notice determination) as to which of the expected effects (e.g., advance notice effect) is to appear selectively. Note that, depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notification effects and the like) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the expected effects (such as a notice effect) may be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The fluctuating effect by the decorated design is executed together with the expected effect (advance effect) related to the background description (background notice) and the movement of the movable body (actor effect). Then, as a result, as a result of the fluctuating effect by the decorative symbol being executed together with the expected effect relating to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, when the stop effect is displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. Will be made possible.

  In such a configuration, the fluctuating effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background description, movable body operation, etc. Is provided as an effect having a "function indicating the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination, a specific one of the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) is specified. If the pattern pattern based on the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, regardless of which result is obtained as the performance determination (such as a preview determination), the effect is accepted. Is allowed to generate an operation reception effect (valid period). However, as will be described later, the mode of the acceptable sound output when the operation accepting effect is generated differs depending on the result of the effect determination, so that the effect after the operation is executed in a highly expected manner. The rate at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and the rate at which the big hit symbol is stopped are indicated.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the above-described fluctuation pattern determination. Even if there is a special result in the effect determination (such as a preliminary determination) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, an operation in which the acceptance of the effect is permitted Reception effects (valid period) can be generated. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation acceptance effect (valid period) does not occur even if the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the effect determination. . Further, the operation reception effect (valid period) generated in the predetermined fluctuation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) generated when the symbol effect based on the specific fluctuation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach. It is performed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the change pattern that generates the operation reception effect (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach, other than the above “specific change pattern” May also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, a change pattern that generates an operation reception effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected change pattern (non-reach change pattern). It is desirable to prevent the selection or to reduce the selection ratio.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is determined in advance for the effect member to be rendered as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period). After the operation to generate the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body), the operation is performed. The effect of the reception effect (valid period) itself is poor, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest until the effect is performed after the operation is reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
-During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (effect sound of a specific type)" according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressed manner. During the execution of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity or the high expected fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) in the output, the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) The corresponding “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, or is not output (the reproduction period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data is over, or the channel is allocated). Has been terminated), and various measures have been taken, such as enabling at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity. And that it is as described above (Figure 190 to Figure 303, Figure 385～ Figure 409).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the mimic image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated mimic image integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the mimic image. In this way, the game entertainment when the operation reception effect (effective period) occurs is improved. With respect to such an integrated mimic image, an operation reception effect (valid period) generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern has progressed to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation generated in the predetermined variation pattern described above. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (valid period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the expected non-suppression reception effects and the high expectation suppression reception effects. Also, in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303 and FIGS. 385 to 409), the display mode of the illustrated mimic image is replaced with any of the integrated mimic images described below. It is desirable to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

Hereinafter, a case where the mimic image is displayed as an “integrated mimic image” will be described.
First of all, the "simulated image" will be described again. The operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception effect includes an "operation receiving portion" for receiving an operation by the player, and a periphery of the operation receiving portion. A “peripheral decoration part” to be decorated is provided. In this regard, the “mimic image” means an image that mimics the “operation receiving section” of such operation means. The “operation receiving section” is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the “peripheral decoration section” is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (production operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the “operation receiving section” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the “peripheral decoration section” corresponds to the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to In the case of the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) illustrated in FIG. 192 or FIG. 222, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the “peripheral decoration portion” corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

  FIG. 410 shows an “integrated mimic image” displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for an operation unit provided with an “operation receiving unit” that receives a “press operation” by a player. It is a figure showing an example.

  In this description example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001. That is, when the player presses the design button 5014, the design button 5014 is pushed into the design portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is produced (for example, after the operation is performed). ). According to such a configuration, in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation unit, a “pattern button 5014” that can be operated (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012, and an operation (moves up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving portions with a possible "pattern portion 5012" will be provided.

  FIG. 410 illustrates an “integrated mimic image” when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 occurs when a predetermined fluctuation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the example described below with reference to FIG. 410, for the “integrated mimic image” when an operation opportunity is given to the design button 5014, the user operates the operation button 410 instead of the design button 5014. You may make it apply as an "integrated mimic image" when the operation reception effect (valid period) to which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the “simulated image imitating the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 190 to 303, 385 to 409) is referred to as an “integrated mimic image” described below. In this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

  As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) When an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button simulation image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. These are displayed as integrated simulation images IGa to IGd. In the examples shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not separately prepared as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). It is configured to be displayed only as the model images IGa to IGd). When the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation promotion displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (valid period), the “first effect mode with relatively low expectation” and the “relative A plurality of production modes including a “second production mode with high expectation” are prepared, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (production determination). . In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d),
In the specific operation reception effect (valid period), the state shown in FIG. 410 (b) (integrated mimic image IGb) is more than the state shown in FIG. 410 (a) (integrated mimic image IGb) appears Appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode having a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation production,
In the specific operation reception effect (effective period), the state shown in FIG. 410 (c) (integrated mimic image IGc) is more than the state shown in FIG. 410 (b) (integrated mimic image IGb) appears. Appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode having a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation production,
In the specific operation reception effect (valid period), the state shown in FIG. 410 (d) (integrated mimic image IGd) is more than the state shown in FIG. 410 (c) (integrated mimic image IGc) appears. Is based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination) so that the relationship where the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation production when the appears One of the model images IGa to IGd is displayed.

  It is not always necessary to prepare all of the four aspects shown as integrated model images IGa to IGd. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period only by preparing at least two modes. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-Operation means (sword decoration body 5001, sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) displaced by operation by the player and a peripheral decoration portion (pattern portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400),
Integrated mimic image display means for displaying a mimic image simulating the operation receiving section as integrated mimic images IGa to IGd integrated with a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery of the mimic image;
An operation reception executing means which can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player when the integrated mimic image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion; The integrated model image can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

  Details of the “integrated mimic image” shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d) will be described separately for each of the modes (integrated mimic images IGa to IGd).

  First, the “integrated mimic image IGa” shown in FIG. 410 (a) includes a normal button mimic image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery. However, in the case of the “integrated mimic image IGa”, the normal button mimic image BMGa is displayed as “an image imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given”. On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa indicates that “the peripheral decoration part (the pattern part 5012 or the frame) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not imitated, and the periphery of the normal button imitation image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration in the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

  According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, which of the operation means is given an operation opportunity is determined by the operation means ( Can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button imitation image BMGa that simulates a part of the image. Moreover, the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is a gorgeous and large image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a peripheral decoration image which is not a real existing decorative part but is preferable for improving decorativeness and performance. ), The effect of the staging when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for luxurious existing peripheral decoration parts, and it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom of production that is not restricted by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration parts. become.

  In the "integrated model image IGa" shown in FIG. 410 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a pedestal for setting a button (normal button model image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof has A predetermined decoration that warns that the button has a high risk is provided. As described above, these “pedestals” and “predetermined decorations” have shapes different from those of the actual peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this regard, in the “integrated model image IGa” according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 411 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced with time. More specifically, when an operation is not received within the validity period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG calculates a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from the display area of the predetermined maximum value. Is displayed so as to decrease as time elapses until the display area becomes. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has a function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, but also indicates the remaining time until the state where the operation reception is permitted (effective period) ends. It also has a function to indicate the remaining time.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 410 (a), a section image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is provided. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target area”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) is applied in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display target area on which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game over the entire period until the empty state.

  When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having the predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area on which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the display method, a method of changing the color of the display target region itself having the predetermined decoration between a portion having a gauge and a portion having no gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist alone as image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 410 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, “white and black stripes”) provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is replaced with the normal peripheral decoration. Since the image SSGa is applied so as to straddle other areas, the integrated decorativeness of the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be further enhanced. It is more expected that the entertainment interest when the “integrated mimic image IGa” is displayed is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 410 (a), when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which “integrated mimic image IGa” is displayed on effect display device 1600 occurs, a pattern button to be operated is displayed. The 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button simulation image BMGa in the “integrated simulation image IGa”. That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared for the button model image BMG, and the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. Is adopted, the mode (expected degree) of the button simulation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated without visually recognizing the normal button simulation image BMGa.

  The “button simulation image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))” does not necessarily have to accurately imitate the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. Any display device may be used as long as it is displayed with a reproduction level (deformation or the like) enough to recognize which operation means it is.

  On the other hand, the “integrated mimic image IGb” shown in FIG. 410 (b) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above. , And a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the “integrated mimic image IGb”, the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed as the same as the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” described above. BMGa "and a" special button simulation image BMGb "having a different shape.

  More specifically, in the “integrated mimic image IGb” shown in FIG. 410 (b), the special button mimic image BMGb is a pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) to be operated. However, it is displayed as an image having a shape different from the “button simulation image BMGa (FIG. 410 (a))” that imitates the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, when such a display method is simply adopted, when the “integrated mimic image IGb” is displayed, there is a concern that it is difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operation means is an operation target.

  However, as described above, in the “integrated mimic image IGa”, the “button mimic image BMGa” simulating the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is integrated with the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” and displayed. Therefore, the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” itself has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is an operation target. In this regard, in the “integrated button image IGb”, the “special button button image BMGb” is integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” to be displayed. Even if the “BMGb” does not properly imitate the operation target, it may indicate that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target for the “integrated mimic image IGb” as a whole. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an operation effect (a function of suggesting an operation target using the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” is operated by a different operation means from the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important to prevent the display (for example, the pattern portion 5012) from being displayed when it is the operation target.

  According to such a configuration, the button simulation image BMG imitating the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery thereof are displayed as an integrated simulation image in which the periphery is decorated. The button simulation image BMG, which is only a part of the simulation image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily limited to the shape of the operation means that is the operation target, and a more prominent effect. It is expected that the game entertainment will be improved by its character and decoration.

  In the “special button model image BMGb” illustrated in FIG. 410 (b), a button having a streamlined shape is depicted in a more stylish design than the “button model image BMGa”. Words such as "DANGER" are given. The appearance of the “special button mimic image BMGb” that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible to easily give the player a sense of premium, and the “button mimic image BMGa” appears. It is expected that people will instinctively feel that the degree of expectation is higher than usual.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 410 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGb” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation is also performed. The design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button simulation image BMGb in the “integrated simulation image IGb”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated.

  On the other hand, the “integrated mimic image IGc” shown in FIG. 410 (c) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above, and includes a button mimic image BMG imitating the operation target and its The image is configured as an image in which the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is integrated. However, in the “integrated mimic image IGc”, the button mimic image BMG is displayed as the same as the above “normal button mimic image BMGa”, but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decoration image SMG”. The image is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the image SSGa.

However, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is the same as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” in the following points.
"The effect display does not simulate the peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The periphery of the button simulation image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration in the display effect on the device 1600.
A display area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

  According to such an “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))”, any of the operation means is operated based on the “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. It is possible to greatly change the shape of the “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” without causing a change in the shape of the “button mimic image BMG” indicating that an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance by causing a shape change without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

  In the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))” according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. It is displayed as. Therefore, in the case where the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” appears and the case where the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” appears, the same post-operation effect is targeted. It is possible to suggest that the particular operation reception effect (effective period) has been performed.

  In particular, in the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))” according to this embodiment, another member having a special decoration is added to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (a))”. The entire image is displayed as an enlarged image in an expanded form. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is displayed as a development of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, and the degree of expectation is higher than when the “button mimic image BMGa” appears. It is expected to make people feel instinctively high.

  In the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))”, which has a different shape and decoration from the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))”, a gauge image (predetermined image) No change is caused in the GG display target area itself.

  That is, when a part of such an integrated model image IG is used as a display target area of the gauge image GG, whether the display target area or the gauge image is merely “a part of the decoration” or “ It is difficult for the player to determine whether the part has a function of suggesting time. In this regard, in the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 410 (a))” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 410 (c))”, a gauge having an important function such as “suggesting remaining time”. Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape is changed in other portions, the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the remaining time suggesting function. This makes it possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 410 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGc” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also set as an operation target. The design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button simulation image BMGa in the “integrated simulation image IGc”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated. However, the normal button simulation image BMGa when the “integrated simulation image IGc” is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, “green”) than when the “integrated simulation image IGa” is displayed. It may be. In this case, the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

  On the other hand, an “integrated mimic image IGd” shown in FIG. 410 (d) is basically the same as the “integrated mimic image IGa” described above, and includes a button mimic image BMG imitating the operation target and its The image is configured as an image in which the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the peripheral edge is integrated. However, in the “integrated button image IGd”, the button button image BMG is displayed as a “special button button image BMGb” having a different shape from the above “normal button button image BMGa”. In addition, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” having a different shape from the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” described above.

  That is, in the “integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))”, the “special button mimic image BMGb” used in the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 410 (b)”) and the “integrated mimic image IGc” (FIG. 410 (c)) "is displayed as an integrated image with the" special peripheral decoration image SSGb ". According to such a configuration, the operation effect obtained by the “special button mimic image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))” and the “integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. c))), the above-described effect obtained by the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is obtained, and when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” is used as a reference, Since both aspects of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that the instinct is made to feel that the degree of expectation is high.

  On the other hand, while the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG both have their modes changed, the same decoration and shape appear in a partial area in the peripheral decoration image SSG. In the case where “Integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” appears and in the case where “Integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” appears, identification for the same post-production effect is performed. Can be suggested to be an operation reception effect (valid period).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 410 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated mimic image IGd” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation is also performed. The design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button simulation image BMGb in the “integrated simulation image IGd”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode according to the type of the button simulation image BMG in the “integrated simulation image IG”. Even if the image BMG is not visually recognized, the mode (expected degree) as the button imitation image BMG can be recognized only by checking the design button 5014 to be operated. However, the special button simulation image BMGb when the “integrated simulation image IGd” is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, “rainbow color”) than when the “integrated simulation image IGb” is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in the rainbow color.

  As shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a symbol effect based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period). Is generated, the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are integrated and the integrated simulation image IG is displayed. One side of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. The other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button simulation image BMG is displayed as the “normal button simulation image BMGa”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( FIGS. 410 (a) and (c). Further, when the button button image BMG is displayed as the “special button button image BMGb”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( FIGS. 410 (b) and (d). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as one of the “normal button simulation image BMGa” and the “special button simulation image BMGb” ( FIGS. 410 (a) and (b). Also, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, the button imitation image BMG can be displayed as either the “normal button simulation image BMGa” or the “special button simulation image BMGb” ( FIGS. 410 (a) and (b).

  According to such a configuration, although the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, when the mode is changed, only one of them is displayed. Therefore, by looking at one side in which the mode has not changed, it is easy to recognize that a predetermined operation reception effect (valid period) is occurring regardless of which mode is displayed on the other side. However, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it is possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect may not be changed on one side of the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the aspect may be changed only on the other side.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated simulation image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the “peripheral decoration image SSG” has a remaining time indicating function indicating the remaining time until the state in which the operation is accepted is ended, and it is determined which operation means the operation target is. By being displayed as an integrated mimic image IG that is integrated with the “button mimic image BMG” that has the function of suggesting, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and further recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. For example, it is expected that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained when the operation reception effect (effective period) occurs.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (Both a portion having a remaining time suggesting function and a portion not having a remaining time suggesting function). In other words, the peripheral decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception effect (valid period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the “decoration of the button simulation image BMG” is performed. It is possible to positively adopt the display mode with the aim of `` improving the performance '', so that while suggesting the remaining time, the production performance when the operation reception production, which is an important production, occurs. It can be significantly improved. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more preferable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said.

  In the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the button mimic image BMG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as an entity, when the “pattern 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion is in one mode, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) that is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of modes (a plurality of emission colors). ). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it is possible to check the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied simply by checking it.

  Also, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), when the button mimic image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, as a substance, the "pattern portion 5012", which is a peripheral decoration portion, does not change to any of a plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG is to decorate the periphery of the button simulation image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to be adjusted to the mode of the “pattern part 5012” that is the peripheral decoration part, so that it is possible to perform various depictions that are preferable for enlivening the effect. The “pattern portion 5012”, which is a peripheral decoration portion, may be provided as a non-light emitting device that cannot be changed in a plurality of modes.

  Also, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), both the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 410 (d)). However, as a substance, it is desirable that both the button simulation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG be changed when the “pattern portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decoration portion, is in one mode.

  In the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, different modes appear in the “pattern portion 5012” that is the peripheral decoration portion. You may do so. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG has at least a different shape between the case where the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the case where the peripheral decoration image SSG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is desirable that the "pattern portion 5012" be caused to cause only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) without a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion as a shape that cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function by the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the mimic image, in addition to the button mimic image BMG simulating the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410), a mimic image simulating the design portion 5012 is provided. TMG is prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made different depending on which of the mimic images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral decoration image SSGa, b for decorating the periphery of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image different from the button model image BMG is displayed. The decoration image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a “function that indicates which operation means is the operation target”.

  When the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the mimic image (the button mimic image BMG, the pattern mimic image TMG), the form (thickness) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decorative image , Length) should be different. The operation reception effect in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern simulation image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (select which one to occur according to the effect determination). Or an effect that occurs at a different timing or at a different timing. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button simulation image is BMG is not an image of the peripheral decoration portion, and the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the image is the pattern simulation image TMG is a simulation of the peripheral decoration portion. You may. However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (effective period) is the same in some cases.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG include those areas. , And a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration is enlarged, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game. become able to.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area on which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game over the entire period until the empty state.

  However, the predetermined decoration need not always be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) the predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration is reduced as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. Is also reduced, so that a player who does not want to reduce the predetermined decoration is promptly performed an operation.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (the design button 5014 or the operation button 410) to be operated. Does not simulate the peripheral decoration portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in the image forming apparatus, and is an image expressing an intangible object as a gaming machine component. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more flexible decorativeness and performance without being caught by the substance as a gaming machine component.

  In the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), among the button mimic image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG, at least the peripheral decorative image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, without changing the shape of the button model image BMG, only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing the intangible object can be changed in shape. It is possible to realize a display with a higher level of directivity and decoration by appropriately indicating whether or not the image is displayed, and by changing the shape of the integrated model image IG.

  Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, when the button model image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, and only the color may be changed. However, the shape change is permitted because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an intangible object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button simulation image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

  It should be noted that in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed in a manner to increase the size. As will be described later, such a form changing method may be any of a method of increasing the number of objects (such as the number of decorations) represented as an image and a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (such as a rectangular parallelepiped and a sphere). It is possible to adopt a method in which the target range to be displayed is widened among the objects displayed in the above, or the predetermined object expressed as an image. In addition, as will be described later, with respect to the form change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, an effect of stepwise changing from a form with a low expectation to a form with a high expectation is executed. The operation reception in the operation reception effect may be allowed while the changed form is maintained.

  Further, in the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed, the gauge image included in the peripheral decoration image SSG ( The display target area of the (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the same form without being changed (at least the shape is not changed). Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to appropriately maintain the suggestion function of how much remaining time remains, and thus to maintain the important function. Holds, the expected degree can also be suggested by a shape change in another area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  Depending on which of the above-described respective effects is intended, the peripheral decoration image SSG may not necessarily represent an intangible object, and may be a peripheral decoration image provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving unit. It may be displayed as an image simulating a part.

  Further, the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during a “valid period during which operation reception is permitted” such as a predetermined operation reception effect. This prompts the player to perform an operation.

  However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, but the button model image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed together. Only one side is dynamically displayed, and the other side is immovably displayed. According to such a configuration, while one side contributes to improving the directing performance when a button effect, which is an important effect, is generated by a dynamic expression, the other side is displayed so as to remain in place. As a result, when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, so that the visibility can be suitably secured.

  In the integrated mimic image IG shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), the button mimic image BMG is dynamically changed so that the operation receiving section to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in its movable range. The edge decoration image SSG is not dynamically displayed. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side where the dynamic display is not performed (peripheral decoration image SSG). When the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Can be displayed so that the display area in the display target area is reduced as time passes.

  As described above, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included on the side of the integrated mimic image IG that ensures the appropriate visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is not the dynamic display side). Thus, while the performance of the operation reception production, which is an important production, is improved by the dynamic display using the button mimic image BMG, how much remaining time is allowed for the production reception. Can be easily recognized.

  In addition, on the side of the integrated mimic image IG that has ensured appropriate visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG which is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image ( An area in which the (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when an effect indicating the degree of expectation is performed on the side of the integrated model image IG that secures appropriate visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from adversely affecting the display target area.

  In the peripheral decoration image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button model image BMG are provided with a plurality of modes having different degrees of expectation. One of the modes is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), but the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d), this is a case where the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with a peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery thereof. In addition, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a mere decoration or pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? There is a concern that it will be difficult to determine whether the function has the function of indicating the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that it is difficult to grasp to which position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to being mixed with the decoration or pattern applied to the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may deteriorate. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( In the display target area where the (predetermined image) GG can be displayed, an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed.

  More specifically, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is referred to as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is displayed at the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or in the vicinity thereof in the display target area. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be similarly displaced.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displaced to the predetermined position. Then, since the validity period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or a suggestion of the remaining time, the position of the “specific image” By confirming, the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  FIG. 411 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated mimic image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 411, assuming that the timing A0 at which a valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has arrived within a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the effect display device 1600 , An integrated simulation image IG, and an operation promotion image such as “press!” And “downward arrow” are displayed.

  In this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. ) May be displayed in any of the modes described in (1). Regardless of the mode in which the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in an aspect described below as time passes.

  As shown in FIG. 411 (a), first, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it is possible to recognize that the validity period has just started.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 411 (a), at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the valid period, "the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The specific image whose aspect has been partially changed is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is determined whether the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed. Only by confirming, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the operation acceptance was permitted (the remaining crotch is decreasing).

  However, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” starts from timing A0 (start timing of the valid period). Until the predetermined time (the time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) has elapsed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner such as "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time". Are displayed in the display target area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 411 (b), in the integrated mimic image IG at a timing A1 after a lapse of a short time from the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), a “gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image TG" as a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed appears until about half of the image is visible. This indicates that the display area is being increased with time.

  As shown in FIGS. 411 (c) and (d), the integrated mimic image IG at the timings A2 and A3 after a long time has elapsed is “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or The “specific image TG” as the “specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is in a state where the entire image has already appeared, and the gauge image is displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that the GG is displaced in the display target area.

  That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG which is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Image) displayed at or near the end of the GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (in a subsequent manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

  The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed as an image in which a star mark is provided in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become something. However, the “specific image TG” may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and may be, for example, the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in a partially changed manner, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or in the vicinity thereof.

  In any case, the “specific image TG” originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating that the remaining time has been exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, “0”). Therefore, at the time when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period ends), at least a part (or all) may be kept in the display state without being hidden.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411 (e), in the integrated mimic image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period, the gauge The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is “0”, and about half the display area of the “specific image TG” is left. If the operation is not received until this state is reached, the period in which the operation is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated model image IG is not displayed.

  However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated specific image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, so that the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. You may make it.

  However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is exactly “0” at the end of the valid period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the display position of the “specific image TG” is adjusted in accordance with the displacement of the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a subsequent manner). Is displayed so as to be displaced, and when viewed from the player side, up to which of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge images ( (Predetermined image) GG can be ambiguous.

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or all) of the display area is left unremoved from the player side. When viewed, when the validity period ends, the display area also appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a minimum value (not displayed here). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation accepting effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left to end, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately after the display, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so as to be reduced, and thereby the non-display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to function as a buffer that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 411, at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the validity period, “the specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG partially changes. The specified image is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed on the gauge. The image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the display target area.

  According to such a configuration, the “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed” is displayed as a part of the gauge image GG. Will be able to show positively as if it is, so that it will appear as if the validity period has been set as a longer period than it looks, and the entertainment interest when the validity period occurs It is expected to improve.

  FIG. 412 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the integrated mimic image IG from the start of the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted to the end thereof.

  Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which operation reception is permitted has arrived within the predetermined fluctuation pattern, the effect display device 1600 also has the effect shown in FIG. , An integrated simulation image IG, and an operation promotion image such as “press!” And “downward arrow” are displayed.

  Also in this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG, but based on the result of the effect determination, FIGS. The information may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Regardless of which mode the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG during the valid period, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the modes shown in FIGS. 412 (a) to (d) with the passage of time. .

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 412 (a), in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. Instead of being displayed, “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” will be displayed. At the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the “specific image TG” may be in such a state that only a part thereof is displayed, but the entirety is displayed here. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to make the “specific image TG” appear as if it functions as a part of the “gauge image GG”, it seems that a longer time remains than it looks. Is possible.

  The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image expressing “eraser”, and does not fit within the area (display target area of the gauge image GG) surrounded by the section image KG, and is not included in another area (out of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , An area in which the mode can change in accordance with the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made more prominent than the “gauge image GG”, and the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time remains is suppressed. Be expected.

  In this example, when the time elapses from the timing A0 to become the timings A2 and A3 and the “specific image TG” is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 412 (b) and (c), the “specific image TG” is changed. Is changed to a "white area" as if the part passed by "" was erased by an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the “gauge image GG” expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors, gloss expression, and the like) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the “specific image TG”. Sometimes, the reduced area is expressed only in one color, so that the contrast at the boundary of the “specific image TG” becomes noticeable, indicating how much remaining time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the depiction is performed. It is preferable that the color appearing in the reduced area is a color not used in the “gauge image GG”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 412 as well, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined images) GG indicating that the remaining time has been exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, “0”). Since it does not originally function as a unit, at least when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period ends), at least a part (or all) may be kept in a display state without being hidden. Become.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 412 (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0” in the integrated mimic image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the valid period. , And the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. If the operation is not received until this state is reached, the period in which the operation is permitted is ended in this state, and the integrated model image IG is not displayed.

  However, also in this example, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A4 that is the end timing of the effective period, a part of the display area of the “specific image TG” is not displayed and a part is left. May be displayed as follows.

  Even in this example, since the “specific image TG” is displayed so that its display position is displaced (in a subsequent manner) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player's side, it is possible to make it ambiguous up to which image is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG among the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Become like

  That is, the “specific image TG” is not hidden when the validity period ends, and the display area of most (half or all) of the display area is left unremoved from the player side. When viewed, when the validity period ends, the display area also appears to be a part of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG having a minimum value (not displayed here). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than the actual one, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than the actual one. As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation accepting effect ends, at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left to end, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Even if the period does not end immediately after the display, the display area of the “specific image TG” can be displayed so as to be reduced, and thereby the non-display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period. That is, in this case, the “specific image TG” can be expected to function as a buffer that can absorb such a temporal shift.

  In the example shown in FIG. 412, the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 411, but the same image may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 411, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 412 may be used. Further, the validity period during which the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411, and the images of the “gauge image GG” and “specific image TG” in the mode shown in FIG. May be generated under different conditions. In this case, the shape of the integrated mimic image IG itself and at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG are different between the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 411 appears and the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 412 appears. It is desirable to be different.

  As described above, as shown in FIGS. 411 (a) to (e) and FIGS. 412 (a) to (d), the integrated mimic image IG is dynamic during the valid period of the predetermined operation reception effect. It can be displayed, thereby prompting the player to perform an operation. However, as described above, the button simulation image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion provided with the operation opportunity is displaced in the movable range. Does not display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on the side on which such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( (The predetermined image) GG is changed, so that even in the integrated mimic image IG that is dynamically displayed, it is easy to recognize how much time remains until the validity period ends. Will be able to do it.

  The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

  According to the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 411 and 412, the “specific image TG” has a display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. It is displayed at or near the end of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the end of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it is unclear how many of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are the gauge images (predetermined image) GG. Will be able to

  Also, the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 411 is not displayed when the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is at the maximum value, and the predetermined time has passed since the operation acceptance was permitted. Until the time elapses (until the entirety of the specific image TG appears), the display area of the “specific image TG” is supplemented by the reduced display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. Is to be increased. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time indicated by the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has not decreased during the initial period from the start of the validity period to the elapse of the predetermined time. Since it is possible to give a good image, it is possible to appropriately maintain a game entertainment.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 410 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). However, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” are the same regardless of the case where the image is displayed in any of these modes. Is desirable. Regarding each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG”, they may be changed according to the degree of expectation. In order to maintain the image properly, it is desirable that even if one of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and “specific image TG” changes, the other does not change. For example, if the mark given to the “specific image TG” shown in FIG. 411 is not a star but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. As the image (GG) is reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) is gradually made visible, so that it is expected to improve the game entertainment.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 411 and FIG. 412, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is non-operable even when the operation is not performed by the player and the validity period ends. The display state is maintained without being displayed. However, with regard to the operation reception effects shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, when the timing A4 arrives without the player performing the operation, the operation is internally received and the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned “automatic reception effect” in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be a timing at which the valid period ends, or may be set as a timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is the timing after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is hidden (the timing at which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden, or a timing later than that), and the timing of the “specific image TG”. It is desirable to set the timing to arrive at a state where at least a part is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the operation acceptance is no longer permitted, even before the display after the operation or the sound output after the operation is performed, the “ Since the “specific image TG” is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output have been started in response to the operation by the player being performed in time and the subsequent operation being accepted. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, by a fade-out after the start of the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output). Etc., which are gradually hidden).

  Assuming that the valid period in which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second condition different from the first condition is used. When the condition is satisfied, a second valid period in which automatic reception is not performed can be generated. Also in the second valid period, the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG for decorating the periphery, and the peripheral decoration image SSG includes a gauge image (predetermined image). ) A display target area of GG is included. However, during the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the “specific image TG” Is not displayed. Except that the “specific image TG” is not displayed, the integrated mimic image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated mimic image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image. Can be done.

  That is, unlike the first validity period generated when the first condition is satisfied, when the set time elapses without performing the operation by the player, the second validity period generated when the second condition is satisfied, The second validity period ends in a state where the automatic reception does not function and the display after operation and / or the sound output after operation (or both) are not generated. Therefore, if the display of the “specific image TG” is left at a time when the reception of the operation by the player is no longer permitted, the valid period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. This can lead to misunderstandings as if they had been done, which in turn could reduce the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, in the second valid period, it is desirable that the “specific image TG” is not displayed over the entire period from the start to the end.

  In this case, it is desirable that the first effective period and the second effective period have different lengths of set time (time from when the operation is accepted to when it is finished). In addition, it is desirable that the display change (display after operation) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when the operation is accepted are different from each other.

  Further, in addition to the first valid period generated when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period in which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is satisfied), In addition to the second valid period that is generated when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, the validity period in which the automatic reception is performed (the validity period in which the occurrence conditions are different from each other) includes at least the first validity period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner. It is sufficient that at least the second effective period during which the processing relating to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described manner is included in the effective periods in which the processing is not performed (the effective periods in which the occurrence conditions differ).

Also, the “first validity period” here is
・ It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output only when the special production state (automatic reception mode) is set, regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the valid period.
-This means that after-operation display or post-operation sound output is output regardless of the effect state, regardless of the presence or absence of operation within the validity period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare “special effect state (automatic reception mode)” or “a plurality of effect states” as effect states. In addition, when the “second validity period” occurs when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, any may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, "automatic reception may not always be activated regardless of the state of production.") This has nothing to do with the configuration relating to the technical features described here.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, an integrated mimic image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the regions forming the integrated mimic image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of the section, a display is performed in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced with the passage of time becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as an effective period is consumed. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) having the predetermined transmittance in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined transmittance. (Predetermined image) The GG is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed thereon, or the gauge image (predetermined image) The GG itself is given a specific pattern. The decorativeness of the depiction itself, which reduces the display area of the GG, can be improved. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to straddle the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG can be further improved.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 411 and 412 is referred to as a “first display target area”. At this time, the second display target area having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts decreasing the display area to when the gauge image GG ends. Can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation accepting effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without operation by the player, and in the case where the operation is performed by the player. In some cases, the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without an operation being performed. On the other hand, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. May be terminated when the first set time elapses without operation by the player, but may be terminated when the second set time elapses without operation by the player. I am trying not to be terminated.

  In this regard, the operation target to which the operation opportunity is given is given by the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed. If the (operation receiving unit) is different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. Together with that, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception production with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed imitate different operation receiving units. The mimic image is displayed in a form integrated with the peripheral decoration image. Also for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations in the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (valid period) in which the second display target region is displayed. In any case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

  In order to obtain the above-described effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target region of “non-linear specific shape” is different from the case where “a different shape (non-similar shape)” is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (the first set time) is set, the display after operation or the sound output after operation is “big hit”. It is desirable to make the ratios at which the “mode suggesting that” appears differ. The ratio may be “0%” or “100%”.

  The operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target region is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target region is displayed have the same set time (first set time). Sometimes, it is desirable to provide an opportunity to accept an operation regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. At different set times, it is desirable to give an opportunity to receive an operation for a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 411 and 412, an operation-related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is displayed so as to be superimposed on the integrated mimic image IG, so that it is combined with the integrated mimic image IG. Therefore, when these are viewed, the situation that should be operated is expressed more strongly. However, in this case, the operation-related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” may be displayed so as to overlap with the button simulation image BMG (at any timing dynamically displayed) indicating the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image TG indicating the remaining time is not displayed overlapping.

  In such a configuration, an operation such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is performed in such a manner as to avoid important information such as the button simulation image BMG, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the specific image TG of the integrated simulation image IG. Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated model image IG, the operation can be strongly encouraged while appropriately transmitting important information to the player. Needless to say, this is because the button simulation image BMG is displayed as an integrated simulation image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation is received within the valid period is set as the valid period in which the operation is permitted. And a plurality (type) of validity periods in which the contents of the sound output after the operation are different. The conditions for generating the valid periods are different from each other, and when any of the conditions is satisfied, a valid period of a type corresponding to the conditions is generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the “specific image TG” is displayed within a plurality of types of validity periods (first validity period). And a case where the “specific image TG” is not displayed within the valid period (second valid period). Hereinafter, in this example, the “first validity period” and the “second validity period” are referred to as the “first validity period” in which the automatic reception is performed and the “second validity period” in which the automatic reception is not performed. The validity period is described as being the same as the validity period, but may be applied as another validity period.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) indicating that the operation reception is permitted, the pachinko machine 1 (the specific display) receives the precursor effect (specific display). May be executed before and after the generation timing of the allowable valid period. According to such an indication effect (specific display), since a valid period is generated while a fancy effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the valid period occurs. become able to.

  However, when the indication effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the indication effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated mimic image IG. Even if the model image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping with the indication effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (it is not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the indication effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated mimic image IG that overlaps the indication effect (specific display) is difficult to visually recognize. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area in such a situation where visibility is difficult.

  That is, in this case, the indication effect (specific display) is not displayed, or there is no portion overlapping the indication effect (specific display), and the entire integrated mimic image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG) is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, so that when viewed from the player side, the effective period (set time) You may remember the impression that is actually shorter.

  On the other hand, the "specific image TG" described above can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, “a sign effect (specific display) is not executed or a sign effect (specific display) is executed) among a plurality of types of validity periods. In the second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) has been completed, "from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end thereof" During this period, the "specific image TG" is not displayed at all. On the other hand, among a plurality (types) of validity periods, when a gauge image is generated during the execution of a precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated mimic image IG becomes visible (or easily visible), (Predetermined image) In the "first effective period in which the display area of the GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first effective period.

  According to such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed in the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. The display area of the GG can be made to look as if it has not decreased so much, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second valid period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. When the “specific image TG” is displayed, for example, in the case of the display mode of FIG. 411, when the valid period occurs, the “specific image TG” is not displayed, and the valid period occurs. When the appearance of the “specific image TG” gradually appears as time elapses from, it may be noticed that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In other words, in this case, there is a concern that the excitement of the length of time remaining is exaggerated and the entertainment interest of the game is reduced. Therefore, the “specific image TG” is displayed in such a second valid period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in a plurality (type) of validity periods, in addition to the second validity period, “the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed, but the precursor effect (specific display) is performed. ) Is completed, a valid period (fifth valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced may be prepared under different generation conditions, or the first valid period may be different. In addition, “the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases during the execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and by the time the entire integrated mimic image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). Valid period (sixth valid period) ”may be prepared under different occurrence conditions, and at this time, whether or not the“ specific image TG ”is displayed may be appropriately set. Good. In short, the plurality of (kind) valid periods include at least the second valid period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first valid period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed. If at least the validity period occurs, the above-described effects will be obtained in relation to the indication effect (specific display).

  In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411. However, at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. It may be executed.

  FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of the effect when the first valid period occurs, of the first valid period and the second valid period.

  FIG. 413 (a) shows an effect display device 1600 in which, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the display of the change of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the state of the production being carried out.

  FIG. 413 (b) shows an effect state in which the indication effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 413 (a).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 413 (b), it can be seen that at least the effect display device 1600 is in a state where the integrated mimic image IG has not yet appeared. However, after the indication effect (specific display TH) is started, an integrated mimic image IG is internally displayed, and the indication effect (specific indication TH) is displayed preferentially. The entirety of the mimic image IG may not be visually recognized (or may be made difficult to visually recognize by a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation acceptance is permitted (the valid period is started) from the time when the indication effect (specific display) is started.

  FIG. 413 (c) shows the result of the advance effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b) progressing and the area in which the advance effect (specific display TH) is displayed being reduced, resulting in an integrated mimic image IG. A part that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating that the part is displayed with good visibility.

  In other words, the integrated mimic image IG has a timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 413 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 413 (b) appears, and is shown in FIG. 413 (c). When the “specific timing (timing at which the valid period starts)”, which is the timing that arrives before the situation to appear, arrives, the display (display on the layer processing) is executed at least internally. It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 413 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually recognized) because they overlap with the indication effect (specific display TH) displayed preferentially. It is difficult), but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the indication effect (specific display TH).

  According to such a configuration, the indication effect (specific display TH) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the occurrence of the effective period is equal to the indication effect. By the (specific display TH), at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized. That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button simulation image imitating the operation target. However, regarding the peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery, the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is used. Therefore, it is in a state where it can be recognized that the image is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 413 (c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it, the type in which the “specific image TG” is displayed at the beginning of the validity period ( (See FIG. 412), or the type in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the time when the valid period starts and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 411). I have. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 412, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When adopted, executing the predictive effect in the above-described manner can be said to be particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 413 (d) shows that the indication effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 413 (b) has been further developed, and as a result, the portion overlapping with the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) has disappeared. (Here, the indication effect is hidden).

  As shown in FIG. 413 (d), when the whole of the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state of good visibility, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is performed. The area has already been reduced and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a larger display area than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is obtained. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not been reduced so much. Accordingly, it is possible to expect that a decrease in gaming interest due to the already reduced display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the indication effect (specific display TH) is completed.

  FIG. 413 (e) shows the case where the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”) and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (just before performing) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 413 (e), at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even at the end of the validity period. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed is performed even if the player does not perform the operation during the period (FIG. 413). (F)).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which a player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the validity period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the post-operation display is performed. The "specific image TG" is displayed immediately before the sound output is performed after the operation, and the display and the operation after the operation are performed in response to the operation by the player being performed in time and the operation being accepted accordingly. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when a precursor effect (previous display) is performed in such a mode, when the entire image of the integrated mimic image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is viewed well, the gauge image (predetermined display) is displayed. The display area of the (image) GG has already been reduced, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, it is likely that a situation in which the operation by the player cannot be performed in time is likely to occur. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the “specific image TG” is displayed and displayed after the operation. It can be said that performing the sound output after the operation or the operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that, regarding the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413, the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 411 and the case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. May be applied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 413, the indication effect (specific display TH) and the integrated mimic image IG are displayed on different layers, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is displayed in priority by displaying the indication effect (specific display TH). It was decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 413 may be stored as one piece of moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can be applied to each example described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 413, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 410 (a) appears as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mimic image IG may appear in one of a plurality of modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). . Then, when such a method is adopted, it is more desirable to execute the sign effect in the modes shown in FIGS. 414 to 416 in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

  FIGS. 414 to 416 are diagrams illustrating a modification of the effect progress when the first valid period occurs, of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  FIG. 414 (a) shows an effect display device in which, in the normal gaming state, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. 1600 shows an effect state being performed.

  FIG. 414 (b) shows an effect in which the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 414 (a). Indicates the situation.

  The first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has advanced to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect is performed. It functions as an effect to perform.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first sign effect (the first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination), “ One of the image shown in FIG. 415 (c) and the image shown in FIG. 416 (d) is displayed, whereby the "normal button mimic image BMGa" and the "special button mimic image BMGa" are displayed as the button mimic image BMG. Which of the button model images BMGb ”is likely to appear is suggested.

  Here, when the “image shown in FIG. 415 (c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button mimic image BMGa” will be displayed as the button mimic image BMG (here, “100%”). It will be suggested that.

  The “image shown in FIG. 415 (c)” according to this example is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (a)) when the “integrated mimic image IGa” is different (here, translucent). It is displayed as the represented image IGa ′. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as for the “image shown in FIG. 415 (c)”, the “integrated model image IGa” may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 410 (a). Alternatively, the “normal button simulation image BMGa” may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. When the “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410A) or may be displayed in the normal mode (FIG. ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (here, translucent) different from the mode described in (1)).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 415 (c), the “normal button mimic image BMGa” itself or the “normal button mimic image BMGa” shown in FIG. At least an image BMGa 'having a (simulated) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the effective period in which the “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed as “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” integrated with the “normal peripheral decorative image SSGa” or “special peripheral decorative image SSGa” It is possible to indicate that a valid period displayed as an “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 410 (a))” integrated with the “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) shown in FIG. 415 (c) is displayed, the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) is not “integrated mimic image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))”. , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 415 (d), “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to“ the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button mimic image BMGa) ”. The image SSGb ′ is rendered as an effect of gradually approaching the image SSGb ′. As a result of performing such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ expressing the normal button mimic image BMGa)”. When the image SSGb 'is added and integrated, an effective period in which the "integrated mimic image IGc (FIG. 410 (c))" appears is generated. On the other hand, “image SSGb ′ expressing special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to “image IGa ′ expressing integrated mimic image IGa” (or image BMGa ′ expressing normal button mimic image BMGa). However, if they are not integrated, an effective period in which the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 410 (a))” appears will occur.

  FIG. 415 (e) shows an effect state in which the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d) is performed, and then the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600. I have.

  The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) has progressed to the second timing, and suggests that operation reception is allowed. It is performed as a production. The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “an image IGa ′ representing the integrated imitation image IGa (or an image BMGa ′ representing the normal button imitation image BMGa)”. The “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching. At the time when the “image SSGb ′ is started”, the “image IGa ′ representing the integrated mimic image IGa” ( Alternatively, it is unknown whether or not the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button mock image BMGa) and the image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) progresses, any of the “image shown in FIG. 415 (f)” and the “image shown in FIG. 415 (h)” is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 415 (f) and 415 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 413 (c)". As a result, the area in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, and as a result, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed. , A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated mimic image IG has the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 415 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 415 (e) appears, and When the “specific timing (the timing at which the valid period starts)”, which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 415 (h) appears, at least the internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 415 (f) or FIG. 415 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed with the second indication effect (specific display TH2) which is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the second indication effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 415 (d) and (e), the result of the effect shown in FIGS. 415 (d) and (e) shows that “the image IGa ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGa (or the normal button mimic image BMGa is expressed). It can be recognized that the image BMGa ′) has failed to associate with the “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415 (g), the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) The whole picture will appear. The subsequent development of the effect is as described above with reference to FIGS. 413 (d) to 413 (f), and will not be described.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 415 (h) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG must be in a state where it can be recognized that it is a “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. 415 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully connected to the image SSGb ′ ”expressing. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 415 (i), the integrated mimic image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)) The whole picture will appear. The subsequent stage of the production progress is that the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is simply replaced with the integrated mimic image IGc (see FIG. 410 (c)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)” is displayed, it is highly likely that “the special button imitation image BMGb” is displayed as the button imitation image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)” according to this example is different from the normal state (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)) of the “integrated model image IGb” (here, translucent). It is displayed as the represented image IGb ′. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 416 (j)”, the “integrated mimic image IGb” may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 410 (b). Alternatively, the "special button simulation image BMGb" may be displayed as a single image without being integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". When the “special button mimic image BMGb” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in a normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 410 (b)) or may be displayed in a normal mode (FIG. 410 (b)). ) May be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (here, translucent) different from the mode described in (1)).

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 416 (j), the “special button mimic image BMGb” itself or the “special button mimic image BMGb” shown in FIG. At least an image BMGb 'having a (simulated) outer shape is displayed. Thereby, the “special button imitation image BMGb” is integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and is displayed as “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))”, or the “special peripheral decoration image SSMG” is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest that a valid period displayed as an “integrated model image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” integrated with the “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) shown in FIG. 416 (j) is displayed, the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) is not “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))”. , An effect that suggests (recalls) that there is a possibility of being displayed as “integrated model image IGd (FIG. 410 (d))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 415 (k), “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. The image SSGb ′ is rendered as an effect of gradually approaching the image SSGb ′. As a result of performing such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed” with respect to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. When the image SSGb ′ ”is added and integrated, a valid period in which the“ integrated mimic image IGd (FIG. 410 (d)) ”appears is generated. On the other hand, “the image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. If they are not integrated, an effective period in which the “integrated mimic image IGb (FIG. 410 (b))” appears will occur.

  FIG. 416 (l) shows an effect state in which the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k) is performed, and then the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600. I have. Instead of the second symptom effect (second specific display TH2), a third symptom effect (third specific display) different from this may be executed.

  As described above, the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) has advanced to the second timing, and operation reception is allowed. It is performed as an effect that suggests that. The second indication effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “an image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or an image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)”. The “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is to be started while gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, the “image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb ( Alternatively, it is unknown whether the image BMGb ′) expressing the special button simulation image BMGb) and the image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 416 (l) progresses, any one of the “image shown in FIG. 416 (m)” and the “image shown in FIG. 416 (o)” is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 416 (m) and 416 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situations and image contents shown in FIG. 413 (c)". As a result, the area in which the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, and as a result, the integrated simulated image IG is displayed. , A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, indicating the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

  That is, the integrated mimic image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 416 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 416 (l) appears, and When the “specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)”, which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in FIG. 416 (o) appears, at least internal processing is displayed (display on the layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 416 (m) or FIG. 416 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are displayed with the second indication effect (specific display TH2) which is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to see) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entirety of the specific image TG overlaps with the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is performed so as to straddle the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated mimic image IG cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the second indication effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated mimic image IG is gradually exposed within the validity period, the degree of expectation indicated by the mode of the integrated mimic image IG (the mode of the peripheral decoration image) ) And the operation target (the mode of the button simulation image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the validity period starts.

  In this regard, when the situation illustrated in FIG. 416 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 416 (k) and (l), the result of the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k), (1) is that the image IGb ′ representing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the special button mimic image BMGb is represented). It can be recognized that the image BMGb ′) has failed to associate with the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416 (n), the integrated mimic image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)) The whole picture will appear. The subsequent development progress is only that the integrated mimic image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is replaced with the integrated mimic image IGb (see FIG. 410 (b)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 416 (o) appears, it is in a state where the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated mimic image IG can be recognized as “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. As a result of the effect shown in FIG. 416 (k), “the image IGb ′ expressing the integrated mimic image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ expressing the special button mimic image BMGb)” becomes “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. It is possible to recognize that the image has been successfully connected to the image SSGb ′ ”expressing. That is, in this case, when the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 416 (p), the integrated mimic image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)) The whole picture will appear. The subsequent production progress is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 410 (a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 410 (d)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it is omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, when FIG. 415 (c) appears, the probability that the “special button mimic image BMGb” appears as the button mimic image BMG is set to “0%”. The probability that the “special button mimic image BMGb” appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 415 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 415 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 416 (m) → (n), ( There is also a possibility that the production progress will be executed in the form of o) → (p).

  According to such a configuration, at the time when FIGS. 415 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 416 (m) and (o) appear, the manner in which the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed is as follows. Although it can be recognized, it is not possible to recognize in which mode the button simulation image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is indicated in stages according to the situation related to the progress of the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2), and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. . In particular, when the button simulation image BMG can indicate any of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the validity period has been started and the degree of expectation related to the operation is also indicated. Despite the situation, a state occurs in which the operation target cannot be recognized, so that the degree of attention to the effect can be significantly improved.

  However, even in the situation in which FIGS. 415 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 416 (m) and (o) appear, the operation means (operation receiving unit) which is the operation target of the player has a button. It is desirable to emit light in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the mimic image BMG (for example, to emit light when a valid period occurs). According to such a configuration, a person who has a strong desire to directly operate the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button model image BMG”. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 414 (a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 415 (c) or FIG. 416 (j).

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, the second indication effect (the second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 415 (d) or FIG. 416 (k) may be changed to the state shown in FIG. 415 (g), (i) or FIG. 416 (n), (p). Good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIG. 415 (d) or FIG. 416 (k) functions as a precursor effect. At the time of the transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be already reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 415 (d) or FIG. 416 (k). The (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area.

  Further, some of the effects of FIGS. 414 to 416 may be omitted according to the mode prepared as the integrated mimic image IG. For example, when the modes shown in FIGS. 410 (b) and (d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 416. Also, at this time, FIG. 415 (c) may be omitted.

  In the effects of FIGS. 414 to 416, before the operation is accepted (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG ′ expressing the button simulation image BMG (or the button simulation image BMG itself) is displayed. (Good) is displayed (FIG. 415 (d), FIG. 416 (k)), but in this situation (before the occurrence of the valid period), an image BMG ′ (or button mimic image BMG) expressing the button mimic image BMG is displayed. Is not dynamically displayed so as to depict a state where is displaced in the movable range of the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, even if the button simulation image BMG and the image BMG 'expressing the button simulation image are displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. Can be suggested implicitly, so that the player can concentrate on the effect without worrying about the remaining time of the validity period. Note that, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the reception of the performance is permitted, so that the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to visually recognize. In this case, the dynamic display of the button simulation image BMG is performed.

  FIG. 417 to FIG. 421 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs among the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  That is, in FIGS. 413 to 416, a valid period (first valid period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. As for the case, an example of the production progress has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 417 to 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not decrease at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. In the case where a valid period (second valid period) occurs without being performed, an example relating to the progress of the effect is described.

  The pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment basically performs a predetermined sign effect (sign indication) when an effective period in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. However, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment can execute the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized” within the validity period. In order to make the feature stand out when performing the effect, a predetermined sign effect (sign display) itself is not performed when the valid period is generated, or even if a predetermined sign effect (sign display) is performed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG At the point in time when the entire display target area has been made visually recognizable, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and has a maximum value.

  Here, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is given a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the validity period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), “the operation is not performed within the validity period, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. In spite of the above, when the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. First display mode ". According to such a configuration, even in a situation in which a large amount of time appears to be left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Since the user is conscious of the possibility that the validity period is suddenly terminated, it is possible to appropriately maintain a sense of tension during the validity period.

  In addition, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the valid period. However, a “second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period” can be cited. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that there is only a little time remaining until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player can use the gauge. The user becomes aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will be reduced, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

  That is, in the example described below, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is described using at least one of the “first display mode” and the “second display mode”. 9 shows a display example in the case of executing.

  First, in FIG. 417 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in the second effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. This shows the state of the effect being performed on the display device 1600.

  FIG. 417 (b) shows that during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 417 (a), a valid period in which the operation means (operation receiving unit) is allowed to accept an operation is generated. Shows an effect state in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 417 (b), when the integrated mimic image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

  When the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is “ The period (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) in which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is not executed is set. In other words, if an attempt is made to execute a display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized during the valid period, it takes time to execute the display mode. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the first valid period during which the “display mode having a characteristic in the movement of the gauge image GG” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG” Despite the fact that the set time until the end of the effective period is different between the second effective period in which the “display mode with the feature is performed” and the second effective period, whether the integrated mimic image IG itself is the same, The images are displayed in a similar relationship (in this example, the integrated mimic image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”. It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed. However, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time for the time when the situation is not reduced is displayed. Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (b) occurs, a precursor effect indicating the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG at the time when the entire integrated image IG (at least the “display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated image IG”) is displayed without overlapping the indication effect. Is at its maximum value and needs to be in a situation that has not yet been reduced.

  That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the valid period) in which operation reception relating to predetermined post-operation display or predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. When the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the effect situation shown in FIG. 417 (b), the gauge image GG is displayed. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is started.

  Such a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is, as shown in FIGS. 417 (c) and (d), to be continued for a predetermined time after the generation of the period. Has become. However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation reception is maintained in a permissible state, and when an operation is performed on the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, the valid period is set. Is terminated, and the integrated simulated image IG is not displayed accordingly, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 417 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, since “a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” appears within the valid period, it is compared with a case where the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant speed. Thus, it is possible to indicate that the remaining time until the expiration of the validity period is sufficient.

  Further, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained as an allowable state, so that an image as if the validity period has been extended can be provided. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest when the valid period is generated is improved.

  In addition, in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 417 (c) and (d), in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the decorative symbol SZ that has been displayed up to that time is not displayed or is difficult to visually recognize. In this state, the user is urged to pay attention to the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”.

  However, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, a misunderstanding that a so-called “freeze effect” occurs, in which an image in the display screen suddenly becomes a still state, may be given to the player. In other words, the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no response is shown for a predetermined time and the state cannot be canceled, so that it is erroneously recognized that the operation acceptance is no longer permitted. This may cause the player to lose his / her motivation to operate the game, which may cause a decrease in the interest in the game. In particular, in this example, the decorative symbol SZ is set to a non-display state or a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern SZ, and this may also promote erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the integrated mimic image IG itself is not in a stationary state, but is integrated. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary while the button mimic image BMG included in the integrated mimic image IG is dynamically displayed (displacement in the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. Display) is continued.

  According to such a configuration, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears while the dynamic display of the button simulation image BMG is continued, so that operation acceptance is no longer permitted ( It is possible to suppress the possibility of being erroneously recognized as “freeze effect has occurred”, and it is expected that the player's willingness to operate is appropriately maintained.

  Here, the dynamic display using the button simulation image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (such as an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving unit) is repeated. In this regard, during the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is not displayed, the setting is performed. Until the time ends, the predetermined operation by the button simulation image BMG is performed as a display that is repeated n times. On the other hand, the indication effect (specific display) is not executed, or the indication effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. During the valid period (the second valid period shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like) in which the display area of the gauge image GG has not decreased at the time when the display time is set to “the display area of the gauge image GG has decreased. It is desirable that the display can be executed as a display in which the predetermined operation by the button simulation image BMG is repeated m (> n) times only within the “period not performed”.

  According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG decreases for a longer time than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like. Since the state that is not being maintained will continue, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate it Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment interest of the game is maintained appropriately. Note that the effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the indication effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first effective period shown in FIGS. 413 to 416 and the like. If there is a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output), the time set for the validity period (set time) is longer than the longest one. It is desirable to increase the number of times of the predetermined operation by the button simulation image BMG during the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” among the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 and the like. .

  As described above, at the time when such a second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set as a predetermined maximum value. It is displayed (FIG. 417 (b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 412, if the specific image TG may be displayed in a state of good visibility in the display target area of the gauge image GG, the amount of the specific image TG displayed However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 411, when the specific image TG may appear in a state of good visibility as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may be displayed. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the excitement of gaming interest may be reduced by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as an effective period.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment does not display the specific image TG itself during the second valid period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG starts to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 417 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed in a state where the specific image TG is not displayed. Is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined time (FIGS. 417 (c) and (d)).

  In this example, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends without an operation being accepted by the operation of the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it. Thereafter, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 417 (e)), the time set for the second validity period (set time) increases. As a result, the second validity period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden (FIG. 417 (f)). Here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, that is, when the gauge image GG is not displayed (FIG. 417 (e)), the time set for the second validity period (set time) increases. Then, the second validity period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden (FIG. 417 (f)).

  As described above, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 417 (f)), the same operation as when the operation is received within the second valid period is performed. The rear display and the post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect is performed), and this point also differs from the first validity period. However, instead, in the second validity period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first validity period, and operation acceptance is also permitted during the display period in the stopped state. This is as described above, so it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be made in time is itself. .

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 417, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is given a characteristic”, the gauge image GG is usually set in advance within the validity period (see FIGS. 411 to 416 and the like). The case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed and the “second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the validity period” has been described. However, as described above, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is usually (see FIGS. 411 to 416), and the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the validity period ends, and the message “No operation is performed within the validity period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Nevertheless, when the validity period ends, the display area of the gauge image GG does not become a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area. May be further applied. When such a method is adopted, it is preferable to execute the method in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 418 and 419 or in the modes shown in FIGS. 420 and 421 in order to improve the entertainment interest of the game. More desirable.

  FIG. 418 and FIG. 419 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect progress when the second effective period occurs among the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situations shown in FIGS. 418 (a) to (d) are the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417 (a) to (d) and other examples. Therefore, also in this example, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs in the middle of the second valid period, and the period including the period is included in the second valid period. When the operation is received in, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 419 (g)).

  However, in this example, even if the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is ended without the operation being accepted by the operation of the player, the gauge image GG reduces its display area again. It will not be displayed. In this example, the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (a predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 418 (d) and 419 (e). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 419 (e)), the operation is received within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at the time of execution (automatic reception effect function) is not performed. However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the reception is allowed.

  However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period is set in a state where the display area of the predetermined value is left. Since the game is terminated, the player may not be able to perform the operation even though the player intends to perform the operation, and the second validity period may end. There are concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second validity period ends without an operation performed by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or a condition that has not reached 10 seconds before the symbol stop) is satisfied. During this period, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity has been given within the second validity period. When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on the operation. In this sense, when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period is generated from the end of the second validity period. It can be said that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of elapse of the predetermined set time without operation by the player, the operation of FIG. ), An operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output can be generated. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 419 (e), when an operation is performed on the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) by the player, the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 419 (f)). Thereafter, the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 418 (b) to (d), and FIGS. 419 (e) and (g) are repeated again. Therefore, even when an operation is received within the second valid period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are performed (see FIG. 419 (g)). ).

  When an operation is received during the special validity period shown in FIG. 419 (e), the image shown in FIG. 419 (f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 418 (b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is different from the post-operation display executed based on the reception of the operation during the second valid period (FIGS. 418 (b) to (d) and FIG. 419 (f)). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 419 (f)), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation.

  FIG. 420 and FIG. 421 are diagrams showing a modification of the effect progress when the second valid period occurs among the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

  The situation shown in FIG. 420 (a) is the same as the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 417 (a) and 418 (a) and the other examples. However, in this example, during execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. A “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is generated for a predetermined time from the time when the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIGS. 420 (b) and (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG sets the display area to the maximum value. It will be maintained as it is.

  It is to be noted that operation reception is permitted even during a period in which the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and a period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, such as execution of the back sound output, are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 417 to 419 and other examples thereof. .

  Also, in this example, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 418 and 419, “the display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second validity period elapses. A period that is not performed ”is continued. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value) as shown in FIGS. 420 (c) and 421 (d). In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated mimic image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative symbol SZ is displayed again or is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize it.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation (FIG. 421 (d)), the operation is received within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at the time of execution (automatic reception effect function) is not performed. However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer time than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, the reception is allowed.

  However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period remains in a state where the display area for the maximum value remains. Is terminated, the player may not be able to perform the operation even though the player intends to perform the operation, and the second validity period may end. There is a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second validity period ends without an operation performed by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or not reaching 10 seconds before the symbol stops) is satisfied. While not being performed, an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (pattern button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity has been given within the second validity period. Is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on the operation. In this sense, it can be said that when the second validity period ends without any operation by the player, a special validity period for regenerating the second validity period is generated.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second validity period ends as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without operation by the player, the operation by the player as shown in FIG. ), An operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output can be generated. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 421 (d), when the player performs an operation on the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 421 (e)). Thereafter, the contents described above with reference to FIGS. 420 (b) and (c), and FIGS. 421 (d) and (f) are repeated again. Therefore, even when an operation is received within the second validity period thus regenerated, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation reception are executed (see FIG. 421 (f)). ).

  However, in this example, even when the second valid period re-occurs, a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” occurs from the time when the second valid period re-occurs. In the situation shown in (1), the decorative symbol SZ is hidden or is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  That is, the “image shown in FIG. 421 (e)” that appears as a post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special validity period shown in FIG. 421 (d) is the “image shown in FIG. 420 (b)”. Is the same as Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 421 (f)), which is executed based on the reception of the operation during the second valid period (FIG. 420 (b), (c), FIG. 421 (d), etc.). )) Are different in image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation being accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 421 (d)), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 421 (f)) that is executed based on the reception of the operation.

  Thus, in the examples shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the entire period from the start to the end of the second valid period functions as a “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

  In the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 419 (e) or FIG. 421 (d), the integrated mimic image IG may be displayed as in the second validity period. However, the second valid period and the special valid period are set so that it is easy to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation have different valid periods (second valid period and special valid period). It is desirable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated model image IG be different from the valid period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second validity period, the integrated mimic image IG in the mode corresponding to the second validity period is hidden, and the integrated mimic image IG in the mode corresponding to the special validity period is newly displayed. Will be displayed. When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the special validity period, a “period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced” may be generated within the validity period, or “a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced”. May not be generated.

  The “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” shown in FIGS. 417 to 421 can be executed when the integrated model image IGa is displayed among the integrated model images IGa to IGd. Therefore, it is desirable that the processing is not executed when the integrated mimic images IGb to IGd among the integrated mimic images IGa to IGd are displayed. That is, although the integrated mimic image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest expectation, when the integrated mimic image IGa is displayed, the “movement of the gauge image GG” shown in FIGS. Since there is a possibility that a “display mode having a characteristic” appears, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 418 to 421, when the operation-related image (such as the integrated mimic image IG) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the player Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the lapse of a predetermined setting period (second effective period) without operation being performed, operation reception occurs and a display change (or , Post-operation sound output). More specifically, even when the predetermined set period (second valid period) has ended, if the operation receiving unit (operating means) which has been prompted to operate by the integrated mimic image IG is operated. A predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, and operation reception is allowed during the regenerated predetermined set period (second valid period) (FIG. 419 (e) and (f) and FIGS. 421 (d) and (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) ends without understanding the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”. Since the predetermined set period (the second valid period) can be regenerated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  On the other hand, in a predetermined setting period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (such as the integrated model image IG) is not displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the operation is not accepted. After the predetermined setting period (first valid period) ends without being performed, even if the operation receiving unit (operation means) which has been prompted by the integrated mimic image IG is operated, the predetermined setting period The (second validity period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 413 to 416).

  Note that, for a predetermined set period (second effective period) in which an operation-related image (such as an integrated mimic image IG) is displayed in a “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”, the symbol fluctuation is not necessarily performed. May not be generated during the execution period. For example, it may be a period generated using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of a symbol change, or a “period during which no symbol change is performed, such as during a big hit game execution period or a period before the big hit game is started. ).

  Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, the integrated mimic image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated mimic image IG is integrated). The model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. Are expected to look the same. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG is characterized”. It is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period in which the “display mode” is executed. However, when a situation where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the time for the time when the situation is not reduced is displayed. Is added, it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When displaying the integrated mimic image IG in a similar relationship between the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416) and the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), the "gauge image" It is desirable that an integrated mimic image IG smaller than the first validity period be displayed in the second validity period in which the “display mode having a characteristic of the movement of the GG” appears.

  Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 413 to 421, during the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) becomes a specific value (here, “ 0 "), but the operation is not received during the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421), and the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. It ends in the state where it has. That is, if the time (set time) set with respect to the effective period is long, the tension during the effective period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, “ By giving the possibility that the validity period can end even if it does not become "0"), it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the case where the integrated mimic image IG is displayed such that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the indication effect is being performed (first effective period), In the case where no effect is performed or an indication effect is performed, but at least while the indication effect is being performed, the integrated mimic image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (second validity). The image displayed in the display target region of the gauge image GG differs between the periods. In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. “The indication effect is performed, but at least the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced during the execution of the indication effect”, as illustrated in FIGS. 420 and 421, when the gauge image GG is displayed over the entire valid period. This includes a case where the display area of the GG is not reduced.

  In this regard, according to the above-described example, in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time has elapsed without performing any operation. In the second valid period (FIGS. 418 to 421), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display) is displayed in a state where the operation has not been performed and the set time has elapsed. (Target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount of the specific image TG displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period, By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to make the valid period end earlier than expected by the player and maintain a sense of tension. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, in the second valid period, a large display area (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value) of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left at the end of the valid period. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced for every unit time in the first valid period (FIGS. 413 to 416). However, a mode in which the display area is not reduced in the second valid period (FIGS. 417 to 421) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the nervous feeling is appropriately maintained.

  According to the above-described example, the button simulation image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving unit is displaced in both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first valid period, whereas the gauge image GG is different from the first mode in the second valid period. The image is displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the example described above, the button simulation image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated simulation image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG). When the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is decreasing and when the gauge image GG is not decreasing. There is to be. Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, the fact that the operation acceptance is allowed due to the dynamic display of the button simulation image BMG is preferably used as the integrated simulation image IG. Be able to suggest.

  According to the above-described example, only when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed among the normal button imitation image BMGa and the special button imitation image BMGb, “the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized. "Display mode provided" can be displayed. In addition, when the normal button mimic image BMGa is displayed, the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a characteristic” may be displayed, as well as the “gauge image (predetermined image) GGGa”. ) The display mode in which the movement of the GG is characterized "is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode (normal mode) that also appears when the special button simulation image BMGb is displayed. I did it. Therefore, it is expected that a decrease in gaming interest when the normal button imitation image BMGa having a lower degree of expectation than the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed is suppressed.

  In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 420 and 421, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. , Only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time suggestion function and the expectation degree suggestion function by the gauge image GG itself have been lost and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG. Is formed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in an area-invariant manner) within the integrated mimic image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period does not function as an image suggesting the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a simple decoration image in the integrated mimic image IG. Therefore, the function can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the variety of expression as the gauge image GG enhances the interest in gaming. Will be expected.

  Note that the first valid period and the second valid period may be different if their occurrence conditions are different from each other. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol fluctuation period. In addition, the first valid period means a period during which operation reception regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is allowed, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means a period during which operation acceptance for a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display or a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each of those periods. The reaction (display change, sound output) that appears when the operation is received is different from each other.

As for the integrated model image IG,
After the indication effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is changed every unit time since the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated mimic image IG” overlap each other. Modes of reduction (FIGS. 413 to 416);
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the “integrated mimic image IG” overlap each other even if the precursor effect is displayed. Aspects (FIGS. 417 to 421)
And there was. According to such a configuration, as a result of the indication effect being performed, whether the display area is already reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured or not, whether the indication effect has been performed or not. The case where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visible is provided, and it is possible to provide the fun by the directing effect using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to do it.

  In particular, when the aspect (FIG. 417 to FIG. 421) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is made visible regardless of whether or not the precursor effect has been performed. As far as possible, a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even within the valid period can further appear, so that it is possible to further increase the gaze of the gauge image GG.

  The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or at least when the precursor effect in the display state and the “integrated model image IG” overlap each other even if the precursor effect is displayed. In the case where a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421), a case where the mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears (FIGS. 417 to 421). A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 417 to 421) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is the second condition, the display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The condition for the occurrence of the specific valid period in which the mode does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

  In the above-described example, during the period in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed, there is a case where a display for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG is performed as time elapses, and a case where the display is not performed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may not be displayed during the valid period. Nevertheless, as for the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first valid period in which the display area is reduced as time elapses, but also the second display area in which the display area is not reduced as time elapses. Since it is displayed even during the validity period, it is expected that it is possible to appropriately suggest that the effect reception is in a permitted state.

  In the above-described example, the time (set time) set with respect to the valid period (second valid period) elapses without displaying the display area decreasing with the passage of time by the gauge image GG. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated in some cases, the sense of tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. Regarding (2), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not activated (in any effect mode). On the other hand, it is desirable that the automatic reception function be enabled (in any effect mode) for the first valid period described above.

  In addition, when the display method that exclusively displays the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is employed by displaying the button mimic image BMG and the gauge GG separately, a method that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is employed. Then, the user feels a great sense of incompatibility with the fact that the remaining time suggesting function is not exhibited despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button simulation image BMG is configured to be displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side, or the gauge image GG itself has a plurality of colors. Since this itself has decorativeness in the integrated model image IG, it can be expected to suppress a sense of incongruity when a situation in which the remaining time indication function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited appears. become.

  By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 414 to 416, prior to the occurrence of the first valid period, the “button mimic image BMG” has a low expectation mode (normal button mimic image BMGa) and a high expectation mode. (Special button-simulated image BMGb), and the “peripheral decoration image SSG” as a low-expectation (normal peripheral decoration image SSGa) and a high-expectation (special peripheral decoration image SSG) SSGb) and the rendition of which one appears appears in a stepwise manner. However, such rendition can be made to appear by the method described below.

  FIG. 422 is a diagram for describing a modification of the effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the integrated model image IG stepwise.

  First, in FIG. 422 (a), in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. This shows the state of the effect being performed on the display device 1600.

  FIG. 422 (b) shows that during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. This shows an effect state in which the button simulation image BMG is displayed.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button simulation image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the “peripheral decoration image SGG”, but is displayed only as a single unit. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (b), the button imitation image BMG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (normal button imitation image BMGa) or a high expectation mode (special button imitation image BMGb). In the figure, a case where a highly expected mode (special button mimic image BMGb) appears is shown. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  FIG. 422 (c) shows an effect state in which the special button simulation image BMGb shown in FIG. 422 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  However, it is not always necessary to make the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). For example, the button imitation image BMG (normal button imitation image BMGa, special button imitation image BMGb) shown in FIG. 422 (b) is valid (first valid period) without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. ) Is produced, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. A period (first valid period) is generated, or a valid period (first valid period) is generated without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. It will be able to provide fun about what to do. If an effective period (first effective period) occurs without being an integrated mimic image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image different from the button mimic image BMG, and for example, a bar-like (linear) ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

  In addition, when the validity period occurs after the button mimic image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected that the button mimic image BMG is stopped with a big hit symbol than when the validity period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable that the degree (ratio) be high. Also, when the special button simulation image BMGb is displayed in the situation illustrated in FIG. 422 (b), the special button simulation image BMGb is displayed more than in the situation illustrated in FIG. 422 (b) than when the normal button simulation image BMGb is displayed. It is desirable to increase the ratio of being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG by progressing to the situation shown in FIG. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (c), the button simulation image BMG includes a peripheral decoration image having a low degree of expectation (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a peripheral decoration image having a high degree of expectation (special peripheral decoration). The image BMGb) is provided with a directing effect as to which one is integrated with the image BMGb). In the drawing, the case where a highly expected mode (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. . Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  Note that, for convenience of description, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example is different from the above-described examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) in image type. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for accommodating the button simulation image BMG. In the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, a heart-shaped pattern (illustration omitted) is applied. On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is provided. Then, “the area from the upper right to the lower left” of the areas where the patterns are applied is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

  The image shown in FIG. 422 (c) functions as an image (integrated mimic image) IGd in which the special button mimic image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated. This is similar to 410 (d).

  FIG. 422 (d) shows an effect state in which the first additional decoration HS1 has been added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (c).

  However, it is not always necessary to make the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d). For example, the effective period (first effective period) without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated model image IG (the integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (c). Is prepared, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) and without adding the first additional decoration HS1 Can be provided as to whether or not the problem occurs.

  When a valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 422 (b) when the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). 422 (d) is more advanced than the case where the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 4 and the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). It is desirable that the rate at which the first additional decoration HS1 is added is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided with the effect of providing the effect in which of the mode of low expectation and the mode of high expectation are added. You may make it.

  FIG. 422 (e) shows an effect state in which the second additional decoration HS2 has been added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (d).

  However, it is not always necessary that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) is performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated model image IG (the integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 422 (d). Is prepared, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) without the effect of progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 422 (e) and without adding the second additional decoration HS2 Can be provided as to whether or not the problem occurs.

  When a valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 added to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (ratio) of stopping at the big hit symbol is higher than in the case. 422 (b) when the special button imitation image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (b) or when the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). 422 (e) is more advanced than the case where the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 4 and the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). It is desirable that the rate at which the second additional decoration HS2 is added is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a staging effect as to whether the second additional decoration HS2 is added in a mode of low expectation or a mode of high expectation. You may make it.

  FIG. 422 (f) shows an effect state in which a valid period (first valid period) has occurred in a state where the integrated mimic image IGd shown in FIG. 422 (e) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 422 (f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as “press” or “down arrow” is displayed. In addition, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the operation is accepted even by confirming the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Although the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from those shown in the above-described examples (FIGS. 410 to 422) for convenience of description, it is basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. Will be done.

  Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 411 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period but is displayed gradually as time elapses). Alternatively, the information may be displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 412 (a method in which the entirety is displayed when the valid period starts).

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 422 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (a snail character) or a mode with a high expectation (a frog character), which is not shown. The effect is to provide the effect of whether or not to be performed. In the figure, a case where a highly expected aspect appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed in a state where the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (d) with a higher degree of expectation than when the validity period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 422 (c). The ratio is higher, and the degree of expectation is higher when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 422 (e) than when the valid period occurs in the situation illustrated in FIG. 422 (d). It is desirable that the ratio at which the specific image TG is displayed is increased. The ratios may include “100%” and “0%”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide directivity as to how much progress can be made to an aspect with high expectation as an operation-related image before the validity period occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the operation in a state where the valid period has not yet occurred. Also, while the operation-related images (button simulation image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1 and HS2) indicate the degree of expectation before the valid period is generated, after the valid period is generated, In addition, since the expectation is further suggested by another image (specific image TG), it is possible to appropriately improve interest in the period from before the valid period occurs to after the valid period occurs. Become.

  In the example shown in FIG. 422, the timing as to whether or not the effect progresses from FIG. 422 (b) to FIG. 422 (c), or the effect progresses from FIG. 422 (c) to FIG. 422 (d). 422 (d) to FIG. 422 (e), the operation-related images (button simulation image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) The display may be temporarily hidden. In other words, in this case, when the operation-related images (button simulation images, peripheral decoration images, additional decorations, etc.) are displayed again, it is necessary to provide the fun of whether the effect has progressed or the validity period has occurred. Will be able to

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 422, at the stage before the occurrence of the validity period, the button simulation image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, and the like are displayed in the same manner as during the validity period. (Flashing or translucent).

  In the example shown in FIG. 422, it is desirable that the time required to indicate the expected degree stepwise by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the validity period is longer than the set time for the validity period. .

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to some embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications may be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the automatic effect function, a display such as "auto button is being set" may be displayed, but the display is not necessarily performed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 1 is not the pachinko machine 1 that is set to the automatic production mode, but is implemented as a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic production function is always enabled and the processing itself such as “setting to the production state” is not mounted, It is desirable that the display such as "Auto button setting" is not performed. In the pachinko machine 1 which is not equipped with the processing itself such as “setting to the effect state”, the validity period in which the automatic effect function is performed and the automatic effect function are set according to the type of the operation accepting effect in which the operation by the player is allowed. A valid period that is not played may occur.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, the “simulated image” may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is, for example, an operation target such as an arrow image that moves up and down in a downward direction. The image may not be displayed as an image imitating the operation means.

  Also, when the automatic production function is employed in each of the above-mentioned production examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically receiving) operation reception within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. It may be. In order to appropriately provide the player with an operation opportunity, an operation is performed when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing that arrives after half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed after the operation valid period has occurred. It is preferable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation effect is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when no operation is detected until the time when the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes one frame, and the post-operation effect is performed based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get started. In addition, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the automatic production function, if the bar display is not to be hidden after the expiration of the validity period and is to be maintained, the operation to be performed is performed in accordance with the timing at which the validity period ends. It is desirable to execute an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is continuously displayed, it is expected to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing "Is the validity period continuing?" Become so.

  Note that in each of the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 303 and the effect examples described with reference to FIG. 387, the operation is performed while maintaining the mimic image (or bar display) without hiding it. When the effect is started, “the time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the mimic image (or bar display) is not displayed (the period from timing tf2 to tf4, the period from timing tg3 to tg5, the timing ), there may be at least several frames (for example, two frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame time. Even if there is such time, the period in which the mock image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the effect is started after the operation, and some players can recognize this. In some cases.

  In the effect example relating to the above-described “improvement of effect effect using automatic effect function (see FIG. 300)”, in a state where the hold display on effect display device 1600 is hidden, the automatic effect function is not enabled. An automatic reception effect and an automatic reception effect in which the automatic effect function is activated may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a reception effect in a state where it is difficult to grasp whether the number of holds is large or small, that is, it is difficult to grasp how easily the automatic effect function is activated. Become. Furthermore, for example, when a non-automatic reception effect is generated in a state where the hold display is hidden, the subsequent symbol fluctuation stops more than when a non-automatic reception effect occurs in a state where the hold display is displayed. If the rate of occurrence of the automatic reception effect is increased until it is completed, the hold display is hidden and the effect of the automatic effect function when it is difficult to grasp the effect is difficult to grasp. Interestingness can be added.

  In addition, in the description example of the "help image for promoting the effect understanding", the ruler is exemplified as the "reference image indicating the length unit in the horizontal direction", but other images may be used. You may. In short, if the player operates, it is sufficient that a display image that is rendered without being affected by the special effect appears.For example, it is not an image aiming to promote the effect understanding, but other functions. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image suggesting a degree of expectation, an image suggesting a current production state, or an image suggesting a state related to production setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. Note that such images do not necessarily have to be drawn as one, and may be drawn so that a plurality of images are arranged side by side to extend in the horizontal direction as a whole.

  Also, in the example of the description of "preventing mischief against a plurality of operation means", mischief is greatly different from illegal acts such as magnet goto, and taking too strict measures is difficult for the hall side. It can lead to profits. Therefore, an image appearing based on detection of an operation by the player (including an image appearing in the process until a specific moving image appears) is realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. Is also good. In short, when a player performs an operation on a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), the “effect display device 1600 executes a game effect according to the big hit determination. Display (playback) a specific moving image that cannot appear in the state where the moving image is displayed (the moving image may have a content that has nothing to do with preventing mischief (for example, moving to a state in which a predetermined movie is played). ) Has been performed), "Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, and the current volume setting value is not displayed," Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the luminance setting value relating to the luminance of the effect lamp is not accepted, and the current luminance setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. In this case, the player can operate the plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (procedure) to generate a function restriction period in which the above-described specific moving image is reproduced by himself / herself. It is.

  Further, in the example of the description of “prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means”, in a state where the decorative symbol is fluctuated, the partial restriction period may be always controlled.

  In addition, as for the example of "Prevention of noise by adjustment confirmation sound at opening of a store", the point is that control is performed in a normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after turning on the power. It is a gaming machine that is controlled to a normal state after passing a restricted state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a luminance adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and when the game is started in the restricted state, the restricted state is ended early. As long as it is controlled so as to be in a normal state, the length of time to be maintained as a restricted state may be appropriately set (any of several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time that is maintained as the restricted state is set too short, the above-described effects in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be exhibited, but the noise when the hall side performs volume setting immediately after turning on the power supply. It is possible to suppress this.

  Further, in the example of the description of the “control on the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the degree of effect importance”, advantageous conditions are used when the first special symbol is changing and when the second special symbol is changing. While the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the side that can be played, the first special symbol on the side that can be played under adverse conditions is not changed. The case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is exemplified. However, it is also possible to apply the technology to a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not mounted. For example, a specific symbol in which a lottery is performed under more disadvantageous conditions than the first special symbol is prepared. Although the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side where the game can be played under advantageous conditions, the side where the game can be played under disadvantageous conditions is not output. A configuration may be such that a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the change of the specific symbol.

  Further, in the example of the description of the “period during which operation reception is allowed (valid period) itself”, the allowable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception effect and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception effects are described. The effect sound may be different from the acceptable sound. Also, in FIG. 388, the acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” that extends over the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

  A mimic image imitating the operation receiving portion receiving the operation and a peripheral decoration image for decorating the periphery may be separately prepared as image data, and the image data may be combined and displayed as an integrated mimic image. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 410, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, the “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 410 (a) and (c)). There is a case where a “special button simulation image BMGb” having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 410 (b) and (d)). However, when the “normal button mimic image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 410A and 410C), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving unit), and the “special button When the "simulated image BMGb" is displayed (FIGS. 410 (b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving section) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

  In each of the above-described examples, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include those requiring a pressing operation (such as a button), those requiring an insertion / removal operation (such as a sword decoration), and non-contact members. Alternatively, it may be realized as a device requiring a touch operation (proximity sensor or the like).

  The peripheral decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral decoration part actually provided on the periphery of the “operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given”, but at least a part thereof imitates the peripheral decoration part. It is sufficient if not provided, and there may be a part imitating the peripheral decoration part.

  The second valid period in which the operation-related images (such as the integrated model image IG) are displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized” is a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set. Instead, the program may be continued indefinitely unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

  When the specific image TG is displayed within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

  Regarding the “automatic reception effect” described in FIG. 410 and thereafter, any of the realization methods relating to the “automatic reception effect” exemplified earlier may be adopted. Regarding how the mock image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception effect is produced, any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. In this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Ordinary symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reservation number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reservation Number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Large winning opening

Claims (1)

A gaming board detachably provided to the gaming machine body,
Determining means for performing a determination based on the reception of the game medium to the starting port provided in the game board,
A symbol variation unit that performs symbol variation based on the result of the determination by the determination unit,
When a predetermined mode appears in the symbol fluctuation, a privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege to the player,
Effect control means for performing control relating to the effect,
A plurality of movable bodies operable under the control of the effect control means,
The plurality of movable bodies include at least a first movable body and a second movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact, and a third movable body provided at a position where the player can contact the movable body. Yes,
The effect control means,
The first movable body, the second movable body, and the specific state in which the movable body operation timing at which each of the third movable body becomes operable is related to the result of the determination by the determination unit. Specific condition generating means that can be generated based on the fulfillment of certain specific conditions,
When the movable body operation timing arrives within the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body provided at positions where the player cannot contact the plurality of movable bodies are determined in advance. and although operating respectively in step, said the plurality of the third movable member player of the movable body is provided contactable position, independently of the operation by the first movable member and said second movable member It is possible to perform the operation that
If the third movable body is not at the normal position when the movable body operation time arrives in the specific state, the first movable body and the second movable body are set even if the third movable body is within the symbol variation execution period. It is possible to execute a process of performing a restoring operation on the third movable body in parallel with the process of operating the body according to a predetermined procedure being performed normally,
further,
The process of causing the third movable body to perform the restoring operation can be executed when a specific time corresponding to the symbol change arrives when the specific state is not in the specific state, but in the specific state. Sometimes, when a specific time corresponding to the symbol change comes, it is not executed with this as a trigger,
The specific time corresponding to the symbol change is at least one of a start time and a stop time of the symbol change,
further,
The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are provided so as to be able to emit light,
Even when any one of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is executing a restoring operation, it is possible to cause the movable body to produce and emit light. ,
further,
As a result of performing the restoring operation of the third movable body that is not in a normal state in response to the arrival of the specific time corresponding to the symbol change, even if it fails to return to the normal state, the state returns to the normal state. It is possible to cause the third movable body in a state where it has failed to return to produce and emit light,
further,
When a specific abnormal state occurs in which a specific effect restriction occurs when any one of the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body is performing a restoration operation, body is the executable to continue the recovery operation among which the specific effect limit occurs, in a state that is continuously executing the the reconstruction operation and corresponding to the symbol variation in the particular abnormal condition gaming machine, wherein the recovery timing even if new incoming, said a new feasible to continue the recovery operation in the form to cross the incoming restoration time.